^'^Ip^^^.J 


4 


BL    240    .D5    1833l» 

Dick,    Thomas,    1774-1857. 

The   Christian  philosopher 


LIBRrA.RY 

BL  240  .D5  1833 
Dick,  Thomas,  1774-1857. 
The  Christian  philosopher, 
or.  The  connection  of 


The  John   IW.   Krel)s   Donation. 


'-*^xL*» 


\?»"-' 


■\^. 


:# ' 


TMIC 


CHRISTIAN  PHILOSOPHER  ? 


OR, 

THE  CONNECTION  OF 


SCIENCE  AND  PHILOSOPHY 


RELIGION. 


ILLUSTRATED  WITH  ENGRAVINGS. 


BY  THOMAS  DICK, 


AUTHOR   OF   A   VARIETT   OF   LITERARY   AND   SCIENTIFIC    COMMUNICA- 
TIONS  IN    NICHOLSON'S    PHILOSOPHICAL    JOURNAL,   THE 
ANNALS   OP   PHILOSOPHY,   &C.  &C 


D.  F.  ROBINSON  &  CO. 
1833. 


TO 

DAVID  BREWSTER,  LL.  D. 

Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London  ;  Secretary  to  the 
Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh  ;  Honorary  Member  of  the 
Royal  Irish  Academy ;  Member  of  the  Royal  Swedish 
Academy  of  Sciences ;  Honorary  Associate  of  the  Royal 
Academy  of  Sciences  at  Lyons,  &c.  &c. 

THIS  VOLUME, 

Intended  to  illustrate  the  connection  of  science  and  phi- 
losophy with  religion,  and  with  the  moral  improvement  of 
mankind,  is  inscribed,  as  a  testimony  of  respect  for  the  ac- 
quisitions which  science  has  derived  from  his  philosophical 
discoveries  and  literary  labours,  by  his  most  obedient,  and 
humble  servant, 

THE  AUTHOR. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  ENGRAVING. 

(Fronting  the  Title.) 

The  five  figures  on  the  upper  part  of  the  plate,  marked  1 ,  2, 8,  4, 
&c.  represent  the  planets  Herschel,  Saturn,  Jupiter,  the  Earth  and 
Moon,  in  their  relative  sizes  and  proportions  ;  together  with  tele- 
scopic views  of  the  belts  and  rings  of  Saturn,  and  the  belts  of  Jupiter. 
The  two  figures  immediately  below,  marked  5  and  6,  are  intended 
to  illustrate  the  description  given  of  the  eye.  pp.  88 — 104.  Fig.  5 
represents  a  front  view  of  the  human  eye.  Fig.  6  represents  a  sec- 
tion of  it,  exhibiting  the  three  coats  and  the  three  humors  of  which  it 
is  composed.  Fig.  7  represents  a  rude  view  of  the  appearance 
which  the  rings  and  moons  of  Saturn  will  exhibit,  in  certain  cases, 
as  beheld  from  a  point  20  or  30  degrees  north  from  his  equator — see 
pp.  187,  188.  The  shade  on  the  upper  part  of  the  rings  represents 
the  shadow  of  the  body  of  Saturn,  as  it  appeals  upon  the  rings  about 
midniffht. 


PREFACE 

TO    THIS    EDITION. 


»oio« 


The  following  pages  were  written  under  the  impression 
that  the  visible  manifestations  of  the  attributes  of  the  Deity 
are  too  frequently  overlooked  by  Christians  in  their  views 
of  the  great  objects  of  Religion,  and  in  the  worship  they 
offer  to  the  Father  of  their  spirits ;  and  are  intended  to 
show,  that  the  Teachers  of  Religion,  in  imparting  instruc- 
tion either  to  the  old  or  to  the  young,  ought  to  embrace  a 
wider  range  of  illustration,  in  reference  to  Divine  subjects, 
than  that  to  which  they  are  usually  confined. 

Throughout  the  whole  of  the  discussions  contained  in 
this  work,  the  Author  has  pursued  his  own  train  of  thought ; 
and,  in  so  doing,  he  trusts  that  he  has  been  enabled  to  ren- 
der some  of  his  illustrations  more  interesting  to  the  young 
and  untutored  mind  than  if  he  had  adhered  rigidly  to  the 
sentiments  of  others,  and  to  the  technical  language  of 
science.  The  sketches  of  the  different  sciences  are  not 
mere  extracts,  or  compilations,  but  are,  for  the  most  part, 
original  composition — in  which  it  has  been  his  main  object 
to  embody  as  many  facts  as  his  limits  would  permit — in 
order  to  excite  the  inquiring  mind  to  further  investigations 
into  the  different  departments  of  physical  science. 

It  is  presumed,  that  no  Christian  reader  will  for  once 
imagine,  that  the  views  ilhistrated  in  this  v/ork  are  intended 
to  be  substituted  in  place  of  the  peculiar  revelations  of  the 
Bible.  The  object  of  the  volume  is  to  illustrate  the  har- 
mony which  subsists  between  the  system  of  Nature  and  the 
system  of  Revelation;  and  to  show,  that  the  maiiifesta 
tions  of  God  in  the  material  universe  ought  to  be  blended 
with  our  views  of  the  facts  and  doctrines  recorded  in  the 
volume  of  Inspiration. 

It  is  taken  for  granted,  throughout  the  whole  range  of 
the  following  illustrations,  that  the  Scriptures  contain  a 

1» 


X  PREFACE- 

Revelation  from  Heaven ;  and,  under  a  firm  belief  of  this 
important  truth,  the  Author  has  embellished  his  work  with 
frequent  quotations  from  the  energetic  and  sublime  lan- 
guage of  this  Sacred  Book.  It  would,  therefore,  be  unfair 
in  any  critic,  who  entertains  doubts  on  this  point,  to  find 
fault  with  such  quotations,  or  with  the  allusions  to  Bible- 
phraseology  which  occur,  unless  they  can  be  shown  to  be 
introduced  without  judgment  or  discrimination. 

The  Author  has  carefully  revised  every  portion  of  the 
present  edition,  and  introduced  a  variety  of  corrections  and 
modifications.  He  has  likewise  introduced  additional  mat- 
ter, to  the  extent  of  between  40  and  50  pages,  and  also 
several  illustrative  engravings.  In  its  present  form,  the 
Author  trusts,  that,  independently  of  the  moral  reflections 
it  contains,  it  will  be  found  to  comprise  popular  descrip- 
tions of  a  greater  number  of  scientific  facts  than  is  to  be 
found  in  any  other  volume  of  the  same  size. 

Various  topics,  originally  intended  to  be  illustrated,  have 
been  unavoidably  omitted.  Some  of  these  are  stated  in  the 
last  paragraph  of  Chapter  IV.  the  illustration  of  which,  in 
combination  with  other  kindred  topics,  would  fill  a  volume 
of  nearly  the  same  size  as  the  present.  This  subject  (for 
which  the  author  has  abundance  of  materials)  will  be  pro- 
secuted in  another  volume,  under  the  title  of  The  Philo- 
sophy OF  Religion  ;  and  will  comprise,  among  many 
other  subjects  of  discussion,  illustrations  of  the  moral  rela- 
tion of  intelligent  beings  to  their  Creator,  and  to  one  an- 
other^ — the  physical  and  rational  grounds  of  those  moral 
laws  which  the  Deity  has  promulgated — the  views  which 
science  affords  of  the  incessant  energies  of  Creating  Power, 
and  of  the  grand  and  multifarious  objects  over  which 
Divine  Providence  presides — the  relation  of  science  to  a 
future  state,  and  of  the  aids  which  the  discoveries  of  science 
afford,  for  enabling  us  to  form  a  conception  of  the  perpetual 
improvement  of  the  celestial  inhabitants  in  knowledge  and 
felicity.  These  subjects  will  be  illustrated  by  a  variety  of 
interesting  details  of  facts,  in  relation  to  the  system  of 
nature,  the  history  of  nations,  and  the  moral  state  of  Chris- 
tian and  general  society. 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 
Introduction,  .  .  .  .  .  .17 

Necessity  of  Revelation.  Folly  of  discarding  the  Science  of  Nature 
from  Religion.  Beneficial  Effects  which  flow  from  the  study  of 
the  Works  of  God. 

^  CHAP.  I. 

OF  THE  NATURAL  ATTRIBUTES  OF  THE  DEITY.. 

Sect.  1.    On  the  Relation  of  the  Natural  Attributes  of  the 

Deity  to  Religion,  .  .  .  .  .25 

The  Christian  Religion  founded  on  the  Natural  Attributes  of  God. 
His  Power  as  interesting  a  subject  as  his  Mercy. — Illustrated  in 
two  instances.  Evils  which  arise  from  imperfect  conceptions  of 
Divine  Power.  Defects  in  Religious  Instructions  on  this  subject. 
Sources  of  Illustration. 

Sect.  2.  Illustrations  of  the  Omnipotence  of  the  Deity,         .  .     32 

The  material  world  exhibits  a  more  striking  display  of  this  Perfec- 
tion than  the  supernatural  facts  recorded  in  Scripture.  Immense 
quantity  of  Matter  in  the  universe.  Mode  of  acquiring  the  most 
comprehensive  conception  of  the  bulk  of  the  Earth — its  variety  of 
scenery — its  mass  of  solid  matter.  Magnitude  of  the  bodies 
which  compose  the  Solar  System.  Magnitude  and  number  of  the 
Stars.  Procedure  of  the  mind  in  acquiring  the  most  impressive 
conceptions  of  such  august  objects.  Reflections.  Rapid  Motions 
of  the  Celestial  Bodies.  How  we  acquire  the  ideas  of  relative 
velocities — weight  of  the  Earth — immense  physical  forces — 
Grandeur  of  the  motion  of  Saturn — immense  number  of  bodies 
impelled  through  the  heavens — Reflections.  Immense  Spaces 
which  surround  the  Heavenhj  Bodies — Reflections.  Popular  illus- 
tration of  the  Motions  of  the  Earth  and  Heavens.  Extract  from 
Dr.  Ridgley,  with  remai'ks.  Universe  intended  to  adumbrate  the 
Attributes  of  God,  and  to  make  a  sublime  impression  on  created 
beings.  Similar  trains  of  thought  suggested  in  the  Scriptures. 
Moral  Effects  of  such  contemplations.  Humility.  Folly  of  pride — 
low  rank  of  man  in  the  scale  of  being.  Reverence  and  Venera- 
tio7i—-Rea.son  why  mankind  feel  so  little  veneration  of  God — 
how  it  may  be  increased.  The  Deity  unsearchable.  Hope  and 
Confidence  in  the  prospect  of  futurity — Resurrection — Scenes  of 
Eternity. 

Si  T.  3.  On  the  Wisdom  and  Intelligence  of  the  Deity,  .  .  61 
Wisdom  defined — Displayed  in  the  Structure  of  the  Solar  Sys- 
tem. Distance  of  the  Sun.  Rotation  of  the  Planets — Principal 
reason  why  such  a  motion  exists.  Wisdom  displayed  in  other 
Systems.  Minute  displays  of  this  attribute  cannot  be  traced  in 
the  heavens.  Wisdom,  as  displayed  in  the  constitution  of  our 
globe — adjustment  of  its  solid  parts  to  the  necessities  of  the  be- 
ings whicJi  inhabit  it.    Mountains,  their  uses — exist  in  other 


12 

worlds.  Diversity  of  color — argument  for  a  plurality  of  worlds — 
general  color  which  prevails  in  the  scene  of  nature — Water,  its 
use  in  the  system  of  nature — its  composition,  evaporation — mo- 
tion of  the  liquid  element — its  beneficial  effects.  The  Atmos- 
phere— its  weight  and  pressure— its  component  parts — its  various 
properties — necessary  to  animal  life,  flame,  sound,  twilight — 
wisdom  displayed  in  its  constitution.  Expansion  of  water  in  the 
act  of  freezmg. 

Variety  of  Nature,  .  •  .  .  •     .     •    .       *° 

Vegetables — their  number  and  variety.  Animals — variety  in 
their  organization.  Eyes  of  insects — their  exquisite  mechanism. 
Subterraneous  Regions.  Atmosphere.  The  Variety  of  Nature 
affords  a  faint  idea  of  the  infinity  of  the  Creator.  Illustrated  in 
the  number  of  animal  parts  and  functions.  Reflection.  Variety 
the  foundation  of  our  judgments.  Beauty  and  sublimity  of  Na- 
ture.    Primeval  state  of  our  globe — other  worlds. 

Mechanism  of  Animated  Beings,  ......        88 

Stjiucture  of  the  Human  Eye — its  coats,  hvimors,  muscles, 
orbit,  and  motions.  Wisdom  displayed  in  its  construction. 
Light — its  velocity,  minuteness,  colors,  and  adaptation  to  the 
eye.  Manner  in  which  Vision  is  performed — exjDlained  by 
a  figure,  and  an  experiment—illustrated  by  the  view  from  Salis- 
fcury  Cra2:s.  Multitude  of  rays  which  flow  from  every  object — 
smallness'^of  the  image  on  the  retina,  illustrated  by  calculation — 
what  proportion  of  the  solar  light  falls  on  our  globe — Reflections. 
Mechanism  for  viewing  near  and  distant  objects — contraction 
and  dilatation  of  the  pupil — distance  at  which  we  see  distinctly. 
Summary  view  of  adaptations  in  the  structure  of  the  eye.  Eyes 
of  sviperior  intelligences.  Visual  organs  of  the  inferior  animals. 
Mechanism  of  the  Bo7ies  iWnstrsited — exemplified  in  the  joints  of 
the  fingers,  the  wrist,  and  the  movements  of  which  the  head  is 
susceptible.  Moral  Reflections  on  the  impropriety  of  overlooking 
the  Divine  Wisdom  in  the  system  of  nature. 

Sect.  4.  On  the  Goodness  or  Benevolence  of  the  Deity,      .      .       Ill 
Benevolence  of  God  in  relation  to  Man — considered  as  a  depraved 
intelligence.     Mercy  displayed  in  the  system  of  nature.    Benevo- 
lence as  displayed  towards  the  lower  animals.    Extract  from 
Dr.  Paley.     General  Reflections. 


CHAP.  II. 

A   CURSORY  VIEW  OF   SOME    OF    THE    SCIENCES    WHICH  ARE 
RELATED  TO  RELIGION  AND  CHRISTIAN  THEOLOGY. 

Introduction.  Extensive  range  of  Theology.  Bad  effects  of  setting 
ReUgion  in  opposition  to  Science.  Harmony  of  the  operations 
of  God  in  Nature  and  Revelation,  .  .  .  .    '      .     117 

Natural  History,  .  .  .  .  •  •  •  •     120 

Its  extensive  range.  Outline  of  its  principal  objects — on  the  siu-- 
face,  and  in  the  interior  recesses  of  the  earth — in  the  atmosphere — 
the  vegetable,  mineral,  and  animal  kingdoms— and  in  the  region 
of  the"  heavens.  Description  of  the  Banian  Tree.  Reflections. 
Monkey  Bread  Tree.  Splendor  and  felicity  of  insect  life.  In- 
visible worlds — infinity  of  the  universe.  Religious  tendency  of 
this  Science.  It  affords  a  manifestation  of  the  Deity,  and  expands 
our  conceptions  of  his  operations — ennobles  the  human  mind. 
— Recommended  by  the  Sacred  writers. 


13 

Geocrapht,  ........  134 

Its  object — Figure  of  the  Earth — ^Proofs  of  its  spherical  form.    Re- 
lation which  the  discovery  of  the  figure  of  the  earth  bears  to  the 
plan  of  Providence.     Magnitude  and  natural  divisions  of  the 
earth.    General  features  of  its  surface.  Mountains — their  general 
ranges,  and  the  sublime  scenes  they  exhibit.     The  Ocean — its 
extent,  depth,  bottom,  and  motions.    Rivers — their  number,  size, 
and  the  quantity  of  water  they  pour  into  the  ocean.     How  they 
are  supplied — their  use  in  the  system  of  nature.    Artificial  divi- 
sion of  the  earth.  Number  and  variety  of  its  inhabitants.    Num- 
ber which  has  existed  since  the  Creation — number  at  the  resur- 
rection, and  the  space  they  would  occupy.     Number  which  the 
earth  would  contain — strictures  on  Malthus.     Utility  of  the  study 
of  Geography  to  Religion — to  Directors  of  Missionary  Societies — 
to  Private  Christians.     Grandeur  of  its  physical  objects — ^utility 
of  its  moral  facts. 
Geology,  .  •  .....  157 

Its  object  and  connection  with  religion — an  interesting  subject  of 
inquiry.    Materials  which  compose  the  crust  of  our  globe.    Vari- 
ous geological  phenomena.  Organic  remains — Mammoth,  Tapir, 
Elk,  Megatherium,  &c.     Geological  deductions  not  inconsistent 
with  the  Mosaic  History — Genesis  i.  1,  2,  explained.     Short  du- 
ration of  the  earth  in  its  present  farm.     The  Deluge,  and  its 
effects  on  the   earth's  strata.     Marine  shells,  &c.     Grand  and 
terrific  objects  which  this  science  exhibits — illustrate  the  sublime 
descriptions  of  the  Deity  recoi-ded  in  the  Scvipiures. 
Astronomy,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .163 

Its  sublime  objects.  Apparent  motions  of  the  Sun — of  the  Moon. 
Eclipses  of  the  Sun  and  Moon.  Apparent  motion  of  the  starry 
heavens.  Stars  and  jDlanets  seen  in  the  day-time,  and  with  wliat 
powers' of  the  telescope  they  may  be  distmguished.  Apparent 
revolution  of  the  celestial  vault  indicates  Almighty  power.  Stars 
never  shift  their  relative  positions.  Solar  System.  The  Sun — 
his  size  and  probable  destmation  illustrated — his  spots  and  atmos- 
phere— different  kind  of  rays  emitted  from  his  body — his  distance 
illustrated..  Mercury — his  size,  rotation,  quantity  of  light  and 
heat,  &c.  Proportions  of  caloric  on  the  different  planets.  Ve- 
nus— her  size,  phases,  mountains,  transits,  and  general  phenom- 
ena. Original  observations  on,  and  mode  by  which  her  diurnal 
rotation  may  be  determined.  Earth — proofs  of  its  annual  and 
diurnal  motions.  The  Moon — description  of  lier  majestic  moun- 
tain scenery,  luminous  spots,  celestial  appearances,  illuminating 
power,  superficial  contents,  &c.  Mars — his  distance,  atmosphere, 
luminous  zone,  &c.  New  Planets — Ceres,  Pallas,  Juno,  and 
Vesta — their  anomalies,  singularities,  and  probable  origin.  Me- 
teoric Stones.  Jupiter — his  bulk,  rotation,  belts,  and  the  appear- 
ances of  his  moons.  Saturn — his  figure,  belts,  moons,  and  quan- 
tity of  light.  His  Rings,  their  dimensions,  motion,  and  phenom- 
ena— illustrated  by  a  figure.  Splendor  of  the  firmament,  as 
viewed  from  this  planet  (see  the  engraving.)  Herschel — his 
distance,  size,  and  quantity  of  light.  Comets — their  tails,  velo- 
city, orbits,  size,  and  number.  New  Comet.  Motion  of  the 
solar  system  in  absolute  space — its  destination — plurality  of 
worlds  mtunated  in  Scriptiu-e.  The  Fixed  Stars — their  distance 
illustrated — their  arrangement,  changes — moral  reflections.  Re- 
lation of  Astronomy  to  Religion — moral  effects  which  its  objects 
have  a  tendency  to  produce — criminality  of  overlooking  the 
works  of  God,  &c. 


14 

Natural  Philosophy,  .  .  ....    201 

Its  objects  and  different  departments.  Mechanics — subjects  it  em- 
braces, and  its  importance  to  the  improvement  of  mankind.  Hy- 
drostatics— its  leading  principles  and  uses,  illustrated  by  figures. 
Pnevimatics — its  principles,  and  the  experiments  by  which  they 
are  illustrated.  Acoustics.  Optics — leading  facts  and  principles 
of  this  science.  Burning-glasses,  &c.  Electricity — its  nature, 
phenomena,  effects,  and  agency  in  the  system  of  nature.  Gal- 
vanism— its  singular  effects  on  metals,  &c.  and  on  the  animal 
system — various  facts  which  it  explains.  Magnetism — its  vari- 
ous phenomena  and  effects.  Relation  of  Natural  Philosophy  to 
Religion — its  inventions  meliorate  the  condition  of  mankind — 
illustrated  in  the  case  of  the  electric  fluid — it  undermines  the  in- 
fluence of  superstition — unfolds  the  incessant  agency  of  God — 
indifference  to  this  subject  unreasonable. 
Chemistry, 219 

Its  objects,  and  present  dignified  station.  General  forms  of  mat- 
ter— simple  arid  compound  substances.  Caloric — its  soiirces  and 
properties.  Oxygen,  its  properties  and  combinations — nitrous 
oxide,  its  singular  effects.  Nitrogen,  its  effects  on  flame  and 
animal  life.  Hydrogen,  its  properties  and  uses.  Carbon,  its 
nature,  combinations,  and  antiseptic  properties.  Sulphm',  its 
origin,  combinations,  and  properties.  Phosphorus,  history  of  its 
discovery — how  prepared — curious  experiments  with  this  sub- 
stance— Phosphoric  phenomena  in  the  system  of  nature.  Con- 
nection of  this  science  with  Religion— it  displays  the  wisdom 
and  benevolence  of  God,  and  the  mode  of  his  present  and  futvire 
operations — miproves  the  condition  of  man — and  carries  forward 
our  views  to  a  more  glorious  and  auspicious  era. 
Anatomy  and  Physiology, 231 

Their  general  object — human  body,  its  different  parts  and  divisions. 
Bones,  their  number,  form,  and  positions.  Muscles,  their  nature, 
use,  and  extraordinary  strength.  Heart  and  blood  vessels,  and 
the  circulation  of  the  blood.  Respiration — curious  structure  of 
the  lungs.  Digestion.  Perspiration.  Sensation,  and  the  sys- 
tem of  nerves.  Summary.  Moral  reflections — this  branch  ot 
study  teaches  us  our  dependance  on  a  Superior  Power — and  ex- 
cites to  gratitude. 
History, •.       •        •       .•     241 

Its  objects,  advantages,  and  connection  with  Religion.  Connection 
of  the  sciences  and  of  the  Divine  dispensations  with  each  other. 
Concluding  remarks. 

CHAP.  III. 

THE    RELATION  WHICH   THE    INVENTIONS    OF  ART    BEAR  TO 
THE   OBJECTS    OF   RELIGION. 

Art  of  Printing,  its  origin,  and  beneficial  effects — Dr.  Church's  Im- 
provements in, 246 

Art  of  Navigation— Mariner's  Compass,  its  discovery  and  use,         249 
The  telescope,  its  invention,  and  the  discoveries  made  by  it — serves 
instead  of  a  celestial  vehicle — Magnifying  powers  of  Dr.  Her- 

schel's  Telescopes, •  252 

The  Microscope,  and  the  views  it  exhibits  of  the  wisdom  of  God,    254 
Steam  Navigation,  its  utility  in  promoting  the  intercourse  of  man- 
kind, and  its  relation  to  the  objects  of  religion,        .        .        .256 


15 

Air  Balloons,  utility  of,  when  arrived  at  perfection — proposed  im- 
provement in.  History  of  their  invention — Lunardi's  ascent — 
the  Parachute, 258 

Acoustic  tunnels.  Experiments  on  the  Conveyance  of  sound. 
M.  Biot's  remarkable  experiment — Don  Gautier's  experiment 
and  suggestion.  Conclusions  in  reference  to  the  extensive  con- 
veyance of  sound, 262 

Practical  remarks — utility  of  the  arts  in  relation  to  the  Millennial 
era, 265 


CHAP.  IV. 

SCRIPTURAL  FACTS  ILLUSTRATED  FROM  THE  SYSTEM  OF 
NATURE. 

I.  Science  may  frequently  serve  as  a  guide  to  the  true  interpreta- 
tion of  Scripture.  Canon  or  rule  for  Scripture  interpretation — 
illustrated, 271 

II.  The  Depravity  of  man  illustrated,  from  a  consideration  of  the 
state  of  the  interior  strata  of  the  earth.  Volcanoes,  and  the  ter- 
rible ravages  they  produce.  Earthquakes,  and  their  dreadful 
effects.  Thunder-storms,  tempests,  and  hurricanes.  General 
Reflections  on  this  subject, 274 

ni.  The  Resurrection  illustrated.  Transformations  of  Insects. 
Indestructibility  of  matter — conclusions  from  this  fact,        .        .  282 

IV.  General  Conflagi-ation.  Concluding  reflections.  Topics  omit- 
ted m  this  volume, 285 


CHAP.  V. 

BENEFICIAL  EFFECTS  WHICH  WOULD  RESULT  FROM  CON- 
NECTING SCIENCE  WITH  RELIGION. 

I.  The  variety  of  topics  would  allure  the  attention  of  intelligent 
minds  to  religious  subjects.  Principle  of  novelty  intended  by  the 
Creator  to  be  gratified — illustrated  in  the  variety  which  appears 

in  the  earth,  the  heavens,  and  the  Volume  of  Revelation,         .      289 

II.  Science  enables  us  to  take  an  extensive  survey  of  the  empire  of 
God — illustrates  many  sublime  passages  of  the  Bible — qualifies  us 
for  complying  with  several  Divine  Injunctions — danger  of  selfish- 
ness and  indifference  in  this  respect.  Our  conceptions  of  God 
depend  on  our  views  of  the  extent  of  his  dominions,        .        .       293 

ni.  Science  enlarges  our  views  of  the  operations  of  Providence,  in 
relation  to  the  past  and  present  scenes  of  the  world.  The  econo- 
my of  the  inferior  animals.  The  physical  and  moral  economy  of 
the  celestial  worlds, 303 

IV.  Science,  blended  with  Rehgion,  would  produce  a  general  ex 
pansion  of  mind,  and  liberality  of  views — in  reference  to  the 
opinions  and  actions  of  men,  and  to  the  works  and  the  ways  of 
God,  illustrated  at  large, 310 

V.  It  would  induce  a  spirit  of  jjiefy,  and  profound  AMmz7%.  Sources 
of  piety— illustrated  by  an  example.  Humility— illustrated  by 
the  examples  of  Mr.  Boyle,  of  Sir  Isaac  Newton,  and  of  superior 
intelligences.    General  conclusions, 317 


16 


APPENDIX. 

Ko.  I.  Illustration  of  the  rate  of  motion  in  the  heavenly  bodies, 

on  the  supposition  that  the  earth  is  at  rest,        .        .        .        ,321 
No.  II.  Experimental  illustrations  of  the  pressure  of  the  Atmos- 
phere,         323 

No.  III.  On  the  means  by  which  it  may  probably  be  ascertained 

whether  the  Moon  be  a  habitable  world,        ....       324 
No.  IV.  Remarks  on  the  late  pretended  discovery  of  a  Lunar  for- 
tification,         326 

No,  V.  On  the  ideas  of  Magnitude,  Motion,  and  Duration,  as  ex- 
pressed by  numbers, 327 

No.  VI.  On  a  Plurality  of  Worlds, 329 

No.  VII.  On  the  first  Inventor  of  Printing,        ....      330 
No.  VIII.  On  Telescopes;  with  a  brief  notice  of  a  ,\'(ewj  Reflecting 

Telescope  constructed  by  the  Author, 331 

No.  IX.  On  Steam  Navigation, 334 

No.  X.  Strictures  on  a  certain  sentiment  respecting  human  re- 
demption,         338 

No.  XI.  Extract  from  Dr.  Dwight, 343 

No.  XII.  List  of  Popular  Works  on  the  different  Sciences  treated 
of  in  this  Volume,  with  Occasional  Remarks,       .       .       .       343 


THE 

CHRISTIAN  PHILOSOPHER. 

INTRODUCTION. 

On  the  subject  of  religion,  mankind  have,  in  all  ages, 
been  prone  to  run  into  extremes.  While  some  have  been 
disposed  to  attach  too  much  importance  to  the  mere  exer- 
tions of  the  human  intellect,  and  to  imagine  that  man,  by 
the  light  of  unassisted  reason,  is  able  to  explore  the  path 
to  true  wisdom  and  happiness, — the  greater  part  of  religion- 
ists, on  the  other  hand,  have  been  disposed  to  treat  scien- 
tific knowledge,  in  its  relation  to  religion,  with  a  degree  of 
indifference  bordering  upon  contempt.  Both  these  disposi- 
tions are  equally  foolish  and  preposterous.  For  he  who 
exalts  human  reason,  as  the  only  sure  guide  to  wisdom  and 
felicity,  forgets,  that  man,  in  his  present  state,  is  a  de- 
praved intelligence,  and,  consequently,  liable  to  err  ;  and 
that  all  those  who  have  been  left  solely  to  its  dictates,  have 
uniformly  failed  in  attaining  these  desirable  objects.  During 
a  period  of  more  than  5,800  years,  the  greater  part  of  the 
human  race  have  been  left  solely  to  the  guidance  of  their 
rational  powers,  in  order  to  grope  their  way  to  the  Temple 
of  Knowledge,  and  the  Portals  of  Immortality  ;  but  what 
has  been  the  result  of  all  their  anxious  researches  1  In- 
stead of  acquiring  correct  notions  of  the  Great  Author  of 
their  existence,  and  of  the  nature  of  that  homage  which 
is  due  to  his  perfections,  "  they  have  become  vain  in  their 
imaginations,  and  their  foolish  hearts  have  been  darkened. 
Professing  themselves  to  be  Avise,  they  have  become  fools  ; 
and  have  changed  the  glory  of  the  Incorruptible  God  into 
an  image  made  like  to  corruptible  man,  and  to  four-footed 
beasts,  and  creeping  things."  Instead  of  acquiring  correct 
views  of  the  principles  of  moral  action,  and  conducting 
themselves  according  to  the  eternal  rules  of  rectitude, 
they  have  displayed  the  operation  of  the  most  diabolical 
passions,  indulged  in  continual  warfare,  and  desolated  the 

2 


18  INTRODUCTION. 

earth  with  rapine  and  horrid  carnage ;  so  that  the  history 
of  the  world  presents  to  our  view,  Uttle  more  than  a  series 
of  revolting  details  of  the  depravity  of  our  species,  and  of 
the  wrongs  which  one  tribe  of  human  beings  has  wilfully 
inflicted  upon  another. 

This  has  been  the  case,  not  only  among  a  few  unculti- 
vated hordes  on  the  coasts  of  Africa,  in  the  plains  of  Tarta- 
ry,  and  the  wilds  of  America,  but  even  among  those  nations 
which  stood  highest  in  the  ranks  of  civilization,  and  of 
science. — The  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans,  who  boasted 
of  their  attainments  in  philosophy,  and  their  progress  in  the 
arts,  entertained  the  most  foolish,  contradictory,  and  un- 
worthy notions  of  the  Object  of  Divine  worship,  of  the 
requirements  of  religion,  and  of  the  eternal  destiny  of  man. 
They  adored  a  host  of  divinities  characterized  by  impiety, 
fraud,  injustice,  falsehood,  lewdness,  treachery,  revenge, 
murder,  and  every  other  vice  which  can  debase  the  human 
mind,  instead  of  offering  a  tribute  of  rational  homage  to 
that  Supreme  Intelligence  who  made,  and  who  governs 
the  universe.  Even  their  priests  and  philosophers  indulged 
in  the  most  degrading  and  abominable  practices,  and  en- 
tertained the  most  irrational  notions  in  regard  to  the  origin 
of  the  universe,  and  the  moral  government  of  the  world. 
Most  of  them  denied  a  future  state  of  retribution,  and  all 
of  them  had  their  doubts  respecting  the  reality  of  an  im- 
mortal  existence :  and  as  to  the  doctrine  of  a  resurrection 
from  the  dead,  they  never  dreamed  of  such  an  event,  and 
scouted  the  idea,  when  proposed  to  them,  as  the  climax  of 
absurdity.  The  glory  to  which  their  princes  and  generals 
aspired,  was,  to  spread  death  and  destruction  among  their 
fellow-men — to  carry  fire  and  sword,  terror  and  dismay, 
and  all  the  engines  of  destruction  through  surrounding 
nations — to  fill  their  fields  Avith  heaps  of  slain — to  plunder 
the  survivors  of  every  earthly  comfort,  and  to  drag  captive 
kings  at  their  chariot  wheels — that  they  might  enjoy  the 
splendor  and  the  honours  of  a  triumph.  What  has  been 
now  stated,  with  regard  to  the  most  enlightened  nations  of 
antiquity,  will  equally  apply  to  the  present  inhabitants  of 
China,  of  Hindostan,  of  the  Japanese  Islands,  of  the  Bir- 
man  Empire,  and  of  every  other  civilized  nation  on  which 
the  light  of  revelation  has  never  shone — with  this  addi- 
tional consideration.  That  they  have  enjoyed  an  additional 
Dcriod  of  1800  years  for  making  further  investigations; 


INTRODUCTION.  19 

and  are,  at  this  moment^  as  far  from  the  object  of  their 
pursuit  as  when  they  first  commenced  their  researches ; 
and  not  only  so,  but  some  of  these  nations,  in  modern 
times,  have  mingled  with  their  abominable  superstitions 
and  idolatries,  many  absurdities  and  horrid  cruelties,  which 
were  altogether  unknown  among  the  Greek  and  Roman 
population. 

Such  are  the  melancholy  results  to  which  men  have 
been  led,  when  left  to  the  guidance  of  unassisted  reason, 
in  the  most  interesting  and  important  of  all  investigations. 
They  have  wandered  in  the  mazes  of  error  and  delusion ; 
and  their  researches,  instead  of  directing  and  expanding 
our  religious  views,  have  tended  only  to  bewilder  the  hu- 
man mind,  and  to  throw  a  deeper  shade  of  intellectual 
gloom  over  our  apostate  world.  After  a  period  of  six  thou- 
sand years  has  been  spent  in  anxious  inquiries  after  the 
path  to  true  knowledge  and  happiness — Ignorance,  Super- 
stition, Idolatry,  Vice  and  Misery,  still  continue  to  sway 
their  sceptre  over  the  great  majority  of  the  human  race  ; 
and,  if  we  be  allowed  to  reason  from  the  past  to  the  future, 
we  may  rest  assured,  that  while  mankind  are  destitute  of 
a  Guide  superior  to  the  glimmerings  of  depraved  reason, 
they  would  be  no  nearer  the  object  of  their  pursuit,  after 
the  lapse  of  sixty  thousand  years,  than  at  the  present  mo 
ment.  It  is  only  in  connection  with  the  discoveries  of  Re 
velation  that  we  can  expect,  that  the  efforts  of  human 
reason  and  activity  will  be  successful  in  abolishing  the 
reign  of  Ignorance  and  degrading  Superstition — in  illu- 
minating the  benighted  tribes  of  the  Pagan  World — and  in 
causing  "  Righteousness,  and  Order,  and  Peace,  to  spring 
forth  before  all  the  nations."  Though  the  Christian  Re- 
ligion has  never  yet  been  fully  understood  and  recognised, 
in  all  its  aspects  and  bearings,  nor  its  requirements  been 
cordially  complied  with,  by  the  great  body  of  those  who 
profess  to  believe  in  its  Divine  origin,  yet  it  is  only  in  those 
nations  who  have  acknowledged  its  authority,  and  in  some 
measure,  submitted  to  its  dictates,  that  any  thing  approxi- 
mating to  just  conceptions  of  the  Supreme  Intelligence, 
and  of  his  moral  govermnent,  is  found  to  prevail. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  though  the  light  of  nature  is  of 
itself  a  feeble  and  insufficient  guide  to  direct  us  in  our 
views  of  the  Supreme  Intelligence,  and  of  our  eternal  des- 
tination, yet  it  is  a  most  dangerous  and  delusive  error  to 


20  INTRODUCTION. 

imagine,  that  Reason,  and  the  study  of  the  material  world, 
ought  to  be  discarded  from  the  science  of  religion.  The 
man  who  w^ould  discard  the  efforts  of  the  human  intellect, 
and  the  science  of  Nature  from  Religion,  forgets — that  He 
who  is  the  Author  of  human  redemption,  is  also  the  Crea- 
tor and  Governor  of  the  whole  system  of  the  material  uni- 
verse— that  it  is  one  end  of  that  moral  renovation  which 
the  Gospel  effects,  to  qualify  us  for  contemplating  aright 
the  displays  of  Divine  Perfection  w^hich  the  works  of  crea- 
tion exhibit — that  the  visible  works  of  God  are  the  princi- 
pal medium  by  which  he  displays  the  attributes  of  his  na- 
ture to  intelligent  beings — that  the  study  and  contempla- 
tion of  these  works  employ  the  faculties  of  intelligences  of 
a  superior  order* — that  man,  had  he  remained  in  primeval 
innocence,  w^ould  have  been  chiefly  employed  in  such  con- 
templations— that  it  is  one  main  design  of  Divine  Revela- 
tion to  illustrate  the  operations  of  Providence,  and  the 
agency  of  God  in  the  formation  and  preservation  of  all 
thing,s — and  that  the  Scriptures  are  full  of  sublime  descrip- 
tions of  the  visible  creation,  and  of  interesting  references 
to  the  various  objects  w^iich  adorn  the  scenery  of  Nature. 
Without  the  cultivation  of  our  reasoning  powers,  and  an 
investigation  of  the  laws  and  economy  of  Nature,  w^e  could 
not  appreciate  many  of  the  excellent  characters,  the  inter 
esting  aspects,  and  the  sublime  references  of  revealed  reli 
.o^ion  :  we  should  lose  the  full  evidence  of  those  argmuent. 
by  which  the  existence  of  God  and  his  attributes  of  Wis- 
dom and  Omnipotence  are  most  powerfully  demonstrated  : 
we  should  remain  destitute  of  those  sublime  conceptions  of 
the  perfections  and  agency  of  Jehovah  which  the  grandeur 
and  immensity  of  his  works  are  calculated  to  inspire  :  we 
should  never  perceive,  in  its  full  force,  the  evidence  of  those 
proofs  on  which  the  Divine  authority  of  Revelation  is  found- 
ed :  w^e  could  not  give  a  rational  interpretation  of  the 
spirit  and  meaning  of  many  parts  of  the  Sacred  Oracles  ; 
nor  could  we  comply  with  those  positive  commands  of  God 
which  enjoin  us  to  contemplate  the  wonder  of  his  power, 
to  "meditate  on  all  his  w^orks,  and  to  talk  of  all  his  doings." 
Notwithstanding  these  and  many  other  considerations, 
which  sliow  the  folly  of  overlooking  the  visible  manifesta- 
tions of  Deity  in  the  exercises  of  Religion,  it  has  long  bee» 

♦Rev.  iv.  11.  XV.  3,&c. 


INTRODUCTION.  21 

the  practice  of  certain  theologians  to  depreciate  the  wonder- 
ful works  of  Jehovah,  and  to  attempt  to  throw  them  into  the 
shade,  as  if  they  were  unworthy  of  our  serious  contempla- 
tion. In  their  view,  to  be  a  bad  philosopher  is  the  surest  way 
to  become  a  good  Christian,  and,  to  expand  the  views  of 
the  human  mind,  is  to  endanger  Christianity,  and  to  render 
the  design  of  religion  abortive.  They  seem  to  consider  it 
as  a  most  noble  triumph  to  the  Christian  cause,  to  degrade 
the  nmterial  world,  and  to  trample  under  foot,  not  only  the 
earth,  but  the  visible  heavens,  as  an  old,  shattered,  and 
corrupted  fabric,  which  no  longer  demands  our  study  or  ad- 
miration. Their  expressions,  in  a  variety  of  instances, 
would  lead  us  almost  to  conclude,  that  they  considered  the 
economy  of  Nature  as  set  in  opposition  to  the  economy  of 
Redemption,  and  that  it  is  not  the  same  God  that  contrived 
the  s)^stem  of  Nature,  who  is  also  the  "  Author  of  eternal 
salvation  to  all  them  that  obey  him." 

It  is,  unquestionably,  both  foolish  and  impious,  to  over- 
look or  to  undervalue  any  of  the  modes  by  which  the  Di- 
vine Being  has  been  pleased  to  make  known  his  nature  and 
perfections  to  mankind.  Since  he  has  given  a  display  of 
his  "  Eternal  Power  and  Godhead"  in  the  grand  theatre  of 
nature,  which  forms  the  subject  of  scientific  investigation, 
it  was  surely  never  intended,  and  would  ill  comport  with 
reverence  for  its  adorable  Author,  that  such  magnificent 
displays  of  his  Power,  Wisdom,  and  Beneficence,  as  the  ma- 
terial universe  exhibits,  should  be  treated,  by  his  intelligent 
offspring,  with  indifference  or  neglect.  It  becomes  us  to  con- 
template, with  adoring  gratitude,  every  ray  of  our  Creator's 
glory,  whether  as  emanating  from  the  light  of  Revelation, 
or  as  reflected  from  the  scenery  of  nature  around  us,  or  as 
descending  from  those  regions  where  stars  unnumbered 
shine,  and  planets  and  comets  run  their  solemn  rounds. 
Instead  of  contrasting  the  one  department  of  knowledge 
with  the  other,  with  a  view  of  depreciating  the  science  of 
nature,  our  duty  is,  to  derive  from  both  as  much  informa- 
tion and  instruction  as  they  are  calculated  to  afford ;  to  mark 
the  harmony  of  the  revelations  they  respectively  vmfold ; 
and  to  use  the  revelations  of  nature  for  the  purpose  of  con- 
firming, and  amplifying,  and  carrying  forward  our  views  of 
the  revelation  contained  in  the  Sacred  Scriptures. 

With  regard  to  the  revelation  derived  firom  the  Sacred 
Records,  it  has  been  imagined  by  some,  that  it  has  httle  or 

2* 


22  INTRODUCTION. 

no  reference  to  the  operations  of  the  material  system,  and 
that,  therefore,  the  study  of  the  visible  works  of  God  can  be 
of  little  importance  in  promoting-  religious  knowledge  and 
holy  affections.  In  the  sequel  of  this  volume,  I  shall  en- 
deavor to  show,  that  this  sentiment  is  extremely  fallacious, 
and  destitute  of  a  foundation.  But,  in  the  mean  time, 
although  it  were  taken  for  granted,  it  would  form  no  argu- 
ment against  the  combination  of  science  with  religion.  For 
it  ought  to  be  carefully  remarked,  that  Divine  Revelation 
is  chiefly  intended  to  instruct  us  in  the  knowledge  of  those 
truths  which  interest  us  as  subjects  of  the  moral  administra- 
tion of  the  Governor  of  the  world, — or,  in  other  words,  as 
apostate  creatures,  and  as  moral  agents.  Its  grand  object 
is  to  develope  the  openings  and  bearings  of  the  plan  of  Di- 
vine Mercy ;  to  counteract  those  evil  propensities  and  pas- 
sions which  sin  has  introduced ;  to  inculcate  those  holy 
principles  and  moral  laws  which  tend  to  unite  mankind  in 
haiTnony  and  love ;  and  to  produce  those  amiable  tempers 
and  dispositions  of  mind,  which  alone  can  fit  us  for  enjoy- 
ing happiness  either  in  this  world,  or  in  the  world  to  come. 
For  this  reason,  doubtless,  it  is,  that  the  moral  attributes 
of  Deity  are  brought  more  prominently  into  view  in  the  Sa- 
cred Volume,  than  his  natural  perfections ;  and  that  those 
special  arrangements  of  his  Providence,  which  regard  the 
moral  renovation  of  our  species,  are  particularly  detailed ; 
while  the  immense  extent  of  his  universal  kingdom,  the 
existence  of  other  worlds,  and  their  moral  economy,  are  but 
slightly  hinted  at,  or  veiled  in  obscurity.  Of  such  a  Re- 
velation we  stood  in  need  ;  and  had  it  chiefly  embraced  sub- 
jects of  a  very  different  nature,  it  would  have  failed  in  sup- 
plying the  remedies  requisite  for  correcting  the  disorders 
which  sin  has  introduced  among  mankind. — But,  suiely,  it 
was  never  intended,  even  in  a  religious  point  of  view,  that 
the  powers  of  the  human  mind,  in  their  contemplations  and 
researches,  should  be  bounded  by  the  range  of  subjects  com- 
prised in  that  revelation  which  is  purely,  or  chiefly  of  a 
moral  nature  ;  since  the  Almiglity  has  exhibited  so  magnifi- 
cent a  spectacle  in  the  universe  around  us,  and  endowed  us 
with  faculties  adequate  to  the  survey  of  a  considerable  por- 
tion of  its  structure,  and  capable  of  deducing  from  it  the 
most  noble  and  sublime^  results.  To  walk  in  the  midst  of 
this  "  wide  extended  theatre,"  and  to  overlook,  or  to  gaze 
with  indifference  on  those  striking  marks  of  Divine  Om- 


INTRODUCTION.  23 

nipotence  and  skill,  which  eveiy  where  appear,  is  to  over- 
look the  Creator  himself,  and  to  contemn  the  most  illustri- 
ous displays  he  has  given  of  his  eternal  power  and  glory. 
That  man's  religious  devotions  are  much  to  be  suspected, 
whatever  show  of  piety  he  may  affect,  who  derives  no  as- 
sistance, in  attempting  to  form  some  adequate  conceptions 
of  the  object  of  his  worship,  from  the  sublime  discoveries  of 
astronomical  science  ;  from  those  myriads  of  suns  and  sys- 
tems which  form  but  a  small  portion  of  the  Creator's  im- 
mense empire  !*  The  professing  Christian,  whose  devo- 
tional exercises  are  not  invigorated,  and  whose  conceptions 
of  Deity  are  not  expanded  by  a  contemplation  of  the  magni- 
tude and  variety  of  his  works,  may  be  considered  as  equally 
a  stranger  to  the  more  elevated  strains  of  piety,  and  to  the 
noble  emotions  excited  by  a  perception  of  the  beautiful  and 
the  sublime. 

"  The  works  of  the  Lord,"  says  an  inspired  writer,  "  are 
great,  and  are  sought  out  by  all  those  who  have  pleasure 
therein."  They  all  bear  the  stamp  of  Infinite  Perfection, 
and  serve  as  so  many  sensible  mediums  to  exalt  and  ex- 
pand our  conceptions  of  him,  whose  invisible  glories  they 
represent  and  adumbrate.  When  contemplated  in  connec- 
tion with  the  prospects  opened  by  Divine  Revelation,  they 
tend  to  excite  the  most  ardent  desires  after  that  state  of 
enlarged  vision,  where  the  plans  and  operations  of  Deity 
will  be  more  clearly  unfolded — and  to  prepare  us  for  bear 
ing  a  part  in  the  immortal  hymn  of  the  church  triumphant : 
— "Great  and  maiTellous  are  thy  works,  Lord  God  Al- 
mighty, just  and  true  are  thy  ways,  thou  King  of  Saints." 
The  most  illustrious  characters  that  have  adorned  our  race 
in  ail  ages,  have  been  struck  with  the  beauty  and  magnifi- 
cence of  the  visible  creation,  and  have  devoted  a  certain 
portion  of  their  time  and  attention  in  investigating  its  ad- 
mirable economy  and  arrangement :  and  there  can  be  no 
question,  that  a  portion  of  our  thoughts  devoted  to  the  study 
of  the  wondrous  works  of  the  Most  High,  must  ultimately 

*  As  some  readers  seem  to  have  mistaken  the  Author's  meaning,  in  this 
and  similar  passages,  it  may  be  proper  to  state,  that  his  meaning  is  not — 
that  a  knowledge  of  natural  science  is  essential  to  genuine  piety ;  but,  that 
the  person  loho  has  an  oppm'tunily  of  making  himself  acquainted  with  the 
science  of  nature  and  of  contemplating  the  wonders  of  the  heavens  in  their 
true  light,  and  who  does  not  find  his  views  of  the  Creator  expanded,  and 
his  religious  emotions  elevated  by  such  studies,  has  reason  to  call  in  ques- 
tion the  nature  and  the  sincerity  of  his  devotional  feelings. 


24  INTRODUCTION. 

be  conducive  to  the  improvement  of  our  intellectual  powers, 
to  our  advancement  in  the  Christian  hfe,  and  to  our  pre- 
paration for  the  exalted  employments  of  the  eternal  world. 
In  fine,  since  the  researches  of  modern  times  have  greatly 
enlarged  our  views  of  the  System  of  Universal  Nature,  and 
of  the  vast  extent  to  which  the  operations  of  the  Creator 
are  carried  on  in  the  distant  regions  of  space, — since  the 
late  discoveries  of  Naturalists  and  Experimental  Pliiloso- 
phers,  Avith  respect  to  the  constitution  of  the  atmosphere, 
water,  light,  heat,  the  gases,  the  electric,  galvanic,  and 
magnetic  fluids,  and  the  economy  and  instincts  of  animated 
beings,  have  opened  to  our  view  a  bright  display  of  Divine 
Wisdom,  in  the  contrivance  and  arrangement  of  the  differ- 
ent parts  of  our  terrestrial  habitation, — since  improve- 
ments in  the  useful  arts  have  kept  pace  with  the  progress 
of  science,  and  have  been  applied  to  many  beneficial  pur- 
poses, which  have  ultimately  a  bearing  on  the  interests  and 
the  progress  of  religion — since  a  general  desire  to  propa- 
gate the  truths  of  Christianity  in  Heathen  lands  now  ani- 
mates the  mass  of  the  religious  world — since  the  nations 
of  both  Continents  are  now  aroused  to  burst  asunder  the 
shackles  of  despotism,  and  to  inquire  after  rational  liberty 
and  mental  improvement, — and  since  all  these  discoveries, 
inventions,  and  movements,  and  the  energies  of  the  human 
mind,  from  which  they  spring,  are  under  the  direction  and 
control  of  that  Omnipotent  Being  who  made,  and  who 
governs  the  world — they  ought  to  be  considered  as  parts  of 
those  Providential  arrangements,  in  the  progress  of  which 
He  will  ultimately  accomphsh  the  illumination  of  our  be- 
nighted race,  and  make  the  cause  of  righteousness  and 
truth  to  triumph  among  all  nations.  And,  therefore,  the 
enlightened  Christian  ought  thankfully  to  appreciate  every 
exhibition,  and  every  discovery  by  which  his  conceptions 
of  the  attributes  of  God,  and  of  the  grandeur  of  his  works, 
may  be  directed  and  enlarged,  in  order  that  he  maybe 
qualified  to  "  speak  of  the  honor  of  his  majesty,  and  talk  of 
his  power  ;  to  make  known  to  the  sons  of  men  his  mighty 
acts,  and  the  glorious  majesty  of  his  kingdom." 


CHAPTER  I. 


OF  THE  NATURAL  ATTRIBUTES  OF  THE  DEITY,  WITH 

PARTICULAR  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF   HIS 

OMNIPOTENCE  AND  WISDOM. 


SECTION  I. 

On  the  Relation  of  the  JVatural  Attributes  of  Deity    to 


Religion. 


A  FIRM  conviction  of  the  existence  of  God,  and  a  compe- 
tent knowledge  of  his  natural  perfections,  lie  at  the  founda- 
tion of  all  religion,  both  natural  and  revealed.  In  propor- 
tion as  our  views  of  the  perfections  of  Deity  are  limited  and 
obscure,  in  a  similar  proportion  will  be  our  conceptions  of  all 
the  relations  in  which  he  stands  to  his  creatures,  of  every  part 
of  his  providential  procedure,  and  of  all  the  doctrines  and  re- 
quirements of  revealed  religion. 

By  the  natural  or  essential  attributes  of  God,  we  under- 
stand such  perfections  as  the  following  : — His  Eternity,  Om- 
nipresence, Infinite  Knowledge,  Infinite  Wisdom,  Omnipo- 
tence, and  Boundless  Beneficence.  These  are  the  characters 
and  attributes  of  Deity,  which,  we  must  suppose,  form  the 
chief  subjects  of  contemplation  to  angels,  and  to  all  other 
pure  intelligences — and,  in  investigating  the  displays  of  which, 
the  sons  of  Adam  would  have  been  chiefly  employed,  had 
they  continued  in  primeval  innocence.  These  attributes  form 
the  ground  work  of  all  those  gracious  relations  in  which  the 
God  of  salvation  stands  to  his  redeemed  people  in  the  econo- 
my of  redemption — they  lie  at  the  foundation  of  the  whole 
Christian  superstructure — and  were  they  not  recognized  as 
the  corner  stones  of  that  sacred  edifice,  the  whole  system  of 
the  Scripture  Revelation  would  remain  a  baseless  fabric. 
The  full  display  of  these  perfections  will  be  exhibited  in  the 
future  world — the  contemplation  of  this  display  will  form  one 


26  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

of  the  sublime  employments  "  of  the  saints  in  light" — and  to 
prepare  us  for  engaging  in  such  noble  exercises,  is  one  of  the 
chief  designs  of  the  salvation  proclaimed  in  the  Gospel. 

The  Christrian  Revelation  ought  not  to  be  considered  as 
superseding  the  Religion  of  Nature,  but  as  carrying  it  for- 
ward to  perfection.  It  introduces  the  Deity  to  us  under  new 
relations,  corresponding  to  the  degraded  state  into  which  we 
have  fallen.  It  is  superadded  to  our  natural  relations  to  God, 
and  takes  it  for  granted,  that  these  natural  relations  must  for 
ever  subsist.  It  is  true,  indeed,  that  the  essential  attributes 
of  God,  and  the  principles  of  Natural  Religion,  cannot  be  ful- 
ly discovered  without  the  light  of  Revelation,  as  appears  from 
the  past  experience  of  mankind  in  every  generation  ;  but  it  is 
equally  true,  that,  when  discovered  by  the  aid  of  this  celestial 
light,  they  are  of  the  utmost  importance  in  the  Christian  sys- 
tem, and  are  as  essentially  connected  with  it,  as  the  founda- 
tion of  a  building  is  with  the  superstructure.  Many  profes- 
sed Christians,  however,  seem  to  think,  and  to  act,  as  if  the 
Christian  Revelation  had  annulled  the  natural  relations  which 
subsist  between  man  and  the  Deity  ;  and  hence  the  zealous 
outcry  against  every  discussion  from  the  pulpit,  that  has  not  a 
direct  relation  to  what  are  termed  the  doctrines  of  grace.  But 
nothing,  surely,  can  be  more  absurd  than  to  carry  out  such  a 
principle  to  all  its  legitimate  consequences.  Can  God  ever 
cease  to  be  Omnipotent,  or  can  man  ever  cease  to  be  depend- 
ent for  existence  on  his  infinite  power  ]  Can  the  Divine 
Being  ever  cease  to  be  Omnipresent  and  Om.niscient,  or  can 
man  ever  cease  to  be  the  object  of  his  knowledge  and  super- 
intendence? Can  Infinite  Wisdom  ever  be  detached  from 
the  Almighty,  or  can  man  ever  be  in  a  situation  where  he  will 
not  experience  the  effects  of  his  wise  arrangements  1  Can 
Goodness  ever  fail  of  being  an  attribute  of  Jehovah,  or  can 
any  sentient  or  intelligent  beings  exist  that  do  not  experience 
the  effects  of  his  bounty?  In  short,  can  the  relation  of  Crea- 
ture and  of  Creator  ever  cease  between  the  human  race,  m 
whatever  moral  or  physical  situation  they  may  be  placed,  and 
that  Almighty  Being,  "  who  giveth  to  all,  life  and  breath,  and 
all  things?"  If  none  of  these  things  can  possibly  happen, 
then  the  relations  to  which  we  refer  must  be  eternal  and  un- 
changeable, and  must  form  the  basis  of  all  the  other  relations 
in  which  we  can  possibly  stand  to  the  Divine  Being,  either 
as  apostate  or  as  redeemed  creatures  ;  and,  therefore,  they 
ought  to  be  exhibited  as  subjects  for  our  frequent  and  serious 
contemplation,  as  religious  and  moral  agents.  But,  unless 
we  make  such  topics  a  distinct  subject  of  attention,  and  en^^ 


NATURAL    ATTRIBUTES    OP    THE    DEITY.  27 

deavour  to  acquire  a  clear  and  comprehensive  conception  of 
our  natural  relations  to  God,  we  can  never  form  a  clear  con- 
ception of  those  new  and  interesting  relations  into  which  we 
have  been  brought  by  the  mediation  of  Jesus  Christ. 

If  man  had  continued  in  his  primitive  state  of  integrity,  he 
would  have  been  for  ever  exercised  in  tracing  the  Power,  the 
Beneficence,  and  other  attributes  of  Deity,  in  the  visible 
creation  alone.  Now  that  his  fallen  state  has  rendered  ad- 
ditional revelations  necessary,  in  order  to  secure  his  happi- 
ness,— is  he  completely  to  throw  aside  those  contemplations 
and  exercises  which  constituted  his  chief  employment,  while 
he  remained  a  pure  moral  intelligence  ?  Surely  not.  One 
great  end  of  his  moral  renovation,  by  means  of  the  Gospel, 
must  be,  to  enable  him  to  resume  his  primitive  exercises,  and 
to  qualify  him  for  more  enlarged  views  and  contemplations  of 
a  similar  nature,  in  that  future  world,  where  the  physical  and 
moral  impediments  which  now  obstruct  his  progress  will  be 
completely  removed. 

It  appears  highly  unreasonable,  and  indicates  a  selfish  dis- 
position of  mind,  to  magnify  one  class  of  the  Divine  attributes 
at  the  expense  of  another  ;  to  extol,  for  example,  the  mercy 
of  God,  and  neglect  to  celebrate  his  Power  and  Wisdom — 
those  glorious  perfections,  the  display  of  which,  at  the  forma- 
tion of  our  globe,  excited  the  rapture  and  admiration  of  angels, 
and  of  innocent  man.  All  the  attributes  of  God  are  equal,, 
because  all  of  them  are  infinite ;  and,  therefore,  to  talk  of 
darling  attributes  in  the  Divine  Nature,  as  some  have  done, 
is  inconsistent  with  reason,  unwarranted  by  Scripture,  and 
tends  to  exhibit  a  distorted  view  of  the  Divine  character. 
The  Divine  mercy  ought  to  be  celebrated  with  rapture  by 
every  individual  of  our  fallen  race  ;  but  with  no  less  rapture 
should  we  extol  the  Divine  Omnipotence  ;  for  the  designs  of 
mercy  cannot  be  accomplished  without  the  intervention  of  In 
finite  Power.  All  that  we  hope  for,  in  consequence  of  the 
promises  of  God,  and  of  the  redemption  accomplished  by 
Jesus  Christ,  must  be  founded  on  the  conception  we  form  of 
the  operations  of  Omnipotence. — An  example  or  two  may  not 
be  unnecessary  for  illustrating  this  position. 

We  are  warranted,  by  the  sacred  oracles,  to  entertain  the 
hope,  that  these  mortal  bodies  of  ours,  after  they  have  moul- 
dered in  the  dust,  been  dissolved  into  their  primary  elementa- 
ry parts,  and  become  the  prey  of  devouring  reptiles,  during  a 
lapse  of  generations  or  of  centuries, — shall  spring  forth  from 
the  tomb  to  new  life  and  beauty,  and  be  arrayed  in  more 
glorious  forms  than  they  now  wear  ;  yea,  that  all  the  inhabit- 


28  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

ants  of  our  globe,  from  Adam  to  the  end  of  time,  though  the 
bodies  of  thousands  of  them  have  been  devoured  by  canni- 
bals, have  become  the  food  of  fishes  and  of  beasts  of  prey,  and 
have  been  burnt  to  cinders,  and  their  ashes  scattered  by  the 
winds,  over  the  different  regions  of  sea  and  land, — shall  be 
reanimated  by  the  voice  of  the  Son  of  God,  and  shall  appear, 
each  in  his  proper  person  and  identical  body,  before  God,  the 
Judge  of  all.  Now,  the  firmness  of  our  hope  of  so  astonish- 
ing an  event,  which  seems  to  contradict  all  experience,  and 
appears  involved  in  such  a  mass  of  difficulties  and  apparent 
contradictions,  must  be  in  proportion  to  the  sentiments  we 
entertain  of  the  Divine  Intelligence,  Wisdom,  and  Omnipo- 
tence. And  where  are  we  to  find  the  most  striking  visible 
displays  of  these  perfections,  except  in  the  actual  operations 
of  the  Creator,  within  the  range  of  our  view  in  the  material 
world  t 

Again,  we  are  informed,  in  the  same  Divine  records,  that, 
at  some  future  period,  the  earth  on  which  we  now  dwell  shall 
be  wrapt  up  in  devouring  flames,  and  its  present  form  and 
constitutiou  for  ever  destroyed ;  and  its  redeemed  inhabitants, 
after  being  released  from  the  grave,  shall  be  transported  to  a 
more  glorious  region ;  and  that  "  new  heavens  and  a  new 
earth  shall  appear,  wherein  dwelleth  righteousness."  The 
divine  mercy  having  given  to  the  faithful  the  promise  of  these 
astonishing  revolutions,  and  most  magnificent  events,  our 
hopes  of  their  being  fully  realized  must  rest  on  the  infinite 
wisdom  and  omnipotence  of  Jehovah  ;  and,  consequently,  if 
our  views  of  these  perfections  be  limited  and  obscure,  our 
hope,  in  relation  to  our  future  destiny,  will  be  proportionably 
feeble  and  languid  ;  and  will  scarcely  perform  its  office  "  as 
an  anchor  to  the  soul  both  sure  and  steadfast."  It  is  not 
merely  by  telling  a  person  that  God  is  All-wise,  and  All-pow- 
erful, that  a  full  conviction  of  the  accomplishment  of  such 
grand  events  will  be  produced.  He  must  be  made  to  see 
with  his  own  eyes  what  the  Almighty  has  already  done,  and 
what  he  is  now  doing  in  all  the  regions  of  universal  nature 
which  lie  open  to  our  inspection  ;  and  this  cannot  be  effected 
without  directing  his  contemplations  to  those  displays  of  in- 
telligence and  power  which  are  exhibited  in  the  structure,  the 
economy,  and  the  revolutions  of  the  material  world. 

If  the  propriety  of  these  sentiments  be  admitted,  it  will  fol- 
low that  the  more  we  are  accustomed  to  contemplate  the  won- 
ders of  Divine  intelligence  and  power,  in  the  objects  with  which 
we  are  surrounded,  the  more  deeply  shall  we  be  impressed 
with  a  conviction,  and  a  confident  hope,  that  all  the  purposes 


NATURAL    ATTRIBUTES    OF    THE    DEITF.  29 

of  divine  mercy  will  ultimately  be  accomplished  in  our  eter- 
nal felicity.     It  will  also  follow,  that,  in  proportion  as  the  mind 
acquires  a  clear,  an  extensive,  and  a  reverential  view  of  the 
essential   attributes  of  the  Deity,  and  of  those  truths  in  con- 
nection with  them,  which  are  objects  of  contemplation  com- 
mon to  all  holy  beings,  in  a  similar  proportion  will  it  be  im- 
pressed, and  its  attention  arrested,  by  every  other  divine  sub- 
ject connected  with  them.     And  it  is,  doubtless,  owing  to  the 
want  of  such  clear  and  impressive  conceptions  of  the  essen- 
tial character  of  Jehovah,  and  of  the  first  truths  of  religion,  that 
the  bulk  of  mankind  are  so  little  impressed  and  influenced  by 
the  leading  doctrines  and  duties  connected  with  the  plan  of  the 
Gospel  salvation,  and  that  they  entertain  so  many  vague  and 
untenable  notions  respecting  the  character  and  the  objects  of 
a  superintending  Providence.     How  often,  for  example,  have 
we  witnessed  expressions  of  the  foolish  and  limited  notions 
which  are  frequently  entertained  respecting  the  operations  of 
Omnipotence?     When  it  has  been  asserted  that    the    earth 
with  all  its  load  of  continents  and  oceans,  is  in  rapid  mo- 
tion through  the  voids  of  space — that  the  sun  is  ten  hundred 
thousand  times  larger  than  the  terraqueous  globe — and  that 
millions  of  such  globes  are  dispersed  throughout  the  immen- 
sity of  nature — some  who  have  viewed  themselves  as  enlight- 
ened  Christians,  have  exclaimed  at  the  impossibility  of  such 
facts,  as  if  they  were  beyond  the  limits  of  Divine  Power,  and 
as  if  such  representations  were  intended  to  turn  away  the  mind 
from  God  and   rehgion  ;  while,  at  the  same  time,  they  have 
yielded  a  firm   assent  to   all  the  vulgar  notions  respecting 
omens,  apparitions,  and  hobgoblins,  and  to  the  supposed  ex- 
traordinary powers  of  the  professors  of  divination  and  witch- 
craft.    How  can  such  persons  assent,  with  intelligence  and 
rational  conviction,  to  the  dictates  of  Revelation  respecting 
the  energies  of  Omnipotence  which  will  be  exerted  at  "the  con- 
summation of  all  things,"  and  in  those  arrangements  which 
are  to  succeed  the  dissolution  of  our  sublunary  system  ]     A 
firm  belief  in  the  Almighty  Power  and  unsearchable  wisdom 
of  God,  as  displayed  in  the  constitution  and  movements  of  the 
material  world,  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  to  confirm  our 
faith,  and  enliven  our  hopes,  of  such  grand  and  interesting 
events. 

Notwithstanding  the  considerations  now  stated,  which  plain- 
ly evince  the  connection  of  the  natural  perfections  of  God 
with  the  objects  of  the  Christian  Revelation,  it  appears  some- 
what strange,  that,  when  certain  religious  instructors  happen 
to  come  in  contact  with  this  topic,  they  seem  as  if  they  were 

3 


so  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

beginning  to  tread  upon  forbidden  ground  ;  and,  as  if  it  were 
unsuitable  to  their  office  as  Christian  teachers,  to  bring  for- 
ward the  stupendous  works  of  the  Almighty  to  illustrate  his 
nature  and  attributes.  Instead  of  expatiating  on  the  numerous 
sources  of  illustration,  of  which  the  subject  admits,  till  the 
minds  of  their  hearers  are  thoroughly  affected  with  a  view  of 
the  essential  glory  of  Jehovah — they  despatch  the  subject 
with  two  or  three  vague  propositions,  which,  though  logically 
true,  make  no  impression  upon  the  heart ;  as  if  they  believed 
that  such  contemplations  were  suited  only  to  carnal  men,  and 
mere  philosophers  ;  and  as  if  they  were  afraid,  lest  the  sancti- 
ty of  the  pulpit  should  be  polluted  by  particular  descriptions  of 
those  operations  of  the  Deity  which  are  perceived  through  the 
medium  of  the  corporeal  senses.  We  do  not  mean  to  insinu- 
ate, that  the  essential  attributes  of  God,  and  the  illustrations  of 
them  derived  from  the  material  world,  should  form  the  sole, 
or  the  chief  topics  of  discussion,  in  the  business  of  religious 
instruction — but,  if  the  Scriptures  frequently  direct  our  atten- 
tion to  these  subjects — if  they  lie  at  the  foundation  of  all  ac- 
curate and  extensive  views  of  the  Christian  Revelation — if 
they  be  the  chief  subjects  of  contemplation  to  angels,  and  all 
other  pure  intelligences,  in  every  region  of  the  universe — and 
if  they  have  a  tendency  to  expand  the  minds  of  professed 
Christians,  to  correct  their  vague  and  erroneous  concep- 
tions, and  to  promote  their  conformity  to  the  moral  character 
of  God — we  cannot  find  out  the  shadow  of  a  reason,  why  such 
topics  should  be  almost,  if  not  altogether,  overlooked,  in  the 
writings  and  the  discourses  of  those  who  profess  to  instruct 
mankind  in  the  knowledge  of  God,  and  the  duties  of  his  wor- 
ship. 

We  are  informed  by  our  Saviour  himself,  that  "this  is  life 
eternal,  to  know  thee  the  living  and  true  God,"  as  well  as 
"  Jesus  Christ  whom  he  hath  sent."  The  knowledge  of  God, 
in  the  sense  here  intended,  must  include  in  it  the  knowledge 
of  the  natural  and  essential  attributes  of  the  Deity,  or  those 
properties  of  his  nature  by  which  he  is  distinguished  from  all 
"the  idols  of  the  nations."  Such  are,  his  Self-existence,  his 
All-perfect  knowledge,  his  Omnipresence,  his  Infinite  Wis- 
dom, his  Boundless  Goodness,  and  Almighty  Power — attri- 
butes, which,  as  we  have  just  now  seen,  lie  at  the  foundation 
of  all  the  other  characters  and  relations  of  Deity  revealed  in 
the  Scriptures.  The  acquisition  of  just  and  comprehensive 
conceptions  of  these  perfections,  must,  therefore,  lie  at  the 
foundation  of  all  profound  veneration  of  the  Divine  Being,  and 
of  all  that  is  valuable  in  religion.     Destitute  of  such  concep- 


NATURAL    ATTRIBUTES    OF    THE    DEITY.  31 

ions,  we  can  neither  feel  that  habitual  humility,  and  that 
reverence  of  the  majesty  of  Jehovah  which  his  essential  glory- 
is  calculated  to  inspire,  nor  pay  him  that  tribute  of  adoration 
and  gratitude  which  is  due  to  his  name.  Devoid  of  such 
views,  we  cannot  exercise  that  cordial  acquiescence  in  the 
plan  of  his  redemption,  in  the  arrangements  of  his  providence, 
and  in  the  requirements  of  his  law,  which  the  Scriptures  en- 
join. Yet,  how  often  do  we  find  persons  who  pretend  to 
speculate  about  the  mysteries  of  the  Gospel,  displaying, — by 
their  flippancy  of  speech  respecting  the  eternal  councils  of  the 
Majesty  of  Heaven — by  their  dogmatical  assertions  respect- 
ing the  divine  character,  and  the  dispensations  of  providence — 
and  by  their  pertinacious  opinions  respecting  the  laws  by 
which  God  must  regulate  his  own  actions — that  they  have 
never  felt  impressive  emotions  of  the  grandeur  of  that  Being, 
whose  "  operations  are  unsearchable,  and  his  ways  past  find- 
ing out  1"  Thouq;h  they  do  not  call  in  question  his  immen- 
sity and  power,  his  wisdom  and  goodness,  as  so  many  ab- 
stract properties  of  his  nature,  yet,  the  unbecoming  familiarity 
with  which  they  approach  this  august  Being,  and  talk  about 
him,  shows  that  they  have  never  associated  in  their  minds,  the 
stupendous  displays  which  have  been  given  of  these  perfec- 
tions, in  the  works  of  his  hands  ;  and  that  their  religion  (if  it 
may  be  so  called)  consists  merely  in  a  farrago  of  abstract 
opinions,  or  in  an  empty  name. 

If,  then,  it  be  admitted,  that  it  is  essentially  requisite,  as  the 
foundation  of  religion,  to  have  the  mind  deeply  impressed  with 
a  clear  and  comprehensive  view  of  the  natural  perfections  of 
the  Deity,  it  will  follow,  that  the  ministers  of  religion,  and  all 
others  whose  province  it  is  to  communicate  religious  instruc- 
tion, ought  frequently  to  dwell,  with  particularity,  on  those 
proofs  and  illustrations  which  tend  to  convey  the  most  de- 
finite and  impressive  conceptions  of  the  glory  of  that  Being 
whom  we  profess  to  adore.  But  from  what  sources  are  such 
illustrations  to  be  derived  ?  Is  it  from  abstract  reasonings 
and  metaphysical  distinctions  and  definitions,  or  from  a  sur- 
vey of  those  objects  and  movements  which  lie  open  to  the  in- 
spection of  every  observer  1  There  can  be  no  difficulty  in 
coming  to  a  decision  on  this  point.  We  might  affirm,  with  the 
schoolmen,  that "  God  is  a  Being  whose  centre  is  every  where, 
and  his  circumference  no  where  ;"  that  "  he  comprehends  in- 
finite duration  in  every  moment ;"  and  that  "  infinite  space 
may  be  considered  as  the  sensorium  of  the  Godhead  ;"  but 
such  fanciful  illustrations,  when  strictly  analyzed,  will  be 
found  to  consist  merely  of  ivords  without  ideas.     We  might 


32  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

also  affirm  with  truth,  that  God  is  a  ]>cing  of  infinite  perfec- 
tion, glory  and  blessedness — that  he  is  without  all  bounds  or 
limits,  either  actual  or  possible — that  he  is  possessed  of  power 
sufficient  to  perform  all  things  which  do  not  imply  a  contra- 
diction— that  he  is  independent  and  self-sufficient — that  his 
wisdom  is  unerring,  and  that  he  infinitely  exceeds  all  other 
beings.  But  these,  and  other  expressions  of  a  similar  kind, 
are  mere  technical  terms,  which  convey  no  adequate,  nor  even 
tolerable  notion  of  what  they  import.  Beings,  constituted 
like  man,  whose  rational  spirits  are  connected  with  an  organi- 
cal  structure,  and  who  derive  all  their  knowledge  through  the 
medium  of  corporeal  organs,  can  derive  their  clearest  and 
most  affecting  notions  of  the  Divinity,  chiefly  through  the 
same  medium,  namely,  by  contemplating  the  effects  of  his  per- 
fections, as  displayed  through  the  ample  range  of  the  visible 
creation.  And,  to  this  source  of  illustration,  the  inspired 
writers  uniformly  direct  our  views — "  Lift  up  your  eyes  on 
high,  and  behold  !  who  hath  created  these  orbs  ?  who  bringeth 
forth  their  host  by  number,  and  calleth  them  all  by  their 
names  ?  The  everlasting  God,  the  Lord,  by  the  greatness  of 
his  might,  for  that  he  is  strong  in  power." — "  He  hath  made 
the  earth  by  his  power  ;  he  hath  establish"d  the  world  by  his 
wisdom ;  he  hath  stretched  out  the  heavens  by  his  under- 
standing."— These  writers  do  not  perplex  our  minds  by  a 
multitude  of  technical  terms  and  subtle  reasonings  ;  but  lead 
us  directly  to  the  source  whence  our  most  ample  conceptions 
of  Deity  are  to  be  derived,  that,  from  a  steady  and  enlightened 
contemplation  of  the  effects,  we  may  learn  the  greatness  of 
the  Cause ;  and  their  example,  in  this  respect,  ought,  doubtless, 
to  be  a  pattern  for  every  rehgious  instructor. 

SECTION  IL 

Illustrations  of  the  Omnipotence  of  the  Deity. 

In  order  to  elucidate  more  distinctly  what  has  been  now 
stated,  I  shall  select  a  few  illustrations  of  some  of  the  Natural 
attributes  of  the  Deity.  And,  in  the  first  place,  I  shall  offer  a 
few  considerations  which  have  a  tendency  to  direct,  and  to 
amplify  our  conceptions  of  Divine  Power. 

Omnipotence  is  that  attribute  of  the  Divine  Being,  by  which 
he  can  accomplish  every  thing  that  does  not  imply  a  contra- 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  33 

diction — however  far  it  may  transcend  the  comprehension  of 
finite  minds.  By  his  power  the  vast  system  of  universal 
nature  was  called  from  nothing  into  existence,  and  is  continu- 
ally supported,  in  all  its  movements,  from  age  to  age. — In 
elucidating  this  perfection  of  God,  we  might  derive  some  strik- 
ing illustrations  from  the  records  of  his  dispensations  towards 
man,  in  the  early  ages  of  the  world — when  he  overwhelmed 
the  earth  with  the  deluge,  which  covered  the  tops  of  the 
highest  mountains,  and  swept  the  crowded  population  of  the 
ancient  world  into  a  watery  grave — when  he  demolished 
Sodom  and  Gomorrah,  and  the  cities  around  them,  with  fire 
from  heaven — when  he  slew  all  the  first-born  of  Egypt,  and 
turned  their  rivers  into  blood — when  he  divided  the  Red  Sea, 
and  the  waters  of  Jordan  before  the  tribes  of  Israel — when  he 
made  the  earth  to  open  its  jaws  and  swallow  up  Korah  and  all 
his  company — and  when  he  caused  Mount  Sinai  to  smoke  and 
tremble  at  his  presence.  But,  these  and  similar  events,  how- 
ever awful,  astonishing,  and  worthy  of  remembrance,  were 
only  transitory  exertions  of  divine  power,  and  are  not  calcula- 
ted, and  were  never  intended,  to  impress  the  mind  in  so  pow- 
erful a  manner  as  those  displays  of  Omnipotence  which  are 
exhibited  in  the  ordinary  movements  of  the  material  universe. 
We  have  no  hesitation  in  asserting,  that,  with  regard  to  this 
attribute  of  the  Divinity,  there  is  a  more  grand  and  impressive 
display  in  the  Works  of  Nature,  than  in  all  the  events  recorded 
in  the  Sacred  History.  Nor  ought  this  remark  to  be  consi- 
dered as  throwing  the  least  reflection  on  the  fullness  and 
sufficiency  of  the  Scripture  revelation  ;  for  that  revelation  as 
having  a  special  reference  to  a  moral  economy,  has  for  its 
object,  to  give  a  more  particular  display  of  the  moral  than  of 
the  natural  perfections  of  God.  The  miracles  to  which  we 
have  now  referred,  and  every  other  supernatural  fact  recorded 
in  the  Bible  were  not  intended  so  much  to  display  the  plenitude 
of  the  power  of  Deity,  as  to  bear  testimony  to  the  Divine 
mission  of  particular  messengers,  and  to  confirm  the  truths 
they  declared.  It  wTts  not,  for  example,  merely  to  display  the 
energies  of  Almighty  powv?r,  that  the  waters  of  the  Red  Sea 
were  dried  up  before  the  thousands  of  Israel,  but  to  give  a 
solemn  and  striking  attestation  to  all  concerned,  that  the  Most 
High  God  had  taken  this  people  under  his  peculiar  protection 
— that  he  had  appointed  Moses  as  their  leader  and  legislator — 
and  that  they  were  bound  to  receive  and  obey  the  statutes  he 
delivered.  The  most  appropriate  and  impressive  illustrations 
of  Omnipotence,  are  those  which  are  taken  from  the  jjermanent 
operations  of  Deity,  which  are  visible  every  moment  in  the 

3* 


34  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

universe  around  us  ;  or,  in  other  words,  those  which  are  de- 
rived from  a  detail  of  the  facts  which  have  been  observed  in 
the  material  world,  respecting  magnitude  and  motion. 

In  the  first  place,  the  immense  quantity  of  matter  contained 
in  the  universe,  presents  a  most  striking  display  of  Almighty 
power. 

In  endeavouring  to  form  a  definite  notion  on  this  subject,  the 
mind  is  bewildered  in  its  conceptions,  and  is  at  a  loss  where  to 
begin  or  to  end  its  excursions.  In  order  to  form  something 
approximating  to  a  well  defined  idea  we  must  pursue  a  train  of 
thought  commencing  with  those  magnitudes  which  the  mind 
can  easily  grasp,  proceeding  through  all  the  intermediate  gra- 
dations of  magnitude,  and  fixing  the  attention  on  every  portion 
of  the  chain,  till  we  arrive  at  the  object  or  magnitude  of  which 
we  wish  to  form  a  conception.  We  must  endeavour,  in  the 
first  place,  to  form  a  conception  of  the  bulk  of  the  world  in 
which  we  dwell,  which,  though  only  a  point  in  comparison  of 
the  whole  material  universe,  is  in  reality,  a  most  astonishing 
magnitude,  which  the  mind  cannot  grasp,  without  a  laborious 
effort.  We  can  form  some  definite  idea  of  those  protuberate 
masses  we  denominate  hills,  which  arise  above  the  surface  of 
our  plains  ;  but  were  we  transported  to  the  mountainous 
scenery  of  Switzerland,  to  the  stupendous  range  of  the  Andes 
in  South  America,  or  to  the  Himmalayan  mountains  in  India, 
where  masses  of  earth  and  rocks,  in  every  variety  of  shape, 
extend  several  hundreds  of  miles  in  different  directions,  and 
rear  their  projecting  summits  beyond  the  region  of  the  clouds 
— we  should  find  some  difficulty  in  forming  an  adequate  con- 
ception of  the  objects  of  our  contemplation.  For,  (to  use  the 
words  of  one  who  had  been  a  spectator  of  such  scenes,) 
"  Amidst  those  trackless  regions  of  intense  silence  and  soli- 
tude, we  cannot  contemplate,  but  with  feelings  of  awe  and 
admiration,  the  enormous  masses  of  variegated  matter  which 
lie  around,  beneath,  and  above  us.  The  mind  labours,  as  it 
were,  to  form  a  definite  idea  of  those  objects  of  oppressive 
grandeur,  and  feels  unable  to  grasp  the  august  objects  which 
compose  the  surrounding  scene."  But  what  are  all  these 
mountainous  masses,  however  variegated  and  sublime,  when 
compared  with  the  bulk  of  the  whole  earth  1  Were  they 
hurled  from  their  basis,  and  precipitated  into  the  vast  Pacific 
Ocean,  they  would  all  disappear  in  a  moment,  except  perhaps 
a  few  projecting  tops,  which,  like  a  number  of  small  islands, 
might  be  seen  rising  a  few  fathoms  above  the  surface  of  the 
waters. 

The   earth   is  a    globe   whose  diameter  is   nearly  8,000 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITT.  35 

miles,  and  its  circumference  about  25,000,  and,  consequently, 
its  surface  contains  nearly  two  hundred  millions  of  square 
miles — a  magnitude  too  great  for  the  mind  to  take  in  at  one 
conception.  In  order  to  form  a  tolerable  conception  of  the 
whole,  we  must  endeavour  to  take  a  leisurely  survey  of  its 
different  parts.  Were  we  to  take  our  station  on  the  top  of  a 
mountain,  of  a  moderate  size,  and  survey  the  surrounding 
landscape,  we  should  perceive  an  extent  of  view  stretching  40 
miles  in  every  direction,  forming  a  circle  SO  miles  in  diameter^ 
and  250  in  circumference,  and  comprehending  an  area  of 
5,000  square  miles.  In  such  a  situation  the  terrestial  scene 
around  and  beneath  us,  consisting  of  hills  and  plains,  towns 
and  villages,  rivers  and  lakes — would  form  one  of  the  largest 
objects  which  the  eye,  and  even  the  imagination,  can  steadily 
grasp  at  one  time.  But  such  an  object,  grand  and  extensive 
as  it  is,  forms  no  more  than  the  forty  thousandth  part  of  the 
terraqueous  globe  ;  so  that  before  w^e  can  acquire  an  adequate 
conception  of  the  magnitude  of  our  own  world,  we  must  con- 
ceive 40,000  landscapes  of  a  similar  extent,  to  pass  in  review 
before  us  :  and  w  ere  a  scene,  of  the  magnitude  now  stated,  to 
pass  before  us  every  hour,  till  all  the  diversified  scenery  of  the 
earth  were  brought  under  our  view,  and  were  12  hours  a-day 
allotted  for  the  observation,  it  would  require  9  years  and  48 
days  before  the  whole  surface  of  the  globe  could  be  contem- 
plated, even  in  this  general  and  rapid  manner.  But,  such  a 
variety  of  successive  landscapes  passing  before  the  eye,  even 
although  it  were  possible  to  be  realized,  would  convey  only  a 
very  vague  and  imperfect  conception  of  the  scenery  of  our 
world  ;  for  objects  at  the  distance  of  40  miles  cannot  be  dis- 
tinctly perceived  ;  the  only  view  which  would  be  satisfactory 
would  be,  that  which  is  comprehended  within  the  range  of  3 
or  4  miles  from  the  spectator. 

Again,  I  have  already  stated,  that  the  surface  of  the  earth 
contains  nearly  200,000,000  of  square  miles. — Now,  were  a 
nerson  to  set  out  on  a  minute  survey  of  the  terraqueous  globe, 
and  to  travel  till  he  passed  along  every  square  mile  on  its  sur- 
face, and  to  continue  his  route  without  intermission,  at  the  rate 
of  30  miles  every  day,  it  would  require  18,264  years  before  he 
could  finish  his  tour,  and  complete  the  survey  of  "  this  nuge 
rotundity  on  which  we  tread  :"  so  that,  had  he  commenced  his 
excursion  on  the  day  in  which  Adam  was  created,  and  continu- 
ed it  to  the  present  hour,  he  would  not  have  accomplished  one- 
third  part  of  this  vast  tour. 

In  estimating  the  size  and  extent  of  the  earth,  we  ought  also 
to  take  into  consideration,  the  vast  variety  of  objects  with 


S6  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

which  it  is  diversified,  and  the  numerous  animated  heings  with 
which  it  is  stored  ; — the  great  divisions  of  land  and  water,  the 
continents,  seas,  and  islands,  into  which  it  is  distributed  ;  the 
lofty  ranges  of  mountains  which  rear  their  heads  to  the  clouds ; 
the  unfathomed  abysses  of  the  ocean  ;  its  vast  subterraneous 
caverns  and  burning  mountains  ;  and  the  lakes,  rivers,  and 
stately  forests  with  which  it  is  so  magnificently  adorned  ; — the 
many  millions  of  animals,  of  every  size  and  form,  from  the 
elephant  to  the  mite,  which  traverse  its  surface  ;  the  numerous 
tribes  of  fishes,  from  the  enormous  whale  to  the  diminutive 
shrimp,  which  "  play"  in  the  mighty  ocean  ;  the  asrial  tribes 
which  sport  in  the  regions  above  us,  and  the  vast  mass  of  the 
surrounding  atmosphere,  which  encloses  the  earth  and  all  its 
inhabitants  as  "  with  a  swaddling  band."  The  immense  va- 
riety of  beings  with  which  our  terrestrial  habitation  is  furnish- 
ed, conspires,  with  every  other  consideration,  to  exalt  our 
conceptions  to  that  power  by  which  our  globe,  and  all  that  it 
contains,  were  brought  into  existence. 

The  preceding  illustrations,  however,  exhibit  the  vast  extent 
of  the  earth,  considered  only  as  a  mere  superficies.  But  we 
know  that  the  earth  is  a  solid  globe,  whose  specific  gravity  is 
nearly  five  times  denser  than  water,  or  about  twice  as  dense  as 
the  mass  of  earth  and  rocks  which  compose  its  surface. 
Though  we  cannot  dig  into  its  bowels  beyond  a  mile  in  per- 
pendicular depth,  to  explore  its  hidden  wonders,  yet  we  may 
easily  conceive  what  a  vast  and  indescribable  mass  of  matter 
must  be  contained  between  the  two  opposite  portions  of  its 
external  circumference,  reaching  SOOO  miles  in  every  direc- 
tion. The  solid  contents  of  this  ponderous  ball  is  no  less  than 
263,858,149,120  cubical  miles — a  mass  of  material  substance 
of  which  we  can  form  but  a  very  faint  and  imperfect  conception — 
in  proportion  to  which  all  the  lofty  mountains  which  rise  above 
its  surface,  are  less  than  a  few  grains  of  sand,  when  compared 
with  the  largest  artificial  globe.  Were  the  earth  a  hollow 
sphere,  surrounded  merely  with  an  external  shell  of  earth  and 
water,  10  miles  thick,  its  internal  cavity  would  be  sufficient  tb 
contain  a  quantity  of  materials  one  hundred  and  thirty-three 
times  greater  than  the  whole  mass  of  continents,  islands,  and 
oceans,  on  its  surface,  and  the  foundations  on  which  they  are 
supported.  We  have  the  strongest  reasons,  however,  to  con- 
clude, that  the  earth,  in  its  general  structure,  is  one  solid  mass, 
from  the  surface  to  the  centre,  excepting  perhaps,  a  few  ca- 
verns scattered,  here  and  there,  amidst  its  subterraneous  re- 
cesses :  and  that  its  density  gradually  increases  from  its 
surface  to  its  central  regions.     What  an  enormous  mass  of 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  37 

materials,  then,  is  comprehended  within  the  limits  of  that  globe 
on  which  we  tread  !  The  mind  labours,  as  it  were,  to  com- 
prehend the  mighty  idea,  and  after  all  its  exertion,  feels  itself 
unable  to  take  in  such  an  astonishing  magnitude  at  one  com- 
prehensive grasp.  How  great  must  be  the  power  of  that 
Being  who  commanded  it  to  spring  from  nothing  into  exist- 
ence, who  "  measureth  the  ocean  in  the  hollow  of  his  hand, 
who  weigheth  the  mountains  in  scales,  and  hangeth  the  earth 
upon  nothing  !" 

It  is  essentially  requisite,  before  proceeding  to  the  survey 
of  objects  and  magnitudes  of  a  superior  order,  that  we  should 
{endeavour,  by  such  a  train  of  thought  as  the  preceding,  to  form 
Borne  tolerable  and  clear  conception  of  the  bulk  of  the  globe 
we  inhabit ;  for  it  is  the  only  body  we  can  use  as  a  standard 
of  comparison  to  guide  the  mind  in  its  conceptions,  when  it 
roams  abroad  to  other  regions  of  material  existence.  And, 
from  what  has  been  now  stated  it  appears,  that  we  have  no 
adequate  conception  of  a  magnitude  of  so  vast  an  extent  ;  or, 
at  least,  that  the  mind  cannot,  in  any  one  instant,  form  to  itself 
a  distinct  and  comprehensive  idea  of  it,  in  any  measure  corres- 
pondmg  to  the  reality. 

Hitherto,  then,  we  have  fixed  only  on  a  determinate  magni- 
tude— on  a  scale  of  a  few  inches,  as  it  were,  in  order  to  assist 
us  in  our  measurement  and  conception  of  magnitudes  still 
more  august  and  astonishing.  When  we  contemplate,  by  the 
light  of  science,  those  magnificent  globes  which  float  around 
us,  in  the  concave  of  the  sky,  the  earth  with  all  its  sublime 
scenery,  stupendous  as  it  is,  dwindles  into  an  inconsiderable 
ball.  If  we  pass  from  our  globe  to  some  of  the  other  bodies 
of  the  planetary  system,  we  shall  find  that  one  of  these  stu- 
pendous orbs  is  more  than  900  times  the  size  of  our  world, 
and  encircled  with  a  ring  200,000  miles  in  diameter,  which 
would  nearly  reach  from  the  earth  to  the  moon,  and  would  en- 
close within  its  vast  circumference,  several  hundreds  of 
worlds  as  large  as  ours.  Another  of  these  planetary  bodies, 
which  appears  to  the  vulgar  eye  only  as  a  brilliant  speck  on  the 
Vault  of  heaven,  is  found  to  be  of  such  a  size,  that  it  would  re- 
quire 1,400  globes  of  the  bulk  of  the  earth  to  form  one  equal 
to  it  in  dimensions.  The  whole  of  the  bodies  which  compose 
the  solar  system,  (without  taking  the  sun  and  the  comets  into 
account,)  contain  a  mass  of  matter  2,500  times  greater  than 
that  of  the  earth.  The  sun  himself  is  520  times  larger  than 
all  the  planetary  globes  taken  together  ;  and  one  million,  three 
hundred  thousand  times  larger  than  the  terraqueous  globe. 
This  is  one  of  the  most  glorious  and  magnificent  visible  ob- 


38  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

jects,  which  either  the  eye,  or  the  imagination,  can  contem- 
plate ;  especially  when  we  consider,  what  perpetual,  and 
incomprehensible,  and  powerful  influence  he  exerts,  what 
warmth,  and  beauty,  and  activity,  he  diffuses,  not  only  on 
the  globe  we  inhabit,  but  over  the  more  extensive  regions  of 
surrounding  worlds.  His  energy  extends  to  the  utmost  limits 
of  the  planetary  system — to  the  planet  Herschel,  which  re- 
volves at  the  distance  of  1,800  millions  of  miles  from  his  sur- 
face, and  there  he  dispenses  light,  and  colour,  and  comfort,  to 
all  the  beings  connected  with  that  far-distant  orb,  and  to  all 
the  moons  which  roll  around  it. 

Here  the  imagination  begins  to  be  overpowered  and  bewil- 
dered in  its  conceptions  of  magnitude,  when  it  has  advanced 
scarcely  a  single  step  in  its  excursions  through  the  materia' 
world  :  For  it  is  highly  probable  that  all  the  matter  contained 
within  the  limits  of  the  solar  system,  incomprehensible  as  its 
magnitude  appears,  bears  a  smaller  proportion  to  the  whole 
mass  of  the  material  universe,  than  a  single  grain  of  sand  to  all 
the  particles  of  matter  contained  in  the  body  of  the  sun  and  his 
attending  planets. 

If  we  extend  our  views  from  the  solar  system  to  the  starry 
heavens,  we  have  to  penetrate,  in  our  imagination,  a  space 
which  the  swiftest  ball  that  was  ever  projected,  though  in  per- 
petual motion,  would  not  traverse  in  ten  hundred  thousand 
years.  In  those  trackless  regions  of  immensity,  we  behold  an 
assemblage  of  resplendent  globes,  similar  to  the  sun  in  size, 
and  in  glory,  and,  doubtless,  accompanied  with  a  retinue  of 
worlds,  revolving,  like  our  own,  around  their  attractive  influ- 
ence. The  immense  distance  at  which  the  nearest  stars  are 
known  to  be  placed,  proves  that  they  are  bodies  of  a  prodigi- 
ous size,  not  inferior  to  our  sun,  and  that  they  shine,  not  by 
reflected  rays,  but  by  their  own  native  light.  But  bodies  en- 
circled with  such  refulgent  splendour,  would  be  of  little  use  in 
the  economy  of  Jehovah's  empire,  unless  surrounding  world-! 
were  cheered  by  their  benign  influence,  and  enlightened  by 
their  beams.  Every  star  is,  therefore,  with  good  reason,  con- 
cluded to  be  a  sun,  no  less  spacious  than  ours,  surrounded  by 
a  host  of  planetary  globes,  which  revolve  around  it  as  a  cen- 
tre, and  derive  from  it  light,  and  heat,  and  comfort.  Nearly 
a  thousand  of  these  luminaries  may  be  seen  in  a  clear  v/inter 
night,  by  the  naked  eye  ;  so  that  a  mass  of  matter  equal  to  a 
thousand  solar  systems,  or  to  thirteen  hundred  and  iiventy  mil- 
lions of  globes  of  the  size  of  the  earth,  may  be  perceived,  by 
every  common  observer,  in  the  canopy  of  heaven.  But  all  the 
celestial  orbs  which  are  perceived  by  the  unassisted  sight,  do 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  39 

not  form  the  eighty  thousandth  part  of  those  which  may  be 
descried  by  the  help  of  optical  instruments.  The  telescope 
has  enabled  us  to  descry,  in  certain  spaces  of  the  heavens, 
thousand  of  stars  where  the  naked  eye  could  scarcely  discern 
twenty.  The  late  celebrated  astronomer,  Dr.  Herschel,  has 
informed  us,  that,  in  the  most  crowded  parts  of  the  Milky-way, 
when  exploring  that  region  with  his  best  glasses,  he  has  had 
fields  of  view  which  contained  no  less  than  588  stars,  and 
these  were  continued  for  many  minutes :  so  that  "  in  one  quar- 
ter of  an  hour's  time  there  passed  no  less  than  one  hundred 
and  sixteen  thousand  stars  through  the  field  of  view  of  his 
telescope." 

It  has  been  computed,  that  nearly  one  hundred  millions  of 
stars  might  be  perceived  by  the  most  perfect  instruments, 
were  all  the  regions  of  the  sky  thoroughly  explored.  And 
yet,  all  this  vast  assemblage  of  suns  and  worlds,  when  com- 
pared with  what  lies  beyond  the  utmost  boundaries  of  human 
vision,  in  the  immeasurable  spaces  of  creation,  may  be  no 
more  than  as  the  smallest  particle  of  vapour  to  the  immense 
ocean.  Immeasurable  regions  of  space  lie  beyond  the  ut- 
most limits  of  mortal  view,  into  which  even  imagination  itself 
can  scarcely  penetrate,  and  which  are,  doubtless,  replenished 
with  the  operations  of  Divine  Wisdom  and  Omnipotence. 
For,  it  cannot  be  supposed,  that  a  being  so  diminutive  as 
man,  whose  stature  scarcely  exceeds  six  feet — who  vanishes 
from  the  sight  at  the  distance  of  a  league — whose  whole 
habitation  is  invisible  from  the  nearest  star — whose  powers  of 
vision  are  so  imperfect,  and  whose  mental  faculties  are  so 
limited — it  cannot  be  supposed  that  man,  who  "  dwells  in  tab- 
ernacles of  clay,  who  is  crushed  before  the  moth,"  and  chain- 
ed down,  by  the  force  of  gravitation,  to  the  surface  of  a  small 
planet, — should  be  able  to  descry  the  utmost  boundaries  of 
the  empire  of  Him  who  fills  immensity,  and  dwells  in  "  light 
unapproachable."  That  portion  of  his  dominions,  however, 
which  lies  within  the  range  of  our  view,  presents  such  a 
scene  of  magnificence  and  grandeur,  as  must  fill  the  mind  of 
every  reflecting  person  with  astonishment  and  reverence,  and 
constrain  him  to  exclaim,  "  Great  is  our  Lord,  and  of  great 
power,  his  understanding  is  infinite."  "  When  I  consider  the 
heavens,  the  work  of  thy  fingers,  the  moon  and  the  stars  which 
thou  hast  ordained, — what  is  man  that  thou  art  mindful  of 
him  !"  "  I  have  heard  of  thee  by  hearing  of  the  ear  ;"  I  have 
hstened  to  subtle  disquisions  on  thy  character  and  perfec- 
tions, and  have  been  but  little  affected,  "  but  now  mine  eye 


40  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

seeth  thee  ;  wherefore  I  humble  myself,  and  repent  in  dust 
and  ashes." 

In  order  to  feel  the  full  force  of  the  impression  made  by  such 
contemplations,  the  mind  must  pause  at  every  step,  in  its  ex- 
cursions through  the  boundless  regions  of  material  existence  : 
for  it  its  not  by  a  mere  attention  to  the  figures  and  numbers 
by  which  the  magnitudes  of  the  great  bodies  of  the  universe 
are  expressed,  that  we  arrive  at  the  most  distinct  and  ample 
conceptions  of  objects  so  grand  and  overwhelming.  The  mind, 
in  its  intellectual  range,  must  dwell  on  every  individual  scene 
it  contemplates,  and  on  the  various  objects  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed. It  must  add  scene  to  scene,  magnitude  to  magni- 
tude, and  compare  smaller  objects  with  greater — a  range  of 
mountains  with  the  whole  earth,  the  earth  with  the  planet 
Jupiter,  Jupiter  with  the  sun,  the  sun  with  a  thousand  stars, 
a  thousand  stars  with  80  millions,  and  80  millions  with  all  the 
boundless  extent  which  lies  beyond  the  limits  of  mortal  vision; 
and,  at  every  step  of  this  mental  process,  sufficient  time  must 
be  allowed  for  the  imagination  to  expatiate  on  the  objects 
before  it,  till  the  ideas  approximate,  as  near  as  possible,  to  the 
reality.  In  order  to  form  a  comprehensive  conception  of  the 
extent  of  the  terraqueous  globe,  the  mind  must  dwell  on  an 
extensive  landscape,  and  the  objects  with  which  it  is  adorned  ; 
it  must  endeavour  to  survey  the  many  thousands  of  diversified 
landscapes  which  the  earth  exhibits — the  hills  and  plains,  the 
lakes  and  rivers,  and  mountains,  which  stretch  in  endless 
variety  over  its  surface — it  must  dive  into  the  vast  caverns  of 
the  ocean — penetrate  into  the  subterraneous  regions  of  the 
globe,  and  wing  its  way  amidst  clouds  and  tempests,  through 
the  surrounding  atmosphere.  It  must  next  extend  its  flight 
through  the  most  expansive  regions  of  the  solar  system, 
realizing,  in  imagination,  those  magnificent  scenes  which  can 
be  described  neither  by  the  naked  eye,  nor  by  the  telescope  ; 
and  comparing  the  extent  of  our  sublunary  world,  with  the 
more  magnificent  globes  that  roll  around  us.  Leaving  the  sun 
and  all  his  attendant  planets  behind,  till  they  have  diminished 
to  the  size  of  a  small  twinkling  star,  it  must  next  wing  its  way 
to  the  starry  regions,  and  pass  from  one  system  of  worlds  to 
another,  from  one  Nebulae*  to  another,  from  one  region  of 
Nebulae  to  another,  till  it  arrive  at  the  utmost  boundaries  of 
creation  which  human  genius  has  explored.  It  must  also 
endeavor  to  extend  its  flight  beyond  all  that  is  visible  by  the 
best  telescopes,  and  expatiate  at  large  in  that  boundless  ex- 

*  For  an  account  of  the  J^ebulce,  see  Ch.  II.  Art.  Astronomy, 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  41 

paDse  into  which  no  human  eye  has  yet  penetrated,  and  which 
is,  doubtless,  replenished  with  other  worlds,  and  systems,  and 
firmaments,  where  the  operations  of  infinite  power  and  benefi- 
cence are  displayed  in  endless  variety,  throughout  the  illimit- 
able regions  of  space. 

Here,  then,  with  reverence,  let  us  pause,  and  wonder! 
Over  all  this  vast  assemblage  of  material  existence,  God  pre- 
sides. Amidst  the  diversified  objects  and  intelligences  it 
contains,  he  is  eternally  and  essentially  present.  By  his  un- 
erring wisdom,  all  its  complicated  movements  are  directed. 
By  his  Almighty  fiat,  it  emerged  from  nothing  into  existence, 
and  is  continually  supported  from  age  to  age.     "  He  spake 

AND    IT  WAS    DONE  ;    HE    COMMANDED    AND    IT    STOOD    FAST." 

*'  By  the  word  of  the  Lord  were  the  heavens  made,  and  all 
the  host  of  them  by  the  spirit  of  his  mouth."  What  an  aston- 
ishing display  of  Divine  power  is  here  exhibited  to  our  view  ! 
How  far  transcending  all  finite  comprehension  must  be  the 
energies  of  Him  who  only  "  spake,  and  it  was  done  ;"  who 
only  gave  the  command,  and  this  mighty  system  of  the  uni- 
verse, with  all  its  magnificence,  started  into  being !  The  in- 
finite ease  with  which  this  vast  fabric  was  reared,  leads  us 
irresistibly  to  conclude,  that  there  are  powers  and  energies  in 
the  Divine  mind  which  have  never  yet  been  exerted,  and 
which  may  unfold  themselves  to  intelhgent  beings,  in  the  pro- 
duction of  still  more  astonishing  and  magnificent  effects,  dur- 
ing an  endless  succession  of  existence.  That  man  who  is 
not  impressed  with  a  venerable  and  overwhelming  sense  of 
the  power  and  majesty  of  Jehovah,  by  such  comtemplationsj 
must  have  a  mind  incapable  of  ardent  religious  emotions,  and 
unqualified  for  appreciating  the  grandeur  of  that  Being  "whose 
kingdom  ruleth  over  all."  And  shall  such  ennobling  views  be 
completely  withheld  from  a  Christian  audience  ?  Shall  it  be 
considered  as  a  matter  of  mere  indifference,  whether  their  views 
of  the  Creator's  works  be  limited  to  the  sphere  of  a  few  miles 
around  them,  or  extended  to  ten  thousand  worlds  ? — whether 
they  shall  be  left  to  view  the  operations  of  the  Almighty 
throughout  eternity  past  and  to  come,  as  confined  to  a  small 
globe  placed  in  the  immensity  of  space,  with  a  number  of  bril- 
liant studs  fixed  in  the  arch  of  heaven,  at  a  few  miles  distance  ; 
or,  as  extending  through  the  boundless  dimensions  of  space? — 
whether  they  shall  be  left  to  entertain  no  higher  idea  of  the 
Divine  majesty  than  what  may  be  due  to  one  of  the  superior 
orders  of  the  seraphim  or  cherubim, — or,  whether  they  shall  be 
directed  to  form  the  most  august  conceptions  of  the  King  eter- 
nal, immortal,  and  invisible,  corresponding  to  the  displays  he 

4 


42  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

has  given  of  his  glory  in  his  visible  works  1  If  it  be  not,  both 
reason  and  piety  require,  that  such  illustrations  of  the  Divine 
perfections  should  occasionally  be  exhibited  to  their  view. 

In  the  next  place,  the  rapid  motions  of  the  great  bodies  of 
the  universe,  no  less  than  their  magnitudes,  display  the  Intinite 
Power  of  the  Creator. 

We  can  acquire  accurate  ideas  of  the  relative  velocities  of 
moving  bodies,  only  by  comparing  the  motions,  with  which 
we  are  familiar,  with  one  another,  and  with  those  which  lie 
beyond  the  general  range  of  our  minute  inspection.  We  can 
acquire  a  pretty  accurate  conception  of  the  velocity  of  a  ship, 
impelled  by  the  wind — of  a  steam-boat — of  a  race  horse — of 
a  bird  darting  through  the  air — of  an  arrow  flying  from  a  bow 
— and  of  the  clouds  when  impelled  by  a  stormy  wind.  The 
velocity  of  a  ship  is  from  8  to  12  miles  an  hour — of  a  race 
horse,  from  20  to  30  miles — of  a  bird,  say  from  50  to  60  miles, 
and  of  the  clouds,  in  a  violent  hurricane,  from  80  to  100  miles 
an  hour.  The  motion  of  a  ball  from  a  loaded  cannon  is  in- 
comparably swifter  than  any  of  the  motions  now  stated  ;  but 
of  the  velocity  of  such  a  body  we  have  a  less  accurate  idea  ; 
because,  its  rapidity  being  so  great,  we  cannot  trace  it  distinct- 
ly by  the  eye  through  its  whole  range,  from  the  mouth  of  the 
cannon  to  the  object  against  which  it  is  impelled.  By  experi- 
ments, it  has  been  found,  that  its  rate  of  motion  is  from  4S0 
to  800  miles  in  an  hour,  but  it  is  retarded  every  moment,  by 
the  resistance  of  the  air  and  the  attraction  of  the  earth.  This 
velocity,  however,  great  as  it  is,  bears  no  sensible  proportion 
to  the  rate  of  motion  which  is  found  among  the  celestial  orbs. 
That  such  enormous  masses  of  matter  should  move  at  all,  is 
wonderful  ;  but  when  we  consider  the  amazing  velocity  with 
which  they  are  impelled,  we  are  lost  in  astonishment.  The 
planet  Jupiter,  in  describing  his  circuit  round  the  sun,  moves 
at  the  rate  of  29,000  miles  an  hour.  The  planet  Venus,  one 
of  the  nearest  and  most  brilliant  of  the  celestial  bodies,  and 
about  the  same  size  as  the  earth,  is  found  to  move  through  the 
spaces  of  the  firmament  at  the  rate  of  76,000  miles  an  hour  ; 
and  the  planet  Mercury,  with  a  velocity  of  no  less  than  150,000 
miles  an  hour,  or  1750  miles  in  a  minute — a  motion  two  hun- 
dred times  swifter  than  that  of  a  cannon  ball. 

These  velocities  will  appear  still  more  astonishing,  if  we 
consider  the  magnitude  of  the  bodies  which  are  thus  impelled, 
and  the  immense  forces  which  are  requisite  to  carry  them 
along  in  their  courses.  However  rapidly  a  ball  flies  from  the 
mouth  of  a  cannon,  it  is  the  flight  of  a  body  only  a  few  inches 
in  diameter ;  but  one  of  the  bodies,  whose  motion  has  been 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  43 

just  now  stated,  is  eighty-nine  thousand  miles  in  diameter,  and 
would  comprehend,  within  its  vast  circumference,  more  than 
a  thousand  globes  as  large  as  the  earth.     Could  we  contem- 
plate such  motions,  from  a  fixed  point,  at  the  distance  of  only 
a  few  hundreds  of  miles  from  the  bodies  thus  impelled — it 
would  raise  our  admiration  to  its  highest  pitch,  it  would  over- 
whelm all  our  faculties,  and,  in  our  present  state,  would  pro- 
duce an  impression  of  awe,  and  even  of  terror,  beyond  the 
power  of  language  to  express.     The  earth  contains  a  mass  of 
matter  equal  in  weight  to  at  least  2,200,000,000,000,000,000,- 
000  tons,  supposing   its  mean  density  to  be  only  about  2J 
times  greater  than  water.      To  move  this  ponderous  mass  a 
single  inch  beyond  its  position,  were  it  iixed  in  a  quiescent 
state,  would  require  a  mechanical  force  almost  beyond  the 
power  of  numbers  to  express.     The  physical  force  of  all  the 
myriads  of  intelligences  within  the  bounds  of  the  planetary 
system,  though  their  powers  were  far  superior  to  those  of 
man,  would  be  altogether  inadequate  to  the  production  of  such 
a  motion.     How  much  more  must  be  the  force  requisite  to 
impel  it  with  a  velocity  one  hundred  and  forty  times  swifter 
than  a  cannon  ball,  or  68,000  miles  an  hour,  the  actual  rate  of 
its  motion,  m  its  course  round  the  sun  !     But  whatever  de- 
gree of  mechanical  power  would  be  requisite  to  produce  such 
a  stupendous  effect,  it  would  require  a  force  one  hundred  and 
fifty  times  greater  to  impel  the  planet  Jupiter,  in  his  actual 
course,  through  the  heavens  !  Even  the  planet  Saturn,  one  of 
the  slowest  moving  bodies  of  our  system,  a  globe  900  times 
larger  than  the  earth,  is  impelled  through  the  regions  of  space 
at  the  rate  of  22,000  miles  an  hour,  carrying  along  with  him 
two  stupendous  rings,  and  seven  moons  larger  than  ours, 
through  his  whole  course  round  the  central  luminary.     Were 
we  placed  within  a  thousand  miles  of  this  stupendous  globe, 
(a  station  which  superior  beings  may  occasionally  occupy,) 
where  its  hemisphere,  encompassed  by  its  magnificent  rings, 
would  fill  the  whole  extent  of  our  vision — the  view  of  such  a 
ponderous  and  glorious  object,  flying  with  such  amazing  velo- 
city before  us,  would  infinitely  exceed  every  idea  of  grandeur 
we  can  derive  from  terrestrial  scenes,  and  overwhelm   our 
powers  with  astonishment  and  awe.     Under   such  an  emo- 
tion, we  could  only  exclaim,  "  Great  and  Marvellous  are 
THY  WORKS,  Lord  God  Almighty  !"     The  ideas  o{ strength 
and  power  implied  in  the  impulsion  of  such  enormous  masses 
of  matter,  through  the  illimitable  tracts  of  space,  are  forced 
upon  the  mind  with  irresistible  energy,  far  surpassing  what 
any  abstract  propositions  or  reasonings  can  convey  ;  and  con- 


44  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

strain  us  to  exclaim,  "  Who  is  a  strong  Lord  like  unto  thee  ! 
Thy  right  hand  is  become  glorious  in  power  !  the  Lord  God 
omnipotent  reigneth  !" 

If  we  consider  the  immense  number  of  bodies  thus  impelled 
through  the  vast  spaces  of  the  universe — the  rapidity  with 
which  the  comets,  when  near  the  sun,  are  carried  through  the 
regions  they  traverse, — if  we  consider  the  high  probability,  if 
not  absolute  certainty,  that  the  sun,  with  all  his  attendant 
planets  and  comets,  is  impelled  with  a  still  greater  degree  of 
velocity  towards  some  distant  region  of  space,  or  around  some 
wide  circumference — that  all  the  thousands  of  systems  of  that 
nebulae  to  which  the  sun  belongs,  are  moving  in  a  similar  man- 
ner— that  all  the  nebulse  in  the  heavens  are  moving  around 
some  magnificent  central  body — in  short,  that  all  the  suns  and 
worlds  in  the  universe  are  in  rapid  and  perpetual  motion,  as 
constituent  portions  of  one  grand  and  boundless  empire,  of 
which  Jehovah  is  the  Sovereign — and,  if  we  consider  still 
farther,  that  all  these  mighty  movements  have  been  going  on, 
without  intermission,  during  the  course  of  many  centuries, 
and  some  of  them,  perhaps,  for  myriads  of  ages  before  the 
foundations  of  our  world  were  laid — it  is  impossible  for  the 
human  mind  to  form  any  adequate  idea  of  the  stupendous 
forces  which  are  in  incessant  operation  throughout  the  un- 
limited empire  of  the  Almighty.  To  estimate  such  mechani- 
cal force,  even  in  a  single  instance,  completely  baffles  the 
mathematician's  skill,  and  sets  the  power  of  numbers  at  de- 
fiance. "  Language,"  and  figures,  and  comparisons,  are 
"  lost  in  wonders  so  sublime,"  and  the  mind,  overpowered 
\vith  such  reflections,  is  irresistibly  led  upwards,  to  search  for 
the  cause  in  that  Omnipotent  Being  who  upholds  the  pil- 
lars of  the  universe — the  thunder  of  whose  power  none  can 
comprehend.  While  contemplating  such  august  objects,  how 
emphatic  and  impressive  appears  the  language  of  the  sacred 
oracles,  "  Canst  thou  by  searching  find  out  God  1  Canst  thou 
find  out  the  Almighty  to  perfection  1  Great  things  doth  he 
which  we  cannot  comprehend.  Thine,  0  Lord,  is  the  great- 
ness, and  the  glory,  and  the  majesty  ;  for  all  that  is  in  heaven 
and  earth  is  thine.  Among  the  gods  there  is  none  like  unto 
thee,  0  Lord,  neither  are  there  any  works  like  unto  thy  works. 
Thou  art  great,  and  dost  wondrous  things,  thou  art  God  alone. 
Hast  thou  not  known,  hast  thou  not  heard,  that  the  everlasting 
God,  the  Lord,  the  Creator  of  all  things,  fainteth  not,  neither 
is  weary?  there  is  no  searching  of  his  understanding.  Let  all 
the  earth  fear  the  Lord,  let  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  world 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  45 

stand  in  awe  of  him  ;  for,  he  spake,  and  it  was  done  ;  he  com- 
manded, and  it  stood  fast." 

Again,  the   immense  spaces  which  surround  the  heavenly 
bodies,  and  in  which  they  perform  their  revokitions,  tend  to 
expand  our  conceptions  on  this  subject,  and  to  illustrate  the 
magnificence  of  the  Divine  operations.     In  whatever  point  of 
view  we  contemplate  the  scenery  of  the  heavens,  an  idea  of 
grandeur  irresistibly  bursts  upon  the  mind  ;  and,  if  empty 
space  can,  in  any   sense,  be  considered  as  an  object  of  sub- 
limity, nothing  can  fill  the  mind  with  a  grander  idea  of  mag- 
nitude and  extension,  than  the  amplitude  of  the  scale  on  which 
planetary  systems  are  constructed.     Around  the  body  of  the 
sun  there  is  allotted  a  cubical  space,  3,600  millions  of  miles  in 
diameter,  in  which  eleven  planetary  globes  revolve — every  one 
being  separated  from  another,  by  intervals  of  many  millions  of 
miles.     The  space  which  surrounds  the  utmost  limits  of  our 
system,  extending  in  every  direction,  to  the  nearest  fixed  stars, 
IS,  at  least,  40,000,000,000,000  miles  in  diameter  ;  and,  it  is 
highly  probable,  that  every   star  is  surrounded  by  a  space  of 
equal,  or  even  of  greater  extent.     A  body  impelled  with  the 
greatest  velocity  which  art  can  produce, — a  cannon  ball,  for 
instance,  would  require  twenty  years  to  pass  through  the  space 
that  intervenes  between  the  earth  and  the  sun,  and  four  mil- 
lions, seven  hundred  thousand  years,  ere  it  could  reach  the 
nearest  star.     Though  the  stars  seem  to  be  crowded  together  in 
clusters,  and  some  of  them  almost  to  touch  one  another,  yet  the 
distance  between  any  two  stars  which  seem  to  make  the  near- 
est approach,  is  such  as  neither  words  can  express,  nor  ima- 
gination fathom.     These  immense  spaces  are  as  unfathomable 
on  the  one  hand,  as  the  magnitude  of  the  bodies  which  move 
in  them,  and  their  prodigious  velocities,  are  incomprehensible 
on  the  other  ;    and  they  form  a  part  of  those  magniticent  pro- 
portions according  to  which  the  fabric  of  universal  nature  was 
arranged — all  corresponding  to  the  majesty  of  that  infinite  and 
incomprehensible   Being,   "  who  measures  the  ocean  in  the 
hollow  of  his  hand,  and  meteth  out  the  heavens  with  a  span." 
How  wonderful  that  bodies  at  such  prodigious  distances  should 
exert  a  mutual  influence  on  one  another  !  that  the  moon  at  the 
distance  of  240,000  miles  should  raise  tides  in  the  ocean,  and 
currents  in  the  atmosphere  !  that  the  sun,  at  the  distance  of 
ninety-five  millions  of  miles,  should  raise  the  vapors,  move  the 
ocean,  direct  the  course  of  the  winds,  fructify  the  earth,  and 
distribute  light,  and  heat,  and  color,  through  every  region  of  the 
globe  ;  yea,  that  his  attractive  influence,  and  fructifying  ener- 
gy, should  extend  even  to  the  planet  Herschel,  at  the  distance 

4* 


46  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

of  eighteen  hundred  milUons  of  miles  !  So  that,  in  every  point 
of  view  in  which  the  universe  is  contemplated,  we  perceive  the 
same  grand  scale  of  operation  by  which  the  Almighty  has  ar- 
ranged the  provinces  of  his  universal  kingdom. 

We  would  now  ask,  in  the  name  of  all  that  is  sacred,  whe- 
ther such  magnificent  manifestations  of  Deity  ought  to  be 
considered  as  irrelevant  in  the  business  of  religion,  and 
whether  they  ought  to  be  thrown  completely  into  the  shade,  in 
the  discussions  which  take  place  in  religious  topics,  in  "  the 
assemblies  of  the  saints  ?"  If  religion  consists  in  the  intellec- 
tual apprehension  of  the  perfections  of  God,  and  in  the  moral 
effects  produced  by  such  an  apprehension — if  all  the  rays  of 
glory  emitted  by  the  luminaries  of  heaven,  are  only  so  man) 
reflections  of  the  grandeur  of  Him  who  dwells  in  light  unap 
proachable — if  they  have  a  tendency  to  assist  the  mind  in 
forming  its  conceptions  of  that  ineffable  Being,  whose  uncre- 
ated glory  cannot  be  directly  contemplated — and  if  they  are 
calculated  to  produce  a  sublime  and  awful  impression  on  all 
created  intelligences, — shall  we  rest  contented  with  a  less 
glorious  idea  of  God  than  his  works  are  calculated  to  afford  1 
Shall  we  disregard  the  works  of  the  Lord,  and  contemn  "  the 
operations  of  his  hands,"  and  that,  too,  in  the  face  of  all  the 
invitations  on  this  subject,  addressed  to  us  from  heaven  1  For 
thus  saith  Jehovah  :  "  Lift  up  your  eyes  on  high,  and  behold, 
who  hath  created  these  things,  who  bringeth  forth  their  host 
by  number. — I,  the  Lord,  who  maketh  all  things,  who  stretch- 
eth  forth  the  heavens  alone,  and  spread  abroad  the  earth  by 
himself;  all  their  host  have  I  commanded."  And,  if,  at  the 
command  of  God,  we  lift  up  our  eyes  to  the  "  firmament  of 
his  power,"  surely  we  ought  to  do  it,  not  with  a  brute  "uncon- 
scious gaze,"  not  with  the  vacant  stare  of  a  savage,  not  as  if 
we  were  still  enveloped  with  the  mists  and  prejudices  of  the 
dark  ages — but  as  surrounded  by  that  blaze  of  light  which 
modern  science  has  thrown  upon  the  scenery  of  the  sky,  in  or- 
der that  we  may  contemplate,  with  fixed  attention,  all  that 
enlightened  reason,  aided  by  the  nicest  observations,  has  ascer- 
tained respecting  the  magnificence  of  the  celestial  orbs.  To 
overlook  the  subHme  discoveries  of  modern  times,  to  despise 
tliem,  or  to  call  in  question  their  reality,  as  some  religionists 
have  done,  because  they  bring  to  our  ears  such  astonishing  re- 
ports of  the  "  eternal  power"  and  majesty  of  Jehovah — is  to 
act  as  if  we  were  afraid  lest  the  Deity  should  be  represented 
as  more  grand  and  magnificent  than  he  really  is,  and  as  if  we 
would  be  better  pleased  to  pay  him  a  less  share  of  homage  and 
adoration  than  i^  due  to  his  name. 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  47 

Perhaps  some  may  be  disposed  to  insinuate,  that  the  views 
now  stated  are  above  the  level  of  ordinary  comprehension,  and 
founded  too  much  on  scientific  considerations,  to  be  stated  in 
detail  to  a  common  audience.     To  any  insinuations  of  this 
kind,  it  may  be  replied,  that  such  illustrations  as  those  to  which 
we  have  referred,  are   more  easily  comprehended  than  many 
of  those  abstract  discussions  to  which  they  are  frequently  ac- 
customed ;  since  they  are  definite  and  tangible,  being  derived 
from  those  objects  which  strike  the  senses  and  the  imagina- 
tion.    Any  person  of  common  understanding  may  be  made  to 
comprehend  the  leading  ideas  of  extended  space,  magnitude, 
and  motion,  which  have  been  stated  above,  provided  the  des- 
criptions be  sufficiently  simple,  clear  and  well  defined  ;  and 
should  they  be  at  a  loss  to  comprehend  the  principles  on  which 
the  conclusions  rest,  or  the  mode  by  which  the  magnificence 
of  the  works  of  God  has  been  ascertained,  an  occasional  re- 
ference to  such  topics  would  excite  them  to  inquiry  and  inves- 
tigation, and  to  the  exercise  of  their  powers  of  observation 
and  reasoning  on  such  subjects — which   are  too  frequently 
directed  to  far  less  important  objects.     The  following  illustra- 
tion, however,  stands  clear  of  every  objection  of  this  kind,  and 
is  level  to  the  comprehension  of  every  man  of  common  sense. 
— Either  the  earth  moves  round  its  axis  once  in  twenty-four 
hours — or,   the   sun,  moon,  planets,  comets,  stars,  and  the 
whole  frame   of  the  universe  move   around  the  earth,  in  the 
same  time.     There   is  no   alternative,  or  third  opinion,  that 
can  be  formed  on  this  point.     If  the  earth  revolve  on  its  axis 
every  24  hours,  to  produce  the  alternate  succession  of  day 
and  night,  the  portions   of  its  surface  about  the  equator  must 
move  at  the  rate  of  more  than  a  thousand  miles  an  hour,  since 
the  earth  is  more  than  twenty-four  thousand  miles  in  circum- 
ference.    This  view  of  the  fact,  when  attentively  considered, 
furnishes  a  most  sublime  and  astonishing  idea.     That  a  globe 
of  so  vast  dimensions,  with  all  its   load  of  mountains,  conti- 
nents, and  oceans,  comprising  within  its  circumference  a  mass 
of  two  hundred  and  sixty-four  thousand   million  of  cubical 
miles,  should  whirl  around  with  so  amazing  velocity,  gives  us  a 
most  august  and  impressive  conception  of  the  greatness  of  that 
Power  which  first  set  it  in  motion,  and  continues  the  rapid 
whirl  from  age  to  age  !  Though  the  huge  masses  of  the  Alpine 
mountains  were  in  a  moment  detached  from  their  foundations, 
carried  aloft  through  the  regions  of  the  air,  and  tossed  into  the 
Mediterranean  sea,  it  would  convey  no  idea  of  a  force  equal 
to  that  which  is  every  moment  exerted,  if  the  earth  revolve  on 
'ts  axis.     But  should  the  motion  of  our  earth  be  called  in 


48  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

question,  or  denied,  the  idea  of  force,  or  power,  will  be  inde- 
finitely increased.  For,  in  this  case,  it  must  necessarily  be 
admitted,  that  the  heavens,  with  all  the  innumerable  host  of 
stars,  have  a  diurnal  motion  around  the  globe  ;  which  motion 
must  be  inconceivably  more  rapid  than  that  of  the  earth,  on 
the  supposition  of  its  motion.  For,  in  proportion  as  the  ce- 
lestial bodies  are  distant  from  the  earth,  in  the  same  proportion 
would  be  the  rapidity  of  their  movements.  The  sun,  on  this 
supposition,  would  move  at  the  rate  of  414,000  miles  in  u 
minute  ;  the  nearest  stars,  at  the  rate  of  fourteen  hundred  mil- 
lions of  miles  in  a  second  :  and  the  most  distant  luminaries, 
with  a  degree  of  swiftness  which  no  numbers  could  express.* 
Such  velocities,  too,  would  be  the  rate  of  motion,  not  merely 
of  a  single  globe  like  the  earth,  but  of  all  the  ten  thousand 
times  ten  thousand  spacious  globes  that  exist  within  the  boun- 
daries of  creation.  This  view  conveys  an  idea  of  power,  still 
more  august  and  overwhelming  than  any  of  the  views  already 
stated,  and  we  dare  not  presume  to  assert,  that  such  a  degree 
of  physical  force  is  beyond  the  limits  of  infinite  perfection  ; 
but  on  the  supposition  it  existed,  it  would  confound  all  our 
ideas  of  the  wisdom  and  intelligence  of  the  Divine  mind,  and 
would  appear  altogether  inconsistent  with  the  character  which 
the  scripture  gives  us  of  the  Deity  as  "  the  only  wdse  God." 
For,  it  would  exhibit  a  stupendous  system  of  means  altogether 
disproportioned  to  the  end  intended — namely,  to  produce  the 
alternate  succession  of  day  and  night  to  the  inhabitants  of  our 
globe,  which  is  more  beautifully  and  harmoniously  affected 
by  a  simple  rotation  on  its  axis,  as  is  the  case  with  the  other 
globes  which  compose  the  planetary  system.  Such  considera- 
tions, however,  show  us,  that,  on  whatever  hypothesis,  whether 
on  the  vulgar  or  the  scientific,  or  in  whatever  other  point  of 
view,  the  frame  of  nature  may  be  contemplated,  the  mind  is 
irresistibly  impressed  with  ideas  of  power,  grandeur  and  magni- 
ficence. And,  therefore,  when  an  inquiring  mind  is  directed 
to  contemplate  the  works  of  God,  on  any  hypothesis  it  may 
choose,  it  has  a  tendency  to  rouse  reflection,  and  to  stimulate 
the  exercise  of  the  moral  and  intellectual  faculties,  on  objects 
which  are  worthy  of  the  dignity  of  immortal  minds. 

VVe  may  now  be,  in  some  measure,  prepared  to  decide, 
whether  illustrations  of  the  onmipotence  of  the  Deity,  derived 
from  the  system  of  the  material  world,  or  those  vague  and  me- 
taphysical disquisitions  which  are  generally  given  in  theologi- 
cal systems,  be  most  calculated  to  impress  the  mind,  and  to 

+  See  Appendix,  No,  1. 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  49 

inspire  it  with  reverence  and  adoration.  The  following  is  a 
description  given  of  this  attribute  of  God,  by  a  well  known 
systematic  writer,  who  has  generally  been  considered  as  a  judi- 
cious and  orthodox  divine  : — 

"  God  is  almighty.  Rev.  i.  18,  chap.  iv.  8.  This  will  evi- 
dently appear,  in  that,  if  he  be  infinite  in  all  his  other  perfec- 
tions, he  must  be  so  in  power  :  thus,  if  he  be  omniscient,  he 
knows  what  is  possible  or  expedient  to  be  done  ;  and  if  he  be 
an  infinite  sovereign,  he  wills  whatever  shall  come  to  pass. 
Now  this  knowledge  would  be  insignificant,  and  his  power 
inefficacious,  were  he  not  infinite  in  power,  or  almighty.  Again, 
this  might  be  argued  from  his  justice,  either  in  rewarding  or 
punishing ;  for  if  he  were  not  infinite  in  power,  he  could  do 
neither  of  these,  at  least  so  far  as  to  render  him  the  object  of 
that  desire  or  fear,  which  is  agreeable  to  the  nature  of  these 
perfections  ;  neither  could  infinite  faithfulness  accomplish  all 
the  promises  which  he  hath  made,  so  as  to  excite  that  trust, 
and  dependence  which  is  a  part  of  religious  worship  ;  nor 
could  he  say  without  limitation,  as  he  does,  /  have  spoken  it,  1 
will  also  bring  it  to  pass  ;  1  have  purposed  it^  I  will  also  do  it ; 
Isa.  xlvi.  11. — But  since  power  is  visible  in,  and  demonstra- 
ted by  its  effect,  and  infinite  power,  by  those  effects  -wiiich 
cannot  be  produced  by  a  creature,  we  may  observe  the  al- 
mighty power  of  God  in  all  his  works,  both  of  nature  and  grace : 
thus  his  eternal  power  is  understood,  as  the  apostle  says.  By 
the  things  that  are  made,  Rom.  i.  20,  not  that  there  was  an 
eternal  production  of  things,  but  the  exerting  this  power  in 
time,  proves  it  to  be  infinite  and  truly  divine  ;  for  no  creature 
can  produce  the  smallest  particle  of  matter  out  of  nothing, 
much  less  furnish  the  various  species  of  creatures,  with  those 
endowments  in  which  they  excel  one  another,  and  set  forth 
their  Creator's  glory.  And  the  glory  of  his  power  is  no  less 
visible  in  the  works  of  providence,  whereby  he  upholds  all 
things,  disposes  of  them  according  to  his  pleasure,  and  brings 
about  events  which  only  he  who  has  an  almighty  arm  can  ef- 
fect."— Uidgleifs  Bodij  of  Divinitij,  p.  39. 

This  is  the  whole  that  Dr.  Ridgley  judges  it  necessary  to 
state,  in  illustration  of  the  attribute  of  Omnipotence,  except 
what  he  says  in  relation  to  its  operation  "  in  the  work  of  grace," 
in  "the  propagation  and  success  of  the  Gospel,"  &c.  subjects, 
to  which  the  idea  of  power,  or  physical  energy,  does  not  pro- 
perly apply.  Such,  however,  are  the  meagre  and  abstract  dis- 
quisitions generally  given  by  most  systematic  writers.  There 
is  a  continual  play  on  the  term  "  Infinite,"  which,  to  most 
minds,  conveys  no  idea  at  all,  unless  it  be  associated  >vith 


50  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

ample  conceptions  of  motion,  magnitude,  and  extension  ;  and 
it  is  constantly  applied  to  subjects  to  which  it  was  never  in- 
tended to  apply,  such  as  "  infinite  faithfulness,  infinite  justice, 
infinite  truth,"  &c.  an  application  of  the  term  which  is  never 
sanctioned  by  Scripture,  and  which  has  a  tendency  to  intro- 
duce confusion  into  our  conceptions  of  the  perfections  of  God. 
Granting  that  the  statements  and  reasonings  in  such  an  extract 
as  the  above  were  unquestionable,  yet  what  impression  can 
they  make  upon  the  mind  ?  Would  an  ignorant  person  feel 
his  conceptions  of  the  Divinity  much  enlarged,  or  his  moral 
powers  aroused  by  such  vague  and  general  statements  1  And, 
if  not,  it  appears  somewhat  unaccountable,  that  those  sources 
of  illustration,  which  would  convey  the  most  ample  and  defi- 
nite views  of  the  "  eternal  power"  and  glory  of  God,  should  be 
studiously  concealed  from  the  view.  Vague  descriptions  and 
general  views  of  any  object  will  never  be  efTectual  in  awaken- 
ing the  attention,  and  arresting  the  faculties  of  the  mind.  The 
heart  will  always  remain  unimpressed,  and  the  understanding 
will  never  be  thoroughly  excited  in  its  exercise,  unless  the 
intellect  have  presented  before  it  a  well-defined  and  interesting 
object,  and  be  enabled  to  survey  it  in  its  various  aspects  ;  and 
this  object  must  always  have  a  relation  to  the  material  world, 
whether  it  be  viewed  in  connection  with  religion,  or  with  any 
other  subject. 


Thus  I  have  endeavoured,  in  the  preceding  sketches,  to  pre- 
sent a  few  detached  illustrations  of  the  omnipotence  and  gran- 
deur of  the  Deity,  as  displayed  in  the  vast  magnitude  of  the 
material  universe — the  stupendous  velocities  of  the  celestial 
bodies — and  in  the  immeasurable  regions  of  space  which  sur- 
round them,  and  in  which  their  motions  are  performed.  Such 
a  magnificent  spectacle  as  the  fabric  of  the  universe  presents — 
so  majestic,  God-like,  and  overwhelming,  to  beings  who  dwell 
"  in  tabernacles  of  clay" — was  surely  never  intended  to  be 
overlooked,  or  to  be  gazed  at  with  indifference,  by  creatures 
endowed  with  reason  and  intelligence,  and  destined  to  an  im- 
mortal existence.  In  forming  a  vmiverse  composed  of  so 
many  immense  systems  and  worlds,  and  replenished  with 
such  a  variety  of  sensitive  and  intelligent  existences,  the  Crea- 
tor, doubtless,  intended  that  it  should  make  a  sublime  and 
reverential  impression  on  the  minds  of  all  the  intellectual  be- 
ings to  whom  it  might  be  displayed,  and  that  it  should  convey 
some  palpable  idea  of  the  infinite  glories  of  his  nature,  in  so 
far  as  material  objects  can  be  supposed  to   adumbrate  the 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY. 


5l 


perfections  of  a  spiritual  and  uncreated  Essence.  Dwelling  iii 
*'  light  inaccessible"  to  mortals,  and  for  ever  veiled  from  the 
highest  created  being,  by  the  pure  spirituality  and  immensity 
of  his  nature,  there  is  no  conceivable  mode  by  which  the  in- 
finite grandeur  of  Deity  could  be  exhibited  to  finite  intelli- 
gences, but  through  the  medium  of  those  magnificient  opera- 
tions which  are  incessantly  going  forward  throughout  the 
boundless  regions  of  space.  Concealed  from  the  gaze  of  all 
the  "  principalities  and  powers"  in  heaven,  in  the  unfathoma- 
ble depths  of  his  Essence,  he  displays  his  presence  in  the 
universe  he  has  created,  and  the  glory  of  his  power,  by 
launching  magnificent  worlds  into  existence,  by  adorning  them 
with  diversified  splendors,  by  peopling  them  with  various  ranks 
of  intelligent  existence,  and  by  impelling  them  in  their  move- 
ments through  the  illimitable  tracts  of  creation. 

It  will  readily  be  admitted  by  every  enlightened  Christian, 
that  it  must  be  a  highly  desirable  attainment,  to  acquire  the 
most  glorious  idea  of  the  Divine  Being  which  the  limited  ca- 
pacity of  our  minds  is  capable  of  receiving.  This  is  one  of 
the  grand  difficulties  in  religion.  The  idea  of  a  Being  purely 
IMMATERIAL,  yet  pervading  infinite  space,  and  possessed  of 
no  sensible  quahties,  confounds  and  bewilders  the  human  in- 
tellect, so  that  its  conceptions,  on  the  one  hand,  are  apt  to 
verge  towards  extravagancy,  while,  on  the  other,  they  are  apt 
to  degenerate  into  something  approaching  to  inanity.  Mere 
abstract  ideas  and  reasonings  respecting  infinity,  eternity, 
and  absolute  perfection,  however  sublime  we  may  conceive 
them  to  be,  completely  fail  in  arresting  the  understanding,  and 
affecting  the  heart ;  our  conceptions  become  vague,  empty, 
and  confused,  for  want  of  a  material  vehicle  to  give  them  or- 
der, stability,  and  expansion.  Something  of  the  nature  of  vast 
extension,  of  splendid  and  variegated  objects,  and  of  mighty 
movements,  is  absolutely  necessary,  in  order  to  convey  to 
spirits  dwelling  in  bodies  of  clay,  a  definite  conception  of  the 
invisible  glories  of  the  Eternal  Mind  ;  and,  therefore,  in  the 
immense  variety  of  material  existence  with  which  the  universe 
is  adorned,  we  find  every  requisite  assistance  of  this  kmd  to 
direct  and  expand  our  views  of  the  great  object  of  our  adora- 
tion. When  the  mind  is  perplexed  and  overwhelmed  with  its 
conceptions,  when  it  labors,  as  it  were,  to  form  some  well- 
defined  conceptions  of  an  Infinite  Being,  it  here  finds  some 
tangible  objects  on  which  to  fix,  some  sensible  substratum  for 
its  thoughts  to  rest  upon  for  a  little,  while  it  attempts  to  pene- 
trate, in  its  excursions,  into  those  distant  regions  which  eye 
hath  not  seen,  and  to  connect  the  whole  of  its  mental  survey 


52  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

with  the  energies  of  the  "  King,  Eternal,  Immortal,  and  In- 
visible." 

To  such  a  train  of  thought  we  are  uniformly  directed  in  the 
sacred  oracles,  where  Jehovah  is  represented  as  describing 
himself  by  the  effects  which  his  power  and  wisdom  have  pro- 
duced.— "  Israel  shall  be  saved  in  the  Lord  with  an  everlast- 
ing salvation.  For  thus  saith  Jehovah  that  created  the  hea- 
vens ;  God  himself  thai  formed  the  earth  and  made  it ;  he 
hath  established  it,  he  created  it  not  in  vain,  he  formed  it  to 
be  inhabited  ;  I  am  the  Lord,  and  there  is  none  else."  "  I 
have  made  the  earth  and  created  man  upon  it,  my  hands  have 
stretched  out  the  heavens,  and  all  their  host  have  I  command- 
ed." "  Hearken  unto  me,  0  Israel :  I  am  the  first,  1  also  am 
the  last.  Mine  hand  also  hath  laid  the  foundation  of  the 
earth,  and  my  right  hand  hath  spanned  the  heavens  :  when  I 
call  unto  them,  they  stand  up  together."  "  Who  hath  mea- 
sureth  the  waters  in  the  hollow  of  his  hand,  and  meted  out 
heaven  with  the  span,  and  weighed  the  mountains  in  scales  ? 
He  who  sitteth  upon  the  circle  of  the  earth,  and  the  inhabitants 
thereof,  are  as  grasshoppers  ;  that  stretched  out  the  heavens 
as  a  curtain,  that  fainteth  not,  neither  is  weary."  "  The  Lord 
made  the  heavens,  the  heaven  of  heavens,  with  all  their 
hosts  ;  honor  and  majesty  are  before  him,  and  his  kingdom 
ruleth  over  all."*  Such  sublime  descriptions  of  Jehovah,  and 
references  to  his  material  works,  are  reiterated  in  every  por- 
tion of  the  sacred  volume  ;  and  the  import  and  sublimity  of 
such  expressions  cannot  be  fully  appreciated,  unless  we  take 
into  view  all  the  magnificent  objects  which  science  has  unveil- 
ed in  the  distant  regions  of  creation. 

This  subject  is  calculated,  not  merely  to  overpower  the  in- 
tellect with  ideas  of  sublimity  and  grandeur,  but  also  to  pro- 
duce a  deep  moral  impression  upon  the  heart ;  and  a  Christian 
ohilosopher  would  be  deficient  in  his  duty,  were  he  to  overlook 
tnis  tendency  of  the  objects  of  his  contemplation. 

One  important  moral  effect  which  this  subject  has  a  natural 
tendency  to  produce,  is,  profound  humility.  What  an  in- 
significant being  does  man  appear,  when  he  compares  himself 
with  the  magnificence  of  creation,  and  with  the  myriads  of 
exalted  intelligences  with  which  it  is  peopled  !  What  are  all 
the  honors  and  splendors  of  this  earthly  ball,  of  which  mortals 
are  so  proud,  when  placed  in  competition  with  the  resplendent 
glories  of  the  skies?  Such  a  display  as  the  Almighty  has 
given  of  himself,  in  the  magnitude  and  variety  of  his  works* 

*  Isa.  xlv.  18,  12.  xlviii.  12,  13.  xl.  12,  22,  &c. 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  53 

was  evidently  intended  "to  stain  the  pride"  of  all  human 
grandeur,  that  "  no  flesh  should  glory  in  his  presence."  Yet, 
there  is  no  disposition  that  appears  so  prominent  among  puny 
mortals,  as  pride,  ambition,  and  vain-glory — the  very  opposite 
of  humility,  and  of  all  those  tempers  which  become  those 
"  who  dwell  in  tabernacles  of  clay,  and  whose  foundation  is  in 
th-edust.-'  Even  without  taking  into  account  the  state  of  man 
as  a  depraved  intelligence,  what  is  there  in  his  situation  that 
should  inspire  him  v/ith  "  lofty  looks,"  and  induce  him  to  look 
down  on  his  fellow-men  wth  supercilious  contempt  ?  He 
derived  his  origin  from  the  dust,  he  is  allied  with  the  beasts 
that  perish,  and  he  is  fast  hastening  to  the  grave,  where  his 
carcass  will  become  the  food  for  noisome  reptiles.  He  is 
every  moment  dependant  on  a  Superior  Being  for  every  pulse 
that  beats,  and  every  breath  he  draws,  and  for  ail  that  he  pos- 
sesses ;  he  is  dependant  even  on  the  meanest  of  his  species 
for  his  accommodations  and  comforts.  He  holds  every  enjoy- 
ment on  the  most  precarious  tenure, — his  friends  may  be 
snatched  in  a  moment  from  his  embrace  ;  his  riches  may  take 
to  themselves  wings  and  fly  away  ;  and  his  health  and  beauty 
may  be  blasted  in  an  hour,  by  a  breath  of  wind.  Hunger  and 
thirst,  cold  and  heat,  poverty  and  disgrace,  sorrow  and  disap- 
pointment, pain  and  disease,  mingle  themselves  with  all  his 
pursuits  and  enjoyments. — His  knowledge  is  circumscribed 
within  the  narrowest  limits,  his  errors  and  follies  are  glaring 
and  innumerable  ;  and  he  stands  as  an  almost  undistinguish- 
able  atom,  amidst  the  immensity  of  God's  work's.  Still,  with 
all  these  powerful  inducements  to  the  exercise  of  humility, 
man  dares  to  be  proud  and  arrogant. 

Man,  proud  Man, 


Dressed  in  a  little  brief  authority, 

Plays  such  fantastic  tricks  before  high  Heaven 

As  inake  the  angels  weep." 

How  affecting  to  contemplate  the  warrior,  flushed  with  dia- 
bolical pride,  pursuing  his  conquests  through  heaps  of  slain, 
in  order  to  obtain  possession  of  *'  a  poor  pitiable  speck  of 
perishing  earth  ;'  exclaiming  in  his  rage,  "  I  will  pursue,  I 
will  overtake,  I  will  divide  the  spoil,  my  lust  shall  be  satisfied 
upon  them,  I  will  draw  my  sword,  my  hand  shall  destroy 
them" — to  behold  the  man  of  rank  glorying  in  his  wealth, 
and  his  empty  titles,  and  looking  around  upon  the  inferior 
orders  of  his  fellow-mortals  as  the  worms  of  the  dust — 
to  behold  the  man  of  ambition  pushing  his  M^ay  through  bribery, 
and  treachery,  and  slaughter,  to  gain  possession  of  a  throne, 
that  he  may  look  down  with  proud  pre-eminence  upon  his 

5 


54  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

fellows — to  behold  the  haughty  airs  of  the  noble  dame,  inflated 
with  the  idea  of  her  beauty,  and  her  high  birth,  as  she  struts 
along,  surveying  the  ignoble  crowd  as  if  they  were  the  dust 
beneath  her  feet — to  behold  the  smatterer  in  learning,  puffed 
up  with  a  vain  conceit  of  his  superficial  acquirements,  when 
he  has  scarcely  entered  the  porch  of  knowledge — in  fine,  to 
behold  all  ranks  from  the  highest  to  the  lowest,  big  with  an 
idea  of  their  own  importance,  and  fired  with  pride  and  re- 
venge at  the  least  provocation,  whether  imaginary  or  real ! 
How  inconsistent  the  manifestations  of  such  tempers,  with 
the  many  humiliating  circumstances  of  our  present  condition, 
and  with  the  low  rank  which  we  hold  in  the  scale  of  UniversaJ 
Being  ] 

It  is  not  improbable,  that  there  are  in  the  universe,  intelli- 
gences of  a  superior  order,  in  whose  breasts  pride  never  found 
a  place — to  whom  this  globe  of  ours,  and  all  its  inhabitants, 
appear  as  inconsiderable  as  a  drop  of  water  filled  with  micro- 
scopic animalcule,  does  to  the  proud  lords  of  this  earthly  re- 
gion. There  is  at  least  one  Being  to  whom  this  sentiment  is 
applicable,  in  its  utmost  extent : — *'  Before  Him  all  nations 
are  as  a  drop  of  a  bucket,  and  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  as 
grasshoppers  ;  yea,  they  are  as  nothing,  and  are  counted  to 
him  less  than  nothing  and  vanity."  Could  we  wing  our  way, 
with  the  swifness  of  a  seraph,  from  sun  to  sun,  and  from 
world  to  world,  till  we  had  surveyed  all  the  systems  visible  to 
the  naked  eye,  which  are  only  as  a  mere  speck  in  the  map  of 
the  universe — could  we,  at  the  same  time,  contemplate  the 
glorious  landscapes  and  scenes  of  grandeur  they  exhibit — 
could  we  also  mingle  with  the  pure  and  exalted  intelligences 
which  people  those  resplendent  abodes,  and  behold  their  hum- 
ble and  ardent  adorations  of  their  Almighty  IMaker,  their 
benign  and  condescending  deportment  towards  one  another  ; 
"  each  esteeming  another  better  than  himself,"  and  all  united 
in  the  bonds  of  the  purest  affection,  without  one  haughty  or 
discordant  feeling — what  indignation  and  astonishment  would 
seize  us,  on  our  return  to  this  obscure  corner  of  creation,  to 
behold  beings  enveloped  in  the  mist  of  ignorance,  immersed 
in  depravity  and  wickedness,  liable  to  a  thousand  accidents, 
exposed  to  the  ravages  of  the  earthquake,  the  volcano,  and 
the  storm ;  yet  proud  as  Lucifer,  and  glorying  in  their  shame  ! 
We  should  be  apt  to  view  them,  as  we  now  do  those  bedlam- 
ites, who  fancy  themselves  to  be  kings,  surrounded  by  their 
nobles,  while  they  are  chained  to  the  walls  of  a  noisome  dun- 
geon. "  Sure  pride  was  never  made  for  man."  How  abhor- 
rent, then,  must  it  appear  in  the  eyes  of  superior  beings,  who 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  55 

have  taken  an  expansive  range  through  the  field  of  creation  ? 
How  abhorrent  it  is  in  the  sight  of  the  Almighty,  and  how 
amiable  is  the  opposite  virtue,  we  learn  from  his  word  : — 
"  Every  one  that  is  proud  in  heart  is  an  abomination  to  the 
Lord." — "God  resisteth  the  proud,  but  giveth  grace  to  the 
humble." — "  Thus  saith  the  High  and  Lofty  One,  who  in- 
habiteth  eternity,  I  dwell  in  the  high  and  holy  place  ;  with 
him  also  that  is  of  an  humble  and  contrite  spirit ;  to  revive 
(he  spirit  of  the  humble,  and  the  heart  of  the  contrite  ones." — 
While,  therefore,  we  contemplate  the  omnipotence  of  God,  in 
the  immensity  of  creation,  let  us  learn  to  cultivate  humility 
and  self-abasement.  This  was  one  of  the  lessons  which  the 
pious  Psalmist  deduced  from  his  survey  of  the  nocturnal 
heavens.  When  he  beheld  the  moon  walking  in  the  bright- 
ness, and  the  innumerable  host  of  stars,  overpowered  with  a 
sense  of  his  own  insignificance,  and  the  greatness  of  divine 
condescension,  he  exclaimed,  "  0  Lord  !  what  is  man,  that 
thou  art  mindful  of  him,  or  the  son  of  man,  that  thou  shouldst 
visit  him !" 

Again,  this  subject  is  also  calculated  to  inspire  us  with 
•lEVERENCE  and  VENERATION  of  God.  Profound  veneration 
of  the  Divine  Being  lies  at  the  foundation  of  ail  religious  wor- 
ship and  obedience.  But,  in  order  to  venerate  God  aright, 
we  must  know  him  ;  and,  in  order  to  acquire  the  true  know- 
ledge of  him,  we  must  contemplate  him  through  the  medium 
of  those  works  and  dispensations,  by  which  he  displays  the 
glories  of  his  nature  to  the  inhabitants  of  our  world.  I  have 
already  exhibited  a  few  specimens  of  the  stupendous  opera- 
tions of  his  power,  in  that  portion  of  the  system  of  the  uni- 
verse which  lies  open  to  our  inspection  ;  and  there  is  surely, 
no  mind  in  which  the  least  spark  of  piety  exists,  but  must 
feel  strong  emotions  of  reverence  and  awe,  at  the  thought 
of  that  Almighty  and  Incomprehensible  Being,  who  impels  the 
huge  masses  of  the  planetary  globes,  with  so  amazing  a  rapid- 
ity through  the  sky,  and  who  has  diversified  the  voids  of  space 
with  so  vast  an  assemblage  of  magnificent  vvorlds.  Even 
those  manifestations  of  Deity  which  are  confined  to  the  globe 
we  inhabit,  when  attentively  considered,  are  calculated  to 
rouse,  even  the  unthinking  mind,  to  astonishment  and  awe. 
The  lofty  mountains,  and  expansive  plains,  the  mass  of  water 
in  the  mighty  ocean,  the  thunders  roiling  along  the  sky,  the 
lightnings  flashing  from  cloud  to  cloud,  the  hurricane  and  the 
tempest,  the  volcano  vomiting  rivers  of  fire,  and  the  earth- 
quake shaking  kingdoms,  and  leveling  cities  with  the  ground 
— all  proclaim  the  JMajesty  of  Him,  by  whom  the  elements  of 


56  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

nature  are  arranged  and  directed,  and  seem  to  address  the 
sons  of  men  in  language  like  this  :  "  The  Lord  reigneth,  he 
IS  clothed  with  majesty  ;  at  his  wrath  the  earth  trembles ;  a 
tire  goeth  before  him,  and  burneth  up  his  enemies." — "  Let 
all  the  earth  fear  the  Lord,  let  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  world 
stand  in  awe  of  him." 

There  is  one  reason,  among  others,  why  the  bulk  of  man- 
kind feel  so  little  veneration  of  God,  and  that  is,  that  they 
tieldom  contemplate,  with  fixed  attention,  "  the  operations  of 
his  hands."  If  we  wish  to  cherish  this  sublime  sentiment  in 
our  hearts,  we  must  familiarize  our  minds  to  frequent  excur- 
sions over  all  those  scenes  of  Creation  and  Providence,  which 
the  volume  of  nature,  and  the  volume  of  inspiration  unfold  to 
view.  We  must  endeavour  to  assist  our  conceptions  to  the 
grandeur  of  these  objects,  by  every  discovery  which  has  been, 
or  may  yet  be  made,  and  by  every  mode  of  illustration  by 
which  a  sublime  and  comprehensive  idea  of  the  particular 
object  of  contemplation  may  be  obtained. — If  we  would  wish 
to  acquire  some  definite,  though  imperfect  conception  of  the 
physical  extent  of  the  universe,  our  minds  might  be  assisted 
by  such  illustrations  as  the  following  : — Light  flies  from  the 
sun  with  a  velocity  of  nearly  tw  o  hundred  thousand  miles  in  a 
moment  of  time,  or,  about  1,400,000  times  swifter  than  the 
motion  of  a  cannon  ball :  Suppose  that  one  of  the  highest 
order  of  intelligences  is  endowed  with  a  power  of  rapid  mo- 
tion superior  to  that  of  light,  and  with  a  corresponding  degree 
of  intellectual  energy  ;  that  he  has  been  flying  without  inter- 
mission, from  one  province  of  creation  to  another,  for  six 
thousand  years,  and  will  continue  the  same  rapid  course  for  a 
thousand  millions  of  years  to  come  ;  it  is  highly  probable,  if 
not  absolutely  certain,  that,  at  the  end  of  this  vast  tour,  he 
would  have  advanced  no  farther  than  "  the  suburbs  of  crea- 
tion"— and  that  all  the  magnificent  systems  of  material  and 
intellectual  beings  he  had  surveyed,  during  his  rapid  flight, 
and  for  such  a  length  of  ages,  bear  no  more  proportion  to  the 
whole  Empire  of  Omnipotence,  than  the  smallest  grain  of 
.sand  does  to  all  the  particles  of  matter  of  the  same  size  con- 
tained in  ten  thousand  worlds.  Nor  need  we  entertain  the 
least  fear,  that  the  idea  of  the  extent  of  the  Creator's  power, 
conveyed  by  such  a  representation,  exceeds  the  bounds  of 
reality.  On  the  other  hand,  it  must  fall  almost  infinitely  short 
of  it.     For,  as  the  poet  has  justly  observed— 

"  Can  man  conceive  beyond  what  God  can  do  ?" 

Were  a  seraph,  in  prosecuting  the  tour  of  creation  in  the 
manner  now  stated,  ever  to  arrive  at  a  hmit  beyond  wliich  no. 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY,  67 

farther  displays  of  the  Divinity  could  be  perceived,  the  thought 
would  overwhelm  his  faculties  v/ith  unutterable  anguish  and 
horror :  he  would  feel,  that  he  had  now,  in  some  measure, 
comprehended  all  the  plans  and  operations  of  Omnipotence, 
and  that  no  farther  manifestation  of  the  Divine  glory  remained 
to  be  explored.  But  we  may  rest  assured,  that  this  can  never 
happen  in  the  case  of  any  created  inteUigence.  We  have 
every  reason  to  believe,  both  from  the  nature,  of  an  Infinite 
Being,  and  from  the  vast  extent  of  creation  already  explored, 
that  the  immense  mass  of  material  existence,  and  the  endless 
variety  of  sensitive  and  intellectual  beings  with  which  the  uni- 
verse is  replenished,  are  intended  by  Jehovah,  to  present  to 
his  rational  offspring,  a  shadow,  an  emblem,  or  a  representa- 
tion, (in  so  far  as  finite  extended  existence  can  be  a  repre- 
sentation,) of  the  Infinite  Perfections  of  his  nature,  which 
would  otherwise  have  remained  for  ever  impalpable  to  all 
subordinate  intelligences. 

In  this  manner,  then,  might  w^e  occasionally  exercise  our 
minds  on  the  grand  and  diversified  objects  which  the  universe 
exhibits  ;  and,  in  proportion  as  we  enlarge  the  sphere  of  our 
contemplations,  in  a  similar  proportion  will  our  views  of  God 
himself  be  extended,  and  a  corresponding  sentiment  of  vene- 
ration impressed  upon  the  mind.     For  the  soul  of  man  can- 
not venerate  a  mere  abstract  being,  that  was  never  manifested 
through  a  sensible  medium,  however  many  lofty  terms  may 
be  used  to  describe  his  perfections.     It  venerates  that  Ineffa- 
ble Being,  who  conceals  himself  behind  the  scenes  of  Crea- 
tion, through  the  medium  of  the  visible  displays  he  exhibits  of 
his  Power,  Wisdom,  and  Beneficence,  in  the  Economy  of 
Nature,  and  in  the  Records  of  Revelation.     Before  the  uni- 
verse was  formed,  Jehovah  existed  alone,  possessed  of  every 
attribute  which  he  now  displays.     But,  had  only  one  solitary 
intelligence  been  created,  and   placed  in  the   infinite  void, 
without  a  material  substratum  beneath  and  around  him,  he 
could  never  have  been  animated  with  a  sentiment  of  profound 
veneration  for  his  Creator  ;  because  no  objects  existed  to  ex- 
cite it,  or  to  show,  that  his  Invisible  Maker  was  invested  with 
those  attributes  which  he  is  now  known  to  possess.     Accor- 
dingly, we  find,  in  the  sacred  writings,  that,  when  a  sentiment 
of  reverence  is  demanded  from  the  sons  of  men,  those  sensi- 
ble objects  which  are  calculated  to  excite  the  emotion,  are 
uniformly  exhibited.     "  Fear  ye  not  me  ?   saith  the  Lord. — 
Will  ye  not  tremble  at  my  presence  ?  who  have  placed  the 
sand  for  the  bound  of  the  sea,  by  a  perpetual  decree,  that  it 
cannot  pass  it ;  and  though  the  waves  thereof  toss  themselves, 

5* 


58  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHEH. 

yet  they  cannot  prevail ;  though  they  roar,  yet  can  they  nxDt 
pass  over  it."  "  Who  would  not  fear  thee,  O  King  of  nations  ? 
Thou  art  the  true  God,  and  an  everlasting  King. — Thou  hast 
made  the  earth  by  thy  power,  thou  hast  established  the  world 
by  thy  wisdom,  thou  hast  stretched  out  the  heavens  by  thy  dis- 
cretion. When  thou  utterest  thy  voice  there  is  a  noise  of 
waters  in  the  heavens,  thou  causest  the  vapours  to  ascend 
from  the  ends  of  the  earth,  thou  makest  lightnings  with  rain, 
and  bringest  forth  the  winds  out  of  thy  treasures."* 

But,  however  enlarged  and  venerable  conceptions  of  God 
we  may  derive  from  the  manifestations  of  his  power,  they 
must  fall  infinitely  short  of  what  is  due  to  a  being  of  bound- 
less perfection.  For  there  may  be  attributes  in  the  Divine 
Essence,  of  which  we  cannot  possibly  form  the  least  concep- 
tion— attributes  which  cannot  be  shadowed  forth  or  represent- 
ed by  any  portion  of  the  material  or  intellectual  world  yet  dis- 
covered by  us,  or  by  all  the  mighty  achievements  by  which  hu- 
man redemption  was  effected — attributes  which  have  not  been 
yet  displayed,  in  their  effects,  to  the  highest  orders  of  intelli- 
gent existence.  And,  therefore,  as  that  excellent  philosopher 
and  divine,  the  honorable  Mr.  Boyle,  has  well  observed — 
'•  Our  ideas  of  God,  however  so  great,  will  rather  express  the 
greatness  of  our  veneration,  than  the  Immensity  of  his  Perfec- 
tions ;  and  the  notions  worthy  of  the  most  intelligent  men, 
are  far  short  of  being  worthy  the  incomprehensible  God — the 
brightest  idea  we  can  frame  of  God  being  infinitely  inferior, 
and  no  more  than  a  Parhelion'\  in  respect  of  the  sun ;  for 
though  that  meteor  is  splendid,  and  resembles  the  sun,  yet  it 
resides  in  a  cloud,  and  is  not  only  much  beneath  the  sun  in 
distance,  but  inferior  in  bigness  and  splendor." 

In  short,  were  we  habitually  to  cherish  that  profound  ven- 
eration of  God  which  his  works  are  calculated  to  inspire, 
with  what  humility  would  we  approach  the  presence  of  this 
August  Being !  with  what  emotions  of  awe  would  we  present 
our  adorations  !  and  with  what  reverence  would  we  talk  of 
his  inscrutable  purposes,  and  incomprehensible  operations  ! 
W^e  would  not  talk  about  him,  as  some  writers  have  done,  with 
the  same  ease  and  indifference,  as  a  mathematician  would  talk 

*  Jerem.  x.  7 — 13. 

t  A  Parhelion  or  J\Iock-Sun,  is  a  meteor  in  the  form  of  a  very  bright 
light  appearing  on  one  side  of  the  sun,  and  somewhat  resembling  the  ap- 
pearance of  that  kiminary.  This  phenomenon  is  supposed  to  be  produced 
by  the  refraction  and  reflection  of  the  sun's  rays  from  a  watery  cloud. — 
Sometimes  three  or  four  of  these  parhelia,  all  of  them  bearing  a  certain  re- 
semblance to  the  real  sun,  have  been  seen  at  one  time 


OMNIPOTENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  59 

about  the  properties  of  a  triangle,  or  a  philosopher  about  the 
effects  of  a  mechanical  engine  ;  nor  would  we  treat,  with  a 
spirit  of  levity,  any  of  the  solemn  declarations  of  his  Mord, 
or  the  mighty  movements  of  his  providence.  We  would  be 
ever  ready  to  join  with  ardor  in  the  sublime  devotions  of  the 
inspired  writers,  "  Great  and  marvellous,  are  thy  works.  Lord 
God  Almighty,  just  and  true  are  thy  ways,  thou  King  of 
saints.  Who  would  not  fear  thee,  O  Lord,  and  glorify  thy 
name?  Let  all  the  earth  fear  the  Lord,  let  all  the  inhabitants 
of  the  world  stand  in  awe  of  him." 

Lastly,  the  views  we  have  taken  of  the  omnipotence  and 
grandeur  of  the  Deity  are  calculated  to  inspire  us  with  hope 
and  CONFIDENCE  in  the  prospect  of  that  eternal  existence  u'hich 
lies  before  us.  The  period  of  our  existence  in  this  terrestrial 
scene  will  soon  terminate,  and  those  bodies  through  which  we 
now  hold  a  correspondence  with  the  visible  creation,  crumbled 
into  dust.  The  gradual  decay,  and  the  ultimate  dissolution 
of  human  bodies,  present  a  scene  at  which  reason  stands 
aghast ;  and,  on  a  cursory  survey  of  the  chambers  of  the 
dead,  it  is  apt  to  exclaim,  in  the  language  of  despair,  "  Can 
these  dry  bones  live  ]"  A  thousand  difficulties  crowd  upon  the 
mind  which  appear  repugnant  to  the  idea,  that  "  beauty  shall 
again  spring  oat  of  the  ashes,  and  life  out  of  the  dust."  But, 
when  we  look  abroad  to  the  displays  of  Divine  power  and  in- 
telligence, in  the  wide  expanse  of  Creation^  we  perceive  that 

"Almighty  God 

Has  done  much  more ;  nor  is  his  arm  impaired 
Through  length  of  days. — And  wliat  he  can,  he  will  ; 
His  faithfulness  stands  bound  to  see  it  done." 

We  perceive  that  he  has  created  systems  in  such  vast  pro- 
fusion, that  no  man  can  number  them.  The  Avorlds  every 
moment  under  his  superintendence  and  direction,  are  unques- 
tionably far  more  numerous  than  all  the  human  beings  who 
have  hitherto  existed,  or  will  yet  exist  till  the  close  of  time. 
And,  if  he  has  not  only  arranged  the  general  features  of  each 
of  these  worlds,  and  established  the  physical  laws,  by  which 
its  economy  is  regulated,  but  has  also  arranged  the  diversified 
circumstances,  and  directs  the  minutest  movements  of  the 
myriads  of  sensitive  and  intellectual  existences  it  contains,  we 
ought  never,  for  a  moment,  to  doubt,  that  the  minutest  parti- 
cles of  every  human  body,  however  widely  separated  from 
each  other,  and  mingled  with  other  extraneous  substances,  are 
known  to  him  whose  presence  pervades  all  space  ;  and  that 
all  the  atoms  requisite  for  the  construction  of  the  Resurrection- 
body  will  be  re-assembkd  foy  this  purpose  "  by  the  eaergy  o€ 


60  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

that  mighty  power,  whereby  he  is  able  to  subdue  all  things  to 
himself."  If  we  suppose  that  a  number  of  human  beings, 
amounting  to  three  hundred  thousand  millions,  shall  start  from 
the  grave  into  new  life,  at  the  general  resurrection,  and  that 
the  atoms  of  each  of  these  bodies  are  just  now  under  the 
special  superintendence  of  the  Almighty — and  that,  at  least 
an  equal  number  of  worlds  are  under  his  particular  care  and 
direction — the  exertion  of  power  and  intelligence,  in  the  for- 
mer case,  cannot  be  supposed  to  be  greater  that  what  is  requi- 
site in  the  latter.  To  a  Being  possessed  of  infinite  power, 
conjoined  with  boundless  Intelligence,  the  superintendence  of 
countless  atoms,  and  of  countless  worlds,  is  equally  easy, 
where  no  contradiction  is  implied.  For  as  the  poet  has  well 
observed, — 

"  He  summons  into  being,  with  like  ease, 
A  wliole  creation,  and  a  single  grain." 

And  since  this  subject  tends  to  strengthen  our  hope  of  a  re- 
surrection from  the  dead,  it  is  also  calculated  to  inspire  us  with 
confidence  in  the  prospect  of  those  eternal  scenes  which  will 
burst  upon  the  view,  at  the  dissolution  of  all  terrestrial  things. 
Beyond  the  period  fixed  for  the  conflagration  of  this  world,  "a 
wide  and  unbounded  prospect  lies  before  us  ;"  and  though,  at 
present,  "  shadows,  clouds,  and  darkness  rest  upon  it,"  yet  the 
boundless  magnificence  of  the  Divine  empire  which  science 
has  unfolded,  throws  a  radiance  over  the  scenes  of  futurity, 
which  is  fraught  with  consolation  in  the  view  of  "  the  wreck  of 
matter  and  the  crush  of  worlds."  It  Opens  to  us  a  prospect 
of  perpetual  improvement  in  knowledge  and  felicity  ;  it  pre- 
sents a  field  in  which  the  hunsan  faculties  may  be  for  ever  ex- 
panding, for  ever  contemplating  new  scenes  of  grandeur  rising 
to  the  view,  in  boundless  perspective,  through  an  interminable 
succession  of  existence.  It  convinces  us  that  the  happiness  of 
the  eternal  state  will  not  consist  in  an  unvaried  repetition  of 
the  same  perception  and  enjoyments,  but  that  new  displays  of 
the  Creator's  glory  will  be  continually  bursting  on  the  aston- 
ished mind,  world  without  end.  And  as  we  know  the  same 
beneficence  and  care  which  are  displayed  in  the  arrangement 
of  systems  of  worlds,  are  also  displayed  in  supporting  and 
providing  for  the  smallest  microscopic  emimalculse,  we  have  no 
reason  to  harbor  the  least  fear,  lest  we  should  be  overlooked  in 
the  immensity  of  creation,  or  lost  amidst  the  multiplicity  of 
those  works  among  which  the  Deity  is  incessantly  employed  ; 
for,  as  he  is  Omnipresent  and  Omniscient,  his  care  and  influ- 
ence must  extend  to  every  creature  he  has  formed.     There- 


WISDOM    OF    THE    DEITT.  61 

fore,  though  "  the  elements  shall  melt  with  fervent  heat,  and 
the  earth,  and  all  the  works  therein  be  dissolved,  yet,  we,  ac- 
cording to  his  promise,  look  for  new  heavens  and  a  new  earth, 
wherein  dwelleth  righteousness." 


SECTION  III. 

On  the  Wisdom  and  Intelligence  of  the  Deitf. 

In  surveying  the  system  of  nature  with  a  Christian  and  a 
Philosophic  eye,  it  may  be  considered  in  different  points  of 
view.  It  may  be  viewed  either  as  displaying  the  power  and 
magnificence  of  the  Deity,  in  the  immense  quantity  of  m.atc- 
rials  of  which  it  is  composed,  and  in  the  august  machinery  and 
movements  by  which  its  economy  is  directed  ; — or,  as  mani- 
festing his  Wisdom,  in  the  nice  adaptation  of  every  minute 
circumstance  to  the  end  it  was  intended  to  accomplish  ; — or 
as  illustrating  his  unbounded  beneficence  in  the  provision 
which  is  made  for  the  accommodation  and  happiness  of  the 
numerous  tribes  of  sentient  and  intelligent  beings  it  contains. 
Having,  in  the  preceding  section,  endeavored  to  exhibit  some 
of  those  objects  which  evince  the  Omnipotence  of  Deity,  and 
the  pious  emotions  they  are  calculated  to  excite,  I  shall  now 
offer  a  few  popular  illustrations  of  Divine  Wisdom,  as  display- 
ed in  the  arrangements  of  the  material  world — which  shall 
chiefly  be  confined  to  those  objects  which  are  most  prominent 
and  obvious  to  the  vulgar  eye. 

Wisdom  is  that  perfection  of  an  intelligent  agent,  by  which 
he  is  enabled  to  select  and  employ  the  most  proper  means  in 
order  to  accomplish  a  good  and  important  end.  It  includes  the 
idea  of  knowledge  or  intelligence,  but  may  be  distinguished 
from  it.  Knowledge  is  opposed  to  ignorance,  wisdom  ii  op- 
posed to  folly  or  error  in  conduct.  As  applied  to  God,  it  may 
be  considered  as  comprehending  the  operations  of  his  Omni- 
science and  benevolence,  or,  in  other  words,  his  knowledge  to 
discern,  and  his  disposition  to  choose  those  means  and  ends 
which  are  calculated  to  promote  the  order  and  the  happiness 
of  the  universe. 

The  Wisdom  of  God  is,  doubtless,  displayed  in  every  ar 
rangement  he  has  made  throughout  all  the  provinces  of  his 
immense  and  eternal  kingdom,  however  far  they  may  be  re- 
moved from  the  sphere  of  human  observation.     But  it  is  only 


G2  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

in  those  parts  of  the  system  of  nature  which  he  open  to  our 
particular  investigation,  that  the  traces  of  this  perfection  can 
be  distinctly  perceived.  The  Heavens  declare  the  glory  of 
God's  "Wisdom,  as  well  as  of  his  Power.  The  planetary  sys- 
tem— that  portion  of  the  heavens  with  which  we  are  best  ac- 
quainted— displays  both  the  magnificence  and  the  skill  of  its 
Divine  Author, — in  the  magnitudes,  distances,  revolutions, 
j)roportions,  and  uses  of  the  various  globes  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed, and  in  the  diversified  apparatus  by  which  light  and 
darkness  are  alternately  distributed.  The  sun,  an  immense 
luminous  world,  by  tar  the  largest  body  in  the  system,  is  placed 
in  the  centre.  No  other  position  would  have  suited  tor  an 
equable  distribution  of  illumination  and  heat  through  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  system.  Around  him,  at  different  distances, 
eleven  primary  planets  revolve,  accompanied  with  eighteen 
secondaries,  or  moons, — all  in  majestic  order  and  harmony, 
no  one  interrupting  the  movements  of  another,  but  invariably 
keeping  the  paths  prescribed  them,  and  performing  their  revo- 
lutions in  their  appointed  times.  To  all  these  revolving 
globes,  the  sun  dispenses  motion,  light,  heat,  fertility,  and 
other  unceasing  energies,  for  the  comfort  and  happiness  of 
their  respective  inhabitants — without  which,  perpetual  sterility, 
eternal  winter,  and  eternal  night,  would  reign  over  every  re- 
gion of  our  globe,  and  throuohout  surrounding  worlds. 

The  distance  at  which  the  heavenly  bodies,  particularly  the 
sun,  are  placed  from  the  earth,  is  a  manifest  evidence  of  Di- 
vine Wisdom.  If  the  sun  were  much  nearer  us  than  he  is  at 
present,  the  earth,  as  now  constituted,  would  be  wasted  and 
parched  with  excessive  heat ;  the  waters  would  be  tuj'ned  into 
vapor,  and  the  rivers,  seas,  and  oceans,  would  soon  disappear, 
leavino;  nothing;  behind  them  but  frio;htful  barren  dells  and 
gloomy  caverns  ;  vegetation  would  completely  cease,  and  the 
tribes  of  animated  nature  languish  and  die.  On  the  other 
hand,  were  the  sun  much  farther  distant  than  he  now  is,  or 
were  his  bidk,  or  the  influence  of  his  rays,  diminished  one  half 
of  what  they  now  are,  the  land  and  the  ocean  would  soon  be- 
come one  frozen  mass,  and  universal  desolation  and  sterility 
would  overspread  the  fair  face  of  nature,  and,  instead  of  a 
pleasant  and  comfortable  abode,  our  globe  would  become  a 
frightful  desert,  a  state  of  misery  and  perpetual  punishment.* 

*  It  forms  no  objection  to  these  remarks,  that  caloric,  or  the  matter  of 
heat,  does  not  altogether  dejiend  upon  the  direct  influence  of  the  solar  rays. 
The  substance  of  caloric  may  be  cliiefly  connected  with  the  constitution 
of  the  globe  wc  inhabit.  But  still,  it  is  quite  certain,  that  the  earth,  c* 
presently  consliluted,  would  suffer  effects  most  disastrous  to  sentient  bein^j 


WISDOM    OF    THE    DEITY.  63 

But  he»  ein  is  the  wisdom  of  God  displayed,  that  he  has  formed 
the  siui  of  such  a  determinate  size,  and  placed  it  at  such  a 
convenient  distance,  as  not  to  annoy,  but  to  refresh  and  cheer 
us,  and  to  enliven  the  soil  with  its  genial  influence  ;  so  that 
we  plainly  perceive,  to  use  the  language  of  the  prophet,  that 
"  He  hath  established  the  world  by  his  wisdom,  and  stretched 
out  the  heavens  by  his  understanding." 

The  rotation  of  the  several  planetary  globes  around  their 
axis,  to  produce  the  alternate  succession  of  day  and  night, 
strikingly  demonstrates  the  wisdom  and  benevolence  of  their 
great  Author.  Were  the  earth  and  the  other  planetary  worlds 
destitute  of  a  diurnal  motion,  only  one  half  of  their  surfaces 
could  be  inhabited,  and  the  other  half  would  remain  a  dark  and 
cheerless  desert.  The  sun  would  be  the  only  heavenly  orb 
which  would  be  recognized  by  the  inhabitants  of  each  respect- 
ive world,  as  existing  in  the  universe,  and  that  scene  of  gran- 
deur which  night  unfolds  in  the  boundless  expanse  of  the  sky, 
would  be  for  ever  veiled  from  their  view.  For,  it  appears  to 
be  one  grand  design  of  the  Creator,  in  giving  these  bodies  a 
diurnal  motion,  not  only  to  cheer  their  inhabitants  with  light 
and  warmth,  and  the  gay  colouring  produced  by  the  solar 
rays  ;  but  also  to  open  to  them  a  prospect  of  other  portions  of 
his  vast  dommions,  which  are  dispersed  in  endless  variety 
throughout  the  illimitable  regions  of  space  ;  in  order  that  they 
may  acquire  a  more  sublime  impression  of  the  glory  of  his 
kingdom,  and  of  his  eternal  Power  and  Godhead.  But,  v^ere 
perpetual  day  to  irradiate  the  planets,  it  would  throw  an  eter- 
nal and  impenetrable  veil  over  the  glories  of  the  sky,  behind 
which,  the  magnificent  operations  of  Jehovah's  power  would 
be,  in  a  great  measure,  concealed.  It  is  this  circumstance 
which  we  should  consider  as  the  principal  reason  why  a  rota- 
tory motion  has  been  impressed  on  the  planetary  globes  ;  and 
not  merely  that  a  curtain  of  darkness  might  be  thrown  around 
their  mhabitants,  during  the  repose  of  sleep,  as  in  the  world  in 
which  we  dwell.  For,  in  some  of  the  other  planetary  worlds 
belonging  to  our  system,  the  intelligent  beings  with  which  they 
are  peopled,  may  stand  in  no  need  of  that  nocturnal  repose 
which  is  necessary  for  man  ;  their  physical  powers  may  be  in- 
capable of  being  impaired,  and  their  mental  energies  may  be 

were  it  removed  mncli  nearer  to,  or  much  farther  from  the  ceniral  kmiinary. 
Those  planets  which  are  removed  several  hundreds  of  millions  of  miles 
farther  from  the  sun  than  our  globe,  may  possibly  experience  a  des-ree  of 
heat  much  greater  than  ours  ;  but,  in  this  case,  the  constitution  of  the  solid 
parts  of  these  globes,  and  of  their  surrounding  atmospheres,  must  be  very 
liifTerent  from  what  obtains  in  tlie  physical  arrangements  of  our  globe. 


64  THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

in  perpetual  exercise.  And  in  some  of  those  bodies  which 
are  surrounded  with  an  assemblage  of  rings  and  moons,  as  the 
planet  Saturn,  the  diversified  grandeur  of  their  celestial  phe- 
nomena, in  the  absence  of  the  sun,  may  present  a  scene  of 
conten)plation  and  enjoyment,  far  more  interesting  than  all 
the  splendours  of  their  noon-day.  Besides,  had  the  planets 
no  motion  round  their  axis,  and  were  both  their  hemispheres 
supposed  to  be  peopled  with  inhabitants,  their  physical  state 
and  enjoyments  would  be  as  opposite  to  each  other,  as  if  they 
lived  under  the  government  of  two  distinct  independent  be- 
ings. While  the  one  class  was  basking  under  the  splendors 
of  perpetual  day,  the  other  would  be  involved  in  all  the  horrors 
of  an  everlasting  night.  While  the  one  hemisphere  would  be 
parched  with  excessive  heat,  the  other  would  be  bound  in  the 
fetters  of  eternal  ice  ;  and,  in  such  a  globe  as  ours,  the  mo- 
tion of  the  tides,  the  ascent  of  the  vapors,  the  currents  of  the 
atmosphere,  the  course  of  the  winds,  the  benign  influences  of 
the  rains  and  dews,  and  a  thousand  other  movements  which 
produce  so  many  salutary  and  beneficial  effects  would  be 
completely  deranged.  Hence  we  find  that  in  all  the  planetary 
bodies  on  which  observations  can  conveniently  be  made,  a 
rotatory  motion  actually  exists,  in  the  secondary,  as  well  as  in 
the  primary  planets,  and  even  in  the  sun  himself,  the  centra, 
and  the  mover  of  the  whole  :  in  which  an-angement  of  the  Al- 
mighty Creator,  the  evidences  of  wisdom  and  design  are 
strikingly  apparent. 

This  amazing  scene  of  Divine  workmanship  and  skill, 
which  the  planetary  system  exhibits,  we  have  reason  to  be- 
lieve, is  multiplied,  and  diversified,  to  an  indefinite  extent, 
throughout  all  the  other  systems  of  creation,  displaying  to  the 
intelligences  of  every  region,  "  the  manifold  wisdom  of -God." 
For  there  can  be  no  question,  that  every  star  we  now  behold, 
either  by  the  naked  eye,  or  by  the  help  of  a  telescope,  is  the 
centre  of  a  system  of  planetary  worlds,  where  the  agency  of 
God,  and  his  unsearchable  wisdom,  may  be  endlessly  varied, 
and,  perhaps,  more  strikingly  displayed  than  even  in  the  sys- 
tem to  which  we  belong.  These  vast  globes  of  light  could 
never  have  been  designed  merely  to  shed  a  few  glimmering 
rays  on  our  far  distant  world  ;  for  the  ten  thousandth  part  of 
them  has  never  yet  been  seen  by  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth, 
since  the  Mosaic  creation,  except  by  a  few  astronomers  of 
the  past  and  the  present  age  ;  and  the  light  of  many  of  them, 
in  all  pro!)al)ility,  has  never  yet  reached  us  ;  aud  perhaps 
never  will,  till  the  period  of  "  the  consummation  of  all  terres- 
trial things."     They  were  not  made  in  vain  ;  for  such  a  sup- 


THE    WISDOM    OF    THE    DEITY.  65 

position  would  be  inconsistent  with  every  idea  we  can  form  of 
the  attributes  of  a  Being  of  infinite  perfection.  They  were 
not  intended  merely  to  diversify  the  voids  of  infinite  space 
with  a  useless  splendor,  which  has  no  relation  to  intellectual 
natures  ;  for  this  would  give  us  a  most  distorted  and  inconsist- 
ent idea  of  the  character  of  Him  who  is  "  the  only  wise  God  ;" 
and  we  are  told,  by  an  authority  which  cannot  be  questioned, 
that  "  by  his  wisdom  he  made  the  heavens,  and  stretched  them 
out  by  his  understanding."  The  only  rational  conclusion, 
therefore,  which  can  be  deduced,  is,  that  they  are  destined  to 
distribute  illumination  and  splendor,  vivifying  influence,  and 
happiness,  among  incalculable  numbers  of  intelhgent  beings, 
of  various  degrees  of  physical,  moral,  and  intellectual  excel- 
lence. And,  wherever  the  Creator  has  exerted  his  Almighty 
energies  in  the  production  of  sensitive  and  intellectual  natures, 
we  may  rest  assured,  that  there  also,  his  infinite  wisdom  and 
intelligence,  in  an  endless  variety  of  arrangements,  contriv- 
ances, and  adaptations,  are  unceasingly  displayed. 

But,  after  all,  whatever  evidences  of  contrivance  and  design 
the  celestial  globes  may  exhibit,  it  is  not  in  the  heavens  that 
the  most  striking  displays  of  Divine  ?mc/o?n  can  be  traced  by 
the  inhabitants  of  our  world.  It  is  only  a  few  general  relations 
and  adaptations  that  can  be  distinctly  perceived  among  the  orbs 
of  the  firmament ;  though,  in  so  far  as  we  are  able  to  trace  the 
purposes  which  they  subserve,  the  marks  of  beauty,  order,  and 
design,  are  uniformly  apparent.  But  we  are  placed  at  too 
great  a  distance  from  the  orbs  of  heaven,  to  be  able  to  inves- 
tigate the  particular  arrangements  which  enter  into  the  physi- 
cal and  moral  economy  of  the  celestial  worlds.  Were  we 
transported  to  the  surface  of  the  planet  Jupiter,  and  had  an 
opportunity  of  surveying,  at  leisure,  the  regions  of  that  vast 
globe,  and  the  tribes  of  sensitive  and  intellectual  existence 
which  compose  its  population — of  contemplating  the  relations 
of  its  moons  to  the  pleasure  and  comfort  of  its  inhabitants — 
the  constitution  of  its  atmosphere  as  to  its  reflective  and  re- 
fractive powers,  in  producing  a  degree  of  illumination  to  com- 
pensate for  the  great  distance  of  that  planet  from  the  sun — its 
adaptation  to  the  functions  of  animal  life — the  construction  of 
the  visual  organs  of  its  inhabitants,  and  the  degree  of  sensi- 
bihty  they  possess  corresponding  to  the  quantity  of  light  re- 
ceived from  the  sun — the  temperature  of  the  surface  and  atmo- 
sphere of  this  globe  corresponding  to  its  distance  from  the  cen- 
tral source  of  heat,  and  to  the  physical  constitution  of  sensi- 
tive beings — in  short,  could  we  investigate  the  relations  which 
inanimate  nature,  in  all  its  varieties  and  sublimities,  bears  to 

6 


66  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

the  necessities  -and  the  hapi)iQess  of  the  animated  existences 
that  traverse  its  diiferent  regions,  we  should,  doubtless,  behold 
a  scene  of  Divine  ^Visdoni  and  intelligence,  far  more  admira- 
ble and  astonishing  than  even  that  which  is  exhibited  in  our 
sublunary  world. — But  since  it  is  impossible  for  us  to  investi- 
gate the  economy  of  other  worlds,  while  we  are  chained  down 
to  this  terrestrial  sphere,  we  must  direct  our  attention  to  those 
arrangements  and  contrivances  in  the  constitution  of  our  own 
globe,  which  lie  open  to  our  particular  inspection,  in  order  lo 
perceive  more  distinctly  the  benevolent  designs  of  Him  "  in 
whom  we  live  and  move,  and  have  our  being."  And  here  an 
attentive  observer  will  find,  in  almost  every  object,  when  min- 
utely examined,  a  display  of  goodness  and  intelligence,  which 
will  constrain  him  to  exclaim,  "  0  the  depth  of  the  riches  both 
of  the  wisdom  and  the  knowledge  of  God." 

Wisdom,  considered  as  consisting  in  contrivance,  or  the  se- 
lection of  the  most  proper  means  in  order  to  accomplish  an 
important  end,  may  be  exemplified  and  illustrated  in  a  variety 
of  familiar  objects  in  the  scene  of  nature. 

The  earth  on  which  we  tread,  was  evidently  intended  by  the 
Creator  to  support  man  and  other  animals,  along  with  their 
habitations,  and  to  furnish  those  vegetable  productions  which 
are  necessary  for  their  subsistence ;  and,  accordingly,  he  has 
given  it  that  exact  degree  of  consistency  which  is  requisite 
for  these  purposes.  Were  it  much  harder  than  it  now  is ; 
were  it,  for  example,  as  dense  as  a  rock,  it  would  be  incapable 
of  cultivation,  and  vegetables  could  not  be  produced  from  its 
surface.  Were  it  softer,  it  would  be  insufficient  to  support  us, 
and  we  should  sink  at  every  step,  like  a  person  walking  in  a 
quagmire.  Had  this  circumstance  not  been  attended  to  in  its 
formation,  the  earth  would  have  been  rendered  useless  as  a 
habitable  world,  for  all  those  animated  beings  which  now  trav- 
erse its  surface.  The  exact  adjustment  of  the  solid  parts  of 
our  globe  to  the  nature  and  necessities  of  the  beings  which 
inhabit  it,  is,  therefore,  an  instance,  and  an  evidence  of  Wis- 
dom. 

The  dipersitij  of  surface  which  it  every  where  presents,  in 
the  mountains  and  vales  with  which  it  is  variegated,  indicates 
the  same  benevolent  contrivance  and  design.  If  the  earth 
were  divested  of  its  mountains,  and  its  surface  every  where 
uniformly  smooth,  there  woidd  be  no  rivers,  springs,  or  foun- 
tains ;  for  water  can  flow  only  from  a  higher  to  a  lower  place; 
the  vegetable  tribes  would  droop  and  languish;  man  and  other 
animals  would  be  deprived  of  what  is  necessary  for  their  exis- 
tence and  comfort ;   we  should  be  destitute  of  many  useful 


MOUNTAINS.  67 

stones,  minerals,  plants,  and  trees,  which  are  now  produced 
on  the  surface,  and  in  the  interior  of  mountains  ;  the  sea  itself 
would  become  a  stagnant  marsh,  or  overflow  the  land ;  and  the 
whole  surface  of  nature  in  our  terrestrial  sphere,  would  present 
an  unvaried  scene  of  dull  uniformity.     Those  picturesque  and 
sublime  scenes  which  fire  the  imagination  of  the  poet,  and  which 
render  mountainous  districts  so  pleasing  to  the  philosophic  tra- 
veller, would  be  completely  withdrawn  ;  and  all  around,  when 
compared  with  such  diversified  landscapes,  would  appear  as 
fatiguing  to  the  eye  as  the  vast  solitudes  of  the  Arabian  de- 
serts, or  the  dull  monotony  of  the  ocean.    But  in  consequence 
of  the  admirable  distribution  of  hills  and  mountains  over  the 
surface  of  our  globe,  a  variety  of  useful  and  ornamental  effects 
is  produced.      Their  lofty  summits  are  destined  by  providence 
to  arrest  the  vapors  which  float  in  the  regions  of  the  air ;  their 
internal  cavities  form  so  many  spacious  basins  for  the  recep- 
tion of  waters  distilled  from  the  clouds  ;  they  are  the  original 
sources  of  springs  and  rivers,  which  water  and  fertilize  the 
earth  ;  they  form  immense  magazines,  in  which  are  deposited 
stones,  metals,  and  minerals,  which  are  of  so  essential  service 
in  the  arts  that  promote  the  comfort  of  human  life ;  they  serve 
for  the  production  of  a  vast  variety  of  herbs  and  trees  ;  they 
arrest  the  progress  of  storms  and  tempests  ;  they  afford  shel- 
ter and  entertainm^ent  to  various  animals  which  minister  to  the 
wants  of  mankind  :     In  a  word,  they  adorn  and  embelUsh  the 
face  of  nature — they  form  thousands  of  sublime  and  beautiful 
landscapes,  and  afford  from  their  summits  the  most  delightful 
orospects  of  the  plains  below.     All  these  circumstances  de- 
monstrate the  consummate  wisdom  of  the  Great  Architect  of 
lature,  and  lead  us  to  conclude,  that  mountains,  so  far  from 
■)eing  rude  excrescences  of  nature,  as  some  have  asserted, 
^brrn  an  essential  part  in  the  constitution,  not  only  of  our  globe. 
Out  of  all  habitable  worlds.    And  this  conclusion  is  confirmed, 
so  far  as  our  observation  extends,  with  regard  to  the  moon,  and 
several  of  the  planetary  bodies  which  belong  to  our  system, 
whose  surfaces  are  found  to  be  diversified  by  sublime  ramifi- 
cations of  mountain  scenery  ;   which  circumstance  forms  one 
collateral  proof,  among  many  others,  that  they  are  the  abodes 
of  sentient  and  intellectual  beings. 

Again,  the  coloring  which  is  spread  over  the  face  of  nature 
indicates  the  wisdom  of  the  Deity.  It  is  essential  to  the  pre- 
sent mode  of  our  existence,  and  it  was  evidently  intended  by 
the  Creator,  that  we  should  be  enabled  easily  to  recognize  the 
forms  and  properties  of  the  various  objects  with  which  we  are 
surrounded.   But  were  the  obje.cts  of  nature  destitute  of  color, 


68  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

or  were  the  same  unvaried  hue  spread  over  the  face  of  crea- 
tion, we  should  be  destitute  of  all  the  entertainments  of  vision, 
and  be  at  a  loss  to  distinguish  one  object  from  another.  We 
should  be  unable  to  distinguish  rugged  precipices  from  fruitful 
hills  ;  naked  rocks  from  human  habitations  ;  the  trees  from 
the  hills  that  bear  them,  and  the  tilled  from  the  untilled  lands. 
"  We  should  hesitate  to  pronounce  whether  an  adjacent  en- 
closure contain  a  piece  of  pasturage,  a  plot  of  arable  land,  or  a 
field  of  corn  ;  and  it  would  require  a  little  journey,  and  a  mi- 
nute investigation,  to  determine  such  a  point.  We  could  not 
determine  whether  the  first  person  we  met  were  a  soldier  in 
his  regimentals,  or  a  swain  in  his  Sunday  suit ;  a  bride  in  her 
ornaments,  or  a  widow  in  her  weeds."  Such  would  have 
been  the  aspect  of  nature,  and  such  the  inconveniences  to 
which  we  should  have  been  subjected,  had  God  allowed  us 
light,  without  the  distinction  of  colors.  We  could  have  dis- 
tinguished objects  only  by  intricate  trains  of  reasoning,  and  by 
circimistances  of  time,  place,  and  relative  position.  And,  to 
what  delays  and  perplexities  should  we  have  been  reduced, 
had  we  been  obliged  every  moment  to  distinguish  one  thing 
from  another  by  reasoning  !  Our  whole  life  must  then  have 
been  employed,  rather  in  study  than  in  action  ;  and,  after  all, 
we  must  have  remained  in  eternal  uncertainty  as  to  many 
things,  which  are  now  quite  obvious  to  every  one  as  soon  as 
he  opens  his  eyes.  We  could  neither  have  communicated  our 
thoughts  by  writing,  nor  have  derived  instruction  from  others 
through  the  medium  of  books  :  so  that  we  should  now  have 
been  almost  as  ignorant  of  the  transactions  of  past  ages,  as 
we  are  of  the  events  which  are  passing  in  the  planetary 
worlds ;  and,  consequently,  we  could  never  have  enjoyed  a 
written  revelation  from  heaven,  nor  any  other  infallible  guide 
to  direct  us  in  the  path  to  happiness,  if  the  Almighty  had  not 
distinguished  the  rays  of  light,  and  painted  the  objects  around 
us  with  a  diversity  of  colors, — so  essentially  connected  are  the 
minutest,  and  the  most  magnificent  works  of  Deity.  But 
now,  in  the  present  constitution  of  things,  color  characterizes 
the  class  to  which  every  individual  belongs,  and  indicates, 
upon  the  first  inspection,  its  respective  quality.  Every  object 
wears  its  peculiar  livery,  and  has  a  distinguishing  mark  by 
which  it  is  characterized. 

The  different  hues  which  are  spread  over  the  scenery  of  the 
world,  are  also  highly  ornamental  to  the  face  of  nature,  and 
afford  a  variety  of  pleasures  to  the  eye  and  the  imagination. 
It  is  this  circumstance  which  adds  a  charm  to  the  fields,  the 
valleys,  and  the  hills,  the  lofty  moimtain,  the  winding  rivor^ 


COLORS.  69 

and  the  expansive  lake  ;  and  which  gives  a  splendor  and 
sublimity  to  the  capacious  vault  of  heaven.  Color  is,  there- 
fore, an  essential  requisite  to  every  world  inhabited  by  sensi- 
tive beings  ;  and  we  know,  that  provision  has  been  made  for 
diffusing  it  throughout  all  the  globes  which  may  exist  in  the 
distant  regions  which  our  telescopes  have  penetrated  ;  for  the 
hght  which  radiates  from  the  most  distant  stars  is  capable  of 
being  separated  into  the  prismatic  colors,  similar  to  those 
which  are  produced  by  the  solar  rays  ;  which  furnishes  a  pre- 
sumptive proof  that  they  are  intended  to  accomplish  designs 
m  their  respective  spheres  analogous  to  those  which  light  sub- 
serves in  our  terrestrial  habitation, — or,  in  other  words,  that 
they  are  destined  to  convey  to  the  minds  of  sentient  beings, 
impressions  of  light  and  color,  and,  consequently,  beings  sus- 
ceptible of  such  impressions  must  reside  within  the  sphere,  or 
more  immediate  influence  of  these  far  distant  orbs. 

The  same  benev6lent  design  is  apparent  in  the  general  color 
which  prevails  throughout  the  scent  of  sublunanj  nature.  Had 
the  fields  been  clothed  with  hues  of  a  deep  red,  or  a  brilliant 
white,  the  eye  would  have  been  dazzled  with  the  splendor  of 
their  aspect.  Had  a  dark-blue,  or  a  black  color  generally 
prevailed,  it  would  have  cast  a  universal  gloom  over  the  face 
of  nature.  But  an  agreeable  green  holds  the  medium  between 
these  two  extremes,  equally  remote  from  a  dismal  gloom  and 
excessive  splendor,  and  bears  such  a  relation  to  the  structure 
of  the  eye,  that  it  refreshes,  instead  of  tiring  it,  and  supports, 
instead  of  diminishing  its  force.  At  the  same  time,  though 
one  general  color  prevails  over  the  landscape  of  the  earth,  it  is 
diversified  by  an  admirable  variety  of  shades,  so  that  every 
individual  object  in  the  vegetable  world  can  be  accurately  dis- 
tinguished from  another  ;  thus  producing  a  beautiful  and  varie- 
gated appearance  over  the  whole  scenery  of  nature.  "  Who 
sees  not  in  all  these  things,  that  the  hand  of  the  Lord  hath 
wrought  this  ?"' 

If  from  the  earth  we  turn  our  attention  to  the  waters,  we 
shall  perceive  similar  traces  of  the  exquisite  wisdom  and  skill 
of  the  Author  of  nature.  Water  is  one  of  the  most  essential 
elementary  parts  in  the  constitution  of  our  globe,  without  which 
the  various  tribes  of  beings  which  now  people  it  could  not  exist. 
It  supplies  a  necessary  beverage  to  man,  and  to  all  the  animals 
that  people  the  earth  and  the  air.  It  forms  a  solvent  for  a 
great  variety  of  solid  bodies  ;  it  is  the  element  in  which  an 
infinitude  of  organized  beings  pass  their  existence  ;  it  acts  an 
important  part  in  conveying  life  and  nourishment  to  all  the 
tribes  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  and  gives  salubrity  to  the 

6* 


70  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

atmospherical  regions.  Collected  in  immense  masses  in  the 
basins  of  the  sea,  it  serves  as  a  vehicle  for  ships,  and  as  a  me- 
dium of  communication  between  people  of  the  most  distant 
lands.  Carried  along  with  a  progressive  motion  over  the  beds 
of  streams  and  of  rivers,  it  gives  a  brisk  impulse  to  the  air, 
and  prevents  the  unwholesome  stagnation  of  vapors ;  it  re- 
ceives the  filth  of  populous  cities,  and  rids  them  of  a  thousand 
nuisances.  By  its  impulsion  it  becomes  the  mover  of  a  mul- 
titude of  machines  ;  and,  wheii  rarified  into  steam,  it  is  trans 
formed  into  one  of  the  most  powerful  and  useful  agents  under 
the  dominion  of  man.  All  which  beneficial  effects  entirely 
depend  on  the  exact  degree  of  density,  or  specific  gravity, 
which  the  Creator  has  given  to  its  constituent  parts.  Had  it 
been  much  more  rarified  than  it  is,  it  would  have  been  alto- 
gether unfit  to  answer  the  purposes  now  specified  ;  the  whole 
face  of  the  earth  would  have  been  a  dry  and  barren  waste  ; 
vegetable  nature  could  not  have  been  nourished  ;  our  floating 
edifices  could  not  have  been  supported ;  the  lightest  bodies 
would  have  sunk,  and  all  regular  intercourse  with  distant 
nations  would  have  been  prevented.  On  the  other  hand,  had 
its  parts  been  much  denser  than  they  are ;  for  example,  had 
they  been  of  the  consistency  of  a  thin  jelly,  similar  disastrous 
effects  would  have  inevitably  followed  ;  no  ships  could  have 
ploughed  the  ocean  ;  no  refreshing  beverage  would  have  been 
supplied  to  the  animal  tribes  ;  the  absorbent  vessels  of  trees, 
herbs  and  flowers,  would  have  been  unable  to  imbibe  the 
moisture  requisite  for  their  nourishment ;  and  we  should  thus 
have  been  deprived  of  all  the  beneficial  effects  we  now  derive 
from  the  use  of  that  liquid  element,  and  of  all  the  diversified 
scenery  of  the  vegetable  world.  But  the  configuration  and 
consistency  of  its  parts  are  so  nicely  adjusted  to  the  constitu- 
tion of  the  other  elements,  and  to  the  wants  of  the  sensitive 
and  vegetable  tribes,  as  exactly  to  subserve  the  ends  intended 
111  the  system  of  nature. 

Water  has  been  ascertained  to  be  a  compound  body  formed 
by  the  union  of  two  different  kinds  of  air — oxygen  and  hydro- 
gen. It  has  the  property  of  becoming,  in  certain  cases,  much 
lighter  than  air ;  though,  in  its  natural  liquid  state,  it  is  800 
times  heavier  than  that  fluid ;  and  has  also  the  property  of 
afterwards  resuming  its  natural  weight.  Were  it  not  for  this 
property  evaporation  could  not  be  produced  ;  and,  conse- 
quently, no  clouds,  rain,  nor  dew,  could  be  formed,  to  water 
and  fertilize  the  different  regions  of  the  earth.  But,  in  con- 
sequence of  this  wonderful  property,  the  ocean  becomes  an 
inexhaustible  cistern  to  our  world.     From  its  expansive  sur 


WATERS. 


71 


face  are  exhaled  those  vapors  which  supply  the  rivers,  and 
nourish  the  vegetable  productions  of  every  land.  "  The  air 
and  the  sun,"  says  an  elegant  writer,  "  constitute  the  mighty 
engine  which  works  without  intermission  to  raise  the  liquid 
treasures  ;  while  the  clouds  serve  as  so  many  aqueducts  to 
convey  them  along  the  atmosphere,  and  distribute  them,  at 
seasonable  periods,  and  in  regular  proportions,  through  all  the 
regions  of  the  globe." 

Notwithstanding  the  properties  now  stated,  motion  was  still 
requisite^  to  ensure  all  the  advantages  we  now  derive  from  the 
liquid  element.  Had  the  whole  mass  of  waters  been  in  a 
stagnant  state,  a  thousand  inconveniences  and  disastrous 
consequences  would  have  inevitably  ensued.  But  the  All 
Wise  Creator  has  impressed  upon  its  various  masses  a  circu- 
lating motion,  which  preserves  its  purity,  and  widely  extends 
its  beneficial  influence.  The  rill^s  pour  their  liquid  stores  into 
the  rivers  ;  the  rivers  roll  their  watery  treasures  into  the 
ocean  ;  the  waters  of  the  ocean,  by  a  libratory  motion,  roll 
backwards  and  forwards  every  twelve  hours,  and,  by  means  of 
currents,  and  the  force  of  winds,  are  kept  in  constant  agitation. 
By  the  solar  heat,  a  portion  of  these  waters  is  carried  up  into 
the  atmosphere,  and,  in  the  form  of  clouds,  is  conveyed  by  the 
winds  over  various  regions  ;  till,  at  last,  it  descends  in  rain 
and  dew,  to  supply  the  sprii;gs  "  which  run  among  the  hills." 
So  that  there  is  a  constant  motion  and  circulation  of  the  watery 
element,  that  it  may  serve  as  an  agent  for  carrying  forward  the 
various  processes  of  nature,  and  for  ministering  to  the  wants 
of  man  and  beast. 

In  fine,  were  the  waters  in  a  state  of  perpetual  stagnation, 
the  filth  of  populous  cities  would  be  accumulated  to  a  most 
unwholesome  degree  ;  the  air  would  be  filled  with  putrid  ex- 
halations, and  the  vegetable  tribes  would  languish  and  die. 
Were  they  deprived  of  the  property  of  being  evaporated,  (in 
which  state  they  occupy  a  space  1400  times  greater  than  in 
their  liquid  state,)  rain  and  dew  could  never  be  produced,  and 
the  earth  would  be  turned  into  "  a  dry  and  parched  wilder- 
ness ;"  neither  grass  nor  corn  could  be  sufficiently  dried  to 
lay  up  for  use ;  our  clothes^  when  washed,  could  never  he  dried ; 
and  a  variety  of  common  operations,  which  now  conduce  to 
our  convenience  and  comfort,  could  never  be  carried  on. 
But  the  infinite  wisdom  of  the  Creator,  foreseeing  all  the 
effects  which  can  possibly  arise  from  these  principles  of  na- 
ture, has  effectually  provided  against  such  disasters,  by  arrang- 
ing all  things,  in  number,  weight,  and  measure,  to  subserve  the 


72  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

beneficial  ends  for  which  they  were  ordained.  "  He  causetfo 
the  vapors  to  ascend  from  the  ends  of  the  earth  ;  he  sendeth 
the  springs  into  the  valleys,  which  run  among  the  hills.  They 
give  drink  to  every  beast  of  the  field  ;  the  wild  asses  quench 
their  thirst.  By  them  the  fowls  of  heaven  are  refreshed,  which 
sing  among  the  branches.  He  watereth  the  hills  from  his 
chambers,  and  the  earth  is  satisfied  with  the  fruit  of  his 
works." 

Let  us  now  attend  to  the  atmosphere,  in  the  constitution  of 
which  the  wisdom  of  God  is  no  less  conspicuous  than  in  the 
other  departments  of  nature. 

The  atmosphere  is  one  of  the  most  essential  appendages  to 
the  globe  we  inhabit,  and  exhibits  a  most  striking  scene  of 
Divine  skill  and  omnipotence.  The  term  atmosphere  is  ap- 
plied to  the  whole  mass  of  fluids,  consisting  of  air,  vapors, 
electric  fluid,  and  other  matters,  which  surround  the  earth  to  a 
certain  height.  This  mass  of  fluid  matter  gravitates  to  the 
earth,  revolves  with  it  in  its  diurnal  rotation,  and  is  carried 
along  with  it  in  its  course  rouncl  the  sun  every  year.  It  has 
been  computed  to  extend  about  45  miles  above  the  earth's 
surface,  and  it  presses  on  the  earth  with  a  force  proportioned 
to  its  height  and  density.  From  experiments  made  by  the 
barometer,  it  has  been  ascertained,  that  it  presses  with  a 
weight  of  about  15  pounds  on  every  square  inch  of  the  earth's 
surface  ;  and,  therefore,  its  pressure  on  the  body  of  a  middle- 
sized  man,  is  equal  to  about  32,000  lbs.  or  14  tons  avoirdu- 
pois, a  pressure  which  would  be  insupportable,  and  even  fatal, 
were  it  not  equal  in  every  part,  and  counterbalanced  by  the 
spring  of  the  air  within  us.  The  pressure  of  the  whole  atmos- 
phere upon  the  earth,  is  computed  to  be  equivalent  to  that  of 
a  globe  of  lead  60  miles  in  diameter,  or  about  5,000,000,000,- 
000,000  tons  ;  that  is,  the  whole  mass  of  air  which  surrounds 
the  globe,  compresses  the  earth  with  a  force  or  power  equal 
to  that  of  jive  thousand  millions  of  millions  of  tons.*  This 
amazing  pressure  is,  however,  essentially  necessary  for  the 
preservation  of  the  present  constitution  of  our  globe,  and  of 
the  animated  beings  which  dwell  on  its  surface.  It  prevents 
the  heat  of  the  sun  from  converting  water,  and  all  other  fluids 
on  the  face  of  the  earth,  into  vapor  ;  and  preserves  the  ves- 
sels of  all  organized  beings  in  due  tone  and  vigor.  Were  the 
atmospherical  pressure  entirely  removed,  the  elastic  fluids 
contained  in  the  finer  vessels  of  men  and  other  animals,  would 

*  See  Appendix,  No.  IL 


I  ATMOSPHERE.  To 

inevitably  burst  them,  and  life  would  become  extinct;*  and 
,  most  of  the  substances  on  the  face  of  the  earth,  particularly 
liquids,  would  be  dissipated  into  vapor. 

The  atmosphere  is  now  ascertained  to  be  a  compound  sub- 
stance, formed  of  two  very  different  ingredients,  termed  oxy- 
gen and  nitrogen  gas.  Of  100  measures  of  atmospheric  air, 
21  are  oxygen,  and  79  nitrogen.  The  one,  namely,  oxygen, 
is  the  principle  of  combustion,  and  the  vehicle  of  heat,  and  is 
absolutely  necessary  for  the  support  of  animal  life,  and  is  the 
most  powerful  and  energetic  agent  in  nature.  The  other,  is 
altogether  incapable  of  supporting  either  flame  or  animal  life. 
Were  we  to  breathe  oxygen  air,  without  any  mixture  or  alloy, 
our  animal  spirits  would  be  raised,  and  the  fluids  in  our  bodies 
would  circulate  with  greater  rapidity  ;  but  we  should  soon  in- 
fallibly perish  by  the  rapid  and  unnatural  accumulation  of 
':  heat  in  the  animal  frame.  If  the  nitrogen  were  extracted 
from  the  air,  and  the  whole  atmosphere  contained  nothing  but 
:  oxygen,  or  vital  air,  combustion  would  not  proceed  in  that 
I  gradual  manner  which  it  now  does,  but  with  the  most  dreadful 
and  irresistible  rapidity  :  not  only  wood  and  coals,  and  other 
substances  now  used  for  fuel,  but  even  stones,  iron,  and  other 
metallic  substances,  would  blaze  with  a  rapidity  which  would 
carry  destruction  through  the  whole  expanse  of  nature.  If 
even  the  proportions  of  the  two  airs  were  materially  altered,  a 
variety  of  pernicious  effects  would  instantly  be  produced.  If 
the  oxygen  were  less  in  quantity  than  it  now  is,  fire  would  lose 
its  strength,  candles  would  not  diffuse  a  sufficient  light,  and 
animals  would  perform  their  vital  functions  with  the  utmost 
difficulty  and  pain.  On  the  other  hand,  were  the  nitrogen 
diminished,  and  the  oxygen  increased,  the  air  taken  in  by  res- 
piration would  be  more  stimulent,  and  the  circulation  of  the 
animal  fluids  would  become  accelerated  ;  but  the  tone  of  the 

*  The  necessity  of  the  atmospherical  pressure,  for  the  comfort  and  pre- 
icrvation  of  animal  life,  might  be  illustrated  by  the  effects  experienced  by 
ihose  who  have  ascended  to  the  summits  of  very  high  mountains,  or  who 
have  been  carried  to  a  great  height  above  the  surface  of  the  earth  in 
balloons.  Acosta,  in  his  relation  of  a  Journey  among  the  mountains  of 
Peru,  states,  that  "  he  and  his  companions  were  'sm-prised  with  such 
extreme  pangs  of  straining  and  vomitmg,  not  without  casting  up  of  blood 
too,  and  with  so  violent  a  distemper,  that  they  would  undoubtedly  have 
died  had  they  remained  two  or  three  hours  longer  in  that  elevated  situa- 
tion." Count  Zambeccari,  and  his  companions,  who  ascended  in  a 
balloon,  on  the  7th  of  November,  1783,  to  a  great  height,  found  their 
hands  and  feet  so  swelled,  that  it  was  necessary  for  a  surgeon  to  make 
incisions  in  the  skin.  In  both  the  cases  now  stated,  the  persons  ascended 
to  so  great  a  height,  that  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  was  not  suftcierUi 
to  counterbalance  the  pressure  of  the  fluids  of  the  body. 


74  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

vessels  thus  stimulated  to  increased  action,  would  be  destroy- 
ed, by  too  great  an  excitement,  and  the  body  would  inevitably 
waste  and  decay.  Again,  were  the  oxygen  completely  ex- 
tracted from  the  atmosphere,  and  nothing  but  nitrogen  remain- 
ed, fire  and  flame  would  be  extinguished,  and  instant  destruc- 
tion would  be  carried  throughout  all  the  departments  of  vege- 
table and  animated  nature.  For  a  lighted  taper  will  not  burn 
for  a  single  moment  in  nitrogen  gas,  and  if  an  animal  be 
plunged  into  it,  it  is  instantly  suffocated. 

Again,  not  only  the  extraction  of  any  one  of  the  component 
parts  of  the  atmosphere,  or  the  alteration  of  their  respective 
proportions,  but  even  the  slightest  increase  or  diminution  of 
their  specific  gravihj,  would  be  attended  with  the  most  dis- 
astrous effects.  The  nitrogen  is  found  to  be  a  little  lighter 
than  common  air,  which  enables  it  to  rise  towards  the  higher 
regions  of  the  atmosphere.  In  breathing,  the  air  which  is 
evolved  from  the  lungs,  at  every  expiration,  consists  chiefly  of 
nitrogen,  which  is  entirely  unfit  to  be  breathed  again,  and 
therefore  rises  above  our  heads  before  the  next  inspiration. — 
Now,  had  nitrogen,  instead  of  being  a  little  lighter,  been  a 
slight  degree  heavier  than  common  air,  or  of  the  same  specific 
gravity,  it  would  have  accumulated  on  the  surface  of  the  earth, 
and  particularly  in  our  apartments,  to  such  a  degree  as  to  have 
produced  diseases,  pestilence,  and  death,  in  rapid  succession. 
But  being  a  little  lighter  than  the  surrounding  air,  it  flies  up- 
wards, and  we  never  breathe  it  again,  till  it  enter  into  new  and 
salutary  combinations.  Such  is  the  benevolent  skill  which 
the  Author  of  Nature  has  displayed,  for  promoting  the  com- 
fort and  preservation  of  every  thing  that  lives.* 

Farther,  were  the  air  colored,  or  were  its  particles  much 
larger  than  they  are,  we  could  never  obtain  a  distinct  view  of 

*  The  necessity  of  atmospherical  air  for  the  support  of  hfe,  was  stri- 
kingly exemplified  in  the  fate  of  the  unhappy  men  who  died  in  the  Black- 
hole  of  Calcutta.  On  the  20th  of  June,  1756,  about  8  o'clock  in  the 
evening,  146  men  were  forced,  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet,  into  a  dungeon 
only  18  feet  square.  They  had  been  but  a  few  minutes  confined  in  this 
infernal  prison,  before  every  one  fell  into  a  perspiration  so  profuse,  that  no 
idea  can  be  formed  of  it.  "This  brought  on  a  raging  thirst,  the  most  diffi- 
cult respiration,  and  an  outrageous  delirium.  Such  was  the  horror  of 
their  situation,  that  every  insult  that  could  be  devised  against  the  guard 
without,  and  all  the  opprobrious  names  that  the  Viceroy  and  his  officers 
could  be  loaded  with,  were  repeated,  to  provoke  the  guard  to  fire  upon 
them,  and  terminate  their  sufferings.  Before  1 1  o'clock  the  same  evening, 
one-third  of  the  men  were  dead ;  and  before  6  next  morning,  only  23  came 
out  alive,  but  most  of  them  in  a  high  putrid  fever.  All  these  dreadful 
effects  were  occasioned  by  the  want  of  atmospheric  air,  and  by  their 
breathing  a  superabundant  quantity  of  the  nitrogen  emitted  from  thc« 
lungs. 


ATMOSPHERE.  75 

any  other  object.  The  exhalations  which  rise  from  the  earth, 
being  rendered  visible,  would  disfigure  the  rich  landscape  of 
the  universe,  and  render  life  disagreeable.  But  the  Almighty, 
by  rendering  the  air  invisible,  has  enabled  us  not  only  to  take 
a  delightful  and  distinct  survey  of  the  objects  that  surround 
us,  but  has  veiled  from  our  view  the  gross  humors  incessant- 
ly perspired  from  animal  bodies,  the  filth  exhaled  from 
kitchens,  streets,  and  sewers,  and  every  other  object  that 
would  excite  disgust.  Again,  ivere  the  different  portions  of 
the  atmosphere  completely  stationary,  and  not  susceptible  of 
agitation,  all  nature  would  soon  be  thrown  into  confusion. 
The  vapors  which  are  exhaled  from  the  sea  by  the  heat  of  the 
sun  would  be  suspended,  and  remain  for  ever  fixed  over  those 
places  from  whence  they  arose.  For  want  of  this  agitation  of 
the  air,  which  now  scatters  and  disperses  the  clouds  over 
every  region,  the  sun  would  constantly  scorch  some  districts, 
and  be  for  ever  hid  from  others  ;  the  balance  of  nature  would 
be  destroyed  ;  navigation  would  be  useless,  and  we  could  no 
longer  enjoy  the  productions  of  different  climates.  In  fine, 
were  the  atmosphere  capable  of  being  frozen,  or  converted 
into  a  solid  mass,  as  all  other  fluids  are,  (and  we  know  no 
reason  why  it  should  not  be  subject  to  congelation,  but  the 
will  of  the  Creator,)  the  lives  of  every  animal  in  the  air,  the 
waters,  and  the  earth,  would,  in  a  few  moments,  be  complete- 
ly extinguished.  But  the  admirable  adjustment  of  every  cir- 
cumstance, in  relation  to  this  useful  element,  produces  all  the 
beneficial  effects  which  we  now  experience,  and  strikingly  de- 
monstrates, that  the  Intelligent  Contriver  of  all  things  is 
"  wonderful  in  counsel,  and  excellent  in  working." 

From  the  instances  now  stated,  we  may  plainly  perceive, 
that  if  the  Almighty  had  not  a  particular  regard  to  the  happi- 
ness of  his  intelligent  offspring,  and  to  the  comfort  of  every 
animated  existence  ;  or,  if  he  wished  to  inflict  summary  pun- 
ishment on  a  wicked  world,  he  could  easily  effect,  by  a  very 
slight  change  in  the  constitution  of  the  atmos})here,  the  entire 
destruction  of  the  human  race,  and  the  entire  conflagration  of 
the  great  globe  they  inhabit, — throughout  all  its  elementary  re- 
gions. He  has  only  to  extract  one  of  its  constituent  parts, 
and  the  grand  catastrophe  is  at  once  accomplished.  With 
what  a  striking  propriety  and  emphasis,  then,  do  the  inspired 
writers  declare,  that,  "  In  Him  we  live,  and  move,  and  have 
our  being ;"  and  that  "  in  His  hand  is  the  soul  of  every  living 
thing,  and  the  breath  of  all  mankind !" 

A  great  variety  of  other  admirable  properties  is  possessed 
by  the  atmosphere,  of  which  I  shall  briefly  notice  only  the  fol- 


76  THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

lowing  : — It  is  the  vehicle  of  smells^  by  which  we  become  ac- 
quainted with  the  qualities  of  the  food  which  is  set  before  us, 
and  learn  to  avoid  those  places  which  are  damp,  unwholesome, 
and  dangerous.  It  is  the  medium  of  sounds,  by  means  of 
which  knowledge  is  conveyed  to  our  minds.  Its  undulations, 
like  so  many  couriers,  run  for  ever  backwards  and  forwards, 
to  convey  our  thoughts  to  others,  and  theirs  to  us  ;  and  to 
bring  news  of  transactions  which  frequently  occur  at  a  consi- 
derable distance.  A  few  strokes  on  a  large  bell,  through  the 
ministration  of  the  air,  will  convey  signals  of  distress,  or  of 
joy,  in  a  quarter  of  a  minute,  to  the  population  of  a  city  con- 
taining a  hundred  thousand  inhabitants.  So  that  the  air  may 
be  considered  as  the  conveyer  of  the  thoughts  of  mankind, 
which  are  the  cement  of  society.  It  transmits  to  our  ears  ah 
the  harmonies  of  music,  and  expresses  every  passion  of  the 
soul  :  it  swells  the  notes  of  the  nightingale,  and  distributes 
alike  to  every  ear  the  pleasures  v/hich  arise  from  the  harmo- 
nious sounds  of  a  concert.  It  produces  the  blue  color  of  the 
sky,  and  is  the  cause  of  the  morning  and  the  evening  twilight^ 
by  its  property  of  bending  the  rays  of  light,  and  reflecting  thent 
in  all  directions.  It  forms  an  essential  requisite  for  carrying 
on  all  the  processes  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  and  serves  foi 
the  production  of  clouds,  rain,  and  dew,  which  nourish  and 
fertilize  the  earth.  In  short,  it  would  be  impossible  to  enume- 
rate all  the  advantages  we  derive  from  this  noble  appendage 
to  our  world.  Were  the  earth  divested  of  its  atmosphere,  or 
were  only  two  or  three  of  its  properties  changed  or  destroyed, 
it  would  be  left  altogether  untit  for  the  habitation  of  sentient 
beings.  Were  it  divested  of  its  undulating  quality,  we  should 
be  deprived  of  all  the  advantages  of  speech  and  conversation 
— of  all  the  melody  of  the  feathered  songsters,  and  of  all  the 
pleasures  of  music  ;  and,  like  the  deaf  and  dumb,  we  could 
have  no  power  of  communicating  our  thoughts  but  by  visible 
signs.  IVere  it  deprived  of  its  reflective  powers,  the  sun 
would  appear  in  one  part  of  the  sky  of  a  dazzling  brightness, 
while  all  around  would  appear  as  dark  as  midnight,  and  the 
stars  would  be  visible  at  noon-day.  Were  it  deprived  of  its 
refractive  powers,  instead  of  the  gradual  approach  of  the  day 
and  the  night  which  we  now  experience,  at  sunrise,  we  should 
be  transported  all  at  once  from  midnight  darkness  to  the  splen- 
dor of  noon-day  :  and,  at  sun-set,  should  make  a  sudden  tran- 
sition from  the  splendors  of  day  to  all  the  horrors  of  midnight, 
which  would  bewilder  the  traveller  in  his  journey,  and  strike 
the  creation  with  am.azement.  In  line,  were  the  oxygen  of 
the  atmosphere  completely  extracted,  destruction  would  seize 


EXPANSION  OF  WATER  IN  FREEZING.       77 

on  all  the  tribes  of  the  living  world,  throughout  every  region 
of  earth,  air,  and  sea. 

Omitting  at  present  the  consideration  of  an  indefinite  va- 
riety of  other  particulars,  which  suggest  themselves  on  this 
subject,  I  shall  just  notice  one  circumstance  more,  which  has 
a  relation  both  to  the  waters  and  to  the  atmosphere.  It  is  a 
well  known  law  of  nature,  that  all  bodies  are  expanded  by  heat, 
and  contracted  by  cold.  There  is  only  one  exception  to  this 
law  which  exists  in  the  economy  of  our  globe,  and  that  is,  the 
expansion  of  wafer,  in  the  act  of  freezing, — While  the  parts 
of  every  other  body  are  reduced  in  bulk,  and  their  specific  gravity 
increased  by  the  application  of  cold  ;  water,  on  the  contrary, 
when  congealed  into  ice,  is  increased  in  bulk,  and  becomes  of 
a  less  specific  gravity  than  the  surrounding  water,  and,  there- 
fore, swims  upon  its  surface.  Now,  had  the  case  been  other- 
wise ;  had  water,  when  deprived  of  a  portion  of  its  heat,  fol- 
lowed the  general  law  of  nature,  and,  like  all  other  bodies,  be- 
come specifically  heavier  than  it  was  before,  the  present  con- 
stitution of  nature  would  have  been  materially  deranged,  and 
many  of  our  present  comforts,  and  even  our  very  existence, 
would  have  been  endangered.  At  whatever  time  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  atmosphere  became  reduced  to  32"  of  the  common 
thermometer,  or  to  what  is  called  the  freezing  point,  the  water 
on  the  surface  of  our  rivers  and  lakes  would  have  been  con- 
verted into  a  layer  of  ice  ;  this  layer  would  have  sunk  to  ihe 
bottom  as  it  froze  ;  another  layer  of  ice  would  have  been  im- 
mediately produced,  which  would  also  have  sunk  to  the  former 
layer,  and  so  on  in  succession,  till,  in  the  course  of  time,  all 
our  rivers  from  the  surface  to  the  bottom,  and  every  other  por- 
tion of  water,  capable  of  being  frozen,  would  have  been  con- 
verted into  solid  masses  of  ice,  which  all  the  heat  of  summer 
co\ild  never  have  melted.  We  should  have  been  deprived  oi 
most  of  the  advantages  we  now  derive  from  the  liquid  ele- 
ment, and,  in  a  short  time,  the  face  of  nature  would  have  been 
transformed  into  a  frozen  chaos.  But  in  the  existing  consti- 
tution of  things,  all  such  dismal  effects  are  prevented,  in  con- 
sequence of  the  Creator  having  subjected  the  waters  to  a  law 
contrary  to  that  of  other  fluids,  by  means  of  which  the  frozeii 
water  swims  upon  the  surface,  and  prevents  the  cold  from 
penetrating  to  any  great  depth  in  the  subjacent  fluid  ;  and 
when  the  heat  of  the  atmosphere  is  increased,  it  is  exposed  to 
its  genial  influence,  and  is  quickly  changed  into  its  former 
liquid  state.  How  admirably,  then,  does  this  exception  to  the 
general  law  of  nature  display  the  infinite  intelligence  of  the 
Great  Contriver  of  all  things^  and  his  provideatial  care  for  the 

T 


78  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

comfort  of  his  creatures,  when  he  arranged  and  established 
the  economy  of  nature  ! 

VARIETY    OF    NATURE. 

As  a  striking  evidence  of  Divine  Intelligence,  we  may  next 
consider  the  immense  variety  lohich  the  Creator  has  introduced 
into  every  department  of  the  material  world. 

In  every  region  on  the  surface  of  the  globe,  an  endless  multi- 
plicity of  objects,  all  differing  from  one  another  in  shape,  color, 
and  motion,  present  themselves  to  the  view  of  the  beholder. 
Mountains  covered  with  forests,  hills  clothed  with  verdure, 
spacious  plains  adorned  with  vineyards,  orchards,  and  wav- 
ing grain  ;  naked  rocks,  abrupt  precipices,  extended  vales, 
deep  dells,  meandering  rivers,  roaring  cataracts,  brooks  and 
rills  ;  lakes  and  gulfs, bays  and  promontories,  seas  and  oceans, 
caverns  and  grottoes — meet  the  eye  of  the  student  of  Nature, 
in  every  country,  with  a  variety  which  is  at  once  beautiful  and 
majestic.  Nothing  can  exceed  the  variety  of  the  vegetable 
kingdom,  which  pervades  all  climates,  and  almost  every  por- 
tion of  the  dry  land,  and  of  the  bed  of  the  ocean.  The  im- 
mense collections  of  Natural  History  which  are  to  be  seen  in 
the  Museum  at  Paris,  show,  that  botanists  are  already  ac- 
quainted with  nearly  fifty-six  thousand  different  species  of 
olants.*  And  yet,  it  is  probable,  that  these  form  but  a  very 
small  portion  of  what  actually  exists,  and  that  several  hundreds 
of  thousands  of  species  remains  to  be  explored  by  the  indus- 
try of  future  ages.  For,  by  far  the  greater  part  of  the  vegeta- 
ble world  still  remains  to  be  surveyed  by  the  scientific  botanist. 
Of  the  numerous  tribes  of  vegetable  nature  which  flourish  in 
the  interior  of  Africa  and  America,  in  the  innnense  islands  of 
New  Holland,  New  Guinea,  Borneo,  Summatra,  Java,  Cey- 
lon, Madagascar,  and  Japan  ;  in  the  vast  regions  of  Tartary, 
Thibet,  Siberia,  and  the  Burman  empire  ;  in  the  Phillippines, 
the  Moluccas,  the  Ladrones,  the  Carolinas,  the  Marquesas, 
the  Society,  the  Georgian,  and  in  thousands  of  other  Islands 
which  are  scattered  over  the  Indian  and  Pacific  oceans — little 
or  nothing  is  known  by  the  naturalists  of  Europe,  and  yet  it  is 
a  tact  which  admits  of  no  dispute,  that  every  country  hitherto 
explored,  produces  a  variety  of  species  of  plants  peculiar  to 
itself;  and  those  districts  in  Europe  which  have  been  fre- 
quently surveyed,  present  to  every  succeeding  explorer  a  new 
field  of  investigation,  and  reward  his  industry  with  new  dis- 
coveries of  the  beauties  and  varieties  of  the  vegetable  king- 
dom.    It  has  been  conjectured  by  some  Naturalists,  on   the 

*  Edinburgh  Philosophical  Journal,  Julyj  1822,  p.  48. 


VARIETY    OF    NATURE.  79 

ground  of  a  multitude  of  observations,  that  "  there  is  not  a 
square  league  of  earth,  but  what  presents  some  one  plant  pe- 
culiar to  itself,  or,  at  least,  which  thrives  there  better,  or  ap- 
pears more  beautiful  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  world." 
This  would  make  the  number  of  species  of  vegetables  to 
amount  to  as  many  millions  as  there  are  of  square  leagues  on 
the  surface  of  the  earth. 

Now,  every  one  of  these  specie-s  of  plants  differs  from  ano- 
ther, in  its  size,  structure,  form,  flowers,  leaves,  fruits,  mode 
of  propagation,  color,  medicinal  virtues,  nutritious  qualities, 
internal  vessels,  and  the  odors  it  exhales.  They  are  of  all 
sizes,  from  the  microscopic  mushroom,  invisible  to  the  naked 
eye,  to  the  sturdy  oak,  and  the  cedar  of  Lebanon,and  from  the 
slender  willow  to  the  Banian  tree,  under  whose  shade  7000 
persons  may  find  ample  room  to  repose.  A  thousand  different 
shades  of  color  distinguish  the  different  species.  Every  one 
wears  its  peculiar  livery,  and  is  distinguished  by  its  own  native 
hues;  and  many  of  their  inherent  beauties  can  be  distinguished 
only  by  the  help  of  the  microscope.  Some  grow  upright, 
others  creep  along  in  a  serpentine  form.  Some  flourish  for 
ages,  others  wither  and  decay  in  a  few  months  ;  some  spring 
up  in  moist,  others  in  dry  soils  ;  some  turn  towards  the  sun, 
others  shrink  and  contract  when  we  approach  to  touch  them. 
Not  only  are  the  different  species  of  plants  and  flowers  dis- 
tinguished from  each  other,  by  their  different  forms,  but  even 
the  different  individuals  of  the  same  species.  In  a  bed  of 
tulips  or  carnations,  for  example,  there  is  scarcely  a  flower  in 
which  some  difference  may  not  be  observed  in  its  structure, 
j  size,  or  assemblage  of  colors  ;  nor  can  any  two  flowers  be 
I  found  in  which  the  shape  and  shades  are  exactly  similar.  Of 
I  ail  the  hundred  thousand  millions  of  plant.s  trees,  herbs,  and 
I  flowers,  with  which  our  globe  is  variegated,  there  are  not,  per- 
1  haps,  two  individuals  precisely  alike,  in  every  point  of  view  in 
which  they  may  be  contemplated  ;  yea,  there  is  not,  perhaps, 
a  single  leaf  in  the  forest,  when  minutely  examined,  that  will 
not  be  found  to  differ,  in  certain  aspects,  from  its  fellows. 

ISuch  is   the   wonderful  and  infinite   diversity  with  which  the 
Creator  has  adorned  the  vegetable  kingdom. 
His  wisdom  is  also  evidently  displayed  in  this  vast  profusion 
,;  of  vegetable  nature — in  adaptilig  eacn  plant  to  the  soil  and  sit- 
j  uation  in  which  it  is  destined  to  flourish — in  furnishing  it  with 
'  those  vessels  by  which  it  absorbs  the  air  and  moisture  on  which 
it  feeds — and  in  adapting  it  to  the  nature  and  necessities  of 
'■  animated  beings.     As   the   earth  teems  with  animated  exist- 
ence, and  as  the  different  tribes  of  animals  depend  chiefly  on 


80  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

the  productions  of  the  vegetable  kingdom  for  their  subsist- 
ence, so  there  is  an  abundance  and  a  variety  of  plants  adapted 
to  the  peculiar  constitutions  of  every  individual  species.  This 
circumstance  demonstrates,  that  there  is  a  pre-contrived  rela- 
tion and  fitness  between  the  internal  constitution  of  the  ani- 
mal, and  the  mature  of  the  j)}ants  which  aflbrd  it  nourishment ; 
and  shows  us,  that  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms  are  the 
workmanship  of  one  and  the  same  Almighty  Being,  and  that, 
in  his  arrangements  with  regard  to  the  one,  he  had  in  view  the 
necessities  of  the  other. 

When  we  direct  our  attention  to  the  tribes  of  animated  na- 
ture, we  behold  a  scene  no  less  variegated  and  astonishing. 
Above  fifty  thousand  species  of  animals  have  been  detected 
and  described  by  Naturalists,  besides  several  thousands  of 
species  which  the  naked  eye  cannot  discern,  and  which  people 
the  invisible  regions  of  the  waters  and  the  air.  And,  as  the 
greater  part  of  the  globe  has  never  yet  been  thoroughly  ex- 
plored, several  hundreds,  if  not  thousands,  of  species  unknown 
to  the  scientific  world,  may  exist  in  the  depths  of  the  ocean, 
and  in  the  unexplored  regions  of  the  land.  All  these  species 
differ  from  one  another  in  color,  size,  and  shape  ;  in  the  inter- 
nal structure  of  their  bodies,  in  the  number  of  their  sensitive 
organs,  limbs,  feet,  joints,  claws,  wings,  and  fins  ;  in  their 
dispositions,  faculties,  movements,  and  modes  of  subsistence. 
They  are  of  all  sizes,  from  the  mite  and  the  gnat,  up  to  the 
elephant  and  the  whale,  and  from  the  mite  downwards  to  those 
invisible  animaculae,  a  hundred  thousand  of  which  would 
not  equal  a  grain  of  sand.  Some  fly  through  the  atmos- 
phere, some  glide  through  the  waters,  others  traverse  the  solid 
land.  Some  walk  on  two,  some  on  four,  some  on  twenty,  and 
some  on  a  hundred  feet.  Some  have  eyes  furnished  with  two, 
some  with  eight,  some  with  a  hundred,  and  some  with  eight 
thousand  distinct  transparent  globes,  for  the  purpose  of  vision.* 

*  The  eyes  of  beetles,  silk-worms,  fi'ies,  and  several  other  kinds  of 
insects,  are  among  the  most  curious  and  wonderful  productions  of  the  God 
of  Nature.  On  th-e  head  of  a  fly  are  two  large  protuberances,  one  on  each 
side  ;  these  constitute  its  organs  of  vision.  Tiie  whole  surface  of  these 
protuberances  is  covered  with  a  multitude  of  small  hemispheres  placed  with 
the  utmost  regularity  in  rows,  crossing  each  other  in  a  kind  of  lattice  work. 
These  little  hemispheres  have  each  of  them  a  minute  transparent  convex 
lens  in  the  middle,  each  of  which  has  a  distinct  branch  of  the  optic  nerve 
ministering  to  it;  so  that  the  different  lenses  may  be  considered  as  so  many 
distinct  eyes,  Mr.  Leeuwenhoek  counted  6236  in  the  two  eyes  of  a  silk 
worm,  when  in  its  Jiy  stale  ;  3180  in  each  eye  of  the  beetle  ;  and  8000  in 
the  two  eyes  of  a  common  fly.  Mr.  Hook  reckoned  14,000  in  the  eyes  of  a 
drone  fly ;  and,  in  one  of  the  eyes  of  a  dragonfly,  there  have  been  reckoned 
13,500  of  these  lenses,  and,  consequently,  in  both  eyes,  27,000,  every  dj®-. 


'  VARIETY    OF    NATURE.  81 

Our  astonishment  at  the  variety  which  appears  in  the  animal 
kingdom  is  still  farther  increased  when  we  consider  not  only 
the  diversities  which  are  apparent  in  their  external  aspect,  but 
also  in  their  internal  structure  and  organization.  When  we 
reflect  on  the  thousands  of  movements,  adjustments,  adapta- 
tions, and  compensations,  which  are  requisite  in  order  to  the 
construction  of  an  animal  system,  for  enabling  it  to  form  its 
intended  functions  ; — when  we  consider,  that  every  species  of 
animals  has  a  system  of  organization  peculiar  to  itself,  con- 
sisting of  bones,  joints,  blood  vesseJs,  and  muscular  motions, 
differing  in  a  variety  of  respects  from  those  of  any  other  spe- 
cies, and  exactly  adapted  to  its  various  necessities  and  modes 
of  existence  ;  and  when  we  consider,  still  farther,  the  incom- 
prehensibly delicate  contrivances,  and  exquisite  borings,  pol- 
ishings,  claspings,  and  adaptations,  which  enter  into  the  or- 
ganization of  an  animated  being  ten  thousand  times  less  than 
a  mite  ;  and  that  the  different  species  of  these  animals  are 
likewise  all  differently  organized  from  one  another, — we  can- 
not but  be  struck  with  reverence  and  astonishment,  at  the  In- 
telligence of  that  Incomprehensible  Being  who  arranged  the 
organs  of  all  the  tribes  of  animated  nature,  who  "  breathed 
into  them  the  breath  of  life,"  and  who  continually  upholds 
them  in  all  their  movements  ! 

Could  we  descend  into  the  subterraneous  apartments  of  the 
globe,  and  penetrate  into  those  unknown  recesses  which  he 
towards  its  centre,  we  should,  doubtless,  behold  a  variegated 
scene  of  wonders,  even  in  those  dark  and  impenetrable  re- 
gions. But  all  the  labor  and  industry  of  man  have  not  hith- 
erto enabled  him  to  penetrate  farther  into  the  bowels  of  the 
earth  than  the  six  thousandth  part  of  its  diameter ;  so  that 
we  must  remain  for  ever  ignorant  of  the  immense  caverns 
and  masses  of  matter  that  may  exists  and  of  the  processes 
that  may  be  going  on  about  its  central  regions.     In  those  re 

of  which  is  capable  of  forming  a  distinct  iiYiage  of  any  object,  m  the  same 
manner  as  a  common  convex  glass ;  so  that  there  are  27,000  images  fonried 
on  the  retina  of  this  little  animal.  Mr.  Leeuwenhoek  having  prepared  the 
eye  of  a  fly  for  the  purpose,  placed  it  a  little  farther  from  his  microscope 
than  when  he  would  examine  an  object,  so  as  to  leave  a  proper  local  dis- 
tance between  it  and  the  lens  of  his  microscope  ;  and  then  looked  through 
both,  in  the  manner  of  a  telescope,  at  the  steeple  of  the  church,  which  was 
299  feet  high,  and  750  feet  distant,  and  could  plainly  see  through  every 
little  lens,  the  whole  steeple  inverted,  though  not  larger  than  the  point  of 
a  fine  needle :  and  then  directing  it  to  a  neighbouring  house,  saw  through 
many  of  these  little  hemispheres,  not  only  the  front  of  the  house,  but  also 
the  doors  and  windows,  and  could  discern  distinctly,  whether  the  windows 
were  open  or  sliut.  Such  an  exquisite  piece  of  Divine  mechanism  tran- 
scends all  human  comprehension. 

7* 


82  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

gions,  however,  near  the  surface,  which  lie  within  the  sphere 
of  human  inspection,  we  perceive  a  variety  analogous  to  that 
which  is  displayed  in  the  other  departments  of  nature.  Here 
we  find  substances  of  various  kinds  formed  into  strata,  or  lay- 
ers, of  different  depths — earths,  sand,  gravel,  marl,  clay,  sand- 
stone, free-stone,  marble,  lime-stone,  fossils,  coals,  peat,  and 
similar  materials.  In  these  strata  are  found  metals  and  mine- 
rals of  various  descriptions — salt,  nitrate  of  potash,  ammonia, 
sulphur,  bitum.en,  platina,  gold,  silver,  mercury,  iron,  lead,  tin, 
copper,  zinc,  nickel,  manganeze,  cobalt,  antimony,  the  dia- 
mond, rubies,  sapphires,  jaspers,  emeralds,  and  a  countless 
variety  of  other  substances,  of  incalculable  benefit  to  man- 
kind. Some  of  these  substances  are  so  essentially  requisite 
for  the  comfort  of  man,  that,  without  them,  he  would  soon 
degenerate  into  the  savage  state,  and  be  deprived  of  all  those 
arts  which  extend  his  knowledge,  and  which  cheer  and  embel- 
lish the  abodes  of  civilized  life. 

If  we  turn  our  eyes  upward  to  the  regions  of  the  atmos- 
phere, we  may  also  behold  a  spectacle  of  variegated  magni- 
ficence. Sometimes  the  sky  is  covered  with  sable  clouds,  or 
obscured  with  mists  ;  at  other  times  it  is  tinged  with  a  variety 
of  hues,  by  the  rays  of  the  rising  or  the  setting  sun.  Some- 
times it  presents  a  pure  azure,  at  other  times  it  is  diversified 
with  strata  of  dappled  clouds.  At  one  time  we  behold  the 
rainbow  rearing  its  majestic  arch,  adorned  with  all  the  colors 
of  light;  at  another,  the  Aurora  Borealis  illuminating  the  sky 
with  its  fantastic  corruscations.  At  one  time  we  behold  the 
fiery  meteor  sweeping  through  the  air  ;  at  another,  we  per 
ceive  the  forked  lightning  darting  from  the  clouds,  and  hea. 
the  thunders  rolling  through  the  sky.  Sometimes  the  vault  o 
heaven  appears  like  a  boundless  desert,  and  at  other  timee 
adorned  with  an  innumerable  host  of  stars,  and  with  the  moor 
"  v/alking  in  brightness."  In  short,  whether  we  direct  our 
view  to  the  vegetable  or  the  animal  tribes,  to  the  atmosphere, 
the  ocean,  the  mountains,  the  plains,  or  the  subterranean  re- 
cesses of  the  globe,  we  behold  a  scene  of  beauty,  order  and 
variety,  which  astonishes  and  enraptures  the  contemplative 
mind,  and  constrains  us  to  join  in  the  devout  exclamations  of 
the  Psalmist,  "  Hoiv  manifold  are  tJuj  works^  O  Lord  !  In  wis- 
dom hast  thou  made  them  all,  the  earth  is  full  of  thy  riches  ; 
so  is  the  great  and  wide  sea,  wherein  are  things  creeping,  in- 
numerahhj  both  small  and  great  beasts." 

This  countless  variety  of  objects  which  appears  throughout 
every  department  of  our  sublunary  system,  not  only  displays 
the  depths  af  Divine  wisdonirbut  also  presents  us  with  a  faint 


VARIETY    OF   NATURE  83 

idea  of  the  infinity  of  the  Creator,  and  of  the  immense  multipli- 
city  of  ideas  and  conceptions  which  must  have  existed  in  the 
Eternal  Mind,  when  the  fabric  of  our  globe,  and  its  numerous 
tribes  of  inhabitants  were  arranged  and  brought  into  existence. 
And,  if  every  other  world  which  floats  in  the  immensity  of 
space,  be  diversified  with  a  similar  variety  of  existence,  alto- 
gether different  from  ours,  (as  we  have  reason  to  beheve,  from 
the  variety  we  already  perceive,  and  from  the  boundless  plans 
and  conceptions  of  the  Creator,)  the  human  mind  is  lost 
and  confounded,  when  it  attempts  to  form  an  idea  of  those 
endlessly  diversified  plans,  conceptions,  and  views,  which 
must  have  existed  during  an  eternity  past,  in  the  Divine  mind. 
When  we  would  attempt  to  enter  into  the  conception  of  so 
vast  and  varied  operations,  we  feel  our  own  littleness,  and  the 
narrow  limits  of  our  feeble  powers,  and  can  only  exclaim,  with 
the  Apostle  Paul,  "  0  the  depth  of  the  riches  both  of  the  wis- 
dom and  knowledge  of  God  i  how  unsearchable  are  his  coun- 
cils, and  his  ways  of  creation  and  providence  past  finding  out  " 

This  characteristic  of  variety,  which  is  stamped  on  all  the 
works  of  Omnipotence^  is,  doubtless,  intended  to  gratify  the 
principle  of  curiosity,  and  the  love  of  novelty,  which  are  im- 
planted in  the  human  breast ;  and  thus  to  excite  rational  be- 
ings to  the  study  and  investigation  of  the  works  of  the  Crea- 
tor ;  that  therein  they  may  behold  the  glory  of  the  Divine 
character,  and  be  stimulated  to  the  exercise  of  love,  admira- 
tion, and  reverence.  For,  as  the  records  of  revelation,  and 
the  dispensations  of  Providence,  display  to  us  the  various  as- 
pects of  the  moral  character  of  Deity,  so,  the  diversified  phe- 
nomena, and  the  multiplicity  of  objects  and  operations  which 
the  scenery  of  nature  exhibits,  present  to  us  a  specimen  of  the 
ideas,  as  it  were,  of  the  Eternal  Mind,  in  so  far  as  they  can  be 
adumbrated  by  material  objects,  and  exhibited  to  mortals, 
through  the  medium  of  corporeal  organs. 

To  convey  an  adequate  conception  of  the  mimher  of  these 
ideas,  as  exhibited  on  the  globe  in  which  we  live, 'would  baffle 
the  arithmetician's  skill,  and  set  his  numbers  at  defiance. — 
We  may,  however,  assist  our  conceptions  a  little,  by  confining 
our  attention  to  one  department  of  nature  ;  for  example,  the 
Animal  Kingdom.  The  number  of  the  different  species  of 
animals,  taking  into  account  those  which  are  hitherto  undis- 
covered, and  those  which  are  invisible  to  the  naked  eye,  can- 
not be  estimated  at  less  than  300,000.  In  a  human  body 
there  are  reckoned  about  446  muscles,  in  each  of  which,  ac- 
cording to  anatomists,  there  are  at  least  10  several  intentions, 
or  due  qualifications  to  be  observed — its  proper  figure,  its  just 


84  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

magnitude,  the  right  disposition  of  its  several  ends,  upper  and 
lower,  the  position  of  the  whole,  the  insertion  of  its  proper 
nerves,  veins,  arteries,  &c.  so  that  in  the  muscular  system 
alone,  there  are  4,460  several  ends  or  aims  to  be  attended  to. 
The  bones  are  reckoned  to  be  in  number  about  245,  and  the 
distinct  scopes  or  intentions  of  each  of  these  are  above  40  ;  in 
all,  about  9,800  ;  so  that  the  system  of  bones  and  muscles 
alone,  without  taking  any  other  parts  into  consideration, 
amounts  to  above  14^000  different  intentions  or  adaptations. 
If  now,  we  suppose,  that  all  the  species  of  animals  above  sta- 
ted, are  differently  constructed,  and,  taken  one  wdth  another, 
contain  at  an  average,  a  system  of  bones  and  muscles  as  nu- 
merous as  in  the  human  body — the  number  of  species  must 
be  multiplied  by  the  number  of  different  aims  or  adaptations, 
and  the  product  will  amount  to  4,200,000,000.  If  we  were 
next  to  attend  to  the  many  thousands  of  blood  vessels  in  an 
animal  body,  and  the  numerous  ligaments,  membranes,  hu- 
mors, and  fluids  of  various  descriptions — the  skin,  with  its 
millions  of  pores,  aird  every  other  part  of  an  organical  system, 
with  the  aims  and  intentions  of  each,  we  should  have  another 
sum  of  many  hundreds  of  millions  to  be  multiplied  by  the  for- 
mer product,  in  order  to  express  the  diversified  ideas  which 
enter  into  the  construction  of  the  animal  world.  And,  if  we 
still  farther  consider,  that  of  the  hundreds  of  millions  of  indi- 
viduals belonging  to  each  species,,  no  two  individuals  exactly 
resemble  each  other — that  all  the  myriads  of  vegetables  with 
which  the  earth  is  covered,  are  distinguished  from  each  other, 
by  some  one  characteristic  or  another,  and  that  every  grain  of 
sand  contained  in  the  mountains,  and  in  the  bed  of  the  ocean, 
as  shown  by  the  microscope,  discovers  a  different  form  and 
configuration  from  another — we  are  here  presented  with  an 
imao-e  of  the  infinitij  of  the  conceptions  of  Him  in  whose  in- 
comprehensible mind  they  all  existed,  during  countless  ages,, 
before  the  universe  was  formed. 

To  overlook  this  amazing  scene  of  Divine  Intelligence,  or 
to  consider  it  as  beneath  our  notice,  as  some  have  done — if  it 
be  not  the  characteristic  of  impiety,  is  at  least,  the  mark  of  a 
weali  and  undiscriminating  mind.  The  man  who  disregards 
the  visible  displays  of  Infinite  wisdom,  or  who  neglects  to  in- 
vestigate them,  when  opportunity  offers,  acts  as  if  he  consider- 
ed huuself  already  possessed  of  a  sufficient  portion  of  intelli- 
gence, and  stood  in  no  need  of  sensible  assistances  to  direct 
his  conceptions  of  the  Creator.  Pride,  and  false  conceptions 
of  the  nature  and  design  of  true  religion,  frequently  lie  at  the 
foundation  of  all  that  mdifference  and  neglect  with  which  the 


I  VARIETY    OF    NATURE.  85 

I  visible  works  of  God  are  treated,  by  those  who  make  preten- 
j  sions  to  a  high  degree  of  spiritual  attainments.  The  truly 
pious  man  will  trace,  with  wonder  and  delight,  the  footsteps 
of  his  Father  and  his  God,  wherever  they  appear  in  the  varie- 
gated scene  of  creation  around  him,  and  will  be  filled  with 
sorrow,  and  contrition  of  heart,  that,  amidst  his  excursions 
and  solitary  walks,  he  has  so  often  disregarded  '*  the  works  of 
the  Lord,  and  the  operation  of  his  hands." 

In  line,  the  variety  v.hich  appears  on  the  face  of  nature,  not 
only  enlarges  our  conceptions  of  Infinite  Wisdom,  but  is  also 
the  foundation  of  all  our  discriminations  and  judgm.ents  as 
rational  beings,  and  is  of  the  most  essential  utility  in  the 
affairs  of  human  society.  Such  is  the  variety  of  which  the 
i  features  of  the  human  countenance  are  susceptible,  that  it  is 
I  probable  that  no  two  individuals,  of  ail  the  millions  of  the  race 
;  of  Adam,  that  have  existed  since  the  beginning  of  time,  would 
,  be  found  to  resemble  each  other.  Yv  e  know  no  two  human 
j  beings  presently  existing,  however  similar  to  each  other,  but 
I  may  be  distinguished  either  by  their  stature,  their  forms,  or 
'  the  features  of  their  faces  ;  and  on  the  ground  of  this  dissimi- 
larity, the  various  wheels  of  the  machine  of  society  move  on- 
ward, without  clashing  or  confusion.  Had  it  been  otherwise 
— had  the  faces  of  men,  and  their  organs  of  speech  been  cast 
exactly  in  the  same  mould,  as  would  have  been  the  case,  had 
the  world  been  framed  according  to  the  Epicurean  system,  by 
blind  chance  directing  a  concourse  of  atoms,  it  might  have 
been  as  difficult  to  distinguish  one  human  countenance  from 
another,  as  to  distinguish  the  eggs  laid  by  the  same  hen,  or 
the  drops  of  water  which  trickle  from  the  same  orifice  ;  and, 
consequently,  society  would  have  been  thrown  into  a  state  of 
universal  anarchy  and  confusion.  Friends  would  not  have 
been  distinguished  from  enemies,  villains  from  the  good  and 
honest,  fathers  from  sons,  the  culprit  from  the  innocent  per- 
son, nor  the  branches  of  the  same  family  from  one  another. 
And  what  a  scene  of  perpetual  confusion  and  disturbance 
would  thus  have  been  created  !  Frauds*  thefts,  robberies, 
murders,  assassinations,  forgeries,  and  injustice  of  all  kinds, 
might  have  been  daily  committed  without  the  least  possibility 
of  detection. — Nay,  were  even  the  variety  of  tones  in  the 
human  voice,  peculiar  to  each  person,  to  cease,  and  the  hand- 
writing of  all  men  to  become  perfectly  uniform,  a  multitude 
of  distressing  deceptions  and  perplexities  would  be  produced 
in  the  domestic,  civil,  and  commercial  transactions  of  man- 
kind. But  the  All-wise  and  Beneficent  Creator  has  prevented 
all  such  evils  and  inconveniences,  by  the  character  of  variety 


86  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

which  he  has  impressed  on  the  human  species  ;  and  on  all  his 
works.  By  the  pecahar  features  of  his  countenance  every 
man  may  be  distinguished  in  the  hght  :  by  the  tones  of  his 
voice  he  may  be  recognized  in  the  dark,  or  when  he  is  sepa- 
rated from  his  fellows  by  an  impenetrable  partition  ;  and  his 
hand-writing  can  attest  his  existence  and  individuality,  when 
continents  and  oceans  interpose  between  him  and  his  rela- 
tions, and  be  a  witness  of  his  sentiments  and  purposes  to 
future  oenerations. 


Thus,  I  have  taken  a  very  cursory  view  of  some  evidences 
of  Divine  Wisdom,  which  appear  in  the  general  constitution 
of  the  earth,  the  waters,  and  the  afmospliere,  and  in  the  char- 
acteristic of  variety,  which  is  impressed  on  all  the  objects  of 
the  visible  creation.  When  these  and  other  admirable  arrange- 
ments, in  our  sublunary  system,  are  seriously  contemplated, 
every  rational  and  pious  mind  will  be  disposed  to  exclaim 
with  the  Psalmist — "  There  is  none  like  unto  thee,  0  Lord, 
neither  are  there  any  works  like  unto  thy  works." — "  Thou 
art  great,  and  dost  wondrous  things,  thou  art  God  alone." — 
"  O  that  men  would  praise  the  Lord  for  his  goodness,  and  for 
his  wonderful  works  towards  the  children  of  men  !" 

When  we  consider  not  only  the  utilitij,  but  the  heanty  and 
grandeur  of  the  wise  arrangements  of  nature,  what  reason 
have  we  to  admire  and  adore  the  goodness  of  the  great  Author 
of  our  existence  !  ^Vere  all  the  diversities  of  shape  and 
color,  of  mountains  and  vales,  of  rivers  and  lakes,  of  light  and 
shade,  which  now  embellish  the  various  landscapes  of  the 
world,  to  disappear,  and  were  one  unvaried  scene  perpetually 
to  present  itself  to  the  eye,  how  dull  and  wearisome,  and  un- 
interesting would  the  aspect  of  the  universe  appear  to  an 
intelligent  mind  !  Although  the  variegated  beauties  which 
adorn  the  surface  of  our  globe,  and  the  vault  of  heaven,  are 
not  essential  to  our  existence,  as  sensitive  beings,  yet,  were 
they  completely  withdrawn,  and  nothing  presented  to  the  eye, 
but  a  boundless  expanse  of  barren  sands,  the  mind  would  re- 
coil upon  itself,  its  activity  would  be  destroyed,  its  powers 
would  be  confined,  as  it  were,  to  a  prison,  and  it  would  roam 
in  vain  amidst  the  surrounding  waste,  in  search  of  enjoyment. 
Even  the  luxuries  of  a  palace,  were  it  possible  to  procure 
them  amidst  such  a  scene  of  desolation,  would  become  stale 
and  insipid,  and  would  leave  the  rational  soul,  almost  desti- 
tute of  ideas  and  of  mental  energy,  to  the  tiresome  round  of  a 


PRIMEVAL    STATE    OF   NATURE.  87 

cheerless  existence.  But  in  the  actual  state  of  the  world  we 
live  in,  there  is  no  landscape  in  nature,  from  the  Icebergs  of 
Greenland  to  the  verdant  scenes  of  the  Torrid  Zone,  in  which 
objects,  either  of  sublimity  or  of  beauty,  in  boundless  variety, 
are  not  presented  to  the  view  ;  in  order  to  stimulate  the  mind 
to  activity,  to  gratify  its  desire  of  novelty,  and  to  elevate  its 
conceptions  of  the  Beneficent  Creator. 

And,  if  the  present  constitution  of  our  world  displays  so 
evident  marks  of  beauty  and  benevolent  design,  now  that  it  is 
inhabited  by  an  assemblage  of  depraved  intelligences,  and 
its  physical  aspect  deforined,  in  consequence  of  "  the  wicked- 
ness of  man" — what  transporting  beauties  and  sublimities 
must  it  have  presented,  when  it  appeared  fresh  from  the  hand 
of  its  Almighty  Maker,  and  when  all  things  were  pronounced 
by  him  to  l)e  verij  good  ?  After  a  deluge  of  waters  has  swept 
many  of  its  primeval  beauties,  and  has  broken  and  deranged 
even  its  subterraneous  strata,  this  terrestrial  world  still  pre- 
sents to  the  eye  a  striking  scene  of  beauty,  order,  and  benefi- 
cence. But  we  have  the  strongest  reason  to  believe,  that, 
before  sin  had  disfigured  the  aspect  of  this  lower  world,  all 
was  "  beauty  -to  the  eye,  and  music  to  the  ear" — that  "  im- 
mortality breathed  in  the  w^inds,  flowed  in  the  rivers,"  and  ex- 
haled from  every  plant  and  flower.  No  storms  disturbed  the 
tranquillity  of  nature,  nor  created  the  least  alarm  in  the  breasts 
of  its  holy  inhabitants.  No  earthquakes  shook  the  ground, 
nor  rent  the  foundations  of  nature.  No  volcanoes  vomited 
iheir  rivers  of  lava,  nor  overwhelmed  the  plains  with  deluges 
of  fire. — No  barren  deserts  of  heath  and  sand  disfigured  the 
rich  landscape  of  the  world — no  tempests  nor  hurricanes 
tossed  the  ocean,  nor  scorching  heats,  nor  piercing  colds,  nor 
pestilence,  nor  disease,  annoyed  the  human  frame. — In  the 
paradisaical  state  of  the  world,  we  may  reasonably  suppose, 
that  all  the  elements  of  nature  contributed  directly  to  the 
pleasure  and  enjoyment  of  man,  and  of  the  other  tribes  of  ani- 
mated nature  ;  and  that  they  were  not  subjected,  as  they  now 
are,  to  the  operation  of  those  natural  agents  v.hich  so  frequent- 
ly spread  destruction  and  ruin  among  the  abodes  of  men.  To 
suppose  the  contrary  to  have  happened,  would  be  inconsist- 
ent with  the  state  of  pure  and  happy  mtelligences,  and  with 
the  benignity  of  the  Creator  ;  and  would  imply,  that  God  was 
either  unwilling,  or  unable  to  remove  such  physical  evils. 
But  we  cannot  suppose  it  beyond  the  limits  of  Infinite  Wis- 
dom and  Omnipotence,  to  create  and  arrange  a  world  entirely 
free  from  those  evils  and  inconveniences  which  now  flow  from 
the  operation  of  certain  physical  agents  ;  without,  at  the  sam<* 


88  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

time,  supposing  that  his  power  and  intelhgcnce  are  confined 
within  certain  bounds,  beyond  which  they  cannot  pass.  And, 
therefore,  if,  in  the  existing  constitution  of  things,  the  harmony 
of  nature  is  occasionally  disturbed,  and  its  beauty  defaced,  by 
earthquakes,  storms,  and  tempests — we  must  remember,  that 
the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  are  now  a  depraved  race  of  mor- 
tals, no  longer  adorned  with  primeval  purity  and  innocence  ; 
and  that  the  physical  economy  of  our  globe  has  undergone  a 
certain  derangement,  corresponding  to  the  moral  state  of  its 
present  occupants. — But  since  this  earth,  even  in  its  present 
state  of  degradation  and  derangement,  presents  to  the  view  of 
every  beholder  so  many  objects  of  beauty  and  magnificence, 
and  so  numerous  traces  of  Divine  Beneficence — we  may 
reasonably  conclude,  that  scenes  of  Divine  Wisdom  and 
Goodness,  far  more  glorious  and  transporting,  must  be  dis- 
played in  those  worlds  where  moral  evil  has  never  shed  its 
malign  influence,  and  where  the  inhabitants — superior  to  dis- 
ease and  death — bask  for  ever  in  the  regions  of  immortality. 
And,  therefore,  however  admirable  the  displays  of  Divine  Wis- 
dom may  appear  in  the  sublunary  scene  around  us,  they  must 
be  considered  as  inferior  to  these  which  are  exhibited  in  many 
other  provinces  of  Jehovah's  empire,  in  so  far  as  they  are 
blended  with  those  physical  derangements  which  indicate  his 
displeasure  against  the  sins  of  men. 


Were  we  now  to  direct  our  attention  to  the  mechanism  of 
animated  beings,  and  to  consider  the  numberless  contrivances 
and  adaptations  in  their  organical  structure  and  functions,  a 
thousand  instances  of  exquisite  wisdom  and  design,  still  more 
striking  and  admirable,  would  crowd  upon  our  view.  For, 
although  the  general  fabric  of  the  world,  and  the  immense 
variety  of  objects  it  contains,  are  evident  proofs  of  a  Wise  and 
Intelligent  Contriver,  yet  it  is  chiefiy  in  the  minute  and  delicate 
contrivances  of  organical  structures,  their  adaptation  to  the 
purposes  of  life,  motion,  and  enjoyment,  and  their  relation  and 
correspondence  to  the  surrounding  elements,  that  the  consum- 
mate skill  of  the  Great  Architect  of  nature  is  most  strikingly 
perceived.  But  as  it  forms  no  part  of  my  present  plan  to  en- 
ter on  so  extensive  a  ticld  of  illustration,  on  which  volumes 
miirht  be  v/ritten,  i  shall  content  myself  with  merely  stating 
an  example  or  two.     My  first  exaiaple  shall  be  taken  from 

THE    STRUCTURK    OF    THE    HUMAN    EYE. 

The  eye  is  one  of  the  nicest  pieces  of  mechanism  which  the 
human  undcrstandiisg  can  conteuiplate  ;  but  as  it  requires  'a 


STRUCTURE    OF    THE    EYE.  89 

«t  knowledge  of  its  anatomical  structure,  and  of  the  principles 
of  optics,  to  enable  us  to  appreciate  its  admirable  functions, 
I  shall  confine  myself  to  a  few  general  descriptions  and  re- 
marks. 

The  eye  is  nearly  Of  a  globular  form.  It  consists  chiefly  of 
three  coats,  and  three  humours.  The  first  or  outer  coat,  is 
termed  Sclerotica  ;  it  is  every  where  white  and  opaque,  and  is 
joined  at  its  anterior  edge  to  another  which  has  more  convexity 
than  any  other  part  of  the  globe  of  the  eye,  and,  being  exceed- 
ingly transparent,  is  called  the  Cornea,  These  two  parts  are 
perfectly  different  in  their  structure,  and  are  supposed,  by  some 
anatomists,  to  be  as  distinct  from  each  other  as  the  glass  of 
a  watch  is  from  the  case  into  which  it  is  fixed. — Next  within 
this  coat  is  that  called  the  Choroides^  on  account  of  its  being 
furnished  with  a  great  number  of  vessels.  It  serves,  as  it  were, 
,  for  a  lining  to  the  other,  and  is  joined  with  that  part  of  the  eye 
termed  iris.  The  iris  is  an  opaque  membrane  like  the  cho- 
roides,  but  of  different  colors  in  different  eyes,  as  grey,  black, 
or  hazel.  It  is  composed  of  two  sets  of  muscular  fibres,  the 
one  of  a  circular  form,  which  contracts  the  hole  in  the  middle, 
called  the  pupil,  when  the  light  is  too  strong  for  the  eye  ;  and 
the  other  of  radial  fibres,  tends  every  where  from  the  circum- 
ference of  the  iris  towards  the  middle  of  the  pupil ;  which 
fibres,  by  their  contractions,  dilate  and  enlarge  the  pupil,  when 
the  light  is  weak,  in  order  to  let  in  more  of  its  rays. — The 
third  coat  is  called  the  retina  upon  which  are  painted  the  ima- 
ges of  all  visible  objects,  by  the  rays  of  light  which  flow  from 
them.  It  spreads  like  net-work  all  over  the  inside  of  the  cho- 
roides,  and  is_ nothing  more  than  a  fine  expansion  of  the  optic 
nerve  ;  by  which  nerve  the  impressions  of  visible  objects  are 
i  conveyed  to  the  brain. 

I  The  inside  of  the  globe  of  the  eye,  within  these  tunics  or 
coats,  is  filled  with  three  humors,  called  the  aqueous,  the  crys- 
I  talline,  and  the  vitreous.  The  aqueous  humour  hes  at  the  fore- 
I  part  of  the  eye,  and  occupies  all  the  space  between  the  crys- 
i  talline  and  the  prominent  cornea.  It  has  the  same  specific 
!  gravity  and  refractive  power  as  water,  and  seems  chiefly 
';  of  use  to  prevent  the  crystalline  from  being  easily  bruised  by 
i  rubbing,  or  by  a  blow — and  perhaps  it  serves  for  the  crystal- 
j  line  humour  to  move  forward  in,  while  we  view  near  objects  ; 
'  and  backward,  for  remoter  objects  ;  without  which,  or  some 
other,  mechanism,  effecting  the  same  purpose  we  could 
not,  according  to  the  laws  of  optics,  perceive  objects  dis- 
;  tinctly,  when  placed  at  different  distances. — Behind  the  aque- 
1  ous  lies  the  crystalUm  humour,  which  is  shaped  like  a  double 
;  S 


90  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

convex  glass,  and  is  a  little  more  convex  on  the  back,  than 
on  the  fore-part.  This  humour  is  transparent  like  crystal, 
is  nearly  of  the  consistence  of  hard  jelly,  and  converges  the 
rays  which  pass  through  it,  from  visible  objects,  to  its  focus 
at  the  bottom,  or  back  part  of  the  eye. — The  vitreous  humour 
lies  behind  the  crystalhne,  and  fills  up  the  greatest  part  of  the 
orb  of  the  eye,  giving  it  a  globular  shape.  It  is  nearly  of  the 
consistence  of  the  white  of  an  egg,  and  very  transparent ;  its 
fore-part  is  concave,  for  the  crystalline  humour  to  lodge  in,  and 
its  back  part  being  convex,  the  retina  is  spread  over  it.  It 
serves  as  a  medium  to  keep  the  crystalline  humour  and  the 
retina  at  due  distance.  From  what  has  now  been  stated, 
it  is  obvious,  that  the  images  of  external  objects  are  depicted 
in  the  retina,  in  an  inverted  position,  in  the  same  mamier 
as  the  images  formed  by  a  common  convex  lens  ;  but  how 
the  mind,  in  this  case,  perceives  objects  erect,  is  a  question, 
about  which  the  learned  have  divided  in  their  opinions.* 

The  ball  of  the  eye,  as  now  described,  is  situated  in  a  bony 
cavity,  called  its  orbit,  composed  by  the  junction  of  seven  dif- 
ferent bones,  hollowed  out  at  their  edges.  This  cavity  is  in 
all  the  vacant  spaces  filled  with  a  loose  fat,  which  serves  as  a 
proper  medium  for  the  eye  to  rest  in,  and  as  a  socket  in  which 
it  may  move.  It  is  sheltered  by  the  eye-brows,  which  are 
provided  with  hair,  to  prevent  the  descending  sweat  of  the 
forehead  from  running,  down  into  it.  As  a  still  farther  protec- 
tion to  this  delicate  organ,  it  is  furnished  with  the  eye-lid, 
which  like  a  curtain,  is  drawn  over  it  with  inconceivable  swift- 
ness, for  its  security,  on  the  approach  of  danger.  It  also 
serves  to  wipe  it  from  superfluous  moisture,  and  to  cover  it 
during  sleep.  In  the  upper  part  of  its  orbit,  it  is  furnished 
with  a  gland,  to  supply  it  with  water  sufficient  to  wash  off  dust, 
and  to  keep  its  outer  surface  moist,  without  which  the  cornea 
would  be  less  transparent,  and  the  rays  of  light  would  be  dis- 
turbed in  their  passage  ;  and  the  superfluous  water  is  convey- 
ed to  the  nose  through  a  perforation  in  the  bone. 

For  the  purpose  of  enabling  the  eye  to  move  in  its  socket, 
six  muscles  are  provided.  These  are  admirably  contrived  to 
move  it  in  every  direction,  upwards  or  downwards,  to  the  right, 
or  to  the  left,  or  in  whatever  direction  the  occasion  may  re- 
quire ;  and  thus  we  are  spared  the  trouble  of  turning  our  heads 
continually  towards  the  objects  we  wish  to  inspect.     If  we 

+  An  idea  of  tlie  relative  positions  of  the  coats  and  humours  described 
above,  may  be  obtained  by  a  simple  inspection  of  the  Plate,  Fig.  6. — Fig. 
5,  represents  a  front  vieiv  of  the  human  eye,  as  it  appears  in  its  natural 
state,  and  exiiibits  the  relative  positions  of  the  Cornea,  Iris,  and  Pupil, 


STRUCTURE    OF    THE    EYE.  91 

want  to  look  upward,  one  of  these  muscles  lifts  up  the  orb  of 
the  eye ;  if  we  would  cast  our  eyes  to  the  ground,  another 
muscle  pulls  them  down.  A  third  muscle  moves  the  globe 
outwards  towards  the  temples,  and  a  fourth  draws  it  towards 
the  nose.  A  fifth,  which  shdes  within  a  cartilaginous  ring, 
like  a  cord  over  a  pulley,  and  is  fastened  to  the  globe  of  the 
eye  in  two  points,  makes  it  roll  about  at  pleasure.  A  sixth  lies 
under  the  eye,  and  is  designed  to  temper  and  restrain,  within 
proper  bounds,  the  action  of  the  rest,  to  keep  it  steadily  fixed 
on  the  object  it  beholds,  and  to  prevent  those  frightful  contor- 
tions Avhich  otherwise  might  take  place.  By  these,  and  a 
multitude  of  other  mechanical  contrivances,  all  acting  in  har- 
monious combination,  the  eye,  as  a  natural  telescope  and  mi- 
croscope, is  made  to  advance,  to  recede,  to  move  to  the  right, 
and  to  the  left,  and  in  every  other  direction  ;  and  to  view  near 
and  distant  objects  with  equal  distinctness  ;  so  that  a  single 
eye,  by  the  variety  of  positions  it  may  assume,  performs  the 
office  of  a  thousand.* 

The  utility  of  these  several  movements,  and  the  pain  and 
inconvenience  which  would  be  suffered,  were  any  of  them 
wanting,  can  scarcely  be  conceived,  by  any  one  whose  eyes 
have  always  remained  in  a  sound  state.  We  are  so  much  ac- 
customed to  the  regular  exercise  of  our  visual  organs,  that  we 
seldom  reflect  on  the  numerous  delicate  springs  which  must  be 
set  in  action,  before  the  functions  of  vision  can,  with  ease,  be 
performed.  But  were  any  one  of  the  muscular  organs,  now 
described,  to  fail  in  its  functions,  we  should  soon  experience 
so  many  inconveniences,  as  would  throw  a  gloom  on  all  the 
other  comforts  of  life  ;  and  convince  us,  how  much  we  are  in- 
debted, every  moment,  to  the  provident  care  and  goodness  of 
our  Beneficent  Creator,  for  thousands  of  enjoyments  which 
we  seldom  think  of,  and  for  Avhich  we  are  never  sufficiently 
grateful. — "  With  much  compassion,  as  well  as  astonishment, 
at  the  goodness  of  our  loving  Creator,"  says  Dr.  Nieuwentyt, 
"  have  I  considered  the  sad  state  of  a  certain  gentleman,  who, 
as  to  the  rest,  was  in  pretty  good  health,  but  only  wanted  the 
use  of  those  two  little  muscles  that  serve  to  lift  up  the  eyelid, 
and  so  had  almost  lost  the  use  of  his  sight — being  forced,  as 
long  as  this  defect  lasted,  to  shove  up  his  eyelids  every  mo- 
ment, with  his  o^Yn  hands. "t 

How  admirable,  then,  is  the  formation  of  the  eye,  and  how 

♦  Flies  and  other  insects,  whose  eyes  are  immoveable,  have  several  thou- 
sands of  distinct  globes  in  each  eye.     See  note  page  SO. 
t  Nieuwentyt's  Religious  Philosopher,  vol.  1.  p.  232. 


92  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

grateful  ought  we  to  feel  at  the  consideration,  that  we  are  per- 
mitted to  enjoy  all  the  transporting  pleasures  of  vision,  without 
the  least  perplexity  or  effort  on  our  part !  If  the  loss  of  action 
in  a  single  muscle  produces  so  many  distressing  sensa- 
tions and  efforts,  what  would  be  the  consequence  if  all  the 
muscles  of  the  eye  were  wanting  or  deranged?  And,  is  it  man 
that  governs  these  nice  and  intricate  movements  ?  Or  is  it  the 
eye  itself,  as  a  self-directing  machine,  that  thus  turns  around, 
seasonably  and  significantly,  towards  every  visible  object  1 
Man  knows  neither  the  organs  of  vision,  nor  the  functions 
they  ought  to  perform.  The  eye  is  only  an  unconscious  ma- 
chine, in  the  hands  of  a  Superior  Intelligence,  as  a  watch,  or 
a  steam  engine,  is  in  the  hands  of  a  mechanic.  It  is  God 
alone  who  constantly  performs  its  movements,  according  to 
certain  laws,  which  he  has  submitted  to  our  inclinations  and, 
desires  ;  ^^fo7^  in  him  we  live  and  move.''^ — We  are  desirous  to 
see  certain  objects  around  us  :  this  is  all  the  share  we  have 
in  the  operations  of  our  eyes  ;  and  without  perplexing  our 
understanding,  without  the  least  care  or  management,  in  re-< 
gard  to  any  of  the  functions,  we  can,  in  a  few  moments,  take 
a  survey  of  the  beauties  and  sublimities  of  an  extensive  land- 
scape, and  of  the  glories  of  the  vault  of  heaven.  Thus,  the 
Divine  Being  operates  not  only  in  this,  but  in  a  thousand  dif- 
ferent ways,  in  the  various  senses  and  contrivances  which  be- 
long to  our  animal  system  ;  and  yet,  thoughtless  and  ungrate- 
ful man  often  inquires,  in  the  language  of  doubt  and  hesitation, 
"  Where  is  God  my  Maker  ?" — He  is  in  us,  and  around  us, 
directing  every  movement  in  our  animal  frame  to  act  in  har- 
mony with  the  surrounding  elements,  and  to  minister  to  our 
enjoyments  ;  and  it  is  only  when  his  exquisite  operations  are 
deranged  by  external  violence,  that  we  feel  inconvenience  oi 
pain. 

Such  are  only  a  few  general  outlines  of  the  structure  of  the 
eye  :  for  no  notice  has  been  taken  of  the  numerous  minute 
veins,  arteries,  nerves,  lymphatics,  glands,  and  many  other 
particulars  which  are  connected  with  this  organ.  But,  all  this 
delicate  and  complicated  apparatus,  in  the  structure  of  the  eye, 
would  have  been  of  no  use  whatever  for  the  purpose  of  vision, 
had  not  a  distinct  substance  been  created  to  act  upon  it, 
exactly  adapted  to  its  nature  and  functions.  .  In  order  that  the 
eye  might  serve  as  the  medium  of  our  perceptions  of  visible 
objects,  light  was  formed,  and  made  to  travel  from  its  source 
at  the  rate  of  195,000  miles  in  a  second  of  time.  This  prodi- 
gious velocity  of  light  is,  doubtless,  essential  to  the  nature  of 
vision. ;  since  it  actually  exists,  and  since  we  find  that  it  radi- 


STRUCTURE    OF    THE    EYE.  93 

ates  with  the  same  swiftness  from  the  most  distant  visible 
star,  as  from  the  smi  which  enhghtens  our  system.  To  abate 
the  force  of  this  amazing  velocity,  its  particles  have  been 
formed  almost  infinitely  small — a  circumstance  which  alone 
prevents  this  delightful  visitant  from  becoming  the  most  tre- 
mendous and  destructive  element  in  nature.  Dr.  Nieuwentyt 
has  computed,  that,  in  one  second  of  time,  there  flows  418,- 
680,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000* 
particles  of  light  out  of  a  burning  candle,  which  number  con- 
tains at  least  6,337,242,000,000  l;imes  the  number  of  grains  of 
sand  in  the  whole  earth,  supposing  every  cubic  inch  of  the 
earth  to  contain  a  milUon  of  grains.  It  has  been  justly  re- 
marked, by  Mr.  Ferguson  and  other  authors,  that  "  if  the 
particles  of  light  were  so  large,  that  a  million  of  them,  were 
equal  in  bulk  to  an  ordinary  grain  of  sand,  we  durst  no  more 
open  our  eyes  to  the  light,  than  suffer  sand  to  be  shot  point 
blank  against  them,  from  the  mouth  of  a  cannon.'*  It  may 
also  be  remarked,  that  the  property  which  all  bodies  possess, 
of  reflecting  light,  is  essential  to  the  purpose  of  vision,  without 
which,  the  splendid  and  variegated  scene  of  nature  would  be 
changed  into  a  dreadful  gloom  ;  and  were  the  rays  of  light  of 
one  uniform  color,  and  not  compounded  of  various  hues,  one 
object  could  not  be  distinguished  from  another,  and  the  beauti- 
ful aspect  of  our  globe  would  instantly  disappear. 

Thus  we  see,  that  the  eye  is  adapted  to  light,  and. light  to  the 
eye  ;  and  in  this  admirable  adaptation  the  wisdom  of  the 
Creator  is  strikingly  displayed.  For  light  has  no  effect  upon 
the  ear,  or  upon  any  other  organ  of  sensation  :  so  as  to  pro- 
duce a  perception  of  visible  objects  ;  as,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
undulations  of  the  air  have  no  effect  upon  the  eye,  so  as  to  pro- 
duce the  sensation  of  souncL  The  eye  did  not  produce  the 
light,  nor  did  the  light  form  the  eye  ;  they  are  perfectly  distinct 
from  each  other,  yet  so  nicely  adapted  in  every  particular 
that  had  any  one  quality  or  circumstance  been  wanting  in 
either,  the  functions  of  vision  could  not  have  been  performed 
in  the  manner  in  which  they  now  operate  ;  which  strikingly 
demonstrates,  that  one  and  the  same  Intelhgent  Being,  pos- 
sessed of  a  wisdom  beyond  our  comprehension,  formed  the 
curious  structure  of  the  eye,  and  endued  the  rays  of  light  with 
those  properties  of  color,  motion,  and  minuteness,  which  are 
calculated,  through  the  medium  of  this  organ,  to  produce,  in 
sentient  beings,  the  ideas  of  visible  objects.  And,  surely,  he 
never  intended  that  such  exquisite  skill  and  contrivance  should 

*  See  Appendix,  No.  V. 
8* 


94 


THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 


be  altogether  overlooked  by  rational  beings,  for  whose  pleasure 
and  enjoyment  all  this  benevolent  care  is  exercised. 

MANNER    IN    WHICH    VISION    IS    PERFORMED. 

Let  us  now  attend  a  little  to  the  manner  in  which  vision  is 
performed,  by  the  medium  of  light  acting  on  the  organs  of 
sight.  If  we  take  a  common  convex  glass — a  reading  glass  for 
example — and  hold  it  at  some  distance  from  a  candle  or  a 
window  sash,  placing  a  piece  of  white  paper  behind  the  glass, 
at  the  distance  of  its  focus,  the  image  of  the  candle  or  sash  will 
be  painted  on  the  paper,  in  an  inverted  position.  This  expe- 
riment may  be  performed,  with  a  better  effect,  by  darkening  a 
room,  and  placing  the  convex  glass  in  a  hole  cut  out  of  the 
window  shutter,  when  the  rays  of  light  flowing  from  the  objects 
without,  and  passing  through  the  glass,  will  form  a  picture  of 
the  objects  opposite  the  window,  on  the  white  paper,  adorned 
with  the  most  beautiful  colors.  In  a  manner  similar  to  this, 
are  the  images  of  external  objects  depicted  on  the  back  part  of 
the  inner  coat  or  membrane  of  the  eye.  The  rays  of  light, 
proceeding  in  all  directions,  from  surrounding  objects,  and 
failing  on  the  eye,  are  transmitted  through  the  pupil  ;  and  be- 
ing refracted  by  the  different  humours,  (particularly  by  the 
crystalline  humour,  which  acts  the  part  of  a  convex  lens,)  they 
converge  to  a  focus  on  the  retina,  where  the  images  of  visible 
objects  are  painted  in  an  mverted  position  ;  and,  by  means  of 
the  optic  nerve,  these  images  are  conveyed  to  the  mind. 

The  following  figure  will  perhaps  more  distinctly  illustrate 


this  point.  Let  a,  6,  c,  x,  y,  represent  the  globe  of  the  eye^ 
and  A,  B,  C,  an  object  at  a  certain  distance  from  it.  Now,  it 
is  well  known  that  every  point  of  a  visible  object  sends  out  rays 
of  light  in  all  directions  ;  and,  therefore,  a  certain  portion  of 
the  rays  which  flow  from  the  object  ABC,  will  fall  upon  the 
cornea^  between  x  and  y,  and,  passing  through  the  aqueous 
humour,  w,  n,  a!id  the  crystalline  humour,  o,p,  and  the  vitreous 
humour^  D  E,  will  be  converged  to  a  focus  on  the  retina,  and 


WONDERS   OP  VISION.  95 

paint  a  distinct  picture,  a  b  c,  of  the  object  A  B  C,  in  an  inver- 
ted position.  The  rays  from  the  point  A  of  the  object,  after 
being  refracted  by  the  different  humours,  will  be  brought  to  a 
point  at  a  ;  those  from  B,  will  be  converged  at  b  ;  and  those 
from  C,  at  c  ;  and,  of  course,  the  intermediate  rays  between 
A  B,  and  B  C,  will  be  formed  between  a  6,  and  b  c,  and  the 
object  will  become  visible  by  means  of  its  image  or  represen- 
tation being  painted  on  the  retina,  in  all  the  colors  and  propor- 
tions which  belong  to  it.  If  we  take  a  bullock's  eye,  and  cut 
off  the  three  coats  from  the  back  part,  and  put  a  piece  of  thin 
white  paper  over  that  part,  and  hold  the  eye  towards  the  win- 
dow, or  any  bright  object,  we  shall  see  the  image  of  the  object 
depicted  upon  the  paper,  and  in  an  inverted  position,  as  stated 
above. 

In  order  that  we  may  more  distinctly  perceive  the  wonders 
of  vision,  and  the  numerous  circumstances  on  which  it  de- 
pends, let  us  suppose  ourselves  placed  on  an  eminence,  which 
commands  a  view  of  a  variegated  and  extensive  landscape. 
Let  us  suppose  ourselves  stationed  on  Arthur's  seat,  or  on  the 
top  of  Salisbury  Crags,  in  the  vicinity  of  Edinburgh.  Turning 
our  face  to  the  north-west,  the  city,  with  its  castles,  spires,  and 
stately  edifices,  presents  itself  to  our  view.  Beyond  it,  on  the 
north  and  west,  a  beautiful  country,  adorned  with  villas,  plan- 
tations, and  fertile  fields,  stretches  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reach, 
till  the  view  is  bounded  by  the  castle  of  Sterling,  at  the  distance 
of  more  than  thirty  miles.  On  the  right  hand,  we  behold  the 
port  of  Leith,  the  shipping  in  the  roads,  the  coast  of  Fife,  the 
isles  of  Inchkeith  and  of  May,  and  the  Frith  of  Forth,  gradu- 
ally losing  itself  in  the  German  ocean.  If  we  suppose  the 
length  of  this  landscape  to  be  forty  miles,  and  its  breadth 
twenty-five,  it  will,  of  course,  comprehend  an  area  of  a  thou- 
sand square  miles. 

The  first  circumstance  which  strikes  the  mind,  is  the  immense 
imdtitude  of  rays  of  reflected  light  which  flow,  in  all  directions, 
from  the  myriads  of  objects  which  compose  the  surrounding 
scene.  In  order  to  form  a  rude  idea  of  this  infinity  of  radia- 
tions, I  fix  my  attention  on  a  single  object.  I  direct  my  eye 
to  Nelson's  monument,  on  the  Calton  hill.  From  the  parapet 
at  the  top,  a  thousand  different  points  send  forth  a  thousand 
different  cones  of  rays,  which,  entering  my  eye,  render  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  it  distinctly  visible,  besides  myriads  of  rays  from 
the  same  points,  which  flow  in  every  other  direction  through 
the  open  spaces  of  the  atmosphere  which  surround  them. 
How  many  thousands  of  millions,  then,  of  different  radiations, 
must  be  issuing  forth  every  moment  from  the  whole  mass  of 


96  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

the  monument !  And  if  one  object  pours  forth  such  a  flood 
of  rays,  how  immense  must  be  the  number  of  radiations 
which  are  issuing  from  all  the  objects  which  compose  this 
extensive  landscape  !  Myriads  of  rays,  from  myriads  of  ob- 
jects, must  be  crossing  each  other  in  an  infinity  of  directions, 
so  that  the  mind  is  confounded  at  the  apparent  confusion  which 
seems  to  exist  in  this  immensity  of  radiations  ;  yet  every  ray 
passes  forward  in  the  crowd,  in  the  most  perfect  order,  and 
without  being  blended  or  confused  with  any  other  ray,  produces 
its  specific  effect  on  every  eye  that  is  open  to  receive  it.  But 
this  is  not  all :  these  millions  of  rays  which  flow  from  the 
minutest  points  of  the  surrounding  scene,  before  they  can  pro- 
duce the  sensation  of  vision,  and  form  a  picture  of  the  land- 
scape on  the  retina,  must  be  compressed  into  a  space  little 
more  than  one-eighth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  before  they  can 
enter  the  pupil  of  the  eye  ;  yet  they  all  pass  through  this  small 
aperture  without  the  least  confusion,  and  paint  the  images  of 
their  respective  objects  in  exactly  the  same  order  in  wnich 
these  objects  are  arranged.  Another  circumstance  demands 
attention.  The  rays  which  proceed  from  the  objects  before 
me,  are  not  all  directed  to  the  spot  where  I  stand,  but  are  dif- 
fused throughout  every  point  of  the  surrounding  space,  ready 
to  produce  the  same  effect,  wherever  sentient  beings  are  pre- 
sent to  receive  them.  Were  the  whole  inhabitants  of  Edin- 
burgh placed  on  the  sloping  ^declivity  of  Arthur's  seat,  and 
along  the  top  of  Salisbury  Crags,  and  were  millions  of  other 
spectators  suspended  in  the  surrounding  atmosphere,  similar 
sensations  would  be  produced,  and  a  scene  similar  to  that 
which  I  now  behold,  would  be  depicted  in  every  eye.  Amidst 
the  infinity  of  cones  of  light,  crossing  each  other  in  aninrinity 
of  directions,  no  confusion  would  ensue,  but  every  spectator, 
whose  eyes  were  in  a  sound  state,  would  obtain  a  conect  view 
of  the  scene  before  him  ;  and  hence  it  happens,  that,  when- 
ever I  shift  my  position  to  the  right  hand  or  to  the  left,  other 
streams  of  light  enter  my  eye,  and  produce  the  same  effect. 

Let  me  now  attend  to  another  circumstance,  no  less  admi- 
rable than  the  preceding,  and  that  is,  the  distinct  impression 
which  I  have  of  the  sha{)e,  color,  and  motion,  of  the  multipli- 
citv  of  objects  I  am  now  contemplating,  and  the  small  space 
within  which  their  images  are  depicted  at  the  bottom  of  my 
eye.  Could  a  painter,  after  a  long  series  of  ingenious  efforts, 
delineate  the  extensive  landscape  now  before  me,  on  a  piece 
of  paper  not  exceeding  the  size  of  a  silver  sixpence,  so  that 
every  object  might  be  as  distinctly  seen,  in  its  proper  shape 
and  color,  as  it  now  appears  when  I  survey  the  scene  around 


WONDERS    OF    VISION.  97 

me,  he  would  be  incomparably  superior  to  all  the  masters  of 
his  art  that  ever  went  before  him.  This  effect,  which  tar 
transcends  the  utmost  efforts  of  human  genius,  is  accom- 
plished in  a  moment,  in  millions  of  instances,  by  the  hand  of 
nature,  or,  in  other  words,  by  "  the  finger  of  God."  All  the 
objects  I  am  now  surveying,  comprehending  an  extent  of  a 
thousand  square  miles,  are  accurately  delineated  in  the  bottom 
of  my  eye,  on  a  space  less  them  half  an  inch  in  diameter.  How 
delicate,  then,  must  be  the  strokes  of  that  Divine  pencil,  which 
has  formed  such  a  picture !  I  turn  iny  eyes  to  the  castle  of 
Edinburgh,  which  appears  one  of  the  most  conspicuous  ob- 
jects in  my  field  of  view.  Supposing  that  portion  of  it  which 
strikes  my  eye  to  be  500  feet  long,  and  90  in  height,  I  find,  by 
calculation,  that  it  occupies  only  the  six  hundred  thousandth 
part  of  the  whole  landscape,  and,  consequently,  fills  in  my  eye 
no  more  than  the  twelve  hundred  thousandth  part  of  an  inch. 
I  next  direct  my  eye  towards  the  Frith  of  Forth,  and  perceive 
a  steamboat  sailing  between  Queensferry  and  Newhaven,  I 
distinctly  trace  its  motion  for  the  space  of  40  minutes,  at  the 
end  of  which  it  reaches  the  chain  pier  at  Newhaven,  having 
passed  over  a  space  of  five  miles  in  length,  which  is  but  the 
eighth  part  of  the  lineal  extent  of  the  landscape  in  that  direc- 
tion ;  and,  consequently,  occupies,  in  the  picture  formed  on 
my  retina,  a  lineal  space  of  only  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  in 
'extent.  And,  if  the  boat  be  reckoned  about  88  feet  in  length, 
its  image  is  only  the  three  hundredth  part  of  this  extent ;  and 
of  course,  fills  a  space  in  the  eye  of  only  the  four  thousand 
eight  hundredth  part  of  a  lineal  inch.  Yet,  my  perception  of 
the  motion  of  the  vessel  could  be  produced  only  by  a  corres- 
ponding motion  of  its  image  in  my  eye  ;  that  is,  by  the  gra- 
dual motion  of  a  point  one  4,800th  of  an  inch  in  diameter, 
over  a  space  one  sixteenth  of  an  inch  in  length.  Flow  incon- 
ceivably fine  and  accurate,  then,  must  be  the  impression  of 
those  strokes  which  the  rays  of  light,  from  visible  objects,  pro- 
duce on  the  retina  of  the  eye  !  The  mind  is  lost  in.  wonder 
when  it  attempts  to  trace  so  exquisite  and  admirable  an  effect. 
I  take  a  reflecting  telescope,  and,  through  it,  view  some  of 
the  distant  parts  of  the  landscape.  My  wonder  is  still  in- 
creased, when  I  consider  the  new  directions  into  which  the 
rays  of  light  are  bent — the  crossings  and  recrossings,  the  re- 
fractions, and  reflections,  that  take  place  between  the  mirrors 
and  the  lenses  of  the  instrument,  and  the  successive  images 
that  are  formed — so  that,  instead  of  a  scene  of  confusion, 
which,  previous  to  experience,  might  have  been  expected  from 
^he  numerous  additional  bendings  and  intersections  of  the  rays 


98  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

— I  now  perceive  hundreds  of  objects,  with  the  most  perfect 
distinctness,  which  were  before  invisible.  Rays  of  hght  from 
distant  and  minute  objects,  which  a  moment  before  made  no 
sensible  impression  on  my  eye,  being  collected  and  variously 
modified  by  the  telescope,  now  paint  a  vivid  representation  of 
their  objects,  in  their  true  figures,  colors,  and  positions. 

From  a  consideration  of  the  innumerable  modifications  of 
the  rays  of  light,  and  of  the  immense  variety  of  effects  they 
produce  in  every  region  of  the  earth — I  am  led  to  investigate 
ichat  proportion  of  the  solar  light  falis  upon  our  globe,  in  order 
to  produce  so  diversified  a  scene  of  sublimity  and  beauty. 
Supposing  the  sun's  rays  to  be  chiefly  confined,  in  their  effects, 
within  the  limits  of  the  planetary  system,  since  they  diverge  in 
every  direction,  they  must  fill  a  cubical  space  3,600,000,000 
miles  in  diameter ;  which,  consequently,  will  contain  about 
24,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000  of  cubical  miles,  so 
that  an  eye,  placed  in  any  point  of  this  vast  space,  would  re- 
ceive a  distinct  impression  from  the  solar  rays.  The  solidity 
of  the  earth  is  about  264,000,000,000  cubical  miles,  and, 
therefore,  it  receives  only  the  90:000,000,1 '00,0: io,uuuth  parts  of  the  light 
which  fills  the  sphere  of  the  solar  system.  So  that  the  light 
which  cheers  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  world,  and  unveils  such 
a  variety  of  beautiful  and  magnificent  objects,  is  nothing  more 
than  a  single  stream  of  celestial  radiance  out  of  ninety  thou- 
sand billions  of  similar  streams,  which  the  great  source  of 
light  is  every  moment  diffusing  throughout  the  surrounding 
worlds.  But  the  solar  rays  are  not  confined  within  the  bounds 
of  the  planetary  system  ;  their  influence  extends,  in  every  di- 
rection, as  far  as  the  nearest  stars,  filling  a  cubical  space  at 
least  40,000,000,000,000  miles  in  diameter,  and  which  con- 
tains 33,500,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,- 
000,  or  thirty-three  thousand,  five  hundred  sextillions  of  cubi- 
cal miles.  And,  were  we  to  institute  comparisons  and  calcu- 
lations, with  respect  to  the  possible  variety  of  effects  they 
might  produce  throughout  this  immense  region,  whole  pages 
might  be  filled  with  figures,  cyphers,  and  computations.  We 
might  compute  how  many  globes  similar  to  the  earth,  or  any  of 
the  larger  planets,  might  be  contained  within  this  vast  space, 
allowing  several  hundreds  of  cubical  miles  of  empty  space 
around  each  globe — how  many  myriads  of  refractions  and  re- 
flections the  rays  of  light  would  suffer,  in  regard  to  the  pecu- 
liar objects  connected  with  every  one  of  these  globes — hov/ 
many  eyes  of  sentient  beings  might  be  affected  by  the  diver- 
sities of  color,  shape,  and  motion  which  would  thus  be  pro- 
duced— and  what  a  variety  of  shades  of  light  and  color,  and 


WONDERS  OF    VISION.  99 

what  a  diversity  of  scenery  would  be  produced,  according  to 
the  distances  of  the  respective  globes  from  the  central  lumi- 
nary. After  what  we  have  just  now  stated,  however,  we  may 
rest  satisfied,  with  joining  in  the  pious  exclamation  of  one  who 
had  just  jfinished  a  devout  survey  of  the  structure  of  the  hu- 
man frame  :  "  Marvellous  are  thy  works,  and  that  my  soul 
knoweth  right  well.     How  precious  are  thy  thoughts  unto  me, 

0  God  !"  (or,  aa  the  words  might  be  rendered,)  "  How  pre- 
cious are  thy  wonderful  contrivances  concerning  me,  O  God  ! 
how  great  is  the  sum  of  them  !  If  I  should  count  them,  they 
are  more  in  number  than  the  sand."     In  what  direction  soever 

1  turn  mine  eyes  ;  whatever  portion  of  thy  works  I  investi- 
gate, " /a»i  sh7/ ^(;i7/i  f/iee."*  Thine  infinity  and  unsearch- 
able wisdom  are  impressed  on  every  object,  so  that  I  feel  my- 
self every  moment  encompassed  by  thine  immensity,  and  am 
irresistibly  led  to  wonder  and  adore. 

I  shall  now  conclude  these  reflections  on  vision,  with  two  or 
three  additional  remarks.  It  is  worthy  of  notice,  in  the  first 
place,  that  the  eye  has  the  power  of  adapting  itself  to  objects 
placed  at  different  distances.  By  means  of  some  delicate 
pieces  of  mechanism,  not  hitherto  satisfactorily  explained,  it 
can  perceive,  with  distinctness,  a  large  object,  at  the  distance 
of  six  miles,  and  the  next  moment  it  can  adjust  itself  to  the 
distinct  perception  of  an  object  at  the  distance  of  six  inches  ; 
so  that  it  acts  the  part  both  of  a  telescope  and  a  microscope, 
and  can  be  instantaneouslij  adjusted  to  perform  either  as  the 
one  instrument,  or  as  the  other.  This  necessarily  supposes  a 
corresponding  alteration  in  the  state  of  the  organ,  every  time 
we  lift  our  eye  from  a  near,  to  look  at  a  distant  object.  Either 
the  cornea  is  somewhat  flattened,  or  the  crystalline  humour  is 
pushed  backwards,  or  both  these  chcinges,  in  combination  with 
others,  may  concur  in  causing  the  rays  from  distant  objects  to 
unite  exactly  on  the  retina,  without  which,  distinct  vision  can- 
not be  produced.  This  contrivance,  in  whatever  kind  of  me- 
chanism it  may  consist,  is  one  which  art  would  vainly  attempt 
to  imitate.  We  can  see  objects  that  are  near  us,  with  a  mi- 
croscope, and  those  that  are  distant,  with  a  telescope  ;  but  we 
would  in  vain  attempt  to  see  distant  objects  with  the  former, 
or  those  that  are  only  a  few  inches  from  us,  with  the  latter, 
without  a  variety  of  changes  being  made  in  the  apertures  and 
positions  of  the  glasses  belonging  to  the  respective  instru- 
ments. In  this  respect,  therefore,  as  well  as  in  every  other, 
the  eye  is  an  optical  instrument,  incomparably  superior  to  any 

*  Psalm  cxxxix.  14,  17,  18, 


100  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

instrument  or  imitation  that  art  can  produce  ;  and,  were  it  not 
for  the  pecuhar  property  now  described,  it  would  be  ahnost 
unfit  for  the  purpose  of  vision,  notwithstanding  all  the  other 
delicate  contrivances  which  enter  into  its  construction.  If  it 
were  adjusted  only  for  the  distinct  perception  of  distant  ob- 
jects, every  object  within  the  limits  of  an  ordinary  apartment 
would  appear  a  mass  of  confusion  ;  and  were  it  adjusted  solely 
for  viewing  objects  within  the  limits  of  a  few  feet  or  inches, 
the  glories  of  the  heavens,  and  the  beautiful  landscape  of  the 
earth,  would  be  veiled  from  our  sight,  as  if  they  were  envelop- 
ed in  a  mist. 

Another  circumstance  worthy  of  attention,  is,  the  power 
which  the  j^npil  of  the  eye  possesses  of  contracting  or  enlarg- 
ing the  aperture  or  hole  through  which  the  light  is  admitted. 
When  the  light  is  too  weak,  the  pupil  is  enlarged  ;  when  it  is 
too  strong,  it  is  again  contracted.  Accordingly,  we  find,  that 
when  we  enter  a  darksome  apartment,  though,  at  first,  nothing 
can  be  accurately  distinguished,  yet,  in  the  course  of  a  minute 
or  two,  when  the  pupil  has  had  time  to  dilate,  we  can  perceive 
most  objects  with  considerable  distinctness.  And,  on  the 
other  hand,  when  we  pass  from  a  dark  room  to  an  apartment 
lighted  up  with  a  number  of  lustres,  we  feel  uneasy  at  the 
sudden  glare,  till  the  pupil  has  contracted  itself,  and  excluded 
a  portion  of  the  superfluous  rays.  Were  it  not  for  this  pro- 
perty, we  should,  for  the  most  part,  either  be  surrounded  with 
a  disagreeable  gloom,  or  oppressed  with  an  excessive  splen- 
dor. It  is  for  this  reason,  that  we  are  unable  to  look  upon  the 
sun  %\ithout  being  dazzled,  and  are  under  the  necessity  of 
closing  the  eye-lids,  or  of  turning  away  the  head,  when  a 
strong  light  suddenly  succeeds  to  darkness. 

Again,  it  may  not  be  improper  to  observe,  how  wisely  the 
Author  of  Nature  has  fixed  the  distance  at  which  we  ordina- 
rily see  near  objects  most  distinctly.  This  distance  is  gener- 
ally from  five  to  eight  inches  from  the  eye.  But  had  the  eye 
been  formed  for  distinct  vision,  at  the  distance  of  only  one 
inch,  the  object  would  have  obstructed  the  light,  and  room 
would  have  been  wanting  for  the  performance  of  many  neces- 
sary operations,  which  require  the  hand  to  intervene  between 
the  eye  and  the  object.  And  had  the  limits  of  distinct  vision 
for  near  objects  been  beyond  two  or  three  feet,  sufficient  light 
would  not  have  been  afforded  for  the  inspection  of  minute  ob- 
jects, and  we  could  neither  have  written  a  letter,  nor  have  read 
a  book,  with  the  same  convenience  and  ease  we  are  now  ena- 
bled to  do. 

From  the  preceding  descriptions  and  remarks,  it  will  evi 


WONDERS    OF    VISION.  101 

dently  appear,  with  what  admirable  skill  the  different  parts  of 
the  organs  of  vision  are  constructed,  and  how  nicely  they  are 
adapted  to  the  several  ends  they  were  intended  to  subserve. — 
Were  any  one  of  these  parts  wanting,  or  obstructed  in  its 
functions,  vision  would  either  be  impeded,  ^r  rendered  painful 
and  distressing,  or  completely  destroyed.  If  any  of  the  hu- 
mors of  the  eye  were  wanting — if  they  were  less  transparent 
— if  they  were  of  a  different  refractive  power — or  if  they  were 
of  a  greater  or  less  convexity  than  they  now  are,  however 
minute  the  alteration  might  be,  vision  would  inevitably  be 
obstructed,  and  every  object  would  appear  confused  and  in- 
distinct. If  the  retina,  on  which  the  images  of  objects  are 
painted,  were  fiat,  instead  of  being  concave,  while  objects  in 
the  middle  of  the  view  appeared  distinct,  every  object  towards 
the  sides  would  appear  dim  and  confused.  If  the  cornea 
were  as  opaque  as  the  sclerotica,  to  v/hich  it  is  joined,  or  if 
the  retina  were  not  connected  with  the  optic  nerve,  no  visible 
object  could  possibly  be  perceived.  If  one  of  the  six  mus- 
cles of  the  eye  were  wanting,  or  impeded  in  its  functions,  we 
could  not  turn  it  to  the  right ;  if  a  second  were  deficient,  we 
could  not  turn  it  to  the  letl; ;  if  a  third,  we  could  not  lift  it  up- 
wards ;  if  a  fourth,  we  could  not  move  it  downwards  ;  and  if 
it  were  deprived  of  the  other  two  muscles,  it  would  be  apt  to 
roll  about  in  frightfiil  contortions.  If  the  eyes  were  placed  in 
any  other  part  of  the  body  than  the  head — if  they  were  much 
more  prominent  than  they  now  are — if  they  were  not  sur- 
rounded by  the  bony  socket  in  which  they* are  lodged — and  if 
they  were  not  frequently  covered  by  the  eye-lid — they  would 
be  exposed  to  a  thousand  accidents  from  which  they  are  now 
protected.  If  they  wanted  moisture,  and  if  they  were  not  fre- 
quently wiped  by  the  eye-lids,  they  would  become  less  trans- 
parent, and  more  liable  to  be  inflamed  ;  and  if  they  were  not 
sheltered  by  the  eye-brows,  the  sweat  and  moisture  of  the 
forehead  would  frequently  annoy  them.  Were  the  light  which 
acts  upon  them  devoid  of  color — were  it  not  reflected  from 
objects  in  every  direction — were  its  motion  less  swift,  or  its 
particles  much  larger  than  they  now  are — in  short,  were  any 
one  circumstance  connected  with  the  structure  of  this  organ, 
and  with  the  modification  of  the  rays  of  light  materially  dif- 
ferent from  its  present  arrangement,  we  should  either  be  subject- 
ed to  the  hourly  recurrence  of  a  thousand  painful  sensations, 
or  be  altogether  deprived  of  the  entertainments  of  vision. 

How  admirable  an  organ,  then,  is  the  eye,  and  how  nicely 
adapted  to  unveil  to  our  view  the  glories  of  the  universe  ! 
Without  the  application  of  any  skill  or  laborious  efforts,  on  our 

9 


102  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

part,  it  turns  in  every  direction,  transports  us  to  every  sur- 
rounding object,  depicts  the  nicest  shades  and  colors  on  its 
dehcate  membranes,  and 

"  Takes  in,  at  once,  the  landscape  of  the  world 

*3t  a  small  inlet,  lohidi  a  grain  might  close, 

And  half  creates  the  wond'rous  world  we  see." — Young. 

— How  strikingly  does  it  display,  in  every  part  of  its  structure 
and  adaptations,  the  marks  of  benevolent  design,  and  of  In- 
linite  Intelligence !  However  common  it  is  to  open  our  eyes, 
and  to  behold,  in  an  instant,  the  beauties  of  an  extensive  land- 
scape, and  however  little  we  may  be  accustomed  to  admire 
this  wonderiui  effect, — there  is  not  a  doctrine  in  Religion,  nor 
a  fact  recorded  in  Revelation,  more  mysterious  and  incompre- 
hensible. An  excellent  French  writer  has  well  observed — 
"  The  sight  of  a  tree  and  of  the  sun,  which  God  shows  me,  is 
as  real  and  as. immediate  a  revelation  as  that  v>hich  led  Moses 
towards  the  burning  bush.  The  only  difierence  between  both 
these  actions  of  God  on  Moses  and  me,  is,  that  the  first  is  out 
of  the  common  order  and  economy  ;  whereas  the  other  is  oc- 
casioned by  the  sequel  and  connection  of  those  laws  which 
God  has  established  for  the  regulation  both  of  man  and  na- 
ture." 

If,  then,  the  eye  of  man  (who  is  a  depraved  inhabitant  of  a 
world  lying  partly  in  ruins)  is  an  organ  so  admirably  fitted  for 
extending  our  pro'spects  of  the  visible  creation — we  may  rea- 
sonably conclude,  that  organized  beings,  of  superior  intelli- 
gence and  moral  pitrity,  possess  the  sense  of  vision  in  a  much 
greater  degree  of  perfection  than  man,  in  his  present  state  of 
degradation — and  that  they  may  be  enabled,  by  their  natural 
organs,  to  penetrate  into  regions  of  the  universe  far  beyond 
what  man,  by  the  aid  of  artificial  helps,  vviil  ever  be  able  to 
descry.  It  may  not  be  altogether  extravagant,  nor  even  be- 
yond the  reality  of  existing  facts,  to  suppose,  that  there  are 
intelligences  in  the  regions  of  Jupiter  or  Saturn,  whose  visual 
organs  are  in  so  perfect  a  state,  that  they  can  descry  the 
mountains  of  our  moon,  and  the.  continents,  islands,  and 
oceans  which  diversify  our  globe,  and  are  able  to  delineate  a 
map  of  its  surface,  to  mark  the  period  of  its  diurnal  rotation, 
and  even  to  distinguish  its  cities,  rivers,  and  volcanoes.  It  is 
quite  evident,  that  it  must  be  equally  easy  to  Divine  Wisdom 
and  Omnipotence,  to  form  organs  with  powers  of  vision  far 
surpassing  \vhat  I  have  now  supposed,  as  to  form  an  organ  in 
which  the  magnificent  scene  ot"  heaven  and  earth  is  depicted, 
in  a  moment,  within  the  compass  of  half  an  inch.  There  are 
animals  whose  range  of  vision  is  circumscribed  within  the 


VISUAL    ORGANS    OF    ANIMALS.  103 

limits  of  a  few  feet  or  inches  ;  and,  had  we  never  perceived 
objects  through  an  organ  in  the  same  state  of  perfection  as  that 
with  which  we  are  furnished,  we  could  have  formed  as  little 
conception  of  the  sublimity  and  extent  of  our  present  range  of 
sight,  as  we  can  now  do  of  those  powers  of  vision,  which 
would  enable  us  to  descry  the  inhabitants  of  distant  worlds. — 
The  invention  of  the  telescope  shows,  that  the  penetrating 
power  of  the  eye  may  be  indefinitely  increased  ;  and,  since 
the  art  of  man  can  extend  the  limits  of  natural  vision,  it  is 
easy  to  conceive,  that,  in  the  hand  of  Omnipotence,  a  slight 
modification  of  the  human  feye  might  enable  it,  with  the  utniost 
distinctness,  to  penetrate  into  regions  to  which  the  imagma- 
tion  can  set  no  bounds.  And,  therefore,  it  is  not  unreasona- 
ble to  believe,  that,  in  the  future  v/orkl,  this  will  be  one  pro- 
perty, among  others,  of  the  resurredion-hodij^  that  it  will  be 
furnished  with  organs  of  vision,  far  superior  to  the  present,  in 
order  to  qualify  its  intelligent  inhabitant  for  taking  an  ample 
survey  of  the  "  riches  and  glory"  of  the  empire  of  God. 

I  have  dwelt  somewhat  particularly  on  the  functions  of  the 
eye,  in  order  to  show,  that  it  is  only  when  we  take  a  minute 
inspection  of  the  operations  of  the  Creator,  that  his  Infinite 
Wisdom  and  Intelligence  are  most  distinctly  perceived.  The 
greater  part  of  Christians  will  readily  admit,  that  the  Wisdom 
of  God  is  manifested  in  every  object,  but  few  of  them  take  the 
trouble  to  inquire,  in  what  jjarticidar  contrivances  and  adapta- 
tions this  wisdom  is  displayed ;  and,  therefore,  rest  satisfied 
with  vague  and  general  views,  which  seldom  produce  any  deep 
impression  on  the  mind.  "  The  works  of  the  Lord,"  which 
are  "  great"  and  admirable,  "  must  he  sought  out  by  all  those 
who  have  pleasure  therein  ;"  and  the  more  minutely  they  are 
inspected,  the  more  exquisite  and  admirable  do  all  his  arrange- 
ments appear. 

Were  we  to  enter  into  an  mvestigation  of  the  visual  organs 
of  the  lower  animals,  and  to  consider  the  numerous  varieties 
which  occur  in  their  structure,  position  and  movements,  and 
how  nicely  the  peculiar  organization  of  the  eye  is  adapted  to 
the  general  structure  of  the  animal,  and  to  its  various  necessi- 
ties and  modes  of  existence — the  operation  of  the  same  inscru- 
table Wisdom  and  Intelligence  would  meet  our  eye  at  every 
step.  Birds,  for  example,  which  procure  their  food  by  their 
beak,  have  the  power  of  seeing  distinctly  at  a  very  small  dis- 
tance ;  and,  as  their  rapid  motion  through  the  air  renders  it 
necessary  that  they  should  descry  objects  at  a  considerable 
distance,  they  have  two  pecidiar  mechanical  contrivances, 
connected  with  their  organs  of  vision,  for  producing  both  these 


104  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

effects.  One  of  these  contrivances  consists  in  a  flexible  rim^ 
formed  of  bone,  which  surrounds  the  broadest  part  of  the  eye, 
and,  by  occasionally  pressing  upon  its  orb,  shortens  its  focal 
distance,  and  thus  enables  it  to  inspect  very  near  objects. — 
The  other  consists  of  a  peculiar  muscle,  which  draws  back,  as 
occasion  requires,  the  crystalline  humour,  by  which  means  it 
can  take  a  distinct  view  of  a  distant  landscape  ;  and  can  pass 
from  the  sight  of  a  very  near,  to  the  sight  of  a  distant  object, 
with  rapidity  and  ease.  In  fishes,  which  live  in  a  medium  of  a 
different  refractive  power  trom  that  of  air,  the  crystalline  hu- 
mour has  a  greater  degree  of  convexity,  and  more  nearly  ap- 
proaches to  a  globular  form  than  that  of  land  animals — which 
conformation  is  essentially  requisite  to  distinctness  of  vision 
in  the  watery  element.  A  fish,  of  course,  cannot  see  distinctly 
in  air,  nor  a  quadruped  under  water  ;  and  every  person  who 
has  dived  into  the  water  with  his  eyes  open,  knows,  that, 
though  he  may  perceive  the  general  forms  and "  colors  of  ob- 
jects, his  vision  is  obscure  and  indistinct.  In  hares  and  rab- 
bits the  eyes  are  very  convex  and  prominent,  so  that  they  can 
see  nearly  quite  round  them  ;  whereas,  in  dogs,  which  pursue 
these  animals,  the  visual  organs  are  placed  more  in  the  front 
of  the  head,  to  look  rather  before,  than  behind  them.  Some 
animals,  as  cats  and  oivls,  which  pursue  their  prey  in  the  dark, 
have  the  pupil  of  their  eye  so  formed  as  to  be  capable  of  great 
expansion,  so  that  a  few  rays  of  light  may  make  a  lively  im- 
pression on  their  retina  ;  while  the  eagle,  which  is  able  to  look 
directly  at  the  sun,  has  its  pupil  capable  of  being  contracted 
almost  to  a  point.  Insects,  such  as  the  beetle,  the  fly,  and  the 
butterfly,  whose  eyes  are  incapable  of  motion,  have  several 
thousands  of  small  transparent  globes  set  in  a  convex  hemis- 
phere, every  one  of  which  is  capable  of  forming  an  image  of  an 
object ;  so  that  they  are  enabled  to  view  the  objects  around 
them  without  moving  their  heads.  But,  it  would  be  beyond 
the  limits  of  my  plan  to  prosecute  this  subject  any  farther : 
enough  has  already  been  stated,  to  show,  that  the  eyes  of  men 
and  other  animals  are  master-pieces  of  art,  which  far  transcend 
the  human  understanding  ;  and  that  they  demonstrate  the  con- 
summate wisdom  of  Him,  who  planned  and  constructed  the 
organical  functions  of  the  various  tribes  of  animated  existence. 

I  shall  now  conclude  this  branch  of  my  subject,  by  present- 
ing an  instance  or  two  of  the  meclianism  of  the  bones,  and  the 
movements  it  is  fitted  to  produce. 

The  bones  of  the  human  frame  are  articulated,  or  connected 
together  in  different  ways,  but  most  frequently  in  the  following 
manner. — Either,  1.  a  bone  with  a  round  head  is  articulated 


mechanisjm  of  the  bones.  105 

with  a  cavity,  and  plays  in  it  as  a  ball  in  a  socket ;  or,  2.  they 
are  connected  together  by  a  hinge-like  articulation,  which  en- 
ables a  bone  to  move  up  or  down,  backwards  or  forwards,  like 
a  door  upon  its  hinges.  An  idea  of  these  two  motions,  and 
the  purposes  they  serve,  may  be  obtained,  by  considering  the 
construction  of  the  pedestal  of  a  telescope,  and  the  joints  on 
which  it  moves.  One  of  the  joints  is  of  the  nature  of  a  hinge, 
by  which  a  vertical  motion,  or  a  motion  upwards  and  down- 
wards is  produced.  A  horizontal  motion,  or  a  motion  towards 
the  right  hand  or  the  left,  is  produced  by  a  pivot  moving  in  a 
socket ;  so  that,  by  these  two  motions,  the  telescope  can  be 
made  to  point  in  any  direction.  Such  is  the  nature  of  the  ar- 
ticulations of  the  bones,  and  the  movements  they  produce  ;  and 
wherever  one  or  other  of  these  motions,  or  both  of  them  com- 
bined, are  requisite  for  the  comfort  and  convenience  of  the  in- 
dividual, such  a  power  of  motion  is  uniformly  found  to  exist. 
If  the  movement  of  a  joint  in  every  direction  Avould,  in  any 
particular  case,  be  found  inconvenient,  the  hinge-like  articu- 
lation is  fixed  upon  ;  but  if  a  motion,  in  every  direction,  is 
required  for  the  convenient  use  of  particular  members,  and  for 
the  variety  of  evolutions  which  a  sentient  being  may  have  oc- 
casion to  make,  the  bail  and  socket  articulation  is  combined 
with  the  former. 

For  example,  let  any  person,  for  a  moment,  consider  the 
joints  of  his  fingers,  and  compare  them  with  the  joint  at  his 
wrist,  where  the  hand  is  connected  with  the  fore  arm.  If  he 
hold  the  back  of  his  hand  upwards,  he  will  find  that  he  can 
move  his  fingers  upwards  or  downwards  ;  but  he  cannot  turn 
them  to  the  right  hand,  or  to  the  left,  so  as  to  make  them  de- 
scribe a  circular  motion.  He  will  also  find  that  his  ivrist  is 
capable  of  a  similar  movement,  so  that  the  hand  may  be  bent 
in  a  vertical  direction.  But,  in  addition  to  this  motion,  it  is 
also  capable  of  being  turned  in  a  horizontal  direction,  or  from 
one  side  to  another.  In  the  former  case,  we  have  an  example 
of  the  hinge  articulation  ;  in  the  latter,  it  is  combined  with  an 
articulation  which  produces  nearly  the  same  effect  as  a  pivot 
moving  in  a  socket.  Now,  had  the  joints  of  the  fingers  been 
capable  of  the  same  motions  as  the  wrist,  the  hand  would  have 
lost  its  firmness,  and  been  incapable  of  performing  a  variety 
of  mechanical  operations  which  require  objects  to  be  held 
with  a  steady  grasp.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  joint  of  the 
wrist  had  been  formed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  joints  of  the 
fingers,  and  confined  to  a  vertical  motion,  the  hand  would  have 
been  incapable  of  one  out  of  a  hundred  varied  movements, 
which  it  can  now  perform  with  the  greatest  ease.     In  this 

9* 


106  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

case,  we  could  not  have  bored  a  hole  with  a  gimblet,  cut  dowii 
corn  with  a  sickle,  digged  the  earth  with  a  spade,  sewed  clothes 
with  a  needle,  tossed  up  a  ball,  or  turned  up  the  palm  of  the 
hand,  for  any  of  the  useful  purposes  for  which  that  motion  was 
ordained.  In  short,  without  the  rotatory  motion  of  the  wrist, 
the  greater  part  of  the  operations  connected  with  gardening, 
agriculture,  cookery,  washing,  spinning,  weaving,  painting, 
carving,  engraving,  building,  and  other  mechanical  arts,  could 
not  be  performed  ;  and  such  of  them  as  could  be  effected, 
would  be  accomplished  only  with  the  greatest  inconvenience 
and  labor.  Any  person  may  convince  himself  of  this,  by  hold- 
ing his  hand  in  a  horizontal  position,  and  preventing  his  wrist- 
joint  from  turning  round,  and  then  by  trying  what  operations 
he  can  easily  perform  without  the  rotatory  motion  ;  and  he 
will  soon  perceive  with  what  exquisite  skill  the  numerous 
movements  of  our  animal  frames  have  been  contrived  by  the 
great  Author  of  our  existence.  In  each  hand  there  are  27 
bones,  all  of  which  are  essential  to  the  different  motions  we 
wish  to  perform.  Every  finger  is  composed  of  three  bones, 
connected  together  by  articulations,  muscles,  and  ligaments. 
If,  instead  of  three,  each  finger  were  composed  of  only  one 
bone,  it  would  be  quite  impossible  for  us  to  grasp  a  single 
object. 

The  same  admirable  contrivance  may  be  perceived  in  the 
movements  of  which  the  Head  is  susceptible.  It  was  requi- 
site, in  order  to  our  convenience  and  comfort,  that  we  should 
be  enabled  to  move  our  head  backwards  or  forwards — to  look 
up  towards  the  heavens,  or  downwards  to  the  ground.  It  was 
also  expedient,  that  it  should  have  a  power  of  turning  to  the 
right,  or  to  the  left,  so  as  to  take  in  a  considerable  portion  of 
a  circle,  without  being  under  the  necessity  of  turning  round 
the  whole  body.  Accordingly  we  find,  that  both  these  mo- 
tions are  provided  for,  in  the  manner  in  which  the  head  is 
connected  with  the  t^erieftrce.  The  head  rests  upon  the  up- 
permost of  these  bones,  to  which  it  is  connected  by  a  hinge 
joint,  similar  to  those  in  the  fingers,  which  allows  it  to  move 
backward  and  forward ;  and,  by  means  of  a  round,  longish 
process,  or  projection,  which  moves  in  a  socket,  it  is  enabled 
to  move  horizontally,  as  upon  an  axis.  Had  the  first  motion 
been  wanting,  we  could  not  have  looked  up  to  the  zenith, 
without  laying  flat  on  our  back  ;  nor  could  we  have  looked  to 
the  ground,  without  placing  our  bodies  in  a  prone  position  ; 
and,  in  such  a  case,  we  could  never  have  seen  our  own  feet, 
unless  when  they  were  bent  considerably  forward.  Had  the 
second  motion  been  wanting,  we  could  have  looked  to  no- 


MECHANISM    OF    THE    BONES.  107 

thing,  except  the  objects  directly  before  us,  ^v•ithout  the  trouble 
of  turning  round  the  whole  body,  either  to  the  right,  or  to  the 
left.  But  in  the  construction  of  our  corporeal  system,  every 
thing  is  so  arranged  and  adapted  to  another,  as  at  once  to 
contribute  to  ease,  and  facility  of  motion,  in  all  the  varied 
operations  and  movements  we  have  occasion  to  perform  ; 
which  circumstance  forcibly  demonstrates  both  the  benevo- 
lent intentions,  and  the  admirable  wisdom  of  Him  "  whose 
hands  have  made  and  fashioned  us,"  and  who  "  breathed  into 
our  nostrils  the  breath  of  life." 

The  above  are  only  two  or  three  out  of  a  hundred  of 
similar  instances,  which  might  be  produced  to  show  the 
benevolent  care  which  has  been  exercised  in  arranging  and 
articulating  the  system  of  bones,  of  which  the  prop-work  of 
the  human  frame  is  composed.  Were  we  to  enter  into  an 
investigation  of  the  actions  and  uses  of  the  various  muscles, 
the  wonderful  system  of  veins  and  arteries,  the  action  of  the 
heart,  stomach,  and  bowels  ;  the  process  of  respiration,  and 
insensible  perspiration,  and  the  system  of  nerves,  glands, 
lymphatics,  and  lacteals — a  thousand  instances  of  Divine 
wisdom  and  beneficence  would  crowd  upon  our  view,  which 
could  not  fail  to  excite  the  pious  and  contemplative  mind  to 
join  in  the  devotions  of  the  "  sweet  singer  of  Israel,"  "  I  will 
praise  thee  ;  for  I  am  fearfully  and  wonderfully  made  ;  mar- 
vellous are  thy  works,  and  that  my  soul  knoweth  right  well." 
— But  as  I  intended  to  present  only  a  few  specimens  of  the 
Wisdom  of  God,  as  displayed  in  the  construction  of  the  mate- 
rial world,  I  shall  conclude  this  department  of  my  subject 
with  a  single  reflection.* 

How  foolish  and  ungraisful  is  it  for  rational  heinp;s  to  over- 
look the  wise  and  benevolent  arrangements  of  the  Creator,  in 
the  material  universe  !  How  many  thousands  of  human 
beings  pass  their  existence  without  once  reflecting  on  the 
numerous  evidences  of  divine  Wisdom  and  Beneficence, 
which  appear  around  them,  or  feeling  the  least  spark  of  gra- 
titude for  their  preservation  and  comforts,  to  that  Being  "  in 
whose  hand  their  breath  is,  and  whose  are  all  their  ways  !" 
Yea,  how  many  are  there  who  consider  themselves  as  stand- 
ing high  in  the  ranks  of  the  Christian  profession,  who  afiect 

*  Those  who  wish  to  prosecute  this  subject,  particularly  that  part  of  i* 
which  relates  to  the  contrivances  of  Divine  Wisdom,  which  appear  in  the 
animal  system,  will  find  ample  gratification  in  Nieuwentyt's  "  Religious 
Philosopher,"  Vol.  1.  and  Dr.  Paley's  "  Natural  Theology."  A  variety 
of  useftd  remarks  on  this  subject  will  also  be  found  in  Ray's  "  Wisdom  of 
God  in  the  Creation,"  Derham's  "  Physico-Theology,"  and  Bonnet's 
"  Contemplation  of  Nature." 


108  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

to  look  down,  with  a  certain  degree  of  contempt,  on  the  study 
of  the  material  works  of  God,  as  if  it  were  too  gross  a  subject 
for  their  spiritual  attainments  !  They  profess  to  trace  the 
wisdom  of  God  in  the  Scriptures,  and  to  feel  gratitude  for  his 
pardoning  mercy  ;  but  they  seldom  feel  that  gratitude  which 
they  ought  to  do  for  those  admirable  arrangements  in  their 
own  bodies,  and  the  elements  around  them,  by  which  their 
lives  are  preserved,  and  their  happiness  promoted  ;  and  even 
seem  to  insinuate,  that  they  have  little  or  nothing  to  do  with 
the  contrivances  of  the  God  of  Nature.  They  leave  it  to  the 
genius  of  inhdel  philosophers  to  trace  the  articulations  of  the 
bones,  the  branchings  of  the  veins  and  arteries,  the  properties 
of  light,  and  the  composition  of  the  atmosphere,  while  they 
profess  to  feast  their  minds  on  more  sublime  and  spiritual  en- 
tertainments. But,  surely,  such  astonishing  displays  of  the 
wisdom  and  benignity  of  the  Most  High,  as  creation  exhibits, 
were  never  intended  to  be  treated  by  his  intelligent  offspring 
with  apathy  or  indifference  ;  and  to  do  so,  must  indicate  a 
certain  degree  of  base  ingratitude  towards  Him  whose  inces- 
sant energy  sustains  the  whole  assemblage  of  sentient  and 
intelligent  beings,  and  who  displays  himself,  in  their  construc- 
tion and  preservation,  to  be  "  wonderful  in  counsel,  and  ex- 
cellent in  working."  Shall  we  imagine,  that,  because  God 
stands  in  the  gracious  relation  of  our  Redeemer,  he  has  ceased 
to  stand  in  the  relation  of  our  Creator  and  Preserver?  0- 
shall  we  consider  those  subjects  as  unworthy  of  our  attention, 
which  are  the  theme  of  the  praises  of  the  heavenly  host  ? — 
Rev.  iv.  11.  Can  we  suppose  that  the  Almighty  displayed 
his  infinite  wisdom  in  the  curious  organization  of  the  human 
eye,  that  man — the  only  being  in  this  world  who  is  endowed 
with  faculties  capable  of  appreciating  its  structure,  and  for 
whose  use  and  entertainment  it  was  intended — should  over- 
look such  a  wonderful  piece  of  Divine  workmanship,  and  feel 
no  gratitude  for  the  bestowment  of  so  admirable  a  gift  ?  Shall 
we  extol  the  ingenuity  displayed  in  a  clock  or  a  watch,  in  a 
chess-player,  or  steam  engine,  and  shall  we  feel  no  sentiment 
of  admiration  at  the  view  of  millions  of  instances  of  Divine 
mechanism,  which  infinitely  transcend  the  powers  of  the  human 
understanding  ?  To  act  in  this  manner,  as  too  many  are  dis- 
posed to  do,  is  unworthy  of  man^  both  as  a  Christian  and  as 
an  intelligent  agent.  Such  was  not  the  conduct  of  the  inspired 
writers  ;  their  spirituality  of  views  did  not  lead  them  to  neglect 
the  contemplation  of  any  of  the  worlds  of  God.  "  I  will  me- 
ditate on  all  thy  works,"  says  the  Psalmist,  "  and  talk  of  all 
thy  doings  ;  I  will  utter  abundantly  the  memory  of  thy  great 


MORAL    REFLECTIONS.  109 

goodness,  and  speak  of  all  thy  wondrous  works."  Accord- 
ingly we  find,  that  the  wonders  of  the  human  frame,  the  eco- 
nomy of  the  animal  and  the  vegetable  tribes,  the  scenery  of 
the  "  dry  land,"  and  of  the  "  mighty  deep,"  and  the  glories 
of  the  heavens,  were  the  frequent  subjects  of  their  devout 
contemplation.  They  considered  them  in  relation  to  the  un- 
ceasing agency  of  God,  by  whom  they  were  formed  and  ar- 
ranged, and  as  declaring  his  Wisdom,  Goodness,  and  Omnipo- 
tence ;  and,  with  this  view,  ought  all  the  scenes  of  the  visible 
creation  to  be  investigated  by  his  intelligent  creatures. 

We  have  reason  to  beheve,  that  it  is  owing,  in  part,  to  want 
of  attention  to  the  Divine  wisdom  and  beneficence,  as  exhibit- 
ed in  the  construction  of  the  visible  world,  that  many  profess- 
ed Christians  entertain  so  vague  and  confused  ideas  respect- 
ing the  wisdom  and  goodness  of  Deity,  as  displayed  in  the 
economy  of  Uedomption.  The  terms.  Wisdom,  Goodness, 
and  Beneficence,  in  their  mouths,  become  words  almost  with- 
out meaning,  to  which  no  precise  or  definite  ideas  are  attach- 
ed ;  because  they  have  never  considered  the  instances  and  the 
evidences  of  these  attributes,  as  displayed  in  the  material 
creation.  And,  if  our  minds  have  not  been  impressed  with  a 
sense  of  the  wisdom  and  beneficence  of  God,  in  those  objects 
which  are  presented  to  the  external  senses,  we  cannot  be  sup- 
posed to  have  luminious  and  distinct  ideas  of  those  spiritual 
objects  and  arrangements  which  are  removed  beyond  the 
sphere  of  our  corporeal  organs. — For  all  our  ideas,  in  relation 
to  Religion  and  its  objects,  are  primarily  derived  from  the  in- 
timations we  receive  of  external  objects,  through  the  medium 
of  our  senses  ;  and,  consequently,  the  more  clearly  we  per- 
ceive the  agency  of  God,  in  his  visible  operations,  the  more 
shall  we  be  quaiilied  to  perceive  the  wisdom  and  harmony  of 
his  dispensations,  as  recorded  in  the  volume  of  inspiration. 

We  live  in  a  world,  ail  the  arrangements  of  which  are  the 
effects  of  inlinite  wisdom.  We  are  surrounded  with  vvonders 
on  every  hand  ;  and,  therefore,  we  cease  to  admire,  or  to  fix 
our  attention  on  any  one  of  the  wonders  daily  performed  by 
God.  We  have  never  been  accustomed  to  contemplate,  or 
to  inhabit  a  world  where  benevolence  and  wisdom  are  not 
displayed  ;  and,  therefore,  we  are  apt  to  imagine,  that  the  cir- 
cumstances of  our  terrestrial  existence  could  not  have  been 
much  otherwise  than  they  actually  are.  We  behold  the  sun 
in  the  morning,  ascending  from  the  east — a  thousand  shining 
globes  are  seen  in  the  canopy  of  the  sky,  when  he  has  disap- 
peared in  the  west.  We  open  our  eye-lids,  and  the  myriads 
of  objects  which  compose  an  extensive  landscape,  are,  in  a 


110  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

moment,  painted  on  our  retina, — we  wish  to  move  our  bodies, 
and,  in  an  instant,  the  joints  and  muscles  of  our  hands  and 
feet  perform  their  several  functions.  We  spread  out  our  wet 
clothes  to  dry,  and  in  a  few  hours  the  moisture  is  evaporated. 
We  behold  the  fields  drenched  with  rain,  and  in  a  few  days  it 
disappears,  and  is  dispersed  through  the  surrounding  atmo- 
sphere, to  be  again  embodied  into  clouds.  These  are  all  com- 
mon operations,  and,  therefore,  thoughtless  and  ungrateful  man 
seldom  considers  the  obhgations  he  is  under  to  the  Author  of 
his  existence,  for  the  numerous  enjo;yTnents  which  flow  from 
these  wise  arrangements >  But  were  the  globe  we  inhabit,  and 
all  its  appendages  to  remain  in  their  present  state — and  were 
only  the  principle  of  evaporation  and  the  refractive  and  refect- 
ive  iwoperties  of  the  air  to  be  destroyed — we  should  soon 
feel,  by  the  universal  gloom  which  would  ensue,  and  by  a 
thousand  other  inconveniences  we  should  suffer,  what  a  mi- 
serable world  was  allotted  for  our  abode.  We  should  most 
sensibly  perceive  the  wisdom  and  goodness  we  had  formerly 
overlooked,  and  would  most  ardently  implore  the  restoration 
of  those  arrangements  for  which  we  were  never  sufficiently 
grateful.  And  why  should  we  not  now — while  we  enjoy  so 
many  comforts  flowing  from  the  plans  of  infinite  Wisdom — 
have  our  attention  directed  to  the  benevolent  contrivances 
within  us,  and  around  us,  in  order  that  grateful  emotions  may 
be  hourly  arising  in  our  hearts,  to  the  Father  of  our  spirits  ? 
For  the  essence  of  true  religion  consists  chiefly  in  gratiinde 
to  the  God  of  our  life,  and  the  Author  of  our  salvation  ;  and 
every  pleasing  sensation  we  feel  from  the  harmonies  and  the 
beauties  of  nature,  ought  to  inspire  us  with  this  sacred  emotion. 
"  Hearken  unto  this,  0  man  !  stand  still,  and  consider  the  won- 
derful works  of  God.  Contemplate  the  balancings  of  the  clouds 
the  wondrous  works  of  Him  who  is  perfect  in  knowledge." 
"  He  hath  made  the  earth  by  his  power,  he  hath  established  the 
world  by  his  wisdom.  When  he  uttereth  his  voice,  there  is  a 
noise  of  waters  in  the  heavens  ;  he  causeth  the  vapours  to  as- 
cend from  the  ends  of  the  earth,  and  bringeth  the  winds  out  of 
his  treasures."  While  it  is  shameful  for  man  to  be  inattentive  to 
the  wonders  which  surround  him,whatcan  be  more  pleasing  and 
congenial  to  a  rational  and  devout  mind,  than  contemplations  on 
the  works  of  the  Most  High  ?  "What  can  be  more  gratifying,-' 
says  Sturm,  "than  to  contemplate,  in  the  heavens,  in  the  earth, 
in  the  water,  in  the  night  and  day,  and,  indeed,  throughout  all 
nature,  the  proofs  which  they  afford  of  the  wisdom,  the  purity, 
and  the  goodness  of  our  great  Creator  and  Preserver  !  What 
can  be  more  delightful  than  to  recognize,  in  the  whole   crea- 


BENEVOLENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  Ill 

tion,  in  all  the  natural  world,  in  every  thing  we  see,  traces  of 
the  ever-working  providence,  and  tender  mercy  of  the  great 
Father  of  all !» 

—soloes 

SECTION   IV. 

On  the  Goodness,  or  Benevolence  of  the  Deity. 

The  Benevolence  of  God  is  that  perfection  of  his  nature, 
by  which  he  communicates  happiness  to  the  various  ranks  of 
sensitive  and  intelHgent  existence. 

The  system  of  Nature,  in  all  its  parts,  exhibits  an  unbound- 
ed display  of  this  attribute  of  the  Divine  Mind,  both  in  rela- 
tion to  man,  and  in  relation  to  the  subordinate  tribes  of  anima- 
ted existence.  In  relation  to  Man — the  mpcgniiicence  and 
glory  of  the  heavens — the  variegated  coloring  which  is  spread 
over  the  scene  of  nature — the  beautiful  flowers,  shrubs,  and 
trees,  with  which  the  earth  is  adorned,  which  not  only  delight 
the  eye,  but  perfume  the  air  with  their  delicious  odors — the 
various  kinds  of  agreeable  sounds  that  charm  the  ear — the 
music  of  the  feathered  songsters,  which  till  the  groves  with 
their  melody — the  thousands  of  pleasant  images  which  delight 
the  eye,  in  the  natural  embellishments  of  creation — the  agree- 
able feelings  produced  by  the  contact  of  almost  every  thing 
we  have  occasion  to  touch — the  pleasure  attached  to  eating, 
drinking,  muscular  motion  and  activity — the  luxuriant  profu- 
sion, and  rich  variety  of  aliments  which  the  earth  atfords — and 
the  interchanges  of  thought  and  affection — all  proclaim  the 
Benevolence  of  our  Almighty  Maker,  and  show  that  the  com- 
munication of  happiness  is  one  grand  object  of  all  his  arrange- 
ments. For  these  circumstances  are  not  essentialhj  requisite 
to  our  existence.  We  might  have  lived,  and  breathed,  and 
walked,  though  every  thing  we  touched  had  produced  pain  ; 
though  every  thing  we  ate  and  drank  had  been  bitter  ;  though 
every  movement  of  our  hands  and  feet  had  been  accompanied 
with  uneasiness  and  fatigue  ;  though  every  sound  had  been 
as  harsh  as  the  saw  of  the  carpenter  ;  though  no  birds  had 
warbled  in  the  groves  ;  though  no  flowers  had  decked  the 
fields,  or  filled  the  air  with  their  perfumes  ;  though  one  un- 
varied scene  of  dull  uniformity  had  prevailed,  and  beauty  and 
sublimity  had  been  swept  from  the  face  of  nature  ;  though  the 
earth  had  been  covered  with  a  mantle  of  black,  and  no  radiant 
orbs  had  appeared  in  our  nocturnal  sky.     But  what  a  misera- 


112  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

ble  world  should  we  then  have  inhabited,  compared  with  that 
which  we  now  possess  !  Life  would  have  passed  away  with- 
out enjoyment ;  and  pain  would  have  overbalanced  the  plea- 
sure of  existence.  Whereas,  in  the  existing  constitution  of 
things,  all  the  objects  around  us,  and  every  sense  of  which 
we  are  possessed,  when  preserved  in  its  natural  vigor,  have  a 
direct  tendency  to  produce  pleasing  sensations,  and  to  con- 
tribute to  our  enjoyment :  and  it  is  chiefly  when  we  indulge 
in  foolish  and  depraved  passions,  and  commit  immoral  ac- 
tions, that  the  benevolent  intentions  of  the  Deity  are  frus- 
trated, and  pain  and  misery  produced. 

If  we  consider,  further,  that  the  inexhaustable  bounty  of  the 
Creator,  and  the  numerous  pleasures  we  enjoy,  are  bestowed 
upon  a  guilty  race  of  men,  the  benevolence  of  the  Deity  will 
appear  in  a  still  more  striking  point  of  view.  Man  has  dared 
to  rebel  against  his  Maker  ;  he  is  a  depraved  and  ungrateful 
creature.  The  great  majority  of  our  race  have  banished  God 
from  their  thoughts,  trampled  upon  his  laws,  neglected  to  con- 
template his  Avorks,  refused  to  pay  him  that  tribute  of  rever- 
ence and  adoration  which  his  perfections  demand,  have  been 
ungrateful  for  his  favours,  have  blasphemed  his  name,  and 
have  transferred  to  "  four-footed  beasts,  and  creeping  things," 
that  homage  which  is  due  to  him  alone.  It  has  been  the  chief 
part  of  their  employment,  in  all  ages,  to  counteract  the  effects 
of  his  Beneficence,  by  inflicting  injustice,  oppression,  and  tor- 
ture, upon  each  other  ;  by  maiming  the  human  frame,  burning 
cities  and  villa2;es,  turning  fruitful  fields  into  a  wilderness,  and 
by  every  other  act  of  violence,  carrying  death  and  destruction 
through  the  world.  And  if  icaier,  air,  and  the  light  of  heaven, 
had  been  placed  within  the  limits  of  their  control,  it  is  more 
than  probable,  that  whole  nations  would  have  been  occasion- 
ally deprived  of  these  elements,  so  essential  to  human  exis- 
tence. Yet,  notwithstanding  the  prevalence  of  such  deprav- 
ed dispositions,  the  streams  of  Divine  benevolence  towards 
our  apostate  race,  have  never  yet  been  interrupted.  The 
earth  has  never  stopped  in  its  career,  and  thrown  nature  into  a 
scene  of  confusion  ;  the  light  of  heaven  has  never  ceased  to 
illume  the  world  ;  the  springs  of  water  have  never  been  dried 
up,  nor  has  the  fertile  soil  ceased  to  enrich  the  plains  with 
golden  harvests.  God  "  hath  not  left  himself  without  a  wit- 
ness," to  his  beneficence,  in  any  age,  in  that  he  hath  unceas- 
ingly bestowed  on  the  inhabitants  of  the  world,  "  rain  from 
heaven,  and  fruitful  seasons,  filling  their  hearts  with  food  and 
gladness."  This  is  one  of  the  characters  of  Deity  which 
forms  the  most  perfect  contrast  to  the  selfish  and  revengeful 


BENEVOLENCE    OF   THE   DEITY.  113 

liispositions  of  man,  which  as  far  transcends  human  benevo- 
lence, as  the  heavens  in  extent  surpass  the  earth — a  character 
calculated  to  excite  our  highest  love  and  admiration,  and  which 
we  are  called  upon,  in  the  Sacred  Oracles,  to  imitate  and  re- 
vere. "  Be  ye  merciful,  as  your  Father  who  is  in  heaven  is 
merciful :  for  he  maketh  his  sun  to  rise  on  the  evil  and  on  the 
good,  and  sendeth  rain  on  the  just  and  on  the  unjust."  "  O 
that  men  would  praise  the  Lord  for  his  goodness,  and  for  his 
wonderful  works  to  the  children  of  men." 

From  such  considerations,  we  learn,  even  from  the  system 
of  nature,  that  mercy  is  an  attribute  of  the  Deity  ;  for  ,if  mercy 
consists  in  bestowing  favors  on  those  who  are  unworthy,  or 
who  merit  punishment,  the  greatest  sinners  in  all  ages  have 
shared  in  it,  and  every  individual  of  the  human  race,  now  ex- 
isting, enjoys  a  certain  portion  of  those  comforts  which  flow 
from  the  benevolent  arrangements  which  the  Creator  has  es- 
tablished. "  He  maketh  the  sun  to  rise  on  the  evil  and  on  the 
good."  Though  the  nations  in  ancient  times,  as  well  as  at 
present,  "  walked  in  their  own  way,"  indulging  in  impiety, 
falsehood,  lewdness,  war,  devastations,  revenge,  abominable 
idolatries,  and  every  other  violation  of  his  law,  he  still  support- 
ed the  functions  of  their  animal  frames,  and  caused  the  influ- 
ence of  the  sun,  the  rains,  and  the  dews,  to  descend  upon 
their  fields,  that  they  might  be  refreshed  with  his  bounty,  and 
filled  "  with  food  and  gladness."  If  mercy  were  not  an  es- 
sential attribute  of  the  Deity,  he  would  have  cut  them  down 
in  the  midst  of  their  first  transgressions,  shattered  to  pieces 
the  globe  on  which  they  dwelt,  and  buried  them  in  eternal  ob- 
livion. But  whether  Divine  mercy  will  extend  to  the  final  for- 
giveness of  sin,  and  the  communication  of  eternal  happiness 
to  such  beings,,  can  be  learned  only  from  the  discoveries  of 
revelation. 

In  relation  to  the  inferior  animals — the  immense  multitud-e 
of  living  creatures  with  which  the  earth  is  replenished,  is  a 
striking  evidence  of  the  vast  profusion  of  Divine  Benefi- 
cence. More  than  a  hundred  thousand  species  of  animated 
beings  are  dispersed  through  ihe  different  regions  of  the  air, 
the  water,  and  the  earth,  besides  myriads  which  are  invisible 
to  the  unassisted  eye.  To  estimate  the  number  of  individuals 
belonging  to  any  one  species  is  beyond  the  power  of  mane — 
What  countless  myiiads  of  herrings,  for  example,  are  contained 
in  a  single  shoal,  which  is  frequently  more  than  six  miles  long 
and  three  miles  broad  !  To  estimate  the  number  of  individu- 
als in  all  the  different  species  would,  therefore,  be  as  impossi- 
^\e  as  to  count  the  grains  of  sand  in  the  Arabian  deserts. — 

10 


114  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

There  is  not  a  single  spot,  in  any  region  of  the  globe,  but 
what  teems  with  animated  beings.  Yet,  all  this  vast  assem- 
blage of  sensitive  existence  is  amply  provided  for  by  the 
bountiful  Creator.  "  These  all  wait  upon  him,  and  he  giveth 
them  their  meat  in  due  season."  They  enjoy  not  only  life, 
but  also  a  hapjnj  existence.  The  sportive  motions,  and  gesti- 
culations of  all  the  anin-ial  tribes — the  birds  skimming  through 
the  air,  warbling  in  the  groves,  and  perching  on  the  trees — the 
beasts  of  the  field,  bounding  in  the  forests,  and  through  the  lawns 
— the  fishes  sporting  in  the  waters — the  reptiles  wriggling  in 
the  dust,  and  the  winged  insects,  by  a  thousand  wanton  mazes 
— all  declare  that  they  are  rejoicmg  in  their  existence,  and  in 
the  exercise  ot  those  powers  with  which  the  Creator  has  fur- 
nished them.  So  that  wherever  we  turn  our  eyes,  we  evident- 
ly perceive,  that  "  the  earth  is  full  of  the  goodness  of  the 
Lord,"  and  that  "  his  tender  mercies  are  over  all  his  works." 

This  subject  is  boundless — but  it  would  be  inconsistent  with 
the  hmited  plan  of  this  work,  to  enter  into  a.ny  particular  details. 
And  it  is  the  less  necessary,  when  we  consider,  that  every  in- 
stance of  Divine  Wisdom  is,  at  the  same  time,  an  instance  of 
benevolence  ;  for  it  is  the  ultimate  object  of  all  the  wise  contri- 
vances in  the  system  of  Nature,  that  happiness  may  be  com- 
municated to  the  various  ranks  of  sensitive  and  intelligent  ex- 
istence. Goodness  chooses  the  end,  and  wisdom  selects  the 
most  proper  means  for  its  accomplishment ;  so  that  these  two 
attributes  must  always  be  considered  in  simultaneous  opera- 
tion. And,  therefore,  the  instances  I  have  already  specified, 
of  the  Wisdom  and  Intelligence  of  the  Creator,  may  also  be 
considered,  as  exemplifications  of  Divine  Benevolence. — I 
shall,  therefore,  conclude  this  topic  with  the  following  extract 
from  Dr.  Paley  : — 

"  Contrivance  proves  design  ;  and  the  prominent  tendency 
of  the  contrivance,  indicates  the  disposition  of  the  designer. 
The  world  abounds  with  contrivances  ;  and  all  the  contrivan- 
ces we  are  acquainted  with,  are  directed  to  beneficial  purposes. 
Evil,  no  doubt,  exists  ;  but  it  is  never,  that  we  can  perceive, 
the  object  of  contrivance.  Teeth  are  contrived  to  eat,  not  to 
ache  ;  their  aching  now  and  then,  is  incidental  to  the  contri- 
vance, perhaps  inseparable  from  it :  or  even,  if  you  will,  let  it 
be  called  a  defect  in  the  contrivance,  but  it  is  not  the  object  of 
it.  This  is  a  distinction  which  well  deserves  to  be  attended 
to.  In  describing  implements  of  husbandry,  you  will  hardly 
say  of  a  sickle,  that  it  is  made  to  cut  the  reaper's  fingers, 
though  from  the  construction  of  the  instrument,  and  the  man- 
ner of  using  it,  this  miscliief  often  happens.     Bat  if  you  had 


BENEVOLENCE    OF    THE    DEITY.  115 

occasion  to  describe  instruments  of  torture  or  execution,  this, 
you  would  saj,  is  to  extend  the  sinews  ;  this  to  dislocate  the 
joints  ;  this  to  break  the  bones  ;  this  to  scorch  the  soles  of  the 
feet.  Here  pain  and  misery  are  the  very  objects  of  the  contri- 
vance. Now  nothing  of  this  sort  is  to  be  found  in  the  works 
of  nature.  We  never  discover  a  train  of  contrivance  to  bring 
about  an  evil  purpose.  No  anatomist  ever  discovered  a  sys- 
tem of  organization  calculated  to  produce  pain  and  disease  ; 
or,  in  explaining  the  parts  of  the  human  body,  ever  said,  this  is 
to  irritate  ;  this  to  inflame  ;  this  duct  is  to  convey  the  gravel 
io  the  kidneys  ;  this  gland  to  secrete  the  humor  which  forms 
ihe  gout.  If,  by  chance,  he  come  at  a  part  of  which  he  knows 
not  the  use,  the  most  he  can  say  is,  that  it  is  useless  ;  no  one 
ever  suspects  that  it  is  put  there  to  incommode,  to  annoy,  or 
torment.  Since,  then,  G-od  hath  called  forth  his  consummate 
wisdom  to  contrive  and  provide  for  our  happiness,  and  the 
world  appears  to  have  been  constituted  with  this  design  at 
first,  so  long  as  this  constitution  is  upheld  by  him,  we  must,  in 
reason,  suppose  the  same  design  to  continue."— Pa/e?/'5  JWo- 
ral  Philosophy,  Book  II.  Chap.  5. 

Thus,  I  have  endeavored,  in  this  and  the  preceding  section, 
to  exhibit  a  few  specimens  of  the  Wisdom  and  Goodness  of 
God,  in  the  system  of  nature.  These  might  have  been  multi- 
plied to  an  indefinite  extent,  but  the  instances  adduced,  I  pre- 
sume, are  sufficient  to  show,  that  the  economy  of  the  material 
world  is  not  altogether  a  barren  subject,  to  a  pious  and  con- 
templative mind.  Every  intelligent  believer  in  Revelation, 
will  readily  admit,  that  it  would  be  a  highly  desirable  object,  to 
induce  upon  the  mass  of  Christians  such  a  habit  of  devout  at- 
tention to  the  visible  works  of  creation,  as  would  lead  them,  in 
their  social  and  solitary  walks,  to  recognize  the  agency  of  God, 
in  every  object  they  behold  ;  to  raise  their  thoughts  to  Him  as 
the  Great  First  Cause,  and  to  expand  their  hearts  with  emo- 
tions of  gratitude.  How  very  different  must  be  the  senti- 
ments and  the  piety  of  the  man  who  looks  on  the  scene  of 
wisdom  and  magnificence  around  him,  with  a  "  brute  uncon- 
scious gaze,"  as  thousands  of  professed  Christians  do — and 
the  grateful  and  pious  emotions  of  him  who  recognizes  the  be- 
nevolent agency  of  God,  in  the  motions  of  his  fingers,  and  his 
eye-balls  ;  in  the  pulsation  of  his  heart ;  in  the  picture  of  ex- 
ternal objects,  every  moment  formed  on  his  retina  ;  in  the  re- 
flection of  the  rays  of  light,  and  the  diversified  colors  they  pro- 
duce ;  in  the  drying  of  his  clothes  ;  in  the  constitution  of  the 
atmosphere  ;  in  the  beauty  and  magnificence  of  the  earth  and 
the  heavens  ;  and  in  every  other  object  that  meets  his  eye,  in 


116  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

the  expanse  of  nature  !  The  numberless  astonishing  instances 
of  Divine  agency,  which  every  where  present  themselves  to 
our  view  in  the  scene  around  us,  seem  evidently  intended  to 
arrest  the  mind  to  a  consideration  of  an  "  ever-present  Dei- 
ty ;"  and  I  envy  not  the  sentiments  or  the  feelings  of  that  man 
who  imagines,  that  he  stands  in  no  need  of  such  sensible  me- 
diums, to  impress  his  mind  with  a  sense  of  the  benevolent  care 
and  omnipresence  of  God. 


CHAPTER  II. 


CONTAINING  A  CURSORY  VIEW  OF  SOME  OF  THE  SCIENCES 

WHICH  ARE  RELATED  TO  RELIGION  AND 

CHRISTIAN  THEOLOGY. 


Theology  has  generally  been  viewed  as  a  study  of  a  very 
limited  range :  and,  hence,  when  it  has  been  admitted  into  the 
circle  of  the  sciences,  a  much  smaller  space  has  been  allotted 
for  its  discussion,  than  has  been  devoted  to  almost  any  other 
department  of  human  knowledge.  When  considered,  how- 
ever, in  its  most  extensive  sense — in  its  relations  to  the  Divine 
Being — to  his  past  and  present  dispensations  towards  the  hu- 
man race — to  the  present  circumstances,  and  the  future  des- 
tiny of  man — and  to  the  physical  and  moral  condition  of  all 
the  sentient  and  intelligent  beings  of  which  we  have  any  inti- 
mation— it  ought  to  be  viewed  as  the  most  varied  and  com- 
prehensive of  all  the  sciences  ;  as  embracing,  within  its  ex- 
tensive grasp,  all  the  other  departments  of  useful  knowledge, 
both  human  and  divine.  As  it  has  God  for  its  object,  it  must 
include  a  knowledge  of  the  universe  he  has  formed — of  the 
movements  which  are  continually  going  on  throughout  the 
wide  extent  of  his  empire,  in  so  far  as  they  lie  open  to  our  in- 
spection— of  the  attributes  which  appear  to  be  displayed  in  all 
his  operations — of  the  moral  laws  he  has  framed  for  the  regu- 
lation of  holy  intelhgences — of  the  merciful  arrangements  he 
has  made  for  the  restoration  of  fallen  man — of  the  plans  by 
which  the  knowledge  of  his  will  is  to  be  circulated  and  exten- 
ded in  the  world  in  which  we  live — of  the  means  by  which 
truth,  and  moral  purity,  and  order,  are  to  be  promoted  among 
our  apostate  race,  in  order  to  their  restoration  to  the  happiness 
they  have  lost — together  with  all  those  diversified  ramifications 
of  knowledge,  which  have  either  a  more  remote,  or  a  more  im- 
mediate bearing  on  the  grand  object  now  specified.  Like  the 
lines  which  proceed  from  the  circumference  to  the  centre  of 

10* 


118  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

an  immense  circle — all  the  moral*  arts  and  sciences  which 
have  been  invented  by  men — every  department  of  human 
knowledge,  however  far  it  may,  at  first  sight,  appear  to  be  re- 
moved from  religion — may  be  considered  as  having  a  direct 
bearing  on  Theology,  as  the  grand  central  point,  and  as  hav- 
ing a  certain  tendency  to  promote  its  important  objects. 

It  is  much  to  be  regretted,  that  Theology  has  so  seldom 
been  contemplated  in  this  point  of  view — and  that  the  sciences 
have  been  considered  rather  as  so  many  independent  branches 
of  secular  knowledge,  than  as  subservient  to  the  elucidation 
of  the  facts  and  doctrines  of  religion,  and  to  the  accomplish- 
ment of  its  benevolent  designs.  Hence,  it  has  happened, 
that  Philosophy  and  ReHgion,  instead  of  marching  hand  in  hand 
to  the  portals  of  immortality,  have  frequently  set  themselves  in 
hostile  array  ;  and  combats  have  ensued  equally  injurious  to 
the  interests  of  both  parties.  The  Philosopher  has  occasion- 
ally been  disposed  to  investigate  the  economy  of  nature, 
without  a  reference  to  the  attributes  of  that  Almighty  Being 
who  presides  over  its  movements,  as  if  the  universe  were  a 
.'•clf-moving  and  independent  machine  ;  and  has,  not  unfre- 
quently  taken  occasion,  from  certain  obscure  and  insolated 
facts,  to  throw  out  insinuations  hostile  to  the  truth  and  the 
character  of  the  Christian  Revelation.  The  Theologian,  on 
the  other  hand,  in  the  heat  of  his  intemperate  zeal  against 
the  infidel  philosopher,  has,  ungardedly,  been  led  to  declaim 
against  the  study  of  science,  as  if  it  were  unfriendly  to  reli- 
gion— has,  in  effect,  set  the  works  of  God  in  opposition  to 
his  word — has  confounded  the  foolish  theories  of  speculafive 
minds  with  the  rational  study  of  the  works  of  Deity — and  has 
thus  prevented  the  mass  of  mankind  from  expanding  their 
minds,  by  the  contemplation  of  the  beauties  and  sublimities  of 
nature. 

It  is  now  high  time  that  a  complete  reconciliation  were 
effected  between  these  contending  parties.  Religion  ought 
never  to  disdain  to  derive  her  supports  and  illustrations  from 
the  researches  of  science  ;  for  the  investigations  of  philoso- 
phy into  the  economy  of  Nature,  from  whatever  motives  they 
may  be  undertaken,  are  nothing  else  than  an  inquiry  into  the 
plans  and  operations  of  the  Eternal  Mind.  And  Philosophy 
ought  always  to  consider  it  as  her  highest  honor,  to  walk  as  an 

*  The  epithet  inoral  is  here  used  in  its  application  to  arts,  because  there 
are  certain  arts  which  must  be  considered  as  having  an  immoral  tendency, 
such  as,  the  art  of  war,  the  art  of  boxing,  of  gambUug,  &c.  &c.  and  which, 
therefore,  cannot  have  a  direct  tendency  to  promote  the  objects  of  reli 
gion. 


INTRODUCTION   OF   THE    SCIENCES.  119 

handmaid  in  the  train  of  that  rehgion  which  points  out  the 
path  to  the  regions  of  eternal  bhss.  By  their  mutual  aid,  and 
the  subserviency  of  the  one  to  the  other,  the  moral  and  intel- 
lectual improvement  of  man  will  be  promoted,  and  the  bene- 
volent purposes  of  God,  in  the  kingdom  of  providence,  grad- 
ually accomplished.  But  when  set  in  opposition  to  each  other, 
the  human  mind  is  bewildered  and  retarded  in  its  progress,  and 
the  Deity  is  apt  to  be  considered  as  set  in  opposition  to  him- 
self— as  proclaiming  one  system  of  doctrines  from  the  econo- 
my of  revelation,  and  another,  and  an  opposite  system,  from 
the  economy  of  nature.  But  if  the  Christian  Revelation,  and 
the  system  of  the  material  world  derived  their  origin  from  the 
same  Almighty  Being,  the  most  complete  harmony  must  sub- 
sist between  the  revelations  they  respectively  unfold  ;  and  the 
apparent  inconsistencies  which  occur,  must  be  owning  chiefly 
to  the  circumstances  of  our  present  station  in  the  universe, 
and  to  the  obscure  and  limited  views  we  are  obliged  to  take  of 
some  of  the  grand  and  diversified  objects  they  embrace.  And, 
therefore,  we  have  reason  to  believe  that,  when  the  system  of 
nature  shall  be  more  extensively  explored,  and  the  leading 
objects  of  revelation  contemplated  in  a  clearer  light,  without 
being  tinged  with  the  false  coloring  of  party  opinions  and 
contracted  views,  and  when  rational  inquirers  shall  conduct 
their  researches  with  a  greater  degree  of  reverence,  humility, 
and  Christian  temper — the  beauty  and  harmony  of  all  the 
plans  and  revelations  of  the  Deity,  in  reference  both  to  the 
physical  and  the  moral  world,  will  be  more  distinctly  perceived 
and  appreciated. 

In  the  following  cursory  sketches,  it  forms  no  part  of  my 
plan  to  trace  even  an  outline  of  the  different  sciences  which  are 
connected  with  religion,  much  less  to  enter  into  any  particular 
details,  in  relation  to  their  facts  and  principles.  It  would  be 
comparatively  easy  to  fill  up  the  remaining  sheets  of  this  vol- 
ume with  skeletons  of  the  different  sciences  ;  but  such  mea- 
gre details  as  behooved  to  be  brought  forward,  could  not  be 
interesting  to  the  general  reader,  and  would  fail  in  accomplish- 
ing the  object  proposed.  My  design  simply  is,  to  select  some 
leading  facts,  or  general  truths,  in  relation  to  some  of  the  phy- 
sical sciences,  for  the  purpose  of  showing  their  connection 
with  the  objects  of  religion  and  the  interests  of  rational  piety. 
At  the  same  time,  such  definite  descriptions  will  be  given  as 
will  enable  common  readers  to  appreciate  the  objects  and 
bearings  of  the  different  branches  of  knowledge  which  may  be 
presented  to  their  view. 


120  THE  CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER, 

'^he  first  science*  I  shall  notice  is,  that  of 

NATURAL    HISTORY. 

This  science,  taken  in  its  most  comprehensive  sense,  in- 
cludes a  knowledge  and  description  of  all  the  known  facts  in 
the  material  universe. 

It  is  to  be  regretted,  that  most  books  published  under  the 
title  of  A^atural  History^  to  which  common  readers  have  ac- 
cess, contain  nothing  more  than  a  general  description  of  ani- 
mals, as  if  this  science  were  confined  merely  to  one  class  of 
beings  ;  whereas  there  is  an  infinite  variety  of  other  objects 
seldom  noticed,  which  would  appear  no  less  interesting,  and, 
in  some  instances,  much  more  novel  and  gratifying  to  the  gene- 
ral reader,  and  to  the  youthful  mind.  All  the  diversified  forms 
of  matter,  whether  existing  on  the  surfiice  or  in  the  bowels  of 
the  earth,  in  the  ocean,  the  atmosphere,  or  in  the  heavens, 
form  the  legitimate  objects  of  this  department  of  the  science 
of  nature. 

Were  we,  therefore,  to  sketch  a  comprehensive  outline  of 
the  subjects  of  Natural  History,  we  might,  in  the  first  place, 
take  a  cursory  survey  of  the  globe  we  inhabit,  in  reference  to 
its  magnitude,  figure,  motions,  and  general  arrangements — the 
form,  relations,  and  extent  of  its  continents — the  numerous 
islands  which  diversify  the  surface  of  the  ocean — the  magni 
tude,  the  direction,  and  the  extent  of  its  rivers,  and  the  quan- 
tity of  water  they  pour  into  the  ocean — the  direction,  elevation, 
and  extent  of  the  different  ranges  of  mountains  which  rise  from 
its  surface — the  plains,  morasses,  lakes,  forests,  dells,  and 
sandy  deserts,  which  diversify  its  aspect — the  extent,  the  mo- 
tions, the  color,  and  the  different  aspects  of  the  ocean,  and  the 
facts  which  have  been  ascertained  respecting  its  saitness,  its 
depth,  its  bottom,  and  its  different  currents.  We  might  next 
take  a  more  particular  view  of  some  of  the  most  remarkable 
objects  on  its  surface,  and  give  a  detail  of  the  facts  which  are 
known  respecting  the  history  of  volcanoes — their  number — 
the  countries  in  which  they  are  situated — the  awful  pheno- 
mena they  exhibit — and  the  devastations  they  have  produced  : 

*  The  term  science,  in  its  most  general  and  extensive  sense,  signifies 
knowledge,  particularly  that  species  of  knowledge  which  is  acquired  by  the 
exertion  of  the  human  faculties.  In  a  more  restricted  sense,  it  denotes,  a 
systematic  species  of  knowledge,  which  consists  of  rule  and  order,  such  as 
Mathematics,  Astronomy,  Natural  Philosophy,  &c. — In  the  discussions 
contained  in  this  work,  it  is  used  in  its  most  general  sense,  as  denoting  the 
various  departments  of  human  knowledge,  in  which  sense,  history,  both* 
natural,  civil,  and  sacred,  may  be  termed  scietice. 


NATURAL    HISTORY.  121 

the  history  of  earthquakes,  then-  phenomena  and  effects,  and 
the  countries  most  subject  to  their  ravages — basahic  and 
rocky  wonders,  natural  bridges,  precipices,  cataracts,  ice 
islands,  icebergs,  glaciers,  whirlpools,  mineral  wells,  recipro- 
cating fountains,  boiling  springs,  sulphuric  mountains,  bitu- 
minous lakes,  volcanic  islands — the  various  aspects  of  nature 
ni  the  different  zones,  and  the  contrasts  presented  between 
the  verdant  scenes  of  tropical  climes,  and  the  icy  cliffs  of  the 
polar  regions.  We  would  next  take  a  survey  of  the  subter- 
raneous wonders  which  lie  beneath  the  surface  of  the  earth — - 
the  immense  chasms  and  caverns  which  wind  in  various  direc- 
tions among  the  interior  strata  of  our  globe — such  as  the 
Great  Kentucky  cavern,  and  the  grotto  of  Antiparos — the 
mines  of  salt,  coal,  copper,  lead,  diamond,  iron,  quicksilver, 
tin,  gold,  and  silver — ^the  substances  which  compose  the  vari- 
ous strata,  the  fossil  bones,  shells,  and  petrifactions  which  are 
embedded  in  the  different  layers,  and  the  bendings  and  dis- 
ruptions which  appear  to  have  taken  place  in  the  substances 
which  compose  the  exterior  crust  of  the  earth.  We  might 
next  survey  the  atmosphere  with  which  the  earth  is  environed, 
and  give  a  detail  of  the  facts  which  have  been  ascertained 
respecting  its  specific  gravity  and  pressure,  the  elementary 
principles  of  which  it  is  compounded,  its  refractive  and  reflect- 
ive powers,  and  the  phenomena  which  result  from  its  various 
properties  and  modifications — the  meteors  which  appear  in  its 
different  regions — thunder  and  lightning,  winds,  hail,  rain, 
clouds,  rainbows  ;  parhelias  or  mock-suns,  meteoric  stones, 
the  aurora  borealis,  luminous  arches,  ignes  fatui,  the  mirage, 
the  fata  morgana,  hurricanes,  monsoons,  whirlwinds  and  wa- 
terspouts, sounds  and  echoes. 

In  prosecuting  our  survey  of  sublunary  nature,  we  would 
next  advert  to  the  various  orders  of  the  vegetable  tribes — their 
anatomical  structure — the  circulation  of  their  juices — the  food 
by  which  they  are  nourished — the  influence  of  light  and  air 
on  their  growth  and  motions — their  male  and  female  organs — 
their  periods  of  longevity — their  modes  of  propagation — their 
diseases  and  dissolution — their  orders,  genera,  and  species — 
their  immense  variety— their  influence  on  the  salubrity  of  the 
atmosphere — the  relation  which  their  roots,  leaves,  and  fruits 
bear  to  the  wants  of  man  and  other  animals,  in  supplying  food, 
clothing,  and  materials  for  constructing  habitations — the  gums 
and  resinous  substances  they  exude — the  odors  they  exhale — 
the  variety  of  colors  they  exhibit — the  vast  diversity  of  forms 
in  which  they  appear — and  the  beauty  and  variety  which  thev 
spread  over  the  whole  face  of  nature 


123  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

The  mineral  kingdom  would  next  require  to  be  surveyed. 
We  would  inquire  into  the  facts  which  have  been  ascertained 
respecting  the  earthijy  saline,  injiammahh,  and  metallic  sub- 
stances which  are  found  on  the  surface  and  in  the  bowels  of 
the  earth — their  specific  and  distinguishing  characters — the 
elementary  principles,  or  simple  substances,  of  which  they  are 
composed — the  regions  of  the  earth  where  the  respective 
minerals  most  frequently  abound — and  the  ends  which  they 
are  designed  to  accomplish  in  the  constitution  of  the  globe. 
We  would  consider,  more  particularly,  the  various  metals, 
such  as  iron,  copper,  lead,  tin,  gold,  silver,  bismuth,  zinc,  &c. 
in  reference  to  the  substances  with  which  they  are  united  in 
their  native  ores — the  changes  produced  upon  them  by  the 
action  of  oxygen  and  the  different  acids — their  combustibility 
— their  combination  with  phosphorus,  sulphur,  and  carbon  ; 
and  various  compounds  into  which  they  may  be  formed — their 
important  uses  in  the  arts  which  minister  to  the  comfort  and 
embellishment  of  human  life — their  relation  to  the  multifarious 
necessities  of  man — and  the  wisdom  and  goodness  of  the 
Creator,  as  displayed  in  their  arrangement  in  the  bowels  of 
the  earth,  and  in  the  admirable  properties  of  which  they  are 
possessed.  In  these  details,  the  natural  history  o?  Iron  would 
hold  a  prominent  place.  In  point  of  tdilify,  it  claims  the  high- 
est rank  in  the  class  of  metals,  and  is  intrinsically  more  valua 
ble  than  gold  and  silver,  and  all  the  diamonds  of  the  East. — 
There  is  scarcely  a  mineral  substance  in  the  whole  compass 
of  nature,  which  affords  a  more  striking  instance  of  the  bene- 
ficial and  harmonious  adaptq,tion  of  things  in  the  universal  sys- 
tem. We  would,  therefore,  consider  it  in  reference  to  its  vast 
abundance  in  all  parts  of  the  world — the  numerous  substances 
into  which  it  enters  into  combination — its  magnetical  property 
— its  capability  of  being  fused  and  welded — the  numerous 
useful  utensils  it  has  been  the  means  of  producing — its  agency 
in  carrying  forward  improvements  in  art  and  science,  in  the 
civilization  of  barbarous  tribes,  and  in  promoting  the  progress 
of  the  human  mind  ;  and  the  aids  which  it  affords  to  the  Chris- 
tian missionary  in  heathen  lands. 

Having  surveyed  the  inanimate  parts  of  the  terraqueous 
globe,  and  its  appendages,  we  might  next  direct  our  attention 
to  the  animated  tribes  with  which  it  is  peopled.  Beginning 
at  JVIan,  the  head  of  the  animal  creation,  we  would  detail  the 
principal  facts  which  have  been  ascertained  respecting  his 
structure  and  organical  functions — the  muscular  movements 
of  the  human  body,  the  system  of  bones,  nerves,  veins,  and 
arteries  ;  the  process  of  respiration  ;  and  the  organs  of  vision* 


NATURAL    HISTORY.  1Z6 

hearing,  smelling,  tasting,  and  feeling,  by  which  he  holds  a 
correspondence  with  the  material  world — the  moditications 
which  appear  in  his  corporeal  frame  and  in  his  mental  facul- 
ties, during  the  periods  of  infancy,  puberty,  manhood,  and  old 
age — the  causes  and  phenomena  of  sleep  and  dreaming — the 
varieties  of  the  human  race,  in  respect  of  color,  stature,  and 
features — the  deviations  from  the  ordinary  course  of  nature, 
which  occasionally  occur,  in  the  case  of  monsters,  dwarfs,  and 
giants — the  moral  and  intellectual  faculties — and  those  distin- 
guishing characteristics  which  prove  the  superiority  of  man 
over  the  other  tribes  of  animated  nature. 

The  inferior  ranks  of  the  animal  creation  would  next  demand 
our  attention.     We  would  take  a  survey  of  the  numerous  tribes 
of  Quadrupeds,  Birds,  Fishes,  Serpents,  Lizards,  and  Insects, 
in  reference  to  the  characteristic  marks  by  which  the  diilerent 
species  are   distinguished, — their  food,  and  habitations — the 
different  modes  in  which  they  display  their  architective  faculty, 
in  constructing  places  of  abode  for  shelter  and  protection — 
the  clothing  with  which  they  are  furnished — their  sagacity  in 
finding  out  the  proper  means  for  subsistence  and  self-preser- 
vation— their  hostilities — their  artifices  in  catching  their  prey, 
and  escaping  their  enemies — their  modes  of  propagation — 
their  transformations  from  one  state  and  form  to  another — 
their   migrations  to   different   countries    and   climates — their 
various  instincts — their  care  in  rearing  and  protecting  their 
young — their  passions,  mental  characters,  and  social  disposi- 
tions— their  language,  or  modes  of  communication  with  each 
other — their   capacities  for  instruction    and   improvement — 
their  different  powers  of  loco-motion — the  adaptation  of  ali 
their  organs  to  the  purposes  for  which  they  seem  intended — 
the  indications  they  give  of  being  possessed  of  moral  disposi- 
i  tions  and  rational  powers — their  ditlerent  periods  of  longevity, 
I  and  the  ends  which  they  are  intended  to  subserve  in  the  system 
I  of  nature.     Along  with  these  details,  certain  views  might  be 
i  exhibited  of  the  various  forms  of  sensitive  life,  and  modes  of 
I  existence,  v/hich  obtain  in  those  numerous  species  of  animals 
I  which  are  invisible  to  the  naked  eye,  and  which  tiie  microscope 
discovers  in  almost  every  department  of  nature. 
]      Having  surveyed  the  objects  which  compose  our  sublunary 
I  system,  we  would  next  direct  our  view  to  the  regions  of  the 
I  sky,  and  contemplate  the  facts  which  have  been  discovered 
I  in  relation  to  the  celestial  orbs.     We  would  first  attend  to  the 
apparent  motion  of  the  sun,  the  different  points  of  the  horizon 
at  which  he  seems  to  rise  and  set,  and  the  different  degrees  of 
:  elevation  to  which  he  arrives,  at  different  seasons  of  the  year. 


124  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

— the  different  aspects  he  presents  as  viewed  from  different 
parts  of  the  earth's  surface,  and  the  different  lengths  of  days 
and  nights  in  different  parts  of  the  world.  We  would  next 
attend  to  the  varied  phases  of  the  moon — the  direct  and  re- 
trograde motions  of  the  planets — the  apparent  diurnal  motion 
of  the  whole  celestial  sphere,  from  east  to  west — and  the  dif- 
ferent clusters  of  stars  which  are  seen  in  our  nocturnal  sky, 
at  different  seasons  of  the  year.  We  would  next  consider  the 
deductions  which  science  has  made,  respecting  the  order  and 
arrangement  of  the  planets  which  compose  the  solar  system 
— their  distances  from  the  sun,  and  from  the  earth — their 
magnitudes — the  periods  of  their  diurnal  and  annual  revolu- 
tions— the  secondary  planets,  or  moons,  which  accompany 
them — their  eclipses — the  various  phenomena  which  their 
surfaces  present  when  viewed  through  telescopes — the  phy- 
sical influence  which  some  of  them  produce  on  the  surface  of 
our  globe — and  the  singular  appearance  of  those  bodies  called 
Comets,  which  occasionally  visit  this  part  of  our  system.  We 
would,  in  the  next  place,  extend  our  views  to  the  starry  re- 
gions, and  consider  the  number  of  stars  which  present  them- 
selves to  the  naked  eye — the  immensely  greater  numbers 
which  are  discovered  by  telescopes — the  systems  into  which 
they  appear  to  be  arranged — the  facts  which  have  been  ascer- 
tained respecting  neio  stars — double  and  treble  stars — stars 
once  visible,  which  have  now  disappeared  from  the  heavens — 
variable  stars,  whose  lustre  is  increased  and  diminished  at 
different  periods  of  time — and  the  structure  and  position  of 
the  many  hundreds  of  JVcbuhe,  or  starry  systems,  which  ap- 
pear to  be  dispersed  throughout  the  immensity  of  creation. 

All  the  particulars  now  stated,  and  many  others  which 
might  have  been  specified — considered  simply  as  facts  which 
exist  in  the  system  of  Nature — form  the  appropriate  and  legi- 
timate objects  of  Natural  History,  and  demand  the  serious 
attention  of  every  rational  intelligence,  that  wishes  to  trace 
the  perfections  and  agency  of  the  Almighty  Creator.  To  in- 
vestigate the  causes  of  the  diversified  phenomena  which  the 
material  world  exhibits,  and  the  principles  and  modes  by 
which  many  of  the  facts  now  alluded  to  are  ascertained,  is  the 
peculiar  province  of  Natural  Philosophy,  Chemistry,  and  the 
Mathematical  Sciences, 

Amidst  so  vast  a  variety  of  objects  as  Natural  History 
presents,  it  is  dithcult  to  fix  on  any  particular  facts,  as  speci- 
mens of  the  interesting  nature  of  this  department  of  know- 
ledge, without  going  beyond  the  limits  to  which  I  am  neces- 
sarily canfined  in  this  volume.     I  shall  content  myself  with  a 


NATURAL    HISTORY.  125 

i  (description  of  two  objects,  which  have  a  reference  chiefly  to 
j  the  vegetable  kingdom.      The  first  of  these  is 

The  Banian  Tree. — "  This  tree,  which  is  also  called  the 

i  Burr  tree,  or  the  Indian  Fig,  is  one  of  the  most  curious  and 

I  beautiful  of  Nature's  productions,  in  the  genial  climate  of 

I  India,  where  she   sports  with  the  greatest  variety  and  profu- 

,  sion.     Each  tree  is  in  itself  a  grove  ;  and  some  of  them  are 

:  of  an  aniazing  size  and  extent,  and,  contrary  to  m.ost  other 

animal  and  vegetable  productions,  seem  to  be  exempted  from 

decay.     Every  branch  from  the   main  body,  throws   out  its 

own  roots  :  at  first,  in  small  tender  fibres,  several  yards  from 

the  ground  ;  these  continually  grow  thicker,  until,  by  a  gra- 

•  dual  descent,  they  reach  the  surface,  and  there,  striking  in, 

!  they  increase  to  large  trunks,  and  become  parent  trees,  shoot- 

,  ing  out  new  branches  from  the  tops.     These,  in  time,  suspend 

I  their  roots,  and  receiving  nourishment  from  the  earth,  swell 

I  into  trunks,  and  shoot  forth  other  branches  ;  thus  continuing 

I  in  a  state  of  progression,  so  long  as  the  earth,  the  first  parent 

'  of  them  all,  contributes  her  sustenance.     A  Banian  tree,  with 

many  trunks,  forms  the  most  beautiful  walks,  vistas,  and  cool 

recesses,  that  can  be  imagined.     The  leaves  are  large,  soft, 

■  and  of  a  lively  green  ;  the  fruit  is  a  small  fig,  when  ripe,  of  a 

bright  scarlet,  affording  sustenance  to   monkeys,  squirrels, 

peacocks,  and  birds  of  various  kinds,  which  dwell  among  the 

branches. 

"  The  Hindoos  are  peculiarly  fond  of  the  Banian  tree ; 
they  consider  its  long  duration,  its  outstretching  arms,  and  its 
overshadowing  beneficence,  as  emblems  of  the  Deity,  and 
almost  pay  it  divine  honors.  The  Brahmins,  who  thus  '  find 
a  fane  in  every  sacred  grove,'  spend  much  of  their  time  in 
religious  solitude,  under  the  shade  of  the  Banian  tree  ;  they 
plant  it  near  their  temples  or  pagodas  ^  and  in  those  villages 
where  there  is  no  structure  erected  for  public  worship,  they 
iplace  an  image  under  one  of  these  trees,  and  there  perform  a 
morning  and  evening  sacrifice.  The  natives  of  all  castes 
Irmd  tribes  are  fond  of  recreating  in  the  cool  recesses,  beau- 
jtiful  walks,  and  lovely  vistas  of  this  umbrageous  canopy,  im- 
Ipervious  to  the  hottest  beams  of  a  tropical  sun.  These  are 
the  trees  under  whfch  a  sect  of  naked  philosophers,  called 
Gymnosophists  assembled  in  Arrian's  days,  and  this  historian 
of  Ancient  Greece  presents  a  true  picture  of  the  modera 
Hindoos.  '■  In  winter,'  he  says,  '  the  Gymnosophists  enjoy 
the  benefit  of  the  sun's  rays  in  the  open  air  ;  and  in  summer, 
when  the  heat  becomes  excessive,  they  pass  their  time  in  cool 
and  moist  places,  under  las'ge  trees,  which,  according  to  tlie 

11 


126  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHItOSOFHER. 

accounts  of  Ncarchus,  cover  a  circumference  of  five  acreSf 
and  extend  their  branches  so  far,  that  ten  thoasand  men  may 
easily  find  shelter  under  them.' 

"  On  the  banks  of  the  river  Narbuddy,  in  the  province  of 
Guzzerat,  is  a  Banian  tree,  supposed,  by  some  persons,  to  be 
the  one  described  by  Nearchus,  and  certainly  not  inferior  to 
it.  It  is  distinguished  by  the  name  of  Cubbeer  Burr,  which 
was  given  it  in  honor  of  a  famous  saint.  High  floods  have,  at 
various  times,  swept  away  a  considerable  part  of  this  extraor- 
dinary tree  ;  but  what  still  remains,  is  nearly  two  thousand  feet 
in  circumference  measured  round  the  principal  stems  ;  the 
overhanging  branches,  not  yet  struck  down,  cover  a  much  lar 
ger  space  ;  and  under  it  grow  a  number  of  custard-apple  and 
other  fruit  trees.  The  large  trunks  of  this  single  tree  amount 
to  three  hundred  and  fifiy  ;  and  the  smaller  ones  exceed  three 
thousand  ;  every  one  of  these  is  constantly  sending  forth  bran- 
ches and  hanging  roots,' to  form  other  trunks,  and  become  the 
parents  of  a  future  progeny.  The  Cubbeer  Burr  is  famed 
throughout  Hindostan,  not  only  on  account  of  its  great  extent, 
but  also  of  its  surpassing  beauty.  The  Indian  armies  general- 
ly encamp  around  it ;  and  at  stated  seasons,  solemn  Jatarras, 
or  Hindoo  festivals,  to  which  thousands  of  votaries  repair,  from 
every  part  of  the  Mogul  empire,  are  there  celebrated.  It  is 
said  that  seven  thousand  persons  find  ample  room  to  repose 
under  its  shade.  It  has  long  been  the  custom  of  the  British 
residents  in  India,  on  their  hunting  and  shooting  parties,  to 
form  extensive  encampments,  and  spend  weeks  together,  un- 
der this  delightful  and  magnificent  pavilion,  which  aflbrds  a 
shelter  to  all  travellers,  particularly  to  the  religious  tribes  of 
the  Hindoos.  It  is  generally  filled  with  greenwood  pigeons, 
doves,  peacocks,  and  a  variety  of  feathered  songsters — with 
monkeys  which  both  divert  the  spectator,  by  their  antic  tricks, 
and  interest  him  by  the  paternal  affection  they  display  to  their 
young  ofisprmg,  in  teaching  them  to  select  their  food,  and  to 
exert  themselves  in  jumping  from  bough  to  bough, — and  is 
shaded  by  bats  of  a  large  size,  many  of  them  measuring  up- 
wards of  six  feet,  from  the  extremity  of  one  wing  to  the  other. 
This  tree  affords  not  only  shelter,  but  sustenance,  to  all  its  in- 
habitants, being  covered  amid  its  bright  foliage,  with  small  figs, 
of  a  rich  scarlet,  on  which  they  all  regale  with  as  much  delight 
as  the  lords  of  creation  on  their  more  costly  fare,  in  their  par- 
ties of  pleasure." — See  EncycJopcedia  Britannica^  Art.  Ficus, 

This  tree,  which  is  doubtless,  one  of  the  most  singular  and 
magnificent  objects  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  appears  to  be  a 
world  in  miniature,  in  which  thousands  both  of  human  beings, 


NATURAL    HISTORY.  127 

and  of  the  inferior  tribes  that  traverse  the  earth  and  the  air, 
may  find  ample  accommodation  and  subsistence.  What  a 
striking  contrast  does  it  present  to  the  forests  of  trees,  or 
mushrooms,  which  are  perceived  by  the  help  of  the  microscope, 
in  a  piece  of  mouldiness — every  plant  of  which  is  several  hun- 
dreds of  times  smaller  than  the  point  of  a  fine  needle  !  Yet  both 
are  the  effects  of  the  agency  of  the  same  All- wise  and  Omni- 
potent Being.  And  what  an  immense  variety  of  gradations 
is  to  be  found  in  the  vegetable  world,  between  these  two  ex- 
tremes—  every  part  of  the  vast  interval  being  filled  up  with 
fiower--;,  herbs,  shrubs,  and  trees  of  every  color,  f^rm,  and 
size,  and  in  such  vast  multitudes  and  profusion  that  no  man 
can  number  them  ! 

An  object,  which  "approximates  in  a  certain  degree  to  the 
one  now  described,  is  mentioned  in  "  Staunton's.  Account  of 
Macartney's  Embassy  to  China,"  p.  70.  It  is  called  by  Bo- 
tanists, Adansonia,  and  is  also  known  by  the  name  of  the 
JMonheij  Bread  Tree,  and  was  discovered  in  the  island  of  St. 
Jago.  "  The  circumference,  or  girth  of  the  base,  was  56  feet, 
which  soon  divided  into  two  vast  branches,  the  one  in  a  per- 
pendicular direction,  whose  periphery,  or  girth,  was  42  feet, 
the  other  26.  Another,  of  the  same  species,  stood  near  it, 
whose  single  trunk,  girthing  only  38  feet,  was  scarcely  noti- 
ced." 

The  only  other  specimen  I  shall  exhibit  to  the  reader  has 
a  relation  both  to  the  animal  and  to  the  vegetable  kingdom. 
It  is  well  known  that  the  examination  of  flowers',  and  vegeta- 
bles of  every  description,  by  the  microscope,  opens  a  new  and 
interesting  field  of  wonders  to  the  inquiring  naturalist.  Sir 
John  Hill  has  given  the  following  curious  account  of  what  ap- 
peared on  his  examining  a  carnation  : 

"  The  principal  fiower  in  an  elegant  bouquet  was  a  carna- 
tion :  the  fragrance  of  this  led  me  to  enjoy  it  frequently  and 
near.  The  sense  of  smelhng  was  not  the  only  one  affected 
on  these  occasions  :  while  that  was  satiated  with  the  powerful 
sweet,  the  ear  was  constantly  attacked  by  an  extremely  soft, 
but  agreeable  murmuring  sound.  It  was  easy  to  know  that 
some  animal  within  the  covert  must  be  the  musician,  and  that 
the  little  noise  must  come  from  some  little  creature,  suited  to 
produce  it.  I  instantly  distended  the  lower  part  of  the  flower, 
and  placing  it  in  a  full  light,  could  discover  troops  of  little  in- 
sects frisking,  with  wild  jollity,  among  the  narrow  pedestals 
that  supported  its  leaves,  and  the  little  threads  that  occupied 
its  centre.  What  a  fragrant  world  for  their  habitation  !  What  a 
perfect  security  from  all  annoyance,  m  the  dusky  husk  that 


128  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

surrounded  the  scene  of  action  !  Adapting  a  microscope  to 
take  in,  at  one  view,  the  whole  base  of  the  flower,  I  gave  my- 
self an  opportunity  of  contemplating  what  they  were  about, 
and  this  for  many  days  together,  without  giving  them  the  least 
disturbance.  Thus,  I  could  discover  their  economy,  their 
passions,  and  their  enjoyments.  The  microscope,  on  this  oc- 
casion, had  given  what  nature  seemed  to  have  denied  to  the 
objects  of  contemplation.  The  base  of  the  flower  extended 
itself  under  its  influence,  to  a  vast  plain  ;  the  slender  stems  of 
the  leaves  became  trunks  of  so  many  stately  cedars  ;  the 
threads  in  the  middle  seemed  columns  of  massy  structure,  sup- 
porting at  the  top  their  several  ornaments  ;  and  the  narrow 
spaces  between  were  enlarged  in  walks,  parterres,  and  terra- 
ces. On  the  pohshed  bottoms  of  these,  brighter  than  Parian 
marble,  walked  in  pairs,  alone,  or  in  larger  companies,  the 
winged  inhabitants  :  these,  from  little  dusky  flies,  for  such  only 
the  naked  eye  would  have  shown  them,  were  raised  to  glo- 
rious glittering  animals,  stained  with  living  purple,  and  with  a 
glossy  gold,  that  would  have  made  all  the  labors  of  the  loom 
contemptible  in  the  comparison. — I  could,  at  leisure,  as  they 
walked  together,  admire  their  elegant  limbs,  their  velvet  shoul- 
ders, and  their  silken  wings  ;  their  backs  vying  with  the  em- 
pyrean in  its  blue  ;  and  their  eyes,  each  formed  of  a  thousand 
others,  out-glittering  the  little  planes  on  a  brilliant ;  above  de- 
scription, and  too  great  almost  for  admiration.  I  could  observe 
them  here  singling  out  their  favorite  females  ;  courting  them 
with  the  music  of  their  buzzing  wings,  ^vith  little  songs,  formed 
for  their  little  organs,  leading  them  from  walk  to  walk,  among 
the  perfumed  shades,  and  pointing  out  to  their  taste,  the  drop 
of  liquid  nectar,  just  bursting  from  some  vein  within  the  living 
trunk — here  were  the  perfumed  groves,  the  more  than  mystic 
shades  of  the  poet's  fancy  realized.  Here  the  happy  lovers 
spent  their  days  in  joyful  dalliance,  or  in  the  triumph  of  their 
little  hearts,  skipped  after  one  another,  from  stem  to  stem» 
among  the  painted  trees,  or  winged  their  short  flight  to  the 
close  shadow  of  some  broader  leaf,  to  revel  undisturbed  in  the 
heights  of  ail  felicity." 

This  picture  of  the  splendor  and  felicity  of  insect  hfe,  may, 
to  certain  readers,  appear  somewhat  overcharged.  But  those 
who  have  been  much  in  the  habit  of  contemplating  the  beau- 
ties of  the  animal  and  vegetable  world,  through  microscopes, 
can  easily  enter  into  all  the  views  which  are  here  described. 
I  have  selected  this  example,  for  the  purpose  of  illustrating  the 
unbounded  goodness  of  the  Creator,  in  the  vast  profusion  of 
enjoyment  he  has  communicated,  even  to  the  lowest  tribes  o£ 


NATURAL    HISTORT.  1S9 

animal  existence,  and  as  a  specimen  of  those  invisible  worlds 
which  exist  beyond  the  range  of  our  natural  vision.  For  it 
appears  that  there  is  a  gradation  of  worlds  downwards,  as  well 
as  upwards.  However  small  our  globe  may  appear  when  com- 
pared with  the  sun,  and  with  the  immensity  of  starry  systems 
which  lie  dispersed  through  the  infinity  of  space,  there  are 
worlds  iiiled  with  myriads  of  living  beings,  which,  in  point  of 
size  and  extent,  bear  as  small  a  proportion  to  the  earth,  as  the 
earth  bears  to  the  vast  assemblage  of  the  celestial  worlds.  A 
single  flower,  a  leaf,  or  a  drop  of  water  may  appear  as  large 
.  and  as  diversified  in  its  structure,  to  some  of  the  beings  which 
inhabit  it,  as  the  whole  earth  appears  to  the  view  of  man  ;  and 
a  thousand  scenes  of  magnificence  and  beauty  maybe  presen- 
ted to  their  sight,  of  which  no  distinct  conception  can  be 
formed  by  the  human  mind.  The  many  thousands  of  trans- 
parent globes,  of  which  their  eyes  are  composed,  may  magnify 
and  multiply  the  objects  around  them  without  end,  so  that  an 
object  scarcely  visible  to  the  eye  of  man,  may  appear  to  them 
as  a  vast  extended  universe. 

"  Having  examined,"  says  St.  Pierre,  "  one  day,  by  a  mi- 
croscope, the  flowers  of  thyme,  I  distinguished  in  them,  with 
equal  surprise  and  dehght,  superb  flagons  with  a  long  neck, 
of  a  substance  resembling  the  amethyst,  from  the  gullets  of 
which  seemed  to  flow  ingots  of  liquid  gold.  I  have  never 
made  observations  of  the  corolla,  simply  of  the  smallest 
flower,  without  finding  it  composed  of  an  admirable  substance, 
half  transparent,  studded  with  brilliants,  and  shining  in  the 
most  lively  colors.  The  beings  which  live  under  a  reflex  thus 
enriched,  must  have  ideas  very  diflerent  from  ours,  of  light, 
and  of  the  other  phenomena  of  nature.  A  drop  of  dew,  fil- 
tering in  the  capillary  and  transparent  tubes  of  a  plant,  pre- 
sents'to  them  thousands  of  cascades  ;  the  same  drop  fixed  as 
a  wave  on  the  extremity  of  one  of  its  prickles,  an  ocean  with- 
out a  shore  ;  evaporated  into  air,  a  vast  aerial  sea. — It  is  cre- 
dible, then,  from  analogy,  that  there  are  animals  feeding  on 
the  leaves  of  plants  like  the  cattle  in  our  meadows,  and  on 
our  mountains,  which  repose  under  the  shades  of  a  down  im- 
perceptible to  the  naked  eye,  and  which,  from  goblets  formed 
like  so  many  suns,  quaff"  nectar  of  the  color  of  gold  and 
silver." 

Thus  it  appears,  that  the  universe  extends  to  infinity  on 
either  hand  ;  and  that  whenever  matter  exists,  from  the  pon- 
derous globes  of  heaven  down  to  the  invisible  atom,  there  the 
Almighty  Creator  has  prepared  habitations  for  countless  or- 
ders of  existence,  from  the  seraph  to  the  animalcula,  in  order 

11* 


130  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

to  demonstrate  his  boundless  beneficence,  and  the  infinite  va- 
riety of  modes  by  which  he  can  diffuse  happiness  through  the 
universal  system. 

"  How  sweet  to  muse  upon  His  skill  displayed  ! 
'     Infinite  skill !  in  all  that  he  has  made  ; 
To  trace  in  nature's  most  minute  design 
The  signature  and  stamp  of  Power  Divine  ; 
Contrivance  exquisite,  expressed  ^vith  ease, 
Where  unassisted  sight  no  beauty  sees ;  • 

The  shapely  limb  and  lubricated  joint, 
Within  the  small  dimensions  of  a  point ; 
Muscle  and  nerve  miraculously  spun, 
His  mighty  work  who  speaks,  and  it  is  done 
Th'  invisible  in  things  scarce  seen  revealed  ; 
To  whom  an  atom  is  an  ample  field  !" — Cowper,'s  Retirement. 

With  regard  to  the  religions  tendency  of  the  study  of  Na" 
tural  History,  it  may  be  remarked — that^  as  all  the  objects 
which  it  embraces  are  the  n'orkmanship  of  God — the  deline- 
ations and  descriptions  of  the  Natural  Historian,  must  be  con- 
sidered as  "  The  history  of  the  operations  of  the  Creator  ;'' 
or,  in  other  words,  so  far  as  the  science  extend^^.,  "  The  his- 
tory of  the  Creator  himself:"  for  the  marks  of  his  incessant 
agency,  his  power,  wisdom,  and  beneficence  are  impressed 
on  every  object,  however  minute,  throughout  the  three  king- 
doms of  nature^  and  throughout  every  region  of  earth,  air, 
and  sky.  As  the  Deity  is  invisible  to  mortal  eyes,  and  can- 
not be  directly  contemplated  by  finite  minds,  without  some 
material  medium  of  communication — there  are  but  two  me- 
diums with  which  we  are  acquainted,  by  which  we  can  attain 
a  knowledge  of  his  nature  and  perfections.  These  are,  either 
the  facts  which  have  occurred  in  the  course  of  his  providen- 
tial dispensations  towards  our  race,  since  the  commencement 
of  time,  and  the  moral  truths  connected  with  them — or,  the 
facts  which  are  displayed  in  the  economy  of  nature.  The 
first  class  of  facts  is  recorded  in  the  Sacred  History,  and  in 
the  Annals  of  Nations  ;  the  second  class  is  exhibited  in  the 
diversified  objects  and  motions  which  appear  throughout  the 
system  of  the  visible  universe.  The  one  may  be  termed  the 
Moral  History,  and  the  other,  the  JSTatural  History  of  the 
operations  of  the  Creator.  It  is  obviously  incumbent  on  every 
rational  being,  to  contemplate  the  Creator  through  both  these 
mediums  ;  for  each  of  them  conveys  its  distinct  and  peculiar 
revelations ;  andyConsequently,  our  perception  of  Deity  through 
the  one  medium,  does  not  supersede  the  necessity  of  our  con- 
templating him  through  the  other.  While^  therefore,  it  is  our 
duty  to  contemplate  the  perfections^  the  providence,  and  the 
agency  of  God»  as  displayed  in  the  Scripture  Revelation,  it  kj 


NATURAL   HISTORY.  131 

also  incumbent  upon  us,  to  trace  his  attributes  in  the  System 
of  Nature,  in  order  that  we  may  be  enabled  to  contemplate 
the  eternal  Jehovah,  in  every  variety  of  aspect,  m  which  he 
has  been  pleased  to  exhibit  himself,  in  the  universe  he  has 
formed. 

The  visible  creation  may  be  considered  as  a  permanent  and 
sensible  manifestation  of  Deity ;  intended  every  moment  to 
present  to  our  view,  the  unceasing  energies  of  Him  "  in  whom 
we  live  and  move,"  And  if  the  train  of  our  thoughts  were 
directed  in  its  proper  channel,  we  would  perceive  God  in  every 
object,  and  in  every  movement :  we  would  behold  him  oper- 
ating in  the  whirlwind,  and  in  the  storm  ;  in  the  subterraneous 
cavern,  and  in  the  depths  of  the  ocean ;  in  the  gentle  rain, 
and  the  refreshing  breeze  ;  in  the  rainbow,  the  fiery  meteor, 
and  the  lightning's  flash  ;  in  the  splendors  of  the  sun,  and  the 
majestic  movements  of  the  heavens ;  in  the  frisking  of  the 
lambs,  the  songs  of  birds,  and  the  buzz  of  insects  ;  in  the 
circulation  of  our  blood,  the  movements  of  our  joints,  the  mo- 
tion of  our  eyeballs,  and  in  the  rays  of  light  which  are  conti- 
nually darting  from  surrounding  objects,  for  the  purposes  of 
A^ision.  For  these,  and  ten  thousand  other  agencies  in  the 
systems  of  nature,  are  nothing  else  but  the  voice  of  Deity, 
proclaiming  to  the  sons  of  men,  in  silent  but  emphatic  lan- 
guage, "  Stand  still,  and  consider  the  wonderful  works  of 
God." 

If,  then,  it  be  admitted,  that  the  study  of  Nature  is  the  study 
of  the  Creator — to  overlook  the  grand  and  beautiful  scenery 
with  which  we  are  surrounded,  or  to  undervalue  any  thing 
which  Infinite  Wisdom  has  formed,  is  to  overlook  and  con- 
temn the  Creator  himself.  Whatever  God  has  thought  pro- 
per to  create,  and  to  present  to  our  view  in  the  visible  world, 
it  becomes  man  to  study  and  contemplate,  that,  from  thence, 
he  may  derive  motives  to  excite  him  to  the  exercise  of  rever- 
ence and  adoration,  of  gratitude  and  praise.  In  so  far  as  any 
individual  is  unacquainted  with  the  various  facts  of  the  his- 
tory of  nature,  in  so  far  does  he  remain  ignorant  of  the  mani- 
festations of  Deity  ;  for  every  object,  on  the  theatre  of  the 
universe,  exhibits  his  character  and  designs  in  a  different  point 
of  view.  He  who  sees  God  only  as  he  displays  himself  in  his 
operations  on  the  earth,  but  has  never  contemplated  the  firma- 
ment with  the  eye  of  reason,  must  be  unacquainted  with  those 
amazing  energies  of  eternal  Power,  which  are  displayed  in 
the  stupendous  fabric  and  movements  of  the  orbs  of  heaven. 
He  who  sees  God  only  in  the  general  appearances  of  nature, 
but  neglects  to  penetrate  into  his  minute  operations,  must  re- 


132  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

main  ignorant  of  those  astonishing  manifestations  of  Divine 
wisdom  and  skill  which  appear  in  the  contrivances,  adapta- 
tions, and  functions  of  the  animal  and  the  vegetable  king- 
doms. For,  the  more  we  know  of  the  work,  the  more  ac- 
curate and  comprehensive  will  be  our  views  of  the  Intelligence 
by  whom  it  was  designed  ;  and  the  farther  we  carry  our  inves- 
tigations of  the  works  of  God,  the  more  admirable  and  asto- 
nishing will  his  plans  and  perfections  appear. 

In  short,  a  devout  contemplation  of  the  works  of  nature  tends 
to  ennoble  the  human  soul,  and  to  dignify  and  exalt  the  affec- 
tions. It  inspires  the  mind  with  a  relish  of  the  beauty,  the 
harmony,  and  order  which  subsist  in  the  universe  around  us — 
it  elevates  the  soul  to  the  love  and  admiration  of  that  Being 
who  is  the  author  of  our  comforts,  and  of  all  that  is  sublime  and 
benificent  in  creation,  and  excites  us  to  joint  with  all  holy 
beings  in  the  chorus  of  praise  to  the  God  and  Father  of  all. 
For  they 

"Whom  Nature's  works  can  charm,  with  God  himself 
Hold  converse,  grow  familiar  day  by  day 
With  his  conceptions,  act  upon  his  plan, 
And  form  to  his  the  relish  of  their  souls." 

The  man  who  surveys  the  vast  field  of  nature,  witn  the  eye 
of  reason  and  devotion,  will  not  only  gain  a  more  comprehen- 
sive view  of  that  illimitable  power  which  organized  the  uni- 
verse, but  will  tind  his  sources  of  enjoyment  continually  in- 
creased, and  will  feel  an  ardent  desire  after  that  glorious  world, 
where  the  veil  which  now  hides  from  our  sight  some  of  the 
grandest  manifestations  of  Deity  will  be  withdrawn,  and  the 
wonders  of  Omnipotence  be  displayed  in  all  their  splendor  and 
perfection. 

In  conformity  with  these  sentiments,  we  find  the  inspired 
writers,  in  numerous  instances,  calling  our  attention  to  the 
wonders  of  creating  power  and  wisdom.  In  one  of  the  first 
speeches  in  which  the  Almighty  is  introduced  as  addressing 
the  sons  of  men,  and  the  longest  one  in  the  Bible,*  our  atten- 
tion is  exclusively  directed  to  the  subjects  of  Natural  History  ; 
— the  whole  address  having  a  reference  to  the  economy  of 
Divine  Wisdom  in  the  arrangement  of  the  world  at  its  first 
creation — the  wonders  of  the  ocean,  and  of  light  and  darkness 
— the  phenomena  of  thunder  and  lightning,  rain,  hail,  snow^ 
frost,  and  other  meteors  in  the  atmosphere — the  intellectual 
faculties  of  man,  and  the  economy  and  instincts  of  quadrupeds^ 
birds,  fishes,  and  other  tribes  of  animated  existence.    Indeed, 

*  Job,  chap,  xxxviii.  xxxix..xl.  xli^ 


NATURAL   HISTORY.  '  133 

the  greater  part  of  the  sublime  descriptions  contained  in  the 
book  of  Job  has  a  direct  reference  ta  the  agency  of  God  in 
the  material  creation,  and  to  the  course  of  his  providence  in 
relation  to  the  different  characters  of  men ;  and  the  reasonings 
of  the  different  speakers  in  that  sacred  drama  proceed  on  the 
supposition  that  their  auditors  were  intimately  acquainted  with 
the  varied  appearances  of  nature,  and  their  tendency  to  exhibit 
the  character  and  perfections  of  the  Omnipotent  Creator. — 
We  find  the  Psalmist,  in  the  104th  Psalm,  employed  in  a  de- 
vout description  of  similar  objects,  from  the  contemplation  of 
which  his  mind  is  raised  to  adoring  views  of  their  Almighty 
Author — and,  from  the  whole  of  his  survey,  he  deduces  the 
following  conclusions  : — "  How  manifold  are  thy  works,  0 
Lord !  Ill  wisdom  thou  hast  made  them  all !  The  earth  is  full 
of  thy  riches  ;  so  is  this  great  and  wide  sea,  wherein  are  things 
,  creeping  innumerable,  both  small  and  great  beasts.  The 
Glory  of  the  Lord  shall  endure  for  ever  ;  the  Lord  shall 
rejoice  in  all  his  works.*  I  will  sing  unto  the  Lord  as  long 
as  I  live ;  I  will  sing  praises  to  my  God,  while  I  have  my 
being." 

But  in  order  to  enter  into  the  spirit  of  such  sublime  reflec- 
tions, we  must  not  content  ourselves  with  a  superficial  and 
cursory  view  of  the  objects  and  operations  of  nature, — we 
must  not  think  it  sufficient  to  acquiesce  in  such  vague  propo- 
sitions as  these — "  The  glory  of  God  is  seen  in  every  blade  of 
grass,  and  every  drop  of  water  ;  all  nature  is  full  of  wonders, 
from  the  dust  of  the  earth  to  the  stars  of  the  firmament."  We 
must  study  the  works  of  creation  with  ardor,  survey  them  with 
minute  attention,  aud  endeavour  to  acquire  a  specific  and  com- 
prehensive knowledge  of  the  Creator's  designs.  We  must 
endeavour  to  acquire  a  knowledge  of  the  particular  modes, 
circumstances,  contexture,  configurations,  adaptations,  struc- 
ture, functions,  and  relations  of  those  objects  in  which  bene- 
volence and  design  conspicuously  appear — in  the  animal  and 
the  vegetable  world,  in  the  ocean,  the  atmosphere,  and  the  hea- 

*  The  glory  of  the  Lord  in  this  passage,  denotes  the  display  of  his  per- 
fections in  the  material  universe  :  and  the  declaration  of  the  inspired  wri- 
ter plainly  intimates,  that  tliis  display  will  continue  for  ever,  and  will  re- 
main as  an  object  of  unceasing  contemplation  to  all  intelligences,  and  as  an 
eternal  monument  of  his  Power  and  Wisdom.  For,  although  the  earth 
and  the  aerial  heavens  will  be  changed  at  the  close  of  that  dispensation  of 
Providence  which  respects  our  world,  yet  the  general  frame  of  the  uni- 
verse, in  its  other  parts,  will  remain  substantially  the  same  ;  and  not  only 
so,  but  will  in  all  probability  be  perpetually  increasing  in  magnitude  and 
grandeur.  And  the  change  which  will  be  effected  in  respect  to  the  terra- 
queous globe  and  its  appendages  will  be  suclv,  that  Jehovali  will  have  rea- 
son to  "  rejoice"  in  this,  as  well  as  m  all  l\is  other  works. 


134  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

veils  ;  that  the  mind  may  be  enabled  to  draw  the  conclusion 
with  full  conviction  and  intelligence — "  Li  ivisdom  thou  hast 
made  them  all.''^  The  pointed  interrogatories  which  Jehovah 
addressed  to  Job,  evidently  imply,  that  Job  had  previously  ac- 
quired an  intimate  acquaintance  with  the  works  of  nature.  It 
seems  to  be  taken  for  granted,  as  a  matter  of  course,  that  he 
made  himself  acquainted  with  the  general  range  of  facts  in  the 
visible  creation  ;  and  the  intention  of  the  several  questions 
presented  to  his  consideration  evidently  was  to  impress  him 
with  a  sense  of  his  own  impotency,  and  to  lead  him  to  the  in- 
vestigation of  the  Avonders  of  Creating  Power  which  he  had 
formerly  overlooked. — The  conclusion  which  the  Psalmist 
draws  respecting  the  Wisdom  displayed  throughout  all  the 
works  of  God,  plainly  intimates,  tha.t  he  had  made  the  different 
parts  of  nature  the  subject  of  minute  examination,  and  of  deep 
reflection  ;  otherwise  he  could  not  have  rationally  deduced  his 
conclusion,  or  felt  those  emotions  which  filled  his  mind  with 
the  pious  rapture  so  beautifully  expressed  in  that  hymn  of  praise 
to  the  Creator  of  the  world. 

We  have,  therefore,  reason  to  believe,  from  these  and  other 
instances,  that  pious  men,  "  in  the  days  of  old,"  were  much 
more  accustomed  than  modern  Christians  to  contemplate  and 
admire  the  visible  v/orks  of  the  Lord — and  it  is  surely  much 
to  be  regretted,  that  we  who  enjoy  so  many  superior  means  of 
information,  and  who  have  access  to  the  brilliant  discoveries 
of  later  and  more  enlightened  times,  should  manifest  so  much 
disregard  to  "  the  works  of  Jehovah  and  the  operations  of  his 
hands."  To  enable  the  common  mass  of  Christians  to  enter 
into  the  spirit  of  this  delightful  study  and  Christian  duty, 
should,  therefore,  be  one  object  of  those  periodical  and  other 
religious  works  which  are  put  into  their  hands  ;  so  that  they 
may  be  enabled,  with  vigor  and  intelligence,  to  form  the  pious 
resolution  of  Asaph,  "  I  will  meditate  on  all  thy  works,  0 
Lord  !  and  talk  of  thy  doings."  "  I  will  utter  abundantly  the 
memory  of  thy  great  goodness,  and  tell  of  thy  wondrous 
works."* 

GEOGRAPHY. 

The  next  department  of  knowledge  I  shall  notice  is  the 
science  of  Geography. 

The  object   of  this  science   is,  to  describe   the  world  we 

*  A  select  list  of  popular  works  on  Natural  History,  and  the  other 
sciences,  noticed  in  the  following  sketches,  will  be  found  in  the  Jlp" 
pendix. 


GEOGRAPHY.  135 

inhabit,*  in  reference  to  the  continents,  islands,  mountains, 
oceans,  seas,  rivers,  empires,  and  kingdoms  with  which  it  is 
diversified,  together  with  the  manners,  customs,  and  reHgion 
of  the  different  tribes  which  people  its  surface. 

In  order  to  form  an  accurate  conception  of  the  relative  posi- 
tions of  objects  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  and  to  enter  with 
intelligence  on  the  study  of  this  subject,  it  is  requisite,  first  of 
all,  to  have  an  accurate  idea  of  itsji<iure  and  magnitude.  For 
a  long  series  of  ages  it  was  supposed  by  the  bulk  of  man- 
kind, that  the  surface  of  the  earth  v/as  nearly  a  plane,  indefi- 
nitely extended,  and  bounded  on  all  sides  by  the  sky.  Lac- 
tantius,  and  several  of  the  fathers  of  the  Christian  church, 
strenuously  argued  that  the  earth  was  extended  infinitely  do  wn- 
Avards,  and  established  upon  several  foundations.  The  an- 
cient philosopher  Heraclitus  is  said  to  have  believed  that  the 
earth  was  of  the  shape  of  a  skitf  or  canoe,  very  much  hol- 
lowed ;  and  the  philosopher  Leucippus  supposed  it  to  be  of 
the  form  of  a  cylinder  or  a  drum.  It  is  only  within  the  period 
of  the  last  three  hundred  years  that  the  true  figure  of  the 
earth  has  been  accurately  ascertained.  This  figure  is  now 
found  to  be  that  of  an  oblate  spheroid,  nearly  approaching  to 
the  shape  of  a  globe  or  sphere. — To  have  asserted  this  opin- 
ion several  ages  ago  would  have  been  consi.dered  as  a  heresy 
in  religion,  and  would  have  subjected  its  abettors  to  the  ana- 
themas of  the  church,  and  even  to  the  peril  of  their  lives. — 
Historians  inform  us  that  the  learned  Spigelius,  bishop  of  Up- 
sal,  in  Sweden,  suffered  martydom  at  the  stake,  in  defence  of 
the  doctrine  of  the  ^intipodes ;  and  we  knov/  that,  for  assert- 
ing the  motion  of  the  earth,  the  celebrated  philosopher  Gali- 
leo was  immured  in  a  dungeon,  and  condemned  by  an  assem- 
blv  of  Cardinals  to  all  the  horrors  of  perpetual  imprisonment. 
The  doctrine  he  maintained,  and  which  is  now  universally  re- 
ceived by  every  one  acquainted  with  the  subject,  was  declared 
by  those  arrogant  ecclesiastics  to  be  "  a  proposition  absurd 
in  its  very  nature,  false  in  philosophy,  heretical  in  religion,  and 
contrary  to  the  Holy  Scriptures."  Such  are  some  of  the  hor- 
rible and  pernicious  consequences  which  f^ow  from  ignorance 
of  the  phenomena  of  nature,  and  of  those  laws  by  which  the 
Almighty  governs  the  universe  he  has  formed ;  and  which 
prove  it  to  be  a  Christian  duty  for  every  rational  being  to  study 
the  order  and  economy  of  the  visible  world. 

That  the  earth  is  nearly  of  a  globular  figure,  is  proved  by 
the  following  considerations  :  1.  When  we  stand  on  the  sea 
shore,  while  the  sea  is  perfectly  calm,  we  perceive  that  the 
surface  of  the  water  is  not  auite  plain,  but  convex  or  rounded; 


136  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

and  if  we  are  on  one  side  of  an  arm  of  the  sea,  as  the  Frith 
of  Forth,  and,  with  your  eyes  near  the  water,  look  towards 
the  opposite  coast,  we  shall  plainly  see  the  water  elevated  be- 
tween our  eyes  and  the  opposite  shore,  so  as  to  prevent  our 
seeing  the  land  near  the  edge  of  the  water.  The  same  expe- 
riment may  be  made  on  any  portion  of  still  water,  of  a  mile 
or  two  in  extent,  when  its  convexity  will  be  perceived  by  the 
eye.  A  little  boat,  for  instance,  may  be  perceived  by  a  man 
who  is  any  height  above  the  water,  but  if  he  stoops  down,  and 
lays  his  eye  near  the  surface,  he  will  find  that  the  fluid  appears 
to  rise,  and  intercept  the  view  of  the  boat.  2.  If  we  take  our 
•station  oh  the  sea-shore,  and  view  the  ships  leaving  the  coast, 
in  any  direction — as  they  retire  from  our  view,  we  may  perceive 
the  masts  and  rigging  of  the  vessels  when  the  hulls  are  out  of 
sight,  and,  as  it  were,  sunk  in  the  water.  On  the  other  hand, 
when  a  ship  is  approaching  the  shore,  the  first  part  of  her  that 
is  seen  is  the  topmast ;  as  she  approaches  nearer,  the  sails 
become  visible,  and,  last  of  all,  the  hull  comes  gradually  into 
view.*  The  reason  of  such  appearances  obviously  is  that  the 
round  or  convex  surface  of  the  water  interposes  between  our 
eye  and  the  body  of  the  ship,  when  she  has  reached  a  certain 
distance,  while,  at  the  same  time,  the  sails  and  topmast,  from 
their  greater  elevation,  may  be  >still  in  view.  To  the  same 
cause  it  is  owing,  that  the  higher  the  eye  is  placed,  the  more 
extensive  is  the  prospect ;  and  hence  it  is  common  for  sailors 
to  climb  to  the  tops  of  masts,  in  order  to  discover  land  or  ships 
at  a  distance.  The  contrary  of  all  this  would  take  place,  if 
the  earth  and  waters  were  an  extended  plane.  When  a  ship 
came  within  view,  the  hull  would  first  make  its  appearance, 
being  the  largest  object,  next  the  sails,  and,  last  of  all,  the  top- 
mast. These  considerations,  which  hold  true  in  all  parts  of 
the  world,  prove  to  a  certainty,  that  the  mass  of  the  ocean  is 
of  a  globular  form  ;  and  if  the  ocean  be  a  portion  of  a  sphere 
it  follows  that  the  land  also  is  of  the  same  general  figure  ;  for 
no  portion  of  the  earth's  surface  is  elevated  above  four  or  five 
miles  above  the  level  of  the  ocean.  3.  That  the  earth  is 
round  from  north  to  south,  appears  from  the  following  circum- 
stance : — When  we  travel  a  considerable  distance  from  north 
to  south,  or  from  south  to  north,  a  number  of  new  stars  suc- 
cessively appear  in  the  heavens,  in  the  quarter  to  which  we  are 
advancing,  and  many  of  those  in  the  oj)posite  quarter  gradually 

*  In  order  to  make  such  observatioirto  advantage,  the  observer's  eye 
should  be,  as  near  as  possible,  on  a  level  ivith  the  sea,  and  he  should  use  a 
telescope  to  enable  him  to  perceive  more  distinctly  the  upper  part  of  the 
vessel. 


GEOGRAPHY.  137 

disappear,  which  would  not  happen  if  the  earth  were  a  plane 
in  that  direction.     4.  That  the  earth  is  round,  from  east  to 
west,  appears  from  actual  experiment ;  for  many  navigators, 
by  sailing  in  a  westerly  direction,  have  gone  quite  round  it, 
from  east  to  west ;  and,  were  it  not  for  the  frozen  seas  within 
the  polar  regions  which  interrupt  navigation  in  those  direc- 
tions, it  would,  long  ere  now,  have  been  circumnavigated  from 
north  to  south.     5.  All  those  proofs  are  confirmed  and  illus- 
trated by  echpses  of  the  moon,  which  present  an  ocular  de- 
monstration  of  the  earth's  rotundity.    An  eclipse  of  the  moon 
is  caused  by  the  intervention  of  the  body  of  the  earth  between 
the  sun  and  the  moon  ;  in  which  case,  the  shadow  of  the 
earth  falls  upon  the  moon.     This  shadow  is  found  in  all  cases, 
and  in  every  position  of  the  earth,  to  be  of  a  circular  ligure  : 
which  incontrovertibly  proves,  that  the  whole  mass  of  land 
and  water,  of  which  the  earth  is  composed,  is  nearly  of  a  glo- 
bular form.    The  mountains  and  vales  which  diversify  its  sur- 
face detract  little  or  nothing  from  its  globular  shape ;  for  they 
bear  no  more  proportion  to  its  whole  bulk  than  a  few  grains  of 
sand  to  a  common  terrestrial  globe ;  the  highest  mountains  on 
its  surface  being  litth;  more  than  the  two  thousandth  part  of 
its  diameter.     Some  of  the  mountains  on  the  surface  of  the 
moon  are  higher  than  those  on  the  earth,  and  yet  that  body  ap- 
pears both  to  the  naked  eye,  and  through  telescopes,  of  a 
spherical  figure. 

To  some  readers,  the  discovery  of  the  true  figure  of  the 
earth  may  appear  as  a  matter  of  very  trivial  importance  in  re- 
ligion. I  hesitate  not,  however,  to  affirm  that  it  constitutes  a 
most  important  fact  in  the  history  of  Divine  Providence.  Had 
not  this  discovery  been  made,  it  is  probable,  that  the  vast  con- 
tinent of  America  might  yet  have  remained  undiscovered  ;  for 
Columbus,  who  first  discovered  that  new  world,  had  learned, 
contrary  to  the  general  opinion  of  the  times,  that  the  earth 
was  of  a  spherical  figure  ;  and,  from  the  maps  then  existing, 
be  began  to  conjecture,  that  the  nearest  way  of  sailing  to  the 
East  Indies,  would  be  to  sail  westward.  And  although  he 
missed  the  object  of  his  research,  he  was  the  means  of  laying 
open  to  view  a  vast  and  unknown  region  of  the  earth,  des- 
tined, in  due  time,  to  receive  from  the  Eastern  world,  the 
blessings  of  knowledge,  civihzation,  and  religion.  On  the 
knowledge  of  the  spherical  figure  of  the  earth,  the  art  of  navi- 
gation, in  a  great  measure  depends  ;  and  all  the  voyages  of 
discovery,  which  have  been  made  in  later  years,  were  under- 
taken in  consequence  of  the  knowledge  of  this  fact.  Had 
mankind  remained  unacquainted   with  this  discovery,  the  cir- 

12 


138  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

cumnavigation  of  the  globe  would  never  have  been  attempted, 
— vast  portions  of  the  habitable  world  would  have  remained 
unknown  and  unexplored — no  regular  intercourse  would  have 
been  maintained  between  the  various  tribes  of  the  human  race, 
and,  consequently,  the  blessings  of  Divine  Revelation  could 
never  have  been  communicated  to  the  greater  part  of  the  Gen- 
tile world.  Besides,  the  knowledge  of  the  true  figure  and 
magnitude  of  our  sublunary  world  forms  the  ground-work  of 
all  the  sublime  discoveries  which  have  hitherto  been  made  in 
the  regions  of  the  firmament.  For  its  diameter  forms  the 
base  line  of  those  triangles  by  which  the  distances  and  magni- 
tudes of  the  celestial  globes  have  been  determined  ;  without  a 
knowledge  of  the  extent  of  which,  the  important  results  which 
have  been  deduced  respecting  the  system  of  the  universe, 
could  not  have  been  ascertained,  and,  consequently,  our  views 
of  the  grandeur  and  omnipotence  of  the  Deity,  and  of  the  mag- 
nificence and  extent  of  his  dominions,  must  have  been  much 
more  circumscribed  than  they  now  are.  Such  is  the  intimate 
connection  that  subsists  between  every  part  of  the  chain  of 
Divine  dispensations,  that  if  any  one  link  had  been  either  bro- 
ken or  dissolved,  the  state  of  things,  in  the  moral  and  intellec- 
tual world,  would  have  been  very  different  from  what  it  now 
is  ;  and  the  plans  of  Providence,  for  accomplishing  the  renova- 
tion and  improvement  of  mankind,  would  have  been  either  par- 
tially or  totally  frustrated. 

With  regard  to  the  magnitude  of  the  earth — I  have  already 
stated  the  mode  by  which  we  may  acquire  the  most  accurate 
and  comprehensive  conception  of  this  particular,  in  the  course 
of  the  illustrations  which  were  given  of  the  Omnipotence  of 
Deity,  (pp.  34 — 38.)  It  is  necessary  here  only  to  remark — 
that,  according  to  the  latest  computations,  the  diameter  of  the 
earth  is  about  7,930  miles,  and  its  circumference  24,912  miles ; 
and,  consequently,  the  vvhole  surface  of  the  land  ai>d  water  it 
contains,  comprehends  an  area  of  197,552,160  miles.  The 
proportion  of  land  and  water  on  its  surface  cannot  be  very  ac- 
curately ascertained  ;  but  it  is  quite  evident,  from  an  inspec- 
tion of  a  map  of  the  world,  that  the  water  occupies  at  least 
two-thirds  of  its  surface,  and,  of  course,  the  land  cannot  oc- 
cupy more  than  one-third.  Supposing  it  to  be  only  one-fourth 
of  the  earth's  surflice,  it  will  contain  49,387,040  square  miles, 
which  is  considerably  more  than  what  is  stated  in  most  of  our 
late  systems  of  Geography;  in  some  of  which  the  extent  of 
the  land  is  rated  at  39  millions,  and  in  othefs,  so  low  as  30 
millions  of  square  miles — the  former  of  which  statements  be- 
ing less  than  one-iifth,  and  the  latter  less  than  one-sixth  of 


GEOGRAPHY.  139 

the  surface  of  the  globe.  But,  it  is  quite  obvious  that  the  ex- 
tent of  the  land  cannot  be  less  than  one-fourth  of  the  area  of 
the  globe,  and  must,  therefore,  comprehend  at  least  50  milHons 
of  square  miles.  And  if  a  large  Arctic  contin  nt,  eleven  hun- 
dred leagues  in  length,  exist  around  the  North  Pole,  as  some 
French  philosophers  infer,  from  Captain  Parry's  late  discove- 
ries*— the  quantity  of  land  on  the  terraqueous  globe  will  be 
much  greater  than  what  has  been  now  stated. 

General  Divisions  of  the  Earth. — The  surface  of 
the  earth  is  divided,  from  north  to  south,  by  two  bands  of 
earth,  and  two  of  water.  The  first  band  of  earth  is  the  an- 
cient or  Eastern  Continent,  comprehending  Europe,  Asia,  and 
Africa  ;  the  greatest  length  of  which  is  found  to  be  in  a  line 
beginning  on  the  east  point  of  the  northern  part  of  Tartary, 
and  extending  from  thence  to  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  which 
measures  about  10,000  miles,  in  a  direction  nearly  from 
North-east  to  South-west ;  but  if  measured  according  to  the 
meridians,  or  from  north  to  south,  it  extends  only  7,500  miles, 
from  the  northermost  cape  in  Lapland  to  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope.  This  vast  body  of  land  contains  about  36  milhons  of 
square  miles,  forming  nearly  one-fifth  of  the  whole  surface  of 
the  globe.  The  other  band  of  earth  is,  v/hat  is  commonly 
called  the  New  Continent,  which  comprehends  North  and 
South  America.^  Its  greatest  length  lies  in  a  line  beginning 
at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Plata,  passing  through  the  island  of 
Jamaica,  and  terminating  beyond  Hudson's  Bay  ;  and  it 
measures  about  8,000  miles.  This  body  of  land  contains 
about  14  millions  of  square  miles,  or  somewhat  more  than  a 
third  of  the  old  continent. 

It  may  not  be  improper  here  to  remark,  that  the  two  lines 
now  mentioned,  which  measure  the  greatest  lengths  of  the 
two  continents,  divide  them  int0  two  equal  parts,  so  that  an 
equal  portion  of  land  lies  on  each  side  of  these  hues,  and  that 
each  of  these  lines  has  an  incHnation  of  about  30  degrees  to 
the  equator,  but  in  opposite  directions  ;  that  of  the  old  conti- 
nent extending  from  the  north-east  to  the  south-west ;  and 
that  of  the  new  continent,  from  the  north-west  to  the  south- 
east; and  that  they  both  terminate  at  the  same  degree  of 
northern  and  southern  latitude.  It  may  also  be  noticed,  that 
the  old  and  new  continents  are  almost  opposite  to  each  other, 
and  that  the  old  is  more  extensive  to  the  north  of  the  equator, 
and  the  new  more  extensive  to  the  south.  The  centre  of  the 
old  continent  is  in  the  17th  degree  of  north  latitude,  and  the 

*  See  Monthly  Magazine,  April,  1823,  p.  259. 


140  THE    CHRISTIA>    PHILOSOPHER. 

centre  of  the  new,  in  the  17th  degree  of  south  latitude;  so 
that  they  seem  to  be  made  to  counterbalance  each  other, 
in  order  to  preserve  the  equability  of  the  diurnal  rotation  of 
the  earth.  There  is  also  a  singular  connection  between  the 
two  continents,  namely,  that  if  they  were  divided  into  two 
parts,  all  four  would  be  surrounded  by  the  sea,  were  it  not  for 
the  two  small  necks  of  land  called  the  isthmuses  of  Suez  and 
Panama.* 

Between  the  two  continents  now  mentioned,  lie  two  im- 
mense bands  of  water,  termed  the  Pacific  and  the  Atlantic 
oceans,  whose  greatest  length  is  likewise  in  a  direction  from 
north  to  south. 

Besides  the  two  bands  of  earth  to  which  I  have  adverted, 
many  extensive  portions  of  land  are  dispersed  through  the 
ocean,  which  covers  the  remaining  part  of  the  earth's  surface  ; 
particularly  the  extensive  regions  of  New  Holland,  which 
occupy  a  space  nearly  as  large  as  the  whole  of  Europe,  and 
the  Arctic  continent,  which  probably  exist  within  the  Northern 
Polar  regions,  and  which  some  French  writers  propose  to 
designate  by  the  name  of  Boreasia,  is  in  all  probability,  ol 
equal  extent.  There  are  also  the  extensive  islands  of  New 
Guinea,  Borneo,  Madagascar,  Sumatra,  Japan,  Great  Britain, 
'Nev/  Zealand,  Ceylon,  Iceland,  Cuba,  Java,  and  thousands  of 
others,  of  difierent  dimensions,  scattered  through  the  Pacific, 
the  Indian,  and  the  Atlantic  oceans,  and  which  form  a  very 
considerable  portion  of  the  habitable  regions  of  the  globe. 

General  Features  of  the  Earth's  Surface. — In 
taking  a  general  survey  of  the  external  features  of  the  earthy 
the  most  prominent  objects  that  strike  the  eye  are  those  huge 
elevations  which  rise  above  the  level  of  its  general  surface, 
termed  Hills  and  Mountains.  These  are  distributed  in 
various  forms  and  sizes,  through  every  portion  of  the  conti- 
nents and  islands  ;  and  running  into  immense  chains,  form  a 
sort  of  connecting  band  to  the  other  portion  of  the  earth's  sur- 
face. The  largest  mountains  are  generally  formed  into  im- 
mense chains,  which  extend,  in  nearly  the  same  direction,  foi 
several  hundreds,  and  even  thousands  of  miles.  It  has  been 
observed  by  some  philosophers,  that  the  most  lofty  mountains 
form  two  immense  ridges,  or  belts,  which,  with  some  inter- 
ruptions, extend  around  the  whole  globe,  in  nearly  the  same 
direction.  One  of  these  ridges  lies  between  the  45th  and  55th 
degree  of  North  latitude.  Beginning  on  the  western  shores 
of  France  and  Spain,  it  extends  eastward,  including  the  Alps 

*  See  BufFon's  Natural  History,  vol.  1. 


GEOGRAPHY.  141 

and  the  Pyrenees,  in  Europe,  the  Urahan  and  Altaic  moun- 
tains, in  Asia — extending  from  thence  to  the  shores  of  Kams- 
chatka,  and,  after  a  short  interruption  from  the  sea,  they  rise 
again  on  the  western  coast  of  America,  and  terminate  at 
Canada,  near  the  eastern  shore.  It  is  supposed  that  the  chain 
is  continued  completely  round  the  globe,  through  the  space 
that  is  covered  by  the  Atlantic  ocean,  and  that  the  Azores, 
and  other  islands  in  that  direction,  are  the  only  summits  that 
are  visible,  till  we  come  to  the  British  isles.  The  other  ridge 
runs  along  the  Southern  hemisphere,  betw^een  the  50th  and 
30th  degrees  of  South  latitude,  of  which  detached  portions  are 
found  in  the  mountains  of  Tucuman,  and  of  Paraguay,  in 
South  America, — of  Monomotpa  and  Caffraria,  in  Africa  ;  in 
New  Holland,  New  Caledonia,  the  New  Hebrides,  the  Friend- 
ly, the  Society,  and  other  islands  in  the  Pacific  ocean.  From 
these  ridges  flows  a  variety  of  ramifications,  in  both  hemi- 
spheres, towards  the  Equator,  and  the  Poles,  which  altogether 
present  a  magnificent  scenery,  which  diversifies  and  enlivens 
the  surface  of  our  globe. 

The  highest  mountains  in  the  world,  according  to  some  late 
accounts  published  in  the  "  Transactions  of  the  Asiatic  Socie- 
ty," are  the  Himalaija  chain,  north  of  Bengal,  on  the  borders 
of  Thibet.  The  highest  mountain  in  this  range  is  stated  to  be 
about  27,000  feet,  or  a  little  more  than  five  miles  in  a  per- 
pendicular height,  and  is  visible  at  the  distance  of  230  miles. 
Nineteen  different  mountains  in  this  chain  are  stated  to  be 
above  four  miles  in  perpendicular  elevation.  Next  to  the 
Himalayas,  are  the  Andes,  in  South  America,  which  extend 
more  than  4000  miles  in  length,  from  the  province  of  Quito 
to  the  straits  of  Magellan.  The  highest  summit  of  the  Andes, 
is  Chimborazo,  which  is  said  to  be  20,600  feet,  or  nearly 
four  miles,  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  The  highest  mountains 
in  Europe,  are  the  Alps,  which  run  through  Switzerland  and 
the  north  of  Italy, — the  Pyrenees,  which  separate  France  from 
Spain,  antl  the  Dofrafeld,  which  divide  Norway  from  Sweden. 
The  most  elevated  ridges  in  xisia,  are  Mount  Taurus,  Imaus, 
Caucasus,  Ararat,  the  Uralian,  Altaian,  and  the  mountains  of 
Japan — in  Africa,  Mount  Atlas,  and  the  mountains  of  the  Moon. 
Some  of  the  mountains  in  these  ranges,  are  found  to  contain  im- 
mense caverns  or  perforations,  of  more  than  two  miles  in  cir- 
cumference, reaching  from  their  summits  to  an  immeasurable 
depth  into  the  bowels  of  the  earth.  From  these  dreadful  open- 
ings are  frequently  thrown  up,  to  an  immense  height,  torrents 
of  fire  and  smoke,  rivers  of  melted  metals,  clouds  of  ashes,  and 
cinders,  and  sometimes  red-hot  stones  and  enormous  rocks,  to 

12* 


142  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

the  distance  of  several  miles,  accompanied  with  thunders,  light- 
nings, darkness,  and  horrid  subterraneous  sounds — producing 
the  most  terrible  devastations  through  all  the  surrounding  dis- 
tricts. The  most  noted  mountains  of  this  kind  in  Europe, 
are  mount  Hecla,  in  Iceland  ;  Etna,  in  Sicily  ;  and  Vesuvius, 
near  the  city  of  Naples,  in  Italy.  Numbers  of  volcanoes  are 
also  to  be  found  in  South  America,  in  Africa,  in  the  islands  of 
the  Indian  ocean,  and  in  the  Empire  of  Japan.* 

"^ ' .  who  live  in  Great  Britain,  where  the  highest  mountam 
is  little  more  than  three  quarters  of  a  mile  in  perpendicular 
elevation,  can  form  no  adequate  idea  of  the  magnificence  and 
awful  sublimity  of  the  mountain  scenery  in  some  of  the  coun- 
tries now  mentioned  ;  especially  when  the  volcano  is  belching 
forth  its  flames  with  a  raging  noise,  and  spreading  terror  and 
desolation  around  its  base.  From  the  tops  of  the  lofty  ridges 
of  the  Andes,  the  most  grand  and  novel  scenes  sometimes 
b'jrst  upon  the  eye  of  the  astonished  traveller.  He  beholds 
the  upper  surface  of  the  clouds  far  below  him,  covering  the 
subjacent  plain,  and  surrounding,  like  a  vast  sea,  the  foot  of 
the  mountain  ;  while  the  place  on  which  he  stands  appears 
like  an  island  in  the  midst  of  the  ocean.  He  sees  the 
lightnings  issuing  from  the  clouds,  and  hears  the  noise  of 
the  tempest,  and  the  thunders  rolling  far  beneath  his  feet, 
while  all  is  serene  around  him,  and  the  blue  vault  of  heaven 
appears  without  a  cloud.  At  other  times,  he  contemplates 
the  most  sublime  and  extensive  prospects — mountains  ranged 
around  him,  covered  with  eternal  snows,  and  surrounding  like 
a  vast  amphitheatre,  the  plains  below — rivers  winding  from 
their  sources  towards  the  ocean — cataracts  dashing  headlong 
over  tremendous  cliffs — enormous  rocks  detached  from  their 
bases,  and  rolling  down  the  declivity  of  the  mountains  with  a 
noise  louder  than  thunder — frightful  precipices  impending 
over  his  head — unfathomable  caverns  yawning  from  below — 
and  the  distant  volcano  sending  forth  its  bellowings,  with  its 
top  enveloped  in  the  fire  and  smoke. — Those  who  have  stu- 
died nature  on  a  grand  scale,  have  always  been  struck  with  ad- 
miration and  astonishment  at  the  sublime  and  awful  exhibition 
of  wonders  which  mountainous  regions  exhibit ;  and,  perhaps, 
there  is  no  terrestrial  scene  which  presents,  at  one  view,  so 
many  objects  of  oyerpowering  magnitude  and  grandeur,  and 
which  inspires  the  mind  with  so  impressive  an  idea  of  the 
power  of  that  Almighty  Being,  who  "  weigheth  the  mountains 
in  scales,  and  taketh  up  the  isles  as  a  very  little  thing." 

"^  A  more  particular  description  of  the  phenomena  of  these  terrific  ob- 
jects will  be  found  in  Chap.  iv.  Sect.  2 


GEOGRAPHY.  143 

The  Ocean. — The  ocean  surrounds  the  earth  on  all  sides, 
and  penetrates  into  the  interior  parts  of  different  countries  ; 
sometimes  by  large  openings,  and  frequently  by  small  straits. 
Could  the  eye  take  in  this  immense  sheet  of  waters  at  one 
view,  it  would  appear  the  most  august  object  under  the  whole 
heavens.  It  occupies  a  space  on  the  surface  of  the  globe  at 
least  three  times  greater  than  that  which  is  occupied  by  the 
land  ;  comprehending  an  extent  of  148  millions  of  square 
miles.  Though  the  ocean,  strickly  speaking,  is  but  one  im- 
mense body  of  waters  extending  in  different  directions,  yet 
different  names  have  been  appropriated  to  different  portions  of 
its  surface.  That  portion  of  its  waters  which  rolls  between 
the  western  coast  of  America  and  the  eastern  of  Asia,  is  call- 
ed the  Pacific  ocean  ;  and  that  portion  which  separates  Europe 
and  Africa  from  America,  the  Atlantic  ocean.  Other  portions 
are  termed  the  JYorthern^  Southern,  and  Indian  oceans.  When 
its  waters  penetrate  into  the  land,  they  form  what  are  called 
gulfs,  and  mediterranean  seas.  But  without  following  it 
through  all  its  windings  and  divisions,  I  shall  simply  state  a 
few  general  facts. 

With  regard  to  the  Depth  of  this  body  of  water,  no  cer- 
tain conclusions  have  yet  been  formed.  Beyond  a  certain 
depth,  it  has  hitherto  been  found  unfathomable.  We  know,  in 
general,  that  the  depth  of  the  sea  increases  gradually  as  we 
leave  the  shore  ;  but  we  have  reason  to  believe  that  this  in- 
crease of  depth  continues  only  to  a  certain  distance.  The 
numerous  islands  scattered  every  where  through  the  ocean, 
demonstrate,  that  the  bottom  of  the  waters,  so  far  from  uni- 
formly sinking,  sometimes  rises  into  lofty  mountains.  It  is 
highly  probable,  that  the  depth  of  the  sea  is  somewhat  in  pro- 
portion to  the  elevation  of  the  land  ;  for  there  is  some  reason 
to  conclude,  that  the  present  bed  of  the  ocean  formed  the  in- 
habited part  of  the  ancient  world,  previous  to  the  general  De- 
luge, and  that  we  are  now  occupying  the  bed  of  the  former 
ocean  ;  and,  if  so,  its  greatest  depth  will  exceed  four  or  five 
miles ;  for  there  is  no  mountain  that  rises  higher  above  the  level 
of  the  sea.  But  the  sea  has  never  been  actually  sounded  to  a 
greater  depth  than  a  mile  and  6Q  feet.  Along  the  coast  its 
depth  has  always  been  found  proportioned  to  the  height  of  the 
shore  ;  where  the  coast  is  high  and  mountainous,  the  sea  that 
iwashes  it  is  deep  ;  but  where  the  coast  is  low,  the  water  is 
shallow.  To  calculate  the  quantity  of  water  it  contains,  we 
must  therefore  suppose  a  medium  depth.  If  we  reckon  its 
average  depth  at  two  miles,  it  will  contain  296  millions  of  cu- 
bical miles  of  water.     We  shall  have  a  more  specific  idea  of 


144  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

this  enormous  mass  of  water,  if  we  consider,  that  it  is  suffi- 
cient to  cover  the  whole  globe,  to  the  height  of  more  than 
eight  thousand  feet ;  and  if  this  water  were  reduced  to  one 
spherical  mass,  it  would  form  a  globe  of  more  than  SOO  miles 
in  diameter. 

With  regard  to  its  Bottom — As  the  sea  covers  so  great  a  part 
of  the  globe,  we  should,  no  doubt,  by  exploring  its  interior  re- 
cesses, discover  a  vast  number  of  interesting  objects.  So  far 
as  the  bed  of  the  ocean  has  been  explored,  it  is  found  to  bear 
a  great  resemblance  to  the  surface  of  the  dry  land  ;  being, 
like  it,  full  of  plains,  caverns,  rocks,  and  mountains,  some  of 
which  are  abrupt  and  almost  perpendicular,  while  others  rise 
with  a  gentle  acclivity,  and  sometimes  tower  above  the  water, 
and  form  islands.  The  materials,  too,  which  compose  the 
bottom  of  the  sea,  are  the  same  which  form  the  basis  of  the 
dry  land.  It  also  resembles  the  land  in  another  remarkable 
particular ; — many  fresh  springs,  and  even  rivers,  rise  out  of 
it ;  an  instance  of  which  appears  near  Goa,  on  the  western 
coast  of  Hindostan,  and  in  the  Mediterranean  sea,  not  far  from 
Marseilles.  The  sea  sometimes  assumes  different  colors. 
The  materials  which  compose  its  bottom,  cause  it  to  reflect 
different  hues  in  different  places  ;  and  its  appearance  is  also 
affected  by  the  winds  and  by  the  sun,  while  the  clouds  that 
pass  over  it  communicate  all  their  varied  and  fleeting  colors. 
When  the  sun  shines,  it  is  green ;  when  he  gleams  through  a 
fog,  it  is  yellow  ;  near  the  poles,  it  is  black  ;  while  in  the  tor- 
rid zone,  its  color  is  often  brown ;  and,  on  certain  occasions, 
it  assumes  a  luminous  appearance,  as  if  sparkling  with  fire. 

The  ocean  has  three  kinds  of  motions.  The  first  is  that 
undulation  which  is  produced  by  the  wind,  and  which  is  en- 
tirely conlined  to  its  surface.  It  is  now  ascertained  that  this 
motion  can  be  destroyed,  and  its  surface  rendered  smooth  by 
throwing  oil  upon  its  waves.  The  second  motion  is,  that  con- 
tinual tendency  which  the  whole  water  in  the  sea  has  towards 
the  west,  which  is  greater  near  the  equator  than  towards  the 
poles.  It  begins  on  the  west  side  of  America,  where  it  is 
moderate  ;  but  as  the  waters  advance  westward,  their  motion 
is  accelerated  ;  and,  after  having  traversed  the  globe,  they  re- 
turn, and  strike  with  great  violence  on  the  eastern  shore  of 
America.  Being  stopped  by  that  continent,  they  rush,  with 
impetuosity,  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  thence  they  proceed 
along  the  coast  of  North  America,  till  they  come  to  the  south 
side  of  the  great  bank  of  Newtoundland,  when  they  turn  off 
and  run  down  through  the  Western  Isles.  This  motion  is  most 
probably  owing  to  the  diurnal  revolution  of  the  earth  on  its  axis. 


GEOGRAPHY.  145 

which  is  m  a  direction  contrary  to  the  motion  of  the  sea.  The 
third  motion  of  the  sea  is  the  tide,  which  is  a  regular  swell  of 
the  ocean  every  12|  hours..  The  motion  is  now  ascertained 
to  be  owing;  to  the  attractive  influence  of  the  moon,  and  also 
partly  to  that  of  the  sun.  There  is  always  a  flux  and  reflux  at 
the  same  time,  in  two  parts  of  the  globe,  and  these  are  opposite 
to  each  other  ;  so  that  when  our  Antipodes  have  high  water 
we  have  the  same.  When  the  attractive  powers  of  the  sun 
and  moon  act  in  the  same  direction,  which  happens  at  the  time 
of  new  and  full  moon,  we  have  the  highest  or  sprang  tides ; 
but  when  their  attraction  is  opposed  to  each  othej-,  which  hap- 
pens at  the  quarters,  we  have  the  lowest,  or  neap  tides. 

Such  is  the  ocean, — a  most  stupendous  scene  of  Omnipo- 
tence, which  forms  the  most  magnificent  feature  of  the  globe 
we  inhabit.  When  we  stand  on  the  sea-shore,  and  cast  our 
eyes  over  the  expanse  of  its  waters,  till  the  sky  and  the  waves 
seem  to  mingle,  all  that  the  eye  can  take  in  at  one  survey,  is 
but  an  inconsiderable  sped',  less  than  the  hundred  thousandth 
part  of  the  whole  of  this  vast  abyss.  If  every  drop  of  water 
can  be  divided  into  26  millions  of  distinct  parts,  as  some  phi- 
losophers have  demonstrated,*  what  an  immense  assemblage 
of  watery  particles  must  be  contained  in  the  unfathomable  ca- 
verns of  the  ocean !  Here  the  powers  of  calculation  are  com- 
pletely set  at  defiance  ;  and  an  image  of  infinity,  immensity, 
and  endless  duration  is  presented  to  the  mind.  This  mighty 
expanse  of  waters  is  the  grand  reservoir  of  nature,  and  the 
source  of  evaporation,  which  enriches  the  earth  with  fertility 
and  verdure.  Every  cloud  which  floats  in  the  atmosphere, 
and  every  fountain,  and  rivulet,  and  flowing  stream  are  indebt- 
ed to  this  inexhaustible  source  for  those  watery  treasures 
which  they  distribute  through  every  region  of  the  land.  In 
fine,  whether  we  consider  the  ocean  as  rearing  its  tremendous 
billows  in  the  midst  of  the  tempest,  or  as  stretched  out  into  a 
smooth  expanse — whether  we  consider  its  immeasurable  ex- 
tent, its  mighty  movements,  or  the  innumerable  beings  which 
glide  through  its  rolling  waves — we  cannot  but  be  struck  with 
astonishment  at  the  grandeur  of  that  Omnipotent  Being  who 
holds  it  waters  "  in  the  hollow  of  his  hand,"  and  who  has  said 
to  its  foaming  surges,  "  Hitherto  shalt  thou  come,  and  no  far- 
ther, and  here  shall  thy  proud  waves  be  stayed." 

Rivers. — The  next  feature  of  the  earth's  surface  which  may 
be  noticed,  is,  the  rivers  with  which  it  is  indented  in  every 

*  The  demonstration  of  this  proposition  may  be  seen  in  Nieuwentyt'3 
Rel.  Philosopher,  voi.  iii.  p.  852. 


146  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

direction. — These  are  exceedingly  numerous,  aiid  seem  to  form 
as  essential  a  part  in  the  constitution  of  our  globe,  as  the  moun- 
tains from  which  they  flow,  and  as  the  ocean  to  which  they  di- 
rect their  course.  It  is  reckoned,  that  in  the  old  continent, 
there  are  about  430  rivers  which  fall  directly  into  the  ocean, 
or  into  the  Mediterranean  and  the  Black  seas  ;  but  in  the  new 
continent,  there  are  only  about  145  rivers  known,  which  fall 
directiv  into  the  sea.  In  this  enumeration,  however,  only  the 
great  rivers  are  included,  such  as  the  Thames,  the  Danube, 
the  "VVolga,  and  the  Rhone.  Besides  these,  there  are  many 
thousands  of  streams  of  smaller  dimensions,  which,  rising 
from  the  mountains,  wind  in  every  direction,  till  they  fall  into 
the  large  rivers,  or  are  carried  into  the  ocean.  The  largest 
rivers  in  Europe  are — the  Yf  olga,  which,  rising  in  the  northern 
parts  of  Russia,  runs  a  course  of  1700  miles,  till  it  falls  into 
the  Caspian  sea — the  Danube,  whose  course  is  1300  miles, 
from  the  mountains  in  Switzerland  to  the  Black  sea — and  the 
Don,  which  runs  a  course  of  1200  miles.  The  greatest  rivers 
in  Asia  are — the  Hoanho,  in  China,  whose  course  is  2400 
miles — the  Boorhampooter,  the  Euphrates,  and  the  Ganges. 
The  longest  river  in  x\frica,  is  the  Nile,  the  course  of  which  is 
estimated  at  2000  miles.  In  the  continent  of  America,  the  ri- 
vers appear  to  be  formed  on  the  grandest  scale,  both  as  to  the 
length  of  their  course,  and  the  vast  body  of  waters  which  they 
pour  into  the  ocean.  -The  Amazon,  the  largest  river  in 
the  world,  runs  a  course  of  above  3000  miles  across  the 
continent  of  South  America,  till  it  falls  into  the  xltlantic 
ocean,  where  it  discharges  a  body  of  waters  150  miles  in 
breadth.  Next  to  this  is  the  river  St.  Lawrence,  which  is 
more  than  2400  miles  from  its  mouth  through  the  lake  of 
Ontario  to  the  lake  Alempigo  and  the  Assiniboils ;  and  the 
rivers  La  Plata  and  Mississippi,  each  of  whose  courses  is  not 
less  than  2000  miles. 

When  we  consider  the  number  and  the  magnitude  of  these 
majestic  streams,  it  is  evident  that  an  enormous  mass  of  wa- 
ter is  continually  pouring  into  the  ocean,  from  every  direction. 
From  observations  which  have  been  made  on  the  river  Po, 
which  runs  through  Lombardy,  and  waters  a  tract  of  land  380 
miles  long,  and  120  broad,  it  is  found,  that  it  moves  at  the 
rate  of  four  miles  an  hour,  is  1000  feet  broad,  and  10  feet  in 
depth,  and  consequently,  supplies  the  sea  with  5068  millions 
of  cubical  feet  of  water  in  a  day,  or  a  cubical  mile  in  29  days. 
On  the  supposition  that  the  quantity  of  water  which  the  sea  re- 
ceives from  the  great  rivers  in  all  countries,  is  proportional  to 
the  extent  and  surface  of  these  countries,  it  will  follow,  that  the 


GEOGRAPHY.  147 

\  quantity  of  waters  carried  to  the  sea  by  all  the  other  rivers  on 
I  the  globe,  is  1083  times  greater  than  that  furnished  by  the  Po, 
I  (supposing  the  land,  as  formerly  stated,  to  contain  about  49 
I  millions  of  square  miles,)   and  will  supply  the  ocean  with 
13,630  cubical  miles  of  water  in  a  year.      Now,  reckoning  the 
I  ocean,  as  formerly,  to  contain  296  millions  of  cubical  miles  of 
water,  this  last  number,  divided  by  the  former,  will  give  a  quo- 
tient of  21,716.     Hence  it  appears,  that,  were  the  ocean  com- 
pletely drained  of  its  waters,  it  would  require  more  than  twenty 
thousand  years*  before  its  caverns  could  be  again  completely 
filled  by  all  the  rivers  in  the  world  running  into  it  at  their  pre- 
sent rate. 

Here,  tv/o  questions  will  naturally  occur — Whence  do  the 
i  rivers  receive  so  constant  a  supply  of  waters  1  and  why  has 
not  the  ocean  long  ago  overflowed  the  world  ?  since  so  prodi- 
I  gious  a  mass  of  water  is  continually  flowing  into  its  abyss. 
j  This  was  a  difficulty  which  long  puzzled  philosophers  ;  but  it 
[  is  now  satisfactorily  solved  from  a  consideration  of  the  effects 
I  of  evaporation.  By  the  heat  of  the  sun  the  particles  of  water 
are  drawn  up  into  the  atmosphere  from  the  surface  of  the 
ocean,  and  float  in  the  air  in  the  form  of  clouds  or  vapor. 
These  vapors  are  carried,  by  the  winds,  over  the  surface  of  the 
land,  and  are  again  condensed  into  water  on  the  tops  and  the 
sides  of  mountains,  which,  gliding  down  into  their  crevices  and 
caverns,  at  length  break  out  into  springs,  a  number  of  which 
meeting  in  one  common  valley  becomes  a  river ;  and  many 
of  these  united  together  at  length  form  such  streams  as  the 
Tay,  the  Thames,  the  Danube,  and  the  Rhine.  That  evapo- 
ration is  sufficient  to  account  for  this  effect,  has  been  demon- 
strated by  many  experiments  and  calculations.  It  is  found 
that,  from  the  surface  of  the  Mediterranean  sea,  which  con- 
tains 762,000  square  miles,  there  are  drawn  up  into  the  air, 
every  day,  by  evaporation,  5280  millions  of  tons  of  water, 
while  the  rivers  which  flow  into  it  yield  only  1827  millions  of 
tons  in  the  same  tmie  ;  so  that  there  is  raised  in  vapor  from 
the  Mediterranean  nekrly  three  times  the  quantity  of  water 
which  is  poured  into  it  by  all  its  rivers.  One  third  of  this  falls 
into  the  sea  before  it  reaches  the  land  ;  another  part  falls  on 
the  low  lands,  for  the  nourishment  of  plants  ;  and  the  other 
third  part  is  quite  sufficient  to  supply  the  sources  of  all  the 

*  BufFon  makes  this  result  to  be  812  years,  in  which  he  is  foUoAred  by 
Goldsmith,  and  most  subsequent  writers  ;  but  he  proceeds  on  the  false  as- 
sumption, that  the  ocean  covers  only  half  the  surface  of  the  globe,  and  that 
it  contains  only  85  millions  of  square  miles,  and  he  estimates  the  average 
depth  of  the  ocean  to  be  only  4^10  yards,  or  one  fourth  of  a  mile. 


148  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

rivers  which  run  into  the  sea.  This  is  in  full  conformity  to 
what  was  long  ago  stated  by  an  inspired  Naturalist :  "  All  the 
rivers  run  into  the  sea,  and  yet  the  sea  is  not  full ;  unto  the 
place  from  whence  the  rivers  came,  thither  do  they  return 
again,"  but,  before  they  regain  their  former  place,  they  make 
a  circuit  over  our  heads  through  the  regions  of  the  atmosphere. 

Such  are  the  varied  movements  and  transtbrmations  which 
are  incessantly  going  on  in  the  rivers,  the  ocean,  and  the  at- 
mosphere, in  order  to  preserve  the  balance  of  nature,  and  to 
supply  the  necessities  of  the  animal  and  the  vegetable  tribes  ; 
all  under  the  agency  and  direction  of  Him  who  "  formed  the 
sea  and  the  dry  land,"  and  who  has  arranged  all  things  in  num- 
ber,- weight,  and  measure,  to  subserve  the  purposes  of  his  will. 

Rivers  serve  many  important  purposes  in  the  economy  of 
our  globe.  They  carry  off  the  redundant  waters  which  fall  in 
rains,  or  which  ooze  from  the  springs,  which  might  otherwise 
settle  into  stagnant  pools  ;  they  supply  to  the  seas  the  loss  of 
waters  occasioned  by  their  daily  evaporation ;  they  cool  the 
air  and  give  it  a  gentle  circulation  ;  they  fertilize  the  countries 
through  which  they  floAv ;  their  waters  afford  a  wholesome 
drink,  and  the  fishes  they  contain,  a  delicious  food  for  the  nour- 
ishment of  man  :  they  facilitate  commerce,  by  conveying  the 
productions  of  nature  and  art  from  the  inland  countries  to  the 
sea  ;  they  form  mechanical  powers  for  driving  machinery  of 
ditferent  kinds  ;  they  enliven  and  diversify  the  scenery  of  the 
countries  through  which  they  pass  ;  and  the  cataracts  which 
they  frequently  form  among  the  mountains,  present  us  with 
scenes  the  most  picturesque  and  sublime  ;  so  that  every  part 
of  the  constitution  of  nature  is  rendered  subservient  both  to 
utility  and  to  pleasure. 

Waving  the  consideration  of  other  particulars,!  skill  simply 
state  some  of  the  artificial  divisions  of  the  earth,  and  two  or 
three  tacts  respecting  its  inhabitants. 

The  land  has  generally  been  divided  into  four  parts,  Eu- 
rope, Asia,  Atnca,  and  America,  to  which  has  been  lately 
added  the  division  called  Australasia,  which  comprehends 
New  Holland,  New  Guinea,  New  Zealand,  Yan  Dieman's 
land,  and  several  other  islands  in  the  Pacific  ocean.  Europe 
comprehends  the  following  countries,  Norway,  Sweden,  Den- 
mark, Russia,  Prussia,  Germany,  Austria,  Turkey,  Italy 
Switzerland,  France,  Holland,  or  the  Netherlands,  Spain, 
Portugal,  and  Great  Britain  and  Ireland,  together  with  the 
islands  of  Sicily,  Malta,  Candia,  Corsica,  Sardinia,  Majorca, 
Minorca,  Ivica,  Zealand,  Funen,  Gothland,  Iceland,  and  seve- 
ral others  of  smaller  note. — .isia,  the  largest  and  most  popu- 


GEOGRAPHY.  149 

lous  division  of  the  ancient  continent,  contains  the  Empires  of 
China  and  Japan,  Chinese  Taitary,  Thibet,  Hindostan,  or 
British  India,  the  Birman  Empire,  Persia,  Arabia,  Turkey  in 
Asia,  Siberia,  Independent  Tartary,  and  a  variety  of  territories 
inhabited  by  tribes  with  which  we  are  very  imperfectly  acquaint- 
ed ;  together  with  the  immense  islands  of  Borneo,  Sumatra, 
Java,   Ceylon,  Segalien,  the  Phillippines,  and  thousands    of 
others  of  smaller  dimensions.    It  was  in  Asia  where  the  human 
race  was  first  planted  ;  it  became  the  .lursery  of  the  world  after 
the  universal  deluge,  and  it  was  the  scene  in  which  the  most  me- 
morable transactions  recorded  in  the  sacred  history  took  place. 
But  its  inhabitants  are  now  immersed  in  Mahometan  and  Pa- 
gan darkness  ;  and  the  Christian  religion,  except  in  a  few  in- 
sulated spots,  is  almost  unknown  among  its  vast  population. 
It  is  the  richest  and  most  fruitful  part  of  the  world,  and  pro- 
duces cotton,  silks,  spices,  tea,  coffee,  gold,  silver,  pearls,  dia- 
monds and  precious  stones  :  but  despotism,  in  its  worst  forms, 
reigns  uncontrolled,  over  every  part  of  this  immense   regio'n. 
Africa  comprehends  the  following  kingdoms, — Morocco, 
Algiers,   Tunis,  Tripoli,  Egypt,  Zaara,  Negroland,    Guinea, 
Nubia,  Abyssinia,  Caffraria,  Dahomy,  Benin,  Congo,  Angola, 
and  various  other  territories.     By  far  the  greater  part  of  Afri- 
ca remains  hitherto  unexplored,  and,  consequently,  we  are  pos- 
sessed of  a  very  slender  portion  of  information  respecting  the 
numerous   tribes  that  may  inhabit  it.     This  quarter  of  the 
world,  which  once  contained  several  flourishing  kingdoms  and 
estates,  is  now  reduced  to  a  general  state  of  barbarism.  .  That 
most  abominable  trafirc,  the  slave  trade,  is  carried   on  to  an 
unlimited  extent  on  its  eastern  coasts,  by  a  set  of  European 
ruthans,  whose  villanies  are  a  disgrace  to  human  nature.     Its 
most  striking  features   are  those   immense   deserts,  near  its 
I  northern  parts,  which  comprise  nearly  one  third  of  its  surface. 
I  The  deserts  of  Zaara  are  1500  miles  long,  and  800  broad. 
I      America  is  divided  into  North  and  South.     It  remained  \m- 
j  known  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  Eastern  Hemisphere  till  the 
lyear  1492,  when  it  was  discovered  by  Columbus,  who   first 
jlanded  on  Guanahani,  or  Cat  Island,  one  of  the  Bahama  isles. 
j  North  America  comprehends  the  following  countries  :   The 
lUnited   States,  New  and  Old    Mexico,   Upper   and  Lower 
j  Canada,  Nova  Scotia,  New  Brunswick,  and  Labrador.    South 
'America  comprehends  the  immense  districts  called  Terra  Fir- 
, ma,  Peru,  Guiana,  Amazonia,  Paraguay,  Brazil,  Chili,  and 
Patagonia. — Between  N.  and  S.  America  lie  the  islands  of 
Cuba,  St.  Domingo,  Jamaica,  and   Porto  Rico,  known  by  the 
iname  of  the  West  Indies.     Besides  these,  there  are  connected 

13 


150  THE   CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

with  America,  the  Bahama,  and  Carribbee  islands,  Newfound- 
land, Cape  Breton,  Tobago,  Trinidad,  Terra  del  Fuego,  &c. 
America  is  distniguished  by  its  numerous  and  extensive  lakes, 
which  resemble  large  inland  seas.  Its  rivers,  also,  form  one  of 
its  grand  and  distinguishing  features,  being  the  largest  on  the 
globe.  It  is  likewise  diversified  with  lofty  and  extensive 
ranges  of  mountains.  When  first  discovered  it  was  almost 
wholly  covered  with  immense  forests,  and  thinly  peopled  with 
a  number  of  savage  tribes.  Its  mingled  population  of  Abori- 
gines and  Europeans,  is  now  making  rapid  advances  in  know- 
fedge,  civilization,  and  commerce. 

In  regard  to  the  human  inhahitants  that  occupy  the  difier- 
ent  regions  now  specified — they  have  been  divided  by  some 
geographers  into  the  six  following  classes — 1.  The  dwarfish 
inhabitants  of  the  polar  regions  ;  as  the  Laplanders,  the 
Greenlanders,  and  the  Esquimaux. — 2.  The  fiat-nosed  olive- 
colored  tawny  race  ;  as  the  Tartars,  the  Chinese,  and  the 
Japanese. — 3.  The  blacks  of  Asia  wdth  European  features. 
Of  this  description  are  the  Hindoos,  the  Birmans,  and  the  in- 
habitants of  the  islands  in  the  Indian  ocean. — 4.  The  woolly- 
haired  negroes  of  Africa,  distinguished  by  their  black  color, 
their  flat  noses,  and  their  thick  hps. — 5.  The  copper-colored 
native  Americans,  distinguished  likewise  by  their  black  hair, 
small  black  eyes,  high  cheek  bones,  and  flat  noses. — 6.  The 
sixth  variety  is  the  white  European  nations,  as  the  British,  the 
French,  the  Italians,  and  the  Germans. 

The  number  of  inhabitants  which  people  the  earth  at  one 
tim.e  may  be  estimated  to  amount  to  at  least  eight  hundred 
rniUions ;  of  which  500  millions  may  be  assigned  to  Asia  ; 
SO  millions  to  Africa;  70  millions  to  America;  and  150 
millions  to  Europe. — With  regard  to  their  religion,  they  may 
be  estimated  as  follows  : 

.    Pagans,           .         .  490,000,000 

Mahometans,          .         .  130,000,000 

Roman  Catholics,            .  100,000,000 

Protestants,    .         .         .  43,000,000 

Greeks  and  Arminians,  30,000,000 

Jews,      ....  7,000,000 


800,000,000 

From  this  estimate  it  appears,  that  there  are  more  than  4 
Pagans  and  Mahometans  to  1  Christian,  and  only  one  Pro- 
testant to  17  of  all  the  other  denominations.  Although  all 
the  Roman  Catholics,  Greeks,  and  Protestants  were  reckon- 
ed true  Christians,  there  still  remain  more  than  620  milHons 
of  our  fellow  men  ignorant  of  the  true  God,  and  of  his  will  as 


GEOGRAPHY.  151 

levealed  in  the  Sacred  Scriptures  ;  which  shows  what  a  vast 
field  of  exertion  still  lies  open  to  Christian  benevolence,  be- 
fore the  blessings  of  civilization,  mental  improvement,  rational 
liberty,  and  Christianity  be  fully  communicated  to  the  Pagan 
and  Mahometan  world. 

If  we  suppose  that  the  earth,  at  an  average,  has  always 
been  as  populous  as  it  is  now,  and  that  it  contains  800  mil- 
lions of  inhabitants,  as  above  stated,  and  if  we  reckon  32 
years  for  a  generation,  at  the  end  of  which  period  the  whole 
human  race  is  renewed  ;  it  will  follow,  that  145  thousand 
millions  of  human  beings  have  existed  on  the  earth  since  the 
present  system  of  our  globe  commenced,  reckoning  5829 
years  from  Adam  to  the  present  time.*  And,  consequently, 
if  mankind  had  never  died,  there  would  have  been  182  times 
the  present  number  of  the  earth's  inhabitants  now  in  exist- 
ence. It  follows  from  this  statement,  that  25  miUions  of 
mankind  die  every  year,  2853  every  hour,  and  47  every 
minute,  and  that  at  least  an  equal  number,  during  these  pe- 
riods, are  emerging  from  non-existence  to  the  stage  of  life  ; 
so  that  almost  every  moment,  a  rational  and  immortal  being 
is  ushered  into  the  world,  and  another  is  transported  to  the 
invisible  state.  Whether,  therefore,  we  contemplate  the 
world  of  matter,  or  the  world  of  mind,  we  percerv^e  incessant 
changes  and  revolutions  going  on,  which  are  gradually  carry- 
ing forward  the  earth  and  its  inhabitants  to  some  important 
consummation. — If  we  suppose,  that,  before  the  close  of  time, 
as  many  human  beings  will  be  brought  into  existence,  as  have 
already  existed,  during  the  by-past  ages  of  the  world,  there 
will,  of  course,  be  found  at  the  general  resurrection, 
290,000,000,000  of  mankind.  Yast  as  such  an  assemblage 
would  be,  the  whole  of  the  human  beings  here  supposed,  al- 
lowing'6  square  feet  for  every  individual,  could  be  assembled 
within  the  space  of  62,400  square  miles,  or  on  a  tract  of  land 
not  much  larger  than  that  of  England,  which  contains,  ac- 
cording to  the  most  accurate  calculation,  above  50,000  square 
miles. 

*  This  calculation  proceeds  on  the  supposition,  that  only  4004  years 
elapsed  between  the  Mosaic  Creation  and  the  birth  of  Christ,  according 
to  the  Hebrew  Chronology.  But  Dr.  Hales,  in  his  late  work  on  Scripture 
Chronology,  has  proved,  almost  to  a  demonstration,  that,  from  the  Crea- 
tion to  the  birtli  of  Christ  are  to  be  reckoned  5411  years  ;  and  this  com- 
putation nearly  agrees  with  the  Samaritan  and  Septuagint  Chi'onology, 
and  witl\  that  of  Josephus.  According  to  this  computation,  7235  years 
are  to  be  reckoned  from  the  Creation  to  the  present  time :  and,  conse- 
quently, 220  thousand  millions  of  human  beings  will  have  existed  since 
the  Creation,  which  is  mure  than  226  times  the  number  of  inhabitants 
presently  existing. 


152  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

Our  world  is  capable  of  sustaining  a  much  greater  number 
of  inhabitants  than  has  ever  yet  existed  upon  it  at  any  one 
time.  And  since  we  are  informed  in  the  Sacred  Oracles,  that' 
God  '•  created  it  not  in  vain,  but  formed  it  to  be  inhabited," 
we  have  reason  to  believe,  that,  in  future  ages,  when  the  phy- 
sical and  moral  energies  of  mankind  shall  be  fully  exerted, 
and  when  Peace  shall  wave  her  olive  branch  over  the  nations, 
the  earth  will  be  much  more  populous  than  it  has  ever  been, 
and  those  immense  deserts,  where  ravenous  animals  now  roam 
undisturbed,  will  be  transformed  into  scenes  of  fertility  and 
beauty.  If  it  be  admitted,  that  the  produce  of  12  acres  of 
land  is  sufficient  to  maintain  a  family  consisting  of  six  per- 
sons, and  if  we  reckon  only  one-tpurtii  of  the  surface  of  the 
•jiobe  capable  of  cultivation,  it  can  be  proved,  that  the  earth 
could  afford  sustenance  for  16,000  millions  of  inhabitants,  or 
fwenty  times  the  number  that  is  presently  supposed  to  exist. 
So  that  we  have  no  reason  to  fear  that  the  world  will  be  over- 
stocked with  inhabilants  for  many  ages  to  come;  or  that  a 
period  may  soon  arrive  when  the  increase  of  population  will 
surpass  the  means  of  subsistence,  as  some  of  the  disciples  of 
Blaithus  have  lately  insinuated.  To  suppose,  as  some  of 
these  gentlemen  seem  to  do,  that  wars  and  diseases,  poverty 
and  pestilence,  are  necessary  evils,  in  order  to  prevent  the 
increase  of  the  human  race  beyond  the  means  of  subsistence 
which  nature  can  afford — while  the  immense  regions  of  New 
Holland,  New  Guinea,  Borneo,  and  the  greater  part  of  Africa 
and  America  are  almost  destitute  of  inhabitants — is  both  an 
msult  on  the  dignity  of  human  nature,  and  a  reflection  on  the 
wisdom  and  beneficence  of  Divine  Providence.  The  Creator 
is  benevolent  and  bountiful,  and  "  his  tender  mercies  are  over 
all  his  works  :"  but  man,  by  his  tyranny,  ambition,  and  self- 
ishness, has  counteracted  the  streams  of  Divine  beneficence, 
and  introduced  into  the  social  state,  poverty,  disorder,  and 
misery,  with  all  their  attendant  train  of  evils  ;  and  it  is  not 
before  such  demoralizing  principles  be  in  some  measure  era- 
dicated, and  the  principles  of  Christian  benevolence  brought 
into  active  operation,  that  the  social  state  of  man  will  be 
greatly  meliorated,  and  the  bounties  of  heaven  fully  enjoyed 
by  the  human  race.  If,  in  the  present  deranged  state  of  the 
social  and  political  world,  it  be  found  difficult,  in  any  parti- 
cular country,  to  find  sustenance  for  its  inhabitants,  emigra- 
tion is  the  obvious  and  natural  remedy  ;  and  the  rapid  emi- 
grations which  are  now  taking  place  to  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope,  New  Holland,  Van  Dieman's  Land,  and  America,  are, 
doubtless,  a  part  of  those  arrangements  of  Providence,  by 


GEOGRAPHY.  153 

which  the  Creator  will  accomplish  his  designs,  in  peophng  the 
desolate  wastes  of  our  globe,  and  promoting  the  progress  o* 
knowledge,  and  of  the  true  rehgion  among  the  scattered  tribes 
of  mankind. 


With  that  branch  of  knowledge  to  which  I  have  now  ad- 
verted, every  mdividual  of  the  human  race  ought  to  be  in 
some  measure  acquainted.  For  it  is  unworthy  of  the  dignity 
of  a  rational  being,  to  stalk  abroad  on  the  surface  of  the  earth, 
and  enjoy  the  bounty  of  his  Creator,  without  considering  the 
nature  and  extent  of  his  sublunary  habitation,  the  variety  of 
august  objects  it  contains,  the  relation  in  which  he  stands  to 
other  tribes  of  intelligent  agents,  and  the  wonderful  machinery 
which  is  in  constant  operation  for  supplying  his  wants,  and  for 
producing  the  revolutions  of  day  and  night,  spring  and  autumn, 
summer  and  winter. — In  a  religious  point  of  view,  Geography 
is  a  science  of  peculiar  interest.  For  "  the  salvation  of  God," 
which  Christianity  unfolds,  is  destined  to  be  proclaimed  in 
every  land,  in  order  that  men  of  all  nations,  and  kindreds,  and 
tongues  may  participate  in  its  blessings.  But,  without  ex- 
ploring every  region  of  the  earth,  and  the  numerous  islands 
which  are  scattered  over  the  surface  of  the  ocean,  and  open- 
ing up  a  regular  intercourse  with  the  different  tribes  of  human 
beings  which  dwell  upon  its  surface,  we  can  never  carry  into 
efiect  the  purpose  of  God,  by  "  making  known  his  salvation 
to  the  ends  of  the  earth." — As  God  has  ordained,  that  "  all 
flesh  shall  see  the  salvation"  he  has  accomplished,  and  that 
human  beings  shall  be  the  agents  for  carrying  his  designs  into 
eftect — so,  we  may  rest  assured,  that  he  has  ordained  every 
mean  reciuisite  for  accomplishing  this  end  ;  and,  consequent- 
ly, that  it  is  his  will  that  men  should  study  the  figure  and 
magnitude  of  the  earth,  and  all  those  arts  by  which  they  may 
be  enabled  to  traverse  and  explore  the  different  regions  of  land 
and  water,  which  compose  the  terraqueous  globe — and  that  it 
is  also  his  will,  that  every  one  who  feels  an  interest  in  the 
present  and  eternal  happiness  of  his  fellow-men,  should  make 
himself  acquainted  with  the  result  of  all  the  discoveries  in  this 
science  that  have  been,  or  may  yet  be  made,  in  order  to  stimu- 
late his  activity,  in  conveying  to  the  wretched  sons  of  Adam, 
wherever  they  may  be  found,  "  the  unsearchable  riches  of 
Christ." 

To  the  Missionary,  and  the  Directors  of  Bible  and  Mis- 
sionary Societies,  a  minute  and  comprehensive  knowledge  of 
this  science,  and  of  all  the   facts  connected  with  it,  is  essen- 
13* 


154  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

tially  requisite  ;  without  which  they  would  often  grope  in  ifit- 
dark,  and  spend  their  money  in  vain,  and  "  their  labour  for  that 
which  doth  not  profit."  They  must  be  intimately  acquainted 
with  the  extensive  field  of  operation  which  lies  before  them, 
and  with  the  physical,  the  moral,  and  the  political  state  of  the 
different  tribes  to  which  they  intend  to  send  the  message  of 
salvation  ;  otherwise  their  exertions  will  be  made  at  random, 
and  their  schemes  be  conducted  without  judgment  or  discri- 
mination. To  attempt  to  direct  the  movements  of  Missionary 
Societies,  without  an  intimate  knowledge  of  this  subject,  is  as 
foolish  and  absurd  as  it  would  be  for  a  land-surveyor  to  lay 
down  plans  tor  the  improvement  of  a  gentleman's  estate,  be- 
fore he  had  surveyed  the  premises,  and  made  himself  ac- 
quainted with  the  objects  upon  them,  in  their  various  aspects, 
positions,  and  bearings.  If  all  those  who  direct  and  support 
the  operations  of  such  societies,  were  familarly  acquainted 
with  the  different  fields  for  missionary  exertions,  and  with  the 
peculiar  state  and  character  of  the  diversified  tribes  of  the 
heathen  world,  so  far  as  they  are  known,  injudicious  schemes 
might  be  frustrated  before  they  are  carried  into  oflTect,  and  the 
funds  of  such  institutions  preserved  from  being  wasted  to  no 
purpose.  In  this  view,  it  is  the  duty  of  every  Christian,  to 
mark  the  progress  and  the  results  of  the  various  geographical 
expeditions  \vhich  are  now  going  forward  in  quest  of  disco- 
veries, in  connection  with  the  moral  and  political  movements 
which  are  presently  agitating  the  nations  :  for  every  navigator, 
who  ploughs  the  ocean  in  search  of  new  islands  and  conti- 
nents, and  every  traveller  who  explores  the  interior  of  unknown 
countries,  should  be  considered  as  so  many  pioneers,  sent  be- 
forehand, by  Divine  Providence,  to  prepare  the  way  for  the 
labors  of  the  missionary,  and  for  the  combined  exertions  of 
Christian  benevolence.* 

*  On  this  subject,  the  Author  feels  great  pleasure  in  referring  his  read- 
ers to  a  small  volume,  lately  published,  by  James  Douglas,  Esq.  of  Cavers, 
entitled,  "  Hints  on  Missions," — a  work  which  deserves  the  attentive 
perusal,  both  of  the  philosopher,  the  politician,  and  the  Christian,  and  par- 
ticularly of  the  Directors  of  Missionary  Societies  ;  and  which  is  charac- 
terized by  a  spirit  of  enlightened  philanthropy,  and  «  condensation  of 
thought,  which  has  seldom  been  equalled  in  the  discussion  of  such  topics. 
It  concentrates,  as  it  were,  into  a  focus,  the  light  which  has  been  reflected 
from  hundreds  of  volumes  ;  and  the  original  hints  it  suggests,  claim  the 
serious  consideration  of  the  superintendents  of  missionary  schemes  ;  with- 
out an  attention  to  some  of  which,  the  beneficial  effects  resulting  from  such 
undertakings  v/ill  be  few  and  unimportant. — Should  this  note  happen  to 
strike  the  eye  of  the  worthy  Author,  it  is  submitted,  with  all  due  deference, 
whether  a  more  extensive  circulation  of  the  substance  of  this  volume,  in  a 
less  expensive  form,  and  with  a  few  modifications,  to  bring  it  witliiii  the 


GEOGRAPHF.  155 

But  even  to  every  private  Christian,  Geography  is  an  inter- 
esting branch  of  study,  without  some  knowledge  of  which  his 
prayers  and  his  Christian  sympathies  cannot  be  judiciously 
and  extensively  directed.  We  occasionally  hear  the  ministers 
of  religion,  at  the  commencement  of  public  worship,  on  the 
first  day  of  the  week,  imploring  the  Divine  blessing  on  their 
brethren  throughout  the  Christian  church,  who  are  commenc- 
ing the  same  exercises  ;  and  at  the  close  of  worship  in  the 
afternoon,  that  the  same  blessing  may  seal  the  instructions 
which  have  been  delivered  in  all  the  churches  of  the  saints  ; 
as  if  all  the  public  religious  services  of  the  universal  church 
were,  at  that  moment,  drawing  to  a  close.  This  is  all  very 
well,  so  far  as  it  goes  :  the  expression  of  such  benevolent 
wishes  is  highly  becoming  and  congenial  to  the  spirit  of 
Christianity.  But  a  very  slight  acquaintance  with  Geogra- 
phical science  will  teach  us,  that,  when  we  in  this  country  are 
commencing  the  religious  services  of  the  first  day  of  the  vreek, 
our  Christian  brethren  in  the  East  Indies,  who  live  under  a 
very  different  meridian,  have  finished  theirs  ;  those  in  Russia, 
Poland,  Greece,  Palestine,  and  on  the  banks  of  the  Caspian 
sea,  have  performed  one  half  of  their  public  religious  worship 
and  instructions  ;  and  those  in  New  Holland  and  Van  Die- 
man's  Land  have  retired  to  rest,  at  the  close  of  their  Sabbath. 
On  the  other  hand,  our  friends  in  the  West  India  Islands  and 
in  America,  at  the  close  of  our  worship,  are  only  about  to  com- 
mence the  public  instructions  of  the  Christian  Sabbath.  If, 
then,  it  be  submitted,  that  our  prayers,  in  certain  cases,  ought 
to  be  specific^  to  have  a  reference  to  the  particular  cases  and 
relations  of  certain  classes  of  individuals,  there  can  be  no  valid 
reason  assigned,  why  they  should  not  have  a  reference  to  the 
geographical  positions  of  the  different  portions  of  the  Christian 
Church,  as  well  as  to  those  who  live  on  or  near  our  ov/n  meri- 
dian :  that,  for  example,  in  the  beginning  of  our  public  devo- 
tions, w^e  might  implore  that  the  blessing  of  God  may  accom- 
pany the  instructions  which  have  been  delivered  in  the  Eastern 
parts  ot'the  world  ;  and  at  the  close  of  worship,  that  the  same 
agency  may  direct  in  the  exercises  of  those  in  the  Western 
hemisphere,  who  are  about  to  enter  on  the  sacred  services  of 
that  day.  On  the  same  principle,  we  may  perceive  the  absur- 
dity of  those  "  concerts""^  for  prayer  in  different  places  at  the 

range  of  thought  possessed  by  general  readers,  wcKild  not  have  a  tendency 
Lo  promote  its  benevolent  objects. 

*  The  author  does  rot  seem  to  mean,  that  it  is  ahsxird  for  Christians  in 
every  part  of  the  earth  to  assemble  on  the  same  day  in  their  respective  places 
of  devotion,  to  pray  for  a  universal  extension  of  chribtianity.     This  ubjtc- 


156  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

same  hour,  which  were  lately  proposed,  and  attempted  by  a 
certain  portion  of  the  religious  world.  Even  within  the  limits 
of  Europe,  this  could  not  be  attempted,  with  the  prospect  of 
Christians  joining  in  devotion  at  one  and  the  same  time  ;  for, 
when  it  is  six  o'clock  in  one  part  of  Europe,  it  is  eight  at 
another,  and  five  o'clock  at  a  third  place  ;  much  less  could 
such  a  concert  take  place  throughout  Europe,  Asia,  and  Ame- 
rica. So  that  science,  and  a  calm  consideration  of  the  nature 
and  relations  of  things,  may  teach  us  to  preserve  our  devotional 
fervor  and  zeal  within  the  bounds  of  reason  and  propriety ; 
and,  at  the  same  time,  to  direct  our  reflections,  and  our 
Christian  svmpathies,  to  take  a  wider  range  than  that  to  which 
they  are  usually  confined. 

Besides  the  considerations  now  suggested,  a  serious  con- 
templation of  the  physical  objects  and  movements  which  this 
science  exhibits,  has  a  tendency  to  excite  pious  and  reverential 
emotions.  To  contemplate  this  huge  globe  of  land  and  water, 
flying  with  rapidity  through  the  voids  of  space,  conveying  its 
vast  population  from  one  region  to  another,  at  the  rate  of  fifteen 
hundred  thousand  miles  in  a  day,  and  whirling  round  its  axis 
at  the  same  time,  to  produce  the  constant  succession  of  day 
and  night, — to  contemplate  the  lofty  ridges  of  mountains  that 
stretch  around  it  in  every  direction  ;  the  flaming  volcanoes  ; 
the  roaring  cataracts  ;  the  numerous  rivers,  incessantly  rolling 
their  watery  treasures  into  the  seas;  the  majestic  ocean,  and 
its  unfathomable  caverns  ;  the  vapors  rising  from  its  surface, 
and  replenishing  the  springs  and  rivers  ;  the  avalanche  hurling 
down  the  mountain's  side  with  a  noise  like  thunder  ;  the  luxu- 
riant plains  of  the  torrid  zone  ;  the  rugged  cliffs  and  icebergs 
of  the  polar  regions  ;  and  thousands  of  other  objects  of  diver- 
sified beauty  and  subhmity, — has  an  evident  tendency  to 
expand  the  conceptions  of  the  human  mind,  to  increase  its 
sources  of  animal  enjoyment,  and  to  elevate  the  affections  to 
that  All-Powerful  Being  who  gave  birth  to  all  the  sublimities  of 
Nature,  and  who  incessantly  superintends  all  its  movements. 

In  fine,  from  the  numerous  moral  facts,  which  Geography 
unfolds,  we  learn  the  vast  depth  and  extent  of  that  moral  de- 
gradation into  which  the  human  race  has  fallen — the  ferocious 
tempers,  and  immoral  practices,  which  are  displayed  in  the 
regions  of  Pagan  idolatry — the  horrid  cruelties,  the  vile  abo- 
minations, that  are  daily  perpetrated  under  the  sanction  of  what 

tion  would  lie  with  equal  weight  against  the  sabbath.  His  only  objection 
appears  to  be  against  the  supposition,  that  christians,  meeting  in  different 
parts  of  the  earth  at  the  same  hour  of  the  day,  are  praying  in  all  places  at 
the  same  moment. — dmencan  Editor. 


GEOLOGY.  157 

is  termed  religion — the  wide  extent  of  population,  over  which 
the  prince  of  darkness  sways  his  sceptre — the  difficidties  which 
require  to  be  surmounted  before  the  "  Gospel  of  salvation'*  car? 
extend  its  full  influence  throughout  the  Pagan  world — and  the 
vast  energies  which  are  requisite  to  accomplish  this  glorious 
event.  Ail  these  portions  of  information  are  calculated  to 
confirm  and  illustrate  the  Scriptural  doctrine  of  the  universal 
depravity  of  man — to  exercise  the  faith  of  the  Christian,  on 
the  promises  of  Jehovah,  in  reference  to  the  conversion  of  the 
benighted  nations — to  rouse  his  sympathies  towards  his  •  de- 
graded brethren  of  mankind,  to  excite  his  intercession  in  then- 
behalf,  and  to  direct  his  benevolence  and  activity,  in  devising 
and  e^cecuting  schemes  for  enlightening  the  people  who  are 
sitting  "  in  darkness,  and  in  the  shadow  of  death." 

GEOLOGY. 

Another  subject  intimately  related  to  the  former,  is,  the 
science  of  Geology. 

This  science  has  for  its  object,  to  investigate  and  describe 
the  internal  siructure  of  the  earth,  the  arrangement  of  the  ma- 
terials of  which  it  is  composed,  the  circumstances  peculiar  to 
its  original  formation,  the  different  states  under  which  it  has 
existed,  and  the  various  changes  which  it  appears  to  have  un- 
dergone, since  the  Almighty  created  the  substance  of  which  it 
is  composed.  From  a  consideration  of  the  vast  quantity  of 
materials  contained  in  the  internal  structure  of  our  globe,  and 
of  the  limited  extent  to  which  men  can  carry  their  operations, 
when  they  attempt  to  penetrate  into  its  bowels,  it  is  obvious, 
that  our  knowledge  of  this  subject  must  be  very  shallow  and 
imperfect..  The  observations,  however,  which  have  been  made 
on  the  structure  of  our  globe  during  the  last  half  century,  and 
the  conclusions  deduced  from  them,  are  highly  interesting, 
both  to  the  philosopher,  and  to  the  Christian.  Before  the 
facts,  on  which  this  branch  of  Natural  History  is  founded, 
were  accurately  ascertained,  a  variety  of  objections  to  the  Mo- 
saic history  of  the  creation  were  started  by  certain  sceptical 
philosophers,  founded  on  partial  and  erroneous  views  of  the 
real  structure  and  economy  of  the  earth.  But  it  is  now  found, 
that  the  more  accurately  and  minutely  the  system  of  nature  is 
explored,  the  more  distinctly  do  we  perceive  the  harmony  that 
subsists  between  the  records  of  Revelation,  and.  the  operations 
of  the  Creator,  in  the  material  world.  If  both  be  admitted  as 
the  effects  of  the  agency  of  the  same  Almighty  and  Eternal 
Being,  they  must,  in  the  nature  of  things,  completely  har- 


158  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER, 

moiiize,  and  can  never  be  repugnant  to  each  other — whethei 
we  be  capable,  in  every  instance,  of  perceiving  their  com- 
plete coincidence,  or  not.  If  any  facts  could  be  produced  in 
the  visible  creation  which  directly  contradict  the  records  of 
the  Bible,  it  would  form  a  proof,  that  the  oracles  which  we 
hold  as  Divine,  were  not  dictated  by  the  Creator  and  Go- 
vernor of  the  universe.  But,  although  some  garbled  facts 
have  been  triumphantly  exhibited  in  this  view,  it  is  now  ascer- 
tained, from  the  discoveries  which  have  been  lately  made  in 
relation  to  the  structure  and  formation  of  the  earth,  that  the 
truth  of  the  facts  detailed  in  Sacred  History,  rests  on  a  solid 
and  immutable  basis  ;  and  that  the  Supreme  Intelligence  who 
arranged  the  fabric  of  heaven  and  earth,  and  he  alone,  commu- 
nicated to  the  inspired  writers  the  doctrines,  and  the  facts  they 
have  recorded  ;  and,  we  have  reason  to  believe,  that  as  Geol- 
ogists proceed  in  their  researches  and  investigations,  still 
more  sensible  proofs  of  the  authenticity  of  Revelation  will  be 
brought  to  light. 

Geology  has,  of  late,  become  an  interesting  object  of  in- 
quiry to  the  student  of  general  science,  and  is  now  prosecuted 
with  ardor  by  many  distinguished  philosophers.  The  observa- 
tions which  have  been  made  in  various  parts  of  the  world,  by 
late  navigators  ;  the  facts  which  have  been  ascertained  by 
Pallas,  Saussure,  De  Luc,  Humboldt,  and  other  intelligent 
travellers  ;  and  the  discoveries  which  have  been  brought  to 
light  by  modern  chemists  and  mineralogists,  have  all  con- 
spired to  facihtate  Geological  inquiries,  to  render  them  more 
enlightened  and  satisfactoiy,  and  to  prepare  the  way  for  future 
ages  establishing  a  rational,  scriptural,  and  substantial  theory 
of  the  earth.  The  man  who  engages  in  such  inquiries  has 
always  at  hand  a  source  of  rational  investigation  and  enjoy- 
ment. The  ground  on  which  he  treads — the  aspect  of  the 
surrounding  country — the  mines,  the  caves,  and  the  quarries 
which  he  explores — every  new  country  in  which  he  travels, 
every  mountain  he  climbs,  and  every  new  surface  of  the  earth 
that  is  laid  open  to  his  inspection,  offer  to  him  novel  and  in- 
teresting stores  of  information.  On  descending  into  mines, 
we  are  not  only  gratified  by  displays  of  human  ingenuity,  but 
we  also  acquire  views  of  the  strata  of  the  earth,  and  of  the  revo- 
lutions it  has  undergone  since  the  period  of  its  formation. — 
Our  researches  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  amidst  abrupt  pre- 
cipices and  lofty  mountains,  introduce  us  to  the  grandest  and 
most  sublime  works  of  the  Creator,  and  present  to  our  view 
the  effects  of  stupendous  forces,  which  have  overturned  moun- 
tains, and  rent  the  foundations  of  nature.     "  In  the  midst  of 


GEOJOGY.  159 

such  scenes,  the  Geologist  feels  his  mind  invigorated ;  the 
magnitude  of  the  appearances  before  him  extinguishes  all  the 
little  and  contracted  notions  he  may  have  formed  in  the 
closet  ;  and  he  learns,  that  it  is  only  by  visiting  and  studying 
those  stupendous  works,  that  he  can  form  an  adequate  con- 
ception of  the  great  relations  of  the  crust  of  the  globe,  and  of 
its  mode  of  formation."* 

The  upper  crust,  or  surface  of  the  earth,  is  found  to  be  com- 
posed of  different  strata,  or  beds  placed  one  above  another. 
These  strata,  or  layers,  are  very  much  mixed,  and  their  direc- 
tion, matter,  thickness,  and  relative  position,  vary  considerably 
in  different  places.  These  strata  are  divided  into  seven 
classes,  as  follows  : — black  earth,  clay,  sandy  earth,  mari,  bog, 
chalk,  and  scabeous  or  stony  earth.  The  surface  of  the  globe, 
considered  in  relation  to  its  inequalities,  is  divided  into  High- 
land, Lowland,  and  the  bottom  of  the  sea.  Highland  com- 
prises Alpine  land,  composed  of  mountain  groups,  or  series  of 
mountain  chains :  Lowland  comprises  those  extensive  flat 
tracts  which  are  almost  entirely  destitute  of  small  mountain 
groups.  To  the  bottom  of  the  sea  belong  the  flat,  rocky  bot- 
tom, shoals,  reefsv  and  islands. 

At  first  sight,  the  solid  mass  of  the  earth  appears  to  be  a  con- 
fused assemblage  of  rocky  masses,  piled  on  each  other  without 
regularity  or  order,  where  none  of  those  admirable  displays  of 
skill  and  contrivance  are  to  be  observed,  which  so  powerfully 
excite  attention  in  the  structure  of  animals  and  vegetables. 
But,  on  a  nearer  and  more  intimate  view,  a  variety  of  beautiful 
arrangements  has  been  traced  by  the  industry  of  Geologists, 
and  the  light  of  modern  discoveries  ;  by  which  they  have  been 
enabled  to  classify  these  a})parant  irregularities  of  nature. 
The  materials  of  which  the  solid  crust  of  the  earth  is  composed, 
have  been  arranged  into  the  four  following  classes  : — I. 
Those  rocks  which  contain  neither  any  animal  nor  vegetable 
remains  themselves,  nor  are  intermixed  with  rocks  which  do 
contain  them,  and  are  therefore  termed  Primitive,  or  Primary 
rocks  ;  the  period  of  whose  formation  is  considered  as  ante- 
cedent to  that  of  the  creation  of  organic  beings.  These  are 
granite,  gnesis,  mica  slate,  and  clay  slate,  which  occur  abun- 
dantly in  all  regions  of  the  globe,  with  quartz  rock,  serpentine, 
granular  limestone,  &c.  which  occur  more  sparingly. — 2. 
Rocks  containing  organic  remains,  or  generally  associated  with 
other  rocks  in  which  such  substances  are  found,  and  which,  as 
having  been  formed  posterior  to  the  existence  of  organized 

*  Edinburgh  Encyclop.  Art.  Minerdegy, 


160  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

beings,  are  termed  Secondary,  These  are  greywacke,  sand- 
stone, limestone,  and  gypsum  of  various  kinds,  slate  clay,  with 
certain  species  of  trap ;  and  they  are  found  lying  above  the 
primary  or  older  rocks. — 3.  Above  these  secondary  rocks, beds 
of  gravel,  sand,  earth,  and  moss,  are  found,  which  have  been 
termed  Alluvial  rocks,  or  Formations.  This  class  compre- 
hends those  rocky  substances  formed  from  previously  existing 
rocks,  of  which  the  materials  have  been  broken  down  by  the 
agency  of  water  and  air ;  they  are  therefore  generally  loose  in 
their  texture,  and  are  never  covered  with  any  real  solid  and 
rocky  secondary  strata. — 4.  Volcanic  rocks ;  under  which 
class  are  comprehended  all  those  rocks,  beds  of  lava,  scoriae, 
and  other  matter  thrown  out  at  certain  points  of  the  earth's 
surface  by  the  action  of  subterraneous  fire. 

"  The  phenomena  of  Geology  show,  that  the  original 
formation  of  the  rocks  has  been  accompanied,  in  nearly  all  its 
stages,  by  a  process  of  waste,  decay,  and  recomposition.  The 
rocks,  as  they  were  successively  deposited,  were  acted  upon 
by  air  and  water,  heat,  &c.  broken  into  fragments,  or  worn 
down  into  grains,  out  of  which  new  strata  were  formed.  Even 
the  newer  secondary  rocks,  since  their  consolidation,  have 
been  subject  to  great  changes,  of  which  very  distinct  monu- 
ments remain.  Thus,  we  have  single  mountains  which,  from 
their  structure,  can  be  considered  only  as  remnants  of  great 
formations,  or  of  great  continents  no  longer  in  existence. 
Mount  Meisner,  in  Hesse,  six  miles  long  and  three  broad, 
rises  about  ISOO  feet  above  its  base,  and  2100  above' the  sea, 
overtopping  all  the  neighbouring  hills  from  40  to  50  miles 
round.  The  lowest  part  of  the  mountain  consists  of  the  same 
shell,  limestone,  and  sandstone,  which  exist  in  the  adjacent 
country.  Above  these  are,  first,  a  bed  of  sand,  then  a  bed  of 
fossil  wood,  100  feet  thick  at  some  points,  and  the  whole  is 
covered  by  a  mass  of  basalt,  500  feet  in  height.  On  consi- 
dering these  facts,  it  is  impossible  to  avoid  concluding,  that 
this  niountain  which  now  overtops  the  neighbouring  country, 
occupied  at  one  time,  the  bottom  of  a  cavity  in  the  midst  of 
higher  lands.  The  vast  mass  of  fossil  wood  could  not  all 
have  grown  there,  but  must  have  been  transported  by  water 
from  a  more  elevated  surflice,  and  lodged  in  what  was  then  a 
hollow.  The  basalt  which  covers  the  wood  must  also  have 
flowed  in  a  current  from  a  higher  site  ;  but  the  soil  over  which 
both  the  wood  and  the  basalt  passed,  has  been  swept  away, 
leaving  this  mountain  as  a  solitary  memorial  to  attest  its  exist- 
ence. Thus,  also,  on  the  side  of  Mount  Jura  next  the  Alps, 
where  no  other  mountain  interposes,  there   are  found  vast 


GEOLOGY.  161 

blocks  of  granite  (some  of  1000  cubic  yards)  at  the  height  of 
more  than  2000  feet  above  the  Lake  of  Geneva.  These 
blocks  are  foreign  to  the  rocks  among  which  they  lie,  and  have 
evidently  come  from  the  opposite  chain  of  the  Alps  ;  but  the 
land  which  constituted  the  inclined  plane  over  which  they 
were  rolled  or  transported,  has  been  worn  away,  and  the  val- 
ley of  lower  Switzerland,  with  its  lakes,  now  occupies  its  place, 
Transported  masses  of  primitive  rocks,  of  the  same  descrip- 
tion, are  found  scattered  over  the  north  of  Germany,  which 
Van  Buch  ascertained  by  their  characters  to  belong  to  the. 
mountains  of  Scandinavia  ;  and  which,  therefore,  carry  us 
back  to  a  period  when  an  elevated  continent,  occupying  the 
basin  of  the  Baltic,  connected  Saxony  with  Norway. — Supp. 
to  Eiicy.  Brit.  vol.  6. 

The  production  of  a  bed  for  vegetation  is  effected  by  the 
decomposition  of  rocks.  This  decomposition  is  effected  by 
the  expansion  of  water  in  the  pores  or  fissures  of  rocks,  by 
heat  or  congelation — by  the  solvent  power  of  moisture — and 
by  electricity,  which  is  known  to  be  a  powerful  agent  of  de- 
composition. As  soon  as  the  rock  begins  to  be  softened,  the 
seeds  of  lichens,  which  are  constantly  floating  in  the  air,  make 
it  their  resting  place.  Their  generations  occupy  it  till  a  finely 
divided  earth  is  formed,  which  becomes  capable  of  supporting 
mosses  and  heath  ;  acted  upon  by  light  and  heat,  these  plants 
imbibe  the  dew,  and  convert  constituent  parts  of  the  air  into 
nourishment.  Their  death  and  decay  afford  food  for  a  more 
perfect  species  of  vegetable  ;  and,  at  length,  a  mould  is  form- 
ed, in  which  even  the  trees  of  the  forest  can  fix  their  roots?, 
and  which  is  capable  of  rewarding  the  labors  of  the  cultivator. 
The  decomposition  of  rocks  tends, to  the  renovation  of  soils, 
as  well  as  their  cultivation.  Finely  divided  matter  is  carried 
by  rivers  from  the  higher  districts  to  the  low  countnes,  and 
alluvial  lands  are  usually  extremely  fertile.  By  these  opera- 
tions, the  quantity  of  habitable  surface  is  constantly  increased  : 
precipitous  cUtfs  are  generally  made  gentle  slopes,  lakes  are 
filled  up,  and  islands  are  formed  at  the  mouths  of  great  river?  ; 
so  that  as  the  world  grows  older,  its  capacity  for  containing  an 
increased  number  of  inhabitants  is  gradually  enlarging. 

Of  all  the  memorials  of  the  past  history  of  our  globe,  Xh^ 
most  interesting  are  those  myriads  of  remains  of  organized 
bodies  which  exist  in  the  interior  of  its  outer  crusts.  In  these, 
we  find  traces  of  innumerable  orders  of  beings  existing  under 
different  circumstances,  succeeding  one  another  at  distant 
epochs,  and  varying  through  multiphed  changes  of  form,  **  If 
we  examine  the  secondary  rocks,  beginning  with  the  most 

14 


162  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

ancient,  the  first  organic  remains  which  present  themselves,  are 
those  of  aquatic  plants  and  large  reeds,  but  of  species  differ- 
ent from  ours.  To  these  succeed  madrepores,  encrenities, 
and  other  aquatic  zoophites,  living  beings  of  the  simplest 
forms  which  remain  attached  to  one  spot,  and  partake,  in  some 
degree,  of  the  nature  of  vegetables.  Posterior  to  these,  are 
ammonites,  and  other  moUusci,  still  very  simple  in  their  forms, 
and  entirely  different  from  any  animals  now  known.  After 
these,  some  fishes  appear  ;  and  plants,  consisting  of  bamboos 
and  ferns,  increase,  but  still  different  from  those  which  exist. 
In  the  next  period,  along  with  an  increasing  number  of  extinct 
species  of  shells  and  fishes,  we  meet  with  amphibious  and 
viviparous  quadrupeds,  such  as  crocodiles  and  tortoises,  and 
some  reptiles,  as  serpents,  which  show,  that  dry  land  now  ex- 
isted. As  we  approach  the  newest  of  the  solid  rock  forma- 
tions, we  find  lamantins,  phocae,  and  other  cetaceous  and 
mammiferous  sea  animals,  with  some  birds.  And  in  the  new- 
est of  these  formations,  we  find  the  remains  of  herbiferous 
land  animals  of  extinct  species,  the  paleotherium,  anaplothe- 
rium,  &c.  and  of  birds,  with  some  fresh  water  shells.  In  the 
lowest  beds  of  loose  soil,  and  in  peat  bogs,  are  found  the  re- 
mains of  the  elephant,  rhinoceros,  hippopotamus,  elk,  &c.  of 
different  species  from  those  which  now  exist,  but  belonging  to 
the  same  genera.  Lastly,  the  bones  of  the  species  which  are 
apparently  the  same  with  those  now  existing  alive,  are  never 
found  except  in  the  very  latest  alluvial  depositions,  or  those 
which  are  either  formed  in  the  sides  of  rivers,  the  bottoms  of 
ancient  lakes  and  marshes  now  dried  up,  in  peat  beds,  in  the 
fissures  and  caverns  of  certain  rocks,  or  at  small  depths  below 
the  present  surface,  in  places  where  they  may  have  been  over- 
whelmed by  debris,  or  even  buried  by  man.  Human  bones 
are  never  found  except  among  those  of  animal  species  now 
living,  and  in  situations  which  show,  that  they  have  been 
comparatively  speaking,  recently  deposited." — Supp.  to  Ency. 
Brit.  vol.  6. 

More  than  thirty  different  species  of  animals  have  been 
found  embedded  in  the  secondary  strata — no  living  examples 
of  which  are  now  to  be  found  in  any  quarter  of  the  globe. 
Among  the  most  remarkable  of  these  are  the  following. — 1. 
The  JMammoth,  which  bears  a  certain  resemblance  to  the 
Elephant,  but  is  much  larger,  and  differs  considerably  in  the 
size  and  form  of  the  tusks,  jaws,  and  grinders.  The  fossil  re- 
mains of  this  animal  are  more  abundant  in  Siberia  than  in 
other  countries  ;  there  being  scarcely  a  spot,  from  the  river 
Don  to  Kamtschatka,  in  which  they  have  not  been  found. 


GEOLOGY.  16S 

Not  only  single  bones  and  perfect  skeletons  of  this  animal  are 
frequently  to  be  met  with  ;  but,  in  a  late  instance,  the  whole 
animal  was  found  preserved  in  ice.  This  animal  was  dis- 
covered on  the  banks  of  the  frozen  ocean,  near  the  mouth  of 
the  river  Jena,  in  1799  ;  and  in  1805,  Mr.  Adams  got  it  con- 
veyed over  a  space  of  7000  miles  to  Petersburgh,  where  it  is 
deposited  in  the  Museum.  The  flesh,  skin,  and  hair  were 
completely  preserved,  and  even  the  eyes  were  entire.  It  was 
provided  with  a  long  mane,  and  the  body  was  covered  with 
hair.  This  hair  was  of  different  qualities.  There  were  stiff 
black  bristles  from  12  to  15  inches  long,  and  these  belonged 
to  the  tail,  mane,  and  ears.  Other  bristles  were  from  9  to  10 
inches  long,  and  of  a  brown  color  ;  and  besides  these,  there 
was  a  coarse  wool,  from  3  to  5  inches  long,  of  a  pale  yellow 
color.  This  mammoth  was  a  male  :  it  measured  9  feet  4 
inches  in  height,  and  was  16  feet  4  inches  long,  without  inclu- 
ding the  tusks.  The  tusks,  measuring  along  the  curve,  are  9 
feet  6  inches  ;  and  the  two  together  weigh  360  lbs.  avoirdu- 
pois. The  head  alone  without  the  tusks,  weighs  414  lbs. 
avoirdupois.  The  remains  of  this  animal  have  been  found 
likewise  in  Iceland,  Norway,  Scotland,  England,  and  in 
many  places  through  the  continent  onwards  to  the  Arctic 
ocean. 

2.  The  Megatherium.  A  complete  skeleton  of  this  co- 
lossal species  was  found  in  diluvial  soil,  near  Buenos  Ayres, 
and  sent  to  Madrid,  The  specimen  is  14  feet  long,  and  7 
Spanish  feet  in  height. 

3.  The  great  Mastodon  of  the  Ohio.  This  species  ap- 
pears to  have  been  as  tall  as  the  elephant,  but  with  longer  and 
thicker  limbs.  It  had  tusks  like  the  elephant,  and  appears  to 
have  lived  on  roots.  Its  remains  abound  in  America,  particu- 
larly on  the  banks  of  the  Ohio. 

4.  The  Tapir,  which  also  abounds  in  America.  The 
one  named  Gigantic  Tapir,  is  about  18  feet  long,  and  12  feet 
high. 

5.  The  Irish  Elk,  or  Elk  of  the  Isle  of  Man.  This  gi- 
gantic species,  now  apparently  extinct,  occurs  in  a  fossil  state, 
in  Ireland,  Isle  of  Man,  England,  Germany,  and  France.  The 
most  perfect  specimen  of  this  species,  v/hich  was  found  in  the 
Isle  of  Man,  may  be  seen  in  the  Museum  of  the  University  of 
Edinburgh.  It  is  6  feet  high,  9  feet  long,  and  in  height  to 
the  tip  of  the  right  horn,  9  feet  7^  inches.  An  engraving  of 
this  skeleton  may  be  seen  in  vol.  6  of  Supp.  to  Ency.  Brit. 

From  a  consideration  of  the  phenomena  above  described. 
Geologists  have  been  led  to  conclude,  "  that  rocks  now  buried 


t)-3  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

at  a  great  depih,  constituted,  at  one  time,  the  surface  of  con 
tinents,  and  the  seat  of  organic  Hfe  ;  and  that  many  orders  of 
bemgs  have  been  called  into  existence^  and  afterwards  de- 
stroyed by  great  revolutions,  which  introduced  new  classes  ol 
mineral  deposits,  accompanied  with  new  tribes  of  organic 
beings."  It  has  also  been  concluded  by.  some,  that  the 
appearance  of  Man  upon  the  face  of  the  globe,  is,  geologi- 
cally speaking,  a  very  recent  event ;  before  which  the  earth 
had  been  inhabited  thousand  of  years  by  various  families  of 
plants  and  tribes  of  animals,  which  had  been  destroyed  and 
renewed  in  a  long  series  of  successions.  Whether  these 
conclusions  be  necessary  inferences  from  the  phenomena  of 
organic  remains  and  other  geological  facts,  I  shall  not,  at 
present,  stop  to  inquire.  It  is  sufficient  for  the  Christian 
Philosopher  to  show,  that,  though  they  should  be  admitted  in 
their  full  extent,  they  are  not  inconsistent  with  the  records  of 
Sacred  History,  as  some  divines  have  been  disposed  to  main- 
tain. Though  it  could  be  proved  to  a  demonstration,  that  the 
materials  of  which  the  present  system  of  our  globe  is  com- 
posed, have  existed  for  millions  of  years,  it  would  not,  in  the 
least,  invalidate  the  Mosaic  account  of  the  arrangement  of 
our  world.  For  Moses  no  where  affirms,  that  the  materials  or 
substance  of  the  earth,  were  created,  or  brought  from  nothing 
into  existence,  at  the  period  when  his  history  commences. 
His  language,  on  the  contrary,  evidently  implies,  that  the 
materials  which  enter  into  the  constitution  of  our  globe  did 
exist,  at  the  epoch  at  which  he  commences  his  narration. 
''  The  earth  was  without  form,  and  void  ;  and  darkness  tvas 
upon  the  face  of  the  deep."  This  passage  plainly  implies  the 
following  things — 1.  That  the  original  atoms,  or  materials, 
out  of  which  the  terraqueous  globe,  in  its  present  state,  was 
formed,  were  then  in  existence,  or,  had  been  previously  created. 
How  long  they  had  been  in  existence  is  not  stated.  We  may 
suppose  thein  to  have  existed  tor  a  year,  a  thousand  years,  or 
a  million  of  years,  just  as  geological  phenomena  seem  to  war- 
rant, without  111  the  least  invalidating  the  authority  of  the 
Sacred  Historian,  who  states  nothing  contrary  to  the  truth  of 
either  supposition.  2.  That  the  materials  of  our  globe,  as 
then  existing,  were  in  a  chaotic  state.  Instead  of  that  order 
and  beauty  which  we  perceive  on  the  face  of  nature,  the  whole 
mass  presented  a  scene  of  confusion  and  disorder — such  a 
scene,  perhaps,  as  would  be  presented,  were  the  earth  stripped 
of  its  verdure,  were  its  strata  universally  disrupted,  its  moun- 
tains hurled  into  the  plains,  and  its  rivers  and  seas,  by  some 
terrible  convulsion,  to  ibrsake  their  ancient  channels.    3..  The- 


GEOLOGY.  165 

passage  seems  to  imply,  that  the  whole,  or  the  greater  portion 
of  the  earth,  as  it  then  existed,  was  covered  with  a  deluge 
of  water  :  "  Darkness  covered  the  face  of  the  cieep,"  or  the 
abyss. 

Such  was  the  state  of  the  terrestrial  system  at  the  period 
when  Moses  commences  his  narration  ;  no  intimation  being 
given  of  the  period  of  its  duration  in  this  condition ;  and, 
consequently,  nothing  asserted  to  militate  against  any  geolo- 
gical system  which  is  founded  on  the  facts  which  have  been 
discovered  respecting  the  organic  remains  which  are  found  in 
the  strata  of  our  globe.  It  is  a  mistake  into  which  too  many 
have  been  apt  to  fall,  to  suppose,  that  Moses  begins  his  history 
at  the  period  when  the  first  portions  of  material  existence 
were  created  out  of  nothing ;  and  that  it  was  his  design  to 
mark  the  precise  epoch  when  the  whole  assemblage  of  created 
beings  throughout  the  universe  was  brought  into  existence. — 
His  primary,  if  not  his  sole  intention  evidently  was,  to  detail 
the  progress  of  those  arrangements  by  which  the  earth  was 
gradually  reduced  to  that  form  and  order  in  which  we  now 
behold  it,  from  the  chaotic  materials  which  previously  existed. 
And,  as  an  emphatic  and  appropriate  introduction  to  his  narra- 
tion, he  states  this  important  truth :  "  In  the  begining  God 
created  the  heaven  and  the  earth."  This  passage,  being  of  a 
general  and  comprehensive  nature,  decides  nothing  with  regard 
to  the  period,,  or  precise  epoch,  at  which  the  different  bodies  in 
the  universe  were  called  into  being  ;  but  is  evidently  intended 
to  convey  the  following  important  truth,  in  opposion  to  all  fan- 
ciful, chimerical,  and  atheistical  notions  respectin^g  the  origin  of 
the  world ;  namely,  "  That,  at  what  period  soever,  in  the  lapse 
of  duration,  any  object  was  brought  into  existence,  it  derived 
that  existence  from  the  God  of  Israel,  the  self-existent  and 
Eternal  Jehovah."  "In  the  beginning  God  created  the  heaven 
and  the  earth."  As  the  language  of  the  Sacred  Historian, 
therefore,  decides  nothing  with  regard  to  time — to  limit  the 
creation  of  every  portion  of  the  material  system  within  the 
period  of  six  thousand  years,  is  to  make  an  unnecessary  con- 
cession to  the  infidel  philosopher,  which  may  afterwards  be 
found  inconsistent  with  certain  facts  which  exist  in  the  ma- 
terial world. 

But,  whatever  may  be  said  with  respect  to  the  state  and 
duration  of  the  earth  prior  to  the  period  at  which  Moses  com- 
mences his  narration,  it  is  admitted  by  every  geologist,  that 
our  globe,  as  to  its  present  form  and  arrangement,,  has  been, 
comparatively,  of  but  short  duration.  Cuvier,  one  of  the 
most  enlightened  geologists  of  the  age,  deduces,  from  certain 

14* 


166  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

progressive  changes  on  the  earth's  surface,  as  well  as  from  the 
concurrent  traditions  of  many  nations,  that  the  first  appearance 
of  man  upon  the  face  of  the  globe,  or,  at  least,  the  renewal  of 
the  human  race  after  some  great  catastrophe,  cannot  be  refer- 
red to  a  period  farther  back  than  5000,  or  6000  years  from  the 
present  time.  Geologists,  too,  of  every  description,  however 
different  the  systems  or  theories  they  have  adopted,  have  all 
been  constrained,  from  the  evidence  of  fact,  to  admit  this  con- 
clusion, "  That  every  part  of  the  dry  land  icas  once  covered  by 
the  ocean  ;^^  thus  confirming  the  scriptural  accomit  of  that 
stupendous  event,  the  universal  deluge.  This  event,  from  its 
very  nature,  must  have  been  accompanied  with  the  most  terri- 
ble convulsions,  both  on  the  exterior  surface,  and  in  the  inte- 
rior strata  of  the  globe.  Accordingly  we  find,  that  traces  of 
this  awful  catastrophe  exist  in  every  region  of  the  earth.  Mr. 
Parkinson  describes  the  whole  island  of  Great  Britain,  as 
having,  since  its  completion,  "  sufTered  considerable  distur- 
bance from  some  prodigious  and  mysterious  power.  By  this 
power  all  the  known  strata,  to  the  greatest  depths  that  have 
been  explored,  have  been  more  or  less  broken  and  displaced, 
and,  in  some  places,  have  been  so  lifted,  that  some  of  the  lowest 
of  them  have  been  raised  to  the  surface  ;  while  portions  of 
others,  to  a  very  considerable  depth  and  extent,  have  beec 
entirely  carried  away."  The  whole  of  the  Alpine  region  ir 
Switzerland,  and  the  North  of  Italy,  considered  as  one  mass 
shows  the  most  evident  marks  of  dislocation.  At  the  height 
of  3500  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  M.  Saussure  met  with 
a  chasm  a  hundred  feet  wide,  and  so  deep  that  he  saw  no  bot- 
tom. All  travellers  on  the  Alps  have  regarded  them  with 
horror.  They  mark  the  most  evident  convulsions,  but  show 
no  signs  of  having  been  occasioned  by  attrition.  Mr.  Towns- 
end,  speaking  of  the  Pyrenees,  which  he  personally  inspected, 
says,  "  What  is  most  remarkable  is,  to  see  four  enormous 
chasms,  almost  perpendicular,  which  divided  both  mountains 
and  their  valleys,  and  which  appear  as  if  they  had  just  been 
rent  asunder."  Throughout  the  ranges  of  the  Andes,  and  in 
every  other  mountainous  region,  similar  chasms  and  disrup- 
tions, indicating  the  former  operation  of  some  tremendous 
power,  are  frequently  observed  by  those  who  visit  such  scenes 
of  grandeur. — In  some  of  the  coal  mines  in  our  own  country, 
the  coal  is  in  some  places  lifted  up,  or  thrown  down  several 
hundreds  of  feet  from  the  places  it  appears  originally  to  have 
occupied.  "  Two  miles  north  of  Newcastle,"  says  Mr.  Towns- 
end,  *^  one  great  dyke  ov  fault  throws  down  ihe  coal  540  feet 


GEOLOGY.  167 

— at  the  distance  of  3  miles,  it  is  cut  off  and  thrown  down 
again  240  feet." 

An  evidence  of  the  effects  which  could  be  produced  only 
by  a  general  deluge,  is  also  afforded  by  those  organic  remains 
to  which  I  have  already  adverted,  and  particularly  by  those 
immense  quantities  of  marine  shells^  which  have  been  discov- 
ered in  situations  so  elevated,  and  in  places  so  far  removed  from 
the  sea,  as  to  prove  that  they  were  left  there  by  a  flood  exten- 
ing  over  the  whole  globe.  At  Touraine,  in  France,  a  hundred 
miles  from  the  sea,  is  a  bed  of  shells  stretching  9  leagues  in 
extent,  and  20  feet  in  depth,  and  including  shells  not  known 
to  belong  to  the  neighbouring  sea.  Humboldt  found  sea  shells 
on  the  Andes  at  an  elevation  of  14,120  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  sea.  The  slaty  mountain  of  La  Bolca,  near  Verona,  is 
famous  for  petrifactions,  among  which  are  enumerated  more 
than  one  hundred  species  of  fish,  natives  of  Europe,  Asia, 
Africa,  and  America,  here  assembled  in  one  place. 

It  appears,  therefore,  that  the  researches  of  Geology  confirm 
the  fact  of  a  universal  deluge,  and  thus  afford  a  sensible  proof 
of  the  credibility  of  the  Sacred  Historian,  and,  consequently, 
of  the  truth  of  the  doctrines  of  Divine  Revelation.  But,  besides 
the  testimony  u  bich  this  science  bears  to  the  authenticity  of 
Scripture  History,  it  exhibits  some  of  the  grandest  objects  in 
the  history  of  the  physical  operations  of  Divine  Providence. 
It  presents  to  onr  view,  in  a  most  impressive  form,  the  majes- 
tic agency  of  God,  in  convulsing  and  disarranging  the  struc- 
ture of  our  globe,  and  which  at  first  sprung  from  his  hand  in 
perfect  order  and  beauty.  When  we  comtemplate  the  objects 
which  this  science  embraces,  we  seem  to  be  standing  on  the 
ruins  of  a  former  world.  We  behold  "  hills"  which  "  have 
melted  like  Max  at  the  presence  of  the  Lord."  and  "  mountains" 
which  "  have  been  carried  into  the  midst  of  the  sea."  We 
behold  rocks  of  enormous  size,  which  have  been  rent  from 
their  foundations,  and  rolled  from  one  continent  to  another — • 
the  most  solid  strata  of  the  earth  bent  under  the  action  of 
some  tremendous  power,  and  dispersed  in  fragments  through 
the  surrounding  regions.  We  behold  the  summits  of  lofty 
mountains,  over  w^hich  the  ocean  had  rolled  its  mighty  billows 
— confounding  lands  and  seas  in  one  universal  devastation — 
transporting  plants  and  forests  from  one  quarter  of  the  world 
to  another,  and  spreading  universal  destruction  among  the 
animated  inhabitants  of  the  water  and  the  earth.  When  we 
enter  the  wild  and  romantic  scene  of  a  mountainous  country, 
or  descend  into  the  subterraneous  regions  of  the  globe,  we  are 


168  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

every  where  struck  with  the  vestiges  of  operations  carried  opj 
by  the  powers  of  Nature^  upon  a  scale  of  prodigious  magni- 
tude, and  with  the  exertion  of  forces,  the  stupendous  nature 
of  which  astonishes  and  overpowers  the  mind.  Comtemplat- 
mg  such  scenes  of  grandeur,  we  perceive  the  force  and  sub- 
limity of  those  descrij^tions  of  Deity  contained  in  the  volume 
of  inspiration :  "  The  Lord  reigneth,  he  is  clothed  with  majes- 
ty ;  in  his  hand  are  the  deep  places  of  the  earth,  the  strength 
of  hills  is  his  also.  He  removeth  the  mountains,  and  they 
know  not ;  he  overturneth  them  in  his  anger  ;  he  shaketh  the 
earth  out  of  her  place,  and  the  pillars  thereof  tremble.  At  his 
presence  the  earth  shook  and  trembled  :  the  foundations  also 
of  the  hills  moved,  and  were  shaken,  because  he  was  wrath." 
"  Thou  coveredst  the  earth  with  the  deep,  as  with  a  garment ; 
the  waters  stood  above  the  mountains.  At  thy  rebuke  they 
fled;  at  the  voice  of  thy  thunder  they  hastened  away."  While 
retracing  such  terrific  displays  of  Omnipotence,  we  are  natu- 
rally led  to  inquire  into  the  moral  cause  which  induced  the 
Benevolent  Creator  to  inflict  upon  the  world  such  overwhelm- 
ing desolations.  For  reason,  as  well  as  revelation,  declares, 
that  a  moral  cause  must  have  existed.  Man  must  have  viola- 
ted the  commands  of  his  Maker,  and  frustrated  the  end  of  his 
creation  ;  and  to  this  conclusion  the  Sacred  Historian  bears 
ample  testimony. — "  God  saw  that  the  wickedness  of  man  was 
great  in  the  earth,  and  that  every  imagination  of  the  thoughts 
of  his  heart  was  only  evil  continually  :  and  Jehovah  said,  I 
will  destroy  man  whom  I  have  created,  from  the  face  of  the 
earth,  both  man  and  beast,  and  the  creeping  thing,  and  the 
fowls  of  the  air." 

ASTRONOMY. 

Another  science  which  stands  in  an  intimate  relation  to  reli 
gion,  is  Astronomy. 

This  sublime  science  teaches  us  the  magnitudes  and  dis- 
tances of  the  heavenly  bodies,  their  arrangement,  their  various 
motions  and  phenomena^  and  the  laws  by  which  their  move- 
ments are  regulated.  It  presents  to  our  view  objects  the  most 
wonderful  and  sublime  ;  whether  we  consider  the  vast  magni- 
tude of  the  bodies  about  which  it  is  conversant — their  immense 
number — the  velocitij  of  their  motions — the  astonishing  forces 
requisite  to  impel  them  in  their  rapid  career  through  the  regions 
of  the  sky — the  vast  spaces  which  surround  them,  and  in  which 
they  perform  their  revolutions — the  magnificent  circles  they 
describe — the  splendor  of  their  appearance — or  the  important 
ends  they  are  destined  to  serve  in  the  grand  system  of  the 


ASTRONOMY.  169 

universe.  Having  adverted  to  this  subject,  when  illustrating  the 
Omnipotence  of  the  Deity,  I  shall  here  simply  state  a  few 
additional  facts  with  respect  to  the  general  appearance  of  the 
heavens,  the  bodies  which  compose  the  planetary  system,  and 
the  discoveries  which  have  been  made  in  the  region  of  the 
stars. 

When  we  lift  our  eyes  towards  the  sky,  we  perceive  an  ap- 
parent hollow  hemisphere,  placed  at  an  indefinite  distance,  and 
surrounding  the  earth  on  every  hand.  In  the  day  time,  the 
principal  object  which  appears  in  the  hemi.-sphere,  is  the  sun- 
In  the  morning,  we  see  him  rise  above  the  dis\ant  mountains^ 
or  from  the  extremity  of  the  ocean  ;  he  gradually  ascends  the 
vault  of  heaven,  and  then  declines,  and  disappears  in  the  op- 
posite quarter  of  the  sky.  In  the  northern  parts  of  the  globe, 
where  we  reside,  if,  about  the  21st  of  March,  we  place  our- 
selves on  an  open  plain,  with  our  face  towards  the  south,  the 
sun  will  appear  to  rise  on  our  left,  or  due  east,  about  six  in  the 
morning,  and  about  the  same  hour  in  the  evening,  he  will  set 
due  west.  In  the  month  of  June  he  rises  to  our  left,  but  some- 
w^hat  behind  us,  in  a  direction  towards  the  north-east,  ascends 
to  a  greater  height  at  noon  than  in  the  month  of  March,  and,, 
after  describing  a  large  arc  of  the  heavens,  sets  on  our  right, 
and  still  behind  us,  in  the  north-western  quarter  of  the  sky. 
In  the  month  of  December,  if  we  stand  in  the  same  position, 
we  may  observe,  without  turning  ourselves,  both  his  rising  and 
setting.  He  rises  in  the  south-east,  ascends  to  a  small  eleva- 
tion at  noon,  and  sets  in  the  south-west,  after  having  described 
a  very  small  arc  of  the  heavens.  Every  day  he  appears  to 
move  a  little  towards  the  eastj  or  contrary  to  his  apparent  di- 
urnal motion ;  for  the  stars  which  are  seen  to  the  eastward 
of  him,  appear  every  succeeding  day  to  make  a  nearer  ap- 
proach to  the  place  in  which  he  is  seen.  All  the  variety  of 
these  successive  changes  is  accomplished  within  the  period  of 
365  days  6  hours,  in  which  time  he  appears  to  have  made  a 
complete  revolution  round  the  heavens  from  ivest  to  east. 

The  moon  is  the  next  object  in  the  heavens  which  naturally 
attracts  our  attention  ;  and  she  is  found  to  go  through  similar 
variations  in  the  course  of  a  month.  When  she  first  becomes 
visible  at  new  moon,  she  appears  in  the  western  part  of  the 
heavens,  in  the  form  of  a  crescent,  not  far  from  the  setting 
sun.  Every  night  she  increases  in  size,  and  removes  to  a 
greater  distance  from  the  sun,  till,  at  last,  she  appears  in  the 
eastern  part  of  the  horizon,  just  as  the  sun  disappears  in  the 
western  ;  at  which  time  she  presents  a  round  full-enlightened 
face.     After  this,  she  gradually  moves  farther  and  farther  east- 


170  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

ward,  and  her  enlightened  part  gradually  decreases,  till  at  last 
she  seems  to  approach  the  sun  as  nearly  in  the  east  as  she  did 
in  the  west,  and  rises  only  a  little  before  him  in  the  morning,  in 
the  form  of  a  crescent.  All  these  different  changes  may  be 
traced  by  attending  to  her  apparent  positions,  from  time  to 
time,  with  respect  to  the  fixed  stars. 

A  dark  shadow  is  occasionally  seen  to  move  across  the  face 
of  the  moon,  which  obscures  her  light,  and  gives  her  the  ap- 
pearance of  tarnished  copper.  Sometimes  this  shadow 
covers  only  a  small  portion  of  her  surface  ;  at  other  times  it 
covers  the  whole  of  her  disk  for  an  hour  or  two,  and  its  margin 
always  appears  of  the  figure  of  a  segment  of  a  circle.  This 
phenomenon,  which  happens,  at  an  average,  about  twice  every 
year,  is  termed  an  eclipse  of  the  moon.  It  is  produced  by  the 
shadow  of  the  earth  falling  upon  the  moon,  when  the  sun,  the 
earth,  and  the  moon,  are  nearly  in  a  straight  line  :  and  can 
happen  only  at  the  time  of  full  moon.  Sometimes  the  moon 
appears  to  pass  across  the  body  of  the  sun,  when  her  dark  side 
is  turned  towards  the  earth,  covering  his  disk  either  in  whole 
or  in  part,  and  intercepting  his  rays  from  a  certain  portion  of 
the  earth.  This  is  called  an  eclipse  of  the  swi,  and  can  happen 
only  at  the  time  of  new  moon.  In  a  total  eclipse  of  the  sun, 
which  seldom  happens,  the  darkness  is  so  striking,  that  the 
planets,  and  some  of  the  larger  stars,  are  distinctly  seen,  and 
the  inferior  animals  appear  struck  with  terror. 

Again,  if,  on  a  winter's  evening,  about  six  o'clock,  we  direct 
our  view  to  the  eastern  quarter  of  the  sky,  we  shall  perceive 
certain  stars  just  risen  above  the  horizon  ;  if  we  view  the  same 
stars  about  midnight,  we  shall  find  them  at  a  considerable  ele- 
vation in  the  south,  having  apparently  moved  over  a  space 
equal  to  one  half  of  the  whole  hemisphere.  On  the  next 
morning,  about  six  o'clock,  the  same  stars  will  be  seen  setting 
in  the  western  part  of  the  sky.  If  we  turn  our  eyes  towards 
the  north,  we  shall  perceive  a  similar  motion  in  these  twinkling 
orbs,  but  with  this  difference,  that  a  very  considerable  number 
of  them  neither  rise  nor  set,  but  seem  to  move  round  an  im- 
moveable point,  called  the  north  pole.  Near  this  point  is 
placed  the  pole  star,  which  seems  to  have  little  or  no  apparent 
motion,  and  which,  in  our  latitude,  appears  elevated  a  little 
more  than  half  way  between  the  northern  part  of  our  horizon 
and  the  zenith  or  point  above  our  heads.  A  person  who  has 
directed  his  attention  to  the  heavens  for  the  first  time,  after 
having  made  such  observations,  will  naturally  inquire — 
Whence  come  those  stars  which  begin  to  appear  in  the  east  ? 
Whither  have  those  gone,  which  have  disappeared  in  the  west  I 


ASTRONOMY.  171 

&nd.  What  becomes,  during  the  day,  of  the  stars  which  are 
'  seen  in  the  night  ? — It  will  soon  occur  to  a  rational  observer, 
who  is  convinced  of  the  roundness  of  the  earth,  that  the  stars 
which  rise  above  the  eastern  horizon  come  from  another 
hemisphere,  which  we  are  apt  to  imagine  below  us,  and  when 
they  set,  return  to  that  hemisphere  again  ;  and,  that  the  reason 
why  the  stars  are  not  seen  in  the  day-time,  is,  not  because  they 
are  absent  from  our  hemisphere,  or  have  ceased  to  shine,  but 
because  their  light  is  obscured  by  the  more  vivid  splendor  of 
the  sun.*  From  such  observations  we  are  led  to  conclude, 
that  the  globe  on  which  we  tread  is  suspended  in  empty  space 
— is  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  the  celestial  vault — and  that 
the  whole  sphere  of  the  heavens  has  an  apparent  motion  round 

^  This  is  put  beyond  all  doubt,  by  the  invention  of  the  telescope ;  by 
which  instrument,  adapted  to  an  equatorial  motion,  we  are  enabled  to  see 
many  of  the  stars  even  at  noon-day.  The  Author  of  this  work,  about 
eleven  years  ago,  made  a  number  of  observations,  by  means  of  an  Equa- 
torial telescope,  to  determine  the  following  particulars  : — What  stars  and 
planets  may  be  conveniently  seen  in  the  day-time,  when  the  sun  is  above 
the  horizon  ?  What  degrees  of  magnifying  power  are  requisite  for  distin- 
guishing them?  How  near  their  conjunction  with  the  sun  they  may  be 
seen ; — and,  whether  the  diminution  of  the  aperture  of  the  telescape,  or 
the  increase  of  magnifying  power,  conduces  most  to  render  a  star  or  planet 
visible  in  day-light.  The  results  of  several  hundreds  of  observations  on 
these  points,  accompanied  with  some  original  deductions  and  remarks,  are 
inserted  in  "  Nicholson's  Philosophical  Journal,"  for  C>ctober,  1813,  vol.  36, 
p.  109 — 128.  The  following  are  some  of  the  results  which  were  deduced 
from  the  observations : — That  a  star  of  the  first  magnitude  may  be  dis- 
tinguished at  any  time  of  the  day,  with  a  magnifying  power  of  30  times, 
but  that  a  higher  magnifying  power  is  preferable — That  most  of  the  stars 
of  the  second  magnitude  may  be  seen  with  a  power  of  100  :  and  with  a 
power  of  60  times,  when  the  sun  is  not  much  more  than  two  hours  above 
the  horizon — That  the  planet  Jupiter,  when  not  within  30  or  40  degrees  of 
the  sun,  may  be  seen  with  a  power  of  15  times ; — and  that  Venus  may,  in 
most  instances,  be  seen  with  a  power  of  from  7  to  100  times,  and  upAvards 
— That  Jupiter  can  scarcely  be  distinguished  in  the  day-time,  when  within 
26  degrees  of  the  sun  ;  but  that  Venus  may  be  distinctly  perceived  near 
her  superior  conjunction,  when  only  1  degree  and  27  minutes  from  the  sun's 
margin  ;  and,  consequently,  may  be  visible  at  the  time  of  that  conjunction, 
when  her  geocentric  latitude  ec^uals  or  exceeds  1  degree  43  minutes — That 
she  may  be  perceived,  like  a  line,  slender  crescent,  within  35  hours  after 
passing  her  inferior  conjunction,  &c.  &c.  One  practical  purpose  to  which 
such  observations  on  Venus,  at  the  time  of  her  superior  conjunction,  may 
be  applied,  is,  to  determine  the  difference  (if  any)  between  her  polar  ai.d 
equatorial  diameters.  For,  it  is  only  at  that  conjunction  that  she  presents' 
to  the  earth  a  full  enlightened  hemisphere  ;  and  in  no  other  position  can  the 
measure  of  both  diameters  be  taken,  except  when  she  makes  a  transit 
across  the  suns  disk.  As  the  Earth,  Mars,  Jupiter,  and  Saturn,  are  found 
to  be  spheriods,  it  is  highly  probable  that  Venus  is  of  a  similar  figure  ;  but 
this  point  has  never  yet  been  ascertained  by  actual  observation.  See  also 
"  The  Edinburgh  Philos.  Journal,"  No.  5,  for  July  1820,  p.  191 ;  and  No. 
!3,  for  Julv,  1822—"  The  Scots  Mag."  for  Feb.  1814,  p.  84.— "Monthly 
Mag."  Feb.  1814,  and  August  1820,  p.  62, 


172  THE  CHRISTIAN  PHILOSOPHER. 

the  earth  every  twenty-four  hours.  Whether  this  motion  be 
real,  or  only  apparent,  must  be  determined  by  other  consider- 
ations. 

Such  general  views  of  the  nocturnal  heavens,  which  every 
common  observer  may  take,  have  a  tendency  to  expand  the 
mind,  and  to  elevate  it  to  the  contemplation  of  an  Invisible 
Power,  by  which  such  mighty  movements  are  conducted. 
Whether  we  consider  the  vast  concave,  with  all  its  radiant 
orbs,  moving  in  majestic  grandeur  around  our  globe,  or  the 
earth  itself  whirling  round  its  inhabitants  in  an  opposite  direc- 
tion— an  idea  of  sublimity,  and  of  Almighty  energy,  irresistibly 
forces  itself  upon  the  mind,  which  throws  completely  into  the 
shade  the  mightiest  efforts  of  human  power.  The  most  pow- 
ertul  mechanical  engines  that  were  ever  constructed  by  the 
agency  of  man,  can  scarcely  afford  us  the  least  assistance  in 
forming  a  conception  of  that  incomprehensible  Power,  which, 
with  unceasing  energy,  communicates  motion  to  revolving 
worlds.  And  ytU  such  is  the  apathy  with  which  the  heavens 
are  viewed  by  the  greater  part  of  mankind,  that  there  are 
thousands  who  have  occasionally  gazed  at  the  stars,  for  the 
space  of  fifty  years,  who  are  still  ignorant  of  the  fact,  that  they 
perform  an  apparent  diurnal  revolution  round  our  globe. 

.Again,  if  we  contemplate  the  heavens  with  some  attention, 
for  a  number  of  successive  nights,  we  shall  fmd,  that  by  far 
the  greater  part  of  the  stars  never  vary  their  positions  with 
respect  to  each  other.  If  we  observe  two  stars  at  a  certain 
apparent  distance  from  each  other,  either  north  or  south,  or  in 
any  other  direction,  they  will  appear  at  the  same  distance,  and 
m  the  same  relative  position  to  each  other,  the  next  evening, 
the  next  month,  and  the  next  year.  The  stars,  for  instance, 
which  form  the  sword  and  belt  of  Orion,  present  to  our  eye  the 
same  figure  and  relative  aspect,  during  the  whole  period  they 
are  visible  in  winter,  and  from  one  year  to  another ;  and  the 
same  is  the  case  with  all  the  fixed  stars  in  the  firmament.  On 
examming  the  sky  a  little  more  minutely,  however,  we  per- 
ceive certain  bodies  which  regularly  shift  their  positions. 
Sometimes  they  appear  to  move  towards  the  east,  sometimes 
towards  the  west,  and  at  other  times  seem  to  remain  in  a  sta- 
tionary position,  'i  he^e  bodies  have  obtained  the  name  ot 
planets,  or  wandering  stars  ;  and,  in  our  latitude,  are  most 
frequently  seen,  either  in  the  eastern  and  western,  or  in  the 
southern  pa^is  of  the  heavens.  Ten  of  these  planetary  orbs 
have  been  discovered  ;  six  of  ^hieh  are,  for  the  most  part, 
invisible  to  the  naked  eye.  By  a  careful  examination  of  the 
motions  of  these  bodies,  and  their  different  aspects,  astrono 


ASTROI^OMY.  i7S 

imers  have  determined,  that  they  all  move  round  the  sun  as  the 
•centre  of  their  motions,  and  form^  along  with  the  earth  and 
several  smaller  globes,  one  grand  and  harmonious  system^ 
This  assemblage  of  planetary  bodies  js  generally  termed  the 
Solar  System,  of  which  I  shall  now  eiTdeavor  to  exhibit  a  brief 
outline. 

THE    SOLAR    SYSTEM. 

Of  this  system,  the    sun  is  the  centre  and  the  animating 
principle,  and  by  far  the  largest  body  that  exists  within  its 
limits.      The  first  thing  that   strikes  the  mind  when  contem- 
plating this  glorious  orb,  is  its  astonishing  magnitude.     This 
vast  globe  is  found  to  be  about  880,000  miles  in  diameter,  and, 
consequently,  contains  a   mass   of  matter  equal  to    thirteen 
hundred  thousand  globes  of  the  size  of  the  earth.     Were  its 
central  parts  placed  adjacent  to   the  surface  of  the  earth,,  its 
circumference  would  reach  two  hundred  thousand  miles  beyoyd 
the   moon's  orbit,  on  every  side,  filling  a   cubical  space  of 
681,472,000,000,000,000  miles.     If  it  would  require  18,000 
years  to  traverse  every  square  mile  on  the  earth's  surface,  at 
the  rate  of  30  miles  a-day,  (see  p.  35,)  it  would  require  more 
than  two  thousand  millions  of  years  to  pass  over  every  part  of  the 
sun's  surface,  at  the  same  rate.     Even  at  the  rate  of  90  miles 
a-day  it  would  require  more  than  80  years  to  go  round  its  cir- 
cumference.     Of  a  body  so  vast  in  its  dimensions,  the  human 
mind,  with  all  its  efforts,  can  form  no  adequate  conception.    It 
appears  an  extensive  universe  in  itself;  and,  although  no  other 
body  existed  within  the  range  of  infinite  space,  this  globe  alone 
would  afford  a  powerful  demonstration  of  the  Omnipotence  of 
the  Creator.     Were  the  sun  a  hollow  sphere,  surrounded  by 
an  external  shell,  and  a  luminous  atmosphere  ;   were  this  shell 
perforated  with  several  hundreds  of  openings  into  the  internal 
part ;  v/ere  a  globe  as  large  as  the  earth  placed  at  its  centre, 
and  another   globe  as  large   as   the  moon,  and  at  the   same 
distance  from  the  centre  as   the    moon  is  from   us,  to   re- 
j  volve  round  the  central  globe, — it  would  present  to  the  view 
I  a  universe  as  splendid  and  glorious  as  that  which  now  appears 
I  to  the  vulgar  eye, — a  universe  as  large  and  extensive  as  the 
I  whole  creation  was  conceived  to  be,  by  our  ancestors,  in  the 
1  infancy  of  astronomy.     And  who  can  tell,  but  that  Almighty 
I  Being,  who  has  not  left  a  drop  of  water  in  a  stagnant  pool 
i  without  its  inhabitants,  has  arranged  a  number  of  worlds  withiw. 
the  capacious  circuit  v{^  the  sun,  and  peopled  them  with  intelli- 
'  ;gent  beings  in  the  first   stages  of  their  existence,  to  remain 
afeere  for  a  certain  period,  till  Aey  be  prepared  for  being  trans- 
it 


174  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

ported  to  a  more  expansive  sphere  of  existence  ?  It  is  easy  to 
conceive,  that  enjoyments  as  exquisite,  and  a  range  of  thoughts 
as  ample  as  have  ever  yet  been  experienced  by  the  majority  of 
the  inhabitants  of  our  world,  might  be  afforded  to  myriads  of 
beings  thus  placed  at  the  centre  of  this  magnificent  luminary. 
This  supposition  is,  at  least,  as  probable  as  that  of  the  cele- 
brated Dr.  Herschel,  who  supposed  that  the  exterior  surface 
of  the  sun  was  peopled  with  inhabitants.  For,  if  this  were  the 
case,  the  range  ofvie,w  of  these  inhabitants  would  be  confined 
within  the  limits  of  two  or  three  hundred  miles,  and  no  celes- 
tial body,  but  an  immense  blaze  of  light,  would  be  visible  in 
their  hemisphere.  Such  is  the  variety  which  appears  among 
the  works  of  God,  and  such  is  the  diversity  of  situations  in 
which  sensitive  beings  are  placed,  that  we  dare  not  pronounce 
it  impossible  that  both  these  suppositions  maybe  realized. 

Though  the  sun  seems  to  perform  a  daily  circuit  around  our 
globe,  he  may  be  said,  in  this  respect,  to  be  fixed  and  immova- 
ble. This  motion  is  not  real,  but  only  apparent,  and  is  owing 
to  the  globe  on  which  we^  are  placed,  moving  round  its  axis 
from  west  to  east ;  just  as  the  objects  on  the  bank  of  a  river 
seem  to  move  in  a  contrary  direction,  when  we  are  sailing 
along  its  stream  in  a  steam-boat.  The  only  motion  which  is 
found  to  exist  in  the  sun  is,  a  motion  of  rotation,  like  that  ot'  a 
globe  or  ball  twirled  round  a  pivot  or  axis,  which  is  performed  in 
the  space  of  25  days  and  10  hours.  This  motion  has  been  as- 
certained by  means  of  a  variety  of  dark  spots  which  are  discov- 
ered by  the  telescope  on  the  sun's  disk  ;  which  first  appear  on 
his  eastern  limb,  and,  after  a  period  of  about  thirteen  days,  dis- 
appear on  his  western,  and,  after  a  similar  period,  re-appear  on 
his  eastern  edge.  These  spots  are  various,  both  in  number, 
in  magnitude,  and  in  shape  :  sometimes  40  or  50,  and  some- 
times only  one  or  two  are  visible,  and  at  other  times  the  sun 
appears  entirely  without  spots.  Most  of  them  have  a  very 
dark  nucleus,  or  central  part,  surrounded  by  an  umbra,  or 
fainter  shade.  Some  of  the  spots  are  as  large  as  would  cover 
the  whole  continent  of  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa,  others  have 
been  observed  of  the  size  of  the  whole  surface  of  the  earth  ; 
and  one  was  seen,  in  the  year  1779,  which  was  computed  to 
be  more  than  fifty  thousand  miles  in  diameter. 

With  regard  to  the  nature  of  this  globe — it  appears  highly 
probable,  from  the  observations  of  Dr.  Herschel,  that  the  sun 
is  a  solid  and  opaque  body,  surrounded  with  luminous  clouds 
which  float  in  the  solar  atmosphere,  and  that  the  dark  nucleus 
of  the  spots  is  the  opaque  body  of  the  sun  appearing  through 
occasional  openings  in  this  atmosphere.     The  height  of  the 


li^ii 


ASTRONOMY.-  175 

atmosphere,  he  computes  to  be  not  less  than  1843,  nor  more 
than  2765  miles,  consisting  of  two  regions  ;  that  nearest  the 
sun  being  opaque,  and  probably  resembling  the  clouds  of  our 
earth ;  the  outermost  emitting  vast  quantities  of  light,  and 
forming  the  apparent  luminous  globe  we  behold. 

The  sun  is  the  grand  source  of  light  and  heat,  both  to  the 
earth  and  to  all  the  other  planetary  bodies.  The  heat  he  dif- 
fuses animates  every  part  of  our  sublunary  system,  and  all 
that  variety  of  coloring  which  adorns  the  terrestrial  landscape, 
is  produced  by  his  rays.  It  has  been  lately  discovered,  that 
the  rays  of  light,  and  the  rays  of  heat,  or  ccdoric,  are  distinct 
from  each  other  ;  for,  it  can  be  demonstrated,  that  some  rays 
from  the  sun  produce  heat,  which  have  no  power  of  commu- 
nicating light  or  color.  The  greatest  heat  is  found  in  the  red 
rays,  the  least  in  the  violet  rays  ;  and  in  a  space  beyond  the 
red  rays,  where  there  is  no  light,  the  temperature  is  greatest. 
The  rays  of  the  sun  have  also  been  found  to  produce  different 
chemical  effects.  The  white  muriate  of  silver  is  blackened 
in  the  violet  ray,  in  the  space  of  15  seconds,  though  the  red 
will  not  produce  the  same  effect  in  less  than  20  minutes. 
Phosphorus  is  kindled  in  the  vicinity  of  the  red  ray,  and  ex- 
tinguished in  the  vicinity  of  the  violet.  The  solar  light,  there- 
fore, consists  of  three  different  orders  of  rays,  one  producing 
color^  a  second  producing  heat,  and  a  third  chemical  effects. 
Euler  has  computed  that  the  hght  of  the  sun  is  equal  to  6500 
candles  at  a  foot  distance,  while  the  moon  would  be  as  one 
candle  at  7^  feet;  Venus  at  421  feet ;  and  Jupiter  at  1320 
feet. — That  this  immense  luminary  appears  so  small  to  our 
eyes,  is  owing  to  its  vast  distance,  which  is  no  less  than 
ninety-five  millions  of  miles.  Some  faint  idea  of  this  distance 
may  be  obtained,  by  considering,  that  a  steam  boat  moving  at 
the  rate  of  200  miles  a-day,  would  require  Umpteen  hundred 
years  before  it  could  traverse  the  space  which  intervenes  be- 
tween us  and  the  sun. 

"Hail  sacred  source  of  inexhausted  light! 

Prodigious  instance  of  creating  might ! 

His  distance  man's  imagination  foils  ; 

Numbers  will  scarce  avail  to  count  the  miles. 

As  swift  as  thought  he  darts  his  radiance  round 

To  distant  worlds,  his  system's  utmost  bound." — Browk. 

The  Planet  Mercury. — Mercury  is  the  nearest  planet 
to  the  sun  that  has  yet  been  discovered.  He  is  about  37  mil- 
lions of  miles  distant  from  the  sun,  and  revolves  around  him  in 
88  days.  His  diameter  is  about  3200  miles.  Before  the 
discovery  of  the  four  new  planets,  Ceres,  Pallas,  Juno,  and 


176  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

Vesta,  iii  the  begiiiiiiiig  of  the  present  century,  this  globe  was 
considered  as  the  smallest  primary  planet  in  the  system.  Hi& 
surlace,  however,  contains  above  32  millions  of  square  miles, 
which  is  not  much  less  than  all  the  habitable  parts  of  our  globe.. 
On  account  of  his  nearness  to  the  sun,  he  is  seldom  seen  by 
the  naked  eye  ;  being  always  near  that  quarter  of  the  heavens 
where  the  sun  appears  ;  and  therefore,,  few  discoveries  have 
been  made  on  his  surface,  by  the  telescope.  M.  Schroeter 
concludes,  from  certain  observations,  that  this  planet  revolves 
round  its  axis  in  24  hours  and  five  minutes.  The  sun  will 
appear 'to  an  inhabitant  of  Mercury  seven  times  larger  than  to 
an  iniiabita.nt  of  the  earth ;  and,  if  the  degree  of  heat  be  in 
proportion  to  a  planet's  nearness  to  the  sun,  the  heat  in  this 
planet  will  be  seven  times  greater  than  on  the  surface  of  our 
globe  ;  and,  consequently,  were  the  earth  placed  in  the  same 
position,  all  the  water  on  its  surface  would  boil,  and  soon  be 
turned  into  vapor.  But  the  All-wise  Creator  has,  doubtless, 
attempered  the  surface  of  this  globe,  and  the  constitution  of 
the  beings  that  may  occupy  it,  to  the  situation  in  which  they 
aie  placed.* 

Venus,  the  next  planet  in  order  from  the  sun,  revolves- 
around  him  in  224  days,  at  the  distance  of  68  millions  of  miles, 
and  its  diameter  is  about  seven  thousand  seven  hundred  miles, 
or  nearly  the  size  of  the  earth  ;  and  it  turns  round  its  axis  in 
the  space  of  23  hours  and  20  minutes.  This  planet  is  the 
most  brilhant  orb  which  appears  in  our  nocturnal  heavens,  and 
is  usually  distinguished  by  the  name  of  the  morning  and  eve- 
ning star.     When  it  approaches  nearest  to  the  earth,  it  is  about 

*  From  a  variety  of  facts  which  have  been  observed  in  relation  to  the 
production  of  caloric,  it  does  not  appear  probable,  that  the  degree  of  heat 
on  the  surfaces  of  the  different  planets  is  inversely  proportional  to  the 
squares  of  their  respective  distances  from  the  sun.  It  is  more  probable, 
that  it  depends  chiefly  on  the  distribution  of  the  substance  of  caloric  on  the 
surfaces,  and  throughout  the  atmospheres  of  these  bodies — in  different 
quantities,  according  to  the  different  situations  they  occupy  in  the  solar 
system  ;  and  that  these  different  quantities  of  caloric  are  put  into  action 
by  the  influence  of  the  solaj-  rays,  so  as  to  produce  that  degree  of  sensible 
heat  requisite  for  each  respective  planetary  globe..  On  this  hypothesis — 
which  is  corroborated  by  a  great  variety  of  facts  and  experiments — there 
may  be  no  aiore  sensible  heat  felt  on  the  surface  of  the  planet  Mercury, 
than  on  the  surface  of  Herschel,  although  one  of  these  bodies  is  nearly  50 
times  nearer  the  sun  than  the  other..  We  have  only  to  suppose  that  a 
small  quantity  of  caloric  exists  in  Mercury,  and  a  larger  quantity  in  Her- 
schel, proportionate  to  his  distance  from  the  centre  of  the  system.  On 
this  ground,  we  have  no  reason  to  believe,  either  that  the  planets  nearest 
the  sun  are  parched  with  excessive  heat,  or  that  those  that  are  most  dis- 
tant are  exposed  to  all  the  rigors  of  insufferable  cold,  or  that  the  different 
degrees  of  temperature  w^hich  may  be  found  in  these  bodies,  render  therui 
imfit  for  being  the  abodes  of  sensitive  and  intellectual  beings. 


ASTRONOMY.  177 

27  millions  of  miles  distant ;  and,  at  its  greatest  distance,  it  is 
no  less  than  163  millions  of  miles  from  the  earth.  Were  the 
whole  of  its  enlightened  surface  turned  towards  the  earth, 
when  it  is  nearest,  it  would  exhibit  a  light  and  brilliancy, 
twenty-live  times  greater  than  it  generally  does,  and  appear 
like  a  small  brilliant  moon  ;  but,  at  that  time,  its  dark  hemi- 
sphere is  turned  towards  our  globe.  Both  Yenus  and  Mer- 
cury, when  viewed  by  a  telescope,  appear  to  pass  successively 
through  all  the  shapes  and  appearances  of  the  moon  ;  some- 
times assuming  a  gibbous  phase,  and  at  other  times,  the  form 
of  a  half-moon,  or  that  of  a  crescent ;  which  proves,  that  they 
are  dark  bodies  in  themselves,  and  derive  their  light  from  the 
sun.  The  most  distinct  and  beautiful  views  of  Venus,  espe- 
cially when  she  appears  as  a  crescent,  are  to  be  obtained  in 
the  day  time^  by  means  of  an  equatorial  telescope. — From  a 
variety  of  observations  which  the  author  has  made  with  this 
instrument,  it  has  been  found  that  Yenus  may  be  seen  every 
clear  day  without  interruption,  during  a  period  of  583  days, 
with  the  occasional  exception  of  13  days,  in  one  case,  and 
only  3  days  in  another — a  circumstance  which  cannot  be 
affirmed  of  any  other  celestial  body,  the  sun  only  excepted.* 
M.  Schroeter  affirms,  that  he  has  discovered  mountains  on  the 
surface  of  this  globe,  one  of  which  is  10,  another  11,  and  a 
third  22  miles  high.     It  appears  also  to  be  encompassed  with 

*  See  Edin.  Phil.  Journ.  No.  V.  July,  1820,  and  No.  XIII.  July,  1822. 
— I  have  found,  from  observation,  that  this  planet  may  be  seen  in  the  day 
time,  when  only  1"  43'  from  the  sun's  centre  ;  and,  consequently,  when 
lis  geocentric  latitude  at  the  lime  of  the  superior  conjunction  exceeds  that 
quantity,  it  may  be  distinctly  seen  during  the  whole  period  of  583  days, 
exceptiiig  about  35  hours  before  and  after  its  inferior  conjunction. — It  is 
well  known  to  astronomers,  that  there  has  been  a  difference  of  opinion 
with  respect  to  the  period  of  the  rotation  of  this  planet.  Cassini,  from  ob- 
servations on  a  bright  spot  which  advanced  20  degrees,  in  24  hours,  34 
minutes,  determined  the  tmie  of  its  rotation  to  be  23  hours  and  20  minutes. 
On  the  other  hand,  Bianchini,  from  similar  observations,  concluded,  thai 
its  diurnal  period  was  24  days  and  8  hours.  The  difficulty  of  deciding 
between  these  two  opinions,  arises  from  the  short  time  in  which  observa- 
tions can  be  made  on  this  planet,  either  before  sun-rise,  or  after  sun-set, 
which  prevents  us  from  tracing,  with  accuracy,  the  progressive  motion  of 
its  spots  for  a  sufficient  length  of  time.  And,  although  an  observer  should 
mark  the  position  of  the  spots,  at  the  same  hour,  on  two  succeeding  eve- 
nings, and  find  they  had  moved  forward  about  20  degi-ees  in  24  hours,  he 
would  still  be  at  a  loss  to  determine,  whether  they  had  moved  20  degrees 
in  all,  since  the  preceding  observation,  or  had  finished  a  revolution,  and  20 
degrees  more. — In  "  Nicholson's  Philosophical  Journal,"  vol.  36,  I  endea- 
voured to  show  how  this  point  may  be  determined  by  observations  made 
on  Venus  in  the  day  time,  by  which,  in  certain  cases,  the  progressive  mo- 
tion of  her  spots  might  be  traced,  without  interruption,  for  12  hours  or 
more,  which  would  completely  settle  the  period  of  rotation. 

15* 


178  THE    CHRISTIAN    PlIILOSOPriER. 

an  atmosphere,  the  densest  part  of  which  is  about  16,000  feet 
high.  About  twice  in  the  course  of  a  century,  this  planet 
appears  to  pass,  Uke  a  dark  spot,  across  the  sun's  disk.  This 
is  termed  the  transit  of  Venus.  The  last  transit  happened 
June  3,  1769  ;  the  next  will  happen  on  December  8,  1874,. 
which  will  be  invisible  in  Europe.  Another  will  happen  on 
the  6th  December,  1882,  which  will  be  partly  visible  in  Great 
Britain. 

The  Earth  is  the  next  planet  in  the  system.  It  moves 
round  the  sun  in  365  days,.  5  hours,  and  49  minutes,  at  the 
distance  of  95  millions  of  miles,  and  round  its  axis  in  23  hours,. 
66  minutes,  4  seconds.  The  former  is  called  its  anmial,  and 
the  latter,  its  diurnal  motion.  That  the  earth  is,  in  reality,  a 
moving  body,  is  a  fact  which  can  no  longer  be  called  in  ques- 
tion ;  it  is  indeed  susceptible  of  the  clearest  demonstration. 
But  my  limits  will  not  permit  to  enter  into  a  detail  of  the  argu- 
ments by  which  it  is  supported.  I  have  already  adverted  to 
one  consideration,  from  which  its  diurnal  rotation  may  be  in- 
ferred. (See  pp.  47,  48.)  Either  the  earth  moves  round 
its  axis  every  day,  or  the  whole  universe  moves  round  it  in  the 
same  time.  To  suppose  the  latter  case  to  be  the  fact,  would 
involve  a  reflection  on  the  wisdom  of  its  Almighty  Author,  and 
would  form  the  only  exception  that  we  know,  to  that  beautiful 
propoi'tion,  harmony,  and  simplicity,  which  appear  in  all  the 
works  of  Nature.  Were  it  possible  to  construct  a  machine  as 
large  as  the  city  of  London,  and  to  apply  to  it  mechanical 
powers  sufficient  to  make  it  revolve  on  an  axis,  so  as  to  carry 
round  a  furnace  for  the  purpose  of  roasting  a  joint  of  mutton, 
suspended  in  the  centre  of  its  motion — while  we  might  admire 
the  ingenuity  and  the  energies  displayed  in  its  construction — 
all  mankind  would  unite  in  condemning  it  as  a  display  of  con« 
summate  folly.  But  such  an  extravagant  piece  of  machinery 
would  not  be  half  so  preposterous  as  to  suppose,  that  the  vast 
universe  is  daily  revolving  around  our  little  globe,  and  that  all 
the  planetary  motions  have  an  immediate  respect  to  it.  And 
shall  we  dare  to  ascribe  to  Him  who  is  "  the  only  wise  God," 
contrivances  which  we  would  pronounce  to  be  the  perfection 
of  folly  in  mankind  l  It  is  recorded  of  the  Astronomer  Al- 
phonsus,  King  of  Castile,  who  lived  in  the  13th  century,  that, 
after  having  studied  the  Ptolemaic  System,  which  supposes  the 
earth  at  rest  in  the  centre  of  the  universe,^  he  uttered  the  fol- 
lowing impious  sentence  :  "  If  I  had  been  of  God's  privy 
council,  when  he  made  the  world,  I  would  have  advised  him 
better."  So  that  false  conceptions  of  the  System  of  Nature, 
lead  to  erroneous  notions  of  that  adorable  Being  who  is  pos- 


ASTRONOMY.  179 

sess^d  of  infinite  Perfection.  We  find  that  bodies  much  larger 
than  the  earth  have  a  similar  rotation.  The  planet  Jupiter,  a 
globe  295,000  miles  in  circumference,  moves  round  his  axis  in 
less  than  ten  hours  ;  and  all  the  other  planetary  bodies,  on 
which  spots  have  been  discovered,  are  found  to  have  a  diurnal 
motion.  Besides,  it  is  found  to  be  a  universal  law  of  nature, 
that  smaller  globes  revolve  round  laroer  :  but  there  is  no  ex- 
ample  in  the  universe,  of  a  larger  body  revolving  around  a 
smaller.  The  moon  revolves  around  the  earth,  but  she  is 
much  smaller  than  the  earth  ;  the  moons  which  move  around 
Jupiter,  Saturn,  and  Herschel,  are  all  less  than  their  primaries^ 
and  the  planets  which  perform  their  revolutions  around  the  sun 
are  much  less  than  that  central  luminary. 

With  regard  to  the  annual  revolution  of  the  earth,  if  such  a 
motion  did  not  exist,  the  planetary  system  would  present  a 
scene  of  inextricable  confusion.  The  planets  would  some- 
times move  backwards,  sometimes  forwards,  and,  at  other 
times,  remain  stationary  ;  and  would  describe  looped  curves, 
so  anomalous  and  confused,  that  no  man  in  his  senses  could 
view  the  All-wise  Creator  as  the  author  of  so  much  confusion. 
But,  by  considering  the  earth  as  revolving  in  an  orbit  between 
Venus  and  Mars,  (which  all  celestial  observations  completely 
demonstrate,)  all  the  apparent  irregularities  of  the  planetary 
motions  are  completely  solved  and  accounted  for ;  and  the 
Solar  System  presents  a  scene  of  beauty,  harmony  and  gran- 
deur, combined  with  a  simplicity  of  design  which  characterizes 
all  the  works  of  Omnipotence. 

The  Moon. — Next  to  the  sun,  the  moon  is  to  us  the  most 
interesting  of  all  the  celestial  orbs.  She  is  the  constant  at- 
tendant of  the  earth,  and  revolves  around  it,  in  27  days,  8 
hours  ;  but  the  period  from  one  new  or  full  moon  to  another, 
is  about  29  days,  12  hours.  She  is  the  nearest  of  all  the 
heavenly  bodies  ;  being  only  about  two  hundred  and  forty 
thousand  miles  distant  from  the  earth.  She  is  much  smaller 
than  the  earth  ;  being  only  2,180  miles  in  diameter.  Her  sur- 
face, when  viewed  with  a  telescope,  presents  an  interesting 
and  a  variegated  aspect ;  being  diversified  with  mountains, 
valleys,  rocks,  and  plains,  in  every  variety  of  form  and  posi- 
tion. Some  of  these  mountains  form  long  and  elevated  ridges, 
resembling  the  chains  of  the  Alps  and  the  Andes  ;  while 
others,  of  a  conical  form,  rise  to  a  great  height,  from  the  mid- 
dle of  level  plains,  somewhat  resembling  the  Peak  of  Tene- 
rifFe.  But  the  most  singular  feature  of  the  moon,  is,  those  cir- 
cular ridges  and  cavities  which  diversify  every  portion  of  her 
surface.     A  range   of  mountains  of  a  circular  form,  rising 


ISO  THE   CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

three  or  four  miles  above  the  level  of  the  adjacent  district&v 
surrounds,  like  a  mighty  rampart,  an  extensive  plain  ;  and,  in 
the  middle  of  this  phiiu  or  cavity,  an  insulated  conical  hill 
rises  to  a  considerable  elevation.  Several  hundreds  of  these 
circular  plains,  most  of  vvhich  are  considerably  below  the  level 
of  the  surrounding  country,  may  be  perceived,  wkh  a  good 
telescope,  on  every  region  of  the  lunar  surface.  They  are  of 
all  dimensions,  from  two  or  three  miles  to  forty  miles  in  dia- 
meter ;  and,  if  they  be  adorned  with  verdure,  they  must  pre- 
sent to  the  view  of  a  spectator,  placed  among  them,  a  more 
variegated,  romantic,  and  sublime  scenery  than  is  to  be  found 
on  the  surface  of  our  globe.  An  idea  of  some  of  these  scenes 
may  be  acquired  by  'conceiving  a  plain  of  about  a  hundred 
miles  in  circumference,  encircled  with  a  range  of  mountains, 
of  various  forms,  three  miles  in  perpendicular  height,  and  hav- 
ing a  mountain  near  the  centre,  whose  top  reaches  a  mile  and 
a  half  above  the  level  of  the  plain.  From  the  top  of  this  cen- 
tral mountain,  the  whole  plain,  with  aM  its  variety  of  objects, 
would  be  distinctly  visible  ;  and  the  view  would  appear  to  be 
bounded  on  all  sides  by  a  lofty  amphitheatre  of  mountains,  in 
every  diversity  of  shape,  rearing  their  summits  to  the  sky. 
From  the  summit  of  the  circular  ridge,  the  conical  hill  in  the 
centre,  the  opposite  circular  range,  the  plain  below,  and  some 
of  the  adjacent  plains,  which  encompass  the  exterior  ridge  of 
the  mountains,  would  form  another  variety  of  view  ; — and  a 
third  variety  would  be  obtained  from  the  various  aspects  of  the 
central  mountain,  and  the  surrounding  scenery,  as  viewed  from 
the  plains  below. 

The  Lunar  mountains  are  of  all  sizes,  from  a  furlong  to  five 
miles  in  perpendicular  elevation.  Certain  luminous  spots, 
which  have  been  occasionally  seeu  on  the  dark  side  of  the 
moon^  seem  to  demonstrate  that  fire  exists  in  this  planet.  Dr. 
Herschel,  and  several  other  astronomers  suppose,  that  they 
are  volcanoes  in  a  state  of  eruption.  It  would  be  a  more 
pleasing  idea,  and  perhaps  as  nearly  corresponding  to  fact,  to 
suppose,  that  these  phenomena  are  owing  to  some  occasional 
splendid  illuminations,  produced  by  the  Lunar  inhabitants, 
during  their  long  nights.  Such  a  scene  as  the  burning  of  Mos- 
cow, the  conflagration  of  an  extensive  forest,  or  the  splendid 
illumination  of  a  large  city  with  gas-lights,  might  present  simi- 
lar appearances  to  a  spectator  in  the  moon. — The  bright  spots 
of  the  moon  are  the  mountainous  regions  :  the  dark  spots  are 
the  plains,  or  more  level  parts  of  her  surface.  There  may 
probably  be  rivers  or  small  lakes  on  this  planet ;  but  there  are 
no   seas  or  large  collections  of  water.     It   appears  highly 


ASTRONOMY.  181 

probable,  from  the  o])servations  of  Sehroeter,  that  the  moon  is^ 
encompassed  with  an  atmosphere  ;  but  no  clouds,  rain,  nor 
snow  seem  to  exist  in  it.  The  iUuminating  power  of  the  h^ht 
derived  from  the  moon,  according  to  the  experiments  made  by 
Professor  Leshe^is  about  the  one  hundred  and  Jiftij  thousandth 
•part  of  the  illuminating  power  of  the  sun.  According  to  the 
experiments  of  M.  Boguer,  it  is  only  as  1  to  300,000. 

The  Moon  always  presents  the  same  face  to  us  ;  which 
proves,  that  she  revolves  round  her  axis  in  the  same  time  that 
she  revolves  round  the  earth.  As  this  orb  derives  its  light 
from  the  sun,  and  reflects  a  portion  of  it  upon  the  earth,  so  the 
earth  performs  the  same  office  to  the  moon.  A  spectator  on 
the  lunar  surface  would  behold  the  earth,  like  a  luminous  orb,, 
suspended  in  the  vault  of  heaven,  presenting  a  surface  about 
13  times  larger  than  the  moon  does  to  us,  and  appearing  some- 
times gibbous,  sometimes  horned,  and  at  other  times  with  a 
round  full  face.  The  light  which  the  earth  reflects  upon  the 
dark  side  of  the  moon  may  be  distinctly  perceived  by  a  com- 
mon telescope,  from  three,  to  six  or  eight  days  after  the 
change. — The  lunar  sui-face  contains  about  15  millions  of 
square  miles,  and  is,  therefore,  capable  of  containing  a  popula- 
tion equal  to  that  of  our  globe,  allowing  only  about  53  inhabit- 
ants to  every  square  mile.  That  this  planet  is  inhabited  by 
sensitive  and  intelligent  beings,  there  is  every  reason  to  con- 
clude, from  a  consideration  of  the  sublime  scenery  with  which 
its  surface  is  adorned,  and  of  the  general  beneficence  of  the 
Creator,  who  appears  to  have  left  no  large  portion  of  his  ma- 
terial creation  without  animated  existences  ;  and  it  is  highly 
probable,  that  direct  proofs  of  the  moon's  being  inhabited  may 
hereafter  be  obtained,  when  all  the  varieties  on  her  surface  shall 
have  been  more  minutely  explored.* 

The  Planet  Mars. — Next  to  the  earth  and  moon,  the 
planet  Mars  performs  his  revolution  round  the  sun,  in  one 
year  and  ten  months,  to  the  distance  of  145  millions  of  miles. 
His  diameter  is  about  4,200  miles,  and  he  is  distinguished 
from  all  the  other  planets,  by  his  ruddy  appearance,  which  is 
owing  to  a  dense  atmosphere  with  which  he  is  environed. 
With  a  good  telescope,  his  surface  appears  diversified  by  a  va- 
riety of  spots  ;  by  the  motion  of  which  it  is  found,  that  he  turns 
round  his  axis  in  24  hours  and  40  minutes.  The  inclination 
of  his  axis  to  the  plane  of  his  orbit  being  about  28°  42^,  the 
days  and  nights,  and  the  different  seasons  in  this  planet,  will 
bear  a  considerable  resemblance  to  those  we  experience  in  owt 

*  See  Appendix,  No^IIL. 


1S2  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

terrestrial  sphere.*  At  his  nearest  approach  to  the  earth,  his 
distance  from  us  is  about  50  milUons  of  miles  ;  and,  at  his 
o-reatest  distance,  he  is  about  240  millions  of  miles  ;  so  that . 
in  the  former  case  he  appears  nearly  25  times  larger  than  in 
the  latter.  To  a  spectator  in  this  planet,  our  earth  will  appear, 
alternately,  as  a  morning  and  evening  star,  and  will  exhibit  all 
the  phase's  of  the  moon,  just  as  Venus  does  to  us,  but  with  a 
less  deirree  of  apparent  magnitude  and  splendor.  xY  luminous 
zone  has  been  observed  about  the  poles  of  Mars,  which  is 
subject  to  successive  changes.  Dr.  Herschel  supposes  that 
it  is  produced  by  the  reflection  of  the  sun's  hght  from  his  frozen 
retnons,  and  that  the  melting  of  these  masses  of  polar  ice  is  the 
cause  of  the  variation  in  its  magnitude  and  appearance.  This 
planet  moves,  in  its  orbit,  at  the  rate  of  fifty-five  thousand  miles 
an  hour. 

The  new  Planets. — Between  the  orbs  of  Mars  and  Ju- 
piter, four  planetary  bodies  have  been  lately  discovered,  ac- 
companied with  circumstances  somewhat  different  from  those 
of  the  other  bodies  which  compose  our  system.  They  are 
named  Ceres,  Pallas,  Juno,  and  Vesta.  The  planet  Ceres 
was  discovered  at  Palermo,  in  Sicily,  by  M.  Piazzi,  on  the 
first  day  of  the  present  century.  It  is  of  a  ruddy  color,  and 
appears  about  the  size  of  a  star  of  the  8th  magnitude,  and  is 
consequently  invisible  to  the  naked  eye.  It  performs  its  revo- 
lution in  4  years  and  7  months,  at  the  distance  of  260  millions 
of  miles  from  the  sun,  and  is  reckoned,  by  some  astronomers, 
to  be  about  1624  miles  in  diameter,  or  about  half  the  diameter 
of  Mercury.  It  appears  to  be  surrounded  with  a  large  dense 
atmosphere. — Pallas  was  discovered  the  following  year,  name- 
ly, on  the  28th  of  March,  1802,  by  Ur.  Olbers  of  Bremen. 
It  is  supposed  to  be  about  2000  miles  in  diameter,  or  nearly 
the  size  of  the  moon.  It  revolves  about  the  sun  in  4  years 
and  7  months,  or  nearly  in  the  same  time  as  Ceres,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  266  millions  of  miles  ;  and  is  surrounded  with  a 
nebulosity  or  atmosphere,  above  400  miles  in  height,  similar 
to  that  of  Ceres.  The  planet  Juno  was  discovered  on  the  1st 
September,  1804,  by  Mr.  Harding  of  Bremen.  Its' mean 
distance  from  the  sun  is  about  253  millions  of  miles  ;  its  revo- 
tion  is  completed  in  4  years  and  130  days,  and  its  diameter  is 
computed  to  be  about  1425  miles.     It  is  free  from  the  nebu- 

+  The  inclination  of  the  earth's  axis  to  tlie  eclip'ic,  oi-,  in  other  words, 
to  the  plane  of  its  annual  orbit,  is  23  degrees  and  28  minutes,  which  is  the 
cause  of  the  diversity  of  seasons,  and  of  the  different  length  of  days  and 
nights.  Were  the  axis  of  the  earth  perpendicular  to  its  orbit,  as  is  the  case 
with  the  planet  Jupiter,  there  would  be  no  diversity  of  seasons,, 


ASTRONOMY.  183 

losity  which  siuTOunds  Pallas,  and  is  distinguished  from  all  the 
other  planets  by  the  great  eccentricity  of  its  orbit ;  being,  at 
its  least  distance  from  the  sun,  only  189  millions  of  miles,  and 
at  its  greatest  distance  316  millions. —  Vesta  was  discovered 
by  Dr.  Olbers  on  the  29th  March,  1807.     It  appears  like  a 
star  of  the  5th  or  6th  magnitude,  and  may  sometimes  be  dis- 
tinguished by  the   naked  eye.     Its  light  is  more  intense  and 
white  than  any  of  the  other  three,  and  it  is  not  surrounded  with 
any  nebulosity.     It  is  distant  from  the  sun  about  225  millions 
of  miles,  and  completes  its  revolution  in  3  years  and  240  days. 
Its  diameter  has  not  yet  been  accurately  ascertained  ;  but 
from  the  intensity  of  its  light,  and  other  circumstances,  it  is 
concluded,  that  it  exceeds  in  magnitude  both  Pallas  and  Juno. 
These  planetary  globes  present  to    our  view  a  variety  of 
anomalies  and  singularities,  which  appear  incompatible  with 
the  regularity,  proportion,  and  harmony  which  were  formerly 
supposed  to  characterize  the  arrangements  of  the  solar  sys- 
tem.— They  are  bodies  much  smaller  in  size  than  the  other 
planets — they  revolve  nearly  at  the  same  dUtances  from  the  sun, 
and  perform  their  revolutions  in  nearbj  the  same  periods — their 
orbits  are  much  more  eccentric^  and  have  a  much  greater  degree 
of  inclination  to  the  ecliptic,  than  those  of  the  old  planets — 
and,  what  is  altogether  singular,  (except  in  case  of  comets,) 
their  orbits  cross  each  other  ;   so  that  theie  is  a  possibiliiij  that 
two  of  these  bodies  might  happen  to  interfere,  and  to  strike 
each  other,  in  the  course  of  then*  revolutions.      The  orbit  of 
Ceres  crosses  the  orbit  of  Pallas.      Vesta  may  sometimes  be 
at  a  greater  distance  from  the  sun  than  either  Ceres,  Pallas  or 
Juno,  although  its  mean  distance  is  less  than  that  of  either  of 
them,  by  several  millions  of  miles  ;  so  that  the  orbit  of  \  esta 
crosses  the  orbits  of  all  the  other  three.    From  these  and  other 
circumstances,  it  has,  with  a  high  degree  of  probability,  been 
concluded — that  these  four  planets  are  the  fragments  of  a  large 
celestial  body  which  once  revolved  between  Mars  and  Ju- 
piter, and  which  had  been  burst  asunder  by  some  immense 
irruptive  force.     This  idea  seems  to  have  occurred  to  Dr. 
Olbers  after  he  had  discovered  the  planet  Pallas,  and  he  ima- 
gined that  other  fragments  might  possibly  exist.      He  con- 
cluded, that,  if  they  all  diverged  from  the  same  point,  "  they 
ought  to  have  two  common  points  of  reunion,  or  two  nodes  in 
opposite  regions  of  the  heavens,  through  which  all  the  plane- 
tary fragments  must  sooner  or  later  pass."      One  of  these 
nodes  he  found  to  be  in  the  constellation  Yirgo,  and  the  other 
in  the  Whale  ;  and  it  is  a  remarkable  coincidence,  that  it  was 
in  the  latter  of  these  regions  that  the  planet  Juno  was  dis€ov- 


184  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

ered  by  Mr.  Harding.  In  order  to  detect  the  remaining  frag- 
ments (if  any  existecl)  Dr.  Olbers  examined,  three  times  every 
year,  all  the  small  stars  in  Yirgo  and  the  Whale  ;  and  it  was 
actually  in  the  constellation  Yirgo,  that  he  discovered  the  planet 
Yesta.  It  is  not  unlikely  that  other  fragments  of  a  similar  de- 
scription may  be  discovered.  Dr.  Brewster  attributes  the  fall 
of  meteoric  stones*  to  the  smaller  fragments  of  these  bodies 
happening  to  come  within  the  sphere  of  the  earth's  attraction. 
His  ingenious  reasonings  on  this  subject,  and  in  support  of 
Dr.  Olbers'  hypothesis  above  stated,  may  be  seen  in  Edin. 
Eacy.  vol.  ii.  p.  641,  and  in  his  "  Supplementary  chapters  to 
Ferguson's  Astronomy." 

The  fact  to  which  I  have  now  adverted  seem  to  unfold  a  new 
scene  in  the  history  of  the  dispensations  of  the  Almighty,  and 
to  warrant  the  conclusion,  that  the  earth  is  not  the  only  globe 
in  the  universe  which  is  subject  to  physical  changes  and  moral 
revolutions. 

The  Planet  Jupiter.— This  planet  is  490  millions  of 
miles  distant  from  the  sun,  and  performs  its  annual  revolution 
in  nearly  twelve  of  our  years,  moving  at  the  rate  of  twenty- 
nine  thousand  miles  an  hour.  It  is  the  largest  planet  in  the 
solar  system  ;  being  89,000  miles  in  diameter,  or  about  four- 
teen hundred  times  larger  than  the  earth.  Its  motion  round 
its  axis  is  performed  in  nine  hours  and  fifty-six  minutes  ;  and, 
therefore,  the  portions  of  its  surface  about  the  equator,  move 
at  the  rate  28,000  miles  an  hour,  which  is  nearly  twenty-seven 
times  swifter  than  the  earth's  diurnal  rotation.  The  figure 
of  Jupiter  is  that  of  an  oblate  spheroid,  the  axis,  or  diameter 
passing  through  the  poles,  being  about  6000  miles  shorter 
than  that  passing  through  the  equator.     The  Earth,  Saturn, 

*  Meteoric  stones,  or,  what  are  generally  termed  aerolites,  are  stones 
which  sometimes  fall  from  the  upper  regions  of  the  atmosphere,  upon  the 
earth.  The  substance  of  which  they  are  composed  is,  for  the  most  part, 
metallic ;  but  the  ore  of  which  they  consist  is  not  to  be  found  i?i  the  same 
constituent  proportions  in  any  terrestrial  substances.  Their  fall  is  generally 
preceded  by  a  luminous  appearance,  a  hissing  noise,  and  a  loud  explosion ; 
and,  when 'found  immediately  after  their  descent,  ar-e  ahyays  hot.  Their 
size  differs  from  small  fragments,  of  inconsiderable  weight,  to  the  most 
ponderous  masses.  Some  of  the  largest  portions  of  these  stones  have  been 
found  to  weigh  from  300  lbs.  to  several  tons ;  and  they  have  often  descend- 
ed to  the  earth  with  a  force  sufficient  to  bury  them  many  feet  under  the 
soil-  Some  have  supposed  that  these  bodies  are  projected  from  volcanoes 
in  the  moon  ;  others,  that  they  proceed  from  volcanoes  on  the  earth ;  while 
others  imagine  that  they  are  generated  in  the  regions  of  the  atmosphei'e  ; 
but  the  true  cause  is,  probably,  not  yet  ascertained.  In  some  instances, 
these  stontis  have  penetrated  through  the  roofs  of  houses,  and  proved  de- 
structive to  the  mlxabitauls. 


ASTRONOMY,  185 

and  Mars,  are  also  spheroids  ;  and  it  is  highly  probably  that 
Mercury,  Venus,  and  Herschel  are  of  a  similar  figure,  though 
the  fact  has  not  yet  been  ascertained  by  actual  observation. — 
When  viewed  with  a  telescope,  several  spots  have  been  occa- 
sionally discovered  on  the  surface  of  this  planet,  by  the  mo- 
tion of  which,  its  rotation  was  determined. 

But  what  chiefly  distinguishes  the  surface  of  Jupiter  is 
several  streaky  appearances,  or  dusky  strips,  which  extend 
across  his  disk,  in  lines  parallel  to  his  equator.  These  are 
generally  termed  his  Belts.  Three  of  these  belts,  or  zones, 
nearly  equi-distant  from  each  other,  are  most  frequently  ob- 
served ;  but  they  are  not  regular  or  constant  in  their  appear- 
ance.* Sometimes  only  one  is  to  be  seen,  sometimes  five, 
and  sometimes  seven  or  eight  have  been  distinctly  visible; 
and,  in  the  latter  case,  two  of  them  have  been  known  to  dis- 
appear during  the  time  of  observation.  On  the  2Sth  May, 
1780,  Dr.  Herschel  perceived  "the  lohole  surface  of  Jupiter 
covered  with  small  curved  belts,  or  rather  hues,  that  were  not 
continuous  across  his  disk."  Though  these  belts  are  gener- 
ally parallel  to  each  other,  yet  they  are  not  always  so.  Their 
breadth  is  likewise  variable;  one  belt  having  been  observed  to 
grow  narrow,  while  another  in  its  neighborhood  has  increased 
in  breadth,  as  if  the  one  had  flowed  into  the  other.  The  time 
of  their  continuance  is  also  uncertain;  sometimes  th^y  remain 
unchanged  for  several  months,  at  other  times,  new  belts  have 
been  formed  in  an  hour  or  two.  What  these  belts  or  variable 
appearances  are  it  is  difficult  to  determine.  Some  have  regard- 
ed them  as  strata  of  clouds  floating  in  the  atmosphere  of  Ju- 
piter ;  while  others  imagine,  that  they  are  the  marks  of  great 
physical  revolutions  which  are  perpetually  changing  the  sur- 
face of  that  planet.  The  former  opinion  appears  the  most 
probable.  But,  whatever  be  the  nature  of  these  belts,  the  sud- 
den changes  to  which  they  are  occasionally  subject,  seem  to 
indicate  the  rapid  operation  of  some  powerful  physical  agency- 
for  some  of  them  are  more  than  five  thousand  miles  in  breadth ; 
and  since  they  have  been  known  to  disappear  in  the  space  o£ 
an  hour  or  two,  and  even  during  the  time  of  a  casual  observa- 
tion— agents  more  powerful  than  any  with  which  we  are  ac- 
quainted must  have  produced  so  extensive  an  effect. 

Jupiter  is  attended  by  four  satellites  or  moons,  which  present 

*  A  representation  of  these  belts,  in  the  positions  in  ^hich  they  most 
frequently  appear,  is  exhibited  in  the  engraving,  Fig.  2.  Fig.  1.  represents 
the  double  nng  of  Saturn,  as  it  appears  when  viewed  through  a  powerful 
telescope — Figures  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  represent  Saturn,  Jupit-er,  Herschel, 
the  Earth  suad  Moon,  in  thdr  relative  sizes  and  proportions, 

16 


186  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

a  very  beautiful  appearance  when  viewed  through  a  telescope. 
The  first  moon,  or  that  nearest  the  planet,  it  230,000  miles 
distant  from  its  centre,  and  goes  round  it  in  422  hours  ;  and 
will  appear  from  its  surface,  four  times  larger  than  ovu-  moon 
does  to  us.  The  second  moon,  being  farther  distant,  will  ap- 
pear about  the  size  of  ours  ;  the  third,  somewhat  less  ;  and 
the  fourth,  which  is  a  million  of  miles  distant  from  Jupiter,  and 
takes  sixteen  days  to  go  round  him,  will  appear  only  about  one 
third  the  diameter  of  our  moon.  These  moons  suffer  frequent 
eclipses  from  passing  through  Jupiter's  shadow,  in  the  same 
way  as  our  moon  is  eclipsed  by  passing  through  the  shadow  of 
the  earth.  By  the  eclipses  of  these  moons,  the  motion  of 
light  was  ascertained ;  and  they  are  found  to  be  of  essential 
use  in  determining  the  longitude  of  places  on  the  surface  of 
our  globe.  This  planet,  if  seen  from  its  nearest  moon,  will 
present  a  surface  a  thousand  times  as  large  as  our  moon  does 
to  us,  and  will  appear  in  the  form  of  a  crescent,  a  half-moon, 
a  gibbous  phase,  and  a  full-moon,  in  regular  succession,  every 
42  hours.  Jupiter's  axis  being  nearly  perpendicular  to  his 
orbit,  he  has  no  sensible  change  of  seasons,  such  as  we  expe 
rience  on  the  earth.  Were  we  placed  on  the  surface  of  this 
planet,  with  the  hmited  powers  of  vision  we  now  possess,  our 
earth  and  moon  would  entirely  disappear,  as  if  they  were 
blotted  out  from  the  map  of  creation  ;  and  the  inhabitants  of 
these  regions  must  have  much  better  eyes  than  ours,  if  they 
know  that  there  is  such  a  globe  as  the  earth  in  the  universe. 

The  planet  Saturn. — This  planet  is  900  millions  of 
miles  distant  from  the  sun,  being  nearly  double  the  distance  of 
Jupiter.  Its  diameter  is  79,000  miles,  and,  consequently,  it 
is  more  than  nine  hundred  times  the  bulk  of  the  earth.  It 
takes  29^  years  to  complete  its  revolution  about  the  sun  ;  but 
its  diurnal  motion  is  completed  in  ten  hours  and  sixteen 
minutes  ;  so  that  the  year  in  this  planet  is  nearly  thirty  times 
the  length  of  ours,  while  the  day  is  shorter,  by  more  than  one 
half.  The  year,  therefore,  contains  about  twenty-five  thou- 
sand one  hundred  and  fifty  days,  or  periods  of  its  diurnal  rota- 
tion, which  is  equal  to  10,759  of  our  days.  Saturn  is  of  a 
.spheroidal  figure,  or  somewhat  of  the  shape  of  an  orange  ;  his 
equatorial  being  more  than  six  thousand  miles  longer  than  his 
polar  diameter.  His  surface,  like  that  of  Jupiter,  is  diversified 
with  belts  and  dark  spots.  Dr.  Herschel,  at  certain  times, 
perceived  five  belts  on  his  surface,  three  of  which  were  dark, 
and  two  bright.  The  dark  belts  had  a  yellowish  tinge,  and 
generally  covered  a  larger  zone  of  the  disk  of  Saturn,  than  the 
belts  of  Jupiter  occupy  upon  his  surface.     On  account  of  the 


ASTRONOMY.  187 

great  distance  of  this  planet  from  the  sun,  the  light  it  receives 
from  that  luminary  is  only  the  ninetieth  part  of  what  we  enjoy  ; 
but,  by  calculation,  it  is  found,  that  this  quantity  is  a  thousand 
times  greater  than  the  light  which  the  full  moon  affords  to 
us.  Besides,  it  is  surrounded  by  no  fewer  than  seven  moons, 
which  supply  it  with  light  in  the  absence  of  the  sun.  Five  of 
these  moons  were  discovered  during  the  seventeenth  century, 
by  Huygens  and  Cassini  ;  and  the  sixth  and  seventh  were  dis- 
covered by  Dr.  Herschel,  in  1789,  soon  after  his  iarge  forty 
feet  reflecting  telescope  was  constructed.  These  moons,  and 
also  those  which  accompany  Jupiter,  are  estimated  to  be  not 
less  than  the  earth  in  magnitude,  and  are  found,  like  our  moon, 
to  revolve  round  their  axis  in  the  same  time  in  which  they 
revolve  about  their  respective  primaries. 

Rings  of  Saturn. — The  most  extraordinary  circumstance 
connected  with  this  planet,  is,  the  phenomenon  of  a  double 
ring,  which  surrounds  its  body,  but  nowhere  touches  it,  being 
thirty  thousand  miles  distant  from  any  part  of  the  planet,  and 
is  carried  along  with  the  planet  in  its  circuit  round  the  sun. 
This  is  the  most  singular  and  astonishing  object  in  the  whole 
range  of  the  planetary  system  ;  no  other  planet  being  found 
environed  with  so  wonderful  an  appendage  ;  and  the  planets 
which  may  belong  to  other  systems,  being  placed  beyond  the 
reach  of  our  observations,  no  idea  can  be  formed  of  the  pecu- 
liar apparatus  with  which  any  of  them  may  be  furnished.  This 
double  ring  consists  of  two  concentric  rings,  detached  from 
each  other  ;  the  innermost  of  which  is  nearly  three  times  as 
broad  as  the  outermost.  The  outside  diameter  of  the  exterior 
ring  is  204,000  miles  ;  and,  consequently,  its  circumference 
will  measure  six  hundred  and  fo7^ty  thousand  miles,  or  eighty 
times  the  diameter  of  our  globe.  Its  breadth  is  7,200  miles, 
or  nearly  the  diameter  of  the  earth.  Were  four  hundred  and 
fifty  globes,  of  the  size  of  the  earth,  placed  close  to  one 
another,  on  a  plane,  this  immense  ring  would  enclose  the  whole 
of  them,  together  with  all  the  interstices,  or  open  spaces  be- 
tween the  different  globes.  The  outside  diameter  of  the  inner- 
most  ring  is  184,000  miles,  and  its  breadth  twenty  thousand 
miles,  or  about  21  times  broader  than  the  diameter  of  the 
earth.  The  dark  space,  or  interval  between  the  two  rings,  is 
2,800  miles.  The  breadth  of  both  the  rings,  including  the 
dark  space  between  them,  is  thirty  thousand  miles,  which  is 
equal  to  the  distance  of  the  innermost  ring  from  the  body  of 
Saturn. 

The  following  figure  represents  a  view  of  Saturn  and  his 
rings,  as  they  would  appear,  were  our  eye  perpendicular  to 


188  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

one  of  the  planes  of  those  rings  ;  but  our  eye  is  never  s^ 
much  elevated  above  either  plane,  as  to  have  the  visual  ray- 
standing  at  right  angles  to  it :  it  is  never  elevated  more  than 
30  degrees  above  the  planes  of  the  rings.  When  we  view 
Saturn  through  a  telescope^  we  always  see  the  ring  at  an 
oblique  angle,  so  that  it  appears  of  an  oval  form,  the  outward 


circular  rim  being  projected  into  an  ellipsis  more  or  less 
oblong,  according  to  the  different  degrees  of  obliquity  with 
which  it  is  viewed,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  figure  of  Saturn  in 
the  copperplate  engraving. 

These  rings  cast  a  deep  shadow  upon  the  planet,  which 
proves  that  they  are  not  shining  /Zwtc^^,  but  composed  of  solid 
matter.  They  appear  to  be  possessed  of  a  higher  reflective 
power  than  the  surface  of  Saturn  ;  as  the  light  reflected  by 
them  is  more  brilliant  than  that  of  the  planet.  One  obvious 
use  of  this  double  ring  is,  to  reflect  hght  upon  the  planet,  in 
the  absence  of  the  sun  :  what  other  purposes  it  may  be  intend- 
ed to  subserve,  in  the  system  of  Saturn,  is,  at  present,  to  us 
unknown.  The  sun  illuminates  one  side  of  it  during  fifteen 
years,  or  one-half  of  the  period  of  the  planet's  revolution  ;  and,, 
during  the  next  fifteen  years,  the  other  side  is  enlightened  in 
its  tuni.     Twice  in  the  course  of  thirty  years,  there  is  a  short. 


ASTRONOMY.  189 

period,  during  which  neither  side  is  enhghtened,  and  when,  of 
course,  it  ceases  to  be  visible  ; — namely,  at  the  time  when  the 
sun  ceases  to  shine  on  one  side,  and  is  about  to  shine  on  the 
other.  It  revolves  round  its  axis,  and,  consequently,  around 
Saturn,  in  ten  hours  and  a  half,  which  is  at  the  rate  of  a  thou- 
sand miles  in  a  minute,  or  fifty-eight  times  swifter  than  the 
earth's  equator.  When  viewed  from  the  middle  zone  of  the 
planet,  in  the  absence  of  the  sun,  the  rings  will  appear  like  vast 
luminous  arches,  extending  along  the  canopy  of  heaven,  from 
the  eastern  to  the  -western  horizon  ;  having  an  apparent 
breadth  equal  to  a  hundred  times  the  apparent  diameter  of  our 
moon,  and  will  be  seen  darkened  about  the  middle,  by  the 
shadow  of  Saturn.* 

There  is  no  other  planet  in  the  solar  system,  whose  firma- 
ment will  present  such  a  variety  of  splendid  and  magnificent 
objects,  as  that  of  Saturn.  The  various  aspects  of  his  seven 
moons,  one  rising  above  the  horizon,  while  another  is  setting, 
and  a  third  approaching  to  the  meridian  ;  one  entering  into  an 
eclipse,  and  another  emerging  from  it ;  one  appearing  as  a 
crescent,  and  another  with  a  gibbous  phase  ;  and .  some- 
times the  whole  of  them  shining  in  the  same  hemisphere,  in 
one  bright  assemblage  ; — the  majestic  motions  of  the  rings, — 
at  one  time  illuminating  the  sky  with  their  splendour,  and 
eclipsing  the  stars  ;  at  another,  casting  a  deep  shade  over  cer- 
tain regions  of  the  planet,  and  unveiling  to  view  the  wonders 
of  the. starry  firmament — are  scenes  worthy  of  the  majesty  of 
the  Divine  Being  to  unfold,  and  of  rational  creatures  to  contem- 
plate. Such  magnificent  displays  of  Wisdom  and  Omnipo- 
tence, lead  us  to  conclude  that  the  numerous  splendid  objects 
connected  with  this  planet,  were  not  created  merely  to  shed 
their  lustre  on  naked  rocks  and  barren  sands  ;  but  that  an  im- 
mense population  of  intelligent  beings  is  placed  in  those  re- 
gions, to  enjoy  the  bounty,  and  to  adore  the  perfections  of 
their  great  Creator. — The  double  ring  of  Saturn,  when  viewed 
through  a  good  telescope,  generally  appears  hke  a  luminous 
handle  on  each  side  of  the  planet,  with  a  dark  interval  between 
the  interior  edge  of  the  ring,  and  the  convex  body  of  Saturn; 
which  is  owing  to  its  oblique  position  with  respect  to  our  line 
of  vision.     When  its  outer  edge  is  turned  directly  towards  the 

+  See  the  Engraving,  fig.  7,  which  represents  a  view  of  the  appearance 
wliich  the  rings  and  moons  of  Saturn  will  exhibit,  in  certain  cases,  about 
midnight,  when  beheld  from  a  point  20  or  30  degrees  north  from  his  equa- 
tor. The  shade  on  the  upper  part  of  the  rings  represents  the  shadow  of 
the  body  Saturn.  The  shadow  will  appear  to  move  gradually  to  the  west 
Qs  the  morning  approaches. 

16* 


190  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

earth,  it  becomes  invisible,  or  appears  like  a  dark  stripe  across 
the  disk  of  the  planet.  This  phenomenon  happens  once  every 
fit^een  years. 

The    Planet    Herschel. — This    planet,  which  is   also 
known  by  the  names  of  the   Georgkim   Sidus,  and    Uranus^ 
was  discovered  by  Dr.  Herschel  on  the  13th  March,  1781. 
It  is  the  most  distant  planet  from  the  sun,  that  has  yet  been  dis- 
covered ;  being  removed  at  no  less  than  1800' millions  of  miles 
from  that  luminary,  which  is  nineteen  times  farther  than  the 
earth  is  from  the  sun — a  distance  so  great,  that  a  cannon  ball, 
flying  at  the  rate  of  480  miles  an  hour,  ^\^ould  not  reach  it  in 
400  years.     Its   diameter  is   about  35,000  miles  ;   and,   of 
course,  it  is  about  eighty  times  larger  than  the  earth.     It  ap- 
pears like  a  star  of  the  sixth  magnitude  ;  but  can  seldom  be 
distinguished  by  the  naked  eye.     It  takes  about  S3  years  and 
a  half  to  complete  its  revolution  round  the  sun  ;  and,  though  it 
is  the  slowest  moving  body  in  the  system,  it  moves  at  the  rate 
of  15,000  miles  an  hour.     As  the  degree  of  sensible  heat  in 
any  planet  does  not  appear  to  depend  altogether  on  its  near- 
ness to  the  sun,  the  temperature  of  this  planet  may  be  as  mild 
as  that  which  obtains  in  the  most  genial  climate  of  our  globe.* 
The  diameter  of  the  sun,  as  seen  from  Herschel,  is  little  more 
than  the  apparent  diameter  of  Venus,  as  seen  by  the  naked 
eye ;  and  the  light  which  it  receives  from  that  luminary,  is 
360  times  less  than  what  we  experience  ;  yet  this  proportion 
is  found  by  calculation  to  be  equal  to  the  effect  which  would 
be  produced  by  248  of  our  full  moons  ;  and,  in  the  absence  of 
the  sun,  there  are  six  moons  which  reflect  light  upon  this  dis~ 
tant  planet,  all  of  which  were  discovered  likewise  by  Dr.  Her- 
schel.    Small  as  the  proportion  of  light  is,  which  this  planet 
receives  from  the  sun,  it  is  easy  to  conceive,  that  beings  simi- 
lar to  man,  placed  on  the  surface  of  this  globe,  with  a  slight 
raodification  of  their  organs  of  vision,  might  be  made  to  per- 
ceive objects  with  a  clearness  and  distinctness  even  superior 
to  what  we  can  do.     We  have  only  to  suppose,  that  the  Crea- 
tor has  formed  their  eyes  with  pupils  capable  of  a  much  larger 
expansion  than  ours  ;  and  has  endued  their  retina  with  a  much 
greater  degree  of  nervous  sensibility.     At  all  events,  we  may 
rest  assured,  that  He  who  has  placed  sentient  beings  in  any 
region,  has,  by  laws  with  which  we  are  partly  unacquainted,, 
adapted  the  constitution  of  the  inhabitant  to  the  nature  of  the 
habitation. 

*  See  Note,  page  176.. 


ASTRONOMT.  1^1 

"  Strange  and  amazing  must  the  difference  be, 
'Twixt  this  dull  planet  and  bright  Mercury; 
Yet  reason  says,  nor  can  we  doubt  at  all, 
Millions  of  beings  dwell  on  either  ball, 
With  constitutions  fitted  for  that  spot 
Where  Providence,  all- wise,  has  fixed  their  lot." 

Baker's  Universe. 

The  celestial  globes  which  I  have  now  described,  are  all 
the  planets  which  are  at  present  known  to  belong  to  the  solar 
system.  It  is  probable  that  other  planetary  bodies  may  yet 
be  discovered  between  the  orbits  of  Saturn  and  Herschel,  and 
even  far  beyond  the  orbit  of  the  latter  ;  and  it  is  also  not  im- 
probable that  planets  may  exist  in  the  immense  interval  of  37 
millions  of  miles  between  Mercury  and  the  Sun,*  These  (if 
any  exist)  can  be  detected  only  by  a  series  of  day  observa- 
tions,  made  with  equatorial  telescopes  ;  as  they  could  not  be 
supposed  to  be  seen,  after  sun-set,  on  account  of  their  proxi- 
mity to  the  sun.  Five  primaryf  planets,  and  eight  secondarieSy 
have  been  discovered  within  the  last  42  years  ;  and,  therefore, 
we  have  no  reason  to  conclude,  that  all  the  bodies  belonging 
to  our  system  have  yet  been  detected,  till  every  region  of  the 
heavens  be  more  fully  explored. 

Comets. — Besides  the  planetary  globes  to  which  I  have 
now  adverted,  there  is  a  class  of  celestial  bodies  which  occa- 
sionally appear  in  the  heavens,  to  which  the  name  of  Comets 
has  been  given.  They  are  distinguished  from  the  other  ce-^ 
lestial  bodies,  by  their  ruddy  appearance,  and  by  a  long  train 
of  light,  called  the  tail^  which  sometimes  extends  over  a  con- 
siderable portion  of  the  heavens,  and  which  is  so  transparent, 
that  the  stars  may  be  seen  through  it.  The  tail  is  always  di- 
rected to  that  part  of  the  heavens  which  is  opposite  to  the  sun, 
and  increases  in  size  as  it  approaches  him,  and  is  again  gra- 
dually diminished,  as  the  comet  flies  off  to  the  more  distant 
regions  of  space.     Their  apparent  magnitude  is  very  different : 

*  The  Author,  some  years  ago,  described  a  method  by  which  the  pla- 
nets (if  any)  within  the  orbit  of  Mercury,  may  be  discovered  in  the  day- 
time, by  means  of  a  simple  conti'ivance  for  intercepting  the  solar  rays,  and 
by  the  frequent  application,  by  a  number  of  observers,  of  powerful  tele- 
scopes, to  a  certain  portion  of  the  sky,  in  the  vicinity  of  the  sun.  The  de- 
tails of  this  plan  have  not  yet  been  published  ;  but  the  reader  will  see 
them  alluded  to  in  No.  V.  of  the  Edinburgh  Philosophical  Journal,  for 
July,  1820,  p.  191. 

I  A  primary  planet  is  that  which  revolves  round  the  sun  as  a  centre  ;  as 
Mars,  Jupiter,  and  Saturn.  A  secondary  planet  is  one  which  revolves 
round  a  primary  planet  as  its  centre;  as  the  Moon,  and  the  satellites  of 
Jupiter  and  Saturn.  The  prknary  planets  are  distinguished  from  the 
fixed  stars,  by  the  steadiness  of  their  light ;  not  having  a  twinkling  ap- 
pearance, as  the  stars  exhibit.. 


192  'THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

sometimes  they  appear  only  of  the  bigness  of  the  fixed 
stars  ;  at  other  times  they  equal  the  diameter  of  Venus  ;  and 
sometimes  they  have  appeared  nearly  as  large  as  the  Moon. 
They  traverse  the  heavens  in  all  directions,  and  cross  the 
orbits  of  the  planets.  When  examined  through  a  telescope, 
they  appear  to  consist  of  a  dark  central  nucleus,  surrounded 
by  a  dense  atmosphere,  or  mass  of  vapors.  They  have  been 
ascertained  to  move  in  long  narrow  ellipses  or  ovals,  around 
the  sun ;  some  of  them,  on  their  nearest  approach  to  him, 
having  been  within  a  million  of  miles  of  his  centre  ;  and  then 
fly  off  to  a  region  several  thousands  of  miihons  of  miles  dis- 
tant. When  near  the  sun,  they  move  with*  amazing  velocity. 
The  velocity  of  the  comet  which  appeared  in  1680,  according 
to  Sir  Isaac  Newton's  calculation,  was  eight  hundred  and 
eighty  thousand  miles  an  hour.  They  appear  to  be  bodies  of 
no  great  density,  and  their  size  seldom  exceeds  that  of  the 
moon.  The  length  of  the  tails  of  some  comets  has  been  esti- 
mated at  fifty  millions  of  miles.  According  to  Dr.  HerschePs 
computations,  the  solid  nucleus,  or  central  part  of  the  comet 
which  appeared  in  1811,  was  only  428  miles  in  diameter  ;  but 
the  real  diameter  of  the  head,  or  nebulous  portion  of  the  comet, 
he  computed  to  be  about  127  thousand  miles.  The  length  of 
its  tail  he  computed  to  be  above  one  hundred  millions  of  miles, 
and  its  breadth  nearly  fifteen  millions.  It  was  nearest  to  the 
earth  on  the  11th  October,  when  its  distance  was  113  millions 
of  miles.  The  number  of  comets  which  have  occasionally 
been  seen  within  the  limits  of  our  system^  since  the  com- 
mencement of  the  Christian  era,  is  about  500,  of  which  the 
paths  or  orbits  of  98  have  been  calculated. 

As  these  bodies  cross  the  paths  of  the  planets  in  every  di- 
rection, there  is  a  possibility,  that  some  of  them  might  strike 
against  the  earth  in  their  approach  to  the  sun ;  and,  were  this 
to  happen,  the  consequences  would  be  awful  beyond  descrip- 
tion. But  we  may  rest  assured  that  that  Almighty  Being  who 
at  first  launched  them  into  existence,  directs  all  their  motions, 
however  complicated  ;  and  that  the  earth  shall  remain  secure 
against  all  such  concussions  from  celestial  agents,  till  the  pur- 
poses of  his  moral  government  in  this  world  shall  be  fully  ac- 
complished. What  regions  these  bodies  visit,  when  they  pass 
beyond  the  limits  of  our  view  ;  upon  what  errands  they  are 
sent,  when  they  again  revisit  the  central  parts  of  our  system  ; 
what  is  the  difference  in  their  physical  constitution,  from  that 
of  the  sun  and  planets  ;  and  what  important  ends  they  are 
destined  to  accomplish,  in  the  economy  of  the  universe,  are 
inquiries  which  naturally  arise  in  the  mind,  but  which  surpass 


ASTRONOMY  193 

the  limited  powers  of  the  human  understanding  at  present 
to  determine.  Of  this,  however,  we  may  rest  assured,  that 
they  were  not  created  in  vain  ;  that  they  subserve  purposes 
worthy  of  the  infinite  Creator  ;  and  that  wherever  he  has  ex- 
erted his  power,  there  also  he  manifests  his  Wisdom  and  Be 
neficence.* 

Such  is  a  general  outline  of  the  leading  facts  connected 
with  that  system  of  which  we  form  a  part.  Though  the  ener- 
gies of  Divine  Power  had  never  been  exerted  beyond  the 
limits  of  this  system,  it  would  remain  an  eternal  monument 
of  the  Wisdom  and  Omnipotence  of  its  Author.  Independent 
of  the  Sun,  which  is  like  a  vast  universe  in  itself,  and  of  the 
numerous  comets  which  are  continually  traversing  its  distant 
regions,  it  contains  a  mass  of  material  existence,  arranged  in 
the  most  beautiful  order,  two  thousand  five  hundred  times 
larger  than  our  globe.  From  late  observations,  there  is  the 
strongest  reason  to  conclude,  that  the  sun,  along  with  all  this 
vast  assemblage  of  bodies,  is  carried  through  the  regions  of 
the  universe,  towards  some  distant  point  of  space,  or  around 
some  wide  circumference,  at  the  rate  of  more  than  sixty  thou- 
sand miles  an  hour  ;  and  if  so,  it  is  highly  probable,  if  not  ab- 
solutely certain,  that  we  shall  never  again  occupy  that  portion 
of  absolute  space,  through  which  we  are  this  moment  passing, 
during  all  the  succeeding  ages  of  eternity. 

Such  a  glorious  system  must  have  been  brought  into  ex- 
istence, to  subserve  purposes  worthy  of  the  Infinite  Wisdom 
and  Benevolence  of  the  Creator.  To  suppose  that  the  dis- 
tant globes,  of  which  it  is  composed,  with  their  magnificent 
apparatus  of  Rings  and  Moons,  were  created  merely  for  the 
purpose  of  affording  a  few  astronomers,  in  these  latter  times, 
a  peep  of  them  through  their  glasses,  would  be  inconsistent 
with  every  principle  of  reason  ;  and  would  be  charging  Him 
who  is  the  source  of  Wisdom,  with  conduct  which  we  would 
pronounce  to  be  folly  in  the  sons  of  men.  Since  it  appears, 
so  far  as  our  observation  extends,  that  matter  exists  solely  for 
the  sake  of  sensitive  and  intelligent  beings,  and  that  the  Crea- 

*  A  comet  has  lately  been  discovered,  whose  periodical  revolution  .is 
found  to  be  only  3  years  and  107  days.  At  its  greatest  distance  from  the 
sun,  it  is  within  the  orbit  of  Jupiter,  and  it  possesses  this  peculiar  advan- 
tage for  observation^,  that  it  will  become  visible  ten  times  in  thirty-three 
years.  It  was  last  seen  in  June,  1822,  by  the  astronomers  in  the  observa- 
tory of  Paramatta,  New  Holland,  in  positions  veiy  near  to  those  Avhich 
had  been  previously  calculated  by  Mr.  Enke.  It  is  probable,  that  the 
observations  which  may  hereafter  be  made  on  this  comet,  w-ill  lead  to  more 
definite  and  accurate  views  of  the  nature  and  destination  of  these  singular 
bodies. 


194  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

tor  made  nothing  in  vain  ;  it  is  a  conclusion  to  which  we  are 
necessarily  led/  that  the  planetary  globes  are  inhabited  by 
various  orders  of  intellectual  beings,  who  participate  m  the 
bounty,  and  celebrate  the  glory  of  their  Creator. 

When  this  idea  is  taken  into  consideration,  it  gives  a  striking 
emphasis  to  such  sublime  declarations  of  the  Sacred  Volume 

as  these  : ''  AH  nations  before  him  are  as  nothing — He  sit- 

teth  upon  the  circle  of  the  earth,  and  the  inhabitants  thereof 
are  as  grasshoppers — The  nations  are  «.9  the  drop  of  a  bucket 

All  tTie  inhabitants  of  the  world  are  reputed  as  nothino-  in 

his  sight  ;  and  he  doth  according  to  his  will  in  the  army  of 
heaven,  and  among  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth^ — Thou  hast 
made  heaven,  and  the  heaven  of  heavens,  with  all  their  host ; 
and  thou  preservest  them  all,  and  the  host  of  heaven  worship-- 
pcth  thee — When  I  consider  thy  heavens,  what  is  man,  that 
thou  art  mindful  of  him!"  If  the  race  of  Adam  were  the 
principal  intelligences  in  the  universe  of  God,  such  passages 
would  be  stripped  of  all  their  sublimity,  would  degenerate  into 
mere  hyperboles,  and  be  almost  without  meaning.  If  man 
were  the  only  rational  being  who  inhabited  the  material 
WORLD,  as  some  arrogantly  imagine,  it  would  be  no  wonder  at 
all,  that  God  should  be  "  mindful  of  him  ;"  nor  could  "  all  the 
inhabitants  of  this  world,"  with  any  propriety,  be  compared  to 
"  a  drop  of  a  bucket,"  and  be  "  reputed  as  nothing  in  his 
sight." — Such  declarations  would  be  contrary  to  fact,  if  this 
supposition  were  admitted  ;  for  it  assumes  that  man  holds  the 
principal  station  in  the  visible  universe.  The  expressions 
— "  The  heavens,  the  heaven  of  heavens,"  and  "  the  host  of 
heaven  worshipping  God,"  would  also,  on  this  supposition,  de- 
generate into  something  approaching  to  mere  inanity.  These 
expressions,  if  they  signify  any  thing  that  is  worthy  of  an  In- 
spired Teacher  to  communicate,  evidently  imply,  that  the 
universe  is  vast  and  extensive,  beyond  the  range  of  human 
comprehension — that  it  is  peopled  with  myriads  of  inhabitants 
— that  these  inhabitants  are  possessed  of  intellectual  natures, 
capable  of  appreciating  the  perfections  of  their  Creator — and 
that  they  pay  him  a  tribute  of  rational  adoration.  "  The  host 
of  heaven  worshippeth  thee."  So  that  the  language  of  Scrip- 
ture is  not  only  consistent  with  the  doctrine  of  a  plurality  of 
worlds,  but  evidently  supposes  their  existence  to  all  the  extent 
to  which  modern  science  can  carry  us.  However  vast  the 
universe  now  appears — however  numerous  the  worlds  and 
systems  of  worlds,  which  may  exist  within  its  boundless  range 
— the  language  of  Scripture  is  sufficiently  comprehensive  and 
sublime,  to  express  all  the  emotions  which  naturally  arise  ia 


ASTRONOMY.  195 

the  mind,  when  contemplating  its  structure — a  characteristic 
which  will  apply  to  no  other  book,  or  pretended  revelation. 
And  this  consideration  shows  not  only  the  harmony  which 
subsists  between  the  discoveries  of  Revelation  and  the  dis- 
coveries of  Science,  but  also  forms  by  itself,  a  strong  pre- 
sumptive evidence,  that  the  Records  of  the  Bible  are  authentic 
and  divine.*  Vast  as  the  Solar  System,  we  have  now  been 
contemplating,  may  appear,  it  is  but  a  mere  point  in  the  map 
of  creation.  To  a  spectator  placed  in  one  of  the  stars  of  the 
seventh  magnitude,  not  only  the  glories  of  this  world,  and  the 
more  resplendent  scenes  of  the  planet  Saturn,  but  even  the 
sun  himself  would  entirely  disappear,  as  if  he  were  blotted  out 
of  existence.  "  Were  the  sun,"  says  Mr.  Addison,  "  v/hich 
enlightens  this  part  of  the  creation,  with  all  the  host  of  the 
planetary  worlds  that  move  about  him,  utterly  extinguished 
and  annihilated,  they  would  not  be  missed  by  an  eye  that  could 
take  in  the  whole  compass  of  nature,  more  than  a  grain  of 
sand  upon  the  sea  shore.  The  space  they  possess  is  so  ex- 
ceedingly little,  in  comparison  of  the  whole,  that  it  would 
scarce  make -a  blank  in  creation." 

The  Fixed  Stars. — When  we  pass  from  the  planetary 
system  to  other  regions  of  creation,  we  have  to  traverse,  in 
imagination,  a  space  so  immense,  that  it  has  hitherto  baffled 
all  the  efforts  of  science  to  determine  its  extent.  In  these 
remote  and  immeasurable  spaces,  are  placed  those  immense 
luminous  bodies  usually  denominated  the  fxcd  stars.  The 
nearest  stars  are,  on  good  grounds,  concluded  to  be  at  least 
hventy  billions  of  miles  distant  from  our  globe — a  distance 
through  which  light  (the  swiftest  body  in  nature)  could  noi 
travel  in  the  space  of  three  years  ;  and  which  a  ball,  moving 
at  the  rate  of  500  miles  an  hour,  would  not  traverse  in  foui 
milhons  five  hundred  thousand  years,  or  750  times  the  period 
which  has  elapsed  since  the  Mosaic  cr«ation.  But  how  far 
they  may  be  placed  beyond  this  distance,  no  astronomer  will 
pretend  to  determine.  The  following  consideration  will  prove, 
to  those  unacquainted  with  the  mathematical  principles  of 
astronomy,  that  the  stars  are  placed  at  an  immeasurable  dis- 
tance. When  they  are  viewed  through  a  telescope  which 
magnifies  objects  a  thousand  times,  they  appear  no  larger  than 
to  the  naked  eye  ;  which  circumstance  shows,  that  though  we 
were  placed  at  the  thousandth  part  of  the  distance  from  them 
at  which  we  now  are,  they  would  still  appear  only  as  so  many 
shining  points  ;  for  we 'should  still  be  distant  from  the  nearest 

*  See  Appendix,  No.  VL 


196  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

of  them,  twenty  thousand  millions  of  miles  :  or,  in  other  words, 
were  we  transported  several  thousands  of  millions  of  miles 
from  the  spot  we  now  occupy,  though  their  numbers  would 
appear  exceedingly  increased,  they  would  appear  no  larger 
than  they  do  from  our  present  station  ;  and  we  behooved  to 
be  carried  forward  thousands  of  millions  of  miles  further  in  a 
long  succession,  before  their  disks  appeared  to  expand  into 
large  circles,  like  the  moon.  Dr.  Herschel  viewed  the  stars 
with  telescopes,  magnifying  six  thousand  times,  yet  they  still 
appeared  only  as  brilliant  points,  without  any  sensible  disks, 
or  increase  of  diameter.  This  circumstance  incontestibly 
proves  the  two  following  things  : — 1.  That  the  stars  are 
luminous  bodies,  which  shine  by  their  own  native  light ;  other- 
wise they  could  not  be  perceived  at  such  vast  distances. 
2.  That  they  are  bodies  of  an  immense  size,  not  inferior  to 
the  sun  ;  and  many  of  them,  it  is  probable,  far  exceed  that 
luminary  in  bulk  and  splendor. 

The  stars,  on  account  of  the  difference  in  their  apparent 
magnitudes,  have  been  distributed  into  several  classes  or 
orders.  Those  which  appear  largest  are  called  stars  of  the 
first  magnitude  ;  next  to  those  in  lustre,  stars  of  the  second 
magnitude,  and  so  on  to  stars  of  the  sixth  magnitude,  which 
are  the  smallest  that  can  be  distinguished  by  the  naked  eye. 
Stars  of  the  7th,  8th,  9th,  10th,  &c.  magnitudes,  which  cannot 
be  seen  by  the  naked  eye,  are  distinguished  by  the  name  of 
telescopic  stars.  Not  more  than  a  thousand  stars  can  be  dis- 
tinguished by  the  naked  eye,  in  the  clearest  winter's  night ; 
but,  by  means  of  the  telescope,  millions  have  been  discovered. 
(See  p.  39.)-7And,  as  it  is  probable,  that,  by  far  the  greater 
part  lie  beyond  the  reach  of  the  best  glasses  which  have  been, 
or  ever  will  be  constructed  by  man — the  real  number  of  the 
stars  may  be  presumed  to  be  beyond  all  human  calculation 
or  conception,  and  perhaps  beyond  the  grasp  of  angelic  com- 
prehension. 

In  consequence  of  recent  discoveries,  we  have  now  the 
strongest  reason  to  believe,  that  all  the  stars  in  the  universe 
are  arranged  into  clusters,  or  groupes,"  which  astronomers 
distinguish  by  the  name  of  NEBULiE  or  Starry  Systems, 
each  nebula  consisting  of  many  thousands  of  stars.  The 
nearest  nebula  is  that  whitish  space  or  zone,  which  is  known  by 
the  name  of  the  Milky  Way,  to  which  our  sun  is  supposed  to 
belong.  It  consists  of  many  hundreds  of  thousands  of  stars. 
When  Dr.  Herschel  examined  this  region,  with  his  powerful 
telescopes,  he  found  a  portion  of  it  only  15  degrees  long  and 
2  broad,  which  contained  'fifty  ikoushnd  stars  large  enough  to 


ASTRONOMY.  197 

be  distinctly  counted ;  and  he  suspected  twice  as  many  more, 
which,  for  want  of  sufficient  light  in  his  telescope,  he  saw  only 
now  and  then.  More  than  two  thousand  five  hundred  nebulae 
have  already  been  observed  ;  and,  if  each  of  them  contain  as 
many  stars  as  the  Milky  Way,  several  hundreds  of  millions  of 
stars  must  exist,  even  within  that  portion  of  the  heavens  which 
lies  open  to  our  observation. 

It  appears,  from  numerous  observations, that -uaWoMS  changes 
are  occasionally  taking  place  in  the  regions  of  the  stars. 
Several  stars  have  appeared  for  a  while  in  the  heavens,  and 
then  vanished  from  the  sight.  Some  stars  which  were  known 
to  the  ancients,  cannot  now  be  discovered  ;  and  stars  are  now 
distinctly  visible,  which  were  to  them  unknown.  A  few  stars 
have  gradually  increased  in  brilliancy,  while  others  have  been 
constantly  diminishing  in  lustre.  Certain  stars,  to  the  number 
of  15,  or  upwards,  are  ascertained  to  have  a  periodical  increase 
and  decrease  of  their  lustre,  sometimes  appearing  like  stars  of 
the  1st  or  2d  magnitude,  sometimes  diminishing  to  the  size  of 
the  4th  or  5th  magnitude,  and  sometimes  altogether  disappear- 
ing to  the  naked  eye.  It  also  appears,  that  changes  are  taking 
place  among  the  nebulae — that  several  nebulae  are  formed  by 
the  decomposition  of  larger  nebulae,  and  that  many  nebulae  of 
this  kind  are  at  present  detaching  themselves  from  the  nebulae 
of  the  Milky  Way.  These  changes  seem  to  indicate,  that 
mighty  movements  and  vast  operations  are  continually  going 
on  in  the  distant  regions  of  creation,  under  the  superintendence 
of  the  Sovereign  of  the  Universe,  upon  a  scale  of  magnitude 
and  grandeur  which  overwhelms  the  human  understanding. 

To  explore,  more  extensively,  the  region  of  the  starry 
firmament ;  to  mark  the  changes  that  are  taking  place  ;  to 
ascertain  all  the  changeable  stars  ;  to  determine  the  periodical 
variations  of  their  light ;  the  revolutions  of  double  and  triple 
stars  ;  and  the  motions,  and  other  phenomena  peculiar  to  these 
great  bodies,  will  furnish  employment  for  future  enlightened 
generations  :  and  will,  perhaps,  form  a  part  of  the  studies  and 
investigations  of  superior  intelligences,  in  a  higher  sphere  of 
existence,  during  an  indefinite  lapse  of  ages. 

If  every  one  of  these  immense  bodies  be  a  Sun,  equal  or 
superior  to  ours,  and  encircled  with  a  host  of  planetary  worlds, 
as  we  have  every  reason  to  conclude,  (see  pp.  38,  64,  65,) 
how  vast  must  be  the  extent  of  Creation !  how  numerous  the 
worlds  and  beings  which  exist  within  its  boundless  range !  and, 
how  great,  beyond  all  human  or  angelic  conception,  must  be 
the  Power  and  Intelligence  of  that  glorious  Being,  who  called 
this  system  from  nothing  into  existence,  and  continually  super- 

17 


198  THE  CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

intends  all  its  movements  !  The  mind  is  bewildered  and  con 
founded  when  it  attempts  to  dwell  on  this  subject ;  it  feels  the 
narrow  limits  of  its  present  faculties  ;  it  longs  for  the  powers 
of  a  seraph,  to  enable  it  to  take  a  more  expansive  flight,  into 
those  regions  which  "  eye  hath  not  seen  ;"  and,  while  destitute 
of  these,  and  chained  down  to  this  obscure  corner  of  creation, 
it  can  only  exclaim,  in  the  language  of  inspiration,  "  Who  can 
by  searching  find  out  God  ? — Great  is  our  Lord,  and  of  great 
power  ;  his  understanding  is  infinite  ! — Great  and  marvellous 
are  thy  works.  Lord  God  Almighty ! — Who  can  utter  the 
mighty  acts  of  Jehovah,  who  can  show  forth  all  his  praise  !" 

After  what  has  been  now  stated  in  relation  to  the  leading 
facts  of  astronomy,  it  would  be  needless  to  spend  time  in 
endeavouring  to  show  its  connexion  with  religion.  It  will  be 
at  once  admitted,  that  all  the  huge  globes  of  luminous  and 
opaque  matter,  to  which  we  have  adverted,  are  the  workman- 
ship of  Him  "  who  is  wonderful  in  counsel  and  excellent  in 
working ;"  and  form  a  part  of  the  dominions  of  that  august 
Sovereign,  "  whose  kingdom  ruleth  over  all."  And  shall  it 
ever  be  insinuated,  that  this  subject  has  no  relation  to  the 
great  object  of  our  adoration  ?  and  that  it  is  of  no  importance 
in  our  views  of  the  Divinity,  whether  we  conceive  his  domi- 
nions as  circumscribed  within  the  limits  of  little  more  than 
25,000  miles,  or  as  embracing  an  extent  which  comprehends 
mnumerable  worlds?  The  objects  around  us  in  this  sublunary 
sphere  strikingly  evince  the  superintendency,  the  wisdom  and 
benevolence  of  the  Creator ;  but  this  science  demonstrates, 
beyond  all  other  departments  of  human  knowledge,  the  Gran- 
deur AND  Magnificence  of  his  operations  :  and  raises  the 
mind  to  sublimer  views  of  his  attributes  than  can  be  acquired 
by  the  contemplation  of  any  other  objects.  A  serious  con- 
templation of  the  sublime  objects  which  Astronomy  has  ex- 
plored, must,  therefore,  have  a  tendency  to  inspire  us  with 
profound  veneration  of  the  Eternal  Jehovah — to  humble  us  in 
the  dust  before  his  august  presence — to  excite  admiration  of 
his  condescension  and  grace  in  the  work  of  redemption — to 
show  us  the  littleness  of  this  world,  and  the  insignificancy  of 
those  riches  and  honors  to  which  ambitious  men  aspire  with 
so  much  labor  and  anxiety  of  mind — to  demonstrate  the  glory 
and  magnificence  of  God's  universal  kingdom — to  convince 
us  of  the  infinite  sources  of  varied  felicity  which  he  has  in  his 
power  to  communicate  to  holy  intelligences — to  enliven  our 
hopes  of  the  splendors  of  that  "  exceeding  great  and  eternal 
weight  of  glory"  which  will  burst  upon  the  spirits  of  good 
men,  when  they  pass  from  this  region  of  mortality — and  to 


ASTRONOMY,  199 

induce  us  to  aspire  with  more  lively  ardor  after  that  heavenly 
world,  where  the  glories  of  the  Deity,  and  the  magnificence  of 
his  works  will  be  more  clearly  unfolded. 

If,  then,  such  be  the  effects  which  the  objects  of  astronomy 
have  a  tendency  to  produce  on  a  devout  and  enlightened  mind 
— to  call  in  question  the  propriety  of  exhibiting  such  views  in 
religious  publications,  or  in  the  course  of  religious  instruction, 
would  be  an  approach  to  impiety,  and  an  attempt  to  cover  with 
a  veil  the  most  illustrious  visible  displays  of  Divine  glory. — 
It  forms  a  striking  evidence  of  the  depravity  of  man,  as  well 
as  of  his  want  of  true  taste,  and  of  a  discernment  of  what  is 
excellent,  that  the  grandeur  of  the  nocturnal  heavens,  and  the 
perfections  of  Deity  they  proclaim,  are  beheld  with  so  much 
apathy  and  indifference  by  the  bulk  of  mankind.  Though 
"  the  heavens  declare  the  glory  of  God,"  in  the  most  solemn 
and  impressive  language,  adapted  to  the  comprehension  of 
every  kindred  and  every  tribe,  yet  "  a  brutish  man  knoweth 
not,  neither  doth  a  fool  understand  this."  They  can  gaze  upon 
these  resplendent  orbs  with  as  little  emotion  as  the  ox  that 
feeds  on  the  grass,  or  as  the  horse  that  drags  their  carcasses 
along  in  their  chariots.  They  have  even  attempted  to  ridicule 
the  science  of  the  heavens,  to  caricature  those  who  have 
devoted  themselves  to  such  studies,  and  to  treat  with  an  indif- 
ference, mingled  with  contempt,  the  most  august  productions 
of  Omnipotence.  Such  persons  must  be  considered  as  expos- 
ing themselves  to  that  Divine  denunciation — "  Because  they 
regard  not  the  works  of  Jehovah,  neither  consider  the  opera- 
tions of  his  hands,  he  will  destroy  them  and  not  build  them 
up."  If  the  structure  of  the  heavens,  and  the  immensity  of 
worlds  and  beings  they  contain,  were  intended  by  the  Creator 
to  adumbrate,  in  some  measure,  his  invisible  perfections,  and 
to  produce  a  sublime  and  awful  impression  on  all  created  intel- 
ligences, (see  pp.  46,  54,  58,)  it  must  imply  a  high  degree  of 
disrespect  to  the  Divinity  wilfully  to  overlook  these  astonish- 
ing scenes  of  Power  and  Intelligence.  It  is  not  a  matter  of 
mere  taste  or  caprice,  whether  or  not  we  direct  our  thoughts  to 
such  subjects,  but  an  imperative  duty  to  which  we  are 
frequently  directed  in  the  word  of  God  ;  the  ivilful  neglect  of 
which,  where  there  is  an  opportunity  of  attending  to  it,  must 
subject  us  to  all  that  is  included  in  the  threatening  now  speci- 
fied, if  there  be  any  meaning  in  language. 

That  the  great  body  of  professed  Christians  are  absolute 
strangers  to  the  subhme  sentiments  which  a  serious  contempla- 
tion of  the  heavens  inspires,  must  be  owing,  in  part,  to  the 
minds  of   Christian   parents  and  teachers  not  having  been 


200  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

directed  to  such  subject,  or  to  the  views  they  entertain  respect- 
ing the  relation  of  such  contemplations  to  the  objects  of  reli- 
gion.    In  communicating  religious  instructions  in  reference  to 
the  attributes  of  God,  the  heavens  are  seldom  referred  to,  ex- 
cept in  such  a  vague  and  indefinite  manner  as  can  produce  no 
deep  nor  vivid  impression  on  the  mind  ;  and  many  pious  per- 
sons, whose  views  have  been  confined  to  a  narrow  range  of 
objects,  have  been  disposed  to  declaim  against  such  studies, 
as  if  they  had  a  tendency  to  engender  pride  and  self-conceit, 
and  as  if  they  were  even  dangerous  to  the  interests  of  religion 
and  piety.     How  very  different  were  the  feelings  and  the  con- 
duct of  the  sacred  writers  !     They  call  upon  every  one   of 
God's  intelligent  offspring  to  "stand  still,  and  consider  the  won- 
drous works  of  the  Most  High  ;"  and  describe  the  profound 
emotions  of  piety  which  the  contemplation  of  them  produced 
on  their  own  minds  :  "  Lift  up  your  eyes  on  high  and  behold  ! 
Who  hath  created  these  things !     The  heavens  declare  the 
glory  of  God,  and  the  firmament  showeth  his  handy-work. — 
When  1  consider  thy  heavens,  the  work  of  thy  fingers,  the 
moon  and  the  stars  which  thou  hast  ordained — what  is  man 
that  thou  art  mindful  of  him,  and  the  son  of  man  that  thou 
visitest  him  !     Thou,  even  thou,  art  Lord  alone  ;  thou  hast 
made  heaven,  and  the  heaven  of  heavens,  with  all  their  host, 
and  thou  preservest  them  all ;  and  the  hosts  of  heaven  worship 
thee.     All  the  gods  of  the  nations  are  idols  ;  but  the  Lord 
MADE  THE  HEAVENS  :  Houor  and  Majesty  are  before  him. — 
Jehovah  hath  prepared  his  throne  in  the  heavens  ;  and  his 
kingdom  ruleth  over  all.     Sing  praises   unto  God,  ye  king- 
doms of  the  earth,  to  him  that  rideth  on  the  heaven  of  hea- 
vens.    Ascribe  ye  power  to  our  God  ;  for  his  strength  is  in 
the  heavens.     Praise  him  for  his  mighty  acts,  praise  him  ac- 
cording to  his  excellent  greatness."     If  we  would  enter,  with 
spirit,  into  such  elevated  strains  of  piety,  we  must  content  our- 
selves with  a  passing  and  vacant  stare  at  the  orbs  of  heaven, 
as  if  they  were  only  so  many  brilhant  studs  fixed  in  the  canopy 
of  the  sky  ;  but  must  "  consider"  them,  with  fixed  attention,  in 
all  the  lights  in  which  revelation  and  science  have  exhibited 
them  to  our  view,  if  we  wish  to  praise  God  for  his  mighty 
works,  and  "  according  to  his  excellent  greatness."     And,  for 
this  purpose,  the  conclusions  deduced  by  those  who  have  de- 
voted themselves  to  celestial  investigations,  ought  to  be  pre- 
sented to  the  view  of  the  intelligent  Christian,  that  he  may  be 
enabled  to  "  speak  of  the  glory  of  Jehovah's  kingdom,  and  to 
talk  of  his  power." 


NATURAL    PHILOSOPHY.  201 

Having,  in  the  preceding  sketches,  considerably  exceeded 
the  limits  originally  prescribed  for  this  department  of  my  sub- 
ject, I  am  reluctantly  compelled  to  despatch  the  remaining 
sciences  with  a  few  brief  notices. 

NATURAL    PHILOSOPHY. 

The  object  of  JYatural  Philosophy  is,  to  observe  and  de- 
scribe the  phenomena  of  the  material  universe,  with  a  view  to 
discover  their  causes,  and  the  laws  by  which  the  Almighty  di- 
rects the  movements  of  all  bodies  in  heaven  and  on  earth. — 
It  embraces  an  investigation  of  the  laws  of  gravitation,  by 
which  the  planets  are  directed  in  their  motions — the  laws  by 
which  water,  air,  light,  and  heat  are  regulated,  and  the  effects 
they  produce  in  the  various  states  in  which  they  operate — the 
nature  of  colors,  sounds,  electricity,  galvanism,  and  magnet- 
ism, and  the  laws  of  their  operation — the  causes  which  operate 
in  the  production  of  thunder,  lightning,  luminous  and  fiery 
meteors,  hail,  rain,  snow,  dew,  and  other  atmospherical  phe- 
nomena. In  short,  it  embraces  all  the  objects  of  Natural  His- 
tory formerly  alluded  to,  with  a  viev/  to  ascertain  the  causes 
of  their  varied  appearances,  and  the  principles  that  operate  in 
the  changes  to  which  they  are  subject  ;  or,  in  other  words, 
the  laws  by  which  the  diversified  phenomena  of  universal  na- 
ture are  produced  and  regulated.  One  subordinate  use  of  the 
knowledge  derived  from  this  science,  is,  to  enable  us  to  con- 
struct all  those  mechanical  engines  which  facilitate  human 
labor,  and  increase  the  comforts  of  mankind,  and  all  those  in- 
struments which  tend  to  enlarge  our  views  of  the  operations  of 
nature.  A  still  higher  and  nobler  use  to  which  philosophy  is 
subservient,  is,  to  demonstrate  the  Wisdom  and  Intelligence 
of  the  Great  First  Cause  of  all  things,  and  to  enlarge  our  con- 
ceptions of  the  admirable  contrivance  and  design  which  appear 
in  the  different  departments  of  universal  nature.  In  this  view, 
it  may  be  considered  as  forming  a  branch  of  jYatural  The- 
ology, or,  in  other  words,  a  branch  of  the  religion  of  angels, 
and  of  all  other  holy  intelligences. 

This  department  of  Natural  Science  has  generally  been 
divided  into  the  following  branches  : 

I.  Mechanics. — This  branch,  considered  in  its  most  ex- 
tensive range,  includes  an  investigation  of  the  general  proper- 
ties of  matter  ;  such  as  solidity,  extension,  divisibility,  motion, 
attraction,  and  repulsion — the  law  s  of  gravitation,  and  of  cen- 
tral forces,  as  they  appear  to  operate  in  the  motions  of  the 
celestial  bodies  ;  and  on  the  surface  of  our  globe,  in  the  phe- 
nomena of  falling  bodies,  the  motions  of  projectiles,  the  vibra- 

17* 


202  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

tion  of  pendulums,  &c. — the  theory  of  machines,  the  princi- 
ples on  which  their  energy  depends  ;  the  properties  of  the 
mechanical  powers — the  lever,  the  wheel,  and  axle,  the  'pulley, 
the  inclined  plane,  the  wedge  and  the  screw — and  the  effects 
resulting  from  their  various  combinations.  From  the  investi- 
gations of  philosophers  on  these  subjects,  we  learn  the  laws 
by  which  the  great  bodies  of  the  universe  are  directed  in  their 
motions  ;  the  laws  which  bind  together  the  different  portions 
of  matter  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  and  which  regulate  the 
motions  of  animal,  vegetable,  and  inanimate  nature  ;  and  the 
principles  on  which  cranes,  mills,  wheel-carriages,  pile- 
engines,  threshing-machines,  and  other  engines  are  con- 
structed ;  by  means  of  which,  man  has  been  enabled  to  ac- 
complish operations  far  beyond  the  limits  of  his  own  physical 
powers. 

Without  a  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  motion,  and  assistance 
from  the  combined  effects  of  the  mechanical  powers,  man 
would  be  a  very  limited  being,  his  enjoyments  would  be  few, 
and  his  active  energies  confined  within  a  very  narrow  range. 
In  a  savage  state,  ignorant  of  manufactures,  agriculture,  archi- 
tecture, navigation,  and  the  other  arts  which  depend  upon  me- 
chanical combinations,  he  is  exposed,  without  shelter,  to  the 
inclemencies  of  the  season  ;  he  is  unable  to  transport  himself 
beyond  seas  and  oceans,  to  visit  other  climes  and  other  tribes 
of  his  fellow-men  ;  he  exists  in  the  desert,  comfortless  and 
unimproved  ;  the  fertile  soil,  over  which  he  roams,  is  covered 
with  thorns,  and  briers,  and  thickets,  for  the  haunt  of  beasts  of 
prey  ;  his  enjoyments  are  little  superior  to  those  of  the  lion, 
the  hysena,  and  the  elephant,  while  he  is  much  their  inferior,  in 
point  of  agility  and  physical  strength.  But  when  Philosophy 
has  once  demonstrated  the  principles  of  mechanics,  and  intro- 
duced the  practice  of  the  useful  xlrts,  "  the  wilderness  and  the 
solitary  place  are  made  glad,  and  the  desert  rejoices,  and  blos- 
soms as  the  rose."  Cities  are  founded,  and  gradually  rise  to 
opulence  and  splendor  ;  palaces  and  temples  are  erected  ;  the 
damp  cavern,  and  the  rush-built  hut,  are  exchanged  for  the 
warm  and  comfortable  apartments  of  a  substantial  mansion ; 
ships  are  built,  and  navigated  across  the  ocean  ;  the  treasures 
of  one  country  are  conveyed  to  another  ;  an  intercourse  is 
carried  on  between  the  most  distant  tribes  of  mankind  ;  com- 
merce flourishes,  and  machinery  of  all  kinds  is  erected,  for 
facilitating  human  labor,  and  promoting  the  enjoyments  of  man. 
And  when  the  principles  and  the  practice  of  "  pure  and  unde- 
filed  religion"  accompany  these  physical  and  mechanical  ope- 
rations, love  and  affection  diffuse  their  benign  influence  ;  the 


NATURAL  PHILOSOPHY. 


203 


prospect  brightens  as  years  roll  on,  and  man  advances,  with 
pleasure  and  improvement,  to  the  scene  of  his  high  destination. 

II.  Hydrostatics  treats  of  the  pressure  and  equilibrium  of 
fluids.  From  the  experiments  which  have  been  made  in  this 
branch  of  philosophy,  the  following  important  principles, 
among  many  others,  have  been  deduced  : — 

(1.)  That  the  surface  of  all  waters  which  have  a  communi- 
cation ivhilst  they  are  at  rest,  will  he  perfectly  level.  This 
principle  will  be  more  clearly  understood  by  an  inspection  of 
the  following  figures.  If  water  be  poured  into  the  tube  A, 
(Fig.  1.)  it  wiU  run  through  the  horizontal  tube  E,  and  rise  in 
the  opposite  tube  B,  to  the  same  height  at  which  it  stands  at  A. 


It  is  on  this  principle  that  water  is  now  conveyed  under  ground, 
through  conduit  pipes,  and  made  to  rise  to  the  level  of  the 
fountain  whence  it  is  drawn.  The  city  of  Edinburgh,  a  con- 
siderable part  of  which  is  elevated  above  the  level  of  the  sur- 
rounding country,  is  supplied  with  water  from  a  reservoir  on 
the  Pentland  hills,  several  miles  distant.  The  water  is  con- 
veyed in  leaden  pipes  down  the  declivity  of  the  hill,  along  the 
interjacent  plain,  and  up  to  the  entrance  of  the  castle,  whence 
it  is  distributed  to  all  parts  of  the  city.  If  the  point  A  repre- 
sent the  level  of  the  reservoir,  C  D  will  represent  the  plain 
along  which  the  water  is  conveyed,  and  B  the  elevation  to 
which  it  rises  on  the  castle  hill.  On  the  same  principle,  and 
m  a  similar  manner,  the  city  of  London  is  supplied  with  water 
from  the  water-works  at  London  Bridge.  Had  the  ancients 
been  acquainted  with  this  simple  but  important  principle,  it 
would  have  saved  them  the  labor  and  expense  of  rearing  those 


204  THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

stupendous  works  of  art,  the  Aqueducts,  which  consisted  of 
numerous  arches  of  a  vast  size,  and  sometimes  piled  one 
above  another. 

Fig.  2.  represents  the  syplion,  the  action  of  which  depends 
upon  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere.  If  this  instrument  be 
filled  with  water,  or  any  other  liquid,  and  the  shorter  leg  G, 
plunged  to  the  bottom  of  a  cask,  or  other  vessel,  containing 
the  same  liquid,  the  water  will  run  out  at  the  longer  leg  F,  till 
the  vessel  be  emptied,  in  consequence  of  the  atmospheric 
pressure  upon  the  surface  of  the  liquid.  On  this  principle, 
water  may  be  conveyed  over  a  rising  ground  to  any  distance, 
provided  the  perpendicular  height  of  the  syphon  above  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  in  the  fountain,  does  not  exceed  32  or  33 
feet.  On  the  same  principle  are  constructed  the  fountain  at 
command,  the  cup  of  Tantalus,  and  other  entertaining  devices. 
The  same  principle,  too,  enables  us  to  account  for  springs 
which  are  sometimes  found  on  the  tops  of  mountains,  and  for 
the  phenomena  of  intermitting  springs,  or  those  which  flow 
and  stop  by  regular  alternations. 

(2.)  Jlmj  quantity  of  fluid,  however  small,  may  be  made  to 
counterpoise  any  quantity,  however  large.  This  is  what  has 
generally  been  termed  the  Hydrostatical  Paradox  ;  and  from 
this  principle  it  follows,  that  a  given  quantity  of  water  may 
exert  a  force  several  hundred  times  greater  or  less,  according 
to  the  manner  in  which  it  is  employed.  This  force  depends 
on  the  height  of  the  column  of  water,  independent  of  its  quan- 
tity ;  for  its  pressure  depends  on  its  perpendicular  height.  By 
means  of  water  conveyed  through  a  very  small  perpendicular 
tube,  of  great  length,  a  very  strong  hogshead  has  been  burst 
to  pieces,  and  the  water  scattered  about  with  incredible  force, 
On  this  principle,  the  hydrostatic  press,  and  other  engines  of 
nnmense  power  have  been  constructed. 

(3.)  Every  body  which  is  heavier  than  water,  or  which  sinks 
in  it,  displaces  so  much  of  the  water  as  is  equal  to  the  bulk  of 
the  body  immersed  in  the  water.  On  this  principle,  the  speci- 
fic gravities,  or  comparative  weight,  of  all  bodies  are  deter- 
mined. It  appears  to  have  been  first  ascertained  by  Archi- 
medes, and,  by  means  of  it,  he  determined  that  the  golden 
crown  of  the  King  of  Syracuse  had  been  adulterated  by  the 
workmen.  From  this  principle  we  learn,  among  many  other 
things,  the  specific  gravity  of  the  human  body  ;  and  that  four 
pounds  of  cork  will  preserve  a  person  weighing  135  pounds 
from  sinking,  so  that  he  may  remain  with  his  head  completely 
above  water. 

Hydraulics,  which  has  sometimes  been  treated  £is  a  distinct 


NATURAL    PHILOSOPHY.  205 

department  of  mechanical  philosophy,  may  be  considered  as  a 
branch  of  hydrostatics.  It  teaches  us  what  relates  to  the  mo- 
tion of  fluids,  and  how  to  estimate  their  velocity  and  force. 
On  the  principle  of  this  science,  all  machines  worked  by  water 
are  constructed — as  steam-engines,  water-mills,  common  and 
forcing  pumps,  syphons,  fountains,  and  fire-engines. 

III.  Pneumatics. — This  branch  of  philosophy  treats  of  the 
nature  and  properties  of  the  atmosphere,  and  of  their  effects 
on  solid  and  fluid  bodies.  From  this  science  we  learn,  that 
air  has  weight,  and  presses  on  all  sides,  like  other  fluids  ;  that 
the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  upon  the  top  of  a  mountain,  is 
less  than  on  the  plain  beneath  ;  that  it  presses  upon  our  bodies 
with  a  weight  of  several  thousand  pounds  more  at  one  time 
than  at  another  ;  that  air  can  be  compressed  into  forty  thou- 
sand times  less  space  than  it  naturally  occupies  ;  that  it  is  of  an 
elastic  or  expansive  nature,  and  that  the  force  of  its  spring  is 
equal  to  its  weight ;  that  its  elasticity  is  increased  by  heat  ; 
that  it  is  necessary  to  the  production  of  sound,  the  support  of 
flame  and  animal  life,  and  the  germination  and  growth  of  all 
kinds  of  vegetables. 

These  positions  are  proved  and  illustrated  by  such  experi- 
ments as  the  following  : — The  general  pressure  of  the  atmos- 
phere is  proved  by  such  experiments  as  those  detailed  in  No. 
II.  of  the  Appendix.  The  following  experiment  proves  that 
air  is  compressible.  If  a  glass  tube,  open  at  one  end,  and 
closed  at  the  other,  be  plunged  with  the  open  end  downwards, 
into  a  tumbler  of  water,  the  water  will  rise  a  little  way  in  the 
tube  ;  which  shows,  that  the  air  which  filled  the  tube  is  com- 
pressed by  the  water  into  a  smaller  space.  The  elasticity  of 
air  is  proved  by  tying  up  a  bladder,  with  a  very  small  quantity 
of  air  within  it,  and  putting  it  under  the  receiver  of  an  air 
pump,  when  it  will  be  seen  gradually  to  inflate,  till  it  becomes 
of  its  full  size.  A  similar  effect  would  take  place,  by  carrying 
the  bladder  to  the  higher  regions  of  the  atmosphere.  On  the 
compression  and  elasticity  of  the  air,  depends  the  construc- 
tion of  that  dangerous  and  destructive  instrument,  the  Air- 
gun. 

That  it  is  capable  of  being  rarified  by  heat,  is  proved  by 
holding  to  the  fire  a  half-blown  bladder,  hghtly  tied  at  the 
neck,  when  it  will  dilate  to  nearly  Its  full  size  ;  and  if  either  a 
full-blown  bladder,  or  a  thin  glass  bubble  filled  with  air  is  held 
to  a  strong  fire,  it  will  burst.  The  elasticity  of  the  air  is  such, 
that  Mr.  Boyle,  by  means  of  an  air  pump,  caused  it  to  dilate 
till  it  occupied  fourteen  thousand  times  the  space  that  it  usu- 
ally does. — That  air  is  necessary  to  sound,  flame,  animal  and 


206  THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

vegetable  life,  is  proved  by  the  following  experiments  : — When 
the  receiver  of  an  air-pump  is  exhausted  of  its  air,  a  cat,  a 
mouse,  or  a  bird,  placed  in  it,  expires  in  a  few  moments,  in 
the  greatest  agonies.  A  bell  rung  in  the  same  situation  pro- 
duces no  sound  ;  and  a  hghted  candle  is  instantly  extinguish- 
ed. Similar  experiments  prove  that  air  is  necessary  for  the 
flight  of  birds,  the  ascent  of  smoke  and  vapours,  the  explosion 
of'gun-powder,  and  the  growth  of  plants  ;  and  that  all  bodies 
descend  equally  swift  in  a  place  void  of  air ;  a  guinea  and  a 
feather  being  found  to  fall  to  the  bottom  of  an  exhausted  re- 
ceiver at  the  same  instant.  ' 

On  the  principles  which  this  science  has  established,  have 
been  constructed  the  air-pump,  the  barometer,  the  thermome- 
ter, the  diving-bell,  the  hygrometer,  the  condenser,  and  various 
other  instruments,  which  have  contributed  to  the  comfort  of 
human  Ufe,  and  to  the  enlargement  of  our  knowledge  of  the 
constitution  of  nature. 

IV.  Acoustics. — This  science  treats  of  the  nature,  the 
phenomena,  and  the  laws  of  soimd,  and  the  theory  of  musical 
concord  and  harmony.  From  the  experiments  which  have 
been  made  on  this  subject,  we  learn,  that  air  is  essential  to  the 
production  of  sound  ;  that  it  arises  from  vibrations  in  the  air, 
communicated  to  it  by  vibrations  of  the  sounding  body  ;  that 
these  vibrations,  or  aerial  pulses,  are  propagated  all  around  in 
a  spherical  undulatory  manner  ;  that  their  density  decreases, 
as  the  squares  of  the  distances  from  the  sounding  body  in- 
crease ;  that  they  are  propagated  together  in  great  numbers 
from  different  bodies,  without  disturbance  or  confusion,  as  is 
evident  from  concerts  of  musical  instruments  ;  that  water,  tim- 
ber, and  flannel,  are  also  good  conductors  of  sound  ;  that  sound 
travels  at  the  rate  of  1142  feet  in  a  second,  or  about  thirteen 
miles  in  a  minute  ;  that  the  softest  whisper  flies  as  fast  as  the 
loudest  thunder  ;  and  that  the  utmost  limits,  within  which  the 
loudest  sounds,  produced  by  artificial  means,  can  be  heard,  is 
180  or  200  miles  ;*  that  sound  striking  against  an  obstacle,  as 
the  wall  of  a  house,  may,  like  light,  be  reflected,  and  produce 
another  sound,  which  is  called  an  echo  ;  and  that,  after  it  has 
been  reflected  from  several  places,  it  may  be  collected  into  one 
point  or  focus,  where  it  wifl  be  more  audible  than  in  any  other 

*  In  the  war  between  England  and  Holland,  in  1672,  the  noise  of  the 
euns  was  heard  in  those  parts  of  Wales  which  were  estimated  to  be  two 
hundred  miles  distant  from  the  scene  of  action.  But  the  sounds  produced 
by  volcanoes  have  been  heard  at  a  much  greater  distance  ;  some  instances 
of  which  are  stated  in  Chap.  IV.  Sect.  2.  vSeveral  other  facts  in  relation 
to  sound,  are  detailed  in  Chap.  III.  Art.  *icoustic  Tunnels. 


NATURAL   PHILOSOPHY.  207 

place.     On  these  principles,  whispering  galleries,  speaking 
trumpets,  and  other  acoustic  instruments  are  constructed. 

V.  Optics. — This  branch  of  philosophy  treats  of  vision, 
light,  and  colors,  and  of  the  various  phenomena  of  visible  ob- 
jects produced  by  the  rays  of  light,  reflected  from  mirrors,  or 
transmitted  through  lenses.  From  this  science  we  learn,  that 
light  flies  at  the  rate  of  nearly  twelve  millions  of  miles  every 
minute — that  it  moves  in  straight  lines — that  its  particles  may 
be  several  thousands  of  miles  distant  from  each  other — that 
every  visible  body  emits  particles  of  light  from  its  surface,  in 
all  directions — that  the  particles  of  light  are  exceedingly  small; 
for  a  lighted  candle  will  fill  a  cubical  space  of  two  miles  every 
way  with  its  rays,  before  it  has  lost  the  least  sensible  part  of  its 
substance  ;  and  millions  of  rays,  from  a  thousand  objects,  will 
pass  through  a  hole  not  larger  than  the  point  of  a  needle,  and 
convey  to  the  mind  an  idea  of  the  form,  position,  and  color  of 
every  individual  object — that  the  intensity,  or  degree  of  light 
decreases,  as  the  square  of  the  distance  from  the  luminous 
body  increases  ;  that  is,  at  two  yards'  distance  from  a  candle, 
we  shall  have  only  the  fourth  part  of  the  light  we  should  have 
at  the  distance  of  one  yard  ;  at  three  yards'  distance,  the  ninth 
part ;  at  four  yards,  the  sixteenth  part,  and  so  on — that  glass 
lenses  may  be  ground  into  the  following  forms  ;  plano-convex, 
plano-concave,  double  convex,  double  concave,  and  meniscKS,  that 
is,  convex  on  one  side,  and  concave  on  the  other — that  specula, 
or  mirrors,  may  be  ground  into  either  a  spherical,  parabolical,  or 
cylindrical  form — that,  by  means  of  such  mirrors  and  lenses, 
the  rays  of  light  may  be  so  modified  as  to  proceed  either  in  a 
diverging,  converging,  or  parallel  direction,  and  the  images  of 
visible  objects  represented  in  a  variety  of  new  forms,  positions, 
and  magnitudes — that  every  ray  of  white  light  may  be  stpara- 
ted  into  seven  primary  colors:  red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue, 
indigo,  and  violet — that  the  variegated  coloring  which  appears 
on  the  face  of  nature  is  not  in  the  objects  themselves,  but  in 
the  light  which  falls  upon  them — that  the  rainbow  is  produced 
by  the  refraction  and  reflection  of  the  solar  rays  in  the  drops 
of  falling  rain — that  the  rays  of  light  are  refracted,  or  bent  out 
of  their  course,  when  they  fall  upon  glass,  water,  and  other 
mediums — that  the  light  of  the  sun  may  be  collected  into  a 
point  or  focus,  and  made  to  produce  a  heat  more  intense  than 
that  of  a  furnace* — that  the  rays  from  visible  objects,  when 

*  This  is  produced  by  means  of  lenses,  or  mirrors  of  a  large  diameter, 
called  burning-glasses.  By  these  instruments  the  hardest  metals,  on  wliicii 
common  fires,  and  even  glass-house  furnaces  could  produce  no  effect,  have 
been  melted  in  a  few  seconds.     M.  Villette,  a  Frenchman,  nearly  a  cen 


208  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

reflected  from  a  concave  mirror,  converge  to  a  focus,  and  paint 
an  image  of  the  objects  before  it,  and  that  when  they  pass 
through  a  convex  glass,  they  depict  an  image  behind  it. 

On  these  and  other  principles  demonstrated  by  this  science, 
the  Camera  Obscura,  the  Magic  Lantern,  the  Phantasmagoria, 
the  Kaleidoscope,  the  Heliostata,  the  Micrometer— Spectacles, 
Opera-Glasses,  Prisms,  single,  compound,  lucernal,  and  solar 
Microscopes,  reflecting  and  refracting  Telescopes,  and  other 
optical  instruments,  have  been  constructed,  by  means  of  v^^hich 
the  natural  powers  of  human  vision  have  been  wonderfully 
increased,  and  our  prospects  into  the  works  of  God  extended 
far  beyond  what  former  ages  could  have  conceived. 

VI.  Electricity. — This  name  has  been  given  to  a  science 
which  explains  and  illustrates  the  operations  of  a  very  subtile 
fluid  called  the  electric  fluid,  which  appears  to  pervade  every 
part  of  nature,  and  to  be  one  of  the  chief  agents  employed  in 
producing  many  of  the  phenomena  of  the  material  world.  If 
a  piece  of  amber,  sealing  wax,  or  sulphur,  be  rubbed  with  a 
piece  of  flannel,  it  will  acquire  the  power  of  attracting  small  bits 
of  paper,  feathers,  or  other  light  substances.  If  a  tube  of  glass, 
two  or  three  feet  in  length,  and  an  inch  or  two  in  diameter,  be 
rubbed  pretty  hard,  in  a  dark  room,  with  a  piece  of  dry  woollen 
cloth,  besides  attracting  light  substances,  it  will  emit  flashes  of 
fire,  attended  with  a  crackling  noise.  This  luminous  matter  is 
called  electricity,  or  the  electric  fluid.  If  a  large  globe  or  cylin- 
der of  glass,  be  turned  rapidly  round,  and  made  to  rub  against 
a  cushion,  streams  and  large  sparks  of  bluish  flame  will  be 
elicited,  which  will  fly  round  the  glass,  attract  light  bodies,  and 
produce  a  pungent  sensation  if  the  hand  be  held  to  it.  This 
glass,  with  all  its  requisite  apparatus,  is  called  an  electrical  ma- 
chine.  It  is  found,  that  this  fluid  will  pass  along  some  bodies, 
and   not  along  others.     The  bodies  over  which  it  pass  freely 

tury  ago  constructed  a  mirror,  three  feet  eleven  inches  in  diameter,  and 
three  feet  two  inches  in  focal  distance,  which  melted  copper  ore  in  eight 
seconds,  iron  ore  in  twenty-four  seconds,  a  fish's  tooth  in  thirty-two  seconds, 
east  iron  in  sixteen  seconds,  a  silver  sixpence  in  seven  seconds,  and  tin  in 
three  seconds.  This  mirror  condensed  the  solar  rays  17,257  times,  a  de- 
gree of  heat  which  is  about /our  hundred  and  ninety  times  greater  than  com- 
mon fire.  Mr.  Parker,  of  London,  constructed  a  lens  three  feet  in  diame- 
ter, and  six  feet  eight  inches  focus,  which  weighed  212  pounds.  It  melted 
twenty  grains  of  gold  in  four  seconds,  and  ten  grains  of  platina  in  three 
seconds.  The  power  of  burning  glasses  is,  as  the  area  of  the  lens  directly, 
and  the  square  of  the  focus  distance  inversely— or,  in  other  words,  the  broader 
the  mirror  or  lens,  and  the  shorter  the  focal  distance,  the  more  intense  is 
the  heat  produced  by  such  instruments.  A  globular  decanter  of  water 
makes  a  powerful  burning-glass ;  and  house  furniture  has  been  set  on  fire 
by  incautiously  exposing  it  to  the  rays  of  the  sun. 


NATURAL    PHILOSOPHY.  209 

are  water,  and  most  other  fluids,  except  oil  and  the  aerial  fluids ; 
iron,  copper,  lead,  and,  in  general  all  the  metals,  semi-metals, 
and  metallic  ores  ;  which  are,  therefore,  called  conductors  of 
electricity.  But  it  will  not  pass  over  glass,  resin,  wax,  sulphur, 
silk,  baked  woods,  or  dry  woollen  substances ;  nor  through  air, 
except  by  force,  in  sparks,  to  short  distances.  These  bodies 
are,  therefore,  called  non-conductors. 

The  following  facts,  among  others,  have  been  ascertained 
respecting  this  wonderful  agent: — That  all  bodies  with  which 
we  are  acquainted,  possess  a  greater  or  less  share  of  this  fluid 
— that  the  quantity  usually  belonging  to  any  body  produces  no 
sensible  eftects  ;  but  when  any  surface  becomes  possessed  of 
more  or  less  than  its  natural  share,  it  exhibits  certain  appear- 
ances, in  the  form  of  hght,  sound,  attraction,  or  repulsion, 
which  are  ascribed  to  the  power  called  electric — that  there  are 
two  different  species  of  the  electrical  fluid,  or,  at  least,  two 
diflerent  modifications  of  the  same  general  principle,  termed 
positive  and  negative  electricity — that  positive  and  negative 
electricity  always  accompany  each  other  ;  for  if  a  substance 
acquire  the  one,  the  body  with  which  it  is  rubbed  acquires  the 
the  other — that  it  moves  with  amazing  rapidity  ;  having  been 
transmitted  through  wire  of  several  miles  in  length,  without 
taking  up  any  sensible  space  of  time  ;  and,  therefore,  it  is  not 
improbable,  that  were  an  insulated  conducting  substance  ex- 
tended from  one  continent  to  another,  it  might  be  made  to  fly 
to  the  remotest  regions  of  the  earth  in  a  few  seconds  of  time 
— that  it  has  a  power  of  suddenly  contracting  the  muscles  of 
animals,  or  of  giving  a  shock  to  the  animal  frame — that  this 
shock  may  be  communicated,  at  the  same  instant,  to  a  hun- 
dred persons,  or  to  an  indefinite  number  who  form  a  circle,  by 
joining  their  hands  together — that  it  may  be  accumulated  to 
such  a  degree  as  to  kill  the  largest  animals — that  vivid  sparks 
of  this  fluid,  attended  with  a  crackling  noise,  may  be  drawn 
from  diflferent  parts  of  the  human  body,  when  the  person  is 
insulated,  or  stands  upon  a  stool  supported  by  glass  feet — that 
electricity  sets  fire  to  gun-powder,  spirits  of  wine,  and  other 
inflammable  substances — that  it  melts  iron  wire,  and  destroys 
the  polarity  of  the  magnetic  needle — that  it  augments  the 
natural  evaporation  of  fluids,  promotes  the  vegetation  of  plants, 
and  increases  the  insensible  perspiration  of  animals  ;  and  can 
be  drawn  from  the  clouds  by  means  of  electrical  kites,  and 
other  elevated  conductors.  By  means  of  the  electrical  power, 
small  models  of  machinery  have  been  set  in  action  :  orreries 
to  represent  the  movements  of  the  planets,  have  been  put  in 
motion  ;  and  small  bells  have  been  set  a-ringing  for  a  length 

18 


310  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

of  time  ;  and,  in  consequence  of  the  knowledge  we  have  ac- 
quired of  the  mode  of  its  operation  in  the  system  of  nature,  the 
hghtnings  of  heaven  have  been  arrested  in  their  course,  and 
constrained  to  descend  to  the  earth,  without  producing  any 
injurious  effects. 

From  these,  and  a  variety  of  other  facts  and  experiments, 
it  is  now  fully  ascertained,  that  lightning  and  electricity  are 
identical ;  and  that  it  is  the  prime  agent  in  producing  the  awful 
phenomena  of  a  thunder-storm  ;  the  lightning  being  the  rapid 
motion  of  vast  masses  of  electric  matter,  and  thunder  the  noise, 
with  its  echoes,  produced  by  the  rapid  motion  of  the  lightning " 
through  the  atmosphere. — There  can  be  little  doubt  that,  in 
combination  with  steam,  the  gasses,  and  other  agents,  it  also 
produces  many  of  the  terrific  phenomena  of  earthquakes,  volca- 
noes, whirlwinds,  water-spouts,  and  hurricanes,  and  the  sublime 
coruscations  of  the  aurora  borealis.  In  the  operations  of  this 
powerful  fluid  we  behold  a  striking  display  of  the  sovereignty 
and  majestic  agency  of  God.  In  directing  its  energies,  "  his 
way  is  in  the  whirlwind  and  the  storm,  and  the  clouds  are  the 
dust  of  his  feet  ;  the  heavens  are  covered  with  sackcloth,  the 
mountains  quake  before  him,  the  hills  melt,  the  earth  is  burned 
at  his  presence,  the  rocks  are  thrown  down  by  him  :"  Neh.  i. 
3 — 6.  It  is  easy  to  conceive,  that,  by  a  few  slight  modifica- 
tions produced  by  the  hand  of  Omnipotence,  this  powerful  fluid 
might  become  the  agent  of  producing  either  the  most  awful 
and  tremendous,  or  the  most  glorious  and  transportmg  scenes, 
over  every  region  of  our  globe.  As  it  now  operates,  it  is  cal- 
culated to  inspire  us  rather  with  awe  and  terror  than  with 
admiration  and  joy;  and  to  lead  our  thoughts  to  a  considera- 
tion of  the  state  of  man  as  a  depraved  intelligence,  and  a  rebel 
against  his  Maker. 

VII.  Galvanism  is  intimately  connected  with  electricity, 
though  it  is  generally  considered  as  a  branch  of  Chemistry. 
It  is  only  another  mode  of  exciting  electrical  action.  In  elec- 
tricity the  effects  are  produced  chiefly  by  mechanical  action  ; 
but  the  effects  of  Galvanism  are  produced  by  the  chemical 
action  of  bodies  upon  each  other.  If  we  take  a  piece  of  zinc, 
and  place  it  under  the  tongue,  and  lay  a  piece  of  silver,  as  big 
as  a  half-crown,  above  it ;  by  bringing  the  outer  edges  of  these 
pieces  in  contact,  we  shall  immediately  experience  a  peculiar 
and  disagreeable  taste,  hke  that  of  copper.  The  same  thing 
may  be  noticed  with  a  guinea  and  a  piece  of  charcoal.  If  a 
person,  in  the  dark,  put  a  slip  of  tinfoil  upon  one  of  his  eyes, 
and  a  piece  of  silver  in  his  mouth,  by  causing  these  pieces  to 
communicate,  a  faint  flash  will  appear  before  his  eyes.     If  a 


NATURAL    PHILOSOPHY.  211 

living  frog  or  a  fish,  having  a  slip  of  tinfoil  pasted  upon  its 
back,  be  placed  upon  a  piece  of  zinc,  by  forming  a  communi- 
cation between  the  zinc  and  tinfoil,  the  spasms  of  the  muscles 
are  excited.  These  and  similar  effects  are  produced  by  that 
modification  of  electricity  which  has  been  termed  Galvanism. 
Three  different  conductors,  or  what  is  called  a  galvanic  circle, 
are  requisite  to  produce  such  effects  A  piece  of  copper,  a 
piece  of  flannel,  moistened  with  water  or  acid,  and  a  piece  of 
zinc,  laid  upon  one  another,  form  a  circle  ;  and  if  this  circle 
be  repeated  a  number  of  times,  a  galvanic  pile  or  battery  may 
be  formed  capable  of  giving  a  powerful  shock.  The  most 
common  and  convenient  form,  however,  of  a  battery,  is  found 
to  be  a  trough  of  baked  wood,  three  or  four  inches  deep  and 
as  many  wide.  In  the  sides  are  grooves,  opposite  to  each 
other,  into  each  of  which  is  placed  a  double  metallic  plate,  of 
zinc  and  copper  soldered  together,  and  the  cells  are  then  filled 
either  with  salt  and  water,  or  with  a  solution  of  nitrous  acid 
and  water. 

By  means  of  the  galvanic  agency,  a  variety  of  surprising 
effects  have  been  produced.  Gunpowder,  cotton,  and  other 
inflammable  substances,  have  been  inflamed — charcoal  has 
been  made  to  burn,  with  a  most  brilliant  and  beautiful  white 
flame — water  has  been  decomposed  into  its  elementary  parts 
— metals  have  been  melted  and  set  on  fire — fragments  of 
diamond,  charcoal,  and  plumbago,  have  been  dispersed,  as  if 
they  had  been  evaporated — platina,  the  hardest  and  heaviest  of 
the  metals,  has  been  melted  as  readily  as  wax  in  the  flame  of 
a  candle — the  sapphire,  quartz,  magnesia,  lime,  and  the  firmest 
compounds  in  nature,  have  been  made  to  enter  into  fusion. — 
Its  effects  on  the  animal  system  are  no  less  surprising.  When 
applied  to  a  fowl  or  a  rabbit,  inmiediately  after  life  is  extinct, 
it  produces  the  most  strange  and  violent  convulsions  on  the 
nervous  and  muscular  system,  as  if  the  vital  functions  were 
again  revived ;  and  when  applied  to  the  human  body  after 
death,  the  stimulus  has  produced  the  most  horrible  contortions 
and  grimaces  in  the  muscles  of  the  head  and  face ;  and  the 
most  rapid  movements  in  the  hands  and  feet. 

The  galvanic  agency  enables  us  to  account  for  the  follow- 
ing among  other  facts  : — Why  porter  has  a  different  and  more 
pleasant  taste,  when  drunk  out  of  a  pewter  vessel,  than  out  of 
glass  or  earthen  ware, — why  a  silver  spoon  is  discolored  when 
used  in  eating  eggs, — why  the  limbs  of  people,  under  amputa- 
tion, are  sometimes  convulsed  by  the  application  of  the  instru- 
ments,— why  pure  mercury  is  oxydized  when  amalgamated 
with  tin, — why  works  of  metal,  which  are  soldered  together, 


212  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

soon  tarnish  in  the  places  where  the  metals  are  joined, — and 
why  the  copper  sheathing  of  ships,  when  fastened  with  iron 
nails,  are  soon  corroded  about  the  place  of  contact.  In  all 
these  cases  a  galvanic  circle  is  formed,  which  produces  the 
effects.  We  have  reason  to  believe,  that,  in  combination  with 
the  discoveries  which  modern  chemistry  is  daily  unfolding,  the 
agencies  of  this  fluid  will  enable  us  to  carry  the  arts  forward 
towards  perfection,  and  to  trace  the  secret  causes  of  some  of 
the  sublimest  phenomena  of  nature. 

VIII.  Magnetism. — This  department  of  philosophy  de- 
scribes the  phenomena,  and  the  properties  of  the  loadstone,  or 
natural  magnet.  The  natural  magnet  is  a  hard  dark-colored 
mineral  body,  and  is  usually  found  in  iron  mines.  The  follow- 
ing are  some  of  its  characteristic  properties  : — 1.  It  attracts 
iron  and  steel,  and  all  substances  which  contain  iron  in  its 
metallic  state.  2.  If  a  magnet  be  suspended  by  a  thread,  or 
nicely  poised  on  a  pivot,  or  placed  on  a  piece  of  wood,  and 
set  to  float  in  a  basin  of  water,  one  end  will  constantly  point 
nearly  towards  the  north  pole  of  the  earth,  and  the  other 
towards  the  south  ;  and,  hence,  these  parts  of  the  magnet  have 
been  called  the  Jiorth  and  south  jjoles.  3.  When  the  north 
pole  of  one  magnet  is  presented  near  to  the  south  pole  of 
another,  they  will  attract  each  other ;  but  if  the  north  pole  of 
one  be  presented  to  the  north  pole  of  another,  or  a  south  pole 
to  a  south,  they  will  repel  each  other.  4.  A  magnet  placed  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  be  entirely  at  liberty,  inclines  one  of  its 
poles  to  the  horizon,  and  of  course  elevates  the  other  above  it. 
This  property  is  called  the  dipping  of  the  magnet.  5.  Mag- 
nets do  not  point  directly  north  and  south ;  but  in  different 
parts  of  the  world  with  a  different  declination  eastward  or  west- 
ward of  the  north  ;  it  is  also  different  at  the  same  place  at 
different  times.  In  London,  and  in  most  places  of  Great 
Britain,  the  magnetic  needle,  at  present,  points  about  24 
degrees  to  the  west  of  the  north.  For  more  than  160  years 
it  has  been  gradually  declining  from  the  north  to  the  west ;  but 
seems  of  late  to  have  begun  its  declination  to  the  eastward. 
6.  Any  magnet  may  be  made  to  communicate  the  properties 
now  mentioned,  to  any  piece  of  iron  or  steel.  For  example, 
by  gently  rubbing  a  penknife  with  a  magnet,  it  will  be  immedi- 
ately invested  with  the  property  of  attracting  needles,  or  small 
pieces  of  iron  or  steel.  7.  Heat  weakens  the  power  of  a 
magnet,  and  the  gradual  addition  of  weight  increases  the  mag- 
netic power.  8.  The  properties  of  the  magnet  are  not  affected 
either  by  the  presence  or  the  absence  of  air  ;  and  the  magnetic 
attraction  is  not  in  the  least  diminished  by  the  interposition  of 


NATURAL    PHILOSOPHr.  21S 

any  bodies  except  iron.  A  magnet  will  equally  affect  the 
needle  of  a  pocket  compass,  when  a  thick  board  is  placed 
between  them  as  when  it  is  removed. — It  has  been  lately  dis- 
covered, that  the  violet  rays  of  the  solar  spectrum,  when  con- 
densed with  a  convex  glass,  and  made  to  pass  along  a  piece 
of  steel,  have  the  power  of  communicating  to  it  the  magnetic 
virtue. 

The  cause  which  produces  these  singular  properties  of  the 
magnet,  has  hitherto  remained  a  mystery  ;  but  the  knowledge 
of  the  polarity  of  the  magnet  has  been  applied  to  a  most  im- 
portant practical  purpose.  By  means  of  it,  man  has  now 
acquired  the  dominion  of  the  ocean,  and  has  learned  to  trace 
his  course  through  the  pathless  deep  to  every  region  of  the 
globe.  There  can  be  little  doubt  that  magnetism  has  an  inti- 
mate connexion  with  electricity,  galvanism,  light,  heat,  and 
chemical  action  ;  and  the  discoveries  which  have  been  lately 
made,  and  the  experiments  which  are  now  making  by  Mori- 
chini.  Oersted,  Abraham,  Hansteen,  Barlow,  Beaufoy,  and 
Scoresby,  promise  to  throw  some  light  on  this  mysterious 
agent,  and  on  the  phenomena  of  nature  with  which  it  is  con- 
nected. 

Such  is  a  faint  outline  of  some  of  the  interesting  subjects 
whicn  Natural  Philosophy  embraces.  Its  relation  to  Religion 
will  appear  from  the  following  considerations  : — 

1.  Its  researches  have  led  to  the  invention  of  machines, 
engines,  and  instruments  of  various  kinds,  which  augment  the 
energies,  increase  the  comforts,  and  promote  the  general 
improvement  of  mankind  ;  and  these  objects  are  inseparably 
connected  with  the  propagation  of  Christianity  through  the 
world.  If  we  admit,  that,  in  future  ages,  the  religion  of  the 
Bible  \vill  shed  its  benign  influence  over  all  nations — that  the 
external  condition  of  the  human  race  will  then  be  prosperous 
and  greatly  meliorated  beyond  what  it  has  ever  been — and, 
that  no  miraculous  interposition  of  Deity  is  to  be  expected  to 
bring  about  such  desirable  events — it  will  follow,  that  such 
objects  can  be  accomplished  only  in  the  ordinary  course  of 
Providence,  by  rational  investigations  into  the  principles  and 
powers  of  Nature,  and  the  application  of  the  inventions  of 
science  to  the  great  objects  of  religion,  and  of  human  improve- 
ment, as  I  shall  endeavour  briefly  to  illustrate  in  the  following 
chapter.  As  the  destructive  eflfects  of  many  physical  agents, 
in  the  present  constitution  of  our  globe,  are,  doubtless,  a  con- 
sequence of  the  sin  and  depravity  of  man  ;  we  have  reason 
to  beheve  that,  when  the  economy  of  nature  shall  be  more 
extensively  and  minutely  investigated,  and  the  minds  of  men 

18* 


214  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

directed  to  apply  their  discoveries  to  philanthropic  and  religious 
objects,  they  will  be  enabled  to  counteract,  in  a  great  measure, 
those  devastations  and  tatal  effects  which  are  now  produced 
by  several  of  the  powers  of  nature.  The  general  happiness 
of  all  ranks,  which  will  be  connected  with  the  universal  exten- 
sion of  Christianity,  necessarily  supposes,  that  this  object  will 
be  accomplished  ;  for,  were  a  dread  of  destruction  from  the 
elements  of  nature  frequently  to  agitate  the  mind,  as  at  present, 
no  permanent  tranquillity  would  be  enjoyed  ;  nor  w^ould  that 
ancient  prediction,  in  reference  to  this  era,  receive  its  full 
accomplishment,  that  "there  shall  be  nothing  to  hurt  07^  destroy 
in  all  God's  holy  mountain,  when  the  earth  shall  be  full  of  the 
knowledge  of  the  Lord."  And  since  miraculous  interpositions 
are  not  to  be  expected,  to  what  quarter  can  we  look  for  those 
subordinate  agencies  by  which  this  object  is  to  be  effected, 
but  to  the  discoveries  and  inventions  of  philosophical  science  ] 
Science  has  already  enabled  us  to  remedy  many  of  those 
evils  which  are  the  accidental  effects  of  the  operation  of  physi- 
cal agents.  For  example — the  discoveries  of  the  philosopher, 
with  respect  to  the  nature  of  the  electric  fluid,  have  enabled 
us  to  construct  conductors  for  preserving  buildings  from  the 
stroke  oUightning  :  and  we  have  every  reason  to  hope,  that, 
in  the  progress  of  electric,  galvanic,  and  chemical  science, 
more  complete  thunder  guards,  applicable  to  all  the  situations 
in  which  a  person  may  be  exposed,  vvill  be  invented.  Nay, 
our  increasing  knowledge  of  the  electric  fluid,  and  of  the  che- 
mical agents  which  concur  in  its  operation,  may  enable  us  to 
dissipate  thunder-storms  altogether,  by  disturbing  the  electri- 
city of  the  clouds  by  means  of  a  series  of  elevated  artificial 
conductors.  This  is  not  only  possible,  but  has  already  been 
in  some  degree  effected.  The  celebrated  Euler  imforms  us, 
in  his  "  Letters  to  a  German  Princess,'^  that  he  corresponded 
with  a  Moravian  priest,  named  Divisch,  who  assured  him, 
"  that  he  had  averted,  during  a  whole  summer,  every  thunder- 
storm which  threatened  his  own  habitation  and  the  neighbour- 
hood, by  means  of  a  machine  constructed  ^n  the  principles  of 
electricity — that  the  machinery  sensibly  attracted  the  clouds, 
and  constrained  them  to  descend  quietly  in  a  distillation,  with- 
out any  but  a  very  distant  thunder  clap."  Euler  assures  us 
that  "  the  fact  is  undoubted,  and  confirmed  by  irresistable 
proof."  Yea,  not  only  may  the  destructive  effects  of  hghtning 
be  averted  by  the  inventions  of  philosophy,  but  it.*  agency  may 
be  rendered  subservient  to  human  industry,  and  made  to  act 
as  a  mechanical  power.  This  effect,  too,  has  been  partially 
accomplished.    About  the  year  181 1,  in  the  viffage  of  Philips- 


NATURAL    PHILOSOPHT.  215 

thai,  in  Eastern  Prussia,  an  attempt  was  made  to  split  an  im- 
mense stone  into  a  multitude  of  pieces,  by  means  of  lightning. 
A  bar  of  iron,  in  the  form  of  a  conductor,  was  previously  fixed 
to  the  stone,  and  the  experiment  was  attended  with  ihe  most 
complete  success  ;  for,  during  the  very  first  thunder-storm, 
the  lightning  burst  the  stone  without  displacing  it.* 

It  is,  therefore,  probable,  that  in  the  future  ages  of  the  world, 
this  terrific  meteor,  and  other  destructive  agents,  which  now 
produce  so  much  alarm,  and  so  many  disastrous  eflfects,  may, 
by  the  aid  of  philosophy,  be  brought  under  the  control  of  man, 
and  be  made  to  minister  to  his  enjoyment. 

The  electric  fluid  has  also  been,  in  many  instances,  success- 
fully applied  in  curing  palsies,  rheumatisms,  spasms,  obstruc- 
tions, and  inflammation ;  and  it  is  known  to  have  a  peculiar  eflect 
on  the  nervous  system.  Lightning  has  been  known  to  restore 
the  blind  to  a  temporary  enjoyment  of  sight.  Mr.  Campbell 
of  Succoth,  in  Dumbartonshire,  who  had  been  blind  for  seve- 
ral years,  was  led  by  his  servant  one  evening  through  the 
streets  of  Glasgow,  during  a  terrible  thunder-storm.  The 
lightning  sometimes  fluttered  along  the  streets  for  a  quarter  of 
a  minute  without  ceasing.  While  this  fluttering  lasted,  Mr. 
C.  saw  the  street  distinctly,  and  the  changes  which  had  been 
made  in  that  part  by  taking  down  one  of  the  city  gates.  When 
the  storm  was  over,  his  entire  blindnes^  returned. — A  still 
more  remarkable  instance  is  stated,  along  with  this,  under  the 
article  Thunder, in  Dr.  Gleig's  Supp.  to  Ency.  Brit,  which  was 
written  by  the  late  Professor  Rol3inson.  It  is  also  possible 
that  barren  deserts  might  be  enriched  with  fertility,  and  im- 
mense portions  of  the  desolate  wastes  of  our  globe  prepared 
for  the  support  and  accommodation  of  human  beings,  by  ar- 
resting the  clouds,  and  drawing  down  their  electrical  virtue  and 
their  watery  treasures  by  means  of  an  extended  series  of  ele- 
vated metallic  conductors.  What  has  been  now  stated  is  only 
one  instance,  out  of  many,  which  might  be  adduced,  of  the 
extensive  and  beneficial  eflfects  which  may  be  produced,  in 
future  ages,  by  the  application  of  the  discoveries  of  natural 
science. 

2.  A  knowledge  of  Natural  Philosophy  enables  us  to  detect 
pretended  miracles,  and  to  discriminate  between  those  pheno- 
mena which  are  produced  by  the  powers  of  nature,  and  the 
supposed  effects  of  diabolical  influence.  It  has  been  chiefly 
owing  to  ignorance  of  the  principles  of  natural  science,  that 
mankind,  in  all  ages,  have  been  so  easily  imposed  upon  by  pre- 

*  See  Monthly  Magazine,  vol.  32,  p.  162. 


216  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

tenders  to  supernatural  powers.  It  is  owing  to  the  same 
cause,  that  superstitious  notions  and  vain  alarms  have  spread 
their  influence  so  extensively  among  the  lower  ranks  of  the 
population  of  every  country.  The  pretended  miracles  by 
which  Pagan  and  Popish  Priests  endeavour  to  support  the 
authority  of  their  respective  religious  systems,  and  every 
species  of  degrading  superstition,  vanish  into  smoke,  when 
examined  by  the  light  of  modern  science  ;  and  there  can  be  no 
question  that  an  enlightened  Missionary  would,  in  many  in- 
stances, find  the  principles  and  the  instruments  of  natural 
philosophy  important  auxiliaries  in  undermining  the  fabric  of 
heathen  idolatry  and  priestcraft.  They  tend  to  dissipate  a 
thousand  idle  terrors  which  haunt  and  agitate  the  human  mind  ; 
to  detect  a  thousand  kinds  of  imposture  by  which  it  has  been 
held  in  cruel  bondage  ;  and  to  prevent  the  perpetration  of  those 
deeds  of  cruelty  which  have  uniformly  marked  the  reign  of  Su- 
perstition.* Had  our  forefathers  connected  a  knowledge  of 
this  subject  with  their  study  of  the  Scriptures,  they  would  not 
have  brought  upon  themselves  that  indelible  disgrace  which 
now  attaches  to  their  memories,  on  account  of  their  having 
condemned  and  burned  at  the  stake  hundreds  of  unhappy  wo- 
men, accused  of  crimes  of  which  they  could  not  possibly  have 
been  guilty.  In  New-England,  towards  the  close  of  the  17th 
century,  the  witchcraft  phrensy  rose  so  high,  that  the  execu- 
tion of  witches  became  a  calamity  more  dreadful  than  the 
sword  or  the  pestilence.  Not  only  old  women,  but  children  of 
ten  years  were  put  to  death  ;  young  girls  were  stripped  naked, 
and  the  marks  of  witchcraft  searched  for  upon  their  bodies 
with  the  most  indecent  curiosity ;  and  those  spots  of  the 
scurvy  which  age  impresses  upon  the  bodies  of  old  men,  were 
taken  for  evident  signs  of  infernal  power.  So  that  ignorance 
of  the  laws  and  phenomena  of  nature  has  led  even  Christians 

*  Mr.  Douglas,  in  his  "  Hints  on  Missions,"  formerly  referred  to,  when 
speaking  of  the  faciUties  which  Christians  now  possess  for  extensive  mis- 
sionary exertions,  suggests,  that  Natural  Philosopliy  might  be  an  import- 
ant auxiUary  to  Christian  Missionaries.  "  All  the  ancient  '  war  weapons 
of  victory,'  excepting  miracles,  are  at  their  disposal ;  and  new  instruments 
of  still  greater  potency,  which  the  science  of  the  latter  days  has  been  accu- 
mulating for  a  universal  revolution  of  the  mind,  are  ready  to  be  brought 
into  action,  upon  a  scale  of  overpowering  magnitude.  Even  the  single  re- 
source which  is  lost  may  yet  be  recompensed  by  equivalents,  and  a  substi- 
tute, in  many  respects,  may  be  found  for  miracles.  The  first  effect  of  a 
miracle  is,  to  rouse  the  attention,  and  to  overawe  opposing  prejudices ; 
the  second  to  afford  a  proof  of  the  religion  of  which  it  is  a  sealing  accom- 
paniment. The  first  object  might  be  gained  by  the  natural  magic  of  experi- 
mental Philosophy :  and  as  to  the  second,  the  difference  in  the  proof  from 
miracles,  Hes  rather  in  its  being  more  circuitous,  than  in  its  being  less  con- 
clusive at  the  present  day,  than  in  the  times  of  the  Apostles." 


NATURAL   PHILOSOPHY.  217 

to  commit  acts  of  injustice  and  horrid  cruelty.  For,  let  it  be 
remembered,  that  it  was  Christian  magistrates  and  ministers, 
under  a  pretended  zeal  for  the  honor  of  God,  who  sanctioned 
such  cruel  and  unrighteous  decrees.  This  consideration, 
viewed  in  connection  with  many  others,  tends  to  show,  that 
the  Christian  revelation,  considered  abstractly  by  itself,  with- 
out a  reference  to  the  visible  system  of  the  universe,  is  not 
sufficient  for  all  the  purposes  for  which  it  was  intended  ;  as, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  study  of  the  works  of  nature  is  not  suffi- 
cient of  itself  to  lead  the  mind  to  the  true  knowledge  of  God, 
without  the  aid  of  the  discoveries  derived  from  the  sacred  ora- 
cles. For,  although  the  Bible  has  been  in  the  hands  of  Pro- 
testant Christians  ever  since  the  reformation,  yet  it  is  only 
since  the  light  of  modern  science  began  to  diffiise  its  influence, 
that  the  superstitions  of  the  dark  ages,  and  the  vulgar  notions 
respecting  witchcraft,  necromancy,  and  other  species  of  infer- 
nal agency,  began  to  vanish,  even  from  the  minds  of  Christian 
teachers  ;  as  is  evident  from  the  writing  of  many  eminent 
divines  who  flourished  during  the  16th  and  17th  centuries. 
As  the  two  revelations  which  God  has  given  us  throw  a  mutual 
lustre  on  each  other  ;  the  one  must  always  be  considered  as 
incomplete  without  the  other.  Both  are  necessary  in  order 
"  to  made  the  man  of  God  perfect,"  and  to  enable  him  to  pro- 
secute, with  inteUigence  and  success,  the  great  objects  of  re- 
ligion ;  and  the  Christian  minister  who  affects  to  despise  the 
aids  of  science  in  the  cause  of  religion,  has  yet  much  to  learn 
with  respect  to  some  of  the  grand  bearings  of  the  Christian 
system. 

3.  The  investigations  of  natural  philosophy  unfold  to  us  the 
incessant  agency  of  God,  and  the  plans  by  which  his  wise  and 
benevolent  designs  in  the  system  of  nature  are  accomplished. 
From  the  immeasurable  globes  of  heaven,  down  to  the  mi- 
nutest atoms,  we  perceive  a  regular  chain  of  causes  and  ef- 
fects, conspiring,  in  a  thousand  different  modes,  to  accomplish 
the  purposes  of  infinite  wisdom  and  goodness.  The  operation 
of  central  forces,  and  of  the  law  of  gravitation  on  the  earth 
and  in  the  heavens — the  hydrostatical  laws  which  regulate  the 
pressure  and  the  motion  of  fluids — the  chemical  properties  ot 
the  atmosphere,  its  undulatory,  refractive,  and  reflective  pow- 
ers— the  motion  of  the  rays  of  light,  and  the  infinite  variety  of 
effects  they  produce — the  process  of  evaporation — the  agen- 
cies of  electricity  and  galvanism — the  properties  of  the  mag- 
net, and  the  chemical  action  of  acids  and  alkalies,  and  of  the 
minutest  particles  of  matter  upon  each  other — ought  to  be 
viewed  as  so  many  modifications  of  the  agency  of  Deity,  and 


218  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

as  manifestations  of  his  Wisdom,  in  carrying  forward  those 
plans  which  regard  the  interests  of  his  universal  kingdom  ; 
just  as  we  consider  the  rise  and  fall  of  empires,  the  revolutions 
of  nations,  and  the  circulation  of  the  Scriptures  in  heathen 
lands,  as  so  many  acts  of  his  moral  administration  as  the 
Governor  of  mankind.  For  let  it  be  carefully  remembered, 
that  all  these  physical  agencies  have  ultimately  a  moral  and 
intellectual  bearing  ;  and  are  essentially  connected  with  every 
other  part  of  God's  providential  procedure.  Though  we  may 
be  apt  to  consider  them  as  so  many  detached  and  insulated 
pieces  of  machinery,  with  which  we  have  little  concern,  or 
may  even  disdain  to  notice  their  mode  of  operation  ;  yet,  in  the 
All-comprehensive  mind  of  Him  who  takes  in,  at  one  glance, 
the  whole  chain  of  causes  and  effects,  they  are  as  essentially 
connected  with  his  ultimate  purposes,  and  the  eternal  destiny 
of  man,  as  are  the  revelations  of  his  word. — Were  a  single 
principle  or  motion  which  now  animates  the  system  of  nature 
to  cease — were  the  agencies  of  electricity,  for  example,  or  the 
principle\)f  evaporation  to  be  destroyed — the  physical  consti- 
tution of  our  globe  would  instantly  be  deranged  ;  nature  would 
be  thrown  into  confusion  ;  and  the  sentient  and  intellectual 
beings  that  now  inhabit  the  earth  would  either  be  destroyed,  or 
plunged  into  an  abyss  of  misery.  If,  therefore,  we  admit  that 
the  moral  agency  of  God  is  worthy  of  our  contemplation,  we 
ought  to  consider  his  physical  operations  also  as  no  less  worthy 
of  our  study  and  investigation  ;  since  they  form  the  ground- 
work of  all  his  other  manifestations. 

There  is  nothing,  however,  which  so  strikingly  characterizes 
the  bulk  of  mankind,  and  even  the  great  mass  of  the  Christian 
world,  as  that  apathy  and  indifference  with  which  they  view 
the  wonders  of  creation  which  surround  them.  They  can 
look  on  all  that  is  grand,  and  beautiful,  and  beneficent  in  na- 
ture, without  feeling  the  least  sentiment  of  admiration,  or  of 
gratitude  to  that  Being  who  is  incessantly  operating  within 
them  and  around  them  ;  and  they  are  disposed  to  consider  the 
experiments  of  philosophers,  by  which  the  wonderful  agency 
of  God  is  unveiled,  as  only  so  many  toys  and  amusements  for 
the  entertainment  of  children.  They  would  prefer  the  paltry 
entertainments  of  a  card-table,  of  a  ball-room,  or  of  a  gossiping 
party,  to  the  inspection  of  the  nicest  pieces  of  Divine  mechan- 
ism, and  to  the  contemplation  of  the  most  august  scene  in  na- 
ture. However  lightly  some  religionists  may  be  disposed  to 
treat  this  subject,  that  spirit  of  indifference  with  which  the 
visible  works  of  God  are  treated,  must  be  considered  as  flow- 
ing from  the  same  depraved  principle,  which  leads  multitudes 


CHEMISTRY.  219 

to  reject  the  revelations  of  the  Bible,  and  to  trifle  with  their 
everlasting  interests.  "  Man,"  says  RolHn,  "  lives  in  the 
midst  of  a  world  of  which  he  is  the  sovereign,  as  a  stranger, 
who  looks  with  indifference  upon  all  that  passes  in  it,  and  as  if 
it  was  not  his  concern.  The  universe,  in  all  its  parts,  declares 
and  points  out  its  Author  ;  but,  for  the  most  part,  to  the  deaf 
and  bhnd,  who  have  neither  ears  to  hear,  nor  eyes  to  see. 
One  of  the  greatest  services  that  philosophy  can  do  us,  is  to 
awaken  us  from  this  drowsiness,  and  rouse  us  from  this  le- 
thargy, which  is  a  dishonor  to  humanity,  and  in  a  manner 
reduces  us  below  the  beasts,  whose  stupidity  is  the  conse- 
quence of  their  nature,  and  not  the  effect  of  neglect  or  indif- 
ference. It  awakens  our  curiosity,  it  excites  our  attention, 
and  leads  us  as  it  were  by  the  hand,  through  all  the  parts  of 
nature,  to  induce  us  to  study  and  search  out  the  wonderful 
works  of  it." — Belles  Lettres,  vol.  4. 

Since,  therefore,  the  science  of  natural  philosophy  is  con- 
versant about  the  works  of  the  Almighty,  and  its  investigations 
have  a  direct  tendency  to  illustrate  the  perfections  of  his 
nature,  to  unveil  the  plan  of  his  operations,  to  unfold  the  laws 
by  which  he  governs  the  kingdom  of  universal  nature,  and  to 
display  the  order,  symmetry,  and  proportion,  which  reign 
throughout  the  whole — it  would  be  needless  to  enter  into  any 
further  process  of  reasoning,  to  show  that  the  study  of  it  is 
connected  with  the  great  objects  of  religion.  Whatever 
studies  tend  to  raise  our  minds  to  the  Supreme  Ruler  of  all 
worlds — to  expand  our  views  pf  his  infinite  knowledge  and 
wisdom,  to  excite  our  gratitude  and  our  admiration  of  the 
beneficent  designs  which  appear  in  all  his  arrangements — to 
guard  us  against  erroneous  conceptions  of  his  providential 
procedure — and  to  furnish  us  with  important  auxiliaries  for 
extending  the  influence  of  his  religion  through  the  world — 
must  always  be  interesting  to  every  Christian  who  wishes  to 
enlarge  his  intellectual  views,  and  to  make  progress  in  the 
knowledge  of  God. 

CHEMISTRY. 

This  science,  which  is  intimately  related  to  the  preceding, 
has  for  its  object  to  ascertain  the  ingredients,  or  first  princi- 
ples, of  which  all  matter  is  composed — to  examine  the  com- 
pounds formed  by  the  combination  of  these  ingredients — to 
investigate  those  changes  in  natural  bodies,  which  are  not  ac- 
companied with  sensible  motion,  and  the  nature  of  the  power 
which  produces  these  combinations  and  changes. 

Within  the  limits  of  the  last  half  century,  the  empire  of 


220  THE  CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

Chemistry  has  been  wonderfully  extended.  From  an  obscure 
and  humble  place  among  the  objects  of  study,  it  has  risen  to  a 
high  and  dignified  station  among  those  sciences  which  improve 
and  adorn  the  human  mind.  No  longer  confined  to  the  paltry 
and  mercenary  object  of  searching  for  the  philosopher's  stone, 
or  of  furnishing  a  little  amusement,  it  now  extends  its  sway 
over  all  the  arts  which  minister  to  the  comfort  and  improve- 
ment of  social  life,  and  over  every  species  of  animate  and 
inanimate  matter,  within  the  range  of  human  investigation. 
"  The  forms  and  appearances,"  (says  Sir  Humphry  Davy,) 
"  of  the  beings  and  substances  of  the  external  world,  are 
almost  infinitely  various,  and  they  are  in  a  state  of  continued 
alteration.  Even  the  earth  itself,  throughout  its  whole  sur- 
face, undergoes  modifications.  Acted  on  by  moisture  and 
air,  it  affords  the  food  of  plants  ;  an  immense  number  of  vege- 
table productions  arise  from  apparently  the  same  materials  ; 
these  become  the  substance  of  animals  ;  one  species  of  ani- 
mal matter  is  converted  into  another ;  the  most  perfect  and 
beautiful  of  the  forms  of  organized  life  ultimately  decay,  and 
are  resolved  into  inorganic  aggregates  ;  and  the  same  elemen- 
tary substances,  differently  arranged,  are  contained  in  the  inert 
soil ;  or  bloom,  and  emit  fragrance  in  the  flower  ;  or  become, 
in  animals,  the  active  organs  of  mind  and  intelligence.  In 
artificial  operations,  changes  of  the  same  order  occur :  sub- 
stances having  the  characters  of  earth,  are  converted  into 
metals  ;  clays  and  sands  are  united,  so  as  to  become  porce- 
lain ;  earths  and  alkalies  are  combined  into  glass  ;  acrid  and 
corrosive  matters  are  formed  from  tasteless  substances ; 
colors  are  fixed  upon  stuffs  ;  or  changed,  or  made  to  disap- 
pear ;  and  the  productions  of  the  vegetable,  mineral,  and  ani- 
mal kingdoms,  are  converted  into  new  forms,  and  made  sub- 
servient to  the  purposes  of  civilized  life. — To  trace,  in  detail, 
these  diversified  and  complicated  phenomena ;  to  arrange 
them,  and  deduce  general  laws  from  their  analogies,  is  the 
business  of  chemistry." — Elements  of  Chemical  Philosophy. 

Chemists  have  arranged  the  general  forms  of  matter  into 
the  four  following  classes.  The  first  class  consists  of  Solids, 
which  form  the  principal  parts  of  the  globe,  and  which  differ 
from  each  other  in  hardness,  color,  opacity,  transparency, 
density,  and  other  properties.  The  second  class  consists  of 
Fluids,  such  as  water,  oils,  spirits,  &c.,  whose  parts  possess 
freedom  of  motion,  and  require  great  mechanical  force  to 
make  them  occupy  a  smaller  space.  The  third  class  com 
prebends  Elastic  Fluids,  or  Gases,  which  exist  freely  in  the 
atmosphere ;  but  may  be  confined  by  solids  and  fluids,  and 


CHEMISTRY.  221 

their  properties  examined.     Their  parts  are  highly  moveable, 
compressible,  and  expansive  ;  they  are  all  transparent ;  they 
present  two  or  three  varieties  of  color  ;  and  they  differ  greatly 
in  density.     The  fourth  class  comprehends  Ethereal  Sub- 
stances, which  are  known  to  us  only  in  their  states  of  motion, 
when  acting  upon  our  organs  of  sense,  and  which  are  not  sus- 
ceptible of  being  confined.      Such  are  the  raijs  of  light,  and 
radiant  heat,  which  are  incessantly  in  motion,  throughout  the 
spaces  that  intervene  between  our  globe,  and  the  sun  and  the 
stars. — Chemists  divide  the  substances  in  nature  also    into 
Simple   and   Compound.     Simple    Substances   are   those 
which  have  never  yet  been  decomposed,  nor  formed  by  art. 
Compound   Substances  are  those  which  are  formed  bv  the 
union  of  two  or  more  simple  substances.     The  following  are 
all  the  simple  substances,  ^ith  which  we  are  at  present  ac- 
quainted :   Caloric,  Light,  Oxygen,  Nitrogen,  Carbon, 
Hydrogen,  Sulphur,  Phosphorus,  the  Metals,  and  some 
of  the   Earths. — All  that  I   propose,  under  this  article,  is, 
simply  to  state  some  of  the  properties  of  two  or  three  of  these 
simple  substances. 

Caloric,  or  elementary  fire,  is  the  name  now  given  by 
chemists  to  that  element  or  property,  which,  combined  with 
various  bodies,  produces  the  sensation  oHieat,  while  it  is  pass- 
ing from  one  body  to  another.  This  substance  appears  to 
pervade  the  whole  system  of  nature.  There  are  six  different 
sources,  from  whence  Caloric  may  be  procured.  It  may  be 
produced  by  combustion,  in  which  process  the  oxygen  gas  of 
the  atmosphere  is  decomposed,  and  caloric,  one  of  its  com- 
ponent parts,  set  at  liberty — hy  friction,  or  the  rubbing  of  two 
substances  against  each  other — by  jjercussion,  as  the  striking 
of  steel  against  a  piece  of  flint — by  the  mixture  of  two  or  more 
substances ;  as  when  sulphuric  acid  is  poured  upon  water  or 
magnesia — by  electricity  and  galvanism.  The  discharge  of 
an  electric  or  galvanic  battery,  will  produce  a  more  intense 
degree  of  heat  than  any  other  means  whatever.  But  the  prin- 
cipal, and  probably  the  original  source  of  caloric,  is  the  Sun, 
which  furnishes  the  earth  with  a  regular  supply  for  the  support 
and  nourishment  of  the  animal  and  vegetable  tribes.  From 
this  source  it  moves  at  the  rate  of  195,000  miles  in  a  second 
of  time  ;  for  it  has  been  already  stated,  that  the  sun  sends 
forth  rays  of  heat,  which  are  distinct  from  those  which  produce 
illumination,  and  which  accompany  them  in  their  course 
through  the  ethereal  regions. 

Caloric  is  the  cause  of  fluidity,  in  all  substances  which  are 
capable  of  becoming  fluid.     A  certain  portion,  or  dose  of  it, 

19 


222  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

reduces  a  solid  body  to  the  state  of  an  incompressible  fluid  ; 
a  larger  portion  brings  it  to  the  state  of  an  aeriform  or  gaseous 
fluid.  Thus,  a  certain  portion  of  caloric  reduces  ice  to  a  state 
of  water  ;  a  larger  portion  converts  it  into  steam  or  vapor. 
There  is  reason  to  believe,  that  the  hardest  rocks,  the  densest 
metals,  and  every  solid  substance  on  the  face  of  the  earth 
might  be  converted  into  a  fluid,  and  even  into  a  gas,  were 
they  submitted  to  the  action  of  a  very  high  temperature.  This 
substance  is  called  sensible  caloric,  when  it  produces  the  sen- 
sation of  heal ;  and  latent  caloric,  when  it  forms  an  insensible 
part  of  the  substance  of  bodies. — All  bodies  are,  in  a  greatci 
or  less  degree,  conductors  of  caloric.  Metals  and  liquids  are 
good  conductors  of  heat,  but  silk,  cotton,  wool,  wood,  &c.  are 
bad  conductors  of  it.  For  example,  if  we  put  a  short  poker 
into  the  fire  at  one  end,  it  will  soon  become  hot  at  the  other  ; 
but  this  will  not  happen  with  a  piece  of  wood  of  the  same 
length,  and  under  the  same  circumstances.  A  person  with  a 
silken  purse,  containing  metal  coin,  may  stand  so  near  the 
fire,  as  to  make  the  metal  almost  too  hot  to  touch,  though  the 
temperature  of  the  purse  wdl  apparently  be  scarce  altered. 
If  a  hand  be  put  upon  a  hot  body,  part  of  the  caloric  leaves 
the  hot  body  and  enters  the  hand,  producing  the  sensation  of 
heat.  On  the  contrary,  if  a  hand  be  put  on  a  cold  body,  as  a 
piece  of  iron,  or  another  cold  hand,  part  of  the  caloric  con- 
tained in  the  hand,  leaves  it  to  unite  with  the  colder  body,  pro- 
ducing the  sensation  of  cold.  In  short,  caloric  is  diff"used 
throughout  all  bodies,  and  enters  into  every  operation  in 
nature  ;  and  were  it  not  for  the  influence  of  this  subtile  fluid, 
there  is  reason  to  believe,  that  the  whole  matter  of  the  universe 
would  be  condensed  into  a  solid  mass. 

Oxygen  is  a  very  pure,  subtile,  and  elastic  substance, 
generally  diflfused  throughout  nature  ;  but  is  never  found  unless 
in  combination  with  other  substances.  It  is  one  of  the  most 
important  agents  in  nature  ;  there  being  scarcely  a  single  pro- 
cess, whether  natural  or  artificial,  in  which  oxygen  has  not 
some  important  share.  When  combined  with  caloric,  it  is 
called  oxygen  gas,  which  forms  one  of  the  constituent  parts  of 
the  atmosphere.  In  this  state,  it  forms  the  principle  of  com- 
bustion ;  producing  the  most  rapid  deflagration  of  all  com- 
bustible substances.  If  a  lighted  taper  be  let  down  into  a  jar 
of  oxygen  gas,  it  burns  with  such  splendor,  that  the  eye  can 
scarcely  bear  the  glare  of  light ;  and,  at  the  same  time,  pro- 
duces a  much  greater  heat  than  when  burning  in  common  air. 
If  a  steel  wire,  or  a  thin  file,  having  a  sharp  point,  armed  with 
a  bit  of  wood  in  inflammation,  be  introduced  into  a  jar  filled 


CHEMISTRY.  S23 

with  this  gas,  the  steel  will  take  fire,  and  its  combustion  will 
continue  producing  a  most  brilliant  phenomenon.  It  has 
been  proved,  by  numerous  experiments,  that  this  gas  is  so 
essential  to  combustion,  that  no  substance  will  burn  in  common 
air,  which  has  been  previously  deprived  of  its  oxygen.  It  is 
also  essential  to  the  support  of  animal  life  ;  so  that  man,  and 
all  the  inferior  ranks  of  animated  nature,  may  be  said  to 
depend  upon  tb'^  fluid  for  their  existence.  Its  basis  gives  the 
acid  character  to  all  mineral  and  vegetable  salts  :  and  the 
calcination  of  metals  is  altogether  effected  by  their  union  with 
oxygen.  It  constitutes  the  basis  both  of  the  atmosphere 
which  surrounds  the  earth,  and  of  the  water  which  forms  its 
rivers,  seas,  and  oceans.  It  pervades  the  substance  of  all  the 
vegetable  tribes,  and  enables  them  to  perform  their  functions  ; 
and,  in  combination  with  the  different  metals,  serves  the  most 
important  purposes  in  the  useful  arts.  In  the  operation  of 
this  elementary  principle,  we  perceive  a  striking  display  of  the 
agency  of  the  Creator,  and  of  the  admirable  means  which  his 
wisdom  has  contrived  lor  preserving,  in  due  order,  the  system 
of  nature.  And,  as  this  wonderful  substance  is  so  essentially 
necessary  to  animal  and  vegetable  existence,  every  tliing  is  so 
arranged  as  to  produce  a  regular  supply  of  it,  notwithstanding 
its  incessant  changes,  and  the  multifarious  combinations  into 
which  it  is  continually  entering. 

One  of  the  most  extraordinary  effects  of  oxygen  appears, 
when  it  is  combined  in  a  certain  proportion  with  nitrogen,  so 
as  to  form  the  gaseous  oxide  of  nitrogen,  or  what  is  commonly 
called  nitrous  oxide.  This  gas  consists  of  63  parts  nitrogen, 
and  37  oxygen,  by  weight.  When  inhaled  into  the  lungs,  it 
produces  an  extraordinary  elevation  of  the  animal  spirits,  a 
propensity  to  leaping  and  running,  involuntary  fits  of  laughter, 
a  rapid  flow  of  vivid  ideas,  and  a  thousand  delightful  emotions  ; 
without  being  accompanied  with  any  subsequent  feehngs  of 
debility.  This  circumstance  shows  what  a  variety  of  delight- 
ful or  pernicious  effects  might  flow  from  the  slightest  change 
in  the  constitution  of  the  atmosphere,  were  the  hand  of  the 
Almighty  to  interpose  in  altering  the  proportion  of  its  consti- 
tuent parts  :  for  atmospheric  air  is  composed  of  79  parts  of 
nitrogen,  and  21  of  oxygen,  which  is  not  a  very  different  pro- 
portion from  the  above.  Another  gas  called  nitric  oxide,  com- 
posed of  56  parts  oxygen,  and  44  nitrogen,  produces  instant 
suffocation  in  all  animals  that  attempt  to  breathe  it.  One  of 
the  most  corrosive  acids,  the  nitrous  acid,  or  aquafortis,  is  com- 
posed of  75  parts  oxygen,  and  25  parts  nitrogen  ;  so  that  we 
are  every  moment  breathing  a  certain  substance,  which,  in 


224  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

another  combination,  would  produce  the  most  dreadful  pain, 
and  cause  our  immediate  destruction.  What  a  striking  proof 
does  this  afford,  of  the  infinite  comprehension  of  the  Divine 
mind,  in  foreseeing  all  the  consequences  of  the  elements  of 
nature,  and  in  directing  their  numerous  combinations  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  promote  the  happiness  of  animated  beings  ! 

Nitrogen,  or  azote,  is  a  substance  generally  diffused 
throughout  nature,  and  particularly  in  animated  bodies.  It  is 
not  to  be  found  in  a  solid  or  liquid  state,  but,  combined  with 
caloric,  it  forms  nitrogen  gas,  which  is  one  of  the  ingredients 
of  the  atmosphere.  It  is  incapable  of  supporting  either  flame 
or  animal  life.  This  is  proved  by  introducing  an  animal,  or  a 
burning  candle,  into  a  vessel  full  of  this  gas  :  in  which  case, 
the  animal  is  suddenly  suffocated,  and  the  candle  instantly  ex- 
tinguished. It  is  this  gas  which  is  expelled  from  the  lungs  at 
every  respiration,  and,  rising  over  our  heads,  soon  enters  into 
new  comlDinations.  Though  it  is  destructive  to  animal  life,  it 
appears  to  be  favorable  to  plants,  which  vegetate  freely  when 
surrounded  with  nitrogen. 

Hydrogen  is  another  elementary  substance,  abundant  in 
nature,  and,  when  united  to  caloric,  forms  Hydrogen  Gas.  It 
is  one  of  the  constituent  parts  of  water  ;  for  it  has  been  com- 
pletely demonstrated  by  experiment,  that  water  is  composed 
of  85  parts  by  weight  of  oxygen,  and  15  of  hydrogen,  in  every 
hundred  parts  of  the  fluid.  This  gas  was  formerly  known  by 
tjie  name  of  inflammable  air.  It  is  distinguished  among  miners, 
by  the  name  of  fire-clamp  ;  it  abounds  in  coal-mines,  and  some- 
times produces  the  most  tremendous  explosions.  It  is  inca- 
pable, by  itself,  of  supporting  combustion,  and  cannot  be 
breathed  without  the  most  imminent  danger.  It  is  the  chief 
constituent  of  oils,  fats,  spirits,  ether,  coals,  and  bitumen  ;  and 
is  supposed  to  be  one  of  the  agents  which  produce  the  ignes 
fatui  and  the  northern  lights.  It  is  the  lightest  of  all  ponderable 
bodies  ;  being  from  twelve  to  fifteen  times  lighter  than  com- 
mon air.  A  hundred  cubic  inches  of  it  weigh  about  2|  grains. 
On  account  of  its  great  levity  it  is  used  for  filling  air-balloons. 
In  contact  with  atmospheric  air,  it  burns  with  a  pale  blue  color. 
>\  hen  mixed  with  oxygen  gas,  it  may  be  exploded  like  gun- 
powder, with  a  violent  report.  Carburetted  hydrogen  gas, 
which  is  carbon  dissolved  in  hydrogen,  is  that  beautiful  gas, 
which  is  now  employed  in  lighting  our  streets,  shops,  and 
manufactories. 

Carbon  is  another  simple  substance  extensively  diffused 
throughout  nature.  It  is  found  pure  and  solid  only  in  the  dia- 
mond; but  it  may  be  procured  in  the  sto.te  of  c/iarcoa/,  b^ 


CHEMISTRY.  223 

burning  a  piece  of  wood  closely  covered  \vith  sand,  in  a  cruci- 
ble. Carbon  enters  into  the  composition  of  bitumen  and  pit 
coal,  and  of  most  animal,  and  some  mineral  substances  ;  and  it 
forms  nearly  the  whole  of  the  solid  basis  of  all  vegetables, 
from  the  most  delicate  flower  to  the  stately  oak.  It  is  also  a 
component  part  of  sugar,  and  of  all  Jvinds  of  wax,  oils,  gums, 
and  resins.  It  combines  with  iron  in  various  proportions,  and 
the  results  are,  cast  iron  and  steel.  Black  lead  is  a  composi- 
tion of  nine  parts  of  carbon  to  one  of  iron  ;  and  is,  therefore, 
called  a  carburet  of  iron.  Carbon  is  indestructible  by  age, 
preserves  its  identity  in  all  the  combinations  into  which  it  en- 
ters.— Carbonic  acid  gas  is  a  combination  of  carbon  and 
oxygen.  It  is  found  in  a  state  of  combination  with  lime, 
forming  hmestone,  marble,  and  chalk  ;  and  may  be  separated 
from  them  by  heat,  or  by  means  of  the  mineral  acids.  This 
gas,  which  was  formerly  called  ^j^ecZ  aiV,  is  found  in  mines, 
caves,  the  bottoms  of  wells,  wine  cellars,  brewers'  vats,  and 
in  the  neighborhood  of  lime-kilns.  It  is  known  to  miners  by 
the  name  of  the  choJie-damp,  and  too  frequently  runs  on  deadly 
errands.  It  extinguishes  flame  and  animal  life.  It  is  the 
heaviest  of  all  the  gases  ;  being  nearly  twice  the  weight  of 
common  air,  and  twenty  times  the  weight  of  hydrogen.  It 
may,  therefore,  be  poured  from  one  vessel  to  another  ;  and  if 
a  small  quantity  of  it  be  poured  upon  a  lighted  taper,  it  will  be 
instantly  extinguished.  It  is  a  powerful  antiseptic,  or  pre- 
server from  putrefaction.  Meat  which  has  been  sealed  up  in 
it  (says  Mr.  Parkes)  has  been  known  to  have  preserved  its 
texture  and  appearance  for  more  than  20  years.  There  is  no 
substance  of  more  importance  in  civilized  life  than  the  differ- 
ent forms  of  Carbon.  "  In  nature,"  says  Sir  H.  Davy,  "  this 
element  is  constantly  active  in  an  imp  rtant  series  of  opera- 
tions. It  is  evolved  in  fermentation  and  combustion,  in  car- 
bonic acid  ;  it  is  separated  from  oxygen  in  the  organs  of  plants; 
it  is  a  principal  element  in  animal  structures  ;  and  is  found  in 
diflerent  forms  in  almost  all  the  products  of  organized  beings." 
Sulphur  is  a  substance  which  has  been  known  from  the 
earliest  ages.  It  was  used  by  the  ancients  in  medicine,  and 
its  fumes  have,  for  more  than  2000  years,  been  employed  in 
bleaching  wool.  It  is  found  combined  with  many  mineral 
substances,  as  arsenic,  antimony,  copper,  and  most  of  the 
metallic  ores.  It  exists  in  many  mineral  waters,  and  in  com- 
bination with  vegetable  and  animal  matters,  but  is  most  abun- 
dant in  volcanic  countries,  particularly  in  the  neighborhood  of 
Vesuvius,  Etna,  and  Hecla,  in  Iceland.  It  is  a  solid,  opaque, 
combustible  substance,  of  a  pale  yellow  color,  very  brittle,  and 

19* 


226  THE    CimtStlAN    PHILOSOPHEitV 

almost  without  taste  or  smell.  Its  specific  gravity  is  nearly 
twice  that  of  water  ;  it  is  a  non-conductor  of  electricity,  and, 
of  course,  becomes  electric  by  friction.  When  heated  to  the 
temperature  of  170°  of  Fahrenheit's  thermometer,  it  rises  up 
in  the  form  of  a  fine  powder,  which  is  easily  collected  in  a 
proper  vessel  and  is  named  the  flowers  of  sulphur.  It  is 
insoluble  in  water,  but  may  be  dissolved  in  oils,  in  spirit 
of  wine,  and  in  hydrogen  gas.  When  sulphur  is  heated  to  the 
temperature  of  302°  in  the  open  air,  it  takes  fire  spontaneously, 
and  burns  with  a  pale  blue  flame,  and  emits  a  gieat  quantity  of 
fumes  of  a  strong  suffocating  odour.  Wlien  heated  to  the 
temperature  of  570°,  it  burns  with  a  bright  white  flame,  and 
emits  a  vast  quantity  of  fumes.  When  these  fumes  are  col- 
lected, they  are  found  to  consist  entirely  ot  sulphur ic  acid  ;  so 
that  sulphur,  by  combustion,  is  converted  into  an  acid.  It  is 
the  base  of  several  compound  substances.  It  unites  with 
oxygen,  hydrogen,  nitrogen,  phosphorus,  the  alkahes,  the 
metals,  and  some  of  the  earths.  This  substance  is  of  great 
importance  in  medicine,  as  it  is  found  to  penetrate  to  the  ex- 
tremities of  the  most  minute  vessels,  and  to  impregnate  all  the 
secretions.  It  is  also  used  in  the  arts,  particularly  in  bleach- 
ing and  dying  ;  it  forms  a  very  large  proportion  of  gun-pow- 
der ;  and  one  of  its  most  common,  but  not  least  useful  proper- 
ties, is  that  of  its  combustibility,  by  which,  with  the  help  of  a 
tinder-box,  light  is  almost  instantaneously  produced.  As  this 
substance  has  not  yet  been  decomposed,  it  is  considered  by 
chemists,  in  the  mean  time,  as  one  of  the  simple  substances. 

Phosphorus  is  another  simple  combustible  substance,  but 
is  never  found  in  a  pure  state  in  nature.  It  is  commonly 
united  to  oxygen  in  a  state  of  phosphoric  acid,  which  is  found 
in  different  animal,  vegetable,  and  mineral  substances.  It 
was  first  discovered  by  Brandt,  a  chemist  of  Hamburgh,  in  the 
year  16G7,  and  afterwards  by  the  Honorable  Mr.  Boyle,  in 
1679.  It  was  formerly  obtained  by  a  disgusting  process  ;  but 
it  is  now  extracted  from  the  bones  of  animals,  by  burning  them, 
and  then  reducing  them  to  a  fine  powder,  and  afterwards  pour- 
ing sulphuric  acid  upon  them.  This  substance,  when  pure, 
resembles  bees'  wax,  being  of  a  clear,  transparent,  yellowish 
color  ;  it  is  insoluble  in  water  ;  it  may  be  cut  with  a  knife,  or 
twisted  to  pieces  with  the  fingers  ;  and  it  is  about  double  the 
specific  gravity  of  water.  Its  most  remarkable  property  is  its 
very  strong  attraction  for  oxygen,  from  which  circumstance, 
it,burns  spontaneously  in  the  open  air  at  the  temperature  of 
43° ;  that  is,  it  attracts  the  oxygen  gas  from  the  atmosphere, 
and  heat  and  flame  are  produced.     It  gradually  consumes 


CHEMISTRY.  227 

when  exposed  to  the  common  temperature  of  air,  emits  a 
whitish  smoke,  and  is  luminous  in  the  dark  ;  for  this  reason  it 
is  kept  in  phials  of  water  ;  and  as  the  heat  of  the  hand  is  suf- 
iicient  to  inflame  it,  it-should  seldom  be  handled  except  under 
water.     At  the  temperature  of  99°  it  melts  ;  it  evaporates  at 
219°,  and  boils  at  554°.     When  heated  to   148°  it  takes  fire, 
and  burns  with  a  very  bright  flame,  and  gives  out  a  very  large 
quantity  of  white  smoke,  which  is  luminous  in  the  dark  ;  at 
the  same  time  it  emits  an  odor,  which  has  some  resemblance 
to  that  of  garlic ;  and  this  smoke,  when  collected,  is  proved 
to  be  an  acid.     It  burns  with  the  greatest  splendor  in  oxygen 
gas,  and  when  taken  internally,  it  is  found  to  be  poisonous. 
If  any  light  substance,  capable  of  conducting  heat,  be  placed 
upon  the  surface  of  boiling  water,  and  a  bit  of  phosphorus  be  laid 
upon  it,  the  heat  of  the  water  will  be  sufficient  to  set  the  phos- 
phorus on  fire.     If  we  write  a  few  words  on  paper  with  a  bit 
of  phosphorus  fixed  in  a  quill,  when  the  writing  is  carried  into 
a  dark  room  it  will  appear  beautifully  luminous.     If  a  piece  of 
phosphorus,  about  the  size  of  a  pea,  be  dropped  into  a  tumbler 
of  hot  water,  and  a  stream  of  oxygen  gas  forced  directly  upon 
it,  it  will  display  the  most  brilliant  combustion  under  water 
that   can   be   imagined.     All   experiments   with  phosphorus, 
however,  require  to  be  performed  with  great  caution.     This 
substance  is  used  in  making  phosphoric  match-bottles,  phos- 
phoric  oil,   phosphoric    tapers,  and   various   phosphoric   fire- 
Works.     Phosphorized  hydrogen  gas  is  produced  by  bits  of 
phophorus  remaining  some  hours  in  hydrogen  gas.     It  is  sup- 
posed to  be  this  gas  which  is  often  seen  hovering  on  the  sur- 
face of  burial  grounds  and  marshes,  known  in  Scotland  by  the 
name  oi" spunkie^  and  in  England  by  that  of  will-o-the-wisp. 

Some  animals,  as  the  gloiv-worm  and  the  fir e-fy,  and  fish  in 
a  putrescent  state,  exhibit  phosphorescent  qualities.  M.  Peron 
describes  a  singular  instance  of  this  kind  in  an  animal  which 
he  calls  the  pyrosoma  atlanticum^  which  he  observed  in  his 
voyage  from  Europe  to  the  Isle  of  France.  The  darkness 
was  intense  when  it  was  first  discovered  ;  and  all  at  once, 
there  appeared  at  some  distance,  as  it  were  a  vast  sheet  of 
phosphorus  floating  on  the  waves,  which  occupied  a  great 
space  before  the  vessel.  When  the  vessel  had  passed  through 
this  inflamed  part  of  the  sea,  it  was  found,  that  this  prodigious 
light  was  occasioned  by  an  immense  number  of  small  animals, 
which  swam  at  different  depths,  and  appeared  to  assume  vari- 
ous forms.  Those  which  were  deepest  looked  like  great  red 
hot  cannon  balls,  while  those  on  the  surface  resembled  cylin- 
ders of  red  hot  iron.     Some  of  them  were  caught,  and  were 


223  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHlLOSOPHfiH. 

found  to  vary  in  size  from  3  to  7  inches.  All  the  exterior 
surface  of  the  animal  was  bristled  with  thick  long  tubercles, 
shining  like  so  many  diamonds  ;  and  these  seemed  to  be  the 
principal  seat  of  its  wonderful  phosphorescence. 

Such  is  a  brief  description  of  the  principal  elementary  sub- 
stances, which,  in  a  thousand  diversified  forms,  pervade  the 
system  of  nature,  and  produce  all  that  variety  which  we  behold 
in  the  atmosphere,  the  waters,  the  earth,  and  the  various  pro- 
cesses of  the  arts.  It  is  probable  that  some  of  these  sub- 
stances are  compounds,  though  they  have  not  yet  been 
decomposed.  Yea,  it  is  possible,  and  not  at  all  improbable, 
that  there  are  but  two,  or  at  most  three  elementary  sub- 
stances in  nature,  the  various  modifications  of  which  produce 
all  the  beauties  and  sublimities  in  the  universe.  Perhaps 
caloric,  oxygen,  and  hydrogen,  may  ultimately  be  found  to 
constitute  all  the  elementaiy  principles  of  nature. — Without 
prosecuting  this  subject  farther,  I  shall  conclude  this  article 
with  a  few  cursory  reflections,  tending  to  illustrate  its  con- 
nexion with  religion. 

The  remarks  which  I  have  already  thrown  out  in  reference 
to  Natural  Philosophy,  will  equally  apply  to  the  science  of 
Chemistry  ;  and,  therefore,  do  not  require  to  be  repeated.  In 
addition  to  these,  the  following  observations  may  be  stated  : — 

1.  This  science  displays,  in  a  striking  point  of  view,  the 
wisdom  and  goodness  of  God,  in  producing,  by  the  most  simple 
means,  the  most  astonishing  and  l>enevolent  effects.  All  the 
varied  phenomena  we  perceive,  throughout  the  whole  system 
of  sublunary  nature»  are  produced  by  a  combination  of  six  or 
seven  simple  substances.  I  formerly  adverted  to  the  infinite 
variety  which  exists  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  (see  pp.  78 — 
79.)  About  fifty-six  thousand  different  species  of  plants  have 
already  been  discovered  by  botanists.  All  these,  from  the 
humble  shrub  to  the  cedar  of  Lebanon,  which  adorn  the  sur- 
face of  the  globe,  in  every  clime,  with  such  a  diversity  of 
forms,  shades,  and  colors,  are  the  result  of  the  combinations 
of  "  four  or  five  natural  substances — caloric,  light,  water,  air, 
and  carbon."  "  When  we  consider,"  says  Mr.  Parkes,  "  that 
the  many  thousand  tribes  of  vegetables  are  not  only  all  formed 
from  a  few  simple  substances,  but  that  they  all  enjoy  the  same 
sun,  vegetate  in  the  same  medium,  and  are  supplied  with  the 
same  nutriment,  we  cannot  but  be  struck  with  the  rich  econo- 
my of  Nature,  and  are  almost  induced  to  doubt  the  evidence 
of  those  senses  with  which  the  God  of  nature  has  furnished  us. 
That  it  should  be  possible  so  to  modify  and  intermingle  a  few 
simple  substances,  and  thence  produce  all  the  variety  of  form^ 


CHEMISTRY.  229 

color,  odor,  &c.  which  are  observable  in  the  different  families 
of  vegetables,  is  a  phenomenon  too  astonishing  for  our  com- 
prehension. Nothing  short  of  Omnipotence  could  have 
provided  such  a  paradise  for  man." — Chemical  Catechism, 
chap.   9. 

"  Soft  roll  your  incense,  herbs,  and  frixits,  and  flowers, 

In  mingled  clouds  to  Him,  whose  sun  exalts, 

Whose  breath  perfumes  you,  and  whose  pencil  paints." 

Thomson. 

What  an  admirable  view  is  here  opened  up  of  the  economy  of 
Divine  wisdom,  and  of  the  beneficent  care  which  has  been 
taken  to  secure  the  comfort  and  happiness  of  every  living 
creature  :  and  how  ungrateful  a  disposition  must  it  indicate  in 
rational  beings  to  overlook  such  benevolent  arrangements  ! 
It  is  highly  probable,  that  in  all  other  worlds  disposed  through- 
out the  universe,  an  infinite  diversity  of  scenery  exists,  and 
that  no  one  globe  or  system  exactly  resembles  another  ;  and 
yet,  it  is  probable,  that  the  primary  elements  of  matter,  or  the 
few  simple  substances  of  which  our  world  is  composed,  may  be 
of  the  same  nature  as  those  which  form  the  constituent  parts  of 
every  other  system  ;  and  may  give  birth  to  all  the  variety  which 
exists  throughout  the  wide  extent  of  creation,  and  to  all  the 
changes  and  revolutions  through  which  the  difierent  systems 
may  pass,  during  every  period  of  infinite  duration. 

2.  From  this  science  we  have  every  reason  to  conclude, 
that  matter  is  indestrcutible.  In  the  various  changes  that  take 
place  in  material  substances,  the  particles  of  matter  are  not 
destroyed,  but  only  assume  new  forms,  and  enter  into  new 
combinations.  When  a  piece  of  wood,  for  example,  is  burned 
to  ashes,  none  of  its  principles  are  destroyed  ;  the  elementary 
substances  of  which  it  was  composed,  are  only  separated  from 
one  another,  and  formed  into  new  compounds.  Carbon,  as 
already  stated,  appears  to  be  indestructible  by  age,  and  to  pre- 
serve its  essential  properties,  in  every  mode  of  its  existence. 
That  Being,  indeed,  who  created  matter  at  first,  may  reduce  it 
to  nothing  when  he  pleases  ;  but  it  is  highly  improbable  that 
his  power  will  ever  be  interposed  to  produce  this  effect  ;  or  that 
any  particle  of  matter  which  now  exists,  will  ever  be  annihi- 
lated, into  whatever  new  or  varied  combinations  it  may  enter. 
W'hen  any  particular  world,  or  assemblage  of  material  exist- 
ence, has  remained  in  its  original  state  for  a  certain  period  of 
duration,  and  accomplished  all  the  ends  it  was  intended  to 
subserve,  in  that  state,  the  materials  of  which  it  is  composed, 
will,  in  all  probability,  be  employed  for  erecting  a  new  system, 
and  establishing  a  new  series  of  events,  in  which  new  scenes, 


230  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

and  new  beauties  and  sublimities  will  arise  from  new  and  vari- 
ed combinations.  For  the  Creator  docs  nothing  in  vain. 
But  to  annihilate,  and  again  to  create,  would  be  operating  in 
vain  ;  and  we  uniformly  find,  that  in  all  the  arrangements  ot 
Deity,  in  the  present  state  of  things,  Nature  is  frugal  and 
economical  in  all  her  proceedings  ;  so  that  there  is  no  process, 
when  thoroughly  investigated,  that  appears  unnecessary  or  su- 
perfluous. 

From  the  fact,  that  matter  appears  to  be  indestructible,  we 
may  learn,  that  the  Creator  may,  with  the  self-same  materials 
which  now  exist  around  us,  new-model  and  arrange  the  globe 
we  inhabit,  after  the  general  conflagration,  so  as  to  make  a 
more  glorious  world  to  arise  out  of  its  ashes  ;  purified  from 
those  physical  evils  which  now  exist ;  and  fitted  for  the  ac- 
commodation either  of  renovated  men,  or  of  other  pure  intel- 
ligences. From  the  same  fact,  combined  with  the  considera- 
tion of  the  infinite  diversity  of  effects  which  the  simple 
substances  of  nature  are  capjible  of  producing,  we  may  be 
enabled  to  form  a  conception  of  the  ease  with  which  the  Crea- 
tor may  new-model  our  bodies,  after  they  have  been  dissolved 
in  the  dust ;  and  how,  from  the  same  original  atoms,  he  may 
construct  and  adorn  them  with  more  glorious  forms,  and  more 
delightful  and  exquisite  senses  than  they  now  possess. 

In  short,  the  rapid  progress  which  chemical  science  is  now 
making,  promises,  ere  long,  to  introduce  improvements  among 
the  human  race,  which  will  expand  their  views  of  the  agency  of 
God,  counteract  many  physical  evils,  and  promote,  to  an  ex- 
tent which  has  never  yet  been  experienced,  their  social  and 
domestic  enjoyment.  The  late  discoveries  of  Chemistry  tend 
to  convince  us,  that  the  properties  and  powers  of  natural  sub- 
stances are  only  beginning  to  be  discovered.  Who  could 
have  imagined,  a  century  ago,  that  an  invisible  substance  is 
contained  in  a  piece  of  coal,  capable  of  producing  the  most 
beautiful  and  splendid  illumination — that  this  substance  may 
be  conveyed,  in  a  few  moments,  through  pipes  of  several  miles 
in  length — and  that  a  city,  containing  several  hundred  thou- 
sands of  inhabitants,  maybe  instantly  lighted  up  by  it,  without 
the  aid  of  either  wax,  oil,  or  tallow  I  Who  could  have  imagin- 
ed, that  one  of  the  ingredients  of  the  air  we  breathe  is  the 
principle  of  combustion — that  a  rod  of  iron  may  be  made  to 
burn  in  it  with  a  brilliancy  that  dazzles  the  eyes — that  a  piece 
of  charcoal  may  be  made  to  bm-n  with  a  white  and  splendid 
light,  which  is  inferior  only  to  the  solar  rays — and  that  the  dia- 
mond is  nothing  more  than  carbon  in  a  crystallized  state,  and 
differs  only  in  a  shght  degree  from  a  bit  of  common  charcoal? 


ANATOMY    AND    PHYSIOLOGY.  231 

Who  could  have  surmised,  that  a  substance  would  be  disco- 
vered, of  such  a  degree  of  levity,  as  would  have  power  suth- 
cieiit  to  buoy  up  a  number  of  men  to  the  upper  parts  of  the 
atmosphere,  and  enable  them  to  swim,  in  safety,  above  the 
regions  of  the  clouds  1  These  are  only  specimens  of  still  more 
brilliant  discoveries  which  will,  doubtless,  be  brought  to  light 
by  the  researches  of  future  generations.  We  have  reason  to 
believe,  that  the  investigations  of  this  science  will,  in  due  time, 
enable  us  to  counteract  most  of  the  diseases  incident  to  the 
human  frame  ;  and  to  prevent  many  of  those  fatal  accidents  to 
which  mankind  are  now  exposed.  Davy's  safety  lamp  has  al- 
ready preserved  many  individuals  from  destruction,  when 
working  in  coal  mines  ;  and  thousands,  in  after  ages,  will  be 
indebted  to  this  discovery,  for  security  from  the  dreadful  explo- 
sions of  hydrogen  gas.  And,  we  trust,  that  the  period  is  not 
far  distant,  when  specific  antidotes  to  the  diseases  peculiar  to 
the  different  trades  and  occupa,tions  in  which  mankind  are  em- 
ploved  will  be  discovered  ;  and  the  health  and  vigour  of  the 
mass  of  society  be  preserved  unimpaired,  amidst  all  the  pro- 
cesses in  which  they  may  be  engaged. — In  fine,  the  rapid  pro- 
gress of  chemical  discovery  carries  forward  our  views  to  a 
period,  when  man,  having  thoroughly  explored  the  powers  of 
nature,  and  subjected  them,  in  some  measure,  to  his  control, 
will  be  enabled  to  ward  off  most  of  those  physical  evils  Avith 
which  he  is  now  annoyed,  and  to  raise  himself,  in  some  degree, 
to  the  dignity  and  happiness  he  enjoyed  before  moral  evil  had 
shed  its  baleful  influence  on  our  terrestrial  system.  Such  a 
period  corresponds  to  many  of  the  descriptions  contained  in 
the  Sacred  Oracles  of  the  millennial  state  of  the  church  ;  when 
social,  domestic,  moral,  and  intellectual  improvement  shall  be 
carried  to  the  utmost  perfection  which  our  sublunary  station 
will  permit ;  when  wars  shall  cease  ;  when  the  knowledge  of 
Jehovah  shall  cover  the  earth  ;  when  every  man  shall  sit  under 
his  vine  and  fig-tree,  without  being  exposed  to  the  least  alarm  ; 
and  when  there  shall  be  nothing  to  hurt  nor  destroy  throughout 
the  church  of  the  living  God.  And,  therefore,  we  ought  to 
consider  the  various  discoveries  and  improvements  now  going- 
forward  in  this,  and  other  departments  of  science  as  preparing 
the  way  for  the  introduction  of  this  long-expected  and  auspi- 
cious era. 

ANAT031Y    AND    PHYSIOLOGY. 

The  general  object  of  both  these  sciences  is  to  investigate 
and  describe  the  structure  and  economy  of  the  animal  frame. 
Anatomij  dissects  dead  bodies,  Physiology  investigates  the 


232  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

functions  of  those  that  are  living.  The  former  examines  the 
fluids,  muscles,  viscera,  and  all  the  other  parts  of  the  human 
body,  in  a  state  of  rest ;  the  latter  considers  them  in  a  state  of 
action. 

The  parts  of  the  human  body  have  been  distinguished  into 
two  different  kinds — soHds  and  fluids.  The  solid  parts  are 
bones,  cartilages,  ligaments,  muscles,  teiidons,  membranes, 
nerves,  arteries,  veins,  hair,  nails,  and  ducts,  or  fine  tubular 
'  vessels  of  various  kinds.  Of  these  solid  parts,  the  following  • 
compound  organs  consist ;  the  brain  and  cerebellum ;  the 
hmgs ;  the  heart ;  the  stomach ;  the  liver ;  the  spleen ;  the 
pancreas  ;  the  glands  ;  the  kidneys  ;  the  intestines  ;  the  mesen- 
tery ;  the  larynx ;  and  the  organs  of  sense — the  eyes,  ears, 
nose,  and  tongue.  The  fluid  parts  are,  the  saliva,  or  spittle, 
phlegm,  serum,  the  chyle,  blood,  bile,  milk,  lympha,  urine,  the 
pancreatic  juice,  and  the  aqueous  humour  of  the  eyes.  The 
human  body  is  divided  into  three  great  cavities — the  head ; 
the  thorax,  or  breast ;  and  the  abdomen,  or  belly.  The  head 
is  formed  of  the  bones  of  the  cranium,  and  encloses  the  brain 
and  cerebellum.  The  thorax  is  composed  of  the  vertebrae  of 
the  back,  the  sternum,  and  true  ribs  ;  and  contains  the  heart, 
the  pericardium,  the  breast,  and  the  lungs.  The  abdomen  is 
separated  from  the  thorax  by  means  of  the  diaphragm,  which 
is  a  fleshy  and  membranous  substance,  composed,  for  the  most 
part,  of  muscular  fibres.  This  cavity  is  formed  by  the  lumbar 
vertebrae,  the  os  sacrum,  the  ossa  innominata,  the  false  ribs,  the 
peritonaeum,  and  a  variety  of  muscles.  It  encloses  the  stom- 
ach, intestines,  omentum,  or  caul,  the  liver,  pancreas,  spleen, 
kidneys,  and  urinary  bladder. — Without  attempting  any  tech- 
nical description  of  these  different  parts,  which  could  convey 
no  accurate  ideas  to  a  general  reader,  I  shall  merely  state 
two  or  three  facts  in  relation  to  the  system  of  bones,  muscles, 
and  blood-vessels,  as  specimens  of  the  wonderful  structure  of 
our  bodily  frame. 

The  Bones  may  be  regarded  as  the  prop-work  or  basis  on 
which  the  human  body  is  constructed.  They  bear  the  same  rela- 
tion to  the  animal  system,  as  the  wood-work  to  a  building.  They 
give  shape  and  firmness  to  the  body  ;  they  support  its  various 
parts,  and  prevent  it  from  sinking  by  its  own  weight;  they  serve 
as  levers  for  the  muscles  to  act  upon,  and  to  defend  the  brain, 
the  heart,  the  lungs,  and  other  vital  parts  from  external  injury. 
Of  the  bones,  some  are  hollow,  and  filled  with  marrow;  others 
are  solid  throughout ;  some  are  very  small ;  others  very  large; 
some  are  round,  and  others //ai;  some  are  plane,  and  others 
conve.i'  or  concave  ; — and  all  these  several  forms  are  re(iuisite 


ANATOMY    AND    PHYSIOLOGY. 

for  the  situations  they  occupy,  and  the  respective  functions 
they  have  to  perform. — The  5pme,  or  back-bone,  consists  of 
24  vertebrae,  or  small  bones,  connected  together  by  cartilages, 
articulations,  and  ligaments  ;  of  which  7  belong  to  the  neck, 
12  to  the  back,  and  5  to  the  loins.  In  the  centre  of  each  ver- 
tebra there  is  a  hole  for  the  lodgment  and  continuation  of  the 
spinal  marrow,  which  extends  from  the  brain  to  the  rump. — 
From  these  vertebrae  the  arched  bones  called  ribs  proceed  ; 
and  seven  of  them  join  the  breast-bone  on  each  side,  where 
they  terminate  in  cartilages,  and  form  the  cavity  of  the  thorax 
or  chest.  The  five  lower  ribs,  with  a  number  of  muscles, 
form  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen,  as  above  stated.  The  spine 
is  one  of  the  most  admirable  mechanical  contrivances  in  the 
human  frame.  Had  it  consisted  of  only  three  or  four  bones, 
or  had  the  holes  in  each  bone,  not  exactly  corresponded,  and 
fitted  into  each  other,  the  spinal  marrow  would  have  been 
bruised,  and  life  endangered  at  every  bending  of  the  body. — 
The  skull  is  composed  of  10  bones,  and  about  51  are  reckon- 
ed to  belong  to  the  face,  the  orbits  of  the  eyes,  and  the  jaws 
in  which  the  teeth  are  fixed.  There  are  seldom  more  than  16 
teeth  in  each  jaw,  or  32  in  all. — The  number  of  bones  in  a 
human  body  is  generally  estimated  at  about  245  ;  of  which 
there  are  reckoned,  in  the  skull,  head,  and  face,  61  ;  in  the 
trunk,  64  ;  in  the  arms,  and  hands,  60  ;  in  the  legs,  and  ket, 
60.  The  bones  are  provided  with  ligaments  or  hinges,  which 
bind  and  fasten  them  together,  and  prevent  them  from  being 
displaced  by  any  violent  motion  ;  and,  that  the  ligaments  may 
work  smoothly  into  one  another,  the  joints  are  separated  by 
cartilages  or  gristles,  and  provided  with  a  gland  for  the  secre- 
tion of  oil  or  mucus,  which  is  constantly  exuding  into  the  joints ; 
so  that  every  requisite  is  provided  by  our  Benevolent  Creator, 
to  prevent  pain,  and  to  promote  facility  of  motion.  "  In  con- 
sidering the  joints,"  says  Dr.  Paley, "  there  is  nothing,  perhaps, 
which  ought  to  move  our  gratitude  more  than  the  reflection, 
flow  well  they  wear.  A  limb  shall  swing  upon  its  hinge,  or  play 
in  its  socket  many  hundred  times  in  an  hour,  for  60  years  to- 
gether, without  diminution  of  agiUty  ;  which  is  a  long  time  tor 
any  thing  to  last ;  for  any  thing  so  much  worked  as  the  joints 
are." 

The  Muscular  System. — A  mttsc/e  is  a  bundle  of  fleshy, 
and  sometimes  of  tendinous  fibres.  The  fleshy  fibres  com- 
pose the  body  of  the  muscle  ;  and  the  tendinous  fibres  the  ex- 
tremities. Some  muscles  are  long  and  round ;  some  plain 
and  circular ;  some  are  spiral,  and  some  have  straight  fibres. 
Some  are  double,  having  a  tendon  running  through  the  body 

20 


234  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

from  head  to  tail  ;  some  have  two  or  more  tendinous  hranches 
running  through,  with  various  rows  and  orders  of  fibres.  All 
these,  and  several  other  varieties,  are  essentially  requisite  foi 
the  respective  offices  they  have  to  perform  in  the  animal  sys- 
tem. The  muscles  constitute  the  fleshy  part  of  the  human 
body,  and  give  it  that  varied  and  beautiful  form  we  observe  over 
all  its  surface.  But  their  principal  design  is  to  serve  as  the 
organs  of  motion.  They  are  inserted,  by  strong  tendinous 
extremities,  into  the  different  bones  of  which  the  skeleton  is 
composed  ;  and,  by  their  contraction  and  distention,  give  rise 
to  all  the  movements  of  the  body.  The  muscles,  therefore, 
may  be  considered  as  so  many  cords  attached  'to  the  bones  ; 
and  the  Author  of  Nature  has  fixed  them  according  to  the 
most  perfect  principles  of  mechanism,  so  as  to  produce  the 
fittest  motions  in  the  parts  for  the  movement  of  which  they  are 
intended. 

One  of  the  most  wonderful  properties  of  the  muscles  is,  the 
extraordinarij  force  they  exerf,  although  they  are  composed  of 
such  slender  threads  or  fibres.  The  following  facts,  in  rela- 
tion to  this  point,  are  demonstrated  by  the  celebrated  BoreUi, 
in  his  work,  "  De  Motu  Animalium.''^  When  a  man  lifts  up 
with  his  teeth  a  weight  of  200  pounds,  with  a  rope  fastened  to 
the  jaw-teeth,  the  muscles  named  Temporalis  and  JMassefer, 
with  which  people  chew,  and  which  perform  this  work,  exert  a 
force  of  above  15,0001bs.  weight.  If  any  one  hanging  his  arm 
directly  downwards  lifts  a  weight  of  20  pounds,  with  the  third 
or  last  joint  of  his  thumb,  the  muscle  which  bend  the  thumb 
and  bears  that  weight,  exerts  a  force  of  about  three  thousand 
pounds.  When  a  man  standing  upon  his  feet,  leaps  or  springs 
upwards  to  the  height  of  two  feet,  if  the  weight  of  such  a  man 
be  150  pounds,  the  muscles  employed  in  that  action  will  exert 
a  force  2000  times  greater  ;  that  is  to  say,  a  force  of  about 
three  hundred  thousand  founds.  The  heart.,  at  each  pulse  or 
contraction,  by  which  it  protrudes  the  blood  out  of  the  arteries 
into  the  veins,  exerts  a  force  of  above  a  hundred  thousand 
pounds.  Who  can  contemplate  this  amazing  strength  of  the 
muscular  system,  without  admiration  of  the  power  and  wisdom 
of  the  Creator,  who  has  thus  endued  a  bundle  of  threads,  each 
of  them  smaller  than  a  hair,  with  such  an  astonishing  degree 
of  mechanical  force  !  There  have  been  reckoned  about  446 
muscles  in  the  human  body,  which  have  been  dissected  and 
distinctly  described  ;  every  one  of  which  is  essential  to  the 
performance  of  some  one  motion  or  other,  which  contributes 
to  our  ease  and  enjoyment;  and,  in  most  instances,  a  great 
number  of  them  is  required  to  perform  their  different  functions 


ANATOMY    AND    PHYSIOLOGY.  235 

at  the  same  time.  It  has  been  calculated,  that  about  a  hun- 
dred muscles  are  employed  eveiy  time  we  breathe. — "  Breath- 
ing with  ease,"  says  Dr.  Paley,  "  is  a  blessing  of  every  mo- 
ment ;  yet,  of  all  others,  it  is  that  which  we  possess  with  the 
least  consciousness.  A  man  in  an  asthma  is  the  only  man 
who  knows  how  to  estimate  it." 

The  Heart  and  Blood-vessels. — The  heart  is  a  hollow 
muscular  organ,  of  a  conical  shape,  and  consists  of  four  dis- 
tinct cavities.  The  two  largest  are  called  ventricles^  and  the 
two  smallest,  auricles.  The  ventricles  send  out  the  blood  to 
the  arteries  ;  the  auricles  receive  it  from  the  veins.  The  heart 
is  enclosed  in  the  pericardium,  a  membranous  bag,  which  con- 
tains a  quantity  of  water,  or  lymph.  This  water  lubricates 
the  heart,  and  facilitates  all  its  motions.  The  heart  is  the 
general  reservoir  of  the  blood.  When  the  heart  contracts,  the 
blood  is  propelled  from  the  right  ventricle  into  the  lungs, 
through  the  pulmonary  arteries,  which,  like  all  the  other  arte- 
ries, are  furnished  with  valves  that  play  easily  forward,  but  ad- 
mit not  the  blood  to  return  toward  the  heart.  The  blood, 
after  circulating  through  the  lungs,  and  having  there  been  re- 
vivitied  by  coming  in  contact  with  the  air,  and  imbibing  a  por- 
tion of  its  oxygen,  returns  into  the  left  auricle  of  the  heart,  by 
the  pulmonary  vein.  At  the  same  mstant,  the  left  ventricle 
drives  the  blood  into  the  aorta,  a  large  artery  which  sends  off 
branches  to  supply  the  head  and  arms.  Another  large  branch 
of  the  aorta  descends  along  the  inside  of  the  back-bone,  and 
detaches  numerous  ramifications  to  nourish  the  bowels,  and 
mferior  extremities.  After  serving  the  most  remote  extremi- 
ties of  the  body,  the  arteries  are  converted  into  veins,  which, 
in  their  return  to  the  heart,  gradually  unite  into  larger  branches, 
till  the  whole  terminate  in  one  great  trunk,  called  the  vena 
cava,  which  discharges  itself  into  the  right  auricle  of  the 
heart,  and  completes  the  circulation.  Each  ventricle  of  the 
heart  is  reckoned  to  contain  about  one  ounce,  or  two  table- 
spoonsfull  of  blood.  The  heart  contracts  4000  times  every 
hour  ;  and,  consequently,  there  passes  through  it  250  pounds 
of  blood  in  one  hour.  And  if  the  mass  of  blood  in  a  human 
body  be  reckoned  at  an  average  of  twenty-five  pounds,  it  will 
follow  that  the  whole  mass  of  blood  passes  through  the  heart, 
and,  consequently,  through  the  thousands  of  ramifications  of 
the  veins  and  arteries /our /ee>i  times  every  hour,  or,  about  once 
every  four  minutes.  We  may  acquire  a  rude  idea  of  the  force 
with  which  the  blood  is  impelled  from  the  heart,  by  consider- 
ing the  velocity  with  which  water  issues  from  a  syringe,  or 
tVom  the  pipe  of  a  fire-engine.     Could  we  behold  these  rapid 


236  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

motions  incessantly  going  on  within  us,  it  would  overpower 
our  minds  with  astonishment,  and  even  with  terror.  We 
should  be  apt  to  feel  alarmed  on  making  the  smallest  exertion, 
lest  the  parts  of  this  delicate  machine  should  be  broken  or 
deranged,  and  its  functions  interrupted.  The  arteries,  into 
which  the  blood  is  forced,  branch  in  every  direction  through 
the  body,  like  the  roots  and  branches  of  a  tree  ;  running 
through  the  substance "  of  the  bones,  and  every  part  of  the 
animal  frame,  till  they  are  lost  in  such  fine  tubes  as  to  be 
wholly  invisible.  In  the  parts  where  the  arteries  are  lost  to 
the  sight,  the  veins  take  their  rise  ;  and  in  their  commence- 
ment, are  also  imperceptible. 

Respiration. — The  organs  of  respiration  are  the  luiigs. 
They  are  divided  into  five  lobes  ;  three  of  which  lie  on  the 
right,  and  two  on  the  left  side  of  the  thorax.  The  sub- 
stance of  the  lungs  is  chiefly  composed  of  infinite  ramifica- 
tions of  the  thrachea,  or  windpipe,  which,  after  gradually  be- 
coming more  and  more  minute,  terminate  in  little  cells,  or 
vesicles,  which  have  a  free  communication  with  one  another. 
At  each  inspiration,  these  pipes  and  cells  are  filled  with  air, 
which  is  again  discharged  by  expiration.  In  this  manner,  a 
circulation  of  air,  which  is  necessary  to  the  existence  of  men 
and  other  animals,  is  constantly  kept  up  as  long  as  life  re- 
mains. The  air  cells  of  the  lungs  open  into  the  windpipe, 
by  which  they  communicate  with  the  external  atmosphere. 
The  whole  internal  structure  of  the  lungs  is  lined  by  a  transpa- 
rent membrane^  estimated  at  only  the  thousandth  part  of  an 
inch  in  thickness  ;  but  whose  surface,  from  its  various  con- 
volutions, measures  fifteen  square  feet,  which  is  equal  to  the 
external  surface  of  the  body.  On  this  thin  and  extensive 
membrane,  innumerable  veins  and  arteries  are  distributed, 
some  of  them  finer  than  hairs  ;  and  through  these  vessels  all 
the  blood  of  the  system  is  successively  propelled,  by  a  most 
curious  and  admirable  mechanism.  It  has  been  computed, 
that  the  lungs,  on  an  average,  contain  about  280  cubic  inches, 
or  about  five  English  quarts  of  air.  At  each  inspiration,  about 
forty  cubic  inches  of  air  are  received  into  the  lungs,  and  the 
same  quantity  discharged  at  each  expiration.  On  the  suppo- 
sition, that  20  respirations  take  place  in  a  minute,  it  will  fol- 
low, that,  in  one  minute,  we  inhale  800  cubic  inches  ;  in  an 
hour  48,000  ;  and  in  a  day,  one  million,  one  hundred  and  fifty- 
two  thousand  cubic  inches — a  quantity  which  would  fill  se- 
venty-seven wine  hogsheads,  and  would  weigh  fifty-three 
pounds  troy.  By  means  of  this  function,  a  vast  body  of  air  is 
daily  brought  into  contact  with  the  mass  of  blood,  and  com.- 


ANATOMY    AND    PHYSIOLOGY.  237 

municates  to  it  its  vivifying  influence  ;  and,  therefore,  it  is  of 
the  utmost  importance  to  health,  that  the  air,  of  which  we 
breathe  so  considerable  a  quantity,  should  be  pure,  and  uncon- 
taminated  with  noxious  effluvia. 

Digestion. — This  process  is  performed  by  the  stomach, 
which  is  a  membranous  and  muscular  bag,  furnished  with  two 
orifices.  By  the  one,  it  has  a  communication  with  the  gullet, 
and  by  the  other,  with  the  bowels.  The  food,  after  being 
moistened  by  the  saliva,  is  received  into  the  stomach,  where 
it  is  still  farther  diluted  by  the  gastric  juice,  which  has  the 
power  of  dissolving  every  kind  of  animal  and  vegetable  sub- 
stance. Part  of  it  is  afterwards  absorbed  by  the  lymphatic 
and  lacteal  vessels,  and  carried  into  the  circulating  system, 
and  converted  into  blood  for  supplying  that  nourishment  which 
the  perpetual  waste  of  our  bodies  demands. 

Perspiration  is  the  evacuation  of  the  juices  of  the  body 
through  the  pores  of  the  skin.  It  has  been  calculated  that 
there  are  above  three  hundred  thousand  millions  of  pores  in  the 
glands  of  the  skin  which  covers  the  body  of  a  middle  sized 
man.  Through  these  pores,  more  than  one-half  of  what  we 
eat  and  drink  passes  otf  by  insensible  perspiration.  If  we  con- 
sume eight  pounds  of  food  in  a  day,  five  pounds  of  it  are  in- 
sensibly discharged  by  perspiration.  During  a  night  of  seven 
hours'  sleep,  we  perspire  about  forty  ounces,  or  two  pounds 
and  a  half.  At  an  average,  we  may  estimate  the  discharge 
from  the  surface  of  the  body,  by  sensible  and  insensible  per- 
spiration, at  from  half  an  ounce  to  four  ounces  an  hour.  This 
is  a  most  wonderftil  part  of  the  animal  economy,  and  is  abso- 
lutely necessary  to  our  health,  and  even  to  our  very  existence. 
When  partially  obstructed,  colds,  rheumatisms,  fevers,  and 
other  inflammatory  disorders,  are  produced ;  and  were  it  com- 
pletely obstructed,  the  vital  functions  would  be  clogged  and 
impeded  in  their  movements,  and  death  would  inevitably 
ensue. 

Sensation. — The  nerves  are  generally  considered  as  the 
instruments  of  sensation.  They  are  soft  white  cords  which 
proceed  from  the  brain  and  spinal  marrow.  They  come  forth 
originally  by  pairs.  Ten  pair  proceed  from  the  medullary 
substance  of  the  brain,  which  are  distributed  to  all  parts  of  the 
head  and  neck.  Thirty  pair  proceed  from  the  spinal  marrow, 
through  the  vetebrte,  to  all  the  other  parts  of  the  body  ;  being 
forty  in  all.  These  nerves,  the  ramifications  of  which  are  in- 
finitely various  and  minute,  are  distributed  upon  the  heart, 
lungs,  blood-vessels,  bowels,  and  muscles,  tifl  they  terminate 
on  the  skin  or  external  covering  of  the  body.     Impressions  of 

20* 


THE  CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

external  objects  are  received  by  the  brain  from  the  adjacent 
organs  of  sense,  and  the  brain  exercises  its  commands  over 
the  muscles  and  limbs  by  means  of  the  nerves. 

Without  prosecuting  these  imperfect  descriptions  farther,  I 
shall  conclude  this  very  hasty  sketch  with  the  following  sum- 
mary of  the  parts  of  the  body,  in  the  words  of  Bonnet. — "  The 
bones,  by  their  joints  and  solidity,  form  the  foundation  of  this 
fine  machine  :  the  ligaments  are  strings  which  unite  the  parts 
together :  the  muscles  are  fleshy  substances,  which  act  as 
elastic  springs  to  put  them  in  motion  :  the  nerves,  which  are 
dispersed  over  the  whole  body,  connect  all  the  parts  together  : 
the  arteries  and  veins,  like  rivulets,  convey  life  and  health 
throughout :  the  heart,  placed  in  the  centre,  is  the  focus  where 
the  blood  collects,  or  the  acting  power  by  means  of  which  it 
circulates  and  is  preserved  :  the  lungs,  by  means  of  another 
power,  draw  in  the  external  air,  and  expel  hurtful  vapors  :  the 
stomach  and  intestines  are  the  magazines  where  every  thing 
that  is  required  for  the  daily  supply  is  prepared  :  the  brain, 
that  seat  of  the  soul,  is  formed  in  a  manner  suitable  to  the 
dignity  of  its  inhabitant :  the  senses,  which  are  the  soul's  mi- 
nisters, warn  it  of  all  that  is  necessary  either  for  its  pleasure 
or  use.*  Adorable  Creator  !  with  what  wonderful  art  hast 
thou  formed  us  !  Though  the  heavens  did  not  exist  to  pro- 
claim thy  glory ;  though  there  were  no  created  being  upon 
earth  but  myself,  my  own  body  might  suffice  to  convince  me 
that  thou  art  a  God  of  unlimited  power  and  infinite  goodness." 

This  subject  suggests  a  variety  of  moral  and  religious  re- 
flections, but  the  hmits  to  which  I  am  confined,  will  permit 
me  to  state  only  the  following  : — 

1.  The  economy  of  the  human  frame,  when  seriously  con- 
templated, has  a  tendency  to  excite  admiration  and  astonish- 
ment, and  to  impress  us  with  a  sense  of  our  conthiual  depend- 
ence on  a  Superior  Power.  What  an  immense  multiplicity  of 
machinery  must  be  in  action  to  enable  us  to  breathe,  to  feel, 
and  to  walk !  Hundreds  of  bones  of  diversified  lorms,  con- 
nected together  by  various  modes  of  articulation  ;  hundreds 
of  muscles  to  produce  motion,  each  of  them  acting  in  at  least 
ton  difierent  capacities  ;  (seep.  83.)  hundreds  of  tendons  and 
ligaments  to  connect  the  bones  and  muscles  ;  hundreds  of 
arteries  to  convey  the  blood  to  the  remotest  part  of  the  sys- 
tem :  hundreds  of  veins  to  bring  it  back  to  its  reservoir  the 
heart ;  thousands  of  glands  secreting  humors  of  various  kinds 
from  the  blood  ;  thousands  of  lacteal  and  lymphatic  tubes, 

*  Contemplation  of  Nature,  vol.  I.  p.  64. 


ANATOMY    AND    PHYSIOLOGY.  239 

absorbing  and  conveying  nutriment  to  the  circulating  fluid  ; 
millions  of  pores,  through  which  the  perspiration  is  continu- 
ally issuing ;  an  infinity  of  ramifications  of  nerves,  diffiising 
sensation  throughout  all  the  parts  of  this  exquisite  machine  ; 
and  the  heart  at  every  pulsation  exerting  a  force  of  a  hundred 
thousand  pounds,  in  order  to  preserve  all  this  complicated 
machinery  in  constant  operation  !  The  whole  of  this  vast 
system  of  mechanism  must  be  in  action  before  we  can  walk 
across  our  apartments  !  We  admire  the  operation  of  a  steam- 
engine,  and  the  force  it  exerts.  But,  though  it  is  constructed 
of  the  hardest  materials  which  the  mines  can  supply,  in  a  few 
months  some  of  its  essential  parts  are  worn  and  deranged, 
even  although  its  action  should  be  frequently  discontinued. 
But  the  animal  machine,  though  constructed,  for  the  most  part» 
of  the  softest  and  most  flabby  substances,  can  go  on  without 
intermission  in  all  its  diversified  movements,  by  night  and  by 
day,  for  the  space  of  eighty  or  a  hundred  years  ;  the  heart 
giving  ninety-six  thousand  strokes  every  twenty-four  hours, 
and  the  whole  mass  of  blood  rushing  through  a  thousand  pipes 
of  all  sizes  every  four  minutes  !  And,  is  it  man  that  governs 
these  nice  and  complicated  movements  ?  Did  he  set  the  heart 
in  motion,  or  endue  it  with  the  muscular  force  it  exerts  1  And 
when  it  has  ceased  to  beat,  can  he  command  it  again  to  resume 
its  functioos  ^  Man  knows  neither  the  secret  springs  of  the 
machinery  within  him,  nor  the  half  of  the  purposes  for  which 
they  serve,  or  of  the  movements  they  perform.  Can  any  thing 
more  strikingly  demonstrate  our  dependance  every  moment  on 
a  Superior  Agent,  and  that  it  is  "  in  God  we  live  and  move, 
and  have  our  being  ^"  Were  a  single  pin  of  the  machinery 
within  us,  and  over  which  we  have  no  control,  either  broken 
or  deranged,  a  thousand  movements  might  instantly  be  inter- 
rupted, and  our  bodies  left  to  crumble  into  the  dust. 

It  was  considerations  of  this  kind  that  led  the  celebrated 
physician  Galen,  who  was  a  sceptic  in  his  youth,  publicly  to 
acknowledge  that  a  Supreme  Intelligence  must  have  operated 
in  ordaining  the  laws  by  which  living  beings  are  constructed. 
And  he  wrote  his  excellent  treatise  "  On  the  uses  of  the  parts 
of  the  human  frame,"  as  a  solemn  hymn  to  the  Creator  of  the 
world.  "  I  first  endeavor  from  His  w  orks,"  he  says,  "  to  know 
him  myself,  and  afterwards,  by  the  same  means,  to  show  him  to 
others  ;  to  inform  them,  how  great  is  his  wisdom,  his  good- 
ness, his  power."  The  late  Dr.  Hunter  has  observed,  that 
Astronomy  and  Anatomy  are  the  studies  which  present  us  with 
the  most  striking  view  of  the  two  most  wonderful  attributes  of 
the  Supreme  Being.     The  first  of  these  fills  the  mind  with  the 


240  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

idea  of  his  immensity  in  the  largeness,  distances,  and  number 
of  the  heavenly  bodies  ;  the  last  astonishes  us  with  his  intel- 
lifi^ence  and  art  in  the  variety  and  delicacy  of  animal  me- 
chanism. 

2.  The  study  of  the  animal  economy  has  a  powerful  ten- 
dency to  excite  emotions  of  gratitude.  Man  is  naturally  a 
thoughtless  and  ungrateful  creature.  These  dispositions  are 
partly  owing  to  ignorance  of  the  wonders  of  the  human  frame, 
and  of  the  admirable  economy  of  the  visible  world  ;  and  this 
io-norance  is  owing  to  the  want  of  those  specific  instructions 
which  ought  to  be  communicated  by  parents  and  teachers,  in 
connexion  with  religion.  For,  there  is  no  rational  being  who 
is  acquainted  with  the  structure  of  his  animal  system,  and  re- 
flects upon  it  with  the  least  degree  of  attention,  but  must  feel 
a  sentiment  of  admiration  and  gratitude.  The  science  which 
unfolds  to  us  the  economy  of  our  bodies,  shows  us,  on  what 
an  infinity  of  springs,  and  motions,  and  adaptations,  our  life 
and  comfort  depend.  And  when  we  consider,  that  all  these 
movements  are  performed  without  the  least  care  or  laborious 
effort  on  our  part,  if  we  be  not  altogether  brutish,  and  insen- 
sible of  our  dependance  on  a  superior  Power,  we  must  be 
filled  with  emotions  of  gratitude  towards  Him  "  whose  hands 
have  made  and  fashioned  us,  and  who  giveth  us  life,  and 
breath,  and  all  things."  Some  of  the  motions  to  which  I  have 
adverted,  depend  upon  our  will ;  and  with  what  celerity  do 
they  obey  its  commands  ]  Before  we  can  rise  from  our  chair, 
and  walk  across  our  apartment,  a  hundred  muscles  must  be 
set  in  motion  ;  every  one  of  these  must  be  relaxed  or  con- 
stricted, just  to  a  certain  degree,  and  no  more  ;  and  all  must 
act  harmoniously  at  the  same  instant  of  time  ;  and,  at  the 
command  of  the  soul,  all  these  movements  are  instantaneously 
performed.  When  I  wish  to  lift  my  hand  to  my  head,  every 
part  of  the  body  requisite  to  produce  the  effect  is  put  in  mo- 
tion :  the  nerves  are  braced,  the  muscles  are  stretched  or  re- 
laxed, the  bones  play  in  their  sockets,  and  the  whole  animal 
machine  concurs  in  the  action,  as  if  every  nerve  and  muscle 
had  heard  a  sovereign  and  resistless  call.  When  I  wish  the 
next  moment  to  extend  my  hand  to  my  foot,  all  these  muscles 
are  thrown  into  a  different  state,  and  a  new  set  are  brought 
along  with  them  into  action  :  and  thus  we  may  vary,  every 
moment,  the  movements  of  the  muscular  system,  and  the 
mechanical  actions  it  produces,  by  a  simple  change  in  our 
volition.  Were  we  not  daily  accustomed  to  such  varied  and 
voluntary  movements,  or  could  we  contemplate  them  in  any 
other  machine,  we  should  be  lost  in  wonder  and  astonishment. 


HISTORY.  241 

Besides  these  voluntary  motions,  there  are  a  thousand  im- 
portant functions  which  have  no  dependance  upon  our  will. 
Whether  we  think  of  it  or  not,  whether  we  be  sleeping  or 
waking,  sitting  or  walking — the  heart  is  incessantly  exerting 
its  muscular  power  at  the  centre  of  the  system,  and  sending 
off  streams  of  blood  through  hundreds  of  pipes  ;  the  lungs  are 
continually  expanding  and  contracting  their  thousand  vesicles, 
and  imbibing  the  vital  principle  of  the  air ;  the  stomach  is 
grinding  the  food  ;  the  lacteals  and  lymphatics  are  extracting 
nourishment  for  the  blood  ;  the  liver  and  kidneys  drawing  oif 
their  secretions  ;  and  the  perspiration  issuing  from  millions 
of  pores.  These,  and  many  other  important  functions  with 
which  we  are  unacquainted,  and  over  which  we  have  no  con- 
trol, ought  to  be  regarded  as  the  immediate  agency  of  the 
Deity  within  us,  and  should  excite  our  incessant  admiration 
and  praise. 

There  is  one  peculiarity  in  the  constitution  of  our  anima. 
system,  which  we  are  apt  to  overlook,  and  for  which  we  are 
never  sufficiently  grateful  ;  and  that  is,  the  j^oiver  it  possesses 
of  self-restoration.  A  wound  heals  up  of  itself:  a  broken 
bone  is  made  firm  again  by  a  callus  ;  and  a  dead  part  is  sepa- 
rated and  thrown  off.  If  all  the  wounds  we  have  ever  received 
were  still  open  and  bleeding  afresh,  to  what  a  miserable  con- 
dition should  we  be  reduced  1  But  by  a  system  of  internal 
powers,  beyond  all  human  comprehension,  as  to  the  mode  of 
their  operation,  such  dismal  effects  are  effectually  prevented. 
In  short,  when  we  consider,  that  health  depends  upon  such  a 
numerous  assemblage  of  moving  organs,  and,  that  a  single 
spring  out  of  action,  might  derange  the  whole  machine,  and 
put  a  stop  to  all  its  complicated  movements,  can  we  refrain 
from  joining  with  the  Psalmist,  in  his  pious  exclamation,  and 
grateful  resolution,  "  IIow  precious  are  thy  wonderful  contri- 
vances concerning  me,  0  God !  how  great  is  the  sum  of 
them  !  I  will  praise  thee  ;  for  I  am  fearfully  and  wonderfully 
made.  Marvellous  are  thy  works,  and  that  my  soul  knoweth 
right  well." 

Omitting  the  consideration  of  several  other  departments  of 
science,  I  shall  in  the  meantime,  notice  only  another  subject 
connected  with  religion,  and  that  is  History. 

HISTORY. 

History  embraces  a  record  and  description  of  past  facts  and 
'^vents,  in  reference  to  all  the  nations  and  ages  of  the  world, 
\n  so  far  as  they  are  known,  and  have  been  transmitted  to  our 
time.    As  Natural  History  contains  a  record  of  the  operations 


242  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

of  the  Creator  in  the  material  world,  so,  sacred  and  civil  his- 
tory embraces  a  record  of  his  transactions  in  the  moral  and 
intellectual  world,  or,  in  other  words,  a  detail  of  the  plans  and 
operations  of  His  Providence,  in  relation  to  the  inhabitants  of* 
our  globe.  Through  the  medium  of  Sacred  History,  we  learn 
the  period  arid  the  manner  of  man's  creation — the  reason  of 
his  fall  from  the  primitive  state  of  integrity  in  which  he  was 
created,  and  the  dismal  consequences  which  ensued  ; — the 
various  movements  of  Providence  in  order  to  his  recovery, 
and  the  means  by  which  human  Redemption  was  achieved  ; — 
the  manner  in  which  the  Gospel  was  at  first  promuloated,  the 
countries  into  which  it  was  carried,  and  the  important  effects 
it  produced.  Through  the  medium  of  Civil  History  we  learn 
the  deep  and  universal  depravity  of  mankind,  as  exhibited  in 
the  wars,  dissensions,  and  ravages,  which  have  desolated  our 
fallen  race,  in  every  period,  and  in  every  land  ; — we  learn  the 
desperate  wickedness  of  the  human  heart,  in  the  more  private 
acts  of  ferocity,  cruelty,  and  injustice,  which,  in  all  ages,  men 
have  perpetrated  upon  each  other  ; — we  behold  the  Righteous- 
ness of  the  Supreme  Ruler  of  the  world,  and  the  equity  of  his 
administration,  in  the  judgments  which  have  been  inflicted  on 
wicked  nations — and  the  improbability,  nay,  the  impossibilUy 
of  men  being  ever  restored  to  moral  order  and  happiness, 
without  a  more  extensive  diffusion  of  the  blessings  of  the 
Gospel  of  Peace,  and  a  more  cordial  acquiescence  in  the 
requirements  of  the  Divine  laws. 

Such  being  some  of  the  benefits  to  be  derived  from  History, 
it  requires  no  additional  arguments  to  show,  that  this  branch 
of  knowledge  should  occasionally  form  a  subject  of  study  to 
every  intelligent  Christian.  But  in  order  to  render  the  study 
of  History  subservient  to  the  interests  of  Religion,  it  is  not 
enough  merely  to  gratify  our  curiosity  and  imagination,  by 
following  out  a  succession  of  memorable  events,  by  tracing 
the  progress  of  armies  and  of  battles,  and  listening  to  the 
groans  of  the  vanquished,  and  the  shouts  of  conquerors. 
This  would  be  to  study  History  merely  as  sceptics,  as  Athe- 
ists, or  as  writers  of  novels.  When  we  contemplate  the 
facts  which  the  Historian  presents  to  our  view,  we  ought  to 
raise  our  eyes  to  Him  who  is  the  Governor  among  the  nations, 
"  who  doth  according  to  his  will  in  the  armies  of  heaven,  and 
among  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,"  and  who  overrules  the 
jarring  interests  of  mortals,  for  promoting  the  prosperity  of 
that  Kingdom  which  shall  never  be  moved.  We  should  view 
the  immoral  jjropensities  and  dispositions  of  mankind  as  por- 
trayed in  the  page  of  history,  as  evidences  of  the  depravity  of 


HISTORY.  243 

our  species,  and  as  excitements  to  propagate,  with  unremitting' 
energy,  the  knowledge  of  that  ReHgion,  whose  subhme  doc- 
trines and  pure  precepts  alone  can  counteract  the  stream  of 
human  corruption,  and  unite  all  nations  in  one  harmonious 
society.  We  should  view  the  contests  of  nations,  and  the 
results  with  which  they  are  accompanied,  as  guided  by  that 
Invisible  Hand,  which  "  mustereth  the  armies  to  the  battle  ;" 
and  should  contemplate  them  either  as  the  accomplishment  of 
Divine  predictions,  as  the  inflictions  of  retributive  justice,  as 
paving  the  way  for  the  introduction  of  rational  liberty  and 
social  happiness  among  men,  or  as  ushering  in  that  glorious 
period,  when  "  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord  shall  cover  the 
earth",   and  the  nations  shall  learn  war  no  more. 


Thus  I  have  taken  a  very  cursory  survey  of  some  of  those 
sciences  which  stand  in  a  near  relation  to  the  objects  of  Reli- 
gion ;  and  which  may,  indeed^  be  considered  as  forming  so 
many  of  its  subordinate  branches.  There  are  many  other 
departments  of  knowledge  which,  at  first  view,  do  not  seem  to 
have  any  relation  to  Theological  science  ;  and  yet,  on  a  closer 
inspection,  will  be  found  to  be  essentially  connected  with  the 
several  subjects  of  which  I  have  been  treating.  For  example 
— some  may  be  apt  to  imagine  that  Arithmetic,  Geometry, 
Trigonometry,  and  other  branches  of  Mathematics,  can  have 
no  relation  to  the  leading  objects  of  Religion.  But  if  these 
sciences  had  never  been  cultivated,  the  most  important  disco- 
veries of  astronomy,  geography,  natural  philosophy,  and  che- 
mistry, would  never  have  been  made  ;  ships  could  not  have 
been  navigated  across  the  ocean  ;  distant  continents,  and  the 
numerous  "isles  of  the  sea,"  would  have  remained  unexplored, 
and  their  inhabitants  left  to  grope  in  the  darkness  of  heathen- 
ism ;  and  most  of  those  instruments  and  engines  by  which  the 
condition  of  the  human  race  will  be  gradually  meliorated,  and 
the  influence  of  Christianity  extended,  would  never  have  been 
invented.  Such  is  the  dependance  of  every  branch  of  useful 
knowledge  upon  another,  that  were  any  one  portion  of  science, 
which  has  a  practical  tendency,  to  be  discarded,  it  would 
prevent,  to  a  certain  degree,  the  improvement  of  every  other. 
And,  consequently,  if  any  one  science  can  be  shown  to  have 
a  connexion  with  religion,  all  the  rest  must  likewise  stand  in  a 
certain  relation  to  it.  It  must,  therefore,  have  a  pernicious 
effect  on  the  minds  of  the  mass  of  the  Christian  world,  when 
preachers,  in  their  sermons,  endeavor  to  undervalue  scientific 


244  THE    CHRISTIAN    PKILOSOniER. 

knowledge,  by  attempting  to  contrast  it  with  the  doctrines  of 
Revelation.  It  would  be  just  as  reasonable  to  attempt  to  con- 
trast the  several  doctrines,  duties,  and  facts,  recorded  in  the 
New  Testament  with  each  other,  in  order  to  determine  their 
relative  importance,  and  to  show  which  of  them  might  be 
altogether  overlooked  and  discarded.  The  series  of  facts  and 
of  Divine  revelations  comprised  in  the  Bible  ;  the  moral  and 
political  events  which  diversify  the  history  of  nations  ;  and  the 
physical  operations  that  are  going  on  among  the  rolling  worlds 
on  high,  and  in  the  chemical  changes  of  the  invisible  atoms 
of  matter,  are  all  parts  of  one  comprehensive  system,  under 
the  direction  of  the  Eternal  Mind  ;  every  portion  of  which 
must  have  a  certain  relation  to  the  whole. 

And,  therefore,  instead  of  attempting  to  degrade  one  part 
of  the  Divine  fabric  in  order  to  enhance  another,  our  duty  is 
to  take  an  expansive  view  of  the  whole,  and  to  consider  the 
symmetry  and  proportion  of  its  parts,  and  their  mutual  bear- 
ings and  relations — in  so  far  as  our  opportunities,  and  the 
limited  faculties  of  our  minds  will  permit. 

If  the  remarks  w^hich  have  been  thrown  out  in  this  chapter, 
respecting  the  connexion  of  the  Sciences  with  Religion,  have 
any  foundation,  it  will  follow — that  Sermons,  Lectures,  Sys- 
tems of  Divinity,  and  Religious  Periodical  works,  should  em- 
brace occasional  illustrations  of  such  subjects,  for  the  purpose 
of  expanding  the  conceptions  of  professed  Christians,  and  of 
enabling  them  to  take  large  and  comprehensive  views  of  the 
perfections  of  the  providence  of  the  Almighty.  It  is  much 
to  be  regretted,  that  so  many  members  of  the  Christian  Church 
are  absolute  strangers  to  such  studies  and  contemplations  ; 
while  the  time  and  attention  that  might  have  been  devoted  to 
such  exercises,  have,  in  many  cases,  been  usurped  by  the  most 
grovelling  affections,  by  foolish  pursuits,  by  gossiping  chit- 
chat, and  slanderous  conversation.  Shall  the  most  trifling  and 
absurd  opinions  of  ancient  and  modern  heretics  be  judged 
worthy  of  attention,  and  occupy  a  place  in  Religious  journals, 
and  even  in  discussions  from  the  pulpit,  and  shall  "  the  mighty 
acts  of  the  Lord,"  and  the  visible  wonders  of  his  power  and 
wisdom,  be  thrown  completely  into  the  shade  ?  To  survey, 
with  an  eye  of  intelligence,  the  wide-extended  theatre  of  the 
Divine  operations — to  inark  the  agency  of  the  Eternal  Mind 
in  every  object  we  behold,  and  in  every  movement  within  us 
and  around  us,  are  some  of  the  noblest  attainments  of  the 
rational  soul ;  and,  in  conjunction  with  every  other  Christian 
study  and  acquirement,  are  calculated  to  make  "  the  man  of 
God  perfect,  and  thoroughly  furnished  unto  every  good  work." 


HISTORY.  245 

By  such  studies,  we  are,  in  some  measure,  assimilated  to  the 
angelic  tribes,  whose  powers  of  intellect  are  for  ever  employed 
in  such  investigations— and  are  gradually  prepared  forbearmg 
a  part  in  their  immortal  hymn—"  Great  and  marvellous  are 
thy  works,  Lord  God  Almighty ;  just  and  true  are  thy  ways, 
thou  King  of  Saint?.  Thou  art  worthy  to  receive  glory,  and 
honor,  and  power ;  for  thou  hast  created  all  thmgs,  and  for 
thy  pleasure  they  are  and  were  created." 


Gl 


CHAPTER  III. 


THE  RELATION  WHICH  THE  INA^ENTIONS  OF  HUMAN 
ART  BEAR  TO  THE  OBJECTS  OF  RELIGION. 


In  this  chapter,  I  shall  briefly  notice  a  few  philosophical 
and  mechancical  inventions  which  have  an  obvious  bearing 
on  Religion,  and  on  the  general  propagation  of  Christianity 
among  the  nations. 

The  first,  and  perhaps  the  most  important  of  the  inven- 
tions to  which  I  allude,  is  the  Art  or  Printing.  This  art 
appears  to  have  been  invented  (at  least  in  Europe)  about  the 
year  1430,  by  one  Laurentius,  or  Lawrence  Koster,  a  native 
of  Haerlem,  a  town  in  Holland.  As  he  was  walking  in  a 
wood  near  the  city,  he  began  to  cut  some  letters  upon  the  rind 
of  a  beach  tree,  which,  for  the  sake  of  gratifying  his  fancy, 
being  impressed  on  paper,  he  printed  one  or  two  lines  as  a 
specimen  for  his  grandchildren  to  follow.  This  having  suc- 
ceeded, he  meditated  greater  things  ;  and  first  of  all,  invented 
a  more  glutinous  writing  ink  ;  because  he  found  the  common 
ink  sunk  and  spread  ;  and  thus  formed  whole  pages  of  wood, 
with  letters  cut  upon  them.*     By  the  gradual  improvement  of 

*  I  am  aware,  that  the  honor  of  this  invention  has  been  claimed  by  other 
cities  besides  Haerlem,  particularly  by  Strasburg,  and  Mentz,  a  city  of  Ger- 
many ;  and  by  other  individuaiis  besides  Lam-entius,  chiefly  by  one  Fusl, 
commonly  called  Dr.  Faustus ;  by  Schoeffer,  and  by  Gutenberg.  It  appears 
that  the  art,  with  many  of  its  implements,  was  stolen  from  Laurentius  by 
one  of  his  servants,  whom  he  had  bound,  by  an  oath,  to  secrecy,  who  fled 
to  Mentz,  and  first  commenced  the  process  of  printing  in  that  city.  Here 
the  art  was  improved  by  Fust  and  Schoeffer,  by  their  invention  of  metallic, 
instead  of  icooden  types,  which  were  first  used.  When  Fust  was  in  Paris, 
disposing  of  some  Bibles  he  had  printed,  at  the  low  price  (as  was  then 
thought)  of  sixty  crowns,  the  number,  and  the  uniformity  of  the  copies  he 
possessed,  created  universal  agitation  and  astonishment.  Informations 
were  given  to  the  Police  against  him  as  a  magician,  his  lodgings  were 
searched,  and  a  great  number  of  copies  being  found,  they  were  seized ;  the 
3ed  ink  witl*  v'hich  they  were  embellished,  was  said  to  be  his  blood  ,  it 


ART    OF    PRINTING.  247 

this  art,  and  its  application  to  the  diffusion  of  knowledge,  a 
new  era  was  formed  in  the  annals  of  the  human  race,  and  in 
the  progress  of  science,  religion,  and  morals.  To  it  we  are 
chiefly  indebted  for  our  deliverance  from  ignorance  and  error, 
and  for  most  of  those  scientific  discoveries  and  improvements 
in  the  arts  which  distinguish  the  period  in  which  we  live. — 
Without  its  aid,  the  Reformation  from  Popery  could  scarcely 
have  been  achieved  ;  for,  had  the  books  of  Luther,  one  of  the 
first  reformers,  been  multiplied  by  the  slow  process  of  hand- 
writing and  copying,  they  could  never  have  been  ditfused  to 
any  extent ;  and  the  influence  of  bribery  and  of  power  might 
have  been  sufficient  to  have  arrested  their  progress,  or  even  to 
have  erased  their  existence.  But,  being  poured  torth  from  the 
press  in  thousands  at  a  time,  they  spread  over  the  nations  of 
Europe  like  an  inundation,  and  with  a  rapidity  which  neither 
the  authority  of  princes,  nor  the  schemes  of  priests  and  car- 
dinals, nor  the  bulls  of  popes,  could  counteract  or  suspend. — 
To  this  noble  invention  it  is  owing  that  copies  of  the  Bible 
have  been  multiplied  to  the  extent  of  many  miUions — that  ten 
thousands  of  them  are  to  be  found  in  every  Protestant  country 
— and  that  the  poorest  individual  who  expresses  a  desire  for  it, 

was  seriously  adjudged,  that  he  was  in  league  with  the  Devil ;  and  if  he 
had  not  fled  from  the  city,  most  probably  he  would  have  shared  the  fate  of 
those  whom  ignorant  and  superstitious  judges,  at  that  time,  condemned  for 
witchcraft.  From  this  circumstance,  let  us  learn  to  beware  how  we  view 
the  inventions  of  genius,  and  how  we  treat  those  Avhose  ingenious  contri- 
vances may  afterwards  be  the  means  of  enlightening  and  meUorating  man- 
kind.    See  Appendix.  No.  VII. 

Vaa-ious  improvements  have  been  made,  of  late  years,  in  the  art  of  print- 
ing. That  which  has  lately  been  announced  by  Dr.  Cluxrch  of  Boston,  is 
the  most  remarkable ;  and,  if  found  successful,  will  cany  this  art  to  a  higli 
degree  of  perfection.  A  principal  object  of  this  improvement  is,  to  print 
constantly  from  new  types,  which  is  effected  by  simplifying  the  process  for 
casting  and  composing.  The  type  is  deUvered  perfect  by  machinery,  and  laid 
as  it  is  cast,  in  separate  compartments,  with  unerring  order  and  exactness. 
The  composition  is  then  effected  by  other  apparatus,  directed  by  keys  like 
those  of  a  piano-forte,  and  the  type  may  then  be  arranged  in  words  and 
lines,  as  quickly  as  in  the  performance  of  notes  in  music.  No  error  can 
arise  except  from  touching  the  wrong  key  ;  and  hence  an  expert  hand  will 
leave  little  labor  for  the  reader.  It  is  then  found  less  expensive  under  Dr. 
Church's  economical  system  of  re-casting,  to  re-melt  the  types,  and  re-cast 
them,  than  to  perform  the  tedious  operation  of  distribution.  The  melting 
takes  place  without  atmospheric  exposure, ^by  which  oxydation  and  waste 
of  metal  are  avoided.  It  is  calculated  that  two  men  can  produce  75,000 
new  types  per  hour,  and  in  re-composing,  one  man  will  perform  as  much 
as  three  or  four  compositors.  In  the  production  of  types,  the  saving  is 
ninety-nine  parts  in  a  hundred  ;  and  in  the  composition,  distribution,  and 
reading,  is  three  parts  in  four.  In  regard  to  press-work.  Dr.  C.  has  inven- 
ted a  machine  to  work  with  plattens,  instead  of  cyUnders,  from  which  he 
•\vill  be  enabled  to  take  30  fine  impressions  per  minute. 


248  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

may  be  furnished  with  the  "  Word  of  Life"  which  will  guide 
him  to  a  blessed  immortality.  That  Divine  light  which  is  des- 
tined to  illuminate  every  region  of  the  globe,  and  to  sanctify 
and  reform  men  of  all  nations,  and  kindreds,  and  tongues,  is 
accelerated  in  its  movements,  and  directed  in  its  course  through 
the  nations,  by  the  invention  of  the  Art  of  Printing  ;  and  ere 
long,  it  will  distribute  among  the  inhabitants  of  every  land,  the 
"  Law  and  the  Testimony  of  the  Most  High,"  to  guide  their 
steps  to  the  regions  of  eternal  bliss.  In  short,  there  is  not  a 
more  powerful  engine  in  the  hands  of  Providence,  for  diffu- 
sing the  knowledge  of  the  nature  and  the  will  of  the  Deity, 
and  for  accomplishing  the  grand  objects  of  Revelation,  than 
the  art  of  multiplying  books,  and  of  conveying  intelligence 
through  the  medium  of  the  Press.  Were  no  such  art  in  exis- 
tence, we  cannot  conceive  how  an  extensive  and  universal 
propagation  of  the  doctrines  of  Revelation  could  be  effected^ 
unless  after  the  lapse  of  an  indefinite  number  of  ages.  But^ 
with  the  assistance  of  this  invention,  in  its  present  improved 
state,  the  island  of  Great  Britain  alone,  within  less  than  a 
hundred  years,  could  furnish  a  copy  of  the  Scriptures  to  every 
inhabitant  of  the  world,  and  would  defray  the  expense  of  such 
an  undertaking,  with  much  more  ease,  and  with  a  smaller  sum, 
than  were  necessary  to  furnish  the  political  warfare  in  which 
we  were  lately  engaged. 

These  considerations  teach  us,  that  the  ingenious  inventions 
of  the  human  mind  are  under  the  direction  and  control  of  the 
Governor  of  the  world — are  intimately  connected  with  the  ac- 
complishment of  the  plan  of  his  providence,  and  have  a  ten- 
dency, either  directly  or  indirectly,  to  promote,  over  every 
region  of  the  earth,  the  progress  and  extension  of  the  kingdom 
of  the  Redeemer.  They  also  show  us,  from  what  small  be- 
ginnings the  most  magnificent  operations  of  the  Divine  econo- 
my may  derive  their  origin.  Who  could  have  imagined  that 
the  simple  circumstance  of  a  person  amusing  himself  by  cut- 
ting a  few  letters  on  the  bark  of  a  tree,  and  impressing  them 
on  paper,  was  intimately  connected  with  the  mental  illumina- 
tion of  mankind  ;  and  that  the  art  which  sprung  from  this 
casual  process  was  destined  to  be  the  principal  means  of  illu- 
minating the  nations,  and- of  conveying  to  the  ends  of  the 
earth,  '^  the  salvation  of  our  God?'  But,  "  He  who  rules  in 
the  armies  of  heaven,  and  among  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth," 
and  who  sees  "  the  end  from  the  beginning,"  overrules  the 
most  minute  movement  of  all  his  creatures,  in  subserviency 
to  his  ultimate  designs,  and  shows  himself,  in  this  respect,  to 
be  "  wonderful  in  counsel  and  excellent  in  working." 


THE    mariner's    COMPASS.  249 

The  Mariner's  Compass. — Another  invention  which  has 
an  intimate  relation  to  rehgion,  is,  the  Art  of  JYavis^-aiion,  and 
the  invention  of  the  Mariner's  Compass.  Navigation  is  the 
art  of  conducting  a  ship  through  the  sea,  from  one  port  to 
another.  This  art  v/as  partly  known  and  practised  in  the  early 
ages  of  antiquity,  by  the  Phenicians,  the  Carthaginians,  the 
Egyptians,  the  Romans,  and  other  nations  of  Europe  and  Asia. 
But  they  had  no  guide  to  direct  them  in  their  voyages,  except 
the  sun  in  the  day  time,  and  the  stars  by  night.  When  the  sky 
was  overcast  with  clouds,  they  were  thrown  into  alarms,  and 
durst  not  venture  to  any  great  distance  l>om  the  coast,  lest  they 
should  be  carried  forward  in  a  course  opposite  to  that  which 
they  intended,  or  be  driven  against  hidden  rocks,  or  unknown 
shores.  The  danger  and  difficulty  of  the  navigation  of  the 
ancients,  on  this  account,  may  be  learned  trom  the  delibera- 
tions, the  great  preparations,  and  the  alarms  of  Homer's  heroes, 
when  they  were  about  to  cross  the  Egean  Sea,  an  extent  of 
not  more  than  150  miles  ;  and  the  expedition  of  the  Argonauts 
under  Jason,  across  the  sea  of  Marmora  and  the  Euxine,  to 
the  island  of  Colchis,  a  distance  of  only  four  or  five  hundred 
miles,  was  viewed  at  a  most  wonderful  exploit  at  which  even 
the  gods  themselves  were  said  to  be  amazed.  The  same 
thing  appears  from  the  narration  we  have  in  the  Acts  of  the 
Apostles,  of  Paul's  voyage  from  Cisarea  to  Rome.  "  When,'' 
says  Luke,  "  neither  sun  nor  stars  in  many  days  appeared, 
and  no  small  tempests  lay  on  us,  all  hope  that  we  should  be 
saved  was  then  taken  away."  Being  deprived  of  these  guides, 
they  were  tossed  about  in  the  Mediterranean,  not  knowing 
whether  they  were  carried  to  north,  south,  east,  or  west.  So 
that  the  voyages  of  antiquity  consisted  chiefly  in  creeping  along 
the  coast,  and  seldom  venturing  beyond  sight  of  land  :  they 
could  not,  therefore,  extend  their  excursions  by  sea  to  distant 
continents  and  nations  ;  and  hence,  the  greater  portion  of  the 
terraqueous  globe  and  its  inhabitants  were  to  them  altogether 
unknown.  It  was  not  before  the  invention  of  the  Mariner^s 
Compass,  that  distant  voyages  could  be  undertaken,  that  ex- 
tensive oceans  could  be  traversed,  and  an  intercourse  carried 
on  between  remote  continents  and  the  islands  of  the  ocean. 

It  is  somewhat  uncertain  at  what  precise  period  this  noble 
discovery  was  made  ;  but  it  appears  pretty  evident,  that  the 
Mariner's  Compass  was  not  commonly  used  in  navigation  be- 
fore the  year  1420,  or  only  a  few  years,  before  the  invention  of 
Printing.*     The  loadstone,  in  all  ages,  was  known  to  have  the 

*  The  invention  of  the  Compass  is  usually  ascribed  to  Falvio  Gioia,  of 
Amalli,  in  Campania,  about  the  year  1302  ;  and  the  Italians  are  strenuous 

21* 


250  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

property  of  attracting  iron ;  but  its  tendency  to  point  towards 
the  north  and  south  seems  to  have  been  unnoticed  till  the 
beginning  of  the  twelfth  century.  About  that  time  some  curi- 
ous persons  seem  to  have  amused  themselves  by  making  to 
swim,  in  a  basin  of  water,  a  loadstone  suspended  on  a  piece 
of  cork  ;  and  to  have  remarked,  that,  when  left  at  liberty,  one 
of  its  extremities  pointed  to  the  north.  They  had  also  re- 
marked, that,  when  a  piece  of  iron  is  rubbed  against  the  load- 
stone, it  acquires  also  the  property  of  turning  towards  the  north, 
and  of  attracting  needles  and  filings  of  iron.  From  one  expe- 
riment to  another,  they  proceeded  to  lay  a  needle,  touched 
with  the  magnet,  on  two  small  bits  of  straw  floating  on  the 
water,  and  to  observe  that  the  needle  invariably  turned  its 
point  towards  the  north.  The  first  use  they  seem  to  have 
made  of  these  experiments,  was,  to  impose  upon  simple 
people  by  the  appearance  of  magic.  For  example,  a  hollow 
swan,  or  the  figure  of  a  mermaid,  was  made  to  swim  in  a  basin 
of  water,  and  to  follow  a  knive  with  a  bit  of  bread  upon  its 
point  which  had  been  previously  rubbed  on  the  loadstone.  The 
experimenter  convinced  them  of  his  power,  by  commanding, 
in  this  way,  a  needle  laid  on  the  surface  of  the  water,  to  turn 
its  point  from  the  north  to  the  east,  or  in  any  other  direction. 
But,  some  geniuses,  of  more  sublime  and  reflective  powers  of 
mind,  seizing  upon  these  hints,  at  last  applied  these  experi- 
ments to  the  wants  of  navigation,  and  constructed  an  instru- 
ment by  the  help  of  which  the  mariner  can  now  direct  his 
cours*^  to  distant  lands,  through  the  vast  and  pathless  ocean. 

In  consequence  of  the  discovery  of  this  instrument,  the 
coasts  of  almost  every  land  on  the  surface  of  the  globe  have 
been  explored,  and  a  regular  intercourse  opened  up  between 
the  remotest  regions  of  the  earth.  Without  the  help  of  this 
noble  invention,  America,  in  all  probability,  would  never  have 
been  discovered  by  the  eastern  nations — the  vast  continent  of 
New-Holland — the  numerous  and  interesting  islands  in  the 
Indian  and  Pacific  oceans — the  isles  of  Japan,  and  other  im- 
mense territories  inhabited  by  human  beings,  would  have  re- 
mained as  much  unknown  and  unexplored  as  if  they  had  never 

in  supporting  this  claim.  Others  affirm,  tliat  Marcus  Pauius,  a  Venetian, 
having  made  a  journey  to  China,  brought  back  the  invention  with  him  in 
1260.  The  French  also  lay  claim  to  the  lionor  of  this  invention,  from  the 
circumstance,  that  all  nations  distinguish  the  J^Torth  point  of  the  card  by  a 
Jleur  de  lis ;  and  with  equal  reason,  the  English  have  laid  claim  to  the  same 
honor,  from  the  name  compass,  by  which  most  nations  have  agreed  to  dis- 
tinguish it.  But  whoever  were  the  inventors,  or  at  wdiatever  period  this 
instrument  was  first  constructed,  it  does  not  appear  that  it  was  brought 
into  general  use,  before  the  period  mentioned  in  the  text. 


THE    mariner's   COMPASS.  251 

existed.  And  as  the  nations  of  Europe,  and  the  western  parts 
of  Asia,  were  the  sole  depositories  of  the  records  of  Revela- 
tion, they  could  never  have  conveyed  the  blessings  of  salvation 
to  remote  countries,  and  to  unknown  tribes  of  mankind,  of 
whose  existence  they  were  ennrely  ignorant.  Even  although 
the  whole  terraqueous  globe  had  been  sketched  out  before 
them,  in  all  its  aspects  and  bearings,  and  ramifications  of 
islands,  continents,  seas,  and  oceans,  and  the  moral  and  politi- 
cal state  of  every  tribe  of  its  inhabitants  displayed  to  view  ; — 
without  a  guide  to  direct  their  course  through  the  billows  of  the 
ocean,  they  could  have  afforded  no  light  and  no  relief  to  cheer 
the  distant  nations  "  who  sit  in  darkness,  and  in  the  shadow 
of  death."  Though  the  art  of  Printing  had  been  invented ; 
though  millions  of  Bibles  were  now  prepared,  adequate  to  the 
supply  of  all  the  "  kindreds  of  the  heathen  ;"  though  ships 
in  abundance  were  equipped  for  the  enterprise,  and  thousands 
of  missionaries  ready  to  embark,  and  to  devote  their  lives  to 
the  instruction  of  the  Pagan  world — all  would  be  of  no  avail» 
and  the  "  salvation  of  God"  could  never  be  proclaimed  to  the 
ends  of  the  world,  unless  they  had  a  Mariner's  Compass  to 
guide  their  course  through  the  trackless  ocean. 

In  this  invention,  then,  we  behold  a  proof  of  the  agency  of 
Divine  Providence,  in  directing  the  efforts  of  human  genius  to 
subserve  the  most  important  designs,  and  contemplate  a  strik- 
ing specimen  of  the  "  manifold  wisdom  of  God."  When  the 
pious  and  contemplative  Israelite  reflected  on  the  declaration 
of  the  prophets,  that  "  the  glory  of  Jehovah  would  be  reveal- 
ed, and  that  all  flesh  would  see  it  together  ;" — from  the  state 
of  the  arts  which  then  existed,  he  must  have  felt  many  difficul- 
ties in  forming  a  conception  of  the  manner  in  which  such  pre- 
dictions could  be  realized. — "  The  great  and  wide  sea,"  now 
termed  the  Mediterranean,  formed  the  boundary  of  his  view, 
beyond  which  he  was  unable  to  penetrate.  Of  the  continents, 
and  "  the  isles  afar  off,"  and  of  the  far  more  spacious  oceans 
that  lay  between,  he  had  no  knowledge  ;  and  how  "  the  ends 
of  the  earth"  were  to  be  reached,  he  could  form  no  concep- 
tion ;  and,  in  the  midst  of  his  perplexing  thoughts,  he  could 
find  no  satisfaction  only  in  the  firm  belief,  that  "  with  God  all 
things  are  possible."  But  now  we  are  enabled  not  only  to 
contemplate  the  grand  designs  of  the  Divine  economy,  but  the 
principal  means  by  which  they  shall  all,  in  due  time,  be  accom- 
plished, in  consequence  of  the  progress  of  science  and  art,  and 
of  their  consecration  to  the  rearing  and  extension  of  the  Chris- 
tian church. 

The  two  inventions  to  which  I  have  now  adverted,  may 


252  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

perhaps,  be  considered  as  among  the  most  striking  instances- 
of  the  connection  of  human  art  with  the  objects  of  Rehgion. 
But  there  are  many  other  inventions  which,  at  first  view,  do 
not  appear  to  bear  so  near  a  relation  to  the  progress  of  Christi- 
anity, and  yet  have  an  ultimate  reference  to  some  of  its  grand 
and  interesting  objects. 

The  Telescope. — We  might  be  apt  to  thmk,  on  a  slight 
view  of  the  matter,  that  there  can  be  no  immediate  relation  be- 
tween the  grinding  and  polishing  of  an  optic  glass,  and  fitting 
two  or  more  of  them  in  a  tube,  and— the  enlargement  of  our 
views  of  the  operation  of  the  Eternal  Mmd.  Yet  the  connec- 
tion between  these  two  objects,  and  the  dependance  of  the 
latter  upon  the  former,  can  be  fairly  demonstrated. — The  son 
of  a  spectacle-maker  of  Middleburg  in  Holland,  happening  to 
amuse  himself  in  his  father's  shop,  by  holding  two  glasses  be- 
tween his  finger  and  his  thumb,  and  varying  their  distance, 
perceived  the  weather-cock  of  the  church  spire  opposite  to 
hull,  much  larger  than  ordinary,  and  apparently  much  nearer, 
and  turned  upside  down.  This  new  wonder  exercised  the 
amazement  of  the  father  ;  he  adjusted  two  glasses  on  a  board, 
rendering  them  moveable  at  pleasure  ;  and  thus  formed  the 
first  rude  imitation  of  a  perspective  glass,  by  which  distant  ob- 
jects are  brought  near  to  view.  Galileo,  a  philosopher  of  Tus- 
cany, hearing  of  the  invention,  set  his  mind  to  work,  in  order 
to  bring  it  to  perfection.  He  fixed  his  glasses  at  the  end  of 
long  organ-pipes,  and  constructed  a  telescope,  which  he  soon 
directed  to  different  parts  of  the  surrounding  heavens.  He 
discovered  four  moons  revolving  around  the  planet  Jupiter — 
spots  on  the  surface  of  the  Sun,  and  the  rotation  of  that  globe 
around  its  axis — mountains  and  valleys  in  the  moon — and 
numbers  of  fixed  stars  where  scarcely  one  was  visible  to  the 
naked  eye.  These  discoveries  were  made  about  the  year 
1610,  a  short  time  after  the  first  invention  of  the  telescope. 
Since  that  period  this  instrument  has  passed  through  various 
degrees  of  improvement,  and,  by  means  of  it,  celestial  won- 
ders have  been  explored  in  the  distant  spaces  of  the  universe, 
which,  in  former  times,  were  altogether  concealed  from  mortal 
view.  By  the  help  of  telescopes,  combined  with  the  art  of 
measuring  the  distances  and  magnitudes  of  the  heavenly  bo- 
dies, our  vieAvs  of  the  Grandeur  of  the  Almighty,  of  the  pleni- 
tude of  his  Power  and  of  the  extent  of  his  universal  Empire, 
are  extended  far  beyond  what  could  have  been  conceived  in 
former  ages.  Our  prospects  of  the  range  of  the  Divine  oper- 
ations are  no  longer  confined  within  the  limits  of  the  world  we 
nHabit : — we  can  now  plainly  perceive,  that  the  kingdom  of 


THE    TELESCOPE.  253 

God  is  not  only  "  an  everlasting  dominion,"  but  that  it  ex- 
tends through  the  unlimited  regions  of  space,  comprehending 
within  its  vast  circumference  thousands  of  suns,  and  ten  thou- 
sands of  worlds,  all  ranged  in  majestic  order,  at  immense  dis- 
tances from  one  another,  and  all  supported  and  governed  "  by 
Him  who  rides  on  the  Heaven  of  Heavens,"  whose  greatness 
is  unsearchable,  and  whose  understanding  is  infinite. 

The  telescope  has  also  demonstrated  to  us  the  literal  truth 
of  those  scriptural  declarations  which  assert  that  the  stars  are 
"  innumerable."  Before  the  invention  of  this  instrument^  not 
more  than  about  a  thousand  stars  could  be  perceived  by  the 
unassisted  eye  in  the  clearest  night.  But  this  invention  has 
unfolded  to  view  not  only  thousands,  but  hundreds  of  thous- 
ands, and  millions  of  those  bright  luminaries,  which  lie  dis- 
persed in  every  direction  throughout  the  boundless  dimensions 
of  space.  And,  the  higher  the  magnifying  powers  of  the  teles- 
cope are,  the  more  numerous  those  celestial  orbs  appear ; 
leaving  us  no  room  to  doubt,  that  countless  myriads  more  lie 
hid  in  the  distant  regions  of  creation,  far  beyond  the  reach  of 
the  finest  glasses  that  can  be  constructed  by  human  skill,  and 
which  are  known  only  to  Him  "  who  counts  the  number  of  the 
stars,  and  calls  them  by  their  names." 

In  short,  the  telescope  may  be  considered  as  serving  the 
purpose  of  a  vehicle  for  conveying  us  to  the  distant  regions  of 
space.  We  would  consider  it  as  a  wonderful  achievement, 
could  we  transport  ourselves  two  hundred  thousand  miles  from 
the  earth,  in  the  direction  of  the  Moon,  in  order  to  take  a 
nearer  view  of  that  celestial  orb.  But  this  instrument  enables 
us  to  take  a  much  nearer  inspection  of  that  planet,  than  if  we 
had  actually  surmounted  the  force  of  gravitation,  traversed  the 
voids  of  space,  and  left  the  earth  230,000  miles  behind  us. 
For,  supposing  such  a  journey  to  be  accomplished,  we  should 
still  be  ten  thousand  miles  distant  from  the  orb.  But  a  teles- 
cope which  magnifies  objects  240  times,  can  carry  our  views 
within  ONE  thousand  miles  of  the  moon  ;  and  a  telescope,  such 
as  Dr.  Herschel's  40  feet  reflector,  which  magnifies  6000  times, 
would  enable  us  to  view  the  mountains  and  vales  of  the  moon, 
as  if  we  were  transported  to  a  point  about  40  miles  from  her 
surface,*     We  can  view  the  magnificent  system  of  the  planet 

*  Though  the  highest  magnifying  power  of  Dr.  Herschel's  large  telescope 
was  estimated  at  six  thousand  times,  yet  it  does  not  appear  that  the  Doctor 
ever  applied  this  power  with  success,  when  viewing  the  moon  and  the 
planets.  The  deficiency  of  light,  when  using  so  high  a  power,  would  ren- 
der the  view-  of  these  objects  less  satisflictory  than  when  viewed  with  a 
power  of  one  or  two  thousand  times.     Still,  it"  is  quite  certain,  that  if  any 


254  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

Saturn,  by  means  of  this  instrument  as  distinctly,  as  it^  we  ha«' 
performed  a  journey  eight  hundred  milHons  of  miles  in  th  ■. 
direction  of  that  globe,  which,  at  the  rate  of  50  miles  an  hoi 
would  require  a  period  of  more  than  eighteen  hundred  years  t- 
accomplish.  By  the  telescope,  we  can  contemplate  the  re 
gion  of  the  fixed  stars,  their  arrangement  into  systems,  anc 
their  immense  numbers,  with  the  same  distinctness  and  am- 
plitude of  view,  as  if  we  had  actually  taken  a  flight  often  hun- 
dred thousand  millions  of  miles  into  those  unexplored  and  un- 
explorabie  regions,  which  could  not  be  accomplished  in  seve- 
ral millions  of  years,  though  our  motion  were  as  rapid  as  a  ball 
projected  from  a  loaded  cannon.  We  would  justly  consider  it 
as  a  noble  endowment  for  enabling  us  to  take  an  extensive 
survey  of  the  works  of  God,  if  we  had  the  faculty  of  trans- 
porting ourselves  to  such  immense  distances  from  the  sphere 
we  now  occupy  ;  but,  by  means  of  the  telescopic  tube,  we  may 
take  nearly  the  same  ample  views,  of  the  dominions  of  the 
Creator,  without  stirring  a  foot  from  the  limits  of  our  terres- 
trial abode.  This  instrument  may,  therefore,  be  considered 
as  a  providential  gift,  bestowed  upon  mankind,  to  serve,  in  the 
mean  time,  as  a  temporary  substitute  for  those  powers  of  rapid 
flight  with  which  the  seraphim  are  endowed,  and  for  those  su- 
perior faculties  of  motion  with  which  man  himself  may  be  in- 
vested, when  he  arrives  at  the  summit  of  moral  perfection.* 

The  Microscope. — The  JVIicroscope  is  another  instrument 
constructed  on  similar  principles,  which  has  greatly  expanded 
our  views  of  the  "manifold  wisdom  of  God."  This  instru- 
ment, which  discovers  to  us  small  objects,  invisible  to  the 
naked  eye,  was  invented  soon  after  the  invention  and  improve- 
ment of  the  telescope.  By  means  of  this  optical  contrivance, 
we  perceive  a  variety  of  wonders  in  almost  every  object  in  the 
animal,  the  vegetable,  and  the  mineral  kingdoms.  We  per- 
ceive  that   every  particle  of  matter,  however  minute,  has  a 

portions  of  the  moon's  surface  were  viewed  through  an  instrument  of  such 
a  power,  they  would  apj^ear  as  large  (but  not  nearly  so  bright  and  distinct) 
as  if  we  were  placed  about  40  miles  distant  from  that  l)ody.  The  enlarge- 
ment of  the  angle  of  vision,  in  this  case,  or,  the  apparent  distance  at  which 
the  moon  would  be  contemplated,  is  found  by  dividing  the  moon's  dis- 
tance— 240,000  miles  by  6000,  the  magnifying  power  of  the  telescope, 
which  produces  a  quotient  of  40 — the  number  of  miles  at  which  the  moon 
would  appear  to  be  placed  from  the  eye  of  the  observer.  Dr.  Herschel  ap- 
pears to  have  used  the  highest  power  of  his  telescopes  only,  or  chiefly,  when 
viewing  some  very  minute  objects  in  the  region  of  the  stars.  The  powers 
he  generally  used,  and  with  which  he  made  most  of  his  discoveries  were, 
227,  460,  754,  932,  and  occasionally  2010,  3168,  and  6450  when  inspecting 
double  and  treble  stars,  and  the  more  distant  neloulse. 
*  See  Appendix,  No.  VIH. 


THE    TELESCOPE.  2o5 

determinate  form — that  the  very  scales  of  the  skin  of  a  haddock 
are  all  beautifully  interwoven  and  variegated,  like  pieces  of 
net-work,  which  no  art  can  imitate — that  the  points  of  the 
prickles  of  vegetables,  though  magnified  a  thousand  times,  ap- 
pear as  sharp  and  well  polished  as  to  the  naked  eye — that 
every  particle  of  the  dust  on  the  butterfly's  wing  is  a  beautiful 
and  regularly  organized  feather — that  every  hair  of  our  head  is 
a  hollow  tube,  with  bulbs  and  roots,  furnished  with  a  variety 
of  threads  or  filaments — and  that  the  pores  in  our  skin,  through 
which  the  sweat  and  perspiration  flow,  are  so  numerous  and 
minute,  that  a  grain  of  sand  would  cover  a  hundred  and  twen- 
ty-five thousand  of  them.  We  perceive  animated  beings  in 
certain  liquids,  so  small,  that  fifty  thousand  of  them  would  not 
equal  the  size  of  a  mite  ;  and  yet  each  of  these  creatures  is 
furnished  with  a  mouth,  eyes,  stomach,  blood-vessels,  and 
other  organs  for  the  performance  of  animal  functions.  In  a 
stagnant  pool  which  is  covered  with  a  greenish  scum  during 
the  summer  months,  every  drop  of  the  water  is  found  to  be  a 
world  teeming  with  thousands  of  inhabitants.  The  mouldy 
substance  which  usually  adheres  to  damp  bodies  exhibits  a 
forest  of  trees  and  plants,  where  the  branches,  leaves,  and 
fruit,  can  be  plainly  distinguished.  In  a  word,  by  this  admira- 
ble instrument  we  behold  the  same  Almighty  Hand  which 
rounded  the  spacious  globe  on  which  we  live,  and  the  huge 
masses  of  the  planetary  orbs,  and  directs  them  in  their  rapid 
motions  through  the  sky, — employed,  at  the  same  moment,  in 
rounding  and  polishing  ten  thousand  minute  transparent  globes 
in  the  eye  of  a  fly  ;  and  boring  and  arranging  veins  and  arte- 
ries, and  forming  and  clasping  joints  and  claws,  for  the  move- 
ments of  a  mite  !  We  thus  learn  the  admirable  and  astonish- 
ing effects  of  the  Wisdom  of  God,  and  that  the  Divine  Care 
and  Benevolence  are  as  much  displayed  in  the  construction  of 
the  smallest  insect,  as  in  the  elephant,  or  the  whale,  or  in 
those  ponderous  globes  which  roll  around  us  in  the  sky.  These, 
and  thousands  of  other  views  which  the  miscroscope  exhibits, 
would  never  have  been  displayed  to  the  human  mind,  had  they 
not  been  opened  up  by  this  admirable  invention. 

In  fine,  by  means  of  the  two  instruments  to  which  I  have 
now  adverted,  we  behold  Jehovah's  empire  extending  to  infi- 
nity on  either  hand.  By  the  telescope  we  are  presented  with 
the  most  astonishing  displays  of  his  omnipotence,  in  the  im- 
mense number,  the  rapid  motions,  and  the  inconceivable  mag- 
nitude of  the  celestial  globes  ; — iiiJ,  oy  the  microscope,  we 
behold,  what  is  still  more  inconceivable,  a  display  of  his  un- 
searchable wisdom  in  the  Divine  mechanism,  by  which  a  drop 


256  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

of  water  is  peopled  with  myriads  of  inhabitants — a  fact,  which, 
were  it  not  subject  to  ocular  demonstration,  would  far  exceed 
the  limits  of  human  conception  or  belief.  We  have  thus  the 
most  striking  and  sensible  evidence,  that,  from  the  immeasur- 
able luminaries  of  heaven,  and  from  the  loftiest  seraph  that 
stands  before  the  throne  of  God,  down  to  this  lower  world, 
and  to  the  smallest  microscopic  animalcula  that  eludes  the 
finest  glass — He  is  every  where  present,  and,  by  his  power, 
intelligence,  and  agency,  animates,  supports,  and  directs  the 
whole.  Such  views  and  contemplations  naturally  lead  us  to 
advert  to  the  character  of  God  as  delineated  by  the  sacred 
writers,  that  "  He  is  of  great  power  and  mighty  in  strength  ;" 
that  "  His  understanding  is  infinite  ;"  that  "  His  works  are 
wonderful ;"  that  "  His  operations  are  unsearchable  and  past 
finding  out ;"  and  they  must  excite  the  devout  mind  to  join 
with  fervor  in  the  language  of  adoration  and  praise. 

When  thy  amazing  works,  O  God ! 

My  mental  eye  sm-veys, 
"  Transported  with  the  view,  I'm  lost 

In  wonder,  love,  and  praise." 

Steam  Navigation. — We  might  have  been  apt  to  suppose 
that  the  chemical  experiments  that  were  first  made  to  demon- 
strate the  force  of  Steam  as  a  mechanical  agent,  could  have 
little  relation  to  the  objects  of  rehgion,  or  even  to  the  comfort 
of  human  life  and  society.  Yet  it  has  now  been  applied  to  the 
impelling  of  ships  and  large  boats  along  rivers  and  seas,  in  op- 
position to  both  wind  and  tide,  and  with  a  velocity  which,  at 
an  average,  exceeds  that  of  any  other  conveyance.  We  have 
no  reason  to  believe  that  this  invention  has  hitherto  approxi- 
mated to  a  state  of  perfection  ;  it  is  yet  in  its  infancy,  and  may 
be  susceptible  of  such  improvements,  both  in  point  of  expedi- 
tion and  of  safety,  as  may  render  it  the  most  comfortable  and 
speedy  conveyance  between  distant  lands,  for  transporting  the 
volume  of  inspiration,  and  the  heralds  of  the  gospel  of  peace  to 
"  the  ends  of  the  earth."  By  the  help  of  his  compass  the 
mariner  is  enabled  to  steer  his  course  in  the  midst  of  the  ocean, 
in  the  most  cloudy  days,  and  in  the  darkest  nights,  and  to 
transport  his  vessel  from  one  end  of  the  world  to  another.  It 
now  only  remains,  that  navigation  be  rendered  safe,  uniform, 
and  expeditious,  and  not  dependant  on  adverse  winds,  or  the 
currents  of  the  ocean  ;  and,  perhaps  the  art  of  propelling  ves- 
sels by  the  force  of  steam,  when  arrived  at  perfection,  may 
effectuate  those  desirable  purposes.  Even  at  present,  as  the 
invention  now  stands,  were  a  vessel  fitted  to  encounter  the 
waves  of  the  Atlantic,  constructed  of  a  proper  figure  and 


STEAM    NAVIGATION.  257 

curvature,  having  a  proper  disposition  of  her  wheels,  and  hav- 
ing such  a  description  of  fuel,  as  could  be  easily  stowed,  and 
in  sufficient  quantity  for  the  voyage — at  the  rate  of  ten  miles  an 
hour,  she  could  pass  from  the  shores  of  Britain  to  the  coast  of 
America,  in  less  than  thirteen  days  ; — and,  even  at  eight  miles 
an  hour,  the  voyage  could  be  completed  in  little  more  than  tit- 
teen  days  ;  so  that  intelligence  might  pass  and  repass  between 
the  eastern  and  western  Continents  within  the  space  of  a  sin- 
gle month — a  space  of  time  very  little  more  than  was  requisite^ 
sixty  years  ago,  for  conveying  intelligence  between  Glasgow 
and  London.  The  greatest  distance  at  which  any  two  places 
on  the  globe  He  from  each  other,  is  about  12,500  miles  ;  and, 
therefore,  if  a  direct  portion  of  water  intervene  between  them, 
this  space  could  be  traversed  in  fifty-four  or  sixty  days.  And, 
if  the  isthmus  of  Panama,  which  connects  North  and  South 
America,  and  the  isthmus  of  Suez,  which  separates  the  Medi- 
terranean from  the  Red  Sea,  were  cut  into  wide  and  deep 
canals,  (which  we  have  no  doubt  will  be  accomplished  as  soon 
as  civilized  nations  have  access  to  perform  operations  in  these 
territories,)  every  country  in  the  world  could  then  be  reached 
from  Europe,  in  nearly  a  direct  line  ;  or,  at  most  by  a  gentle 
curve,  instead  of  the  long,  and  dangerous,  and  circuitous  route 
which  must  now  be  taken,  in  sailing  the  eastern  parts  of  Asia, 
and  the  north-western  shores  of  America.  By  this  means, 
eight  or  nine  thousand  miles  of  sailing  would  be  saved  in  a 
voyage  from  England  to  Nootka  Sound,  or  the  Peninsula  of 
California  ;  and  more  than  six  thousand  miles,  in  passing  from 
London  to  Bombay  in  the  East  Indies  ;  and  few  places  on  the 
earth  would  be  further  distant  from  each  other  by  water  than 
15,000  miles  ;  which  space  might  be  traversed  at  the  rate 
mentioned  above,  in  a  period  from  sixty-two  to  seventy-seven 
days.* 

But  we  have  reason  to  beheve,  that  when  this  invention, 
combined  with  other  mechanical  assistances,  shall  approxi- 
mate nearer  to  perfection,  a  much  more  rapid  rate  of  motion 
will  be  effected  ;  and  the  advantages  of  this,  in  a  religious,  as 
well  as  in  a  commercial  point  of  view,  may  be  easily  appreci^- 
ated  ;  especially  at  the  present  period,  when  the  Christian 
world,  now  aroused  from  their  slumbers,  have  formed  the  grand 
design  of  sending  a  Bible  to  every  inhabitant  of  the  globe. 
When  the  empire  of  the  Prince  of  Darkness  shall  be  shaken 
throughout  all  its  dependencies,  and  the  nations  aroused  to  in- 
quire after  light,   and  liberty,  and  divine  knowledge — intelli- 

*  See  Appendix,  No.  IX. 
22 


258  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

geiice  would  thus  be  rapidly  communicated  over  every  region, 
and  between  the  most  distaiU  tribes.  "  Many  would  ran  to 
and  fro,  and  knowledge  would  be  increased."  The  Ambas- 
sadors of  the  Redeemer,  with  the  Oracles  of  Heaven  in  their 
hands,  and  the  words  of  salvation  in  their  mouths,  would 
quickly  be  transported  to  every  clime,  "  having  the  everlast- 
ing gospel  to  preach  to  every  nation,  and  kindred,  and  tongue, 
and  people." 

Air  Balloons. — Similar  remarks  may  be  applied  to  the 
inutntion  of  Air  Balloons.  We  have  heard  of  some  pious 
people  who  have  mourned  over  such  inventions,  and  lamented 
the  folly  of  mankind  in  studying  their  construction,  and  wit- 
nessing their  exhibition.  Such  dispositions  generally  proceed 
from  a  narrow  range  of  thought,  and  a  contracted  view  of  the 
Divine  Economy  and  arrangements  in  the  work  of  Redemp- 
tion. Though  the  perversity  of  mankind  has  often  applied 
useful  inventions  to  foolish,  and  even  to  vicious  purposes,  yet 
this  forms  no  reason  why  such  inventions  should  be  decried  ; 
otherwise  the  art  of  Printing,  and  many  other  useful  arts, 
might  be  regarded  as  inimical  to  the  human  race.  We  have 
reason  to  believe  that  air  balloons  may  yet  be  brought  to  such 
perfection,  as  to  be  applied  to  purposes  highly  beneticial  to  the 
progress  of  the  human  mind,  and  subservient,  in  some  de- 
gree, for  effecting  the  purposes  of  Providence  in  the  enlighten- 
ing and  renovation  of  mankind.  For  this  purpose,  it  is  only 
requisite  that  some  contrivance,  on  chemical  or  mechanical 
principles,  be  suggested,  analogous  to  the  sails  or  rudder  of  a 
ship,  by  which  they  may  be  moved  in  any  direction,  without 
being  directed  solely  by  the  course  of  the  wind  ;  and,  there 
can  be  little  doubt  that  such  a  contrivance  is  possible  to  be  ef- 
fected. It  requires  only  suitable  encouragement  to  be  given 
to  ingenious  experimental  philosophers,  and  a  sufficient  sum 
of  money  to  enable  them  to  prosecute  their  experiments  on  an 
extensive  scale.  To  the  want  of  such  pre-requisites,  it  is 
chiefly  owing,  that  the  hints  on  this  subject,  hitherto  suggest- 
ed, have  either  failed  of  success,  or  have  never  been  carried 
into  execution.  A  more  simple  and  expeditious  process  foi 
filling  balloons  has  lately  been  effected — the  use  of  the  parci- 
chtite,  by  which  a  person  may  detach  himself  from  the  balloon, 
and  descend  to  the  earth,  has  been  successfully  tried, — the 
lightning  of  heaven  has  been  drawn  from  the  clouds,  and 
forced  to  act  as  a  mechanical  power  in  splitting  immense 
stones  to  pieces, — the  atmosphere  has  been  analyzed  into  its 
component  parts,  and  the  wonderful  properties  of  the  ingre- 
dients of  which  it  is  composed,  exhibited  in  their  separate  state : 


AIR    BALLOONS  259 

and  why,  then,  should  we  consider  it  as  at  all  improbable  that 
the  means  of  producing  a  horizontal  direction  in  aerial  naviga- 
tion, may  soon  be  discovered  ]  Were  this  object  once  effected, 
balloons  might  be  applied  to  the  purpose  of  surveying  and  ex- 
ploring countries  hitherto  inaccessible,  and  of  conveying  the 
messengers  of  divine  mercy  to  tribes  of  our  fellow-men,  whose 
existence  is  as  yet  unknown. 

We  are  certain  that  every  portion  of  the  inhabited  world 
must  be  thoroughly  explored,  and  its  inhabitants  visited,  before 
the  salvation  of  God  can  be  carried  fully  into  effect ;  and,  for 
the  purpose  of  such  explorations,  we  must,  of  course,  resort 
to  the  inventions  of  human  genius  in  art  and  science.  Nu- 
merous tribes  of  the  sons  of  Adam  are,  doubtless,  residing  in 
regions  of  the  earth  with  which  we  have  no  acquaintance,  and 
to  which  we  have  no  access,  by  any  of  the  modes  of  convey- 
ance presently  in  use.  More  than  one-half  of  the  interior  parts 
of  Africa  and  Asia,  and  even  of  America,  are  wholly  unknown 
to  the  inhabitants  of  the  civilized  world.  The  vast  regions  of 
Chinese  Tartary,  Thibet,  Siberia,  and  the  adjacent  districts  ; 
almost  the  whole  interior  of  Africa,  and  the  continent  of  New 
Holland— the  extensive  isles  of  Borneo,  Sumatra,  New  Guinea, 
and  Japan,  the  territory  of  the  Amazons,  and  the  internal 
parts  of  North  America,  remain,  for  the  most  part,  unknown 
and  unexplored.  The  lofty  and  impassable  ranges  of  moun- 
tains, and  the  deep  and  rapid  rivers,  which  intervene  between 
us  and  many  of  those  regions,  together  with  the  savage  and 
plundering  hordes  of  men,  and  the  tribes  of  ravenous  beasts, 
through  which  the  traveller  must  push  his  way — present  to 
European  adventurers,  barriers  which  they  cannot  expect  to 
jurmount,  by  the  ordinary  modes  of  conveyance,  for  a  lapse  of 
ages.  But,  by  balloons  constructed  with  an  apparatus  for 
directing  their  motions,  all  such  obstructions  would  at  once  be 
surmounted.  The  most  impenetrable  regions,  now  hemmed 
m  by  streams  and  marshes,  and  lofty  mountains,  and  a  barba- 
rous population,  would  be  quickly  laid  open ;  and  cities  and 
nations,  lakes  and  rivers,  and  fertile  plains,  to  which  we  are 
now  entire  strangers,  would  soon  burst  upon  the  view.  And 
the  very  circumstance,  that  the  messengers  of  peace  and  sal- 
vation descended  upon  such  unknown  tribes  from  the  regions  oj 
the  clouds,  might  arouse  their  minds,  and  excite  their  attention 
and  regard  to  the  message  of  Divine  mercy  which  they  came 
thither  to  proclaim.*      Such  a  scene  (and  it  may  probably  be 

*  In  this  point  of  view,  we  cannot  but  feel  the  most  poignant  regret  at 
the  conduct  of  the  Spaniards,  after  the  discovery  of  America,  towards  the 


260  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

realized)  would  present  a  literal  fulfilment  of  the  prediction  of 
''^angels  flying  through  the  midst  of"  the  aerial  ^^  heaven, 
having  the  everlasting  gospel  to  preach  to  them  that  dwell  upon 
the  earth,  and  to  every  kindred  and  nation." 

That  the  attention  of  the  philosophical  world  is  presently 
directed  to  this  subject,  and  that  we  have  some  prospect  of  the 
views  above  suggested  being  soon  realized,  will  appear  from 
the  following  notice,  which  lately  made  its  appearance  in  the 
London  Scientific  Journals  : — "  A  Prize  being  offered  for  the 
discovery  of  a  horizontal  direction  in  Aerostation,  M.  Mingreli 
of  Bologna,  M.  Pietripoli  of  Venice,  and  M.  Lember  of  Nu- 
remberg, have  each  assumed  the  merit  of  resolving  this  pro- 
blem. It  does  not  appear  that  any  one  of  these  has  come 
forward  to  establish,  by  practical  experiment,  the  validity  of 
his  claim  ;  but  a  pamphlet  has  lately  been  reprinted  at  Paris 
(first  printed  at  Vienna)  on  this  subject^  addressed  to  all  the 
learned  Societies  in  Europe.  The  following  passage  appears 
in  the  work  : — "Professor  Robertson  proposes  to  construct  aa 
acrostic  machine,  150  feet  in  diameter,  to  be  capable  of  raising 
72,954  killograms,  equivalent  to  149,037  lbs.  weight  (French.) 
To  be  capable  of  conveying  all  necessaries  for  the  support  of 
sixty  individuals,  scientific  characters,  to  be  selected  by  the 
Academicians,  and  the  aerial  navigations  to  last  for  some 
months,  exploring  different  heights  and  climates,  &c.  in  all 

natives  of  that  country.  When  those  untutored  people  beheld  the  ships 
which  had  conveyed  Columbus  and  his  associates  from  the  eastern  world, 
the  di-esses  and  martial  order  of  his  troops,  and  heard  their  music,  and  the 
thunder  of  their  cannon,  they  were  filled  with  astonishment  and  wonder 
at  the  strange  objects  presented  to  their  view  ;  they  fell  prostrate  at  their 
feet,  and  viewed  them  as  a  superior  race  of  men.  When  Cortes  afterAvards 
entered  the  territories  of  Mexico,  the  same  sentiments  of  reverence  and 
admiration  seemed  to  pervade  its  inhabitants.  Had  pure  Christian  motives 
actuated  the  minds  of  these  adventurers,  and  had  it  been  then-  ruling  desire 
to  communicate  to  those  ignorant  tribes  the  blessings  of  the  Gospel  of  peace, 
and  to  administer  to  their  external  comfort,  the  circumstances  now  stated 
would  have  been  highly  favourable  to  the  success  of  missionary  exertion, 
and  would  have  led  them  to  listen  with  attention  to  the  message  from, 
heaven.  But,  unfortunately  for  the  cause  of  religion,  treachery,  lust,  cruelty, 
selfishness  and  the  cursed  love  of  gold,  predominated  oA^er  every  other  feeling, 
affixed  a  stigma  to  the  Christian  name,  and  rendered  them  curses,  instead 
of  blessings,  to  that  newly-discovered  race  of  men.  It  is  most  earnestly  to 
be  wished,  that,  in  future  expeditions  in  quest  of  unknown  tribes,  a  few 
intelligent  and  philanthropic  missionaries  were  appointed  to  direct  the 
adventurers  in  their  moral  conduct  and  intercourse  with  the  people  thev 
visit,  in  order  that  nothing  inconsistent  with  Christian  principle  make  its 
appearance.  The  uniform  manifestation  of  Christian  benevolence,  purity, 
and  rectitude,  by  a  superior  race  of  men,  would  win  the  affections  of  n 
rude  people  far  more  effectually  than  all  the  pomp  and  ensigns  of  milit^v 
parade.. 


AIR    BALLOONS.  261 

seasons.  If,  from  accident,  or  wear,  the  machine,  elevated 
above  the  ocean,  should  fail  in  its  functions,  to  be  furnished 
with  a  ship  that  will  ensure  the  return  of  the  Aeronauts." 

Should  any  one  be  disposed  to  insinuate,  that  the  views  now 
stated  on  this  subject  are  chimerical  and  fallacious,  I  beg  leave 
to  rejiiind  them,  that,  not  more  than  twenty  years  ago,  the  idea 
of  a  large  vessel,  without  oars  and  sails,  to  be  navigated 
against  the  wind,  with  the  rapidity  of  ten  miles  an  hour,  would 
have  been  considered  as  next  to  an  impossibility,  and  a  mere 
fanciful  scheme,  which  could  never  be  realized.  Yet  we  now 
behold  such  vehicles  transporting  whole  villages  to  the  places 
of  their  destination,  with  a  degree  of  ease,  comfort,  and  ex- 
pedition, formerly  unknown.  And  little  more  than  forty  years 
have  elapsed,  since  it  would  have  been  viewed  as  still  more 
chimerical  to  have  broached  the  idea,  that  a  machine  might 
be  constructed,  by  which  human  beings  might  ascend  more 
than  two  miles  above  the  surface  of  the  earth,  and  fly  through 
the  region  of  the  clouds  at  the  rate  of  seventy  miles  an  hour, 
carrying  along  with  them  books,  instruments,  and  provisions. 
Yet  both  these  schemes  have  been  fully  realized,  and,  like 
many  other  inventions  of  the  human  intellect,  are  doubtless 
intended  to  subserve  some  important  ends  in  the  economy  of 
Divine  Providence.* 

*  Balloons  were  first  constructed  in  the  year  17S3,  by  Messrs.  S.  and  J. 
Mongolfier,  paper-manufacturers  at  Annonay,  in  France.  A  sheep,  a  cock, 
and  a  duck,  were  the  first  animals  ever  carried  up  into  the  air  by  these 
vehicles.  At  the  end  of  their  journey,  they  were  found  perfectly  safe  and 
unhurt,  and  the  sheep  was  even  feeding  at  perfect  ease.  The  first  human 
being  who  ascended  into  the  atmosphere  in  one  of  these  machines,  was 
M.  Pilatre  de  Rozier.  This  adventurer  ascended  from  amidst  an  astonished 
multitude  assembled  in  a  garden  in  Paris,  on  the  15th  October,  1783,  in  a 
balloon,  whose  diameter  was  48  feet,  and  its  height  about  74  ;  and  remauied 
suspended  above  the  city  about  four  hours.  Mr.  Lunardi,  an  Italian,  soon 
after,  astonished  the  people  of  England  and  Scotland,  by  his  aerial  excur- 
sions. Dr.  G.  Gregory  gives  the  following  account  of  his  ascent :— "  I  was 
myself  a  spectator  of  the  flight  of  Lunardi,  and  I  never  was  present  at  a 
sight  so  intei-esting  and  sublime.  The  beauty  of  the  gradual  ascent,  united 
widi  a  sentiment  of  terror,  on  account  of  the  danger  of  the  man,  and  the 
novelty  and  grandeur  of  the  Avhole  appearance,  are  more  than  words  can 
express.  A  deheate  woman  was  so  overcome  with  the  spectacle,  that  she 
died  upon  the  spot,  as  the  balloon  ascended  ;  several  fainted  ;  and  the  silent 
admiration  of  the  anxious  multitude  was  beyond  any  thing  I  had  ever 
beheld." 

Balloons  have  been  generally  made  of  varnished  silk,  and  of  the  shape 
of  a  globe  or  a  spheroid,  from  thirty  to  fifty  feet  in  diameter.  They  are 
filled  with  hydrogen  gas,  which,  as  formerly  stated,  is  from  twelve  to  fifteen 
times  lighter  than  common  air:  and  they  rise  into  the  atmosphere,  on  the 
same  principle  as  a  piece  of  cork  ascends  from  the  bottom  of  a  pail  of 
water.  The  aerial  travellers  are  seated  in  a  basket  below  the  balloon, 
which  is  attached  to  it  by  means  of  cords. — The  Parachute  is  an  invention, 

22* 


^62  THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

Acoustic  Tunnels. — By  means  of  the  inventions  jusl 
now  adverted  to,  when  brought  to  perfection,  mankind  may  be 
enabled  to  transport  themselves  to  every  region  of  the  globe, 
with  a  much  greater  degree  of  rapidity  than  has  hitherto  been 
attained.  By  the  help  of  the  microscope,  we  are  enabled  to 
contemplate  the  invisible  worlds  of  life,  and  by  the  telescope 
we  can  penetrate  into  regions  far  beyond  the  range  of  the 
unassisted  eye.  By  the  arts  of  Writing  and  Printing,  we  can 
communicate  our  sentiments,  after  a  certain  lapse  of  time,  to 
every  quarter  of  the  world.  In  the  progress  of  human  know- 
ledge and  improvement,  it  would  obviously  be  of  considerable 
importance,  could  we  extend  the  range  of  the  human  voice,  and 
communicate  intelligence  to  the  distance  of  a  thousand  miles, 
in  the  course  of  two  or  three  hours  ;  or  could  we  hold  an  occa- 
sional conversation  with  a  friend  at  the  distance  of  20  or  30 
miles.  From  the  experiments  which  have  been  lately  made, 
in  reference  to  the  conveyance  of  sound,  we  have  some  reason 
to  believe,  that  such  objects  may  not  be  altogether  unattaina- 
ble. It  has  been  long  known,  that  wood  is  a  good  conductor 
of  sound.  If  a  watch  be  laid  on  the  end  of  a  long  beam  of 
timber,  its  beating  will  be  distinctly  heard,  on  applying  the  ear 
to  the  other  end,  though  it  could  not  be  heard  at  the  same  dis- 
tance through  the  air.  In  "  Nicholsvon's  Philosophical  Journal" 
for  February,  1803,  Mr.  E.  Walker  describes  a  simple  appara- 
tus, connected  with  a  speaking  trumpet,  by  means  of  which^ 
at  the  distance  of  17^  feet,  he  held  a  conversation  with  another 
in  whispers,  too  low  to  be  heard  through  the  air  at  that  dis- 
tance. When  the  ear  was  placed  in  a  certain  position,  the 
words  were  heard  as  if  they  had  been  spoken  by  an  invisible 
being  within  the  trumpet.  And  what  rendered  the  deception 
still  more  pleasing,  the  words  were  m.ore  distinct,  softer,  and 
more  musical,  than  if  they  had  been  spoken  through  the  air. 

About  the  year  1750,  a  merchant  of  Cleves,  named  Joris- 
sen,  who  had  become  almost  totally  deaf,  sitting  one  day  near 
a  harpsichord,  while  some  one  was  playing,  and  having  a 
tobacco-pipe  in  his  mouth,  the  bowl  of  which  rested  accident- 
ally against  the  body  of  the  instrument,  he  was  agreeably  and 
unexpectedly  surprised  to  hear  all  the  notes  in  the  most  dis- 
tinct manner.     By  a  little  reflection  and  practice,  he  again 

by  which  the  voyager,  in  cases  of  alarm,  may  l^e  enabled  to  desert  his  bal- 
loon in  mid-air,  and  descend,  without  injury,  to  the  ground.  They  resemble 
an  umbrella,  but  are  of  far  greater  extent.  With  one  of  tliese  contrivances, 
twenty-three  feet  in  diameter,  M.  Garnerin,  having  detached  himself  from 
liis  balloon,  descended  from  a  heiglu  of  more  than  4000  feet,  and  landed 
without  shock  or  accident. 


ACOUSTIC    TUNNELS.  263 

obtained  the  use  of  this  valuable  sense  ;  for  he  soon  iearnedy 
by  means  of  a  piece  of  hard  wood,  one  end  of  which  he 
placed  against  his  teeth,  while  another  person  placed  the  other 
end  on  his  teeth,  to  keep  up  a  conversation,  and  to  be  able  to 
understand  the  least  whisper.  In  this  way,  two  persons  who 
have  stopped  their  ears  may  converse  with  each  other,  when 
they  hold  a  long  stick  or  a  series  of  sticks,  between  their 
teeth,  or  rest  their  teeth  against  them.  The  effect  is  the  same, 
if  the  person  who  speaks  rest  the  stick  against  his  throat,  or 
his  breast,  or  when  one  rests  the  stick  which  he  holds  in  his 
teeth  against  some  vessel  into  which  the  other  speaks  ;  and 
the  effect  will  be  the  greater,  the  more  the  vessel  is  capable  of 
tremulous  motion.  These  experiments  demonstrate  the  faci- 
lity with  which  the  softest  whispers  may  be  transmitted. — 
Water,  too,  is  found  to  be  a  good  conductor  of  sound.  Dr. 
Franklin  assures  us,  that  he  has  heard  under  water,  at  the 
distance  of  half  a  mile,  the  sound  of  two  stones  struck  against 
each  other.  It  has  been  also  observed,  that  the  velocity  of 
sound  is  much  greater  in  solid  bodies,  than  in  the  air.  By  a 
series  of  experiments,  instituted  for  the  purpose  of  determin- 
ing this  point,  Mr.  Chladni  found  that  the  velocity  of  sound, 
in  certain  solid  bodies,  is  16  or  17  times  as  great  as  in  air. 

But  what  has  a  more  particular  bearing  on  the  object  hinted 
at  above,  is,  the  experiments  lately  made  by  M.  Biot,  "  on  the 
transmission  of  sound  through  solid  bodies,  and  through  air, 
in  very  long  tubes."  These  experiments  were  made  by  means 
of  long  cylindrical  pipes,  which  were  constructing  for  conduits 
and  aqueducts,  to  embellish  the  city  of  Paris.  With  regard 
to  the  velocity  of  sound,  it  was  ascertained  that  "  its  trans- 
mission through  cast  iron  is  101  times  as  quick  as  through 
air."  The  pipes  by  which  he  wished  to  ascertain  at  what 
distance  sounds  are  audible,  were  1,039  yards,  or  nearly  five 
furlongs,  in  length.  M.  Biot  was  stationed  at  the  one  end  of 
this  series  of  pipes,  and  Mr.  Martin,  a  gentleman  who  assisted 
in  the  experiments,  at  the  other.  They  heard  the  lowest 
voice,  so  as  perfectly  to  distinguish  the  words,  and  to  keep  up 
a  conversation  on  all  the  subjects  of  the  experiments.  "  I 
wished,"  says  M.  Biot,  "  to  determine  the  point  at  which  the 
human  voice  ceases  to  be  audible,  but  could  not  accomplish 
it :  words  spoken  as  low  as  when  we  whisper  a  secret  in 
another's  ear,  were  heard  and  understood  ;  so  that  not  to  be 
heard,  there  was  but  one  resource,  that  of  not  speaking  at  all. 
— This  mode  of  conversing  with  an  invisible  neighbor,  is  so 
singular  that  we  cannot  help  being  surprised,  even  though 
acquainted  with  the  cause.      Between  a  question  and  answer, 


264  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

the  interval  was  not  greater  than  was  necessary  for  the  trans- 
mission of  sound.  For  Mr.  Martin  and  me,  at  the  distance 
of  1,039  yards,  this  time  was  about  5^  seconos."  Reports  of 
a  pistol  fired  at  one  end,  occasioned  a  considerable  explosion 
at  the  other.  The  air  was  driven  out  of  the  pipe  with  suffi- 
cient force  to  give  the  hand  a  smart  blow,  to  drive  light  sub- 
stances out  of  it  to  the  distance  of  half  a  yard,  and  to  extin- 
guish a  candle,  though  it  was  1,039  yards  distant  from  the 
place  where  the  pistol  was  fired.  A  detailed  account  of  these 
experiments  may  be  seen  in  JVichohon^s  Phil.  Jour,  for 
October,  1811.  Don  Gautier,  the  inventor  of  the  Telegraph, 
suggested  also  the  method  of  conveying  articulate  sounds  to 
a  ^reat  distance.  He  proposed  to  build  horizontal  tunnels, 
widening  at  the  remoter  extremity,  and  found  that  at  the  dis- 
tance of  400  fathoms,  or  nearly  half  a  mile,  the  ticking  of  a 
watch  could  be  heard  far  better  than  close  to  the  ear.  He 
calculated  that  a  series  of  such  tunnels  would  convey  a  mes- 
sage 900  miles  in  an  hour. 

Froiii  the  experiments  now  stated,  it  appears  highly  pro- 
bable, that  sounds  may  be  conveyed  to  an  indefinite  distance. 
If  one  man  can  converse  with  another  at  the  distance  of  nearly 
three  quarters  of  a  mile,  bij  means  of  the  softest  whisper.,  there 
is  every  reason  to  believe,  that  they  could  hold  a  conversa- 
tion at  the  distance  of  30  or  40  miles,  provided  the  requisite 
tunnels  were  constructed  for  this  purpose.  The  latter  case 
does  not  appear  more  wonderful  than  the  former.  Were  this 
point  fully  determined,  by  experiments  conducted  on  a  more 
extensive  scale,  a  variety  of  interesting  effects  would  follow, 
from  a  practical  application  of  the  results.  A  person  at  one 
end  of  a  large  city,  at  an  appointed  hour,  might  communicate 
a  message,  or  hold  a  conversation  with  his  friend,  at  another  ; 
friends  in  neighbouring,  or  even  in  distant  towns,  might  hold 
an  occasional  correspondence  by  articulate  sounds,  and  recog- 
nize each  other's  identity  by  their  tones  of  voice.  In  the  case 
of  sickness,  accident,  or  death,  intelligence  could  thus  be 
instantly  communicated,  and  the  tender  sympathy  of  friends 
immediately  exchanged.  A  clergyman  sitting  in  his  owm  room 
in  Edinburgh,  were  it  at  any  time  expedient,  might  address  a 
congregation  in  Musselburgh  or  Dalkeith,  or  even  in  Glasgow. 
He  might  preach  the  same  sermon  to  his  own  church,  and  the 
next  hour  to  an  assembly  at  forty  miles  distant.  And  surely 
there  could  be  no  valid  objection  to  trying  the  effect  of  an 
invisible  prenclier  on  a  Christian  audience.  On  similar  prin- 
ciples, an  apparatus  might  be  constructed  for  augmenting  the 
strength  of  the  human  voice,  so  as  to  make  it  extend  its  force 


PRACTICAL    REMARKS.  265 

to  an  assembled  multitude,  composed  of  fifty  or  a  hundred 
thousand  individuals  ;  and  the  utility  of  such  a  power,  when 
the  mass  of  mankind  are  once  thoroughly  aroused  to  attend 
to  rational  and  religious  instruction,  may  be  easily  conceived, 
fn  short,  intelligence  respecting  every  important  discovery, 
occurrence,  and  event,  might  thus  be  communicated,  through 
the  extent  of  a  whole  kingdom,  within  the  space  of  an  hour 
after  it  had  taken  place. 

Let  none  imagine  that  such  a  project  is  either  chimerical  or 
impossible.  M.  Biot's  experiment  is  decisive,  so  far  as  it 
goes  ;  that  the  softest  tvhisperj  without  any  diminution  of  its 
intensity,  may  be  communicated  to  the  distancQ  of  nearly  three 
quarters  of  a  mile  ;  and  there  is  nothing  but  actual  experi- 
ment wanting  to  convince  us,  that  the  ordinary  tones  of  the 
human  voice  may  be  conveyed  to  at  least  twenty  times  that 
distance.  We  are  just  now  acting  on  a  similar  principle,  in 
distributing  illumination  through  large  cities.  Not  thirty  years 
ago,  the  idea  of  lighting  our  apartments  by  an  invisible  sub- 
stance, produced  at  ten  miles'  distance,  would  have  been  con- 
sidered as  chimerical,  and  as  impossible  to  be  realized,  as  the 
idea  of  two  persons  conversing  together,  by  articulate  sounds, 
at  such  a  distance.  It  appears  no  more  wonderful,  that  we 
should  be  able  to  hear  at  the  distance  of  five  or  six  miles,  than 
that  we  should  be  enabled  to  see  objects  at  that  distance  by 
the  telescope,  as  distinctly  as  if  w^e  were  within  a  few  yards  of 
them.  Both  are  the  effects  of  those  principles  and  laws  which 
the  Creator  has  interwoven  with  the  system  of  the  material 
world  ;  and  when  man  has  discovered  the  mode  of  their  oper- 
ation, it  remains  with  himself  to  apply  them  to  his  necessities. 
What  the  telescope  is  to  the  eye,  acoustic  tunnels  would  be  to 
the  ear ;  and  thus,  those  senses  on  which  our  improvement  in 
knowledge  and  enjoyment  chiefly  depends,  would  be  gradually 
carried  to  the  utmost  perfection  of  which  our  station  on  earth 
will  permit.  And,  as  to  the  expense  of  constructing  such  com- 
munications for  sound,  the  tenth,  part  of  the  millions  of  money 
expended  in  twenty-two  years'  war  in  which  we  were  lately 
engaged,  would,  in  all  probability,  be  more  than  sufficient  for 
distributing  them  in  numerous  ramifications,  through  the  whole 
island  of  Great  Britain,  Even  although  such  a  project  were 
partially  to  fail  of  success,  it  would  be  a  far  more  honorable 
and  usetul  national  undertaking,  than  that  which  now  occupies, 
the  attention  of  the  despots  on  the  continent  of  Europe,  and, 
might  be  accomplished  with  far  less  expenditure,  either  of 
blood  or  of  money.  Less  than  the  fourth  part  of  a  milhon  of 
p,QUnds  would  be  sufficient  for  trjdng   an   experiment  of  this 


266  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

kind,  on  an  extensive  scale  ;  and  such  a  sum  is  considered  as 
a  mere  item,  when  fleets  and  armies  are  to  be  equipped  for  car- 
rying destruction  through  sea  and  land.  When  will  the  war- 
madness  cease  its  rage  !  When  will  men  desist  from  the  work 
of  destruction,  and  employ  their  energies  and  their  treasures 
in  the  cause  of  human  improvement !  The  most  chimerical 
projects  that  were  ever  suggested  by  the  most  enthusiastic 
visionary,  are  not  half  so  ridiculous,  and  degrading  to  the 
character  of  man,  as  those  ambitious  and  despotic  schemes,  in 
which  the  powers  of  the  earth  in  all  ages  have  been  chiefly  en- 
gaged,— But  on  this  topic  it  is  needless  to  enlarge,  till  more 
extended  experiments  shall  have  been  undertaken. 

In  the  preceding  sketches  I  have  presented  a  few  specimens 
of  the  relation  which  the  inventions  of  human  ingenuity  bear 
to  religious  objects.  I  intended  to  have  traced  the  same  rela- 
tion in  several  other  instances  ;  in  the  invention  of  the  elec- 
trical machine,  the  air-pump,  mills,  clocks  and  watches,  gas- 
lights, chemical  fumigations,  inventions  for  enabling  us  to 
walk  upon  the  water,  to  prevent  and  alleviate  the  dangers  of 
shipwreck,  &c.  &c.  But,  as  my  prescribed  hmits  will  not 
permit  farther  enlargement,  I  trust  that  what  has  been  already 
stated  will  be  suflicient  to  establish  and  illustrate  my  general 
position.     From  this  subject  we  may  learn — 

1st,  That  the  various  processes  of  art,  and  the  exertions  of 
human  ingenuity,  are  under  the  special  direction  of  Him  who 
arranges  all  things  "  according  to  the  counsel  of  his  will."  As 
"  the  king's  heart  is  in  the  hand  of  the  Lord,  and  as  the  rivers 
of  waters,  he  turns  it  whithersoever  he  pleases  ;"  so,  all  the 
varied  schemes  and  movements  of  the  human  mind,  the 
discoveries  of  science,  and  the  diversified  experiments  of 
mechanics,  chemists  and  philosophers,  are  directed  in  such 
channels  as  may  issue  in  the  accomplishment  of  His  eternal 
purposes,  in  respect  to  the  present  and  future  condition  of  the 
inhabitants  of  our  world.  This  truth  is  also  plainly  taught  us  in 
the  records  of  mspiration,  "  Doth  the  ploughman  plough  all 
day  to  sow  ?  Doth  he  open  and  break  the  clods  of  his  ground  1 
AVhen  he  hath  made  plain  the  face  thereof,  doth  he  not  cast 
abroad  the  fitches,  and  scatter  the  cummin,*  and  cast  in  the 
wheat  in  the  principal  [place,]  and  the  barley  in  the  appointed 
place,  and  the  rye  in  its  proper  place  J  For  his  God  doth  in- 
struct him  to  discretion,  and  doth  teach  him.  This  also  cometh 
forth  from  the  Lord  of  hosts,  who  is  wonderful  in  counsel,  and 

*  Fitches  la  a  kind  of  seed  froqn.ontly  sown  in  Jiidea,  for  the  use  of  cut- 
tle :  ai:d  cummin  lo  the  seed  of  a  piai;l  somewhat  hke  fennel. 


millen?nIAL  era.  2fi7 

excellent  in  working."  Agriculture  has,  by  most  nations, 
been  attributed  to  the  suggestions  of  Deity  ;  for  "  every  good 
and  perfect  gift  cometh  down  from  the  Father  of  lights."  It  is 
he  who  hath  taught  men  to  dig  from  the  bowels  of  the  earth, 
iron,  copper,  lead,  silver,  and  gold,  and  to  apply  them  to  useful 
purposes  in  social  life  ;  and  who  hath  given  them  "  wisdom 
and  understanding"  to  apply  the  animal  and  vegetable  produc- 
tions of  nature  to  the  manufacture  of  cloths,  linen,  muslin,  and 
silk,  for  the  use  and  the  ornament  of  man.  For  "  all  things 
are  of  God."  "  Both  riches  and  honor  come  from  him,  and 
he  reigneth  over  all,  and  in  his  hand  is  power  and  might,  and 
in  his  hand  it  is  to  make  great,  and  to  give  strength  to  all." 
When  the  frame  of  the  Mosaic  Tabernacle,  and  all  its  curious 
vessels  were  to  be  constructed,  the  mind  of  Bezaleel  "  was 
filled  with  the  spirit  of  God,  in  wisdom  and  understanding,  and 
in  knowledge,  and  in  all  manner  of  workmanship,  to  devise 
curious  works  in  gold,  and  in  silver,  and  in  brass."  And,  when 
the  fabric  of  the  New  Testament  church  is  to  be  reared,  and 
its  boundaries  are  extended,  artificers  of  every  description,  ade- 
quate for  carrying  on  the  different  parts  of  the  works  are 
raised  up,  and  inspired  with  the  spirit  of  their  respective  de- 
partments— some  with  the  spirit  of  writing,  printing,  and  pub- 
lishing ;  some  with  the  spirit  of  preaching,  lecturing,  and  cate- 
chising ;  some  with  the  spirit  of  fortitude,  to  make  bold  and 
daring  adventures  into  distant  barbarous  climes  ;  and  others, 
with  the  spirit  of  literature,  of  science,  and  of  the  mechanical 
arts — all  acting  as  pioneers  "  to  prepare  the  way  of  the  Lord," 
and  as  builders  for  carrying  forward  and  completing  the  fabric 
of  the  Christian  Church. 

2dly,  All  the  mechanical  contrivances  to  which  I  have  ad- 
verted, all  the  discoveries  of  science,  and  all  the  useful  inven- 
tions of  genius  which  may  hereafter  be  exhibited,  ought  to  be 
viewed  as  preparing  the  way  for  the  millennial  era  of  the  church, 
and  as  having  a  certain  tendency  to  the  melioration  of  the  ex- 
ternal condition  of  mankind  during  its  continuance.  We  are 
certain,  from  the  very  nature  of  things,  as  well  as  from  scrip- 
tural predictions,  that,  w^hen  this  period  advances  towards  the 
summit  of  its  glory,  the  external  circumstances  of  this  world's 
population  will  be  comfortable,  prosperous,  and  greatly  melio- 
rated beyond  what  they  have  ever  been  in  the  ages  that  are 
past — "  Then  shall  the  earth  yield  her  increase,  and  God,  even 
our  own  God,  shall  bless  us.  Then  shall  he  give  the  rain  of  thy 
seed,  that  thou  shalt  sow  thy  ground  withal,  and  bread  of  the 
increase  of  the  earth  ;  and  it  shall  be  fat  and  plenteous.  In 
that  day  shall  thy  cattle  feed  in  large  pastures  ;  the  oxen  like 


268  THE   CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

wise  and  the  young  asses  that  ear  the  ground  shall  eat  savoury 
provender,  which  hath  been  winnowed  with  the  shovel  and 
with  the  fan.  And  the  inhabitants  shall  not  say,  I  am  sick. 
They  shall  build  houses  and  inhabit  them,  and  plant  vineyards, 
and  eat  the  fruit  of  them.  They  shall  not  build,  and  another 
inhabit ;  they  shall  not  plant,  and  another  eat ;  for,  as  the  days 
of  a  tree  are  the  days  of  my  people^  and  mine  elect  shall  long 
enjoy  the  work  of  their  hands.  They  shall  not  labor  in  vain, 
nor  bring  forth  for  trouble  ;  for  they  are  the  seed  of  the  blessed 
of  the  Lord,  and  their  offspring  with  them.  The  seed  shall  be 
prosperous,  the  vine  shall  give  her  fruit,  and  the  ground  shall 
give  her  increase,  and  the  heavens  shall  give  their  dew  ;  the 
evil  beasts  shall  cease  out  of  the  land,  and  they  shall  sit  every 
man  under  his  vine,  and  under  his  fig-tree,  and  none  shall 
make  him  afraid  ;  for  wars  shall  cease  to  the  ends  of  the  world, 
and  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord  shall  cover  the  earth  as  the 
waters  cover  the  sea."*  Diseases  will  be,  in  a  great  measure, 
banished  from  the  world,  and  the  life  of  man  extended  far  be- 
yond its  present  duration — agriculture  will  be  brought  to  per- 
fection— commodious  habitations  erected  for  the  comfortable 
accommodation  of  all  ranks — cities  built  on  elegant  and  spa- 
cious plans,  adapted  to  health,  ornament,  and  pleasure  ;  di- 
vested of  all  the  filth,  and  darkness,  and  gloom,  and  narrow 
lanes  which  now  disgrace  the  abodes  of  men — roads  will  be 
constructed  on  improved  principles,  with  comfortable  means 
of  retreat  for  shelter  and  accommodation  of  all  seasons  ;  and 
conveyances  invented  for  the  ease,  and  safety,  and  rapid  con- 
veyance of  persons  and  property  from  one  place  to  another. 
Either  the  climates  of  the  earth  will  be  meliorated,  by  the  uni- 
versal cultivation  of  the  soil,  so  that  storms  and  tempests, 
thunders  and  lightnings,  shall  no  longer  produce  their  present 
ravages  :  or  chemical  and  mechanical  contrivances  will  be  in- 
vented to  ward  off  their  destructive  etfects.  The  landscape  of 
the  earth  will  be  adorned  with  vegetable  and  architectural 
beauty  ;  and,  instead  of  horse-racing,  demoralizing  plays, 
routs,  and  masquerades,  boxing,  and  bull-baits — artificial  dis- 
plays of  scenery  will  be  exhibited,  more  congenial  to  the  dig- 
nity of  rational,  renovated,  and  immortal  minds.  For  "  the 
knowledge  of  the  Lord,"  and  the  "beauties  ofhoUness,"  will 
pervade  men  of  all  ranks  and  ages,  "  from  the  least  even  to  the 
greatest."-]- 

Psalm  Ixvii.    Isaiah  xxx.  23,  24.  xxxiii.  24.  Ixv.  21,  23,  &c. 
t  The  various    circumstances  above-stated  may  be  considered  as  the 
natund  results  of  a  state  of  society  on  which  the  hglu  of  science  and  o^  r*»ve- 


MILLENNIAL    ERA.  9,69 

Now,  as  we  have  no  reason  to  expect  any  miraculous  infer' 
ference^  we  must  regard  the  past,  and  the  future  useful  inven- 
tions of  philosophy  and  mechanics,  as  having  a  bearing  on  this 
glorious  period,  and  a  tendency  to  promote  the  improvement 
and  the  felicity  of  those  who  shall  live  during  this  era  of  Mes- 
siah's reign.  If  diseases  are  to  be  generally  abolished,  it  will 
be  owing  to  the  researches  of  the  scientific  physician  in  dis- 
covering certain  antidotes  against  every  disorder,  and  to  the 
practice  of  temperance,  meekness,  equanimity  of  mind,  and 
every  other  means  of  preserving  the  vigor  of  the  animal  frame. 
If  the  earth  is  to  produce  its  treasures  in  abundance,  and  with 
little  labour,  it  will  be  owing,  in  part,  to  the  improvement  of 
agricultural  science,  and  of  the  instruments  by  which  its  opera- 
tions are  conducted.  If  the  lightnings  of  heaven  shall  no 
longer  prove  destructive  to  man  and  to  the  labors  of  his  hands, 
it  will  be  effected  either  by  machinery  for  drawing  off  the 
electricity  of  a  stormy  cloud,  or  by  the  invention  of  thunder- 
guards,  which  shall  afford  a  complete  protection  from  its  rav- 
ages. In  these,  and  numerous  other  instances,  the  inventions 
of  men,  under  the  guidance  of  the  Spirit  of  Wisdom,  will 
have  a  tendency  to  remove  a  great  part  of  the  Curse  which 
has  so  long  hung  over  our  sinful  world.  And  since  the  inven- 
tions of  human  skill  and  ingenuity  for  the  melioration  of  man- 
kind, and  for  the  swift  conveyance  of  intelligence  have,  of 
late  years,  been  rapidily  increasing,  at  the  same  time  when  the 
Christian  world  is  roused  to  increased  exertions  in  dissemina- 
ting the  Scriptures  throughout  all  lands,  when  general  know- 
ledge is  increasingly  diffused,  and  when  the  fabric  of  Supersti- 
tion and  Despotism  is  shaking  to  its  foundations, — these  com- 
bined and  simultaneous  movements  seem  plainly  to  indicate, 
that  that  auspicious  era  is  fast  hastening  on,  when  "the  glory 
of  Jehovah  shall  be  revealed,  and  all  flesh  shall  see  it  together," 
when  "  righteousness  and  praise  shall  spring  forth  before  all 

lation  has  diffused  its  full  influence,  and  where  the  active  powers  of  the 
human  mind  are  invariably  directed  by  the  pure  principles  and  precepts  of 
Chi'istianity,  That  the  duration  of  human  life,  at  the  era  referred  to,  will 
be  extended  beyond  its  present  boundary,  appears  to  be  intimated  in  some 
of  the  passages  above  quoted,  particularly  the  following — "»is  the  days  of 
a  tree  shall  be  the  days  of  my  people,  and  mine  elect  shall  long  enjoy  the  work 
of  their  hands."  And,  if  the  life  of  man  will  be  thus  protracted  to  an  in- 
definite period,  it  will  follow,  that  those  diseases  which  now  prey  upon  the 
human  frame,  and  cut  short  its  vital  action,  will  be  in  a  great  measure  ex- 
tirpated. Both  these  effects  may  be  viewed  (without  supposing  any  mira- 
culous interference)  as  the  natural  consequence  of  that  happiness  and 
equanimity  of  mind  which  will  flow  from  the  practice  of  Christian  \'irtues, 
from  the  enlargement  of  om-  knowledge  of  the  principles  of  nature,  and 
from  the  physical  enjoyments  which  such  a  state  of  society  will  furnish. 

23 


270  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

nations,"  and  when  "  Holiness  to  the  Lord,"  shall  be  inscribed 
on  all  the  pursuits,  and  implements,  and  employments  of  men. 
Lastly, — If  the  remarks  suggested  above  be  well  founded, 
we  may  conclude,  that  the  mechanical  and  philosophical  inven- 
tions of  genius  are  worthy  of  the  attentive  consideration  of 
the  enlightened  Christian,  particularly  in  the  relation  they  may 
have  to  the  accomplishment  of  religious  objects.  He  should 
contemplate  the  experiments  of  scientific  men,  not  as  a  waste 
of  time,  or  the  mere  gratification  of  an  idle  curiosity,  but  as 
embodying  the  germs  of  those  improvements,  by  which  civili- 
zation, domestic  comfort,  knowledge,  and  moral  principle  may 
be  diffused  among  the  nations.  To  view  such  objects  with 
apathy  and  indifference,  as  beneath  the  regard  of  a  religious 
character,  argues  a  weak  and  limited  understanding,  and  a 
contracted  view  of  the  grand  operations  of  a  Superintending 
Providence. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


SCRIPTURAL  DOCTRINES  AND  FACTS  ILLUSTRATED 
FROM  THE  SYSTEM  OF  NATURE.* 


Without  spending  time  in  any  introductory  ODservations 
on  this  subject,  it  may  be  remarked  in  general, 

I. — That  scientific  knowledge,  or  an  acquaintance  with  the 
System  of  JVature,  may  frequently  serve  cls  a  guide  to  the  true 
interpretation  of  Scripture, 

It  may  be  laid  down  as  a  universal  principle,  that  there  can 
be  no  real  discrepancy  between  a  just  interpretation  of  Scrip- 
ture, and  the  facts  of  physical  science  ;  and  on  this  principle, 
the  following  canon  is  founded,  which  may  be  considered  as 
an  infallible  rule  for  Scripture-interpretation,  namely, — That 
no  interpretation  of  Scripture  ought  to  he  admitted  ivhich  is 
inconsistent  with  any  well-authenticated  facts  in  the  material 
world.  By  w ell-authenticated  facts^  I  do  not  mean  the  theories 
of  philosophers,  or  the  deductions  they  may  have  drawn  from 
them,  nor  the  confident  assertions  or  plausible  reasonings  of 
scientific  men  in  support  of  any  prevailing  system  of  Natural 
science  ;  but  those  facts  which  are  universally  admitted,  and 
the  reality  of  which  every  scientific  inquirer  has  it  in  his  power 
to  ascertain  :  such  as  that  the  earth  is  not  an  extended  plane, 
but  a  round  or  globular  body,  and  that  the  rays  of  the  sun, 
when  converged  to  a  focus  by  a  large  convex  glass,  will  set 
fire  to  combustible  substances.  Such  facts,  when  ascertained, 
ought  to  be  considered  as  a  revelation  from  God,  as  well  as 
the  declarations  of  his  word.     For  they  make  known  to  us  a 

+  Under  this  head,  it  was  originally  intended  to  embmce  an  elucidation 
of  a  considerable  variety  of  the  facts  recorded  in  the  Sacred  History,  and 
of  the  allusions  of  the  inspired  writers  to  the  system  of  nature ;  but  as  the 
volume  has  already  swelled  beyond  the  limits  proposed,  I  am  reluctantly 
eonipelled  to  confine  myself  to  the  illustration  of  only  two  or  three  topics. 


272  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

portion  of  his  character,  of  his  plans  and  his  operations. — 
This  rule  may  be  otherwise  expressed  as  follows  : — Where  a 
passage  of  Scripture  is  of  doubtful  meanings  or  capable  of  dif- 
ferent interpretation^  that  interpretation  ought  to  be  preferred 
which  will  best  agree  with  the  established  discoveries  of  science. 
For  since  the  Author  of  revelation  and  the  Author  of  univer- 
sal nature  is  one  and  the  same  Infinite  Being, — there  must 
exist  a  complete  harmony  between  the  revelations  of  his  word, 
and  the  facts  or  relations  which  are  observed  in  the  material 
universe.  To  suppose  the  contrary,  would  be  to  suppose  the 
Almighty  capable  of  inconsistency ;  a  supposition  which  would 
go  far  to  shake  our  confidence  in  the  theology  of  Nature,  as 
well  as  of  Revelation.  If,  in  any  one  instance,  a  Record 
claiming  to  be  a  Revelation  from  heaven  were  found  to  con- 
tradict a  well-known  fact  in  the  material  world ;  if,  for  exam- 
ple, it  asserted,  in  express  terms,  to  be  literally  understood, 
that  the  earth  is  a  quiescent  body  in  the  centre  of  the  universe, 
or  that  the  moon  is  no  larger  than  a  mountain ;  it  would  be  a 
fair  conclusion,  either  that  the  revelation  was  not  Divine,  or 
that  the  passages  embodying  such  assertions  are  interpolations, 
or,  that  science,  in  reference  to  these  points,  has  not  yet  arri- 
ved at  the  truth.  The  example,  we  are  aware,  is  inapplicable 
to  the  Christian  Revelation,  which  rests  securely  on  its  own 
basis,  and  to  which  science  is  gradually  approximating,  as  it 
advances  in  the  amplitude  of  its  views,  and  the  correctness  of 
its  deductions  ; — but  it  shows  us  how  necessary  it  is,  in  inter- 
preting the  Word  of  God,  to  keep  our  eye  fixed  upon  his 
tVorks ;  for  we  may  rest  assured,  that  truth  in  the  one  will 
always  correspond  with  fact  in  the  other. 

To  illustrate  the  rule  now  laid  down,  an  example  or  two 
may  be  stated. — If  it  be  a  fact  that  geological  research  has 
ascertained  that  the  materials  of  the  strata  of  the  earth,  arc  of 
a  more  ancient  date  than  the  Mosaic  account  of  the  com- 
mencement of  the  present  race  of  men ;  the  passages  in  the 
first  chapter  of  Genesis,  and  other  parts  of  Scripture,  which 
refer  to  the  origin  of  our  world,  must  be  explained  as  convey- 
ing the  idea,  that  the  earth  was  then  merely  arranged  into  its 
present  form  and  order,  out  of  the  materials  which  previously 
existed  in  a  confused  mass,  and  which  had  been  created  by 
the  Almighty  at  a  prior  period  in  duration.  For  Moses  no 
where  asserts,  that  the  materials  of  our  globe  were  created,  or 
brought  into  existence  out  of  nothing,  at  the  time  to  which  his 
history  refers  ;  but  insinuates  the  contrary.  "  For  the  earth," 
says  he,  prior  to  its  present  constitution,  "  was  without  form, 
and  void,"  &c. — ^^Again,  if  it  be  a  fact  that  the  universe  is  la 


SCRIPTURAL    FACTS    ILLUSTRATED.  273 

definitely  extended,  that,  of  many  millions  of  vast  globes  which 
diversify  the  voids  of  space,  only  two  or  three  have  any  im- 
mediate connexion  with  the  earth ;  then  it  will  appear  most 
reasonable  to  conclude,  that  those  expressions  in  the  Mosaic 
history  of  the  creation,  which  refer  to  the  creation  of  the  fixed 
stars,  are  not  to  6e  understood  as  referring  to  the  time  when 
they  were  brought  into  existence,  as  if  they  had  been  created 
about  the  same  time  with  our  earth ;  but,  as  simply  declaring 
the  fact,  that,  at  what  period  soever  in  duration  they  were  cre- 
ated, they  derived  their  existence  from  God.  That  they  did 
not  all  commence  their  existence  at  that  period,  is  demon- 
strable from  the  fact,  that,  within  the  space  of  2000  years 
past,  and  even  within  the  space  of  the  two  last  centuries,  new 
stars  have  appeared  in  the  heavens,  which  previously  did  not 
exist  in  the  concave  of  the  firmament ;  which,  consequently, 
have  been  created  since  the  Mosaic  period  ;  or,  at  least,  had 
undergone  a  change  analogous  to  that  which  took  place  in  our 
globe,  when  it  emerged  from  a  chaotic  state,  to  the  form  and 
order  in  which  we  now  behold  it.  Consequently,  the  phrase, 
"  God  rested  from  all  his  works,"  must  be  understood,  not 
absolutely,  or  in  reference  to  the  whole  system  of  nature,  but 
merely  in  relation  to  our  world  ;  and  as  importing,  that  the 
Creator  then  ceased  to  form  any  new  species  of  beings  on  the 
terraqueous  globe. — The  same  canon  will  direct  us  in  the  in- 
terpretation of  those  passages  which  refer  to  the  last  judgment, 
and  the  destruction  of  the  present  constitution  of  our  globe. 
When,  in  reference  to  these  events,  it  is  said,  "  that  the  stars 
shall  fall  from  heaven,"  that  "  the  powers  of  heaven  shall  be 
shaken,"  and  that  "  the  earth  and  the  heaven  shall  flee  away," 
our  knowledge  of  the  system  of  nature  leads  us  to  conclude, 
either  that  such  expressions  are  merely  metaphorical,  or  that 
they  describe  only  the  appearance,  not  the  reality  of  things. 
For  it  is  impossible  that  the  stars  can  ever  fall  to  the  earth, 
since  each  of  them  is  of  a  size  vastly  superior  to  our  globe, 
and  could  never  be  attracted  to  its  surface,  without  unhinging 
the  laws  and  the  fabric  of  universal  nature.  The  appearance^ 
however,  of  the  "  heaven  fleeing  away,"  would  be  produced, 
should  the  earth's  diurnal  rotation,  at  that  period,  be  suddenly 
stopped,  as  will  most  probable  happen  ;  in  which  case,  all 
n9.ture  in  this  sublunary  system,  would  be  thrown  into  confu- 
sion, and  the  heavens,  with  all  their  host,  would  appear  to  flee 
away. 

Now,  the  scientific  student  of  Scripture  alone  can  judi- 
ciously apply  the  canon  to  which  I  have  adverted  ;  he  alone 
can  appreciate  its  utility  in  the  interpretation  of  the  sacred 

23* 


274  THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

oracles  y  for  he  knows  the  facts  which  the  philosopher  arfd 
the  astronomer  have  ascertained  to  exist  in  the  system  of 
nature  ;  from  the  yvant  of  which  information,  many  divines, 
whose  comments  on  Scripture  have,  in  other  respects,  been 
judicious,  have  displayed  their  ignorance,  and  fallen  into  egre- 
gious blunders,  when  attempting  to  explain  the  first  chapters  of 
Genesis,  and  several  parts  of  the  book  of  Job,  which  have 
tended  to  bring  discredit  on  the  oracles  of  heaven. 

II. — The    System   of  JVature    Confirms   and   Illustrates   the 
Scriptural  Doctrine  of  the  Depravity  of  Man. 

In  the  preceding  parts  of  this  volume,  I  have  stated  several 
striking  instances  of  Divine  benevolence,  which  appear  in  the 
construction  of  the  organs  of  the  animal  system,  in  the  con- 
stitution of  the  earth,  the  waters,  and  the  atmosphere,  and  in 
the  variety  of  beauties  and  sublimities  which  adorn  the  face  of 
nature;  all  which  proclaim,  in  language  which  can  scarcely 
be  mistaken,  that  the  Creator  has  a  special  regard  to  the  hap- 
piness of  his  creatures. — Yet  the  Scriptures  uniformly  de- 
clare, that  man  has  fallen  from  his  primeval  state  of  inno- 
cence, and  has  violated  the  laws  of  his  Maker  ;  that  "  his 
heart  is  deceitful  above  all  things,  and  desperately  wicked  ;" 
and  that  "  destruction  and  misery  are  in  his  ways."  Obser 
vation  and  experience  also  demonstrate,  that  a  moral  disease 
pervades  the  whole  human  family,  from  the  most  savage  to 
the  most  civilized  tribes  of  mankind  ;  which  has  displayed  its 
virulence  in  those  wars  and  devastations  which  have,  in  all 
ages,  convulsed  the  world  ;  and  which  daily  displays  itself  in 
those  acts  of  injustice,  fraud,  oppression,  malice,  tyranny,  and 
cruelty,  which  are  perpetrated  in  every  country,  and  among 
all  the  ranks  even  of  civilized  life.  That  a  world  inhabited 
by  moral  agents  of  this  description  would  display,  in  its  phy- 
sical constitution,  certain  indications  of  its  Creator's  displea- 
sure, is  what  we  should  naturally  expect,  from  a  consideration 
of  those  attributes  of  his  nature  with  which  we  are  acquainted. 
Accordingly,  we  find,  that,  amidst  all  the  evidences  of  benevo- 
lence which  our  globe  exhibits,  there  are  not  wanting,  certain 
displays  of  "  the  wrath  of  Heaven  against  the  ungodliness 
and  unrighteousness  of  men,"  in  order  to  arouse  them  to  a 
sense  of  their  guilt,  and  to  inspire  them  with  reverence  and 
awe  of  that  Being  whom  they  have  offended.  The  following 
facts,  among  many  others,  may  be  considered  as  corroborating 
this  position. 

In  the  first  place,  the  present  state  of  the  interior  strata  of 


DEPRAVITY    OF   MAN.  275 

ike  earth  may  be  considered  as  a  presumptive  evidence,  tliat 
a  moral  revolution  has  taken  place  since  man  was  placed  upon- 
the  globe.  When  we  penetrate  into  the  interior  recesses  of 
the  earth,  we  find  its  different  strata  bent  into  the  most  irre- 
gular forms  ;  sometimes  lying  horizontally,  sometimes  pro- 
jecting upwards,  and  sometimes  downwards,  and  thrown  into 
confusion  ;  as  if  some  dreadful  concussion  had  spread  its 
ravages  through  every  part  of  the  solid  crust  of  our  globe. 
This  is  visible  in  every  region  of  the  earth.  Wherever  the 
miner  penetrates  among  his  subterraneous  recesses,  wherever 
the  fissures  and  caverns  of  the  earth  are  explored,  and 
wherever  the  mountains  lay  bare  their  rugged  cliffs,  the  marks 
of  ruin,  convulsion,  and  disorder  meet  the  eye  of  the  beholder. 
Evidences  of  these  facts  are  to  be  found  in  the  records  of  all 
intelligent  travellers  and  geologists  who  have  visited  Alpine 
districts,  or  explored  the  subterraneous  regions  of  the  earth  ; 
of  which  I  have  already  stated  a  few  instances,  in  the  article 
of  Geology,  pp.  160,  165,  166. — These  facts  seem  evidently 
to  indicate  that  the  earth  is  not  now  in  the  same  state  in  which 
it  originally  proceeded  from  the  hand  of  its  Creator  ;  for  such 
a  scene  of  disruption  and  derangement  appears  incompatible 
with  that  order,  harmony  and  beauty  which  are  apparent  in 
the  other  departments  of  nature.  We  dare  not  assert,  that 
such  terrible  convulsions  took  place  by  chance,  or  indepen- 
dent of  the  will  of  the  Creator  ;  nor  dare  we  insinuate,  that 
they  were  the  effects  of  a  random  display  of  Almighty  Power  ; 
and,  therefore,  we  are  necessarily  led  to  infer,  that  a  moral 
cause,  connected  with  the  conduct  of  the  rational  inhabitants 
of  the  globe,  must  have  existed,  to  warrant  so  awful  an  inter- 
position of  Divine  Power  ;  for  the  fate  of  the  animated  beings 
which  then  peopled  the  earth,  was  involved  in  the  conse- 
quences which  must  have  attended  this  terrible  catastrophe. 
The  volume  of  Revelation  on  this  point,  concurs  with  the  de- 
ductions of  reason,  and  assigns  a  cause  adequate  to  warrant 
the  production  of  such  an  extraordinary  effect.  "  The  wick- 
edness of  man  was  great  upon  the  earth  ;  the  earth  was 
FILLED  WITH  VIOLENCE  ;  evciy  puiposc  and  desire  of  man's 
heart  was  only  evil  continually."  Man  had  frustrated 
the  end  of  his  existence  ;  the  earth  was  turned  into  a  habita- 
tion of  demons  ;  the  long  period  to  which  his  life  was  pro- 
tracted, only  served  to  harden  him  in  his  wickedness,  and  to 
enable  him  to  carry  his  diabolical  schemes  to  their  utmost 
extent,  till  the  social  state  of  the  human  race  became  a  scene 
of  unmixed  depravity  and  misery.  And  the  physica^  efl?ects 
of  the  punishment  of  this  universal  defection  from  God,  are 


276  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

presented  to  our  view  in  every  land,  and  will  remain  to  all 
ages,  as  a  visible  memorial  that  man  has  rebelled  against  the 
authority  of  his  Maker. 

2.  The  existence  of  Volcanoes,  and  the  terrible  ravages  they 
produce,  bear  testimony  to  the  state  of  man  as  a  depraved 
intelligence.  A  volcano  is  a  mountain,  generally  of  an  im- 
mense size,  from  whose  summit  issue  fire,  smoke,  sulphur, 
and  torrents  of  melted  lava,  (see  p.  141.)  Previous  to  an 
eruption,  the  smoke,  which  is  continually  ascending  from  the 
crater,  or  opening  in  the  top,  increases  and  shoots  up  to  an 
immense  height ;  forked  lightning  issues  from  the  ascending 
column  ;  showers  of  ashes  are  thrown  out  to  the  distance  of 
forty  or  fifty  miles  ;  volleys  of  red  hot  stones  are  discharged 
to  a  great  height  in  the  air  ;  the  sky  appears  thick  and  dark  ; 
the  luminaries  of  heaven  disappear  ;  and  these  terrible  fore- 
bodings are  accompanied  with  thunder,  lightning,  frequent 
concussions  of  the  earth,  and  dreadful  subterraneous  bellow- 
ings.  When  these  alarming  appearances  have  continued 
sometimes  four  or  five  months,  the  lava  begins  to  make  its 
appearance,  either  boiling  over  the  top,  or  forcing  its  way 
through  the  side  of  the  mountain.  This  fiery  deluge  of 
melted  minerals  rolls  down  the  declivity  of  the  mountain, 
forming  a  dismal  flaming  stream,  sometimes  fourteen  miles 
long,  six  miles  broad,  and  200  feet  deep.  In  its  course,  it 
destroys  orchards,  vineyards,  cornfields,  and  villages  ;  and 
sometimes  cities,  containing  twenty  thousand  inhabitants, 
have  been  swallowed  up  and  consumed.  Several  other  phe- 
nomena, of  awful  sublimity,  sometimes  accompany  these 
eruptions.  In  the  eruption  of  Vesuvius,  in  1794,  a  shock  of 
an  earthquake  was  felt ;  and,  at  the  same  instant,  a  fountain 
of  bright  fire,  attended  with  the  blackest  smoke,  and  a  loud 
report,  was  seen  to  issue,  and  to  rise  to  a  great  height  from 
the  cone  of  the  mountain  ;  and  was  soon  succeeded  by  fifteen 
other  fiery  fountains,  all  in  a  direct  line,  extending  for  a  mile 
and  a  half  downwards.  This  fiery  scene  was  accompanied 
with  the  loudest  thunder,  the  incessant  reports  of  which,  like 
those  of  a  numerous  heavy  artillery,  were  attended  by  a  con- 
tinued hollow  murmur,  similar  to  that  of  the  roaiing  of  the 
ocean  during  a  violent  storm.  The  houses  in  Naples,  at 
seven  miles'  distance,  were  for  several  hours  in  a  constant 
tremor  ;  the  bells  ringing,  and  doors  and  windows  incessantly 
rattling  and  shaking.  The  murmur  of  the  prayers  and  lamen- 
tations of  a  numerous  population  added  to  the  horrors  of  the 
scene.  All  travellers,  who  have  witnessed  these  eruptions, 
seem  to  be  at  a  loss  to  find  words  sufficiently  emphatic  to 


DEPRAVITY    OF    MAN.  277 

express  the  terrors  of  the  scene.  "  One  cannot  form  a  juster 
idea,"  says  Bishop  Berkley,  "  of  the  noise  emitted  by  the 
mountain,  than  by  imagining  a  mixed  sound  made  up  of  the 
raging  of  a  tempest,  the  murmur  of  a  troubled  sea,  and  the 
roaring  of  thunder  and  artillery,  confused  altogether.  Though 
we  heard  this  at  the  distance  of  twelve  miles,  yet  it  was  very 
terrible.''^  In  1744,  the  flam.es  of  Cotopaxi,  in  South  Ame- 
rica, rose  3,000  feet  above  the  brink  of  the  crater,  and  its 
roarings  were  heard  at  the  distance  of  six  hundred  miles. 
"  At  the  port  of  Guayaquil,  150  miles  distant  from  the  crater," 
says  Humboldt,  "  we  heard,  day  and  night,  the  noise  of  this 
volcano,  like  continued  discharges  of  a  battery,  and  we  distin- 
guished these  tremendous  sounds  even  on  the  Pacific  ocean." 

The  ravages  produced  by  volcanoes  are  in  proportion  to 
the  terror  they  inspire.  In  the  eruption  of  Etna,  in  1669,  the 
stream  of  lava  destroyed,  in  40  days,  the  habitations  of  27,000 
persons  ;  and,  of  20,000  inhabitants  of  the  city  of  Catania, 
only  3,000  escaped.  In  the  year  79,  the  celebrated  cities  of 
Pompeii  and  Herculaneum  were  completely  overwhelmed  and 
buried  under  ground  by  an  eruption  of  Vesuvius,  and  the  spots 
on  which  they  stood  remained  unknown  for  1600  years. 
Since  that  period,  about  40  eruptions  have  taken  place,  each 
of  them  producing  the  most  dreadful  ravages.  But  the  vol- 
canoes of  Asia  and  America  are  still  more  terrible  and  de- 
structive than  those  of  Europe.  The  volcanic  mountain 
Pichinca,  near  Quito,  caused,  on  one  occasion,  the  destruction 
of  35,000  inhabitants.  In  the  year  1772,  an  eruption  of  a 
mountain  in  the  island  of  Java,  destroyed  40  villages,  and 
several  thousands  of  the  inhabitants  ;  and  in  October,  1822, 
eighty-eight  hamlets,  and  above  2000  persons,  were  destroyed 
in  the  same  island,  by  a  sudden  eruption  from  a  new -volcano. 
The  eruption  of  Tomboro,  in  the  island  of  Sumbawa,  in  1815, 
was  so  dreadful,  that  all  the  Moluccas,  Java,  Sumatra,  and 
Borneo,  to  the  distance  of  a  thousand  miles  from  the  moun- 
tain, felt  tremulous  motions,  and  heard  the  report  of  explo- 
sions. In  Java,  at  the  distance  of  340  miles,  the  clouds  of 
ashes  from  the  volcano  produced  utter  darkness. 

Volcanoes  are  more  numerous  than  is  generally  imagined. 
They  are  to  be  found  in  every  quarter  of  the  world,  from  the 
icy  shores  of  Kamtschatka  to  the  mountains  of  Patagonia. 
Humboldt  enumerates  40  volcanoes  constantly  burning,  be- 
tween Cotopaxi  and  the  Pacific  Ocean  ;  20  have  been  observed 
in  the  chain  of  mountains  that  stretches  along  Kamtschatka  ; 
and  many  of  them  are  to  be  seen  in  the  Phillippines,  the 
Moluccas,  the  Cape  de  Verd,  the  Sandwich,  the  Ladrone,  and 


278  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

other  islands  in  the  Indian  and  Pacific  oceans.  It  is  stated 
in  vol.  6th  of  Sup.  to  Ency.  Brit,  lately  published,  that  about 
205  volcanoes  are  known,  including  only  those  which  have 
been  active  within  a  period  to  which  histoiy  or  tradition 
reaches.  Europe  contains  14  ;  and,  of  the  whole  number,  it 
is  computed,  that  107  are  in  islands,  and  98  on  the  great 
continents. 

Can  we  then  suppose,  that  so  many  engines  of  terror  and 
destruction,  dispersed  over  every  quarter  of  the  globe,  are 
consistent  with  the  conduct  of  a  benevolent  Creator  towards 
an  innocent  race  of  men  1  If  so,  we  must  either  admit  that  the 
Creator  had  it  not  in  his  power,  when  arranging  our  terrestrial 
system,  to  prevent  the  occasional  action  of  these  dreadful 
ravagers,  or,  that  he  is  indifferent  to  the  happiness  of  his 
innocent  offspring.  The  former  admission  is  inconsistent 
with  the  idea  of  his  Omnipotence,  and  the  latter,  with  the  idea 
of  his  universal  Benevolence.  It  is  not,  therefore,  enthu- 
siasm, but  the  fairest  deduction  of  reason  to  conclude,  that 
they  are  indications  of  God's  displeasure  against  a  race  of 
transgressors  who  have  apostatized  from  his  laws. 

3.  The  same  reasoning  will  apply  to  the  ravages  produced 
by  earthquakes.  Next  to  volcanoes,  earthquakes  are  the 
most  terrific  phenomena  of  nature,  and  are  even  far  more 
destructive  to  man,  and  to  the  labors  of  his  hands.  An  earth- 
quake, which  consists  in  a  sudden  motion  of  the  earth,  is 
generally  preceded  by  a  rumbling  sound,  sometimes  like  that 
of  a  number  of  carriages  driving  furiously  along  the  pavement 
of  a  street,  sometimes  like  the  rushing  noise  of  a  mighty  wind, 
and  sometimes  like  the  explosions  of  artillery.  Their  effect 
on  the  surface  of  the  earth  is  various.  Sometimes  it  is  instan- 
taneously heaved  up  in  a  perpendicular  direction,  and  some- 
times it  assumes  a  kind  of  rolling  motion,  from  side  to  side. — 
The  ravages  which  earthquakes  have  produced,  are  terrible 
beyond  description  ;  and  are  accomplished  almost  in  a  mo- 
ment. In  1692,  the  city  of  Port-Royal,  in  Jamaica,  was 
destroyed  by  an  earthquake,  in  the  space  of  two  minutes,  and 
the  houses  sunk  into  a  gulph  forty  fathoms  deep.  In  1693, 
an  earthquake  happened  in  Sicily,  which  either  destroyed,  or 
greatly  damaajed,  fifty-four  cities,  and  an  incredible  number  of 
villages.  The  city  of  Catania  was  utterly  overthrown  :  the 
sea  all  of  a  sudden  began  to  roar  ;  mount  Etna  to  send  forth 
immense  spires  of  flame  ;  and  immediately  a  shock  ensued,  as 
if  all  the  artillery  in  the  world  had  been  discharged.  The  birds 
flew  about  astonished  ;  the  sun  was  darkened  ;  the  beasts  ran 
howling  from  the  hills  ;  a  dark  cloud  of  dust  covered  the  air  i 


DEPRAVITY    OF    MAN.  279 

and,  though  the  shock  did  not  last  three  minutes,  yet  nine- 
teen thousand  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  city  perished  in  the 
ruins.  This  shock  extended  to  a  circumference  of  7000 
miles. 

Earthquakes  have  been  producing  their  ravages  in  various 
parts  of  the  world,  and  in  every  age.  Pliny  informs  us,  that 
12  cities  in  Asia  Minor  were  swallowed  up  in  one  night.  In 
the  year  115,  the  city  of  Antioch,  and  a  great  part  of  the  adja- 
cent country,  were  buried  by.  an  earthquake.  About  300 
years  after,  it  was  again  destroyed,  along  with  40,000  inhabi- 
tants; and,  after  an  interval  of  only  60  years,  it  was  a  third 
time  overturned,  with  the  loss  of  not  less  than  60,000  souls. 
In  1755,  Lisbon  was  destroyed  by  an  earthquake,  and  it  buried 
under  its  ruins  above  50,000  inhabitants.  The  effects  of  this 
terrible  earthquake  were  felt  over  the  greater  part  of  Europe 
and  Africa,  and  even  in  the  midst  of  the  Atlantic  ocean  ;  and 
are  calculated  to  have  extended  over  a  space  of  not  less  than 
four  millions  of  square  miles.  In  August,  1822,  two-thirds 
of  the  city  of  Aleppo,  which  contained  40,000  houses,  and 
200,000  inhabitants,  were  destroyed  by  an  earthquake,  and 
nearly  thirty  thousand  inhabitants  were  buried  under  the  ruins. 
— To  suppose  that  the  human  beings  who  have  been  victims 
to  the  ravages  of  earthquakes  and  volcanoes,  "  were  sinners 
above  all  those  who  dwelt  around  them,"  would  be  the  height 
of  impiety  and  presumption.  But,  the  fact  that  thousands  of 
rational  beings  have  been  swept  from  existence,  in  a  manner 
so  horrible  and  tremendous,  seems  plainly  to  indicate,  that 
they  belonged  to  a  race  of  apostate  intelligences,  who  had 
violated  the  commands  of  their  Creator.  Such  visitations  are 
quite  accordant  to  the  idea  of  man  being  in  the  condition  of  a 
transgressor  ;  but,  if  he  were  an  innocent  creature,  they  would 
be  altogether  unaccountable,  as  happening  under  the  govern- 
ment of  a  Being  of  unbounded  benevolence. 

4.  The  phenomena  of  thunder- storms^  tempests^  and  hurri' 
canes,  and  the  ravages  they  produce,  are  also  presumptive 
proofs  that  man  is  a  depraved  intelligence.  In  that  season  of 
the  year  when  Nature  is  arrayed  in  her  most  beautiful  attire, 
and  the  whole  terrestrial  landscape  tends  to  inspire  the  mind 
with  cheerfulness — suddenly  a  sable  cloud  emerges  from  the 
horizon — the  sky  assumes  a  baleful  aspect — a  disiHal  gloom 
envelopes  the  face  of  nature— the  lightnings  flash  from  one 
en3  of  the  horizon  to  another — the  thunders  roll  with  awful 
majesty  along  the  verge  of  heaven,  till  at  length  they  burst 
over  head  in  tremendous  explosions.  The  sturdy  oak  is  shat- 
tered and  despoiled  of  its  foliage  ;  rocks  are  rent  into  shivers  ; 


280  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

and  the  grazing  herds  are  struck  into  a  Hfeless  group.  Even 
man  is  not  exempted  from  danger  in  the  midst  of  this  appall- 
ing scene.  For  hundreds  in  every  age  have  fallen  victims 
either  to  the  direct  stroke  of  the  lightning,  or  to  the  concus- 
sions and  conflagrations  with  which  it  has  been  attended.  In 
tropical  countries,  the  phenomena  of  thunder-storms  are  more 
dreadful  and  appalling,  than  in  our  temperate  climate.  The 
thunder  frequently  continues  for  days  and  weeks  in  almost  one 
incessant  roar ;  the  rains  are  poured  down  in  torrents  ;  and 
the  flashes  of  lightning  follow  each  other  in  so  rapid  a  succes- 
sion, that  the  whole  atmosphere  and  the  surrounding  hills 
seem  to  be  in  a  blaze.  In  some  instances,  the  most  dreadful 
effects  have  been  produced  by  the  bursting  of  an  electrical 
cloud.  In  1772,  a  bright  cloud  was  observed  at  midnight  to 
cover  a  mountain  in  the  Island  of  Java  ;  it  emitted  globes  of 
fire  so  luminous,  that  the  night  became  as  clear  as  day.  Its 
effects  were  astonishing.  Every  thing  was  destroyed  for  7 
leagues  round  ;  houses  were  demohshed  ;  plantations  buried 
in  the  earth  ;  and  2140  people  lost  their  lives,  besides  1500 
head  of  cattle,  and  a  vast  number  of  horses  and  other  animals. 
— Eiicy.  Brit. — Art.  Cloud. 

Is  it  not  reasonable,  then,  to  conclude,  that  such  awful  phe- 
nomena as  storms,  volcanoes,  and  earthquakes,  are  so  many 
occasional  indications  of  the  frown  of  an  offended  Creator  upon 
a  race  of  transgressors,  in  order  to  arouse  them  to  a  sense  of 
their  apostacy  from  the  God  of  heaven?  We  cannot  con- 
ceive that  such  physical  operations,  accompanied  by  so  many 
terrific  and  destructive  effects,  are  at  all  compatible  with  the 
idea  that  man  is  at  present  in  a  'paradisiacal  state,  and  pos- 
sessed of  that  moral  purity  in  which  he  was  created.  Such 
appaling  displays  of  Almighty  power  are  in  complete  unison 
with  the  idea,  that  man  is  a  trangressor,  and  that  the  present 
dispensations  of  God  are  a  mixture  of  mercy  and  of  judgment ; 
but  if  he  belong  to  an  innocent  race  of  moral  intelligences, 
they  appear  quite  anomalous,  and  are  altogether  inexplicable, 
on  the  supposition,  that  a  Being  of  infinite  benevolence  and 
rectitude  directs  the  operations  of  the  physical  and  moral 
world  ;  more  especially  when  we  consider  the  admirable  care 
which  is  displayed  in  the  construction  of  animal  bodies,  in 
order  to  prevent  pain,  and  to  produce  pleasurable  sensations. 
When  man  was  first  brought  into  existence,  his  thoughts  and 
affections,  we  must  suppose,  were  in  unison  with  the  will  of 
his  Creator  ;  his  mind  was  serene  and  unruffled  ;  and,  con- 
sequently, no  foreboding  apprehensions  of  danger  would,  in 
such  a  state,  take  possession  of  his  breast.     But  after  he  had 


DEPRAVITY    OF  MAN.  281 

swerved  from  the  path  of  primeval  rectitude,  and  especially 
after  the  Dehige  had  swept  away  the  inhabitants  of  the  Ante- 
diluvian world,  the  constitution  of  the  earth  and  the  atmosphere 
seems  to  have  undergone  a  mighty  change,  corresponding  to 
the  degraded  state  into  which  he  had  fallen ;  so  that  those  very 
elements  which  may  have  formerly  ministered  to  his  enjoy- 
ment— 'by  being  formed  into  different  combinations — now  con- 
spire to  produce  terror  and  destruction. 

The  same  important  conclusion  might  have  been  deduced, 
from  a  consideration  of  the  immense  deserts  of  marshes  and 
barren  sands  which  are  dispersed  over  the  globe — the  vast  and 
frightful  regions  of  ice  around  the  poles — the  position  of  the 
mineral  strata,  and  the  vast  disproportion  which  the  extent  ol 
the  dry  land  bears  to  the  expanse  of  the  ocean — all  which  cir- 
cumstances, and  many  others,  in  conjunction  with  the  facts 
above-stated,  conspire  to  show,  that  man  no  longer  stands  in 
the  rank  of  a  pure  intelligence  ;  and  that  his  habitation  cor 
responds,  in  some  degree,  to  his  state  of  moral  degradation 
By  overlooking  this  consideration,  St.  Pierre,  and  other  natu- 
ralists have  found  themselves  much  at  a  loss,  when  attempting 
to  vindicate  the  wisdom  and  equity  of  Providence,  in  the  phy- 
sical disorders  which  exist  in  the  present  constitution  of  our 
globe.  The  circumstance,  that  man  is  a  fallen  creature,  ap- 
pears the  only  clue  to  guide  us  in  unravelling  the  mysteries  of 
Providence,  and  to  enable  us  td  perceive  the  harmony  and  co:i- 
sistency  of  the  Divine  operations  in  the  system  of  nature  ;  and 
no  other  consideration  will  fully  account  for  the  disorders 
which  exist  in  the  present  economy  of  our  world. 

But,  it  is  a  most  consoling  consideration,  that,  amidst  a  1 
the  physical  evils  which  abound,  the  benevolence  and  mercy 
of  God  are  admirably  blended  with  the  indications  of  his  dis- 
pleasure. Thunder-storms  and  tempests  contribute  to  the 
purification  of  the  atmosphere  ;  and  volcanoes  are  converted 
into  funnels  for  vomiting  up  those  fiery  materials  which  pro- 
duce earthquakes,  and  which  might  otherwise  swallow  up 
whole  provinces  in  one  mighty  gulf.  In  the  ordinary  course 
of  things,  such  phenomena  are  more  terrific  than  destructive  ; 
and  are  calculated  rather  to  rouse  an  unthinking  world  to  con- 
sideration, than  to  prove  the  instruments  of  human  destruc- 
tion. Compared  with  the  miseries  which  men  have  volunta- 
rily inflicted  on  one  another,  the  destructive  eftects  of  the  ele- 
ments of  nature  dwindle  into  mere  temporary  and  trifling  acci- 
dents. We  have  reason  to  believe,  that  a  much  greater  destruc- 
tion of  human  beings  has  been  produced  by  two  or  three  of  the 
late  battles  in  modern  Europe,  such  as  those   of  Waterloo, 

24 


282  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

Borodina,  and  Smoleiisko,  than  has  been  produced  by  all  the 
electrical  storms,  earthquakes,  and  volcanic  eruptions,  which 
have  raged  for  the  space  of  a  hundred  years.  It  has  been  calcu- 
lated, that  during  the  Russian  campaign  of  181 2,  including  men, 
women,  and  children,  belonging  to  the  French  and  Russians, 
there  were  not  less  than  five  hundred  thousand  human  victims 
sacrificed  to  the  demon  of  war.  It  is  probable,  that  the  des- 
truction produced  among  the  human  race,  by  the  convulsions 
of  nature,  since  the  commencement  of  time,  (the  deluge  only 
excepted,)  does  not  amount  to  above  four  or  five  millions  of 
lives  ;  but  were  we  to  take  into  account  the  destruction  of 
human  life  produced  by  ambition,  tyranny,  oppression,  super- 
stition, wars,  devastations,  murders,  and  horrid  cruelties,  in 
every  period  of  the  world,  it  would,  doubtless,  amount  to  seve- 
ral hundreds  of  millions.  So  that,  amidst  the  most  terrible  dis- 
plays of  the  displeasure  of  God  against  the  sins  of  men,  mercy 
is  mingled  Avith  judgment  ;  and  while  man  is  the  greatest 
enemy  and  destroyer  of  his  own  species,  benevolence  is  the 
prominent  feature  of  all  the  arrangements  of  the  Deity  in  the 
physical  world.  For  "  his  tender  mercies  are  over  all  his 
works."* 

III. — The  discoveries  which  have  been  made  in  the  system  of 
nature^  illustrate  the  doctrine  of  the  Resurrection  of  the 
Dead. 

The  doctrine  of  a  Resurrection  from  the  dead,  at  first  view, 
appears  to  involve  in  it  a  variety  of  difficulties,  and  apparent 
contradictions.  That  a  complex  organical  machine,  as  the 
human  body  is,  consisting  of  thousands  of  diversified  parts 
for  the  performance  of  its  functions,  after  it  has  been  reduced 
to  atoms,  and  those  atoms  dispersed  to  "  the  four  winds  of 
heaven" — should  be  again  reared  up  with  the  same  materials, 
in  a  new  and  more  glorious  form — is  an  idea  which  seems  to 
baffle  the  human  comprehension  ;  and,  in  all  probability,  would 
never  have  entered  the  mind  of  man,  had  it  not  been  commu- 
nicated by  Divine  Revelation.  Accordingly  we  find,  that  the 
philosophers  of  antiquity,  though  many  of  them  believed  in 
the  doctrine  of  a  future  state,  never  once  dreamed,  that  the 
bodies  of  men,  after  they  had  been  committed  to  the  dust, 

*  The  facts  stated  in  this  section  are  expressed,  for  the  most  part  in  the 
author's  own  words,  for  the  sake  of  compression. — His  authorities  are, 
Goldsmith's  "  Natural  Hist.,"  Humboldt's  "Travels,"  Brydon's,"  Tour," 
Sir  W.  Hamilton's  "  Observations,"  Raffles'  "  History  of  Java,"  Eiicy. 
Brit.  Art.  Etna,  Volcano,  Earthquake,  Antioch,  Cloud ;  The  Literary  and 
Scientific  Journals  for  1822,  &c. 


THE  RESURRECTION  ILLUSTRATED.        283 

would  ever  again  be  reanimated  ;  and  hence,  when  the  Apostle 
Paul  proposed  this  doctrine  to  the  Athenian  philosophers,  they 
scouted  the  idea,  as  if  it  had  been  the  reverie  of  a  madman. 
And,  indeed,  without  a  strong  conviction,  and  a  lively  impres- 
sion of  the  infinite  power  and  intelligence  of  God,  the  mind 
cannot  rely  with  unshaken  confidence  on  the  declaration  of  a 
future  fact  so  widely  different  from  all  the  obvious  phenomena 
of  nature,  and  from  every  thing  that  lies  within  the  range  of 
human  experience.  "  If  a  man  die,"  says  Job,  "  shall  he  live 
again  ?  There  is  hope  of  a  tree,  if  it  be  cut  down,  that  it  will 
sprout  again,  and  bring  forth  boughs  like  a  plant.  But  man 
dieth  and  wasteth  away  ;  yea,  man  giveth  up  the  ghost,  and 
where  is  he  ?"  When  the  mind,  however,  is  frequently  exer- 
cised in  contemplations  on  the  stupendous  works  of  the  Al- 
mighty, it  must  feel  an  impressive  conviction,  that  "  nothing 
can  be  too  hard  for  Jehovah."  When  we  endeavor  to  draw 
aside  the  veil  which  conceals  many  of  the  scenes  of  nature 
from  the  vulgar  eye,  we  perceive  a  variety  of  operations  and 
analogies,  which  tend  to  assist  us  in  forming  a  conception,  not 
only  of  the  'possihUihj  of  a  resurrection,  but  also  of  the  manner 
in  which  it  may  probably  be  effected,  when  the  power  of  Om- 
nipotence is  interposed. 

The  transformations  of  insects  afford  us  a  beautiful  illustra- 
tion of  this  subject.  All  the  butterflies  which  we  see  flutter- 
ing about  in  the  summer  months,  were  originally  caterpillars. 
Before  they  arrive  at  that  highest  stage  of  their  existence,  they 
pass  through  four  different  transformations.  The  first  state 
of  a  butterfly  is  that  of  an  egg  ;  it  next  assumes  the  form  of  a 
loathsome  crawling  worm ;  after  remaining  some  time  in  this 
state,  it  throws  off  its  caterpillar  skin  ;  languishes  ;  refuses  to 
eat ;  ceases  to  move  ;  and  is  shut  up,  as  it  were,  in  a  tomb. 
In  this  state,  the  animal  is  termed  a  chrysalis  ;  it  is  covered 
with  a  thin  crust  or  shell,  and  remains,  sometimes  for  six  or 
eight  months,  without  motion,  and  apparently  without  life. 
After  remaining  its  allotted  time  in  this  torpid  condition,  it  be- 
gins to  acquire  new  life  and  vigor  ;  it  bursts  its  imprisonment, 
and  comes  forth  a  butterfly,  with  wings  tinged  ^\ith  the  most 
beautiful  colors.  It  mounts  the  air  ;  it  ranges  from  flower  to 
flower,  and  seems  to  rejoice  in  its  new  and  splendid  existence. 
How  very  different  does  it  appear  in  this  state  from  what  it  did 
in  the  proceding  stages  of  its  existence  !  How  unlikely  did  it 
seem  that  a  rough,  hairy,  crawling  worm,  which  lay  for  such  a 
length  of  time  in  a  death-like  torpor,  and  enshrouded  in  a  tomb, 
should  be  re-animated,  as  it  were,  and  changed  into  so  beau- 
tiful a  form,  and  endued  with  such  powers  of  rapid  motion  ! 


284  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

Perhaps  the  change  to  be  effected  on  the  bodies  of  men,  at  the 
general  resurrection,  may  not  be  greater,  nor  more  wonderful 
in  its  nature,  than  are  the  changes  which  take  place  from  the 
first  to  the  last  stage  of  a  caterpillar's  existence.  In  such 
transformations,  then,  we  behold  a  lively  representation  of  the 
death  and  resurrection  of  a  righteous  man.  "  A  little  while 
he  shall  lie  in  the  ground,  as  the  seed  lies  in  the  bosom  of  the 
earth ;  but  he  shall  be  raised  again,  and  shall  never  die  any 
more." 

There  is  another  illustration,  taken  from  a  consideration  of 
tlie  chemical  changes  of  matter,  which  has  a  still  more  direct 
bearing  on  the  doctrine  of  a  resurrection.  We  know,  that 
substances  which  are  invisibly  incorporated  with  air,  .water, 
and  other  fluids,  and  which  seem  to  be  destroyed,  may  be 
made  to  re-appear  in  their  original  form  by  the  application  of 
certain  chemical  re-agents.  For  example  ;  put  a  small  piece 
of  solid  camphor  into  a  phial  half-filled  with  alcohol  or  spirits 
of  wine  ;  in  a  short  time  the  camphor  will  be  dissolved  in  the 
fluid,  and  the  spirit  will  be  as  transparent  as  at  first.  If  water 
be  now  added,  it  will  unite  with  the  ardent  spirit,  and  the  cam- 
phor will  be  separated  and  fall  to  the  bottom  of  the  phiaL  In 
this  way  the  camphor  may  be  nearly  all  recovered  as  at 
first ;  and,  by  distillation,  the  alcohol  may  also  be  separated 
from  the  water,  and  exhibited  in  a  separate  state.  I  have 
already  noticed,  that  Carbon^  which  forms  an  essential  part  of 
all  animal  and  vegetable  substances,  is  found  to  be  not  only 
indestructible  by  age,  but  in  all  its  combinations,  which  are 
infinitely  diversified,  it  still  preserves  its  identity.  In  the  state 
of  carbonic  acid  it  exists  in  union  with  earths  and  stones  in 
unbounded  quantities  ;  and  though  buried  for  thousands  of 
years  beneath  immense  rocks,  or  in  the  centre  of  mountains, 
it  is  still  carbonic  acid  ;  for  no  sooner  is  it  disengaged  from 
its  dormity  than  it  rises  with  all  the  life  and  vigor  of  recent 
formation,  not  in  the  least  impaired  by  its  torpid  inactivity  dur- 
ing a  lapse  of  ages.  The  beams  of  the  theatre  at  Hercula- 
neum  were  converted  into  charcoal  (which  is  one  of  the 
compounds  of  Carbon)  by  the  lava  which  overflowed  that  city, 
during  an  eruption  of  Mount  Vesuvius  ;  and  during  the  lapse  of 
1700  years,  the  charcoal  has  remained  as  entire  as  if  it  had 
been  formed  but  yesterday,  and  it  will  probably  continue  so  to 
the  end  of  the  world.  In  addition  to  these  facts  it  may  be 
stated,  that  provision  has  been  made  for  the  restoration  of  the 
fallen  leaves  of  vegetables  which  rot  upon  the  ground,  and,  to 
a  careless  observer,  would  appear  to  be  lost  forever.  It  has 
been  shown  by  experiment,  that  whenever  the  soil  become;?. 


GENERAL   CONFLAGRATION.  285 

charged  with  such  matter,  the  oxygen  of  the  atmosphere 
combmes  with  it,  and  converts  it  into  carbonic  acid  gas. 
The  consequence  of  which  is,  that  this  very  same  carbon  is,  in 
process  of  time,  absorbed  by  a  new  race  of  vegetables,  which 
.t  clothes  with  a  new  foliage,  and  which  is  itself  destined  to 
judergo  similar  putrefaction  and  renovation  to  the  end  of 
time."* 

These  facts,  and  others  of  a  similar  description  which 
might  have  been  stated,  demonstrate,  that  one  of  the  con- 
stituent parts  of  animal  bodies  remains  unalterably  the  same, 
amidst  all  the  revolutions  of  time,  and  all  the  changes  and 
decompositions  which  take  place  in  the  system  of  nature ; 
and,  consequently,  that  though  human  bodies  may  remain  in  a 
state  of  putrefaction  for  ages,  in  the  earth  and  in  the  waters, 
yet  their  component  parts  remain  unchanged,  and  in  readiness 
to  enter  into  a  new  and  more  glorious  combination,  at  the 
command  of  that  Intelligence  to  whom  all  the  principles  of 
nature  and  all  their  diversified  changes  are  intimately  known  ; 
and  whose  Power  is  able  to  direct  their  combinations  to  the 
accomplishment  of  his  purposes. — Though  such  considera- 
tions as  these  may  have  no  weight  on  certain  unreflecting 
minds,  that  never  meet  with  any  difficulties  in  the  economy 
either  of  Nature  or  of  Redemption  ;  yet,  the  man  of  deep  re- 
flection, who  has  frequently  had  his  mind  distracted  with  the 
apparent  improbability  of  the  accomplishment  of  certain  Di- 
vine Declarations,  will  joyfully  embrace  such  facts  in  the 
economy  of  nature,  as  a  sensible  support  to  his  faith  in  the 
promises  of  his  God  ;  and  will  resign  his  body  to  dust  and 
putrefaction,  in  the  firm  hope  of  emerging  from  the  tomb  to  a 
future  and  more  glorious  transformation. 

IT.  The  discoveries  of  Science  tend  to  illusti-ate  the  doctrine 
of  the  General  Conflagration. 

We  are  informed,  in  the  Sacred  Oracles,  that  a  period  is 
approaching,  when  "  the  elements  shall  melt  with  fervent 
heat,  and  the  earth,  and  the  works  that  are  therein,  shall  be 
burned  up."  Science  has  ascertained  certain  facts  in  the  con- 
stitution of  nature,  which  lead  us  to  form  some  conception  of 
the  manner  in  which  this  awful  catastrophe  may  probably  be 
eflfected,  and  also  of  the  ease  with  which  it  may  be  accom- 
plished, when  the  destined  period  shall  have  arrived.  It  was 
formerly  stated,  (pp.  73,  223,)  that  the  atmosphere,  or  the  air 
we  breathe,  is  a  compound  substance,  composed  of  two  very 

*  Parkes'  "  Cliem.  Catechism,"  p.  266,  and  the  additional  notes. 


286  TUt    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOFHER. 

different  and  opposite  principles,  termed  oxygen  and  nitrogei:., 
The  oxygen,  which  forms  about  a  fifth  part  of  the  atmosphere^ 
is  now  ascertained  to  be  the  principle  of  flame ;  a  Hghted 
taper  immersed  in  this  gas,  burns  with  a  brilliancy  too  great 
for  the  eye  to  bear  ;  and  even  a  rod  of  iron  or  steel  is  made  to 
blaze  under  its  energy. 

The  modern  infidel,  like  the  scoffers  of  old,  scouts  the  idea 
of  the  dissolution  of  the  world,  and  of  the  restitution  of  the 
universe,  "  because  all  things  continue  as  they  were  from  the 
beginning  of  the  creation ;  not  knowing  the  Scriptures,  nor  the 
power  of  God  ;"  and  not  considering  the  principles  and  facts 
in  the  system  of  nature,  which  indicate  the  possibility  of  such 
an  event.  But,  from  the  fact  now  stated,  we  may  learn,  how 
easily  this  effect  may  be  accomplished,  even  in  conformity 
with  those  laws  which  now  operate  in  the  constitution  of  our 
globe.  For  should  the  Creator  issue  forth  his  Almighty  Fiat 
— "  Let  the  nitrogen  of  the  atmosphere  be  completely  sepa- 
rated from  the  oxygen,  and  let  the  oxygen  exert  its  native 
energies  without  control,  wherever  it  extends  ;" — from  what 
we  know  of  its  nature,  we  are  warranted  to  conclude,  that  in- 
stantly a  universal  conflagration  would  commence  throughout 
all  the  kingdoms  of  nature — not  only  wood,  coals,  sulphur, 
bitumen,  and  other  combustible  substances,  but  even  the 
hardest  rocks  and  stones,  and  all  the  metals,  fossils,  and 
minerals,  and  water  itself,  which  is  a  compound  of  two  inflam- 
mable substances,  would  blaze  with  a  rapidity  which  would 
carry  destruction  through  the  whole  expanse  of  the  terra- 
queous globe,  and  change  its  present  aspect  into  that  of  a  new 
world  : — at  the  same  time,  all  the  other  laws  of  nature  might 
still  operate  as  they  have  hitherto  done  since  the  creation  of 
the  world. 

I  do  not  mean  positively  to  assert,  that  this  is  the  agent 
which  the  Almighty  will  certainly  employ  for  accomplishing 
this  terrible  catastrophe,  (though  we  think  it  highly  probable,) 
since  Infinite  Power  is  possessed  of  numerous  resources  for 
accomplishing  its  objects,  which  lie  beyond  the  sphere  of  our 
knowledge  and  comprehension.  But  I  have  brought  forward 
this  fact,  to  show  with  what  infinite  ease  this  event  may  be  ac- 
complished, when  Almighty  Power  is  interposed.  By  means 
of  the  knowledge  we  have  acquired  of  the  constitution  of  the 
atmosphere,  and  by  the  aid  of  chemical  apparatus,  we  can 
perform  experiments  on  a  small  scale,  similar  in  kind,  though 
infinitely  inferior  in  degree,  to  the  awful  event  under  consider- 
ation. And,  therefore,  we  can  easily  conceive  that  He  who 
formed   the  expansive  atmosphere   which  surrounds  us,  and 


6ENERAL    CONFLAGRATION.  287 

who  knows  the  native  energy  of  its  constituent  principles, 
may,  by  a  simple  volition,  make  that  invisible  fluid,  in  a  few 
moments,  the  cause  of  the  destruction  of  the  present  constitu- 
tion of  our  world,  and,  at  the  same  time,  the  means  of  its 
subsequent  renovation.  For  as  fire  does  not  annihilate,  but 
only  changes  the  forms  of  matter,  this  globe  on  which  we 
now  tread,  and  which  bears  the  marks  of  ruin  and  disruption 
in  several  parts  of  its  structure,  may  come  forth  from  the 
flames  of  the  general  conflagration,  purified  from  all  its  physi- 
cal evils,  adorned  with  new  beauties  and  sublimities,  and 
rendered  a  fit  habitation  for  pure  intelligences,  either  of  our 
own  species  or  of  another  order.  For,  though  the  "  heavens," 
or  the  atmosphere,  "  shall  be  dissolved,  and  the  elements 
melt  with  fervent  heat ;"  "  yet,"  says  the  Apostle  Peter, 
"  we,  according  to  his  promise,  look  for  new  heavens  and  a 
new  earth,  wherein  dwelleth  righteousness."  Whether,  after 
being  thus  renovated,  it  shall  be  allotted  as  the  residence  of  the 
redeemed  inhabitants  of  our  world,  is  beyond  our  province  at 
present  to  determine.  But  if  not,  it  will,  in  all  probability,  be 
allotted  as  the  abode  of  other  rational  beings,  who  may  be 
transported  from  other  regions,  to  contemplate  a  new  province 
of  the  Divine  empire,  or  who  may  be  immediately  created  for 
the  purpose  of  taking  possession  of  this  renovated  world.  For 
we  have  reason  to  believe,  that  the  energies  of  Creating 
Power  will  be  continually  exerted,  in  replenishing  the  bound- 
less universe,  throughout  all  the  ages  of  infinite  duration,  and 
that  no  substances,  or  worlds  which  God  has  created,  will  ever 
be  suffered  to  fall  into  annihilation — at  least,  that  the  original 
atoms  of  matter  will  never  be  destroyed,  whatever  new  forms 
they  may  assume,  and  however  varied  the  combinations  into 
which  they  may  enter. 

The  above  are  only  a  few  examples  out  of  many  which 
were  intended  to  be  specified,  of  the  illustrations  which  the 
system  of  nature  affords  of  the  doctrines  and  facts  of  Revela- 
tion, but  the  narrow  limits  of  this  volume  prevent  further 
enlargement. 

It  was  also  intended  to  follow  up  the  preceding  discussions 
with  particular  illustrations  of  the  following  topics  : — The 
views  which  science  affords  of  the  incessant  energies  of 
Creating  Poiver — the  changes  and  revolutions  which  appear 
to  have  happened,  and  which  are  still  going  on  in  the  distant 
regions  of  the  universe,  as  tending  to  amplifij  our  vieivs  of  the 
grand  and  multifarious  otijects  over  which  Divine  Providence 
'presides — the  connection  of  science  with  a  future  state — the 
aids  which  the  discoveries  of  science  afford,  in  enabling  us  to 


288  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

form  a  conception  of  the  scenes  of  future  felicity — of  the  em^ 
ployments  of  the  heavenly  inhabitants,  and  of  their  perpetual 
advances  in  knowledge  and  happiness,  and  in  their  views.of  the 
perfections  of  Deity — the  moral  relations  of  intelligent  beings 
to  their  Creator,  and  to  each  other  ;  and  the  physical  grounds 
or  reasons  of  those  moral  laws  which  the  Deity  has  promul- 
gated for  regulating  the  conduct,  and  for  promoting  the  har- 
mony and  order  of  intelligent  agents—- illustrations  of  the 
allusions  of  the  Sacred  writers  to  the  system  of  the  material 
world — the  simnUaneous  progress  of  science  and  religion^ 
considered  as  an  evidence  of  the  connection  of  the  one  with 
the  other — the  moral  effects  of  the  study  of  science  in  connec- 
tion with  religion — replies  to  objections  and  insinuations  which 
have  been  thrown  out  against  the  idea  of  combining  the  dis- 
coveries of  Science  with  the  discoveries  of  revelation,  &c. 
But,  as  illustrations  of  these,  and  various  other  topics  con- 
nected with  them,  would  occupy  two  or  three  hundred  pages, 
they  must,  in  the  mean  time,  be  postponed.* 

*  A  work,  embracing  illustrations  of  some  of  the  topics  here  stated,  is  pre- 

fiaring  for  the  press,  under  the  title  of"  The  Philosophy  of  Religion  ;^''  or,  an 
Uustration  of  the  Moral  Laws  of  the  Universe,  on  the  principles  of  Reason 
and  Divine  Revelation."  In  this  work,  an  original,  and,  at  the  same  time, 
a  popular  train  of  thought  will  be  prosecuted,  and  the  diflferent  topics 
will  be  enlivened  with  illustrative  facts,  borrowed  from  the  scenery  of 
nature  and  the  moral  history  of  mankind. 


CHAPTER  V. 


BENEFICIAL  EFFECTS  WHICH  MIGHT  RESULT  TO  CHRISTIAN 

SOCIETY  FROM  CONNECTING  THE  DISCOVERIES  OF 

SCIENCE  WITH  THE  OBJECTS  OF  RELIGION. 

f. — The  variety  of  topics  which  would  be  introduced  into 
Christian  Instructions^  by  connecting:  them  with  the  manifes- 
tations of-  Deity  in  the  System  of  JVature,  would  have  a 

TENDENCY  TO  ALLURE  THE  ATTENTION  OF  THE  YOUNG 

TO  RELIGIOUS  SUBJECTS,  and  to  afford  JSIental  Entertain- 
ment, and  JMoral  Instruction  to  intelligent  minds  of  every 
description. 

Novelty  and  variety  appear  to  be  essentially  requisite  in 
order  to  rouse  the  attention,  not  only  of  the  more  ignorant  but 
even  of  the  more  intelligent  class  of  mankind,  and  to  excite 
them  to  make  progress  in  the  path  of  intellectual  and  moral 
improvement.  The  principle  of  curiosity,  which  appears  at  a 
very  early  period  of  life,  and  which  variegated  scenery  and 
novel  objects  tend  to  stimulate  and  to  gratify — so  far  from 
being  checked  and  decried,  in  a  religious  point  of  view,  as 
some  have  been  disposed  to  do,  ought  to  be  encouraged  and  cul- 
tivated in  the  minds  both  of  the  old  and  of  the  young.  As  it  is  a 
principle  which  God  himself  has  implanted  in  our  natures,  for 
wise  and  important  purposes,  it  requires  only  to  be  chastened, 
and  directed  in  a  proper  channel,  in  order  to  become  one  of 
the  most  powerful  auxiliaries  in  the  cause  of  religion,  and  of 
intellectual  improvement.  To  gratify  this  principle,  and  to 
increase  its  activity,  the  Creator  has  adorned  our  globe  with  a 
combination  of  beauties  and  sublimities,  strewed  in  endless 
variety  over  all  its  different  regions.  The  hills  and  dales,  the 
mountains  and  plains  ;  the  seas,  the  lakes,  the  rivers,  the 
islands  of  every  form  and  size  which  diversify  the  surface  of 
the  ocean  ;  the  bays,  the  gulfs,  and  peninsulas;  the  forests,  the 
groves,  the  deep  dells,  and  towering  elitfs  ;  the  infinite  variety 
of  trees,  plants,  flowers,  and  vegetable  productions  of  evcrj-f 


290  THE    QHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

hue,  so  profusely  scattered  over  the  face  of  Nature ;  the  diver- 
S'ified  productions  of  the  mineral  kingdom ;  the  variegated  color- 
ing spread  over  the  face  of  nature  ;  together  with  the  many 
thousands  of  ditferent  species  of  animated  beings  which  tra- 
verse the  air,  the  waters,  and  the  earth — atibrd  so  many  stimuli 
to  rouse  this  principle  into  exercise,  and  to  direct  the  mind  to 
the  contemplation  of  the  Creator.  And  as  the  earth  displays 
an  endless  diversity  of  objects,  so  the  heavens,  in  so  far  as 
they  have  been  explored,  exhibit  a  scenery  both  grand  and 
variegated.  There  is  not  a  planet  in  the  Solar  System  but 
differs  from  another,  in  its  magnitude,  in  its  distance  from  the 
central  Ljminary  about  which  it  revolves,  in  the  velocity  of  its 
motion,  in  the  extent  of  the  circle  it  describes  around  the  sun, 
in  the  period  of  time  in  which  its  revolution  is  completed,  in 
its  rotation  round  its  axis,  in  the  number  of  moons  with  which 
it  is  attended,  in  the  inclination  of  its,  axis  to  the,  plane  of  its 
orbit,  and  the  diversity  of  seasons  which  results  from  this  cir- 
cumstance ;  in  the  density  of  its  atmosphere,  and  the  various 
appearances  which  diversify  its  surface.  And  if  we  were 
favored  with  a  nearer  view  of  these  majestic  orbs,  we  should, 
doubtless,  behold  a  similar  variety  in  every  part  of  their  inter- 
nal arrangements. — The  surface  of  the  moon  presents  a  varie- 
gated prospect  of  mountains  and  vales,  but  so  very  different 
in  their  form,  position,  and  arrangement,  from  what  obtains^ 
on  the  surface  of  our  globe,  that  it  would  exhibit  a  scenery 
altogether  new  and  uncommon  to  an  inhabitant  of  this  world, 
were  he  placed  on  the  surface  of  that  planet.  Every  comet, 
too,  is  distinguished  from  another,  by  its  magnitude,  the  extent 
of  its  atmosphere,  the  length  of  its  blazing  tail,  the  rapidity  of 
its  motion,  and  the  figure  of  the  curve  it  descrbes  around  the 
sun.  With  regard  to  the  fixed  stars  which  are  distributed,  of 
every  size,  and  in  every  direction,  through  the  immensity  of 
space,  our  senses,  as  well  as  the  declaration  of  an  inspired 
writer,  convince  us,  that,  in  point  of  brilliancy,  color,  and  mag- 
nitude, "  one  star  diifereth  from  another  star  in  glory." 

And  as  the  system  of  Nature  in  all  its  parts  presents  a 
boundless  variety  of  scenery,  to  arouse  the  attention,  and  to 
gratify  the  desire  for  novelty,  so  the  Revelation  of  God  con- 
tained in  the  Sacred  Records,  displays  a  diversified  combina- 
tion of  the  most  sublime  and  interesting  subjects  and  events. 
"Were  we  to  form  an  opinion  of  the  compass  of  Divine  Reve- 
lation, from  the  range  of  subjects  to  which  the  minds  of  some 
professing  Christians  are  confined,  it  might  all  be  compre- 
hended within  the  limits  of  live  or  six  chapters  of  the  New 
Testament :  and  all  the  rest  might  be  thrown  aside,  as  a  dead- 


VARIETY    OF    TOPICS    IN    RELIGION.  291 

weight  upon  the  Christian  System.  But  here,  as  in  all  the 
other  displays  of  the  Almighty,  Divine  Perfection  and  Provi- 
dence are  exhibited  in  the  most  diversified  aspects.  Here  we 
have  recorded  a  history  of  the  creation  and  arrangement  of  our 
globe, — of  the  formation  of  the  first  human  pair, — of  their 
primeval  innocence,  temptation  and  fall, — of  the  arts  which 
were  cultivated  in  the  first  ages  of  the  world, — of  the  increase 
of  human  wickedness, — of  the  building  of  the  ark, — of  the 
drowning  of  the  world  by  a  universal  deluge, — of  the  burning 
of  Sodom  by  fire  from  the  clouds, — of  the  origin  of  languages, 
— of  the  dividing  of  the  Red  Sea, — of  the  journeying  of  the 
tribes  of  Israel  through  the  deserts  of  Arabia, — of  their  con- 
quest of  the  promised  land,  and  their  wars  with  the  nations  of 
Canaan, — of  the  corporeal  translation  of  Elijah  from  earth  to 
heaven, — of  the  manifestation  of  the  Son  of  God  in  human 
flesh,  the  benevolent  miracles  he  performed,  and  the  triumphs 
he  obtained  over  all  the  powers  of  hell  and  earth.  We  are 
here  presented  with  the  most  interesting  and  affecting  narra- 
tives, elegies,  dramatic  poems,  and  triumphal  songs, — with 
views  of  society  in  the  earliest  ages  of  the  world,  when  the 
lives  of  men  were  prolonged  to  nearly  a  thousand  years, — with 
splendid  miracles  performed  in  the  land  of  Egypt,  in  the  wil- 
derness of  Horeb,  and  in  the  "  field  of  Zoan,"  when  "the  sun 
and  moon  stood  still  in  their  habitation  ;"  when  the  waters  of 
the  great  deep  were  divided,  and  mountains  shook  and  trem- 
bled "at  the  presence  of  Jehovah," — with  the  glorious  march- 
ing of  a  whole  nation  through  the  Arabian  deserts,  under  the 
guidance  of  a  miraculous  pillar  of  clouds  and  fire, — with  the 
visits  of  celestial  messengers,  and  the  visible  symbols  of  "  a 
present  Deity," — with  prophetical  delineations  of  the  present 
and  future  condition  of  the  race  of  Adam, — with  descriptions 
of  the  Power,  Wisdom,  Love,  and  Majesty  of  the  Almighty, 
and  of  his  operations  in  Heaven  and  Earth, — with  the  results 
and  bearings  of  the  Economy  of  Redemption, — with  Divine 
Songs,  Odes  and  Hymns,  composed  by  angels  and  inspired 
men, — with  maxims  of  moral  wisdom,  examples  of  sublime^ 
eloquence,  of  strength  of  reasoning,  and  of  manly  boldness  oi 
reproof,— with  Proverbs,  Parables,  Allegories,  Exhortations, 
Promises, Threatenings, and  Consolatory  addresses.  In  short, 
we  have  here  detailed,  in  the  greatest  variety — History,  Anti- 
quities, Voyages  Travels,  Philosophy,  Geography,  Natural 
and  Moral  Science,  Biography,  Arts,  Epic  Poetry,  Epistles, 
Memoirs,  Delineations  of  Nature,  Sketches  of  Human  Cha- 
racter, Moral  Precepts,  Prophecies,  Miracles,  Narrations, 
Wonderful  Providences,  Marvellous  Deliverances,  the  Phe- 


292  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

nomena  of  the  Air,  the  Waters,  and  the  Earth  ;  the  Past,  the 
Present,  and  the  Future  Scenes  of  the  World — all  blended 
together  in  one  harmonious  system,  without  artificial  order, 
bul;  with  a  majesty  and  grandeur  corresponding  to  the  style  of 
all  the  other  Works  of  God, — and  all  calculated  to  gratify  the 
principle  of  curiosity — to  convey  "  reproof,  correction,  and 
instruction,  in  righteousness,"  and  "  to  make  the  Man  of  God 
perfect,  and  thoroughly  furnished  to  every  good  work." 

And,  as  the  scenes  of  Nature,  and  the  scenes  of  Revela 
tion,  are  thus  wonderfully  diversified,  in  order  to  excite  the 
attention  of  intelligent  beings,  and  to  gratify  the  desire  for 
variety,  so  we  have  every  reason  to  believe,  that  the  scenes, 
objects,  and  dispensations,  which  will  be  be  displayed  in  the 
heavenly  world,  will  be  incomparably  more  grand  and  diversi- 
fied. When  we  consider  the  immensity  of  God's  Universal 
Kingdom,  and  the  numerous  systems,  and  worlds,  and  beings 
comprehended  within  its  vast  circumference,  and  that  the  ener- 
gies of  Creating  Power  may  be  forever  exerted  in  raising  new 
worlds  into  existence — we  may  rest  assured,  that  the  desire  of 
variety  and  of  novelty,  in  holy  intelligences,  will  be  completely 
gratified  throughout  an  endless  succession  of  existence  ;  and 
that  the  most  luxuriant  imagination,  in  its  boldest  excursions, 
can  never  go  beyond  the  reality  of  those  scenes  of  diversified 
grandeur  which  the  Heaven  of  heavens  will  display. 

Now,  since  the  book  of  Nature,  and  the  Book  of  Revela- 
tion, since  all  the  manifestations  of  the  Creator  in  heaven  and 
earth  are  characterized  by  their  subhme  and  diversified  aspect ; 
we  would  ask,  why  should  we  not  be  imitators  of  God,  in  dis- 
playing the  diversified  grandeur  of  his  kingdom  of  Providence 
and  of  Grace,  before  the  minds  of  those  whom  we  profess  to 
instruct  ?  Why  should  we  confine  our  views  to  a  few  points 
in  the  Christian  system,  to  a  few  stones  in  the  fabric  of  the 
Divine  operations,  when  "  a  wide  and  unbounded  prospect  lies 
before  us  V  Why  should  we  not  rather  attempt  to  rouse  the 
moral  and  intellectual  energies  of  mankind,  from  the  pulpit, 
from  the  press,  in  the  school-room,  and  in  the  family  circle,  by 
exhibiting  the  boundless  variety  of  aspect  which  the  Revela- 
tions of  Heaven  present,  and  the  holy  tendencies  of  devout 
contemplation  on  the  Works  and  the  Ways  of  God  1  that  they 
mav  learn,  with  intelligence,  to  "  meditate  on  all  the  works  of 
the  Lord,  and  to  talk  of  all  his  doings." — By  enlarging  and 
diversifying  the  topics  of  religious  discussion,  according  to  the 
views  now  stated,  we  have  it  in  our  power  to  spread  out  an 
intellectual  feast  to  allure  and  to  gratify  every  variety  of  taste, 
— the  voung  and  the  old,  the  learned  and  the  unlearned ;  yea, 


AMPLITUDE    OP    THE    DIVINE    EMPIRE.  293 

even  the  careless  and  the  ignorant,  the  sceptical  and  the  dissi- 
pated, might  frequently  be  allured  by  the  selection  of  a  judi- 
cious variety  of  striking  and  impressive  objects  and  descrip- 
tions, to  partake  of  those  mental  enjoyments  which  might 
ultimately  issue  in  the  happiest  results.  The  man  of  an 
inquisitive  turn  of  mind,  who  now  throws  aside  every  thinfr 
that  has  the  appearance  of  religion,  on  account  of  its  dulness, 
might  have  his  curiosity  gratified  amidst  such  a  variety  as  that 
to  which  I  allude  ;  and,  from  perceiving  the  bearing  of  every 
discussion  on  the  great  rcahties  of  religion  and  a  future  state, 
might  be  led  to  more  serious  inquiries  after  the  path  that  leads 
to  immortality.  In  a  word,  to  associate  and  to  amalgamate, 
as  it  were,  the  arts  and  sciences,  and  every  department  of 
useful  knowledge,  with  divine  subjects,  is  to  consecrate  them 
to  their  original  and  legitimate  ends,  and  to  present  religion  to 
the  eyes  of  men,  in  its  most  sublime,  and  comprehensive,  and 
attractive  form,  corresponding  to  what  appears  to  be  the 
design  of  the  Creator,  in  all  the  manifestations  he  has  given 
of  himself,  in  the  System  of  Nature,  in  the  Operations  of 
Providence,  and  in  the  Economy  of  Redemption. 

II. — By  connecting  Science  with  Religion,  ChiHstians  mould 
be  enabled  to  take  an  extensive  survey  of  the  king- 
dom OF  God. 

How  very  narrow  and  limited  are  the  views  of  most  profes- 
sors of  religion  respecting  the  universal  Kingdom  of  Jehovah, 
and  the  range  of  his  operations  !  Tho  views  of  some  indivi- 
duals are  confined  chiefly  within  the  limits  of  their  own 
parish,  or  at  farthest,  extend  only  to  the  blue  mountains  that 
skirt  their  horizon,  and  form  the  boundary  of  their  sight. 
Within  this  narrow  circle,  all  their  ideas  of  God,  of  rehgion, 
and  of  the  relations  of  intelligent  beings  to  each  other,  are 
chiefly  confined.  There  are  others,  who  form  an  extensive 
class  of  our  population,  whose  ideas  are  confined  nearly  to 
to  the  county  in  which  they  reside,  and  to  the  adjacent  dis- 
tricts ;  and  there  are  few,  comparatively,  whose  views  extend 
beyond  the  confines  of  the  kingdom  to  which  they  belong — 
though  the  whole  island  in  which  we  reside  is  less  than  the 
two  thousandth  part  of  the  globe  we  inhabit.  Of  the  vast 
extent  of  this  earthly  ball,  of  its  figures  and  motions,  of  its 
continents,  seas,  islands,  and  oceans  ;  of  its  volcanoes  and 
ranges  of  mountains,  of  its  numerous  and  diversified  climates 
and  landscapes  ;  of  the  various  nations  and  tribes  of  mankind 
that  people  its  surface,  and  of  the  moral  government  of  God 
respecting  them, — they  are  almost  as  completely  ignorant  as 

25 


294  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

the  untutored  Greenlander,  or  the  roving  savage. — With 
regard  to  the  objects  which  he  beyond  the  boundary  of  our 
world,  they  have  no  precise  and  definite  conceptions.  When 
the  moon  is  "  walking  in  brightness"  through  the  heavens, 
they  take  the  advantage  of  her  light  to  prosecute  their  jour- 
neys ;  and,  when  the  sky  is  overcast  with  clouds,  and  they 
are  anxious  to  travel  a  few  miles  to  their  destined  homes,  they 
will  hft  up  their  eyes  to  the  h^^avens  to  see  if  any  of  the  stars 
are  twinkling  through  the  gloom,  that  their  footsteps  may  be 
directed  by  their  glimmering  rays.  Beyond  this  they  seldom 
soar.  What  may  be  the  nature  of  the  vast  assemblage  of 
shining  points  which  adorn  the  canopy  of  their  habitation,  and 
the  ends  they  are  destined  to  accomplish  in  the  plan  of  the 
Creator's  operations,  they  consider  as  no  part  of  their  pro- 
vince to  inquire. 

"  Their  minds,  fair  Science  never  ta\i£^ht  to  stray 

Far  as  the  Solar  Worlds,  or  Milky  Way." 

How  very  diiferent,  in  point  of  variety,  of  grandeur,  and  of 
extent,  are  the  views  of  the  man  who  connects  all  the  different 
departments  of  knowledge,  and  the  discoveries  of  science, 
with  his  prospects  of  God's  Universal  Dominion  and  Govern- 
ment 1  With  his  mental  eye  he  can  traverse  the  different 
regions  of  the  earth,  and  penetrate  into  the  most  distant  and 
retired  recesses  where  human  beings  have  their  residence. — 
He  can  contemplate  and  adore  the  conduct  of  Divine 
Sovereignty,  in  leaving  so  many  nations  to  grope  amidst  the 
darkness  of  Heathen  Idolatry, — he  can  trace  the  beams  of 
the  Sun  of  Righteousness,  as  they  gradually  arise  to  illume 
the  benighted  tribes  of  men, — he  can  direct  his  prayers,  with 
intelligence  and  fervor,  in  behalf  of  particular  kindreds  and 
people, — he  can  devise  with  judgment  and  discrimination, 
schemes  for  carrying  the  "  Salvation  of  God"  into  effect, — 
he  can  realize,  in  some  measure,  to  his  mental  sight,  the  glo- 
rious and  happy  scenes  which  will  be  displayed  in  the  future 
ages  of  time,  when  "  the  kingdoms  of  this  world  shall  become 
the  kingdom  of  our  Lord,  and  of  his  Christ,"  and  when  the 
*'  everlasting  gospel"  shall  be  published,  and  its  blessings 
distributed  among  all  who  dwell  upon  the  face  of  the  earth. — 
He  can  bound  from  this  earth  to  the  planetary  worlds,  and 
survey  far  more  spacious  globes,  peopled  with  a  higher  order 
of  intelligences,  arranged  and  superintended  by  the  same 
Almighty  Sovereign,  who  "  doth  according  to  his  will  among 
the  inhabitants  of  the  earth."  He  can  wing  his  way  beyond 
the  visible  region  of  the  sky,  till  he  find  himself  surrounded  on 
every  hand  with  suns  and  systems  of  worlds,  rising  to  view  in 


AMPLITUDE    OF    THE    DIVINE    EMPIRE.  295 

boundless  perspective,  throughout  the  tracts  of  immensity 

diversified  with  scenes  of  magnificence,  and  with  beings  of 
every  order — all  under  the  government  and  the  wise  direction 
of  Him  who  "  rules  among  the  armies  of  heaven,"  and  who 
"  preservetli  them  all,"  and  whom  the  "  host  of  heaven  wor- 
ship" and  adore.  He  can  soar  beyond  them  all  to  the  throne 
of  God,  where  angels  and  archangels,  cherubim  and  seraphim, 
celebrate  the  praises  of  their  Sovereign  Lord,  and  stand  ready 
to  announce  his  Will,  by  their  rapid  flight  to  the  most  distant 
provinces  of  his  empire.  He  can  descend  from  that  lofty 
eminence  to  this  terrestrial  world,  allotted  for  his  temporally 
abode,  and  survey  another  unbounded  province  of  the  Empire 
of  God,  in  those  living  worlds  which  lie  hid  from  the  unas- 
sisted sight,  and  which  the  microscope  alone  can  descry.  He 
can  here  perceive  the  same  Hand  and  Intelligence  which 
direct  the  rolling  worlds  above,  and  marshal  all  the  angelic 
tribes — organizing,  arranging,  and  governing  the  countless 
myriads  of  animated  existence  which  people  the  surface  of  a 
muddy  pool.  He  can  speed  his  course  from  one  of  these 
departments  of  Jehovah's  kingdom  to  another,  till,  astonished 
and  overwhelmed  with  the  order,  the  grandeur,  and  extent  of 
the  wondrous  scene,  he  is  constrained  to  exclaim,  "  Great  and 
marvellous  are  thy  works.  Lord  God  Almighty !"  *'  Thine 
understanding  is  infinite !"  The  limits  of  thy  dominions  are 
"  past  finding  out !" 

By  taking  such  extensive  surveys  of  the  empire  of  Jehovah, 
we  are  enabled  to  perceive  the  spirit  and  references  of  those 
sublime  passages  in  the  sacred  writings  which  proclaim  the 
Majesty  of  God,  and  the  glory  of  his  Kingdom.  Such  pas- 
sages are  diffusely  scattered  through  the  inspired  volume,  and 
have  evidently  an  extent  of  reference  far  beyond  what  is 
generally  conceived  by  the  great  mass  of  the  Christian  world. 
The  following  may  suffice  as  a  specimen  : — 

"  Thine,  0  Lord  !  is  the  greatness,  and  the  glory,  and  the 
majesty  ;  for  all  in  heaven  and  earth  is  thine  !  Thine  is  the 
kingdom,  0  Lord  !  Thou  art  exalted  above  all,  thou  reignest 
over  all,  and  in  thine  hand  is  Power  and  Might. — Behold  the 
heaven,  and  the  Heaven  of  heavens,  is  the  Lord's  ;  the  earth 
also,  with  all  that  therein  is. — Ascribe  ye  greatness  to  our 
God  ;  for  there  is  none  like  unto  the  God  of  Israel,  who 
rideth  upon  the  heavens  in  his  strength,  and  in  his  excellency 
on  the  sky.  Thou,  even  thou  art  Lord  alone  ;  thou  hast 
made  heaven,  the  Heaven  of  heavens,  with  all  their  host ;  the 
earth,  and  all  things  that  are  therein  ;  the  seas,  and  all  that  is 
therein  ;  and  thou  preservest  them  all,  and  the  Host  of  Heaven 


296  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

worshippeth  thee. — He  divideth  the  sea  by  his  Power  ;  by  his 
Spirit  he  hath  garnished  the  heavens  :  Lo  !  these  are  only 
parts  of  his  ways ;  but  how  Uttle  a  portion  is  heard  of  him> 
and  the  thunder  of  his  Power  who  can  understand  1 — The 
Lord  hath  prepared  his  Throne  in  the  Heavens,  and  his  king- 
dom ruleth  over  all. — 0  Lord  our  God  !  how  excellent  is  thy 
name  in  all  the  earth  !  who  hast  set  thy  glory  above  the 
heavens.  When  I  consider  thy  heavens,  the  work  of  thy 
fingers,  the  moon  and  the  stars,  which  thou  hast  ordained  ; 
what  is  man,  that  thou  art  mindful  of  him  ! — His  Kingdom  is 
an  everlasting  Kingdom  ;  Honor  and  Majesty  are  before  him  ; 
all  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  are  reputed  as  nothino;  in  his 
sight,  and  he  doth  according  to  his  will  in  the  army  of  heaven, 
and  among  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth. — He  measures  the 
waters  in  the  hollow  of  his  hand  ;  He  meteth  out  heaven  with 
a  span,  and  comprehendeth  the  dust  of  the  earth  in  a  measure. 
— He  sitteth  upon  the  circle  of  the  earth,  and  the  inhabitants 
tliereof  are  as  grasshoppers. — ^I  have  made  the  earth,  and 
created  man  upon  it ;  I,  even  my  hands,  have  stretched  out 
the  heavens,  and  all  their  host  have  I  commanded. — The  Most 
High  dwelleth  not  in  temples  made  with  hands  ;  for  the  heaven 
is  his  throne,  and  the  earth  is  his  footstool. — With  God  is 
awful  Majesty.^Great  things  doth  He,  which  we  cannot 
comprehend  ;  yea,  the  Lord  sitteth  King  for  ever. — Praise 
ye  the  Lord  in  the  Heavens  ;  praise  him  in  the  heights  ; 
praise  him  all  his  angels  ;  praise  ye  him  all  his  hosts.  Praise 
him  sun  and  moon  ;  praise  him  all  ye  stars  of  light ;  praise 
him  ye  Heaven  of  heavens.  Praise  him  ye  kings  of  the  earth, 
and  all  people,  princes,  and  judges  of  the  earth  ;  both  young 
men  and  maidens  ;  old  men  and  children — let  them  praise  the 
name  of  the  Lord  ;  for  his  name  alone  is  excellent,  his  glory 
is  above  the  earth  and  heaven." 

These  sublime  descriptions  of  the  Supremacy  of  God,  and 
of  the  Grandeur  of  his  kingdom,  must  convince  every  reflect- 
ing mind,  of  the  inconceivable  magnificence  and  extent  of 
that  Dominion  "  which  ruleth  over  all."  It  is  quite  evident, 
that  we  can  never  enter,  with  intelligence,  into  the  full  import, 
and  the  grand  references  of  such  exalted  language  employed 
by  inspired  writers,  unless  we  take  into  view,  all  the  disco- 
veries which  Science  has  made,  both  in  the  earth,  and  in  the 
heavens,  respecting  the  variety  and  extent  of  the  Dominions 
of  the  Creator.  If  the  "  Kingdom  of  the  Most  High"  were 
as  limited  in  its  range  as  most  Christians  seem  to  conceive^ 
such  descriptions  might  be  considered  as  mere  hyperboles,  or 
bombast,  or  extravagant  declamation,  which  far  exceeds  the 


AMPLITUDE    OF    THE    DIVINE    EMPIRE.  297 

bounds  of  "  truth  and  soberness."  But  we  are  certain,  that 
the  conceptions  and  the  language  of  mortals  can  never  go 
beyond  the  reality  of  what  actually  exists  within  the  boundless 
precincts  of  Jehovah's  Empire.  For  "  who  can  utter  the 
mighty  acts  of  the  Lord  ?"  or  "  who  can  show  forth  all  his 
praise  ?"  The  language  and  descriptions  to  which  we  have 
now  adverted,  seem  to  have  had  a  prospective  reference  to 
later  and  more  enlightened  times,  when  more  extensive  pro- 
spects of  God's  dominions  would  be  opened  up  by  the  exer- 
tions of  the  human  intellect.  And  were  we  to  search  all  the 
records  of  literature,  in  ancient  or  modern  times,  we  should 
find  no  descriptions  nor  language  of  such  a  dignified  nature 
as  to  express  the  views  and  feelings  of  an  enlightened  Chris- 
tian Philosopher,  when  he  contemplates  the  sublimity  and 
extent  of  Divine  operations — except  those  which  are  to  be 
found  in  the  inspired  volume — the  strength,  and  majesty,  and 
comprehension  of  which,  no  human  language  can  ever  exceed. 
Again,  by  familiarizing  our  minds  to  such  extended  pro- 
spects of  God's  universal  kingdom,  we  shall  be  qualified  and 
disposed  to  comply  with  the  injunctions  of  Scripture,  which 
represent  it  as  an  imperious  duty,  to  communicate  to  the  minds 
of  others  such  elevated  conceptions.  This  duty  is  enjoined  in 
numerous  passages  of  Sacred  Scripture,  particularly  in  the 
book  of  Psalms  ;  "  Declare  his  glory  among  the  heathen, 
and  his  wonders  among  all  people. — I  will  extol  thee,  my 
God,  0  King. — One  generation  shall  praise  thy  works  to 
another,  and  shall  declare  thy  mighty  acts. — I  will  speak  of 
the  glorious  honor  of  thy  majesty,  and  of  thy  wondrous  works, 
— And  men  shall  speak  of  the  might  of  thy  terrible  acts  ;  and 
shall  declare  thy  greatness.  All  thy  works  shall  praise  thee, 
0  Lord  ;  and  thy  saints  shall  bless  thee.  They  shall  speak 
of  the  glory  of  thy  kingdom,  and  talk  of  thy  power ;  to  make 
knoivn  to  the  sons  of  men  thy  mighty  acts,  and  the  glorious 
majesty  of  thy  kingdom.''^'^  When  we  look  around  us  in  the 
world,  and  in  the  visible  church,  and  mark  the  conceptions, 
and  the  conversation  of  the  members  of  religious  societies, 
we  need  scarcely  say  how  little  this  ennobling  duty  is  attended 
to  by  the  mass  of  those  who  bear  the  Christian  name.  We 
hear  abundance  of  idle  chat  about  the  fashions  and  the  poli- 
tics of  the  day — how  Miss  A.  danced  so  gracefully  at  the 
ball,  and  how  Miss  B.  sung  so  sweetly  at  the  concert ;  how 
Mr.  C.  acted  his  part  so  well  in  the  character  of  Rob  Roy, 
and  how  Mr.  D.  made  such  a  flaming  speech  at  the  corpora- 

*  Psalm  cxlv.  and  xcvi.  3,  4. 
25* 


298  THE    CHRISTIAN   PHILOSOPHER. 

tion  dinner.  We  listen  to  slanderous  conversation,  and  heaf 
abundance  of  mean,  and  base,  and  uncharitable  insinuations 
against  our  neighbors  ;  which  indicate  the  operation  of  maUce, 
hatred,  envy,  and  other  malevolent  tempers.  We  spend  whole 
hours  in  boisterous  disputations  about  metaphysical  subtleties 
in  relio-ion,  and  questions  "  which  gender  strife  rather  than 
godly  edifying  ;"  but  "  to  speak  of  the  glory  of  God's  king- 
dom, and  to  talk  of  his  Power,"  with  the  view  of  "  making 
known  to  the  sons  of  men  his  mighty  works,"  is  a  duty 
which  remains  yet  to  be  learned  by  a  majority  of  those  who 
profess  the  religion  of  Jesus.  And  how  can  they  be  sup- 
posed to  be  qualified  to  enter  into  the  spirit  of  this  duty,  and 
to  proclaim  to  others  "  the  glorious  majesty  of  God's  king- 
dom," unless  such  subjects  be  illustrated  in  minute  detail, 
and  proclaimed  with  becoming  energy,  both  from  the  pulpit, 
and  from  the  press  1  These  powerful  engines,  when  con- 
ducted with  judgment  and  discrimination,  are  capable  of  pro- 
ducing on  the  mass  of  mankind,  a  tone  of  thinking,  and  an 
enlargement  of  conception,  on  such  subjects,  which  no  other 
means  can  easily  effect ;  and  it  is  to  be  hoped,  that  more 
precise  and  luminous  details,  and  more  vigor  and  animation, 
will  soon  be  displayed,  in  this  respect,  than  in  the  ages  that 
are  past. 

There  is  a  certain  principle  of  selfishness  which  pervades 
the  minds  of  many  professed  religionists,  which  leads  them 
to  conclude,  that,  if  they  can  but  secure  their  own  personal 
salvation,  they  need  give  themselves  no  trouble  about  the 
glory  and  extent  of  the  kingdom  of  the  Most  High.  "  What 
need  we  care,"  say  they,  "  about  nations  in  the  far-distant 
parts  of  the  world,  and  about  the  planets  and  the  stars  ;  our 
business  is  to  attend  to  the  spiritual  interests  of  our  souls." 
Such  persons  seem  neither  to  understand  in  what  salvation 
really  consists,  and  what  is  conducive  to  their  spiritual  inte- 
rests, nor  to  appreciate  those  tempers  and  habits  which  will 
qualify  them  for  the  enjoyment  of  eternal  life.  It  forms  but 
a  very  slender  evidence  of  their  possessing  any  spark  of 
Christianity  at  all,  if  they  wish  to  rest  satisfied  with  the  most 
vague  and  grovelling  conceptions,  and  if  they  do  not  ardently 
aspire  after  a  more  enlarged  view  of  the  attributes  of  God,  of 
the  glory  of  his  empire,  and  of  whatever  may  tend  to  expand 
their  conceptions  of  "  the  inheritance  of  the  saints  in  light." 
We  have  often  been  astonished  at  the  opinions  of  some  of 
those  who  move  in  a  higher  sphere  of  intelligence,  who  seem 
to  consider  it  as  a  matter  of  pure  indifference,  whether  or  not 
Christians  should  attain  to  the  highest  conception  in  their 


AMPLITUDE    OF    THE    DIVINE    EMPIRE.  299 

jiower  of  the  God  whom  they  worship,  and  of  his  boundless 
dominions  ;  because  they  conceive  that  such  views  are  not 
essentially  connected  with  salvation !  But  we  would  ask 
such  persons,  how  they  came  to  know  that  such  views  are  not 
connected  with  salvation  1  Though  they  may  not  have  been 
essential  to  the  salvation  of  men  in  the  dark  ages  that  are 
past,  or  to  obscure  tribes  of  people  at  present,  who  have  no 
access  to  the  proper  sources  of  information,  yet,  since  God, 
in  the  course  of  his  Providence,  which  guides  all  human  in- 
ventions and  discoveries,  has  disclosed  to  us  a  far  more  ex- 
pansive view  of  the  "  glory  of  his  kingdom,"  than  former 
ages  could  obtain,  for  the  purpose  of  illustrating  the  revela- 
tions of  his  word — who  will  dare  to  assert,  that  the  man  who 
has  access,  by  his  studious  efforts,  to  contemplate  this  won- 
drous scene,  and  to  display  its  grandeur  to  others,  and  yet 
wilfully  shuts  his  eyes  on  the  Divine  glory  therein  displayed, 
does  not  thereby  hazard  the  Divine  displeasure  1  In  this 
point  of  view,  the  following  passage  deserves  a  serious  con- 
sideration :  "  Because  they  regard  not  the  works  of  the  Lord, 
nor  the  operations  of  his  hands,  he  shall  destroy  them,  and 
not  build  them  up."  We  have  no  hesitation  in  admitting,  that 
persons  may  have  obtained  salvation  who  never  saw  more  of 
the  sacred  writings  than  what  is  contained  in  the  gospel  of 
Mark,  or  in  one  of  Paul's  Epistles  ;  but  what  would  we  say 
of  the  man  who  had  access  to  all  the  Revelations  of  Heaven 
we  now  possess,  and  yet  confined  his  attention  solely  to  a 
chapter  or  two  in  the  New  Testament,  and  would  not  deign 
to  look  into  any  other  part  of  the  inspired  volume  ?  We 
should  not  hesitate  at  once  to  pronounce  that  such  a  person 
was  grossly  deficient  in  his  duty,  and  devoid  of  that  reverence 
and  submission  which  are  due  to  the  oracles  of  God.  And, 
if  it  be  admitted,  that  the  person  who  has  access  to  the  Bible, 
and  who  refuses  to  peruse  its  important  contents,  is  guilty  of 
a  criminal  neglect,  we  do  not  see  how  the  man,  who  has  free 
access  to  the  other  volume  of  God's  revelation,  and  views  it 
as  a  matter  of  mere  indifference,  whether  he  looks  into  it  or 
not,  can  be  deemed,  in  this  respect,  entirely  innocent.  If  it 
be  understood,  that  we  shall  be  judged  according  to  the  hght 
and  privileges  we  enjoy,  and  the  use  we  make  of  them,  in  our 
improvement  in  the  knowledge  of  God — we  would  deem  it  a 
hazardous  position,  for  any  one  to  support,  That  "  inattention 
to  the  visible  glories  of  the  kingdom  of  God,  and  to  the 
*  declaration  of  his  wonders  among  the  people,'  is  a  matter 
either  of  indifference,  or  of  trivial  importance." 

For,  let  it  be  considered,  further — that  on  the  extent  of  o^^r 


300  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

vieivs  respecting  the  universal  kingdom  of  God,  depends  our 
conceptions  of  the  JMctjestij  and  Glory  of  the  Creator  himself. 
We  become  acquainted  with  the  nature  of  God,  only  in  so  far 
as  he  has  manifested  himself  to  us  by  external  operations,* 
and  in  so  far  as  we  form  just  conceptions  of  these  operations. 
If  we  conceive  his  empire  as  included  within  the  bounds  of 
eicrhty  or  ninety  thousand  miles,  our  conceptions  of  the  Sover- 
eign of  that  empire  will  be  circumscribed  within  nearly  the 
same  limits.  The  mind  of  every  reasonable  man  must,  in- 
deed, admit  the  abstract  proposition,  "  That  the  Divine  Being 
is  infinite,  and,  consequently,  fills  all  space  with  his  presence." 
But  this  infinity  in  our  view,  is  nothing  more  than  a  vague 
conception  of  empty  space,  extending  a  little  way  beyond  the 
sphere  of  his  visible  operations.  The  mind  must  have  some 
material,  visible  or  tangible  objects  to  rest  upon,  and  to  guide 
it  in  its  excursions,  when  it  would  attempt  to  form  the  most  de- 
finite and  comprehensive  conceptions  of  an  Infinite,  Eternal, 
and  Invisible  Existence.  For  however  much  we  may  talk 
about  purely  spiritual  ideas,  it  is  quite  evident,  from  the  nature 
of  things,  and  from  the  very  constitution  of  man,  that  we  can 
have  no  ideas  at  all  without  the  intervention  of  sensible  objects. 
And,  therefore,  if  we  would  wish  to  form  the  most  sublime 
conceptions  of  God  himself,  we  must  endeavor,  in  the  first 
place,  to  take  the  most  extensive  views  which  science  and  rev- 
elation exhibit,  of  his  vast  dominions.  We  must  endeavor  to 
form  some  adequate  idea  of  the  wide  extent  of  the  globe  on 
which  we  dwell,  its  diversified  scenery,  and  the  numerous 
tribes  of  human  beings,  and  other  animated  existences,  visible 
and  invisible,  which  people  its  different  provinces.  We  must 
explore  the  vast  regions  of  the  planetary  system,  and  compare 
the  bulk  of  the  earth,  large  as  it  is,  with  some  of  those  more 
mao-nificent  globes,  which  would  contain  a  thousand  worlds  as 
large  as  ours.  We  must  next  wing  our  way,  in  imagination, 
over  a  space  which  a  cannon-ball,  flying  five  hundred  miles 
every  hour,  would  not  traverse  in  ten  hundred  thousand  years, 
till  we  arrive  at  the  nearest  fixed  stars,  and  find  ourselves  in 
the  centre  of  thousands  of  systems  and  worlds,  arranged  at  im- 
measurable distances  from  one  another.  We  must  pass  from 
one  nebula,  or  cluster  of  systems,  to  another  ;  continuing  our 
excursions  as  far  as  the  eye  or  the  telescope  can  direct  our 
view  ;  and,  when  the  aid  of  artificial  instruments  begins  to  fail, 
our  imagination  must  still  take  its  flight  far  beyond  the  boun- 
daries of  mortal  vision,  and  add  system  to  system,  and  nebula 

*  Here  I  include  the  manifestations  of  Deity,  as  exhibited  both  in  Di- 
vine Revelation,  and  in  the  System  of  Natui-e. 


AMPLITUDE    OF    THE    DIVINE    EMPIRE.  301 

to  nebula,  through  the  boundless  regions  of  space,  till  we 
arrive  at  the  grand  centre  of  the  universe,  the  Throne  of  God, 
around  which  all  worlds  and  beings  revolve,  where  "  thousands 
thousands"  of  bright  intelligences  "  minister  to  Him,  and  ten 
thousand  times  ten  thousand  stand  before  him." — We  must 
consider  all  this  magnificent  assemblage  of  objects,  not  merely 
as  so  many  masses  of  inert  matter,  or  as  a  grand  raree-show, 
to  dazzle  the  eyes  of  a  few  hundreds  of  human  spectators, — 
but  as  destined  for  purposes  worthy  of  the  plans  and  the  intel- 
ligence of  Him  who  is  "  the  only  wise  God," — as  peopled 
with  numerous  orders  of  intelligent  beings,  whose  physical  and 
moral  economy  is  superintended  and  directed  by  Him,  who,  at 
the  same  time,  rules  amidst  the  tumults  of  human  revolutions, 
and  governs  the  living  myriads  which  people  a  drop  of  water. 
In  this  way,  then,  do  we  come  to  acquire  the  most  extensive 
views  of  the  amolitude  and  glory  of  the  Kingdom  of  the  Most 
High  ;  and  it  is  only  by  the  same  process  of  thought  that  we 
can  ever  attain  the  most  exalted  conceptions  of  the  attributes 
of  its  almighty  Sovereign.  For  our  views  of  the  Sovereign  of 
the  universe  must  always  correspond  with  our  views  of  the  ex- 
tent and  magnificence  of  those  dominions  which  sprung  from 
his  Creating  Hand,  and  over  which  he  every  moment  presides. 
His  essence  must  for  ever  remain  imperceptible  to  finite 
minds  ;  for  he  is  "  the  King  Eternal,  immortal,  and  Invisihle, 
dwelling  in  that  Light  which  no  man  can  approach  unto,  whom 
no  man  hath  seen,  or  can  see."  From  his  nature,  as  a  spiritual 
uncompounded  substance,  and  from  his  immensity,  as  filling 
infinite  space  with  his  presence,  it  appears  impossible,  in  the 
very  nature  of  things,  that  the  glory  of  his  perfections  can  be 
displayed  in  any  other  way  than  through  the  medium  of  the 
visible  operations  of  his  hands,  or  in  the  dispensations  of  his 
providence  towards  particular  worlds  or  classes  of  intelli- 
gences. And  if,  in  the  future  world,  the  souls  of  good  men 
will  enjoy  a  more  glorious  display  than  at  present,  of  the  at- 
tributes of  Deity,  it  will  be  owing  chiefly  to  their  being  placed 
in  more  favorable  circumstances  than  they  now  are,  for  con- 
templating this  display  ;  to  their  faculties  being  more  invigo- 
rated ;  and  every  physical  and  moral  impediment  to  their 
exercise  being  completely  removed  ;  so  as  to  enable  them  to 
perceive  more  clearly  than  they  now  do,  the  unbounded  dis- 
plays he  has  given  of  his  infinite  Power,  Wisdom,  and  Benevo- 
lence. And,  if  we  expect  to  be  introduced  to  this  state  of 
enlarged  vision,  when  we  pass  from  the  scenes  of  mortality,  it 
cannot  be  a  matter  o^  mere  indifference,  even  now,  whether  or 
not  our  minds  be  prepared  for  such  exalted  employments,  hy 


S02  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

endeavoring  to  form  the  most  ample  conceptions  of  the  attri- 
butes of  God  which  can  be  obtained  through  the  medium  of 
his  Word,  and  by  a  contemplation  of  the  variety  and  magnifi- 
cence of  his  Works. — In  the  prospect  of  that  world  where  we 
hope  to  spend  an  interminable  existence,  it  must  also  be  inter- 
esting to  ascertain,  whether  or  not  the  dominions  of  the  univer- 
sal Sovereign  present  such  an  extent  of  empire,  and  such  a 
variety  of  objects,  that  new  scenes  of  wonder  and  glory  may 
be  expected  to  be  displayed  in  continual  succession,  for  the 
contemplation  and  entertainment  of  holy  beings,  while  eternal 
ages  are  rolling  on.  And,  on  this  point,  the  discoveries  of 
science  confirm  and  illustrate  the  notices  of  heavenly  glory  and 
felicity  recorded  in  the  inspired  volume,  and  lead  us  to  rest  with 
full  assurance  on  the  prophetic  declaration,  that  "  eye  hath  not 
seen,  nor  ear  heard,  nor  hath  it  entered  into  the  heart  of  man 
to  conceive  the  things  which  God  hath  prepared  for  them  that 
love  him." 

III. — Bij  connecting  the  discoveries  of  Science  ivith  Religion, 
the  minds  of  Christians  ivould  be  enabled  to  take  a  more 
minute  and  comprehensive  survey  of  the  Operations  of 
Providence. 

Providence  is  that  superintendence  and  care  which  God  ex- 
ercises over  all  creatures  and  events,  in  order  to  accomplish 
the  eternal  purposes  of  his  will.  In  Creation,  God  brought 
the  universe  out  of  nothing,  and  arranged  all  its  provinces  and 
inhabitants  into  due  order.  By  his  Providence  he  supports 
and  governs  all  the  movements  of  the  material  system,  and  the 
sensitive  and  rational  beings  with  which  it  is  peopled.  It  is 
evident,  that,  in  proportion  as  our  views  of  the  Creator's  Do- 
minions are  extended,  our  views  of  his  Providence  will,  to  a 
certain  extent,  be  proportionably  enlarged.  For  wherever 
worlds  and  beings  exist,  there  will  God  be  found,  preserving, 
superintending,  and  governing  the  movements  of  all  creatures 
and  events.  It  is  chiefly,  however,  in  the  world  in  which  we 
reside,  that  the  diversified  dispensations  of  Providence  can  be 
distinctly  traced.  Now  an  acquaintance  with  the  prominent 
parts  of  the  different  branches  of  knowledge  to  which  I  have 
already  adverted,  would  enable  us  to  take  a  particular  and  com- 
prehensive view,  not  only  of  the  ways  of  God  to  man,  but  also 
of  his  arrangements  in  reference  to  all  subordinate  creatures 
and  events. 

From  the  Inspired  History  of  the  Old  Testament,  we  can 
trace  the  prominent  lines  of  the  dispensations  of  God  towards 
man,  particularly  in  regard  to  the  Israelites  and  the  surround- 


RANGE    OF    DIVINE    PROVIDENCE.  303 

mg  nations — from  the  Creation  to  a  period  about  400  years 
before  the  coming  of  Christ.  But  in  order  to  perceive  the 
farther  progress  and  bearings  of  these  Hnes  till  the  commence- 
ment of  the  New  Testament  economy,  we  must  have  recourse 
to  the  most  authentic  records  of  profane  history.  From  the 
era  of  the  birth  of  Christ  to  near  the  close  of  the  first  century, 
we  can  acquire,  from  the  Evangelists,  and  the  History  of  the 
Apostles,  a  particular  account  of  the  life  of  Christ,  of  the 
events  which  preceded  and  accompanied  the  finishing  of  the 
work  of  redemption,  and  of  the  progress  of  the  Gospel 
through  Judea  and  the  adjacent  countries.  But  after  this 
period  we  have  no  inspired  guide  to  direct  us  in  tracing  the 
Divine  Dispensations  towards  the  various  nations  of  the 
earth ;  and,  therefore,  we  must  have  recourse  to  the  annals, 
memoirs,  chronicles,  and  other  records  of  the  history  of 
nations,  down  to  the  period  in  which  we  live  ;  otherwise  we 
could  never  contemplate  the  continued  series  of  events  in  the 
Divine  Economy  towards  the  inhabitants  of  our  world.  Un- 
less men  of  learning  and  of  observation  had  recorded  the 
prominent  facts  which  have  occurred  in  the  history  of  nations, 
for  1700  years  past,  we  must  have  remained  almost  as  igno- 
rant of  the  dispensations  of  God  towards  our  race,  during 
that  period,  as  the  inhabitants  of  the  planet  Saturn  :  and  unless 
we  study  the  events  thus  recorded  in  the  writings  of  the  histo- 
rian, and  contemplate  their  varied  aspects  and  bearings  in  the 
light  of  Divine  Revelation,  we  must  still  remain  ignorant  of 
the  grand  movements  and  tendencies  of  Divine  Providence. 
This  single  circumstance  shows,  in  the  clearest  light,  that  it 
is  the  intention  of  God,  that  we  should  learn  the  operations  of 
his  Providence  from  the  researches  of  Science  and  of  History, 
as  well  as  from  the  records  of  Revelation ;  and  that  the 
Scriptures,  though  they  contain  every  supernatural  discovery 
requisite  to  our  happiness,  are  not  of  themselves  sufficient 
to  present  us  with  a  connected  view  of  the  prominent  dispensa- 
tions of  heaven,  from  the  Creation  to  the  period  in  which  we  live. 
From  the  science  of  Geography  we  acquire  a  knowledge  of 
the  extent  of  the  surface  of  the  earth — of  the  various  tribes 
of  human  inhabitants  with  which  it  is  peopled — of  the  physi- 
cal aspect  of  the  different  climates  they  inhabit — of  their  arts, 
manners,  customs,  laws,  religion,  vices,  wars,  and  political 
economy :  and,  consequently,  we  can,  in  these  and  similar 
respects,  trace  some  of  the  aspects  of  Divine  Providence  to- 
wards them  in  relation  to  their  present  and  future  condition. 
From  the  same  source,  we  learn  the  number  of  human  beings 
which  the  Governor  of  the  world  has  under  his  direction  at 


304  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

one  time,  which  is  nearly  a  thousand  millions,  or  five  Hundred 
times  the  number  of  the  inhabitants  of  Scotland.  From  the 
data  afforded  by  this  science,  we  may  also  form  an  estimate 
of  the  number  of  disembodied  spirits  that  have  passed  from 
this  world  since  the  Creation,  and  are  now  under  the  superin- 
tendence of  the  Almighty  in  the  invisible  state,  which  cannot 
be  much  less  than  145,000  millions  ;  and  on  similar  grounds 
we  may  also  learn  the  number  of  rational  beings  that  are 
coming  forward  into  existence,  and  passing  into  the  eternal 
world  every  day,  which  is  at  least  68,000,  and,  consequently, 
nearly  50  during  each  passing  minute, — every  individual  of 
which,  the  Supreme  Disposer  of  events  superintends  at  his 
entrance  into  life  ;  and,  at  his  departure  from  it,  directs  to  his 
respective  and  eternal  state  of  destination.  All  which  cir- 
cumstances, and  many  others  of  a  similar  kind,  must  be  taken 
into  account,  in  order  to  our  forming  a  comprehensive  con- 
ception of  the  numerous  bearings,  and  the  incessant  agency 
of  a  Superintending  Providence. 

From  JVatural  History  we  learn  the  immense  number  and 
variety  of  the  subordinate  tribes  of  animated  beings  which 
inhabit  the  different  regions  of  earth,  air,  and  sea — their  eco- 
nomy and  instincts — their  modes  of  existence,  and  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  Creator  provides  for  their  various  necessities. 
— From  an  acquaintance  with  the  History  of  the  Arts  and 
JMechanical  Inventions,  we  learn  the  gradual  manner  in  which 
God  directs  the  movements  of  the  human  mind,  in  making 
those  improvements  and  discoveries  which  have  a  bearing 
upon  the  accomplishment  of  his  eternal  plans  of  mercy,  and 
which  tend  to  enlarge  our  views  of  the  amplitude  and  the 
glories  of  his  kingdom.  From  JVatural  Philosophy  and  Che- 
mistry, we  learn  the  secondary  causes  or  subordinate  laws  by 
which  the  Almighty  supports  and  directs  the  natural  constitu- 
tion of  the  world — the  wonderful  manner  in  which  our  lives 
are  every  moment  supported — and  the  agencies  by  which  fire, 
air,  light,  heat,  and  fertility  are  distributed  through  the  globe, 
for  promoting  the  comfort  and  happiness  "  of  every  thing  that 
lives." — From  Anatomy  and  Physiology,  we  learn,  how  "  fear- 
fully and  wonderfully  we  are  made  and  preserved" — that  our 
health  and  comfort  depend  upon  the  regular  action  of  a  thou- 
sand organical  parts  and  functions,  over  which  we  have  no 
control — and  that  our  very  existence  every  moment  is  depen- 
dant on  the  superintendence  of  a  Superior  Pov/er,  "  in  whose 
Hand  our  breath  is,  and  whose  are  all  our  ways." 

By  an  occasional  study,  then,  of  the  subjects  to  which  we 
have  now  alluded,  we  would  gradually  expand  our  concep- 


RANGE    OF   DIVINE    PROVIDENCE.  305 

tions  of  the  range  and  operations  of  Divine  Providence. 
Every  geographical  exploration  of  a  new  region  of  the  globe 
— every  scientific  improvement  and  discovery — every  useful 
invention — every  eruption  of  a  volcano — every  shock  of  an 
earthquake — every  hurricane,  and  storm,  and  tempest — every 
battle  of  the  warrior — every  revolution  among  the  nations — 
and  every  detail  in  the  newspapers  we  daily  read,  would  lead 
us  to  form  some  conceptions  of  the  providential  purposes  of 
Him  who  is  the  Supreme  Disposer  of  all  events. — Even  the 
arrangements  of  Divine  Wisdom,  M'ith  regard  to  the  economy 
of  the  lower  animals,  ought  not  to  be  overlooked  in  such  a 
survey.  When  we  consider  the  immense  number  and  variety 
of  animated  beings — that  there  are  500  species  of  quadrupeds, 
every  species  containing,  perhaps,  many  millions  of  indivi- 
duals ;  4000  species  of  birds  ;  2500  species  of  fishes  ;  700 
species  of  reptiles  ;  and  44,000  difl^erent  kinds  of  insects, 
besides  many  thousands  of  species  altogether  invisible  to  the 
unassisted  sight — when  we  consider  that  the  structure  and 
organization  of  all  these  diflJerent  species  are  different  from 
each  other,  and  exactly  adapted  to  their  various  situations  and 
modes  of  existence,  and  that  their  multifarious  wants,  in 
regard  to  food  and  habitation,  are  all  provided  for,  and  amply 
supplied  by  Him,  who,  at  the  same  time,  arranges  and  governs 
the  afl!airs  of  ten  thousand  worlds — we  must  be  lost  in  aston- 
ishment at  the  greatness  of  that  Intelligence  which  formed 
them,  and  at  the  exuberance  of  that  Bounty  which  spreads  so 
full  a  table  for  so  immense  an  assemblage  of  living  beings  I 
And  were  we  transported  to  other  worlds,  we  should,  doubt- 
less, behold  still  more  ample  displays  of  Divine  Beneficence. 
We  are  here  presented  with  a  striking  commentary  on  such 
passages  of  the  Sacred  Volume  as  these  :  "  The  eyes  of  all 
look  unto  Thee,  0  Lord  !  and  thou  givest  them  their  meat  in 
due  season.  Thou  openest  thy  hand  liberally,  and  satisfiest 
the  desire  of  every  living  thing.  The  earth  is  full  of  thy 
riches,  0  Lord!  so  is  the  great  and  wide  sea,  wherein  are 
things  creeping  innumerable,  both  great  and  small  beasts. — 
These  all  wait  upon  thee,  and  thou  givest  them  their  meat  in 
due  season.  That  which  thou  givest  them  they  gather  :  Thou 
openest  thy  hand,  they  are  filled  with  good." — "  0  Lord,  thou 
preservest  man  and  beast  !  How  excellent  is  thy  loving-kind- 
ness !  Therefore  the  children  of  men  shall  put  their  trust  under 
the  shadow  of  thy  wings  :  They  shall  be  abundantly  satisfied 
with  the  fatness  of  thy  house,"*  (of  the  table  thou  hast  spread 

*  This,  and  several  other  similar  passages,  may  be  considered  as  more 
especially  applicable  to  the  bounty  of  Providence  wliich  God  has  provided 
26 


S06  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

in  thy  world  for  all  thine  offspring,)  "and  thou  shalt  make  them 
drink  of  the  river  of  thy  pleasures."  One  excellent  practical 
effect  which  might  flow  from  such  contemplations  would  be,  to 
inspire  us  with  feelings  of  humanity  towards  the  inferior  order 
of  animals,  and  to  prevent  us  from  wantonly  and  unnecessarily 
torturing,  or  depriving  them  of  existence.  For  since  the 
Creator  and  Preserver  of  all  has  so  curiously  organized  their 
bodies,  and  fitted  them  for  the  different  regions  in  which  they 
reside,  and  so  carefully  provided  for  all  their  wants,  it  must  be 
His  will  that  they  should  enjoy  happiness  according  to  the 
extent  of  their  capacities  ;  and,  therefore,  they  ought  to  be 
considered  as  necessary  parts  of  our  sublunary  system. — 
Another  practical  lesson  we  may  derive  from  such  surveys,  is, 
to  place  an  unshaken  dependance  upon  God  for  our  temporal 
subsistence,  while  we,  at  the  same  time,  exert  all  our  faculties 
in  the  line  of  active  duty.  "  Blessed  is  the  man  who  trusteth 
in  him ;  for  there  is  no  want  to  them  that  fear  him.  The  young 
lions  may  suffer  hunger,  but  they  that  fear  the  Lord  shall  not 
want  any  good  thing." — He  who  decks  the  lily  of  the  vale,  and 
spreads  out  a  plentiful  table  to  the  fowls  of  heaven,  to  the 
beasts  of  the  forests,  to  the  creeping  insects,  and  even  to  the 
microscopic  animalcula,  will  never  fail  to  supply  the  necessary 
wants  of  those  who  "  do  His  will,  and  hearken  to  the  voice  of 
His  commandments."  And  if,  at  any  time,  we  be  found  des- 
titute of  daily  food,  and  pining  away  in  penury  and  squalid 
disease,  we  have  too  much  reason  to  conclude,  that,  in  one 
way  or  another,  either  our  deviation  from  the  path  of  recti- 
tude, or  our  distrust  of  Divine  Providence,  or  our  want  of 
prudence  and  economy,  has  procured  for  us  these  things. 

I  have  said,  that  it  is  chiefly  in  the  world  in  which  we  dwell, 
that  the  dispensations  of  Providence  can  be  distinctly  traced. 
But  we  must  nevertheless  admit  that  the  Care  and  Superinten- 
dence of  God  are  as  minutely  exercised  in  the  distant  regions 
of  the  universe  as  in  our  terrestrial  sphere  ;  though  we  are 
not  permitted,  at  present,  to  inspect  the  particular  details  of 
His  procedure  in  reference  to  other  orders  of  intelhgences. — 
We  are  not,  however,  altogether  ignorant  of  some  prominent 
features  of  the  physical  and  moral  economy  of  other  worlds, 

for  all  his  creatures.  The  practice  of  spiritualizing  such  passages,  as  it  is 
termed,  has  a  tendency  to  carricature  Scripture,  and  to  twist  it  from  its 
precise  and  sublime  references,  to  accord  with  the  vague  fancies  of  inju- 
dicious minds.  Tlie  Hteral  meaning  of  Scripture  is  always  the  most  appro- 
priate, emphatic,  and  sublime ;  but  it  may,  in  some  cases,  be  used  by  way 
of  accommodation,  in  illustrating  divine  subjects,  when  it  is  applied  with 
judgment  and  discrimination. 


RANGE    OF    DIVINE    PROVIDENCE.  307 

in  consequence  of  the  discoveries  of  modern  astronomical 
science. 

With  respect  to  their  jyhysical  economy,  we  behold  a  strik- 
ing variety  in  the  Divine  arrangement.  We  perceive  one 
planetary  world  surrounded  by  two  splendid  and  magnificent 
rings,  one  of  them  204,000,  and  the  other  184,000  miles  in 
diameter,  stretching  across  its  celestial  canopy  from  one  end 
of  the  heavens  to  another — moving  with  majestic  grandeur 
around  its  inhabitants  every  ten  hours,  and  diffusing  a  light 
equal  to  several  thousands  of  moons  like  ours — which  may  be 
considered  as  a  visible  and  permanent  emblem  of  the  Majesty 
and  Glory  of  their  Creator.  We  perceive  connected  with  the 
same  globe,  seven  moons  all  larger  than  ours,  of  different 
magnitudes,  and  placed  at  different  distances,  and  revolving  in 
different  periods  of  time  around  that  spacious  world.  The 
diversified  aspects  of  these  rings,  as  viewed  from  the  different 
regions  of  the  planet  at  different  times,  and  the  variety  of 
appearances  produced  by  the  alternate  rising  and  setting,  cul- 
mination, and  frequent  eclipses,  and  other  aspects  of  the  moons, 
must  present  to  the  inhabitants  a  very  grand,  and  varied,  and 
magnificent  scene  of  Divine  operation.*  On  the  other  hand, 
we  behold  another  planetary  globe,  destitute  both  of  rings  and 
moons,  but  which  has  the  starry  heavens  presented  to  view 
nearly  in  the  same  aspect  in  which  we  behold  them.  We  per- 
ceive a  third  globe  much  larger  than  them  both,  capable  of  con- 
taining 200  times  the  number  of  the  inhabitants  of  our  world — 
accompanied  in  its  course  with  four  moons  to  diffuse  light  in  the 
absence  of  the  sun,  and  to  diversify  the  aspect  of  its  sky.  In 
some  of  these  worlds,  the  succession  of  day  and  night  is 
accomplished  within  the  space  of  ten  hours ;  in  others,  this 
revolution  is  not  completed  till  after  the  lapse  of  twenty-four 
hours,  or  of  as  many  days.  In  some,  the  days  and  nights  are 
nearly  equal  on  every  part  of  their  surface,  and  they  have  little 
variety  of  seasons ;  in  others,  the  variety  in  the  length  of  the 
days,  and  the  vicissitudes  of  the  seasons,  are  nearly  the  same 
as  those  we  experience  in  our  terrestrial  world.  Around  some 
there  appears  a  dense  atmosphere,  while  others  are  environed 
with  atmospheres  more  rare  and  transparent.  Some  move  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  sun,  and  enjoy  an  abundant  efflux  of  light 
and  heat,  while  others  are  removed  to  the  distance  of  eighteen 
hundred  millions  of  miles  from  that  central  luminary.  Some 
finish  the  revolution  of  their  year  in  a  few  months ;  while  others 
require  twelve,  thirty,  or  even  eighty  of  our  years  to  complete 

i 
*  See  the  plate,  Fig,  7.  ■,:' 


308  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

their  annual  round.  Some  appear  adorned  with  majestic 
mountain-scenery,  and  others  seem  to  have  great  changes 
occasionally  taking  place  in  their  atmospheres,  or  on  their  sur- 
faces. There  are  four  planetary  bodies  lately  discovered, 
which,  there  is  every  reason  to  believe,  once  formed  the  corn- 
potent  parts  of  a  large  globe  ;  but  by  some  mighty  catastro- 
phe in  the  dispensations  of  heaven,  it  appears  to  have  been 
burst  asunder  into  the  fragments  we  now  behold.  If  the 
general  proposition  illustrated  in  Section  2.  of  the  preceding 
chapter  be  admitted,  such  a  fact  would  seem  to  indicate  that  a 
moral  revolution  has  taken  place  among  the  intelligent  beings 
who  had  orginally  been  placed  in  those  regions ;  and  that  their 
fate  was  involved  in  the  dreadful  shock  which  burst  asunder 
the  globe  they  inhabited;  just  as  the  fate  of  the  Antediluvians 
was  involved  in  the  shock  by  which  the  solid  crust  of  our 
globe  wa3  disrupted,  at  the  period  of  the  universal  deluge. 

These  are  some  outlines  in  the  economy  of  Providence 
which  we  can  trace  with  regard  to  the  arrangements  of  other 
worlds ;  but  beyond  such  general  aspects  we  are  not  permitted 
to  penetrate,  so  long  as  we  sojourn  in  tabernacles  of  clay. — 
But  even  such  general  views  afford  some  scope  to  the  contem- 
plative mind,  for  forming  enlarged  conceptions  of  the  Grandeur 
and  diversity  of  the  Dispensations  of  God,  in  the  worlds  which 
roll  in  the  distant  regions  of  space. 

With  regard  to  their  moral  economy — we  may  rest  assured 
that  the  prominent  outlines  of  it  are  materially  the  same  as  of 
that  economy  which  relates  to  the  inhabitants  of  our  world. — 
The  fundamental  principles  of  the  moral  laws  given  to  men, 
and  which  it  is  the  great  object  of  Revelation  to  support  and 
illustrate,  are,  "  Thou  shaJt  love  the  Lord  thy  God  with  all 
thy  heart  and  understanding,"  and,  "  Thou  shalt  love  thy 
neighbor  as  thyself."  On  these  two  commandments  hang  all 
the  Law  and  the  prophets. — Now,  we  must  admit,  from  the 
nature  of  the  Divine  Being,  and  from  the  relations  in  which 
rational  beings  stand  to  Him,  and  to  one  another, — that  the 
Creator  has  enacted  these  laws,  as  the  great  governing  princi- 
ples by  which  the  actions  of  all  intelligences  in  heaven,  as 
well  as  upon  earth,  are  to  be  directed.  For  the  Governor  of 
the  world  can  never  be  supposed  to  issue  a  law  to  any  order 
of  rational  creatures,  which  would  permit  them  to  hate  their 
Creator,  or  to  hate  those  whom  he  has  formed  after  his  own 
image.  Such  a  supposition  would  be  inconsistent  with  the 
eternal  rules  of  rectitude,  and  with  the  perfections  of  Deity 
— and  the  facts  supposed,  (if  it  could  exist,)  would  intro- 
duce confusion  and  misery  throughout  the  whole  intelligent 


RANGE    OF    DIVINE    PROVIDENCE.  309 

universe.  And,  therefore,  we  must  necessarily  admit,  that  the 
laws  to  which  I  now  advert,  are  binding  upon  all  the  rational 
inhabitants  which  exist  throughout  Jehovah's  dominions ;  and 
that  it  is  by  these  that  the  moral  order  of  all  the  Principalities 
and  Powers  of  Heaven  is  preserved  and  directed.  In  those 
worlds  where  there  is  no  change  in  the  succession  of  their 
inhabitants — or,  in  other  words,  where  there  is  no  death,  or 
where  they  are  not  produced  by  any  process  analogous  to  gen- 
eration, but  have  a  lixed  and  permanent  residence,  there  will  be 
no  need  for  moral  precepts  corresponding  to  the  fifth  and  the 
seventh  commandments  of  our  moral  law  ;  and  in  those 
worlds  where  property  is  common,  and  the  bounties  of  the 
Creator  are  equally  enjoyed  by  all,  there  will  be  no  necessity 
for  a  law  corresponding  to  the  eight  commandment ;  but  the 
general  principles  on  which  these  laws  are  founded,  will  be 
applicable  to  all  the  other  circumstances  and  relations  which 
actually  exist ;  so  that  the  principle,  and  spirit,  and  essence  of 
our  religion  must  be  common  to  all  the  holy  inhabitants  of  the 
universe.  And,  therefore,  it  will  follow,  that  every  intelligent 
being  that  is  animated  and  directed  by  such  principles  and 
affections,  will  be  qualified  for  holding  delightful  intercourse 
with  all  holy  beings  throughout  the  universe  of  God,  in  what- 
ever province  of  the  Creator's  empire  he  may  hereafter  be 
placed  ;  and,  to  qualify  us  for  such  harmonious  and  affection- 
ate intercourses,  is  one  great  end  of  the  Salvation  exhibited 
m  the  Gospel.  So  that,  although  we  cannot,  in  our  present 
state,  acquire  a  minute  and  comprehensive  knowledge  of  the 
moral  history  of  other  worlds,  of  the  special  interpositions  or 
manifestations  of  Deity  in  relation  to  them,  or  of  the  means 
by  which  they  are  carried  forward  in  moral  and  intellectual 
improvement — yet  we  can  trace  the  general  principles  or  laws 
which  form  the  basis  of  their  moral  and  religious  economy. — 
For  as  the  laws  of  optics,  and  the  principle  of  gravitation, 
pervade  the  whole  material  system,  as  far  as  the  universe  is 
visible  to  our  assisted  vision,  so  the  principle  of  supreme  love 
to  God,  and  sincere  affection  to  fellow-intelligences  must 
pervade  the  intelleclual  universe,  wherever  it  extends  ;  and, 
if  any  intelligent  agents  besides  men,  have  violated  these 
laws,  they  must  experience  pain,  and  misery,  and  disorder, 
analogous  to  those  which  are  felt  by  the  inhabitants  of  our 
apostate  world. 

Thus  I  have  endeavored  to  show,  that  the  combination  of 
Science  with  Religion  would  tend  to  expand  our  views  of 
Divine  Providence — in  the  various  arrangements  of  God,  in 
relation  to  the  human  race,  and  to  the  subordinate  tribes  of 

26* 


310  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

sensitive  beings — and  in  reference  to  some  of  the  prominent 
features  of  his  administration  in  distant  worlds.  And,  there- 
fore, though  the  Christian  ought  never  to  overlook  the  ways 
of  Providence  in  relation  to  himself,  and  to  his  spiritual  and 
domestic  concerns,  yet  it  would  argue  ai  selfishness  and  a 
sottishness  altogether  inconsistent  with  the  noble  and  expan- 
sive spirit  of  Christianity,  to  overlook  all  the  other  parts  of 
the  Theatre  of  Divine  Dispensations,  when  a  very  slight 
degree  of  labor  and  research  might  be  instrumental  in  unfold- 
ing them  to  his  view. 

IV. — The  connexion  of  Science  with  Religion  would  have  a 
tendency  to  induce  upon  Christians  a  spirit  of  liberality, 

OF  CANDOR,  a«rfo/ACCURACY  IN  JUDGING  OF  THE  OPINIONS 
AND  ACTIONS  OF  MEN,  and  of  THE  DIVINE  PROCEDURE  AND 
OPERATIONS. 

Who  is  the  most  Candid  and  Liberal  Being  in  the  Uni- 
verse ?  God. — And  why  is  God  to  be  considered  as  the  most 
Liberal  Intelligence  that  exists?  Because  he  embraces  a 
minute,  a  full,  and  comprehensive  view  of  all  the  circum- 
stances, connexions,  relations,  habits,  motives,  temptations, 
modes  of  thinking,  educational  biases,  physical  affections, 
and  other  causes  that  may  influence  the  sentiments  or  the 
conduct  of  any  of  his  creatures. — Who  among  created  intel- 
ligences may  be  viewed  as  endowed  with  these  qualities  in 
the  next  degree  ?  The  loftiest  seraph  that  God  has  created, 
who  has  winged  his  way  to  numerous  worlds,  and  taken  the 
most  extensive  survey  of  the  dispensations  of  the  Almighty, 
and  of  all  creatures  and  events. — Who,  among  the  sons  of 
men,  is  the  most  illiberal  and  inaccurate  in  judging  of  opinions, 
of  persons,  and  of  things  ?  The  man  who  has  lived  all  his 
days  within  the  smoke  of  his  father's  chimney,  or  within  the 
confines  of  his  native  village — who  has  never  looked  beyond 
the  range  of  his  own  religious  party — whose  thoughts  have 
always  run  in  one  narrow  tract — whose  reading  has  been 
confined  to  two  or  three  musty  volumes,  which  have  lain  for 
ages  on  the  same  smoky  shelf — who  cares  for  nothing  either 
in  the  heavens  or  the  earth,  but  in  so  far  as  it  ministers  to  his 
convenience,  his  avarice,  or  his  sensual  enjoyment — who  will 
admit  no  sentiment  to  be  true,  but  what  he  may  have  heard 
broached  by  his  parson — and  whose  conversation  seldom 
rises  beyond  mere  gossipping  chit-chat,  and  the  slanderous 
remarks  which  are  circulated  among  his  neighbors. — Such 
characters  are  entirely  unquaUfied  for  forming  a  correct  judg- 


EXPANSION    OF    INTELLECTUAL    VIEWS.  311 

hieiit,  either  of  the  sentiments  and  the  actions  of  men,  or  of 
the  Works  and  the  Ways  of  God  ;  for  they  are  completely 
destitute  of  the  requisite  data  whereon  to  form  a  rational  de- 
cision in  relation  to  either  of  these  subjects. 

It  may  be  admitted  as  a  kind  of  axiom,  in  our  estimate  of 
human  character,  that  in  proportion  to  the  ignorance,  and  the 
narrow  range  of  view  which  characterize  any  individual,  in  a 
similar  proportion  will  be  his  want  of  candor  and  his  unfitness 
for  passing  a  sound  judgment  on  any  subject  that  is  laid  be- 
fore him, — and  that  the  man  who  has  taken  excursions  through 
the  widest  range  of  thought,  accompanied  with  a  correspond- 
ing improvement  of  his  moral  powers,  will  always  be  the  most 
liberal  and  candid  in  his  decisions  on  the  moral  and  intellec- 
tual qualities  of  others.  To  these  maxims  few  exceptions 
will  generally  be  found. — In  forming  an  enlightened  judgment 
in  regard  to  any  action  or  object,  it  is  essentially  requisite, 
that  we  contemplate  it  in  all  its  different  features  and  aspects, 
and  in  all  its  minute  circumstances,  bearings,  and  relations. 
W^e  would  not  hesitate  for  a  moment  to  determine  who  is  best 
qualified  to  give  an  accurate  description  of  a  city, — he  who 
has  only  viewed  its  spires  from  a  distance,  while  in  rapid  mo- 
tion in  his  chariot — or  he  who  has  minutely  surveyed  all  its 
streets, lanes,  squares, public  edifices,  and  surrounding  scenery, 
in  every  variety  of  aspect ;  or,  who  appears  most  likely  to 
form  the  most  accurate  and  enlightened  judgment  in  relation 
to  any  particular  kingdom — he  who  has  just  skirted  along  a 
few  miles  on  one  of  its  coasts,  or  he  who  has  traversed  its 
length  and  breadth  in  all  directions,  and  mingled  with  every 
class  of  its  inhabitants.  On  the  same  principle,  it  must  be 
admitted,  that  he  who  has  viewed  religion  in  all  its  aspects 
and  bearings,  who  has  taken  the  most  extensive  survey  of  the 
manifestations  of  God,  and  of  the  habits  and  relations  of  men, 
is  the  best  qualified  to  pronounce  a  candid  and  accurate  deci- 
sion on  all  the  intellectual  and  moral  cases  that  may  come 
before  him. 

If  the  spirit  of  the  above-stated  sentiments  be  founded  on 
reason  and  on  fact,  it  will  follow,  that  the  more  we  resemble 
God  in  the  amplitude  of  our  intellectual  views  and  benevolent 
affections,  the  more  candid,  and  liberal,  and  accurate  will  our 
judgments  be  in  reference  to  all  the  actions,  objects,  and  rela- 
tions we  contemplate. — On  the  other  hand,  the  man  who  is 
confined  to  a  narrow  range  of  thought  and  prospect  is  con- 
tinually blundering  in  the  estimates  he  forms,  both  in  respect 
to  physical  facts,  to  general  principles,  and  to  moral  actions. 
He  forms  a  premature   and   uncharitable   opinion  on  every 


312  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

slander  and  report  against  his  neighbor.  He  condemns, 
without  hesitation,  and  throws  an  unmerited  odium  on  whole 
bodies  of  men,  because  one  or  two  of  their  number  may  have 
displayed  weakness  or  folly.  He  hates  and  despises  men 
and  their  opinions,  because  they  belong  not  to  his  political  or 
religious  party.  He  pronounces  his  decisions  on  the  motives 
of  men,  with  as  much  confidence  as  if  he  had  surveyed  their 
hearts  with  the  eye  of  omniscience.  He  cannot  hear  an  ob- 
jection against  his  flivorite  opinions  with  patience,  nor  an 
apology  for  any  set  of  principles  but  his  own.  He  is  arrogant 
and  dogmatical  in  his  assertions,  and  will  make  no  concessions 
to  the  superior  wisdom  of  others.  He  sets  himself,  with  vio- 
lence, against  every  proposal  for  reformation  in  the  church, 
because  his  forefathers  never  thought  of  it,  and  because  such 
"  innovations"  do  not  suit  his  humor  and  preconceived  opi- 
nions. He  decides,  in  the  most  confident  tone,  on  what  God 
can  and  cannot  do,  as  if  he  had  taken  the  gauge  of  Infinite 
Perfection  ;  and  he  frets  at  the  Divine  dispensations  when 
they  do  not  exactly  quadrate  with  his  own  humors  and  selfish 
views. 

With  regard  to  the  operations  of  the  Most  High,  he  also 
forms  the  most  foohsh,  and  vague,  and  contradictory  concep- 
tions. Tell  him  of  the  vast  dimensions  of  the  planetary  sys- 
tem, of  the  men  and  animals  that  live  on  the  opposite  side  of 
the  globe,  of  the  annual  and  diurnal  motion  of  the  earth — 
that  this  world  and  its  inhabitants  are  moving  through  the  re- 
gions of  space  many  thousands  of  miles  every  hour — that 
one  of  the  planets  is  so  large  that  it  would  contain  1400 
worlds  as  Spacious  as  ours — that  another  is  flying  through  the 
tracts  of  immensity,  at  the  rate  of  a  hundred  thousand  miles 
in  an  hour — and  that  light  is  darted  from  the  sun  with  a  velo- 
city of  195,000  miles  in  a  moment  of  time — he  will  stare  at 
you  with  astonishment  at  such  extravagant  assertions,  and 
will  sooner  believe  the  stories  of  giants  100  feet  high,  and  of 
fairies  that  can  enter  in  crowds  through  the  key-hole  of  his 
door.  Instead  of  frankly  acknowledging  that  "  He  is  igno- 
rant of  such  subjects,  and  of  the  grounds  of  such  conclu- 
sions,— that  those  who  have  studied  them  with  intelHgence 
are  best  capable  of  judging, — that,  if  true,  they  must  fill  us 
with  admiration  of  the  glory  of  God — but  that,  as  he  has 
hitherto  had  no  opportunity  of  examining  such  matters,  he 
must  suspend  his  assent  till  he  inquire  into  the  reasons  which 
can  be  given  for  such  amazing  deductions  ;" — instead  of  such 
concessions,  which  are  the  dictates  of  modesty  and  of  com- 
mon sense — he  will  tell  you  at  once,  without  hesitation,  and 


EXPANSION    OF    INTELLECTUAL    VIEWS.  313 

without  a  blush  at  his  presumptuous  decisions,  that  "  it  is  all 
extravagance,  and  folly,  and  idle  romance,  contrary  to  Scrip- 
ture, and  reason,  and  common  sense  ;"  and  will  not  hesitate 
to  brand  you  as  a  heretic,  for  endeavoring  to  break  loose  his 
intellectual  trammels  ! — thus  tacitly  declaring,  that  he  is  far 
better  qualified  to  pronounce  a  decision  on  such  topics,  than 
all  the  philosophers  and  divines,  and  all  the  brightest  geniuses 
who  ha.ve  appeared  in  the  world  for  ages  past ;  though  he  will 
at  the  same  time  admit,  that  he  never  gave  himself  the  trouble 
to  examine  into  such  matters  ! 

His  views  of  the  providential  dispensations  of  God  are 
equally  partial  and  distorted.  If  disease,  or  poverty,  or  mis- 
fortune, happen  to  his  neighbor,  especially  if  he  had  with- 
drawn from  the  religious  party  to  which  he  belongs,  it  is  con- 
sidered as  a  penal  judgment  for  his  error  and  apostacy.  If 
prosperous  circumstances  attend  his  family  or  his  religious 
party,  it  is  viewed  as  a  sign  of  divine  approbation.  He  seldom 
views  the  hand  of  God,  except  in  uncommon  occurrences ; 
and  then,  he  imagines  that  a  miracle  is  performed,  and  that 
the  wheels  of  nature  are  stopped  in  order  to  accomplish  the 
event.  He  seldom  looks  beyond  the  precincts  of  his  own 
church  or  nation,  to  observe  the  movements  of  the  Divine 
footsteps  towards  other  tribes  of  his  fallen  race.  He  over- 
looks the  traces  of  Divine  operation  which  are  every  moment 
to  be  seen  above  and  around  him — and  yet,  in  the  midst  of  all 
such  partial  and  contracted  views,  he  will  sometimes  decide 
on  the  Wisdom  and  Rectitude  of  the  ways  of  God,  with  as 
much  confidence,  as  if  he  hnd  entered  into  the  secret 
counsels  of  the  Eternal,  and  surveyed  the  whole  plan  of  his 
procedure. 

Such  are  a  few  prominent  outlines  of  the  character  of 
thousands  whose  names  are  enrolled  as  members  of  the  visi- 
ble church — whose  illiberality  and  self-conceit  are  owing  to 
the  contracted  notions  they  have  formed  of  God  and  of  Reli- 
gion. And,  surely,  it  must  appear  desirable  to  every  enlight- 
ened Christian,  that  every  proper  means  should  be  used  to  pre- 
vent rational  immortal  beings  from  remaining  enchained  in 
such  mental  thraldom. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  man  who  takes  an  enlightened  view 
of  all  the  works  and  dispensations  of  God,  and  of  all  the  cir- 
cumstances and  relations  of  subordinate  beings,  necessarily 
acquires  a  nobleness  and  liberality  of  mind,  and  an  accuracy 
in  judging  of  things  human  and  divine,  which  no  other  person 
can  possess.  He  does  not  hastily  take  up  an  evil  report 
against  his  neighbor ;  for  he  considers  how  unfounded  such 


314 


THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 


reports  often  are,  and  how  much  they  are  owing  to  the  insinua- 
tions of  envy  or  of  maUce.     And  when  he  can  no  longei 
doubt  of  an  evil  action  being  substantiated  against  any  one 
he  does  not  triumph  over  him  in  the  language  of  execration  ; 
for  he  considers  all   the  circumstances,  relations,  feelings, 
and  temptations  with  which  he  may  have  been  surrounded ; 
he  considers,  that  he   himself  is  a  frail  sinful  creature,  and 
might   possibly   have  fallen   in  a   similar  way,  had  he  been 
placed  in  the  same  situation.      He  does  not  trumpet  forth  the 
praises  of  a  man  who  has  performed  one  brilliant  benevolent 
deed,  as  if  he  were  a  character  to  be  admired  and  eulogized — 
while  the  general  course  of  his  life  is  marked  with  vice,  and 
an  utter  forgetfulness  of  God  and  Religion  ;  nor  does  he  fix 
a  stigma  of  immorality  upon  the  person  who  may  have  acted 
foolishly  or  sinfully,  in  one  or  two  instances,  while  the  general 
tenor  of  his  conduct  has  been  marked  by  purity  and  rectitude : 
for,  in  both  cases,  he  considers,  that  it  is  not  an  insulated 
action^  but  general  habits,  which  determine  the  character  of 
of  any  individual.     He  esteems  the  Wise  and  the  Good,  and 
holds  triendly  intercourse  with  them,  to  whatever  political  or 
religious  party  they  belong.     He  can  bear,  with  affability  and 
candor,  to  have  his  opinions  contradicted,  and  can  differ  from 
his  neighbor  in  many  disputed  points,  while,  at  the  same  time, 
he  values  and  esteems  him.     He  will  not  brand  a  man  as  a 
Heretic  or  a  Deist,  because  he  takes  a  view  of  some  dogmas 
in  Theology,  in  a  different  light  from  what  he  himself  does  ; 
for  he  considers  the  difference  of  habits,  studies,  pursuits,  and 
educational  prejudices  which  must  have  influenced  his  opi- 
nions ;  and  makes  due  allowance  for  the  range  of  thought  to 
which  he   may  have  been  accustomed.      He  is  always  dis- 
posed to  attribute  the   actions   of  others   to  good   motives, 
>vhen  he  has  no  proof  of  the  contrary.     He  uses  no  threats 
nor  physical  force  to   support  his  opinions,  or   to  convince 
gainsayers  ;  for  he  knows  that  no  external  coercion  can  illu- 
mmate  the  mind,  and  that  the  strength  of  arguments,  and  the 
force  of  truth,  can  alone  produce  conviction.     He   is  con- 
vinced how  ignorant  he  is,  notwithstanding  all  his  study,  ob- 
servations, and  researches,  and  presses   forward,  as  long  as 
he  lives,  to  higher  degrees  of  knowledge  and  of  moral  im- 
provement. 

He  is  an  active  promoter  of  every  scheme  that  tends  to 
enlighten  and  meliorate  mankind,  and  to  extend  the  knowledge 
of  Salvation  to  the  ends  of  the  earth  ;  for  he  considers  that  it 
is  not  by  miracles,  but  by  the  subordinate  agency  of  intelli- 
gent bemgs,  that  God  will  effectuate  the  illumination  and  the 


EXPANSION    OF    INTELLECTUAL    VIEWS.  315 

moral  renovation  of  our  apostate  race.  He  views  the  special 
agency  of  God  in  all  the  movements  of  the  Scientific,  the 
Religious,  and  the  Political  world,  and  perceives  Him  accom- 
plishing his  purpose,  in  the  inventions  of  human  genius,  and 
in  the  economy  of  the  minutest  insect,  as  well  as  in  the  earth- 
quake, the  storm,  and  the  convulsions  of  nations  ;  for  he 
considers  the  smallest  atom,  and  the  hosts  of  Heaven,  as 
equally  directed  by  Eternal  Wisdom,  and  equally  necessary  in 
the  universal  chain  of  creatures  and  events.  He  displays  a 
becoming  modesty  in  speaking  of  the  w-ays  and  the  works  of 
God.  When  he  meets  with  any  dark  and  afflictive  dispensa- 
tion in  the  course  of  Providence,  he  does  not  fret  and  repine, 
but  is  calm  and  resigned,  conscious  that  he  perceives  only  a 
small  portion  of  the  chain  of  God's  dispensations,  and  is, 
therefore,  unable  to  form  a  just  comparison  of  the  connexion 
of  any  one  part  with  the  whole.  When  he  contemplates  the 
depraved  and  wretched  condition  of  the  greater  part  of  the 
world,  at  present,  and  for  thousands  of  years  past,  notwith- 
standing the  salvation  which  has  been  achieved  for  sinners  of 
mankind,  he  is  far  from  arraigning  the  Divine  goodness  and 
rectitude,  in  leaving  so  many  nations  "  to  walk  in  their  own 
ways  ;"  for  he  knows  not  what  relation  this  dismal  scene  may 
bear,  what  influence  it  may  have,  or  what  important  impres- 
sions it  may  produce  on  worlds  and  beings  with  which  we  are 
at  present  unacquainted. 

He  is  cautious  in  pronouncing  decisively  respecting  the  dis- 
pensations of  God,  in  regard  to  the  universe  at  large.  He 
does  not,  for  example,  assert,  with  the  utmost  confidence,  as 
some  have  done,  "  that  there  never  was,  and  never  will  be,  to 
all  the  ages  of  eternity,  such  a  bright  display  of  the  Divine 
Glory  as  in  the  Cross  of  Christ."*  He  admires  and  adores 
the  Condescension  and  the  Love  of  God,  in  the  plan  of  Salva- 
tion, which  the  Gospel  exhibits,  and  feels  an  interest  in  it  far 
beyond  that  of  any  other  special  manifestation  of  Deity;  but 
he  dares  not  set  limits  to  the  Divine  Attributes  and  Operations. 
He  considers  himself  at  present,  with  regard  to  the  grand 
system  of  the  Universe,  in  a  situation  similar  to  that  of  a 
small  insect  on  one  of  the  stones  of  a  magnificent  edifice, 
which  sees  only  a  few  hair-breadths  around  it,  and  is  altogether 
incapable  of  surveying  the  symmetry,  the  order,  and  beauty 
of  the  structure,  and  informing  an  adequate  conception  of  the 
whole.  He  considers  that  he  has  never  yet  surveyed  the 
milUoneth  part  of  Jehovah's  empire,  and,  therefore,  cannot 


316  THE   CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

t*ll  what  the  Eternal  Sovereign  has  been  pleased  to  exhibit  in 
its  numerous  provinces  ;  and,  least  of  all,  can  he  ever  pre- 
sume to  dive  into  the  depths  of  interminable  ages,  and  boldly 
declare  what  the  Almighty  will,  or  will  not  do,  through  eter- 
nity to  come.  He,  therefore,  views  it  as  presumption,  while 
he  has  no  dictate  of  revelation  for  his  warrant,  to  pronounce 
decisively,  either  on  the  one  side  or  the  other,  of  such  a  deep 
and  important  question,  which  seems  above  the  reach  of  the 
loftiest  Seraph  to  determine.*  In  short,  he  endeavors  to  take 
a  view  of  all  the  manifestations  of  Deity  within  his  reach, 
from  every  source  of  information  which  lies  before  him,  and  as 
far  as  his  limited  faculties  will  permit.  He  does  not  call  in  ques- 
tion the  discoveries  of  science,  because  they  bring  to  his  ears 
most  astonishing  reports  of  the  Wisdom  and  Omnipotence  of 
Jehovah,  and  of  the  boundless  extent  of  his  Kingdom  ;  but 
rejoices  to  learn,  that  the  grandeur  of  his  dominions  is  actually 
found  to  correspond  with  the  lofty  descriptions  of  Divine 
Majesty  and  Glory,  recorded  in  the  volume  of  Inspiration, 
and  is  thereby  inspired  with  nobler  hopes  of  the  glory  and  feli- 
city of  that  heavenly  world  where  he  expects  to  spend  an 
endless  existence. 

If,  then,  such  be  some  of  the  features  in  the  character  of 
the  enhghtened  Christian ;  if  liberality  and  candor,  and  accu- 
rate investigation,  mark  the  judgments  he  pronounces  on  the 
sentiments  and  the  actions  of  men,  and  on  the  works  and  the 
ways  of  God  ;  and  if  such  views  and  feelings  ought  to  be  con- 
sidered as  more  congenial  to  the  noble  and  benevolent  spirit 
of  our  religion,  than  the  narrow  and  distorted  notions  of  a 
contracted  mind,  it  must  be  an  object  much  to  be  desired,  that 
the  mass  of  the  Christian  world  be  led  into  such  strains  of 
thought,  as  might  imbue  their  minds  with  a  larger  proportion 
of  this  spirit.  And,  if  diversified  and  occasional  discussions 
on  the  topics  to  which  we  have  adverted,  would  have  a  ten- 
dency to  produce  this  desirable  effect,  it  is  obvious,  that  such 
branches  of  knowledge  as  are  calculated  to  enlarge  the  capa- 
city of  the  mind,  and  to  throw  a  light  over  the  revelations  and 
the  works  of  God,  should  no  longer  be  overlooked  in  the  range 
of  our  religious  contemplations. 

*  See  Appendix,  No.  X. 


PIETY    AND    HUMILITY.  317 

V. — The  extensive  range  of  thought  which  the  diversified  oh- 
jects  in  JVature  present,  would  have  a  tendency  to  in- 
spire us  WITH  A  SPIRIT  OF  PIETY,  AND  OF  PROFOUND 
HUMILITY. 

It  is  owing,  m  many  instances,  to  want  of  attention  to  the 
impressive  displays  of  Wisdom  and  Omnipotence  in  the  mate- 
rial world,  that  our  pious  feelings  and  devotional  exercises  are 
so  cold  and  languid.  We  stalk  about  on  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  and  pass  from  one  day  to  another,  without  reflecting  on 
the  grand  and  complicated  machinery  around  us,  which  is  car- 
rying us  along  through  the  regions  of  space,  and  from  one 
portion  of  duration  to  another,  as  if  the  mighty  energies  of  the 
Eternal  mind,  exerted  in  our  behalf,  were  unworthy  of  our 
acknowledgment  or  regard.  How  few,  for  example,  reflect, 
when  they  open  their  e3^es  in  the  morning,  and  perceive  the 
first  beams  of  the  rising  sun,  that,  since  they  lay  down  to 
sleep,  the  Divine  PoAver  has  been  exerted  in  carrying  them 
more  than  four  thousand  miles  round  to  the  eastward,  in  order 
that  they  might  again  be  cheered  with  the  morning  light ;  and 
that,  during  the  same  period,  they,  along  with  the  earth  and  its 
vast  population,  have  been  carried  forward  476,000  miles  from 
that  portion  of  space  which  they  occupied  seven  hours  before  ! 
Or,  if  they  have  no  idea  of  the  motion  of  the  earth,  and  attach 
no  belief  to  such  an  opinion,  how  is  it  they  do  not  reflect  that, 
after  night  has  thrown  its  shades  around  them,  the  sun,  and 
ten  thousand  other  vast  globes  must  move  several  hundreds  of 
millions  of  miles,  before  their  eyes  can  again  behold  the  light  of 
day?  Either  the  one  or  the  other  of  these  cases  must  be  the  fact ; 
and,  in  either  case,  there  is  presented  to  our  view,  a  display  of 
the  Omnipotence,  and  the  Superintendence  of  Him  in  whom  we 
live  and  move,  which  demands  our  gratitude,  our  admiration, 
and  praise.  And  can  it  ever  be  supposed,  that  such  reflec- 
tions, combined  with  all  the  other  excitements  to  reverence 
and  gratitude,  will  not  tend  to  elevate  our  contemplations,  and 
to  raise  our  pious  feelings  to  a  higher  pitch  of  devotion  ? 
Whether  the  Psalmist  entertained  any  views  of  this  kind  when 
he  composed  the  ninety-second  Psalm,  we  cannot  certainly 
determine  ;  but  I  presume,  the  pious  and  contemplative  mind, 
when  awaking  from  the  slumbers  of  the  night,  under  such  im- 
pressions might  sing  the  first  part  of  that  song  of  praise  with 
peculiar  emphasis  and  delight — "  It  is  a  good  thing  to  give 
thanks  to  Jehovah,  and  to  sing  praise  to  thy  name,  0  thou 
most  High  !  to  show  forth  thy  loving  kindness  in  the  morning. 
For  thou,  Lord,  hast  made  me  glad  through  thy  work,"  (or  thv 

27 


318  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

powerful  energy  ;)   "  I  will  triumph  in  the  works  of  thy  hands. 

0  Lord  !  HOW  great  are  thy  works  !  and  thy  thoughts" 
(or  contrivances)  "  are  very  deep  !  A  brutish  man  knoweth 
not,  neither  doth  a  fool  understand  this." 

An  extensive  acquaintance  with  nature  and  science,  com- 
bined with  Christian  principle,  would  also  induce  profound 
humility.  The  man  who  has  made  excursions  through  the 
most  diversified  regions  of  thought,  is  deeply  sensible  of  the 
little  progress  he  has  attained,  and  of  the  vast  and  unbounded 
field  of  Divine  science  which  still  remains  to  be  explored. 
When  he  considers  the  immense  variety  of  sublime  subjects 
which  the  volume  of  inspiration  exhibits,  and  of  which  he  has 
obtained  but  a  very  faint  and  imp  nfect  glimpse — the  compre- 
hensive extent,  and  the  intricate  ^^'ndings  of  the  operations  of 
Providence,  and  the  infinite  number  of  beings  over  which  it 
extends — the  amplitude  and  magnificence  of  that  glorious  uni- 
verse over  which  Jehovah  presides,  and  how  small  a  portion  of 
it  hes  open  to  his  minute  inspection — he  is  humbled  in  the 
dust  at  the  view  of  his  own  insignificance  ;  he  sees  himself  to 
be  a  very  babe  in  knowledge  ;  and,  as  it  were,  just  emerging 
from  the  gloom  of  ignorance  into  the  first  dawnings  of  light 
and  intelligence.  He  feels  the  full  force  and  spirit  of  the 
Poet's  sentiments — 

"  Mvich  learning  shows  how  little  mortals  know," 
When  he  considers  the  comprehensive  extent  of  the  Divine 
law,  and  its  numerous  bearings  on  every  part  of  his  conduct, 
and  on  all  the  diversified  relations  in  which  he  stands  to  his 
God,  and  to  his  fellow  men  ;  and  when  he  reflects  on  his  mul- 
tiplied deviations  from  that  eternal  rule  of  rectitude,  he  is 
ashamed  and  confounded  in  the  presence  of  the  Holy  One  of 
Israel ;  and,  on  a  review  of  his  former  pride  and  self-conceit, 
is  constrained  to  adopt  the  language  of  Agur  and  of  Asaph — 
*'  Surely  I  am  more  brutish  than  any  man,  and  have  not  the 
understanding  of  a  man."     "  So  foolish  was  I,  and  ignorant^ 

1  was  as  a  beast  before  thee."  He  views  the  meanest  and  the 
most  ignorant  of  his  species,  as  but  a  very  few  degrees  below 
him  in  the  scale  of  intelligence,  and  sees  no  reason  why  he 
should  glory  over  his  fellows. 

This  sentiment  might  be  illustrated  from  the  example  of 
some  of  the  most  eminent  men  in  whose  minds  science  and 
religion  were  combined.  The  Honorable  Mr.  Boyle  was 
the  most  unwearied  and  successful  explorer  of  the  works  of 
God,  in  the  age  in  which  he  lived,  and  all  his  philosophical  pur- 
suits were  consecrated  to  the  service  of  Religion.  Among 
other  excellent  traits  in  his  character,  humility  was  the  most 


PIETY    AND    HUMILITY. 

conspicuous.  "  He  had  about  him,"  says  Bishop  Burnet, 
"  all  that  unaffected  neglect  of  pomp  in  clothes,  lodging,  furni- 
ture, and  equipage,  which  agreed  with  his  grave  and  serious 
course  of  life,"  and  was  courteous  and  condescending  to  the 
meanest  of  his  fellow  men.  "  He  had,"  says  the  same  author, 
"  the  profoundest  veneration  for  the  Great  God  of  Heaven 
and  earth,  that  ever  I  observed  in  any  person.  The  very 
name  of  God  was  never  mentioned  by  him  without  a  pause, 
and  a  visible  stop  in  his  discourse  ;"  and  the  tenor  of  his  phi- 
losophical and  theological  writings  is  in  complete  unison  with 
these  traits  of  character.  Sir  Isaac  Newton,  too,  whose 
genius  seemed  to  know  no  limits  but  those  of  the  visible  uni- 
verse, was  distinguished  by  his  modestij,  humility^  and  meekness 
of  temper.  He  had  such  an  humble  opinion  of  himself,  tnat 
he  had  no  relish  of  the  applause  which  was  so  deservedly  paid 
him.  He  would  have  let  others  run  away  with  the  glory  of  his 
inventions,  if  his  friends  and  countrymen  had  not  been  more 
jealous  of  his  honor  than  he  was  himself.  He  said,  a  little 
before  his  death,  "  I  do  not  know  what  I  may  appear  to  the 
world,  but  to  myself,  I  seem  to  have  been  only  like  a  boy  play- 
ing on  the  sea-shore,  and  diverting  myself  in  now  and  then 
finding  a  pebble  or  a  prettier  shell  than  ordinary,  whilst  the 
great  ocean  of  truth  lay  all  undiscovered  before  me." 

The  same  sentiment  might  have  been  illustrated  from  the 
lives  of  Bacon,  Locke,  Dr.  Boerhaave,  Hervey,  Nieuwentyt, 
Ray,  Derham,  the  Abbe  Pluche,  Bonnet,  and  other  eminent 
characters,  who  devoted  their  stores  of  knowledge  to  the  illus- 
tration of  the  Christian  system.  For  an  extensive  knowledge 
of  the  operations  of  God  has  a  natural  tendency  to  produce 
humility  and  veneration  ;  and  wherever  it  is  combined  with 
pride  and  arrogance,  either  among  philosophers  or  divines,  it 
indicates  a  lamentable  deficiency,  if  not  a  complete  destitution 
of  Christian  principle,  and  of  all  those  tempers  which  form  the 
bond  of  union  among  holy  intelligences.  Afler  the  attention 
of  Job  had  been  directed  to  the  works  of  God,  and  when  he 
had  contemplated  the  inexplicable  phenomena  of  the  Divine 
agency  in  the  material  world,  he  was  ashamed  and  confounded 
at  his  former  presumption  ;  and,  in  deep  humility,  exclaimed, 
"  I  have  heard  of  thee  by  the  hearing  of  the  ear ;  but  now 
mine  eye  see  thee ;  wherefore  I  abhor  myself,  and  repent 
in  dust  and  ashes." — In  accordance  with  what  has  been  now 
stated,  we  find,  that  the  most  exalted  intelligences  who,  of 
course,  possess  the  most  extensive  views  of  the  works  and 
providential  arrangements  of  God,  are  represented  as  also  the 
most  humble  in  their  deportment,  and  as  displaying  the  most 


330  THE    CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHER. 

profound  reverence  m  their  incessant  adorations.  They  "/o/^ 
doivn  before  him  who  sits  upon  the  throne  ;  and  cast  their 
crowns  before  the  throne,  saying,  Thou  art  worthy,  O  Lord,  to 
receive  glory,  and  honor  and  power ;  for  thou  hast  created  all 
things,  and  for  thy  pleasure  they  are  and  were  created." 
Their  moral  conduct  evinces  the  same  lowly  temper  of  mind. 
They  wait  around  the  throne,  in  the  attitude  of  motion,  with 
wings  outspread  readv  to  fly,  on  the  first  signal  of  their  Sove- 
reign's will ;  they  "  do  his  commandments,  hearkening  to  the 
voice  of  his  word,"  and  do  not  disdain  to  perform  important 
services,  in  our  wretched  world,  to  the  meanest  human  being 
who  is  numbered  among  "  the  heirs  of  salvation."  In  like 
manner,  were  ive  endued  with  the  grasp  of  intellect,  the  capa- 
cious minds,  the  extensive  knowledge,  and  the  moral  powers 
which  they  possess,  we  would  also  display  the  same  humble 
and  reverential  spirit,  and  feel  ashamed  of  those  emotions  of 
vanity  and  pride,  which  dispose  so  many  of  the  human  family 
to  look  down  with  contempt  on  their  fellow  mortals. 


If  the  leading  train  of  sentiment  which  pervades  this  volume 
be  admitted,  the  following  general  conclusions  maybe  ad- 
duced : — That,  in  conducting  the  religious  instruction  of  the 
young,  the  works  of  God  in  the  material  world,  and  the  most 
striking  discoveries  which  have  been  made  as  to  their  magni- 
tude, variety,  and  mechanism,  should  be  frequently  exhibited 
to  their  view  in  minute  detail ;  as  illustrations  of  the  attributes 
of  the  Deity,  and  of  those  descriptions  of  his  nature  and  ope- 
rations contained  in  the  Volume  of  Inspiration  ; — that  the 
books  put  into  their  hands  should  contain,  among  other  sub- 
jects, popular  and  striking  descriptions  of  the  facts  and  appear- 
ances of  nature  ; — that  seminaries  should  be  established  for 
the  occasional  instruction  of  young  persons,  from  the  age  of 
15  to  the  age  of  20  or  30,  or  upwards,  in  all  those  popular 
branches  of  natural  and  moral  science  which  have  a  tendency 
to  enlarge  the  capacity  of  their  minds,  and  to  expand  their  con- 
ceptions of  the  incessant  agency  of  God  ; — and  that  the  Minis- 
ters of  Religion,  in  their  public  instructions,  should  frequently 
blend  their  discussions  of  divine  topics  with  illustrations  de- 
rived from  the  scenes  of  creation  and  providence. 


APPENDIX; 


CONTAINING 


NOTES  AND  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


-oejoc^ 


No.  I.  p.  48. — Illustration  of  the  rate  of  motion  in  the  Heaven' 
ly  Bodies,  on  the  supposition  that  the  Earth  is  at  rest. 

The  distance  of  the  sun  is  about  95  millions  of  miles  ;  con- 
f=^quently,  the  diameter  of  the  circle  he  would  describe  around 
the  earth  would  be  190  millions,  and  its  circumference 
597,142,857,  which  forms  the  extent  of  the  circuit  through 
which  he  would  move  in  24  hours,  if  the  earth  were  at  rest. 
This  number  divided  by  24,  gives  24,880,952,  the  number  of 
miles  he  would  move  in  an  hour  ;  and  this  last  number,  divided 
by  60,  gives  414,682,  the  number  of  miles  he  would  move 
in  a  minute.  The  nearest  star  is  reckoned  to  be  at  least 
20,000,000,000,000  or  twenty  biUions  of  miles  distant  from  the 
earth ;  consequently,  its  daily  circuit  round  our  globe  would 
measure  more  than  125,000,000,000,000  miles.  This  sum 
divided  by  86,400,  the  number  of  seconds  in  a  day,  would  give 
1,454,861,111,  or  somewhat  more  than  one  thousand  four 
hundred  millions  of  miles,  for  its  rate  of  motion  in  a  second  of 
time — a  motion  which,  were  it  actually  existing,  would,  in  all 
probability,  shatter  the  universe  to  atoms. 

The  unlearned  reader  may,  perhaps,  acquire  a  more  distinct 
idea  of  this  explanation  from  the  following  figure  : 


27* 


322 


APPENDIX. 


Let  the  small  circle  A,  in  the  centre,  represent  the  Earth, 
and  the  circle  B  C  D  E  the  orbit  of  the  Sun,  on  the  supposi- 
tion that  he  moves  round  the  Earth  every  24  hours.  The 
line  A  B  will  represent  the  distance  of  the  Sun  from  the  Earth, 
or  95  millions  of  miles  ;  the  line  B  D  the  diameter  of  the  orbit 
he  would  describe  ;  and  the  circle  B  C  D  E  the  circumfe- 
rence along  which  he  would  move  every  day,  or  597  millions 
of  miles,  which  is  somewhat  more  than  three  times  the  diame- 
ter. If  the  line  A  F  represent  the  distance  of  the  nearest 
star,  the  circle  F  G  H  I  will  represent  the  circuit  through 
which  it  would  move  every  24  hours,  if  the  earth  were  at  rest. 
It  is  obvious,  from  the  figure,  that  since  the  stars  are  at  a 
greater  distance  from  the  earth  than  the  sun,  the  circle  they 
would  describe  around  the  earth  would  be  larger  in  proportion, 
and,  consequently,  their  velocities  would  be  proportionably 
more  rapid  ;  since  they  would  move  through  their  larger  cir- 
cles in  the  same  time  in  which  the  sun  moved  through  his 
narrower  sphere.     But  the  supposition  that  the  earth  is  the 


APPENDIX. 


323 


centre  of  all  the  celestial  motions,  and  that  the  different  stars 
are  daily  moving  around  it  with  different  velocities,  and  the 
slowest  of  these  motions  is  so  inconceivably  rapid — is  so  wild 
and  extravagant,  that  it  appears  altogether  inconsistent  with 
the  harmony  of  the  universe — with  the  Wisdom  and  Intelli- 
gence of  the  Deity,  and  with  all  the  other  arrangements  he  has 
made  in  the  system  of  nature. 


No.  II.  p.  72. — Experimental  Illustrations  of  the  Pressure  of 
the  Atmosjjhere. 

The  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  is  most  strikmgly  illustrated 
by  means  of  the  air  pump.  But  as  few  persons,  compara- 
tively, possess  this  instrument,  the  following  experiments, 
which  any  person  may  perform  at  pleasure,  are  sufficiently 
convincing  on  this  point.  Take  a  common  wine  glass,  and 
fill  it  with  water  ;  apply  a  piece  of  paper  over  the  mouth  of  the 
glass  ;  press  the  paper  to  the  rim  of  the  glass  with  the  palm  of 
the  hand  ;  turn  the  glass  upside  down  ;  withdraw  the  hand 
from  the  paper,  and  the  water  will  be  supported  by  the  pres- 
sure of  the  atmosphere.  That  it  is  the  atmospherical  pressure, 
and  not  the  paper,  which  supports  the  water  is  evident ;  for 
the  paper,  instead  of  being  pressed  down  by  the  weight  of  the 
water,  is  pressed  upward  by  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere, 
and  appears  concave^  or  hollow  in  the  middle.  If  the  flame  of 
a  candle  be  applied  to  the  paper,  it  may  be  held,  for  an  indefi- 
nite length  of  time,  close  to  the  paper,  without  setting  fire  to  it. 
The  same  fact  is  proved  by  the  following  experiment  : — Take 
a  glass  tube,  of  any  length,  and  of  a  narrow  bore  ;  put  one  end 
of  it  in  a  basin  of  water  ;  apply  the  mouth  to  the  other  end, 
and  draw  out  the  air  by  suction  ;  the  water  will  immediately 
rise  toward  the  top  of  the  tube  ;  and  if  the  finger  or  thumb  be 
applied  to  the  top  of  the  tube,  to  prevent  the  admission  of  air, 
and  the  tube  removed  from  the  basin  of  water,  the  water  in  the 
tube  will  be  supported  by  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  on 
the  lower  end.  Again  : — Take,  a  wine  glass,  and  burn  a 
small  bit  of  paper  in  it ;  and,  when  the  paper  is  burning,  press 
the  palm  of  the  hand  upon  the  mouth  of  the  glass,  and  it  will 
adhere  to  the  hand  with  considerable  force.  In  this  case,  the 
pressure  of  the  atmosphere  will  be  sensibly  felt ;  for  it  will 
sometimes  require  considerable  force  to  detach  the  glass  from 
the  hand. 

The  pressure  of  the  o.tmosphere  explains  a  variety  of  com- 
mon phenomena.     When  we  talve  a  draught  of  water  out  of  a 


324  APPENDIX. 

basin,  or  a  running  stream,  we  immerse  our  mouths  in  the 
water,  and  make  a  vacuum  by  drawing  in  the  air  ;  the  pres- 
sure of  the  atmosphere  upon  the  external  surface  of  the  water 
then  forces  it  into  the  mouth.  The  same  cause  explains  the 
process  of  a  child  sucking  its  mother's  breasts — the  action  of 
a  boy's  sucker,  in  lifting  large  stones — the  rise  of  water  in 
pumps — the  effects  produced  by  cements — the  firm  adhesion 
of  snails  and  periwinkles  to  rocks  and  stones — the  scarcity 
of  water  in  the  time  of  hard  frosts — and  the  fact  that  a  cask 
will  not  run  by  the  cock,  unless  a  hole  be  opened  in  some 
other  part  of  the  cask. 


No.  III.  p.  253. — On  the  means  by  which  it  may  probably  be 
ascertained  whether  the  JMoon  be  a  habitable  ivorld. 

About  six  years  ago,  the  Author  published,  in  the  Monthly 
Magazine,  a  few  observations  on  the  surface  of  the  Moon,  in 
which  a  few  remarks  were  offered  on  this  subject.  The  fol- 
lowing is  an  extract  from  that  communication  : — 

"  If  we  be  ever  to  obtain  an  ocular  demonstration  of  the 
habitability  of  any  of  the  celestial  orbs,  the  Moon  is  the  only 
one,  where  we  can  expect  to  trace,  by  our  telescopes,  indica- 
tions of  the  agency  of  sentient  or  intelligent  beings  ;  and  I 
am  pretty  much  convinced,  that  a  long  continued  series  of 
observations  on  this  planet,  by  a  number  of  individuals  in 
different  places,  might  completely  set  at  rest  the  question, 
'  Whether  the  Moon  be  a  habitable  world  V  Were  a  vast 
number  of  persons,  in  different  parts  of  the  world,  to  devote 
themselves  to  a  particular  survey  of  the  Moon — were  different 
portions  of  her  surface  allotted  to  different  individuals,  as  the 
object  of  their  particular  research — were  every  mountain, 
hill,  cavern,  chff,  and  plain  accurately  inspected — and  every 
change  and  modification  in  the  appearance  of  particular  spots 
carefully  marked  and  represented  in  a  series  of  delineations, 
it  might  lead  to  some  certain  conclusions,  both  as  to  her  phy- 
sical constitution,  and  her  ultimate  destination.  It  can  be 
demonstrated,  that  a  telescope  which  magnifies  100  times, 
will  show  a  spot  on  the  Moon's  surface,  whose  diameter  is 
1223  yards  ;  and  one  which  magnifies  a  thousand  times,  will, 
of  course,  enable  us  to  perceive  a  portion  of  her  surface, 
whose  size  is  only  122  yards  :  and,  consequently,  an  object, 
whether  natural  or  artificial,  of  no  greater  extent  than  one  of 
our  large  edifices,  (tor  example,  St.  Paul's  Church,  London,) 
may,  by  such  an  instrument,  be  easily  distinguished.     Now, 


APPENDIX.  325 

if  every  minute  point  on  the  Lunar  surface  were  accurately 
marked  by  numerous  observers,  it  might  be  ascertained 
whether  any  changes  are  taking  place,  either  from  physical 
causes,  or  from  the  operations  of  intelligent  agents.  If  a 
large  forest  were  cutting  down — if  a  city  were  building  in  an 
open  plain,  or  extending  its  former  boundaries — if  a  barren 
waste  were  changing  into  a  scene  of  vegetation — or,  if  an 
immense  concourse  of  animated  beings  were  occasionally 
assembled  on  a  particular  spot,  or  shifting  from  one  place  to 
another — such  changes  would  be  indicated  by  certain  modifi- 
cations of  shade,  color,  or  motion  ;  and,  consequently,  would 
furnish  a  direct  proof  of  the  agency  of  intelligent  beings 
analogous  to  man,  and  of  the  Moon  being  a  habitable  globe. 
For  although  we  may  never  be  able  to  distinguish  the  inha- 
hitants  of  the  Moon  (if  any  exist)  yet  if  we  can  trace  those 
effects  which  can  flow  only  from  the  operations  of  intelligent 
agents,  it  would  form  a  complete  demonstration  of  their  ex- 
istence, on  the  same  ground  on  which  a  Navigator  concludes 
an  unknown  island  to  be  inhabited,  when  he  perceives  human 
habitations,  and  cultivated  fields. 

"  That  changes  occasionally  happen  on  the  lunar  hemi- 
sphere next  the  earth,  appears  from  the  observations  of  Her- 
schel  and  Schroeter,  particularly  from  those  of  the  latter.  In 
the  transactions  of  the  '  Society  of  Natural  Philosophy,'  at 
Berlin,  Schroeter  relates,  that  on  the  30th  December,  1791, 
at  6  o'clock,  J),  m.  with  a  7  feet  reflector,  magnifying  161 
times,  he  perceived  the  commencement  of  a  small  crater  on 
the  south-west  declivity  of  the  volcanic  mountain  in  the  Mare 
Crmwwi,  having  a  shadow  of  at  least  2^^  5.  On  the  11th 
January,  at  20  minutes  past  five,  on  looking  at  this  place 
again,  he  could  see  neither  the  new  crater  nor  its  shadow. 
Again,  on  the  4th  January,  1792,  he  perceived,  in  the  eastern 
crater  of  Helicon,  a  central  mountain,  of  a  clear  gray  color, 
3'''  in  diameter,  of  which,  during  many  years'  observations, 
he  had  perceived  no  trace.  '  This  appearance,'  he  adds,  '  is 
remarkable,  as  probably  from  the  time  of  Hevelius,  the  western 
part  of  Hehcon  has  been  forming  into  its  present  shape,  and 
Nature  seems,  in  that  district,  to  be  particularly  active.' — In 
making  such  minute  observations  as  those  to  which  I  allude, 
it  would  be  proper,  along  with  an  inspection  of  the  moon's 
luminous  disk,  to  mark  the  appearances  of  different  portions 
of  her  dark  hemisphere,  when  it  is  partially  enhghtened  by 
the  reflected  light  from  the  earth,  soon  after  the  appearance 
of  new  moon.  These  researches  would  require  a  long-con- 
tinued series  of  the  most  minute  observations,  by  numerous 


326  APPENDIX. 

observers  in  different  regions  of  the   globe,  which  could  hi 
effected  only  by  exciting,  among  the  bulk  of  mankind,  a  ge 
neral  attention  to  such  investigations.     But  were  this  objec 
accomplished,  and  were  numerous  observations  made  fron'. 
the  tops  of  mountains,  and  in  the   serene  sky  of  southern 
climes,  where  the  powers  of  the  telescope   are  not  counter- 
acted by  dense  vapors,  there  can  be   little  doubt  that  direct 
proofs  would  be  obtained  that  the  Moon  is  a  habitable  world ; 
or,  at  least,  that  the  question  in  relation  to  this  point  would  be 
completely  set  at  rest." 


No.  lY. — Remarks  on  trie  late  pretended  discovery  of  a  Lunar 
Fortification. 

The  British  Public  was  lately  amused  by  the  announce- 
ment of  a  discovery  said  to  have  been  made  by  Professor 
Frauenhofer,  of  Munich.  This  gentleman  was  said  to  have 
discovered  a  fortifivcation  in  the  Moon,  and  to  have  distin- 
guished several  hues  of  road,  supposed  to  be  the  work  of  the 
lunar  inhabitants.  It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  say,  that  such 
announcements  are  obviously  premature.  To  perceive  dis- 
tinctly the  shape  of  an  object  in  the  Moon,  which  resembles 
a  fortification,  it  is  requisite,  that  that  object  be  of  a  much 
larger  size  than  our  terrestrial  ramparts.  Besides,  although 
an  object  resembling  one  of  our  fortifications  were  perceived 
on  the  surface  of  the  moon,  there  would  be  no  reason  to  con- 
clude, that  it  served  the.  same  purpose  as  fortifications  do 
among  us.  We  are  so  much  accustomed  to  vjar  in  our  ter- 
restrial system,  and  reflect  so  httle  on  its  diabolical  nature, 
that  we  are  apt  to  imagine  that  it  must  form  a  necessary  em- 
ployment even  in  other  worlds.  To  be  assured  that  a  fortifi- 
cation existed  in  the  Moon  for  the  same  purpose  as  with  us, 
would  indeed  be  dismal  tidings  from  another  world  ;  for  it 
would  be  a  necessary  conclusion,  from  such  intelligence,  that 
the  inhabitants  of  that  globe  are  actuated  by  the  same  princi- 
ples of  depravity,  ambition,  and  revenge,  which  have  infected 
the  moral  atmosphere  of  our  sublunary  world.  With  regard 
to  the  pretended  discovery  of  the  Lunar  roads,  it  may  not  be 
improper  to  remark,  that  such  roads  behooved  to  be  at  least 
400  feet  broad,  or  ten  times  the  breadth  of  ours,  in  order  to  be 
perceived  as  faint  lines  through  a  telescope  which  magnifies  a 
thousand  times  ;  which  is  a  higher  power,  I  presume,  than 
Frauenhofer  can  apply  with  distinctness  to  any  of  his  tele- 


APPENDIX.  327 

scopes.  It  is  not  at  all  likely  that  the  lunar  inhabitants  are  of 
such  a  gigantic  size,  or  employ  carriages  of  such  an  enormous 
bulk,  as  to  require  roads  of  such  dimensions,  since  the  whole 
surface  of  the  Moon  is  only  the  thirteenth  part  of  the  area  of 
our  globe. 

Schroeter  conjectures  the  existence  of  a  great  city  to  the 
north  of  Marius,  (a  spot  in  the  moon,)  and  of  an  extensive 
canal  towards  Hijgena,  (another  spot,)  and  he  represents  part 
of  the  spot  named  Mare  Imbrium,  to  be  as  fertile  as  the 
Campania.  See  Edin.  Phil.  Jour.  JVo.  21,  for  July,  1824. 
Similar  remarks  to  those  now  stated  will  apply  to  these  con- 
jectures of  Schroeter.  We  are  too  apt  to  imagine,  that  the 
objects  we  perceive  in  the  moon  must  bear  a  certain  resem- 
blance to  those  with  which  we  are  acquainted  on  the  Earth  ; 
whereas,  there  is  every  reason  to  believe,  from  the  variety  we 
perceive  in  nature,  that  no  one  world  resembles  another, 
except  in  some  of  its  more  prominent  and  general  arrange- 
ments. The  Moon  bears  a  general  resemblance  to  the  Earth, 
in  its  being  diversified  with  mountains  and  valleys  ;  but  the 
positions  and  arrangement  of  these  objects  in  the  Moon,  and 
the  scenery  they  exhibit,  are  materially  different  from  what 
appears  on  the  surface  of  the  terraqueous  globe. 


No.  V. — On  the  ideas  of  JVLagnitude,  JWotion,  and  Duration, 
as  expressed  hij  numbers.     See  pp.  93,  98. 

In  the  pages  referred  to,  and  other  parts  of  this  volume, 
some  very  large  numbers  are  expressed  in  figures.  Some 
readers  have  insinuated,  that  it  would  have  been  better  to 
have  expressed  such  numbers  in  u'ords.  The  Author,  how- 
ever, is  of  a  different  opinion  ;  because,  to  some  readers,  not 
much  acquainted  with  JVumeration,  a  thousand  trillions  would 
convey  nearly  the  same  idea  as  a  thousand  nonilions,  though 
the  one  number  contains  58  places  of  figures,  and  the  other 
only  22.  It  is  chiefly  the  number  of  figures,  or  cyphers,  in 
such  large  sums,  that  leads  us  to  form  a  comparative  estimate 
of  their  value  or  extent.  Our  ideas  of  magnitude  and  exten- 
sion, conveyed  by  such  numbers,  must,  of  course,  be  very 
vague  and  undefined.  If  we  have  been  accustomed  to  travel- 
ling, we  have  a  tolerably  clear  conception  of  a  hundred,  and 
even  of  a  thousand  miles  ;  but  we  have  no  clear  nor  adequate 
conception  of  a  body,  or  a  portion  of  space,  ten  hundred 
thousand,  ten  hundred  millions,  or  ten  hundred  billions  of 


328  APPENDIX. 

miles  m  extent.  The  mind,  however,  may  be  assisted  in  iis 
conceptions,  £ind  in  its  comparative  estimate  of  different  num- 
bers, by  fixing  on  some  particular  number  as  a  standard.  If, 
according  to  the  common  reckoning,  we  suppose,  that  5828 
years  have  elapsed  since  the  commencement  of  time,  the  num- 
ber of  seconds,  or  moments,  in  this  period,  will  amount  to 
183,913,782,212,  or  one  hundred  and  eighty-three  thousand 
nine  hundred  and  thirteen  millions,  seven  hundred  and  eighty- 
two  thousand,  two  hundred  and  twelve,  which  is  less  than  the 
fifth  part  of  a  billion.  If  the  distance  of  the  nearest  stars  from 
the  earth  be  at  least  20  billions  of  miles,  then  this  distance  may 
be  otherwise  expressed,  by  saying,  that  the  number  of  miles 
which  intervene  between  us  and  these  bodies  is  more  than  a 
hundred  times  greater  than  the  number  of  moments,  which 
have  elapsed  since  the  creation  ;  and,  by  a  similar  comparison, 
it  will  be  found  that  the  number  of  cubical  miles  within  the 
limits  of  the  planetary  system,  is  130,000,000,000,000,000, 
or,  one  hundred  and  thirty  thousand  billions  of  times  greater 
than  the  number  of  moments  in  5828  years. 

It  has  been  computed,  that  the  earth,  supposing  it  a  solid 
globe,  contains  about  30,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,- 
000,000,  or  thirty  septiUions  of  grains  of  sand,  supposing  a 
hundred  grains  of  sand  to  be  equal  in  length  to  an  inch,  and, 
consequently,  a  million  of  such  grains  for  every  cubical  inch. 
If  we  use  this  number  as  a  standard  for  estimating  the  number 
of  cubical  miles  contained  within  the  space  which  intervenes 
between  us  and  the  nearest  stars,  we  shall  find  that  the  num- 
ber of  cubical  miles  comprehended  within  this  space,  is  more 
than  ten  thousand  millions  of  times  greater  than  the  number 
of  the  grains  of  sand  contained  in  the  globe  on  which  we 
dwell. 

Though  the  human  mind  can  form  no  definite  conceptions 
of  such  numbers  and  magnitudes,  yet  it  may  be  useful,  occa- 
sionally, to  ruminate  on  such  subjects  ;  as  it  is  the  only,  or,  at 
least,  the  principal  mode  by  which  limited  minds  like  ours  can 
approximate  to  an  idea  of  the  infinity  of  the  Creator.  And  if 
an  image  of  infinity  is  presented  to  the  mind  in  the  spaces 
comprehended  within  the  limits  of  our  system,  how  overpow- 
ering the  conception  of  innumerable  systems,  to  which  ours 
bears  no  more  proportion  than  a  drop  of  water  to  the  mighty 
ocean  1  How  ineffably  glorious  must  be  the  attributes  of  that 
Incomprehensible  Being  who  pervades  every  part  of  this  vast 
universe,  and  who  continually  superintends  all  its  minute  and 
diversified  movements  ! 


APPENDIX.  329 

No.  VI.  p.  195.— 021  a  Plurality  of  Worlds. 

The  doctrine  of  a  plurality  of  worlds  is  now  admitted  as 
highly  probable  both  by  philosophers  and  by  enlightened  di- 
vines. But  it  has  been  admitted  by  many  persons,  on  grounds 
that  are  too  general  and  vague,  and  consequently,  a  full  con- 
viction  of  its  truth  is  seldom  produced  in  the  mind.  In  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  preceding  volume,  I  have  all  along  taken  it  for 
granted,  because  I  consider  it  as  susceptible  of  a  moral  demon- 
stration. — The  following  heads  of  argument,  were  they  fully 
illustrated,  would  go  far  to  carry  demonstration  to  the  mind  on 
this  subject :  namely,  That  there  are  numerous  bodies  in  the 
universe  of  a  bulk  sufficient  to  contain  myriads  of  intelhgent 
beings,  and  to  afford  them  enjoyment — that  there  appears,  in 
the  constitution  of  many  of  these  bodies,  a  variety  of  arrange- 
ments evidently  adapted  to  this  end — that,  in  relation  to  the 
planets  of  our  system,  there  are  many  circumstances  which 
bear  a  striking  resemblance  to  the  constitution  of  our  globe 
and  its  appendages  :  They  have  annual  and  diurnal  motions, 
moons,  atmospheres,  mountains  and  vales — that  light,  and 
heat,  and  color,  appear  to  be  distributed  throughout  the  regions 
of  immensity  ;  and  that  these  agents  can  have  a  relation  only 
to  the  necessities  and  the  happiness  of  organized  intelli- 
gences— that  every  part  of  nature,  so  far  as  our  observations 
on  the  surface  of  this  globe  extend,  appears  to  exist  solely  for 
the  sake  of  sentient  beings — that  this  doctrine  is  more  worthy 
of  the  Infinite  Creator,  and  gives  a  more  glorious  and  magnifi- 
cent idea  of  his  nature,  than  to  suppose  his  benevolent  regards 
confined  to  the  globe  on  which  we  dwell.  When  these  and  a 
variety  of  other  arguments  are  considered,  in  connection 
with  the  Wisdom  and  other  attributes  of  the  Deity,  they 
amount  not  only  to  a  high  degree  of  probability,  but  to  some- 
thing approaching  to  a  moral  demonstration.  But  to  illustrate 
these  arguments  in  a  minute  detail,  so  as  to  make  a  convincing 
impression  on  the  mind,  would  require  a  volume  of  a  consid- 
erable size.  The  Author  flatters  himself  he  has  some  original 
thoughts  on  this  subject,  which  may  probably  see  the  light 
should  the  present  work  meet  with  public  acceptance.  There 
is  no  work  in  our  language  which  takes  an  extensive  view  on 
this  subject,  in  connection  with  the  attributes  of  the  Deity,  and 
the  intimations  contained  in  Divine  Revelation.  Fontenelle's 
"  Plurality  of  Worlds,"  contains  a  number  of  ingenious  rea- 
sonings ;  but  he  treats  the  subject  in  too  light  and  flippant  a 
manner,  and  without  the  least  reference  to  a  Supreme  Intelli- 
gence.     The  celebrated  Huygens  in  his  "  Cosmotheoros,''^ 

28 


330  APPENDIX. 

instead  of  attempting  to  prove  the  doctrine  of  a  plurality  of 
worlds,  takes  it  for  granted,  and  indulges  chiefly  in  conjec- 
tures respecting  the  organical  structure,  and  faculties  of  their 
inhabitants. 

That  the  Scriptures  are  silent  on  this  head,  has  been  as- 
sumed by  some  as  a  presumptive  argument  that  this  doctrine 
is  without  a  solid  foundation.  I  have  already  endeavored  to 
show  that  this  assumption  is  unfounded,  (see  page  193.)  A 
plurality  of  worlds  is  more  than  once  asserted  in  Scripture, 
and  in  numerous  passages,  is  evidently  taken  for  granted. 
Celestial  intelHgences  are  represented  as  ascribing  "  glory, 
honor,  wisdom  and  power"  to  the  King  of  Heaven,  "  because 
he  hath  created  all  things,"  and  because  they  perceive  his 
works  to  be  "  great  and  marvellous."  But  if  all  the  great 
globes  in  the  firmament  were  only  so  many  frightful  deserts, 
destitute  of  inhabitants,  such  a  universe  could  never  inspire 
superior  intelligences  with  admiration  of  the  wisdom  of  the 
Creator.  For  wisdom  consists  in  proportioning  means  to 
ends  ;  but,  in  the  case  supposed,  there  would  be  no  proportion 
between  the  means  and  the  end.  The  means  are  indeed  great 
and  astonishing  ;  but  no  end  appears  to  justify  such  a  display 
of  creating  energy. — The  Psalmist,  when  he  contemplated  the 
heavens,  was  so  affected  with  the  idea  of  the  immense  popula- 
tion of  the  universe,  that  he  seems  to  have  been  almost  afraid 
lest  he  should  be  overlooked  amidst  the  immensity  of  beings 
that  are  under  the  superintendence  of  God.  "  When  I  con- 
sider thy  heavens — what  is  man  that  thou  art  mindful  of  him  !" 
There  would  be  no  propriety  nor  emphasis  in  this  exclama- 
tion, if  the  heavenly  orbs  were  devoid  of  inhabitants  ;  for,  if 
no  intelligent  beings  exist  besides  man,  and  a  colony  of  an- 
gels, it  would  not  appear  wonderful  that  the  Creator  should 
exercise  a  particular  care  over  the  one  half  of  his  intelligent 
offspring.  But,  if  we  conceive  the  universe  as  composed  of 
ten  thousand  times  ten  thousand  worlds,  peopled  with  myriads 
of  intellectual  beings  of  various  orders,  the  sentiment  of  admi- 
ration implied  in  the  passage  is  extremely  natural  and  em- 
phatic, and  conveys  to  us  an  impressive  idea  of  the  Intelli- 
gence, the  Benificence,  and  the  Condescension  of  the  Founder 
and  Governor  of  all  worlds. 


No.  VII.  p.  246. — On  the  first  Inventor  of  Printing. 

Mr.  Ireland,  in  his  "  Picturesque  Tour  through  Holland, 
Brabant,  and  part  of  France,  in  1789,"  gives  the  following 


APPENDIX.  331 

account  of  the  inventor  of  Printing,  when  describing  the  city 
of  Haerlem. 

"  Haerlem  claims  the  invention  of  the  art  of  printing.  It  is 
attributed  to  Lawrence  Koster,  an  alderman  of  this  city,  in 
1440  ;  whose  house  is  yet  standing  in  the  market-place,  oppo- 
site the  church.  Amusing  himself  one  day  in  the  neighboring 
wood,  with  cutting  the  bark  of  trees  into  the  letters  that  form- 
ed the  initials  of  his  name,  he  is  said  to  have  laid  them  on 
paper,  and  falling  asleep,  when  he  awoke,  observed,  that  from 
the  dew,  their  form  was  impressed  on  the  paper.  This  acci- 
dent induced  him  to  make  further  experiment :  he  next  cut 
his  letters  in  wood,  and,  dipping  them  in  a  glutinous  liquid, 
impressed  them  on  paper,  which  he  found  an  improvement ; 
and,  soon  after,  substituting  leaden  and  pewter  letters,  erected 
a  press  in  his  house  ;  thus  laying  the  foundation  of  this  noble 
art,  which  has  thence  gradually  risen  to  its  present  excellence. 
— The  art,  it  is  said,  was  stolen  from  him  by  his  servant,  John 
Faustus,  who  conveyed  it  to  Mentz,  and,  from  the  novelty  of 
the  discovery,  soon  acquh'ed  the  title  of  Doctor  and  Conjurer. 
The«original  specimens  are  now  shown  at  the  library  in  the 
Town  Hall.  The  first  is  on  a  leaf  of  parchment,  and  the 
second  and  third  on  paper,  printed  only  on  one  side,  and  the 

ooriier    loft   blank    for   capitaler      At  the  top  are  WOoden  CUtSj 

representing  the  creation,  and,  as  it  is  called,  Lucifer's  Fall." 
—pp.  109—111. 


No.  YHL  p.  254. — On  Telescopes ;  with  a  brief  notice  of  a 
New  Reflecting  Telescope,  constructed  by  the  Author. 

It  is  doubtful  to  what  particular  individual  we  owe  the  in- 
vention of  the  telescope.  Some  have  supposed  that  Roger 
Bacon  and  Baptista  Porta  invented  this  instrument.  Borelli 
ascribes  the  invention  to  Zacharias  Jansen,  a  native  of  Mid- 
dleburg.  Perhaps  the  account  given  in  the  article  to  which 
this  note  refers,  and  which  is  stated  by  a  variety  of  authors, 
may  be  as  probable  as  any  other.  It  is  certain  that  the  teles- 
cope was  not  in  general  use  until  the  beginning  of  the  17th 
century,  and  that  no  discoveries  in  the  heavens  were  made 
with  it,  till  the  year  1609. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  telescopes.  Refracting  and  Reflect- 
ing.  In  refracting  telescopes,  the  rays  of  light  pass  through 
convex  or  concave  glasses  or  lenses.  The  object-glass  is 
always  convex,  and  forms  an  image  or  picture  of  the  object 
in  an  inverted  position  in  its  focus  ;  which  image  is  viewed  by 
the  eye-glass  ;  and  the  magnifying  power  is  in  the  proportion 


332  APPENDIX. 

of  the  focal  distance  of  the  object-glass  to  that  of  the  eye- 
glass. The  focal  distance  of  a  convex  glass  may  be  ascer- 
tained by  holding  it  in  the  rays  of  the  sun,  opposite  to  a  piece 
of  white  paper,  and  measuring  the  distance  between  the  glass 
and  the  white  spot,  or  burning  point,  formed  on  the  paper. — 
An  Astronomical  telescope  for  viewing  celestial  objects  may 
be  constructed  with  only  two  glasses.  If  an  object-glass,  30 
inches  focal  distance,  be  fixed  in  the  end  of  a  tube,  and  an 
eye-glass  of  one  inch  focus  be  placed  at  the  other  end,  at  the 
distance  of  31  inches  from  the  object-glass,  a  telescope  will 
be  formed,  which  will  magnify  in  the  proportion  of  one  to 
thirty,  or  30  times  ;  that  is,  objects  seen  through  such  a  tele- 
scope will  appear  thirty  times  larger  in  diameter,  or  thirty  times 
nearer  than  to  the  naked  eye.  By  such  an  instrument,  the 
inequalities  on  the  moon's  surface,  and  some  of  the  satellites 
of  Jupiter  may  be  perceived  ;  but  when  directed  to  land 
objects  they  will  appear  inverted,  or  turned  upside  down.  In 
order  to  reverse  the  appearance  of  the  object,  two  other  eye- 
glasses are  required ;  or,  if  a  concave  eye-glass  of  a  similar  focus 
be  placed  at  29  inches  from  the  object-glass,  the  object  ^will 
appear  in  its  natural  position,  and  the  magnifying  power  will 
be  the  same  ;  but  the  field  of  view  will  be  much  smaller. — 
Astronomical  telescopes  of  this  construction  were  formerly 
made  of  120,  and  even  of  200  feet  in  length,  and  were  used 
without  a  tube  ;  the  object-glass  being  placed  on  the  top  of  a 
long  pole  ;  but  these  are  now  entirely  superseded  by  Achro- 
matic telescopes.  In  the  achromatic  telescope,  the  object- 
glass  is  compounded  of  two,  and  sometimes  of  three  lenses, 
placed  close  to  each  other,  one  of  which  is  a  double  concave 
of  white  flint  glass,  and  the  other  a  double  convex  of  crown 
glass.  By  this  means  an  image  is  formed  without  being  blend- 
ed with  the  prismatic  colors ;  and  it  will,  therefore,  bear  a 
much  greater  magnifyhig  power  than  a  common  refractor. — 
An  achromatic  telescope  four  feet  long,  will  magnify  objects  as 
much  as  a  common  refractor  100  feet  long. 

In  Reflecting  telescopes  the  images  of  objects  are  formed 
by  speculums  or  mirrors,  instead  of  lenses.  They  are  of  two 
kinds,  the  Gregorian  and  the  Newtonian.  The  Gregorian 
reflector  consists  of  a  tube  in  which  a  concave  mirror,  having 
a  hole  in  its  centre,  is  placed.  The  rays  of  light  from  distant 
objects  falling  upon  this  mirror,  form  an  image  before  it,  in  its 
centre  or  focus.  This  image  is  intercepted  by  a  smaller  mir- 
ror, which  reflects  it  back  through  the  hole  in  the  large  mirror, 
to  an  eye-glass,  through  which  the  observer  views  the  object. 
In  the  Newtonian  Reflector,  a  plane  mirror,  placed  at  an  anglo 


APPENDIX.  333 

of  45  degrees,  is  substituted  in  place  of  the  small  mirror  in 
the  Gregorian  construction,  and  the  observer  looks  down  upon 
the  object  through  the  side  of  the  tube.  Dr.  Brewster  has 
suggested  an  interesting  improvement  in  the  construction  of 
this  instrument,  which  is  described  in  The  Edinburgh  Ency. 
Art.  Optics,  p.  644. 


New  Reflector. — About  three  years  ago,  the  Author  com- 
menced a  series  of  experiments  on  Reflecting  Telescopes  ; 
and  has  lately  constructed  several  on  a  new  plan  and  princi- 
ple. In  this  construction,  there  is  no  small  speculum,  either 
plane,  convex,  or  concave ;  there  is  no  tube,  except  a  short  one 
of  two  or  three  inches  in  length,  for  holding  the  speculum. — 
The  observer  sits  with  his  back  to  the  object,  and  views  the 
image  formed  by  the  speculum  through  an  eye-piece,  which 
requires  to  be  nicely  directed  and  adjusted.  Three  or  four 
instruments  of  this  construction  have  been  fitted  up,  with 
specula  of  5,  8,  16,  28,  35,  and  49  inches  focal  distance. — 
One  of  them,  having  a  speculum  of  eight  inches  focus,  and  2 
inches  diameter,  with  a  terrestrial  eye-piece,  magnifying  about 
25  times,  forms  an  excellent  parlour  telescope  for  viewing 
land  objects,  and  exhibits  them  in  a  brilliant  and  novel  aspect. 
When  compared  with  a  Gregorian  of  the  same  size  and  mag- 
nifying power,  the  quantity  of  light  upon  the  object  appears 
nearly  double,  and  the  image  is  equally  distinct.  It  represents 
objects  in  their  natural  colors,  without  that  dingy  and  yellowish 
tinge  which  appears  when  looking  through  a  Gregorian. — 
Another  of  these  instruments,  having  a  speculum  of  28  inches 
focal  distance,  and  an  eye-piece  producing  a  magnifying  power 
of  about  100  times,  serves  as  an  excellent  astronomical  tele- 
scope. By  this  instrument  the  belts  and  satellites  of  Jupiter, 
the  ring  of  Saturn,  and  the  mountains  and  cavities  of  the 
Moon  may  be  contemplated  with  great  ease  and  distinction. 
By  placing  the  pedestal  on  the  floor  of  the  apartment,  when 
the  object  is  at  a  high  elevation,  we  can  view  celestial  phe- 
nomena with  the  same  ease  as  if  we  were  sitting  at  a  writing- 
desk  reading  a  book.  With  a  magnifying  power  of  about  40 
or  50  times  applied  to  this  telescope,  terrestrial  objects  appear 
extremely  bright  and  well  defined.  A  speculum  of  49  inches 
focal  distance,  and  6*  inches  diameter,  has  lately  been  fitted 
up  on  the  same  principle.  With  magnifying  powers  of  from 
100  to  160  times,  it  exhibits  distinct  and  interesting  views  of 
the  Moon's  surface,  and  of  the  ring  of  Saturn,  and  with  a 

28* 


334  APPENDIX. 

power  of  66  times  it  affords  a  beautiful  view  of  land  objec4v 
The  specula  used  in  these  instuments  are  far  from  being  good; 
being  of  a  yellowish  color,  and  scarcely  half  poUshed,  and 
having  large  holes  in  the  centre ;  as  they  were  originally  intend- 
ed for  Gregorian  Reflectors  ;  yet  the  brightness  of  vision 
approaches  nearly  to  that  of  xichromatic  Telescopes.  The 
experiments  which  have  been  made  on  this  subject  demon- 
strate, that  a  tube  is  not  necessary  for  a  Reflecting  Telescope, 
when  viewing  either  celestial  or  terrestrial  objects  ;  and,  there- 
fore, this  construction  of  the  instrument  may  be  denominated, 
The  Aerial  Reflector.  The  simplicity  of  the  construc- 
tion, and  the  excellence  of  the  performance  of  these  instru- 
ments, have  been  much  admired  by  several  scientific  gentlemen 
to  whom  they  have  been  exhibited.  A  Caveat  has  lately  been 
lodged  at  the  Patent  Oflice,  in  the  view  of  taking  out  a  Patent 
for  this  construction  of  Reflecting  telescopes  ;  and  a  more 
detailed  account  of  it  will  probably  soon  appear  in  some  of  the 
Scientific  Journals. 

In  the  System  of  Optics,  lately  published  in  the  Edinburg 
Encyclopeedia,  (one  of  the  most  luminous  and  comprehensive 
treatises  which  has  yet  appeared  on  this  subject,)  the  writer,  in 
his  introduction  to  the  account  of  Dr.  Brewster's  improve- 
ment on  the  Newtonian  Telescope,  remarks  : — "  If  we  could 
dispense  with  the  use  of  the  small  specula  in  telescopes  of 
moderate  length,  by  inclining  the  great  speculum,  and  using 
an  oblique,  and,  consequently,  a  distorted  reflection,  as  pro- 
posed first  by  La  Maire,  we  should  consider  the  Newtonian 
Telescope  as  perfect ;  and  on  a  large  scale,  or  when  the  in- 
strument exceeds  20  feet,  it  has  undoubtedly  this  character,  as 
nothing  can  be  more  simple  than  to  magnify,  by  a  single  eye- 
glass, the  image  formed  by  a  single  speculum. — As  the  front 
view  is  quite  impracticable  ;  and,  indeed,  has  never  been  at- 
tempted in  instruments  of  a  small  size,  it  becomes  of  great 
practical  consequence  to  remove  as  much  as  possible  the  evils 
which  arise  from  the  use  of  a  small  speculum,"  &c. — The 
instruments  noticed  above  have  effectuated  the  desirable  ob- 
ject alluded  to  by  this  respectable  writer;  and  the  principle  of 
the  construction  is  neither  that  of  Dr.  Hcrschel's  front  view, 
nor  does  it  coincide  with  that  proposed  by  La  Maire,  which 
seems  to  have  been  a  mere  hint,  which  was  never  put  into 
execution. 


No.  IX.  p.  257. — On  Steam  Navigation. 
The  appUcatioa  of  steam,  as  a  mechanical  power  for  impel^^ 


APPENDIX. 

ling  vessels  along  rivers  and  seas,  is  one  of  the  most  brilliant 
and  useful  achievements  of  art  which  distinguish  the  present 
age,  and  seems  destined  to  produce  an  important  and  interest- 
ing change  in  the  general  intercourse  of  nations.     From  the 
"Report  of  a  Committee  of  Parliament,"  published  in  1S22, 
it  appears,  that  the  first  application  of  steam  to  the  impelling 
of  vessels,  was  made  by  an  Englishman,  of  the  name  of  Hull, 
who,  in  1736,  obtained  a  patent  for  the  invention  of  a  Steam- 
boat, to  be  moved  with  a  crank  and  paddles.     But  it  was  only 
in  1807,  that  the  invention  was  fairly  brought  into  practical 
use,  by  Mr.  Fulton,  an  American,  who  had  the  assistance 
and  advice  of  Mr.  Bell,  a  Scots  engineer.     There  are  nowj 
according  to  Mr.  Perkins'  statement,  about  300  Steam-boats 
on  the  rivers,  bays,  and  coasts  of  the  United  States^  varying 
in  their  size  from  100  to  700  tons.     In  Britain,  the  first  suc- 
cessful application  of  steam  to  vessels,  was  made  by  the  above 
mentioned  Mr.  Bell,*  who  built  the  Comet  of  25  tons,  and 
four  horses'  power,  to  ply  on  the  Clyde.    There  are  now  reck- 
oned about  150  Steam-boats,  from  40  to  500  tons,  plying  on 
the  rivers  and  coasts  of  the  British  isles.      Glasgow,  which 
had  the  honor  of  introducing  steam  navigation  on  this  side  of 
the  Atlantic,  is  still  the  seat  of  its  greatest  activity.     Accord- 
ing to  a  statement  given  in  the  "  Edinburgh  Philosophical 
Journal,"  pubhshed  in  July^  1822,  there  v/ere  then  no  less 
than  36  Steam-boats,  of  various  sizes,  plying  on  the  Clyde. 
Some  of  these,  besides  performing  regular  voyages  to  Inve- 
rary,  Campbelton,  Belfast,  Liverpool^  and  other  places,  are  also 
performing  tours,  during  the  summer  months,  to  the  Giant's 
Causeway,  Staffa,  Skye,  and  other  ports  of  the  Western  Isles, 
and  to  Inverness  by  the  Caledonian  Canal.     Steam-boats  are 
also  plying  between  Aberdeen  and  Leith — between  Newha- 
ven  and   Aberdour,   Bruntisland,   Kinghorn,   Kirkaldy,    and 
Dysart  ;  and  to  Queensferry,  AUoa^  Grangemouth  and  Ster 
ling — between  Leith  and  London — Dover  and  Calais.     One 
has  been  plying  for  several  years  on  Loch-Lomond,  which  en- 
ables the  traveller,  at  a  small  expense,  to  take  an  interesting 
view  of  the  diversified  scenery  of  that  beautiful  lake.     Five 
are  just  now  plying  on  the  Tay  ;  two  of  which,  with  engines  of 
30  and  40  horse  powers^  and  fitted  up  with  elegant  accommo- 

+  It  is  much  to  be  regretted,  and  it  is  certainly  not  congenial  to  the  libe- 
ral spirit  of  the  age,  that  this  gentleman,  who  was  among  the  first  invent- 
ors of  steam  navigation,  and  who  has  done  so  much  to  promote  its  success 
in  the  neighborhood  of  Glasgow,  has  never  received  any  public  reward 
for  his  exertions,  and  has  been  left  to  sink  into  a  state  approaching  to 
poverty^ 


336  APPENDIX.    ' 

dation,  ply  daily  between  Perth  and  Dundee  ;  each  of  them 
during  most  of  the  summer  months,  transporting  nearly  a  hun- 
dred passengers  at  every  trip. 

Steam  navigation,  though  less  understood  on  the  Continent 
than  with  us,  is  now  beginning  to  make  considerable  progress. 
There  are  eight  Steam-boats  on  the  Garonne,  and  several  on 
the  Seine.  There  are  two  on  the  Lake  of  Geneva,  and  two 
are  about  to  be  established  on  the  Lake  Constance,  and  there 
are,  besides,  one  or  two  on  the  Danube.  It  is  likely,  that  in 
the  course  of  a  few  years  such  conveyances  will  be  estab- 
lished on  all  our  Friths  and  Rivers,  and  the  period  is,  no  doubt, 
hastening  on,  when  excursions  will  be  taken,  in  such  vehicles, 
between  Europe  and  America.  A  Steam-boat  of  700  tons 
burden,  and  100  horse  power,  has  sailed  regularly,  summer 
and  winter,  for  three  or  four  years,  between  New  York  and 
New  Orleans,  a  distance  of  2000  miles,  in  an  open  sea,  ex- 
posed to  great  storms  ;  and,  by  many,  she  is  preferred  to  the 
packets,  not  only  for  the  certainty  of  making  shorter  voyages, 
but  on  account  of  greater  safety.  In  America,  steam  vessels 
are  fitted  up  with  every  accommodation  and  elegancy  which 
art  can  devise  ;  so  as  to  produce,  if  possible,  as  great  a  vari- 
ety of  enjoyment  to  passengers  on  sea,  as  on  land.  Mr. 
Church,  the  American  Consul  in  France,  has  invented  a  pad- 
dle, which  revolves  on  the  paddle  wheel,  by  very  simple 
mechanism,  which  is  found  to  save  power.  In  the  United 
States,  a  new  mode  of  constructing  cabins  has  been  lately  in- 
troduced, so  as  to  place  them  beyond  the  reach  of  injury  from 
explosions  of  the  boiler.  A  steam  vessel  of  a  large  size  has 
lately  been  fitted  up,  which  is  intended  to  sail  between  Lon- 
don and  Calcutta. 

"  Steam  vessels  have  been  built  in  this  country  from  10  to 
500  tons,  and  from  3  or  4  to  110  horse  power.  The  length 
of  the  City  of  Edinburgh,  on  the  upper  deck,  is  143  feet ;  and 
some  have  lately  been  constructed  of  still  larger  dimensions. 
The  American  steam-boats  are  larger  than  ours,  and  are  much 
more  used  for  the  conveyance  of  merchandise.  The  Fron- 
tinac,  which  plies  on  the  Canadian  side  of  Lake  Ontario,  is 
170  feet  long  on  deck,  and  32  feet  broad  ;  and  the  Chancel- 
lor Livingston,  which  plies  on  the  Hudson,  is  of  the  same 
size.  The  velocity  aimed  at  is  generally  8  or  9  miles  an 
hour.  The  proportion  is,  on  an  average,  about  one  horse 
power  for  every  four  tons  of  burden,  computed  in  the  usual 
way.  The  velocity  is  found  to  be  nearly  as  the  square  root  of 
the  power,  so  that  an  SO  horse  power  engine  will  produce  only 
twice  the  velocity  of  one  of  20  horse  power.     Something 


APPENDIX.  337 

depends  also  on  the  make  and  size  of  the  vessel.  The  "  Sover- 
eign," of  210  tons,  and  80  horse  power,  goes  9|  miles  an 
hour  in  still  water  ;  and  the  "  James  Watt,"  of  448  tons,  and 
100  horse  power,  is  stated  to  go  ten  miles.  For  the  paddle- 
boards,  the  rule  is,  that  3-lOths  of  a  square  foot  of  surface 
should  be  immersed  in  the  water  for  each  horse  power.  The 
paddle  wheels  vary  from  10  to  15  feet  in  diameter,  dip  from 
12  to  20  inches  in  the  water,  and  have  about  one  foot  in 
breadth  for  each  10  horse  pov/er.  Mr.  Gladstone  affirms,  that 
so  much  power  is  wasted  in  displacing  the  water  by  the  stroke 
of  the  board,  that  the  velocity  of  the  ship  is  only  about  one 
half  of  that  of  the  outer  surface  of  the  paddle-wheel. 

"  There  are  two  sources  of  apprehension  in  steam-boats — 
fire,  and  the  bursting  of  the  boiler.  With  regard  to  the  latter, 
when  the  boiler  is  of  low  pressure,  it  is  satisfactorily  estabhsh- 
ed  that  not  the  smallest  danger  exists.  And  in  the  best  con- 
structed vessels,  the  danger  from  fire  is  completely  obviated, 
by  separating  the  furnace  from  the  sides  of  the  vessels  by  five 
inches  of  water." — The  poM^er  of  steam  is  now  rendered  sub- 
servient to  the  breaking  of  stones  for  the  construction  of  roads. 
The  stones  are  put  into  a  kind  of  hopper  above,  and  pushed 
down  with  a  rake,  and  the  machine  is  worked  by  a  rotatory 
motion  of  one  horse  power ;  and  will  break  a.  ton  of  hard  peb- 
bles, completely,  in  from  six  to  eight  minutes.  A  steam  ma- 
chine has  also  been  invented  for  the  dressing  of  woollen  cloth, 
which  does  as  much  work  in  50  minutes  as  two  men  could  do 
in  two  days.  Mon.  Mag.  Aug.  1823,  p.  71. — A  steam  car- 
riage, for  conveying  goods  and  passengers  on  land,  was  lately 
constructing  by  Mr.  Griffiths.  Its  rate  of  motion,  on  common 
roads  is  estimated  at  five  miles  an  hour,  at  an  average  ;  about 
three  miles  when  going  up-hill,  and  above  seven  when  running 
down.  But  pecuniary  embarrassments,  or  other  impediments, 
have,  hitherto,  prevented  the  completion  of  his  design. 

Mr.  Perkins  has  lately  made  improvements  on  the  steam- 
engine,  which  promise  to  carry  its  powers  to  a  high  degree  of 
perfection.  The  engine  he  has  lately  constructed  is  calculated 
to  a  ten  horse  power,  though  the  cylinder  is  no  more  than  two 
inches  in  diameter,  and  18  inches  long,  with  a  stroke  of  only 
12  inches.  Although  the  space  occupied  by  the  engine  is  not 
more  than  six  feet  by  eight,  yet  Mr.  P.  considers  the  appara- 
tus (with  the  exception  of  the  working  cylinder  and  piston)  is 
perfectly  sufficient  for  a  thirty  horse  engine.  "When  the  en- 
gine performs  full  work,  it  consumes  only  two  bushels  of  coal 
in  the  day.  Mr.  Perkins  has  also  announced  a  discovery  still 
more  e^^traordinary,  viz.  that  he  has  been  able  "  to  arrest  the 


338  APPENDIX. 

heat,  after  it  has  performed  its  mechanical  functions,  and  ac- 
tually pump  it  back  to  the  generator,  to  unite  with  a  fresh  por- 
tion of  water,  and  renew  its  useful  labors."  A  particular 
account  of  Perkins'  engine,  accompanied  with  an  engraving, 
is  given  in  the  Edin.  Philos.  Journal,  No.  17,  for  July  1823. 
The  pretensions  of  Mr.  Perkins,  however,  have  not  yet  been 
so  fully  substantiated  by  experiment  as  to  satisfy  the  anxious 
expectation  of  the  public. 

An  interesting  Report  has  lately  been  published  of  a  series 
of  experiments,  made  with  a  new  steam  engine,  invented  by  an 
American  machinist,  called  the  capillanj  steam  engine.  Three 
great  objects  are  said  to  be  accomplished  by  this  invention, 
lightness,  safety,  and  economy  of  f net.  In  an  engine  calcu- 
lated for  a  four  horse  power,  the  generator,  is  formed  of  a  cop- 
per tube  i  inch  in  diameter,  and  100  feet  long,  which  weighs 
about  16  lbs.  It  is  arranged  in  coils,  one  above  another,  in 
the  form  of  a  sugar  loaf,  30  inches  high  ;  the  bottom  coil 
being  18  inches  in  diameter,  and  the  top  one  considerably  less. 
The  wood  is  prepared  as  is  usual  for  a  stove,  and  put  within 
the  coils.  The  steam  cylinder  is  formed  of  sheet  copper,  three 
inches  in  diameter,  27  inches  in  stroke,  and,  with  all  its  append- 
ages, weighs  about  25  lbs.  It  has  been  ascertained,  that  the  ge- 
nerator dnd  maiu  cylinder,  with  their  contents  and  appendages, 
exclusive  of  fuel,  need  not  weigh  more  than  20  lbs.  to  the 
horse  power.  JVo  harm  can  be  done  by  the  bursting  of  boilers 
■ — even  a  safety-valve  is  considered  as  useless.  In  the  course 
of  the  experiments,  the  experimenters  several  times  burst  the 
tube  ;  but,  so  far  from  doing  any  injury,  it  could  not  always  be 
perceived  by  the  spectators.  To  ascertain  what  may  be  done 
towards  aerial  navigation,  by  steam,  experiments  were  made 
on  the  power  of  wings  in  the  air,  and  on  the  power  necessary 
to  work  them.  The  result  is,  that  it  requires  a  horse  power  to 
carry  30  lbs.  in  the  air  ;  so  that  a  flying  engine,  to  be  worked 
by  charcoal,  would  weigh  about  30  lbs.  to  the  horse  power, 
wings,  condenser  and  fuel  included.  It  was  also  ascertained  by 
experiments  and  calculations,  that  a  balloon  could  be  made  to 
carry  a  man  with  an  engine,  which  would  push  it  at  the  rate  of 
15  miles  an  hour  in  the  air.  A  more  particular  detail  of  these 
experiments  may  be  seen  in  the  "  London  Mechanic's  Maga- 
zine," No.  60,  for  16th  October,  1824. 

No.  X.  p.  316. — Strictures  on  a  certain  sentiment  respecting 
the  Work  of  Human  Redemption. 
The   sentiment  referred  to  in  this  paragraph,  "  That  there 
never  was,  nor  ever  will  be,  through  all  the  ages  of  eternity, 


APPENDIX.  o39 

SO  wonderful  a  display  of  the  Divine  gloiy,  as  in  the  cross  of 
Christ,"  has  been  reiterated  a  thousand  times,  in  sermons  and 
in  systems  of  divinity,  and  is  still  repeated  by  certain  preachers 
as  if  it  were  an  incontrovertible  axiom,  which  ought  never  to 
be  called  in  question  ;  and  is,  no  doubt,  intended  to  magnify 
the  Divine  attributes,  and  the  work  of  redemption.*  But  it  is 
nothing  more  than  a  presumptuous  assumption,  which  has  a 
tendency  to  limit  the  perfections  of  Deity,  and  to  present  a 
partial  and  distorted  view  of  the  economy  of  human  redemp- 
tion. For,  in  the  first  place,  it  has  no  foundation  in  Scrip- 
ture. There  is  not  a  single  passage  from  which  it  can  be 
legitimately   deduced.     The   onus  'prohandi,  on  this   point, 

*  It  is  not  important  to  determine  how  often  the  sentiment  here  ex- 
pressed has  been  "  reiterated  in  sermons  and  systems  of  Divinity."  We 
cannot,  however,  beheve  that  it  has  been  repeated  with  the  same  frequen- 
cy, as  the  author's  language  seems  to  imply.  That  there  are  instances, 
in  which  it  was  designed  to  express  all  the  meaning  here  attributed  to  it, 
cannot  be  denied.  But  why  may  it  not  have  been  sometimes  used  to  dis- 
tinguish the  work  of  mediation  ti'om  all  the  other  favors,  which  God  has 
conferred  on  our  race  ?  In  his  History  of  R.edemption,  p.  342,  President 
Edwards  says,  "  from  what  has  been  said,  one  may  argue,  that  the  work 
of  Redemption  is  the  greatest  of  all  God's  works,  of  which  we  have  any 
notice,  and  it  is  the  end  of  all  his  other  woi-ks."  This  view  of  the  subject 
accords  with  the  scriptures.  Though  it  cannot  be  asserted,  that  in  a 
single  instance  they  directly  affirm  the  work  of  redemption  to  be  the 
greatest  of  all  the  works  of  God,  yet  they  give  it  such  an  importance  and 
prominency,  as  are  conceded  to  no  other  of  His  dispensations.  In  this 
light  the  Apostles  seem  to  have  regarded  it.  Paul  counted  all  the  distinc- 
tions and  honors  and  advantages,  which  he  had  acquired  amongst  the 
Jews,  as  loss  in  comparison  with  the  glory  of  the  Gospel.  He  went  even 
farther.  He  declared  that  he  counted  ALL  THINGS  but  loss  for  the 
excellency  of  the  knowledge  of  Christ  Jesus  his  Lord.  In  this  view  of  the 
subject  there  is  no  presumption  and  no  limitation  of  the  "  divine  perfec- 
tions and  operations."  It  has  no  tendency  either  to  damp  the  hopes,  or 
obscure  the  prospects  of  immortal  beings. 

On  the  other  hand  who,  that  is  not  presumptuous  beyond  endurance, 
will  suppose,  that  he  now  understands  the  full  extent  of  the  love  of  Christ 
and  Its  bearings  on  all  the  other  divine  operations  ?  Who  will  dare  to 
assert,  that  this  theme  will  not  be  sufficient  forever  to  employ  the  medita- 
tions and  the  songs  of  the  redeemed  ?  Has  any  one  ascertained,  that  it  is 
so  limited,  as  to  be  soon  exhausted  ?  On  these  topics  the  author  is  hap- 
pily silent;  or  rather  he  "pronounces  nothing  decisively;"  but  affirms, 
that  were  he  "  to  hazard  a  conjecture,"  he  should  say,  "  that  the  converse 
of  the  proposition"  under  consideration  "  is  true."  But  for  ourselves 
"  we  feel  chained  down  to  an  obscure  corner  of  God's  domains,"  and  pos- 
sess no  light  except  that  which  he  has  given  us.  In  our  present  condition 
we  dare  not  launch  with  the  author  into  the  ocean  of  conjecture.  Guided 
by  the  revelation  which  God  has  made,  we  are  compelled  to  regard  tlie 
work  of  Redemption  as  the  greatest  of  all  the  divine  works  of  which  we 
have  any  knowledge  ;  and  we  are  satisfied,  that  the  developement  of  the 
relations  and  bearings  and  effects  of  this  stupendous  work  will  be  suffi- 
cient to  employ  all  our  powers  of  comprehension,  and  ever  to  minister  to 
us  new  and  constant  delight.  Am.  Editor. 


340  APPENDIX. 

rests  with  those  who  make  the  assertion.     A  gentleman,  when 
lately  conversing  on  this  subject,  brought  forward  the  follow- 
ing interrogation,  as  a  demonstrative  argument  in  proof  of 
the  position  in  question  :  "  Is  not  Redemption  declared  in 
Scripture  to  be  the  chief  of  all  the  icorls  of  God  ?"  but  he 
was   not  a  little  surprised,  when  he  was  informed,  that  the 
passage  which  he  had  partly  misquoted,  is   applied  to  the 
Behemoth  or  the  Elephant,  as  stated  in  Job,  xl.  19. — 2dly, 
the  assertion  is  as  presumptuous  as  it  is  unfounded.     It  takes 
for  granted,  that  we  know  all  the  events  which  have  already 
happened,  and  which  are  now  taking  place  throughout  the 
whole  range  of  God's  Universal  Empire.     This  empire  ap- 
pears unbounded ;  and  that  portion  of  it  which  we  can  mi- 
nutely explore,  is  but  as  a  point  in  comparison  of  the  whole. 
But  before  we  can,  on  good  grounds,  hazard  such  an  assertion 
as  that  under  consideration,  we  must  have  explored  all  the 
dispensations   of    God,   through   every  portion   of   his  vast 
dominions  ;  and  be  able  to  form  a  comparison  between  the 
different  displays  of  Divine  glory,  nlade  to  all  the  different 
classes  of  intellectual  beings,  under  the  government  of  the 
Creator.     And  who,  among  the  sons  of  Adam,  can  lay  claim 
to  such  high  quahfications  for  pronouncing  so  sweeping  a  de- 
cision on  this  point  1     3dly,  It  sets  limits  to  the  Divine  per- 
fections and  ojjerations.     For  although  it  could  be  proved, 
(which  it  cannot  be,)  that  no  such  displays  have  hitherto  been 
made  to  any  other  beings,  yet  who  can  take  upon  him  to 
assert,  that  displays  of  Divine  perfection  far  more  glorious 
and  astonishing,  will  not  be  exhibited  during  the  countless 
ages  of  eternity  which  are  yet  to  come  1     To  set  limits  to  the 
operations  of  Almighty  Power  and  Boundless  Benevolence, 
during  the  lapse  of  infinite  duration,  is  not  the  province  of  any 
created  intelligence,  and  far  less  of  man,  who  stands  so  low 
in  the  scale  of  universal  being.     4thly,  It  tends  to  damp  the 
hopes  and  prospects  of  immortal  beings,  when  looking  forward 
to  an  interminable  existence.     For  this  sentiment  leads  them 
to  conclude,  that  they  are  already  acquainted  with  the  gre.atest 
display  of  Divine  glory  which  can  be  made  ;  and  that  what- 
ever scenes  of  wonder  may  be  exhibited  in  the  future  world, 
they  must,  of  course,  be  all  inferior  to  this,  in  point  of  extent 
and  grandeur. 

The  Redemption  of  the  human  race,  as  displayed  in  the 
Christian  Revelation,  is  a  theme  sufficiently  grand,  astonish- 
ing, and  interesting,  to  command  the  attention  of  all  who  are 
convinced  that  they  belong  to  an  apostate  race  of  intelligences, 
and  to  excite  tlie  admiration  and  gratitude  of  all  who  have 


APPENDIX.  341 

experienced  its  benefits ;  and  it  stands  in  no  need  of  such 
unfounded  and  extravagant  assertions,  to  display  its  riches 
and  glory.     "  Will  a  man  speak  deceitfully  for  God  ?     Shall 
not  his  excellency  make  you  afraid,  and  his  dread  fall  upon 
you  1" — We  pronounce  nothing  decisively  on  this   subject. 
We  feel  ourselves   chained  down  to  an  obscure  corner  of 
God's  dominions,  to  be  in  the  very  infancy  of  our  knowledge, 
and  withal,  to  be  connected  with  a  race  of  beings  whose 
*'  understandings  are  darkened  by  reason  of  sin  ;"  and  are 
therefore  unable  to  pronounce  an  infallible  decision  on  what 
God  will,  or  will  not  do.     Were  we  to  hazard  a  conjecture  on 
this  subject,  we  would  say,  that  the  converse  of  the  proposition 
under  consideration,  is  more  probable  than  the  proposition 
itself.     We  can  conceive  worlds  ten  thousand  times  more 
populous  than  ours,  and  peopled  with  a  higher  order  of  intel- 
lectual beings,  towards  whom  a  similar  display  of  Benevo- 
lence and  Mercy,  were  it  necessary,  may  be  made  ;    and, 
therefore,  in  point  of  the  extent  of  its  objects,  we  can  conceive 
the  Love  of  God  more  illustriously  manifested  than  even  to 
the  inhabitants  of  our  globe.     But  whether  such  an  event 
shall  ever  take  place,  it  would  be  presumption  in  us  to  deter- 
mine.    For  the  thoughts  and  the  ways  of  God  as  far  trans- 
cend ours,  "  as  the  heavens  are  high  above  the  earth."     It 
demands   our  highest  tribute   of  grateful  adoration,  that  the 
Almighty  condescended  to  "  regard  us  in  our  low  estate," 
and  to  deliver  us  from  the  moral  degradation  into  which  we 
had  fallen  ;  but,  surely,  it  would  be  unreasonable  to  conclude, 
from  this  consideration,  that,  of  all  the  rational  tribes  which 
people  the  universe,  Man  is  the  only  favorite  of  the  most 
High,  "  when  thousand  worlds  are  round."     Though  myriads 
of  other  intelligences  were  to  share  in  similar  favors,  it  would 
not  lessen  the  happiness  conferred  on  us,  nor  ought  it  in  the 
least,  to  detract  from  our  admiration  of  "  the  love  of  God, 
which  is  in  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord." 

There  are  a  great  many  other  vague  and  untenable  notions 
which  are  entertained  and  reiterated  by  certain  commentators 
and  divines,  as  indisputable  axioms,  which  it  would  be  of  im- 
portance to  the  cause  of  Religion  to  discard  ; .  such  as — that 
angels  are  pure  immaterial  substances* — that  they  were 
formed  on  the  first  day  of  the  Mosaic  creation — that  the 
ivisdom  of  God  is  no  where  so  illustriously  displayed  through- 

+  In  the  Scriptures  angels  are  called  Spirits.  And  till  some  evidence  is 
offered  of  their  materiality  we  shall  see  no  reason  to  abandon  the  opinion, 
that  they  are  pure  spirits. — Ed. 

29 


342  APPENDIX. 

out  the  universe  as  in  the  scheme  of  redemption* — ;that  the 
chief  employment  of  the  future  world  m411  be  to  pry  into  the 
mysteries  of  salvationf — that  sin  is  an  injinite  evilj — that  the 
whole  material  universe  was  brought  into  existence  at  the 
same  time  with  our  earth — that  the  Creator  ceased  to  create 
any  new  order  of  beings  in  the  universe,  after  arranging  the 
fabric  of  our  globe — that  the  whole  system  of  material  nature 
in  heaven  and  earth,  will  be  destroyed  at  the  period  of  the  dis- 
solution of  our  world — that  our  thoughts  and  affections  shoula 
be  completely  detached  from  all  created  things,  &c.  &c. — 
Several  vague  notions  of  this  description  are  founded  on  the 
false  assumption,  that  the  globe  we  inhabit,  and  the  rational 
oemgs  that  have  appeared  on  its  surface  from  age  to  age,  art 
the  chief  objects  of  God's  Superintendence  and  Care — and 
that  the  Scriptures  are  the  only  medium  through  which  we  can 
view  the  plans  and  operations  of  the  Deity — assumptions, 
which  are  contrary  to  reason,  which  are  unwarranted  in  Re- 
velation, nay,  which  are  directly  contradicted  in  numerous 
passages  of  Scripture,  some  of  which  have  already  been 
referred  to  in  the  course  of  this  volume.     It  would  be  of 

*  To  show  that  it  is  important  to  discard  this  sentiment,  the  author 
ought  at  least  to  have  stated  some  good  reason  for  beUeving  it  to  be  with- 
out foundation.  Until  something  moi-e  decisive  of  this  point  shall  be  made 
to  appear,  there  cannot  be  the  least  occasion  to  abandon  the  sentiment  in 
question. — Ed. 

t  Here  substantially  the  same  reply  may  be  made  as  in  the  preceding 
instance.  Prove,  that  this  will  not  be  the  chief  employment  of  heaven — 
Show,  that  any  thing  else  will,  for  the  most  part,  occupy  the  attention  of 
the  spirits  of  just  men  made  perfect  in  glory,  and  the  sentiment  mider  con- 
sideration will  be  readily  renounced.  Till  then  we  shall  claim  the  right  to 
believe,  and  maintain,  that  the  em]iloynient  of  the  redeemed  in  glory  will 
consist,  to  a  great  extent,  in  beholding,  admiring,  and  adoring  Huifi,  who 
bath  loved  them  and  died  for  them. — Ed. 

I  Infinite  is  once  used  in  the  scriptures  to  qualify  the  term  iniquity. 
Job  xxii.  5.  Is  not  thy  tcickedness  great  and  thine  iniquities  infinite  ?  But 
not  to  insist  on  perhaps  a  too  literal  interpretation  of  the  term,  it  will  be 
sufficient  to  show  what  it  is  ordinarily  vised  to  denote. 

Some  authors,  regarding  only  the  very  Hmited  faculties  and  powers  of 
human  beings,  deem  it  mipossible,  that  any  of  their  deeds  can  be  an  iiifi- 
nite  evil. 

Others,  considering  only  the  infinity  of  the  Being  against  whom  sin  is 
committed,  find  no  dilficulty  in  convincing  themselves,  that  it  is  an  infinite 
evil. 

There  is  also  a  third  class,  who  taking  the  word  of  God  for  their  guide, 
and  learning  that  sin  exposes  men  to  everlasting  punishment,  do  not  hesi- 
tate to  denominate  that  an  infinite  evil,  which  brings  on  its  guilty  victim 
sufferings  infinite  in  duration.  Understood  in  this  last  sense,  we_  can  feel 
no  obligation  to  reject  it.  It  must,  however,  be  admitted  that  it  is  not 
always  used  in  this  manner,  and  that  it  is  sometimes  an  occasion  of  ambi- 
guity.— Ed. 


APPENDIX.  343 

essential  service  to  the  cause  of  Christianity,  that  its  doc- 
trines, facts,  and  moral  requisitions  were  uniformly  exhibited 
in  their  native  simplicity  and  grandeur,  without  being  obscured 
and  distorted  by  the  vague  and  extravagant  representa- 
tions with  which  they  are  too  frequently  blended  by  injudicious 
minds. 

No.  XI. 
As  authority  has  a  considerable  degree  of  weight  on  some 
minds,  I  shall  conclude  with  an  extract  on  the  subject  of  this 
volume,  from  that  respectable  and  enlightened  divine,  Dr. 
DwiGHT,  late  President  of  Yale  College  : — "  The  works  of 
God  were  by  him  intended  to  be,  and  are,  in  fact,  manifesta- 
tions of  himself;  proofs  of  his  character,  presence,  and 
agency.  In  this  light  he  requires  men  continually  to  regard 
them  :  and  to  refuse  this  regard  is  considered  by  him  as 
grossly  wicked,  and  highly  deserving  of  punishment,  Psalm 
xxviii.  5.  Isa.  v.  12 — 14.  I  am  apprehensive,  that  even  good 
men  are  prone  to  pay  less  attention  to  the  works  of  creation 
and  providence  than  ]iiety  demands,  and  the  Scriptures  re- 
quire. We  say  and  hear  so  much  concerning  the  insufficiency 
of  these  works  to  unfold  the  character  of  God,  and  the  nature 
of  genuine  rehgion,  that  we  are  prone  to  consider  them  as 
almost  uninstructive  in  moral  things,  and,  in  a  great  measure, 
useless  to  the  promotion  of  piety.  This,  however,  is  a  palpa- 
ble and  dangerous  error.  The  works  alone,  without  the  aid  of 
the  Scriptures,  would,  I  acknowledge,  be  far  less  instructive 
than  they  now  are,  and  utterly  insufficient  to  guide  us  in  the 
way  of  righteousness.  The  Scriptures  were  designed  to  be 
a  comment  on  these  works  ;  to  explain  their  nature,  and  to 
show  us  the  agency,  purposes,  wisdom,  and  goodness  of  God 
in  their  formation.  Thus  explained,  thus  illuminated,  they 
become  means  of  knowledge,  very  extensive  and  eminently 
useful.  He  who  does  not  find  in  the  various,  beautiful,  sub- 
lime, awful,  and  astonishing  objects  presented  to  us  in  Crea- 
tion and  Providence,  irresistible  and  glorious  reasons,  for  ad- 
miring, adoring,  loving,  and  praising  his  Creator,  has  not  a 
claim  to  evangehcal  piety." — System  of  Theology,  vol.  iii. 
p.  477. 

No.  XII. — List  of  Popular  Works  on  the  different  Sciences 
treated  of  in  this  Volume,  ivith  occasional  Remarks. 

SELECT    BOOKS    OF    NATURAL    HISTORY. 

"  Goldsmith's  History  of  the  Earth,  and  animated  nature," 
with  notes  by  T.  Brown,  Esq.  published  at  Manchester,  6 


344  APPENDIX. 

vols.  8vo.  The  copious  notes  appended  to  this  edition,  con- 
tain an  account  of  the  latest  discoveries,  and  form  a  valuable 
addition  to  the  original  work. — "  The  Gallery  of  Nature,  and 
Art,"  by  Dr.  Mason  Good,  and  others,  6  vols.  8vo. — "  Spec- 
tacle de  la  JVature,^^  or,  Nature  Displayed,  7  vols.  12mo. — 
"Nature  Displayed,"  by  Dr.  Simeon  Shaw,  3  vols.  Svo.  or  in 
6  vols.  12mo.  This  work,  though  chiefly  a  compilation, 
embodies  a  great  variety  of  interesting  and  popular  descrip- 
tions of  the  most  remarkable  facts  in  the  system  of  nature, 
which  are  illustrated  with  numerous  engravings,  both  plain 
and  colored. — Clarke's  "  Hundred  Wonders  of  the  World," 
1  A^ol.  12mo.  and  Piatt's  "  Book  of  Curiosities,"  contain  a 
number  of  interesting  selections  on  this  subject. — Smellie's 
"  Philosophy  of  Natural  History,"  2  vols.  4to.  and  his  trans- 
lation of  "  Buffon's  Natural  Plistory." — Works  entitled, 
"  System"  and  "  Elements"  of  "  Natural  History,"  are  nu- 
merous ;  but  the  greatest  part  of  them  is  confined  to  descrip- 
tions of  the  forms,  habits,  and  instinct  of  animals.  On  this 
department  of  natural  science,  a  work  is  just  now  in  course  of 
publication,  by  the  celebrated  Cuvier,  entitled  "  The  Animal 
Kingdom,''^  with  engravings,  chiefly  from  the  living  subjects  in 
the  Museum  of  Natural  History  at  Paris. — A  popular  and 
comprehensive  History  of  the  facts  which  have  been  ascer- 
tained respecting  the  earth,  the  atmosphere,  the  meteors,  the 
heavens,  &c.  calculated  for  general  readers,  and  interspersed 
with  appropriate  moral  and  religious  reflections,  is  still  a  desi- 
deratum. The  facts  of  Natural  History,  next  to  the  facts 
recorded  in  the  Sacred  Volume,  are  the  first  subjects  to  which 
the  minds  of  the  young  should  be  directed  in  the  course  of  a 
general  education. 

SELECT  BOOKS  ON  GEOGRAPHY. 

Pinkerton's  Modern  Geography,  2  vols.  4to.  and  the 
Abridgment,  1  vol.  Svo. — Guthrie's  Geographical  Grammar. 
— The  Glasgow  Geography,  in  5  vols.  Svo.  This  work  com- 
prehends an  immense  mass  of  information,  on  the  historical 
and  descriptive  parts  of  Geography.  It  also  contains  com- 
prehensive compends  of  Astronomy,  Geology,  Meteorology, 
&c. — Make  Brun's  "  System  of  Geography,"  Svo.  The 
English  translation  of  this  work,  Avhen  completed,  will  com- 
prise the  fullest  and  most  comprehensive  view  of  Universal 
Geography  that  has  yet  appeared  in  our  language,  including 
details  of  the  most  recent  discoveries.     Five  volumes  of  the 


APPENDIX.  345 

English  translation  have  already  appeared.  The  first  volume 
contains  a  luminous  and  comprehensive  outline  of  the  science 
of  Geology,  and  Physical  and  Mathematical  Geography. — 
Myer's  "  System  of  Modern  Geography,"  with  maps,  views, 
engravings  representing  costumes,  &c.  2  large  vols.  4to. — 
Cooke's  "  System  of  Universal  Geography,"  in  2  very  large 
quarto  vols,  closely  printed,  contains  a  great  variety  of  inter- 
esting sketches  in  relation  to  Descriptive  Geography,  ex- 
tracted from  the  writings  of  modern  Voyagers  and  Travellers ; 
the  details  of  incidents,  &c.  being  related,  for  the  most  part, 
in  the  words  of  the  respective  authors  from  whom  the  infor- 
mation is  collected. — Winterbotham's  "  Geographical  and 
Historical  view  of  the  United  States  of  America,  &c."  four 
vols.  Svo. — Morse's  "  American  Geography,"  8vo. — Gold- 
smith's "  Geography  on  a  popular  plan,"  contains  an  interest- 
ing account  of  the  manners  and  customs  of  nations,  for  the 
entertainment  and  instruction  of  the  young,  illustrated  with 
above  60  engravings.  Of  smaller  systems,  there  is  a  great 
abundance  in  the  English  language,  but  most  of  them  are 
extremely  deficient,  particularly  in  what  relates  to  General 
Geography. — On  Sacred  Geography,  Well's  Geography,  mo- 
dernized by  the  Editor  of  Calmet's  Dictionary,  is  the  most 
complete  work  of  its  kind. — On  Physical  or  General  Geogra- 
phy— Play  fair's  System  of  Geography,  vol.  1.  and  Yarenius's 
General  Geography.  A  Modern  system  of  General  Geo- 
graphy, in  a  separate  form,  on  the  plan  of  Varenius,  is  a  desi- 
deratum.— Edin.  Ency.  Art.  Geography — Sup.  to  Ency.  Brit. 
Art.  Physical  Geography,  &c.  &c.  Books  of  Voyages  and 
Travels,  generally  contain  the  most  circumstantial  details  of 
the  physical  aspects  of  the  different  countries,  and  of  the 
dispositions  and  customs  of  their  inhabitants  ;  and  present  to 
the  view  of  the  Christian  Philanthropist,  those  facts  and  inci- 
dents, froni  which  the  moral  state  and  character  of  the  various 
tribes  of  human  beings  may  be  inferred.  The  following 
works  contain  comprehensive  abridgments  of  the  most  cele- 
brated voyages  and  travels. — "  Pinkerton's  General  Collec- 
tion of  Voyages  and  Travels  in  all  parts  of  the  world,"  17 
vols.  4to. — "  Mavor's  Voyages,"  &c.  28  vols.  18mo. — "  The 
World  Displayed,"  18  vols.  ISmo.—"  Philip's  Collection  of 
Voyages  and  Travels,"  &:c. 

The  following  are  among  the  most  respectable  modern  pub- 
lications oh  this  subject,  arranged  according  to  the  different 
quarters  of  the  World.  Asia. — "  Valencia's  Travels  in  India, 
Arabia,"  &c.— "  Porter's  Travels  in  Georgia,  Armenia,"  &c. 
— "  Golownin's  Travels  in  Japan."     '*  Staunton's  Account  of 

29* 


346  APPENDIX. 

Macartney's  Embassy  to  China."  "  Raffle's  Travels  Ik? 
Java."  "  Clark's  Travels  in  Asia  Minor,  and  the  Holy 
Land."  "  Chateaubriand's  Travels  in  Palestine."  "Ali  Bey's 
Travels  in  Arabia." — "Morier's  Travels  through  Persia,"  &c. 
Africa. — "Lyon's  Travels  in  Northern  Africa."  Burckhard's 
Travels  in  ISubia.  Bruce's  Travels  in  Abyssinia.  Salt's 
Travels  in  Abyssinia.  Bowdich,  Hutton,  and  Dupuis'  Ac- 
count o{  Ashantee.  Leigh's  Jour,  in  Egypt.  Belzoni's  Tra- 
vels in  Egypt.  Sonini's  Travels  in  Egypt.  Barrow's,  Bur- 
chell's,  and  Campbell's  Travels  in  Southern  Africa,  &c.  &c. 
America. — Howison's  Sketches  of  Upper  Canada.  Fearon's 
Sketches  of  the  United  States.  Miss  Wright's  Yiews  of 
Society  in  the  United  States.  Humboldt's  Travels  in  South 
America.  Duncan's  Travels  in  the  United  States.  Luccock's, 
Vidal's,  Kosters's,  and  Hall's  Travels  in  South  America,  &c. 
Europe. — Henderson's  and  Mackenzie's  Travels  in  Iceland. 
—Thompson's  Travels  in  Sweden. — Carr's  Travels  in  Russia, 

Denmark,    &c. Pallas'   Travels    in    Russia. Wraxail's, 

Neale's,  Coxe's,  and  Lemaistre's  Tours  through  France, 
Switzerland,  Ger^iany,  &c. — Bourgoing's  and  Jacob's  Tra- 
vels in  Spain. — Brydon's  Tour  in  Sicily,  &c. — Von  Buch's 
Travels  in  Norway  and  Lapland, — Cochrane's  Travels  in 
Siberia,  &c. — Cook's,  Anson's,  Bryon's,  Perouse's,  and  Bou- 
ganville's  Voyages  round  the  World,  &c. — Prior's  Universal 
Traveller,  1  thick  vol.  12mo,  closely  printed  with  one  hundred 
engravings. 

SELECT  BOOKS  ON  GEOLOGY. 

Kirwan's  "  Mineralogy,"  and  his  "  Geological  Essays." — ' 
De  Luc's  "  Geology,"  and  his  "  Geological  Travels." — Par- 
kinson's "  Organic  Remains  of  a  former  World,"  3  vols.  4to. 
— "  The  Fossils  of  the  South  Downs,  or  Illustrations  of  the 
Geology  of  Sussex,  by  G.  Mantel,  F.  L.  S."  The  prelimi- 
nary Essay  to  this  splendid  work,  contains  several  excellent 
remarks  respecting  the  connexion  of  Geology  with  Religion, 
which  are  calculated  to  advance  the  interests  of  both. — 
Cuvier's  "  Essay  on  the  Theory  of  the  Earth,"  with  illustra- 
tions by  Professor  Jameson  ;  4th  edition. — Playfair's  illustra- 
tions of  the  Huttonian  Theory  of  the  Earth. — Transactions 
of  the  Geological  and  Wernerian  Societies. — Jameson's  Min- 
eralogy.— Buckland's  Account  of  the  Discovery  of  a  Den  of 
Hyenas  in  a  cavern  in  Yorkshire. — Philips'  "Outlines  of  Min- 
eralogy and  Geology,"  12mo.  This  last  work  forms  a  good 
introduction  to  the  study  of  Geology,  for  those  who  are  just 


APPENDIX.  347 

6'omniencing  their  inquiries  on  this  subject.  The  object  of 
this  science,  in  the  mean  time,  should  be  chiefly  to  the  collect- 
ing off  acts  in  reference  to  the  structure  of  the  earth,  and  the 
changes  it  has  undergone.  The  exterior  aspect  of  our  globe, 
and  its  internal  recesses,  must  be  still  more  extensively 
explored,  before  any  theory  of  the  earth  can  be  established  on 
a  broad  and  solid  foundation.  It  should  be  left  to  future  ages 
to  build  a  system  with  the  materials  we  are  now  preparing. 

POPULAR  WORKS  ON  ASTRONOMY. 

Brewster's  "  Ferguson's  Astronomy,"  2  vols.  8vo.  with  a 
vol.  of  plates.  The  notes  and  supplementary  chapters  of  this 
work,  written  by  Dr.  Brewster,  contain  a  full  and  comprehen- 
sive detail  of  all  the  modern  discoveries  in  this  science. — 
"  Bonnycastlfe's  Introduction  to  Astronomy,"  1  vol.  8vo. — 
La  Place's  "  System  of  the  World,"  2  vols.  8vo.  Dr.  Olinthus 
Gregory's  Astronomy,  1  vol.  Svo. — Mrs.  Bryan's  "  System  of 
Astronomy,"  Svo. — Dr.  Mylne's  "  Elementary  Treatise  on 
Astronomy,"  Svo. — Adam's  "Astronomical  and  Geographical 
Essays,"  Svo. — Philips'  "  Eight  Familiar  Lectures  on  Astro- 
nomy," 12mo. — Squire's  «'  Grammar  of  Astronomy,"  1  thick 
vol.  ISmo.  closely  printed  and  illustrated  with  35  plates. — 
The  "  Wonders  of  the  Heavens,"  12mo.  This  work  contains 
a  popular  view  of  the  principal  facts  of  Astronomy,  and  is 
illustrated  with  50  elegant  engravings,  of  a  variety  of  interest- 
ing objects  connected  with  the  scenery  of  the  heavens  ;  but 
its  discussions  are  too  frequently  blended  with  the  peculiari- 
ties of  a  modern  physical  theory. — Martin's  "  Gentleman  and 
Lady's  Philosophy,"  vol.  1. — Derham's  "Astro-Theology," 
and  Whiston's  "  Astronomical  principles  of  Religion,"  Svo. 
— Baxter's  "  Matho,"  2  vols.  &c. — An  elegant  and  compre- 
hensive outline  of  the  leading  facts  of  Astronomy,  in  their  re- 
lation to  revealed  Religion,  will  be  found  in  Dr.  Chalmers' 
"  Discourses  on  the  Christian  Revelation,  viewed  in  connec- 
tion with  the  Modern  Astronomy,"  Svo. — The  general  reader 
in  commencing  his  study  of  this  science,  will  find  Bonnycas- 
tle's  "  Introduction"  a  very  interesting  work.  It  js  written  in 
an  elegant  and  animated  style,  and  is  agreeably  interspersed 
with  a  number  of  appropriate  reflections  ;  but  it  is  deficient  in 
the  detail  of  modern  discoveries.  He  might  next  proceed  to  the 
perusal  of  Ferguson,  Gregory,  Squire,  &c.  La  Place's  work 
contains  a  beautiful  exposition  of  the  JXewtonian  System,  but 
it  is  glaringly  deficient  in  a  reference  to  the  Wisdom  and 
Agency  of  a  Supreme  Intelligence.  "  An  undevout  astrono- 
mer is  mad',''      Baxter's   "  Matho,"  contains  a  popular  and 


348  APPENDIX. 

interesting  view  of  this  subject  and  forms  a  striking  contrast  to 
the  apathy  of  La  Place,  who  carefully  keeps  out  of  view  the 
agency  of  the  Creator — the  main  design  of  this  author  being 
to  connect  the  phenomena  of  the  heavens  and  the  earth  with 
the  attributes  of  Deity,  and  the  high  destination  of  immortal 
minds.  Though  this  work  passed  through  three  editions,  it 
does  not  seem  to  have  been  appreciated  according  to  its  merits. 
As  it  has  now  become  scarce,  a  new  edition,  with  notes,  con- 
taining a  detail  of  modern  discoveries,  might  be  an  acceptable 
present  to  the  public.  Those  who  wish  to  prosecute  this 
subject  to  a  greater  extent,  may  be  referred  to  "Long's  Astro- 
nomy," 2  vols.  4to. — Robinson's  "  Mechanical  Philosophy," 
vol.  1. — A^ince's  "Complete  System  of  Astronomy,"  3  vols. 
4to. — "  La  Lande  Astronomie,-^  3  volumns  4to. — and  Biot's 
"  Traite  Elementaire  d'Astronomie  Physique."  A  compre- 
hensive work  on  Descriptive  Astronomy,  detailing,  in  a  popular 
manner,  all  the  facts  which  have  been  ascertained  respecting 
the  scenery  of  the  heavens,  accompanied  with  a  variety  of 
striking  delineations,  and  interspersed  with  appropriate  moral 
reflections,  accommodated  to  the  general  reader,  is  a  deside- 
ratum. 

SELECT    BOOKS    ON    NATURAL    PHILOSOPHY. 

Hauys  "  Elementary  treatise  on  Natural  Philosophy," 
translated  by  Dr.  O.  Gregory,  2  vols.  8vo.  This  translation 
contains  a  number  of  valuable  notes  by  the  translator. — Fer- 
guson's "  Lectures  on  Select  Subjects  in  Mechanics,"  &c. 
by  Dr.  Brewster,  2  vols.  8vo.  with  a  vol.  of  plates.  The 
Ajjpendix  to  this  work,  by  Dr.  Brewster,  contains  a  mass  of 
valuable  information  on  Mechanics,  Hydraulics,  Dialling,  and 
the  construction  of  Optical  Instrinnents ;  besides  a  variety 
of  illustrative  notes  interspersed  through  the  body  of  the  work. 
A  new  edition  of  this  work,  comprising  a  detailed  account  of 
the  recent  discoveries  in  Experimental  Philosophy,  has  been 
lately  published. — Nicholson's  "  Introduction  to  Natural  Phi- 
losophy," 2  vols.  8vo. — Cavallo's  "  Complete  Treatise  on 
Natural  and  Experimental  Philosophy,"  4  vols.  Svo. — Mar- 
tin's "  Philosophia  Britannica,"  3  vols.  Svo.  His  "Gentleman 
and  Lady's  Philosophy,"  3  vols.  Svo.  and  his  Philosophical 
Grammar,"  1  vol.  Svo. — Gregory's  "  Economy  of  Nature, 
3  vols.  Svo.  and  his  "  Lectures  on  Experimental  Philoso- 
phy, Astronomy,  and  Chemistry,"  2  vols.  12mo. — Joyce's 
"Letters  on  Experimental  Philosophy,"  2  vols.  12mo. — and 
his  "  Scientific  Dialogues,"  6  vols.  ibmo. — Adams'  "  Lec- 
tures  on  Natural   and  Experimental   Philosophy,"  4  vols. 


APPENDIX.  o4y 

Svo.  with  a  vol.  of  plates. — Young's  "  Lectures  on  Natural 
Philosophy,"  2  vols.  Svo. — Walker's  system  of  "  Familiar 
Philosophy,"  4to.  in  12  lectures,  with  47  quarto  engravings. — 
Conversations  on  Natural  Philosophy,  by  the  Author  of 
Conversations  on  Chemistry,  1  thick  vol.  12mo.  with  23  en- 
gravings.— Blair's  "  Grammar  of  Natural  and  Experimental 
Philosophy,"  especially  the  late  editions,  contains  (at  a  small 
price)  a  comprehensive  view  of  the  principal  departments  of 
Philosophy,  including  Astronomy,  Geology,  Chemistry,  Me- 
teorology, &c. — Euler's  "  Letters  to  a  German  Princess,"  2 
vols.  Svo.  contains  a  popular  view  of  the  most  interesting  sub- 
jects connected  with  Natural  and  Experimental  Philosophy, 
Logic,  and  Ethics.  This  work  is  distinguished  by  a  vein  of 
dignified  and  scriptural  piety,  which  runs  through  every  part  of 
it.  Euler  was  one  of  the  most  distinguished  Philosophers  and 
Mathematicians  of  his  day.  He  died  in  1783,  at  the  age  of 
77.  A  new  edition  of  this  work,  ivith  notes  by  Dr.  Brewster^ 
has  been  lately  pubhshed.  These  notes  are  excellent,  so  far 
as  they  extend ;  but  it  is  to  be  regretted  that  they  are  so 
sparingly  distributed,  and  that  the  passages  suppressed  by  M. 
Condorcet,  and  De  la  Croix,  which  were  restored  by  Dr. 
Hunter,  who  translated  the  work,  and  the  notes  of  the  French 
and  English  editors,  are,  for  the  most  part,  discarded.  Not- 
withstanding the  numerous  excellent  treatises  which  are  to  be 
found  on  this  subject,  a  comprehensive  work  on  experimental 
Philosophy,  blended  with  sketches  of  those  parts  of  natural' 
history,  which  are  connected  with  it,  and  enlivened  with  appro- 
priate reflections  on  the  peculiar  agencies  of  the  Deity,  which 
appear  in  the  various  processes  of  nature — is  still  wanting  to 
interest  the  general  reader,  and  to  attract  his  attention  to  this 
department  of  knowledge.  Were  philosophers  in  their  dis- 
cussions of  natural  science,  more  frequently  to  advert  to  the 
agency  of  the  Deity,  and  to  point  out  the  Religious  and  Phi- 
lanthropic purposes  to  which  modern  discoveries  might  be 
applied,  they  might  be  the  means  of  promoting,  at  the  same 
time,  the  interests  both  of  science  and  of  religion  ;  by  alluring 
general  readers  to  direct  their  attention  to  such  subjects  ;  and 
by  removing  those  groundless  prejudices  which  a  great  propor- 
tion of  the  Christian  world  still  entertain  against  philosophical 
studies.  About  the  period  when  Boyle,  Ray,  Derham^ 
Nieuwentyt,  Whiston,  Addison,  the  Abbe  Pluche,  and  other 
Christian  Philosophers  flourished,  more  attention  seems  to 
have  been  paid  to  this  object  than  at  present.  Since  the  mid- 
dle of  the  last  century,  the  piety  of  philosophers  appears  to  have 
been  greatly  on  the  decline.     It  is  to  be  hoped  that  it  is  now 


350  APPENDIX. 

beginning  to  experience  a  revival.  But,  whatever  may  be  the 
varying  sentiments  and  feehngs  of  mere  philosophers,  in  re- 
ference to  the  agencies  of  the  material  system—"  all  the  works 
of  God  invariably  speak  of  their  Author,"  to  the  humble  and 
enlightened  Christian ;  and  if  he  be  directed  to  contemplate 
the  "order  of  nature,  with  an  eye  of  intelligence,  he  will  never 
be  at  a  loss  to  trace  the  footsteps  and  the  attributes  of  his 
Father  and  his  God. 

SELECT    BOOKS    ON    CHEMISTRY. 

Davy's  Elements  of  Chemical  Philosophy,  8vo. — lire's 
Dictionary  of  Chemistry,  on  the  basis  of  Mr.  Nicholson's,  one 
large  vol.  Svo.  Henry's  Epitome  of  Chemistry,  2  vols.  8vo. 
— Accum's  Chemistry,  2  vols.  8vo. — Thomson's  system  of 
Chemistry,  4  vols.  Svo.— Murray's  System  of  Chemistry,  4 
vols.  Svo.  and  Appendix. — Kerr's  translation  of  Lavoisier's 
Elements  of  Chemistiy,  Svo.— Chaptal's  Chemistry,  applied 
to  the  Arts,  4  vols.  Svo. — Fourcroy's  Chemistry,  4  vols. — 
Accum's  "  Chemical  Amusements,"  and  Griffin's  "  Chemical 
Recreations,"  contain  a  description  of  a  variety  of  interesting 
Chemical  facts  and  amusing  experiments.— Gurney's  Lec- 
tures on  the  Elements  of  Chemical  Science,  Svo. — Macken- 
zie's One  Thousand  Experiments  in  Chemistry,  &c. — Mitch- 
ell's Dictionary  of  Chemistry.— Conversations  on  Chemistry, 
by  a  Lady,  2  vols.  12mo. — Joyce's  Dialogues  on  Chemistry, 
2  vols.  ISmo. — Parker's  Rudiments  of  Chemistry,  ISmo.  and 
his  Chemical  Catechism,  Svo.— The  four  works  last  mention- 
ed may  be  recommended  as  popular  introductions  to  the  study 
of  this  science.  Parkes'  Rudiments  and  Catechism  are  dis- 
tinguished by  their  constant  reference  to  the  agency  of  the 
Deity,  and  by  the  anxiety  which  the  author  displays  to  fix  the 
attention  of  his  readers  on  the  evidences  of  benevolent  design 
which  appear  in  the  constitution  of  nature.  The  numerous 
notes  appended  to  the  Chemical  Catechism,  embody  a  great 
variety  of  interesting  facts  in  reference  to  the  economy  of 
nature,  and  the  processes  of  the  arts.  To  this  amiable  and 
intelligent  writer  I  feel  indebted  for  several  of  the  chemical 
facts  stated  in  this  volume. 


THE    END. 


\ 


\ 


Princeton  Theologic; 


Seminary-Speer  Libi 


1   1012  01007  0391 


